Ss 


ah 


ὲ 


af 5 M oa i 
+h HS : i Sha Se ( 
Seat, | WORE une i Sane 
fat) © het : 4 ἊΝ steel a 8 ὑός 

Bien meee 4 ee ay 


4 


et wr 
τὰν Coa aoN 


% τῇ ‘4 ; jes’ ΝΟ Ὶ Hy st Cia ares 
SEY ἢ - oes ἐφ we AC 


ἐν 


. 


ae 


“- 


ΩΝ 


᾿ 
A 
Sie 


᾿ 


ae 


thes 


- a 
DASE 
AL Aig’ 


ic 


ν᾽ ἐν 
‘ Pow ς ᾿ ΤᾺΝ 
Gas ὲ 4 ᾿ 
ἀφο t ᾿ ς i Ν ὃ i w " ῳ cas 
᾿ ΄ 4 ᾿ τ 

ἊΝ 


ἃς 
Ἂ 4 
. Sow 
‘ — 


we : y ; he : . A ae eM) 


yt 


; 3 ν 5 mf ‘ 

eS γὴν : : : : \ Ra a 2: : - ἜΚ ick Ἄλον αὐ" Α 

Δ ΤΥ ΟΝΑ τς, Ν ΔΝ pe πως ἣν tte } Rea που ξις πὰ Shy An | ah δῷ 
Seaport te Ὁ Ν A ee, 


ma) 


NS 


he ens teas ας Woh re και ee yee ᾿ ; νος ἤν 8 CT tk SON 


Ls 
ΓΝ ee 


vs . ‘ ; J 8 ‘ . , 
Games Ra τες. τος ταν να ἀευ εν οθονς See Reo aS 


heyy 


ery τῶ , 
rs Pale alr et 


ie 
κι 
ἣν 


~ Fact 
ANAS 
᾿ ἃ ἈΝ 
et ao’ 

ore 


ne 
Ἢ δ“ ῚᾺΝ 
τ αὐ ΔΑΝ S 
Sate νοῦς 


Ἂς 

















( TIBRARY ἢ 














{iftuversioy oF GaLironnry 
SK 


Ὁ 


BY | 











JHRE K.SHGRER 
LIBRARY FUND. 














MEN ie cots ae ace 1 


* —d 




















Page) ΤᾺ. ἢ 
᾿ AL 
ΓΝ OU 


¢ 


ee 


re 
Bie ye 
hie 


ie :.ὕ , 
hs 








"Ὁ 


τ 


Rp. 
Pica f 
ee, 


Bu 

iS 

᾿ 

ae 
Ee 

oe 


ὴ 
ἈΞ 


tis κἱ 











SOCRATES 


aples 


‘ 
c 


1 bust in the Museum at N 


€ 
e 


Ὶ 
λ 


ΠΡΟΣ 


i 


COLLEGE SERIES OF GREEK AUTHORS 
JOHN WILLIAMS WHITE Aanp THOMAS DAY SEYMOUR, EpDITors 
‘CHARLES BURTON GULICK, ASSOCIATE EDITOR 


XHNOPHON 


MEMORABILIA 


EDITED 
ON THE BASIS OF THE BREITENBACH-MUCKE EDITION 
BY 


JOSIAH RENICK SMITH 


PROFESSOR OF GREEK IN OHIO STATE UNIVERSITY 








GINN & COMPANY 


BOSTON . NEW YORK - CHICAGO - LONDON 


ENTERED AT STATIONERS’ HALL 


COPYRIGHT, 1903, BY 
JOHN WILLIAMS WHITE, THOMAS DAY SEYMOUR, AND CHARLES BURTON GULICK 


ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 
56.9 


The Athenzum Press 


GINN ἃ COMPANY - PRO- a 
PRIETORS «+ BOSTON - U.S.A. 








Digitized by the Internet Archive 
in 2007 with funding from 
Microsoft Corporation 


https://archive.org/details/memorabilia0Oxenorich | 


PREFACE 


Tuts edition of the Memorabilia is based upon the sixth (Ger- 
man) edition of Ludwig Breitenbach’s Xenophons Memorabilien, 
revised by Dr. Rudolf Miicke, Oberlehrer in the Kénigliche 
Klosterschule at Ilfeld; Berlin, 1889. 

The preparation of this book for the College Series was origi- 
nally undertaken by Professor William Goodell Frost, of Oberlin 
College; but on his assuming the presidency of Berea College, 
Kentucky, the present editor was requested, with the cordial 
concurrence of President Frost, to undertake the work. 

The text is substantially that approved by Breitenbach, chiefly 
with such modifications as have met the consensus of Dindorf, 
Sauppe, and Gilbert; and with a few changes in orthography, to 
conform to what is believed to be the best Attic usage (e.7., 
such forms as μείγνυσθαι [μίγνυσθαι], ἀποτεῖσαι [arorioa |, σῴζειν, 
ἀποθνῃσκειν). 

In the Introduction and Commentary, both of which are freely 
adapted from the German edition, the editor has endeavored con- 
stantly to keep in mind the needs of college students who may 
read Xenophon, and references to the grammars of Goodwin 
and Hadley-Allen are accordingly supplied in abundance. The 
notes are especially full on those portions of the work which 
may profitably be selected when it is not feasible to take the 
class through the entire Memorabilia. For the convenience of 
instructors who may wish to make such selections, the editor 


210597 


vl PREFACE 


suggests the following passages as characteristic and as repaying 
study from different points of view: book i, chapters 1, 4, 6; 
book ii, chapters 1, 2, 6; book iii, chapters 1, 4, 5, 9, 10; book iv, 
chapters 2, 6, 8. 

The editor desires to express his grateful acknowledgments to 
Professor Seymour, whose watchful supervision and keen but 
friendly criticism have been effectively present at every stage of 
the work; to Dr. Rudolf Micke for his courteous permission to 
make use of the German edition; and to the editor’s colleague, 
Dr. Arthur W. Hodgman, who has been kind enough to read all 


the proofs. 
JOSIAH R. SMITH. 


Onto State UNIVERSITY, 
January, 1908. 


INTRODUCTION 


I. LIFE OF SOCRATES (469-399 B.c.) 


1. Socrates, the son of Sophroniscus, a sculptor, was born at 
Athens in 469 8.c. His mothér was Phaenaréte, a midwife. He 
is said to have been brought up to his father’s calling, and to 
have obtained some proficiency therein: Pausanias mentions 
(i. 22. 8) having seen near the entrance to the Acropolis a 
marble group of Hermes and the three Graces, said to be from 
the hand of Socrates. He soon, however, abandoned art, and 
gave himself to the study of his fellow-men, with the desire to 
assist in their moral and intellectual improvement. The pecul- 
iarity of his personal appearance,’ his straightforward honesty, 
and the pungency of his criticisms, soon made this street 
preacher of righteousness perhaps the best-known citizen of 
Athens. Young men, especially, listened eagerly to his sayings, 
and became his devoted friends and followers: among these 
Plato, Xenophon, and Alcibiades were the most distinguished. 

2. Socrates had no liking for public life, but did not refuse 
public service. He took part as a hoplite in the siege of 
Potidaea (432-430 B.c.); also in the battles of Delium (424 B.c.) 
and Amphipolis (422 B.c.). On all these occasions he showed 
conspicuous courage and endurance. In 406 B.c., when a member 
of the Boulé, he strenuously resisted the illegal proposition of 
Callixenus to decide in one vote the fate of the generals who had 


1Socrates’s features were in strong contrast to the accepted type of 
‘classical’ beauty. His snub nose and bulging eyes are mentioned by 
Theodorus in the Theaetetus of Plato (143 ©); and in Plato’s Symposium 
(215 a, B) Alcibiades says that Socrates resembles nothing more than the 
carved figures of Silenus or the satyr Marsyas. 
vii 


Viil SOCRATES 


fought at Arginusae. Again, in 404 B.c., when commanded by 
the Thirty to go with four others to Salamis and arrest Leon, a 
citizen whose wealth was coveted by the tyrants, Socrates 
alone had the courage to disobey. “For this,” as he says, “I 
should probably have been punished, had not the government 
soon thereafter fallen.” 

3. Socrates was married, probably in middle life, to Xan- 
thippe, by whom he had three sons — Sophroniscus, Menexenus, 
and Lamprocles. His domestic life is said to have been unhappy ; 
and the name of Xanthippe has become proverbial for shrewish- 
ness. Probably there were faults on both sides. The philos- 
opher’s eccentricities and his absorption in his work for men 
hardly fitted him to make any woman happy; and Xanthippe’s 
grief when visiting her husband in his prison cell, as described 
by Plato (Phaedo 60 A) contrasts favorably with his rather 
cold-blooded dismissal of her. On the other hand, we may 
recall the conversation between Socrates and his son Lamprocles 
(Mem. ii. 2. 1), in which he reproves the latter for disrespect 
towards his mother, and enlarges on the heinousness of filial 
ingratitude. 

4. In his discussions Socrates busied himself mainly with 
ethics (in distinction from physics and metaphysics), regarding 
man and his relations as the only proper objects of study. 
Although he was able, by his great intellectual powers, to win 
brilliant dialectic victories over the most expert sophists, he 
was before all a practical philosopher, whose ultimate aim was 
not abstract speculation, but true wisdom of life and true happi- 
ness.' As he believed in knowledge as the foundation of all virtue, 
he sought to establish in his hearer’s mind a thorough knowledge 
of self as the indispensable basis of character. By a skillful 
application of the question-and-answer method, along essen- 
tially inductive lines of reasoning, he proceeded from common 
and well-known things to the general idea; and then, showing 


΄ 1Cf. Cicero’s statement that Socrates was the first thinker who brought 
philosophy down from the clouds to dwell in the cities and houses of men 
(Tusc. Disp. v. 4. 10). 


INTRODUCTION 1x 


what in this general idea was applicable to the case in hand, he 
brought home to his interlocutor’s head and heart both convic- 
tion of the truth and the desire to embrace it. Thus, though 
he gave no formal instruction, he was one of the greatest of 
teachers. 

5. It was inevitable that a man who fearlessly exposed 
ignorance and resisted injustice should arouse opposition. As 
early as 423 B.c. Aristophanes, the stout upholder of the good old 
ways in politics and education, found it easy to ridicule, in the 
Clouds, the person and teachings of Socrates; but the popular 
prejudice and calumnies received their first direct expression in 
399 B.c., when the philosopher was formally accused of impiety 
and of corrupting the morals of youth. The charge was brought 
by three accusers — Melétus, an inferior poet, Anytus, a leather 
seller, and Lycon, a professional speechmaker; of whom Mele- 
tus seems to have been the leader and chief spokesman. Socrates 
defended himself in a characteristic speech, the substance of 
which probably is preserved for us in Plato’s Apology ; but he 
was pronounced guilty, by a majority of some sixty votes. 
Asked to name his own punishment, he said that public enter- 
tainment in the Prytaneum for the rest of his days would bea 
fitting return for services such as his; but finally named a fine 
of thirty minae: which so irritated the judges that by an 
increased majority they condemned him to death. The month? 
preceding his execution was spent in tranquil conversations with 
the friends who had access to his cell; and when the fatal hour 
arrived, he drank the poison hemlock with perfect serenity. 
“Such was the end,” as Plato makes Phaedo say, “of the noblest, 
wisest, and most upright man that we had ever known.” 


1Qn the day before his trial the sacred ship was crowned, which was the 
beginning of the embassy sent yearly from Athens to the shrine of Apollo 
at Delos, in commemoration of the victory of Theseus over the Minotaur. 
During the absence of this vessel, the city was kept ceremonially clean, and 
-it was unlawful to put condemned criminals to death. In the case of Soc- 
rates, this respite lasted thirty days. Cf. Mem. iv. 8.2; Plato Phaedo 
58 a ff. 


x XENOPHON 


II. LIFE OF XENOPHON 


6. Xenophon, the son of Gryllus, was born, probably in 
431 B.c.,! at Erchia (the modern Spata), a deme of Attica, lying 
east of Mt. Hymettus, and near the home of Demosthenes at 
Paeania. His mother’s name was perhaps Diodora. His edu- 
cation may be supposed to have been that of a freeborn Greek 
boy, including instruction in μουσική, γραμματική, and γυμναστική. 
According to Diogenes Laertius (Life of Xenophon ii), he early 
came under the influence of Socrates, and remained his loyal 
friend and disciple until the philosopher’s death in 399 B.c. Of 
this intercourse the Memorabilia, written many years later, is 
the record. 

7. Xenophon was of good birth, and both his natural tastes 
and the results of his studies and observations inclined him to 
sympathize with aristocratic rather than with democratic insti- 
tutions. Hence the ‘philolaconian’ feeling which is noticeable 
throughout his writings. Whether this carried him to the 
point of sharing in the establishment of the Thirty Tyrants 
(404 8.0.) is uncertain. In 401 B.c., at the invitation of his 
friend Proxenus the Boeotian, he left Athens and attached him- 
self to the expedition of Cyrus the Younger. After the battle 


1 The traditional date, 444 B.c., rests upon a story told by Strabo the 
geographer (circa 10 B.c.), to the effect that Socrates saved Xenophon’s life 
at the battle of Delium (424 B.c.), at which time Xenophon, to be liable to 
military service beyond the frontier, must have been at least twenty years of 
age. The story is repeated by Diogenes Laertius (circa 220 a.p.) in his Life 
of Socrates (ii. 22); it is perhaps a reminiscence and extension of Plato 
Sym, 220, 221, where Alcibiades says that Socrates saved his life at Potidaea 
(430 5.6.) and at Delium showed great bravery during the retreat. But 
neither Plato nor Xenophon anywhere mentions the latter’s name in con- 
nection with this story. 

On the other hand, the internal evidence of the Anabasis goes to show 
that Xenophon was a young man—not over thirty — when he joined the 
expedition of Cyrus. See An. iii. 1. 14, 25, 4. 42; v. 3. 1; vii. 2. 38, 3. 46, 
6. 34. For a discussion of the question, see Dakyns, The Works of Xen- 
ophon, Introduction, p. xlix ff., and C. D. Morris, On the Age of Xenophon 
at the Time of the Anabasis, in the Trans. of the Am. Philol. Assn., v. p. 82. 


INTRODUCTION ΧΙ 


αὖ Cunaxa and the treacherous massacre of the five generals, 
Xenophon by common consent became the leader of the Ten 
Thousand Greeks; and by his tact, patience, and readiness of 
resource brought them through the dangers and hardships of a 
five months’ march to the Black Sea. The Anabasis is the vivid 
and convincing narrative of this expedition. 

8. After returning to Greece, Xenophon served under the 
Spartan king Agesilaus, whom he greatly admired and of whom 
he has left a eulogistic sketch. At the battle of Coronéa 
(894 8.0.) he fought with the Spartans against the Athenians 
and Thebans. For this his banishment was decreed by the 
Athenians; and he found a home at Scillus in Elis, near 
Olympia, where he settled down to the quiet life of a country 
gentleman, devoting himself to literature, farming, and hunting. 
His treatises on the breeding and training of horses and dogs 
are suggestive of his pursuits during this period. After the 
crushing defeat of the Spartans at Leuctra (371 B.c.), and pos- 
sibly because of it, Xenophon was driven from his home by the 
Eléans, and is said to have taken refuge at Corinth; somewhat 
later, when the Spartans and Athenians had become allies, the 
latter repealed their decree of banishment against Xenophon. 
It is uncertain whether he accepted the permission to return to 
Athens, or continued to reside in the hospitable Corinth, which 
had received him in his hour of need; his two sons, at all 
events, availed themselves of the amnesty to enter the Athenian 
service. 

9. At the battle of Mantinéa (362 B.c.), or rather in the cay- 
alry skirmish preceding it, Gryllus, one of Xenophon’s two sons, 
was slain. The Laconian composure with which Xenophon 
received the news is thus described by Diogenes Laertius : “ Gryl- 
lus was serving in the (Athenian) cavalry; it was the battle of 
Mantinea, and he fought valorously and was slain. Meanwhile, as 
the story goes, Xenophon was engaged in offering sacrifice; the 
chaplet was on his brow when they brought him news, saying, 
‘Your son has fallen,’ whereupon he removed the chaplet; but 
as the messengers added ‘nobly’ he replaced it on his head, 


ΧΗ | - XENOPHON 


shedding, as others have mentioned, no tear, but only uttering 
the words dev θνητὸν γεγεννηκώς (I knew my child was mortal).”} 

10. The date of Xenophon’s death is unknown; but it is 
certain that he lived to a good old age. Ancient authorities 
agree in this; and one of them fixes his age at ninety, while 
another says that he died Ol. τος, 1 (860-359 B.c.). The general 
belief of modern scholars is that he lived till about 354 8.6. 

11. To young readers of the Anabasis Xenophon’s character 
is commended as worthy of imitation in the qualities disclosed 
by that spirited narrative. He is there shown to have been 
pious, temperate, a lover of nature, and a good judge of men; 
fertile of device in emergencies, patient and cheery.under hard- 
ship, and capable of both persuading and commanding his 
comrades. The simplicity and practical cast of his mind 
made him a good objective reporter of the Socratic conversa- 
tions; the Memorabilia is thus probably a more accurate pre- 
sentment of Socrates as he appeared to the ordinary man than 
the Platonic dialogues, in which Socrates is often only the 
mouthpiece for his great successor. 

12. Xenophon’s writings are like the nature of the man: clear, 
straightforward, and generally unaffected. He lacks higher 
imaginative qualities ; he is occasionally humorous but not genial. 
Dionysius of Halicarnassus, in his Epistle to Cn. Pompeius, thus 
compares the style of Xenophon with that of Herodotus: “As 
to diction, he is partly his equal, partly his inferior. He is 
equal to him in his choice of words familiar and natural to the 
things described; he frames his sentences with no less grace 
and sweetness. Yet to Herodotus alone belong sublimity, beauty, 
stateliness, and that peculiar historic style of his.” 

13. In the list of Xenophon’s writings quoted by Diogenes 
Laertius from Demetrius Magnes we find the following titles: 
The Anabasis (AvdBacis), 7 books; the Cyropaedia (Κυροπαιδεία), 
8 books; the Hellenica (Ἑλληνικά), 7 books; the Memorabilia 
CAropvnpoveduara), 4 books ; the Symposium (Συμπόσιον), 1 book ; 
the Economist (Οἰκονομικός), 1 book; the tract on Horsemanship 

1 (Dakyns’s transl.) 


INTRODUCTION xiii 


(περὶ Ἱππικῆς), 1 book; the Sportsman (Kuvyyerixés), 1 book ; 
the Cavalry General (‘Imrapyxixds), 1 book; the Defense of 
᾿ Socrates ( Ἀπολογία Σωκράτους), 1 book; Revenues (Πόροι), 1 
book; Hiero (Ἱέρων), 1 book; Agesilaus ( Ἀγεσίλαος), 1 book; the 
Polity of the Lacedaemonians (Πολιτεία τῶν Λακεδαιμονίων), 1 
book; the Polity of the Athenians (Πολιτεία τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων), 
1 book; in all, 37 books. Some of these minor works are now 
not considered Xenophontie, e.g., the Apology and the Polity of 
the Athenians, which latter treatise was probably written at or 
near the time of Xenophon’s birth. 


lI. THE MEMORABILIA (‘AIIOMNHMONEYMATA) 


14. This collection of reminiscences is the record of various 
conversations in which Socrates took the leading part, together 
with Xenophon’s comments on these and his general estimate of 
the philosopher’s character; the whole being manifestly pub- 
lished as a defense against the charges of impiety and pernicious 
teaching which had already cost Socrates his life. It belongs, 
with the Oeconomicus, Symposium, and Apologia Socratis, to the 
class of ‘Socratic’ writings, which probably were composed dur- 
ing Xenophon’s residence at Scillus, 1.6. between 387 and 371 B.c. 
He probably had kept notes of his friend’s utterances during 
their years of companionship, of course without anticipating 
the occasion for their publication; and we have little reason 
to doubt their general authenticity and sincerity. 

15. Still, the Memorabilia contains many irregularities of style, 
incoherences in statement, and perplexing repetitions of the 
same topic (especially noticeable in book iv). These have given 
rise to suspicions that the work as we have it is not in the con- 
dition in which it left_the author’s hands. Some scholars (as 
Bergk, Schenkl, and Hartman) have regarded it as an epitomized 
fragment of an original which included the Oeconomicus and the 
Symposium. Others have thought that the original work has 
-been largely added to by various editors and copyists, Krohn 
going so far as to repudiate all but four chapters and fragments 


X1V THE MEMORABILIA 


of three others, and Lincke recognizing only three chapters out 
of the thirty-nine as genuine. A still later school of criticism 
(represented by Schanz, F. Dimmler, and K. Joel) shows a ten- 
dency towards reaction from these extreme views; and the Mem- 
orabilia seems to be regaining its former position of acceptance 
as a fairly trustworthy portrait, though somewhat colored by 
affection, from the hand of one who knew and loved his master 
and friend. Oa 

16. In the first two chapters of book i, Xenophon defends 
Socrates against his accusers by refuting the principal counts in 
the indictment; in what follows, chiefly by reporting conversa- 
tions, he brings out in detail various aspects of the teach- 
ings and character of Socrates. The first and second books 
are more closely connected than the third and fourth. From 1. 
3 to 11. 1, the virtues chiefly considered are εὐσέβεια and ἐγκράτεια. 
From ii. 2 to ii. 10, gratitude and duties to relatives and friends 
are discussed. The third book shows us Socrates in conversa- 
tion with different individuals in regard to their specific occupa- 
tions or professions, such as generalship, statesmanship, the art 
of the orator, of the painter and sculptor, and even of the lover; 
or discussing proper behavior in certain situations of everyday 
life. In the fourth book, finally (with the exception of chap. 4, 
which forms a surprising interruption to the series of dialogues 
with Euthydémus), we see how Socrates proceeded in different 
ways with different natures, in order to lead them to higher 
things. In particular, his four conversations with Euthydémus 
(iv. 2, 3, 5, 6) show how fully he understood the process of 
bringing young men, vain of their knowledge, to the confession 
that they knew nothing; as well as the skill with which, after 
winning their confidence, he led them to a right conception of 
their life problems. The last chapter is an epilogue which sums 
up and concludes the whole.’ 


1 Dindorf rejects the last chapter as going beyond the plan marked out in 
i. 1.1. But the epilogue seems to agree well enough with the author’s pur- 
pose, as set forthabove. Cf. E. Pohle, Die angebliche Xenophontische Apolo- 
gie in ihrem Verhiltnis zum letzten Kapitel der Memorabilien. 


INTRODUCTION XV 


17. What, now, does the Memorabilia really contain, and how 
far does it afford us a true picture of the personality of 


_ Socrates ? ' 


The pre-Socratic philosophy had dealt chiefly with the uni- 
verse external to man —the κόσμος. It asked how the world 
had come into being and from what; whether the original sub- 
stance was one or many, and whether it was to be conceived 
of as in motion or motionless, etc. (i. 1. 14). It was owing to 
the Sophists, and to Socrates contemporaneously with them, that 
men were recalled from the world of material phenomena to the 
contemplation of their own inner nature; and in such a way that 
with them the thought and the intellect appeared superior to 
things and to Nature. 

18. But the Sophists made man’s mind the measure of all 
things; thus installing the individual as judge of everything, 
and dismissing all previously accepted principles in reference to 
the family, the state, and religion, while offering nothing better 
in their place. Socrates, on the other hand, who knew well the 
limits of human knowledge, used the individual mind as a means 
to a higher end, and sought to lead men to ‘true knowledge.’ By 
this term he meant that* everything, to be really understood, 
must be looked at according to its various kinds and relation- 
ships, and traced back to its original conception (i. 1. 16), and 
that in everything the unessential must be separated from the 
essential (iv. 5. 12, 6.1, 13; ef. i. 2. 41, 50). 

19. Now this true knowledge is the highest good of man 
(iv. 5. 6); for, as no man may act otherwise than as he knows 
is good for him (iii. 9. 4; iv. 6. 6), the highest knowledge is 
also the highest virtue, because it is necessary to all other 
virtues (ill. g. 4, 5). 

20. Since virtue is a form of knowledge, it can and must be 
learned ; but, if it is to be permanent, it must be continually 
practiced (i. 2. 19, 23; ii. 6. 39; iii. 9. 1 ff.). Only he who has 
knowledge recognizes that self-restraint is better than license 
Gi. 5. 5; 11. 1. 19, 33; iv. 5.9); he will be able to distinguish 
the apparent danger from the real one (iv. 6. 11), and will 


Xvi THE MEMORABILIA 


therefore have truer courage than the one who lacks that ability 
(iii. 9. 2); he will clearly see that integrity brings more security 
and prosperity than does iniquity. On this basis of clear insight 
rests also the virtue of piety, which can be neglected only by the 
man who does not know that the gods watch over individual men 
and the race in general (i. 1. 19, cf. i. 4. 5 ff.), and how many 
blessings are daily received from them (i. 4. 10 ff.); while he 
who knows how much he owes the gods is εὐσεβής (iv. 6.4). The 
thoughtfulness resting on such insight, and gradually developed 
into a morality which everywhere and always decides for virtue, 
is called σωφροσύνη (iil. 9. 4; iv. 3.1). This σωφροσύνη (not 
essentially different from σοφία, according to the Xenophontic 
Socrates) is unthinkable without self-knowledge. The under- 
standing of our own situation and powers enables us to dis- 
tinguish real from apparent knowledge, and preserves us from 
perverted actions and from failure (iv. 2. 24 ff., cf. iil. 9. 6 ff.). 

21. Thus all virtue is identified with the right knowledge of 
that which subserves true utility; and the good (ἀγαθόν) and 
beautiful (καλόν) appear as synonymous with the useful (ὠφέλι- 
μον, λυσιτελές). The Good in itself, the zdea of goodness, is thus 
unknown to the Socrates of Xenophon. To him it is always 
something relative, which receives its specific application from 
the prevailing circumstances (ili. 8. 2, 3; iv. 2. 13 ff.). 

22. As human action, however, cannot dispense with all 
rules, these are provided for: on the one hand, by the νόμοι τῶν 
θεῶν (iv. 4. 19, 6. 3 ff.), which, although unwritten, clearly 
show to mortals what they are to do and to avoid with ref- 
erence to the gods. On the other hand we have the νόμοι τῆς 
πόλεως, Which regulate the action of man toward man (iv. 6. 6 ff.; 
iv. 4.16). These not only impose on us specific duties, but pro- 
vide for us ample protection ; so that it is folly to become a citi- 
zen of the world and to decline to belong to any one state (ii. 1. 
14 ff.). In so far as the νόμοι furnish the standard for right 
action, τὸ δίκαιον is synonymous with τὸ νόμιμον (iv. 4. 12, 6. 6). 
The ultimate end, however, of all striving for virtue is εὐδαιμονία 
(happiness) (ii. τ. 33). As every individual virtue is simply the 


* 


INTRODUCTION XVil 


doing of that which in every situation is the most appropriate, 
most reasonable, dest thing, so the reward of an industrious and 
virtuous life is the attainment of true happiness. This, so far as 
it is the result of intelligent and upright effort, is called by 
Socrates εὐπραξία, in distinction from εὐτυχία (111. 9. 14). 

23. Such, in its essential features, is the Socratic ethics. If 
it did not attain to the Platonic idea of the good, that is not 
more wonderful than that the Aeginetan sculptures do not show 
the artistic perfection of those wrought by a Phidias. Socrates 
laid the foundation, and thata solid one, on which later structures 
could be reared, and it was by virtue of this that he became the 
introducer of a new epoch in the annals of human. civilization. 
He furnished, as it were, the leaven which worked unceasingly 
and irresistibly, for many years, in the Athenian people; and 
which made itself effective, not so much in the select circles 
of philosophers, as in the streets and markets, the gymnasia 
and palaestrae, the stalls and workshops of artisans —in short, 
wherever he could gain entrance with his formative powers 
Gor. 10). 

24. To the students in our colleges the Memorabilia is of 
value as presenting a faithful though incomplete picture of the 
man whose character and teaching meant so much to Athens. 
We see him temperate and self-contained in all that concerns 
external life, discharging his duties as a citizen according to his 
best knowledge and ability, hearkening to the divine inner 
voice when human wisdom failed, and striving always to lead 
his fellow-citizens to the same knowledge, virtue, and happiness 
that he himself had attained. 

25. The Memorabilia has a further value for students in the 
simplicity and truth with which it transmits the Socratic ethics. 
In this mirror of virtues, as it was held up to antique youth, the 
‘sweet reasonableness’ of integrity, modesty, temperance, love of 
relatives, piety, is contrasted with the unreasoning and destruc- 
tive nature of intemperance, sciolism, boastfulness, ingratitude, 
atheism; and all in a luminous and convincing manner, every- 
where adapted to the nature of the subject. 


Xviil THE AAIMONION 


26. Finally, the Memorabilia is to be recommended as an 
admirable preparation for the reading of Plato. The conver- 
sations are of moderate length, and are conducted on an easily 
recognized plan; and thus afford a suitable transition to the 
more extended Platonic dialogues. The teaching of Socrates, 
moreover, was the fruitful germ of much of the later philosophy, 
especially and immediately that of Plato. Whoever would turn 
to the latter should first learn to know Socrates as he presented 
himself to the cultivated but simple and practical mind of 
Xenophon. 


IV. THE AAIMONION OF SOCRATES? 


27. The word δαιμόνιον generally means the same as θεῖον 
divine. Hence τὸ δαιμόνιον is equivalent to τὸ θεῖον the divine 
being (ef. i. 4. 2,10; iv. 3. 14); and ra δαιμόνια is almost equiv- 
alent to of θεοί, as we say ‘the deities’ for ‘the gods.’ Cf. 
ovs μὲν ἣ πόλις νομίζει θεοὺς οὐ νομίζων, ἕτερα δὲ καινὰ δαιμόνια 
εἰσφέρων i. 1. 1. 

28. But Socrates, although he thus recognized this general 
meaning, usually identified the δαιμόνιον with its utterance, 7.e. 
with that inner voice which urged him on or held him back when 
he contemplated any course of action. This ‘still small voice,’ a 
kind of practical conscience, directed him both in his own 
affairs and in giving advice to his friends; and so, for him at 
least, largely replaced the usual forms of divination, such as 
augury, oracles, etc. (i. 1. 2-5), although he recommended these 
to his friends on occasion. 

29. It should be noted, however, that the δαιμόνιον concerned 
itself only with action as contemplated, and thus performed the 
functions of a guide, not those of a judge or punisher. For past 
actions it apparently had neither approval nor condemnation ; 
and we cannot apply to it our modern phrase ‘an approving 
conscience’ or find a trace of it in the remorse which scourged 
the guilty souls in Greek tragedy. 


1 Adapted from Kiihner’s Prolegomena (1857), pp. 22-81. 


INTRODUCTION ΧΙΧ 


30. While Xenophon in several places speaks distinctly of 
this inner voice as both urging on and holding back, Plato with 
equal distinctness makes Socrates say, This is a kind of voice 
which has come to me ever since boyhood, and which whenever it 
comes always deters me from what I may be about to do, but never 
urges me on, ἐμοὶ δὲ τοῦτό ἐστιν ἐκ παιδὸς ἀρξάμενον φωνή Tis γιγνο- 
μένη, ἢ ὅταν γένηται ἀεὶ ἀποτρέπει με τοῦτο ὃ ἂν μέλλω πράττειν, 
προτρέπει δὲ οὔποτε (Plato Apol. 31 ν, cf. also Theages 128 pv). 
This apparent contradiction is generally reconciled by supposing 
that in Plato the silence of the divine voice was taken as a sign 

of assent (cf. Plato Apol. 40 4, 8, C). 





BENO®ONTOS 


AITTOMNHMONEY MATA 


Πολλάκις ἐθαύμασα τίσι ποτὲ λόγοις ᾿Αθηναίους 1 


¥ ε , ε ¥ ¥ , 
ἔπεισαν οἵ γραψάμενοι Σωκράτην ws ἄξιος εἴη θανάτου 


~ 7 
Τῇ πόλει. 


1. Socrates reverenced the gods of 
the Athenian state, and introduced no 
new divinities, 

1. πολλάκις ἐθαύμασα : with these 
words Isocrates begins his Panegyri- 
cus, and Theophrastus his Charac- 
teres.—tlot ποτε: by what possible. 
The use of ris, ποῖος, πόσος, πῶς, etc., 
makes the indirect question more 
vivid and forcible. G. 1012; H. 1011. 
So ποίῳ ποτέ ἴῃ 2. For asimilar inten- 
sive use of ποτέ (Lat. tandem) with 
questions, cf. τί ποτε λέγει ὁ θεός 
Plato Apol. 21 8, τίπτ᾽ [τί ποτε] 
εἷλήλουθας Hom. A 202. Xenophon 
surely was not unacquainted with 
the contents of the judicial indict- 
ment against Socrates; but he 
regarded its grounds as wholly un- 
satisfactory, and wondered what 
arguments could have persuaded 
the judges to render such a verdict. 
At the time of the trial (399 B.c.), 
Xenophon was not in Athens, and 
could only have heard from others in 
regard to the speeches. —’ Αθηναίους : 
here (as ᾿Αθηναῖοι in 20) refers imme- 
diately to the judges. So, in address- 
ing the court, ὦ ἄνδρες ᾿Αθηναῖοι was 


ἡ μὲν yap γραφὴ κατ᾽ αὐτοῦ τοιάδε τις ἣν. 


allowable, instead of ὦ ἄνδρες δικα- 
oral, since every Athenian citizen 
over thirty years of age could become 
a judge. The actual number of 
judges sitting on each case was very 
large, usually 501, which must have 
made the court resemble somewhat 
a New England town meeting. In 
the popular jury court of the Heliaea, 
the term δικαστής really is equivalent 
to ‘judge-juryman.’ (See Schémann, 
Antig. of Greece, Eng. transl. ,i.474ff. ; 
Gow, Companion to School Classics, 
p. 126.) Both here, however, and 
in 20, δικαστής is purposely avoided, 
to indicate that the guilt of con- 
demning Socrates affected the whole 
Athenian state. —érecav, ὡς ely: 
in 20, ἐπείσθησαν with acc. and infini- 
tive. —ot γραψάμενοι : the accusers, 
viz. Meletus, Anytus, and Lycon 
(Introd. ὃ 6). --- τῇ πόλει: dat. of 
relation or interest. G. 1172; 
H. 771. Cf. i. 2. 62, 63. —pév: not 
followed by a correlative δέν A con- 
trast is not expressed, though per- 
haps suggested. ‘‘ How unfounded, 
however, the accusation was will 
appear hereafter.’’ — γραφή: the 


2 ERENO®ONTOS ATLOMNHMONEYMATA A. 1. 


“᾿Αδικεῖ Σωκράτης ovs μὲν ἡ πόλις νομίζει θεοὺς 


δοὺ νομίζων, ἕτερα δὲ καινὰ δαιμόνια εἰσφέρων" 


ἀδικεῖ δὲ καὶ τοὺς νέους διαφθείρων." 


al > ‘ 
Πρῶτον μὲν οὖν, ws οὐκ ἐνόμιζεν ovs ἡ πόλις νομίζει 


θεούς, ποίῳ ποτ᾽ ἐχρήσαντο τεκμηρίῳ; 


θύων τε γὰρ 


φανερὸς ἦν πολλάκις μὲν οἴκοι, πολλάκις δὲ ἐπὶ τῶν 


ιοκοινῶν τῆς πόλεως βωμῶν, καὶ μαντικῇ χρώμενος οὐκ 


ἀφανὴς ἦν. διετεθρύλητο γὰρ ὡς dain Σωκράτης τὸ 


ὃ , ε A , é “θ δῷ Ν 4 4 
QLLOVLOV ECAVUT@ ON MQALVELY *—— OVEV OY) Και μάλιστα μοι 


term for a public indictment. See 
Gow, p. 127.—Kar αὐτοῦ : without 
repetition of the art. (after γραφή), 
as often after a noun expressing 
action. Cf. ἣν yap ἐφ᾽ ἑνὸς ἡ κατά- 
βασις ἐκ τοῦ χωρίου An. v. 2. 6. ---- τὶς : 
after τοιάδε, shows that the author 
is more concerned with the sub- 
stance than with the exact words. 
The indictment is probably, how- 
ever, quoted nearly verbatim. We 
find it somewhat differently given 
by Plato, Apol. 24 8, where the two 
principal counts stand in the reverse 
order. There, too, an ἔχει δέ πως 
ὧδε precedes. — ots... νομίζων : the 
rel. clause ovs . . . νομίζει has the 
force of an attrib. adjective. θεούς is 
obj. of νομίζων, recognizing. For 
the circumstantial participle of 
means or manner, see G. 1563, 3; 
H. 969 a. — ἀδικεῖ δὲ καί: the first 
ἀδικεῖ was not followed by μέν, an 
omission which occurs chiefly when, 
as here, δὲ καί follows. ΟἿ i. 2. 22; 
ii. 6. 23; An. iii. 1. 238. 

2-9. Socrates not only sacrificed 
to the gods, but also availed himself of 
divination, as is proved by his belief in 
the δαιμόνιον. But he thought that we 


should not question the gods on matters 
which human understanding is capable 
of ascertaining without divine aid. 

2. πρῶτον μὲν οὖν: ‘*as to the 
first charge, then.’’. The δέ corre- 
sponding to μέν is at the beginning of 
chapter 2. — θύων : for the participle 
in indirect discourse with δῆλος and 
φανερός εἶμι, see G. 1589; H. 981.— 
οἴκοι : at home, i.e. in the αὐλή, the 
interior court of the dwelling, where 
stood the altar of Ζεὺς ‘Epxeios. See 
Seyffert, Dict. Class. Antig. p. 704. 
For the accent of οἴκοι, see G. 113; 
H. 102 b. —rév κοινῶν βωμῶν : these 
stood in the open spaces of the city, 
so that the worshipers were ‘seen 
of men.’ — οὐκ ἀφανής : ‘ litotes.’ — 
διετεθρύλητο yap: for it was com- 
monly reported (διά indicating the 
spread of the report) that Socrates 
believed in his δαιμόνιον, and hence 
in divination. The parenthetical 
sentences from ὅθεν δή to yap ἔφη in 
4 carry this thought farther. — δαι- 
poviov: an adj. used as a noun, like 
τὸ θεῖον. Cf. divinum quiddam, 
quod daemonium  appellat 
(Socrates) Cic. de Div. i. 54. See 
Introd. §27 ff. — ὅθεν δὴ καὶ μάλιστα: 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA I, 1. 3 


ων SUN > ’, Ν ’ὔ 5» ΄’ 
δοκοῦσιν QUTOV αἰτιάσασθαι καινα δαιμόνια εἰσφέρειν. 


ὁ δ᾽ οὐδὲν καινότερον εἰσέφερε τῶν ἄλλων, ὅσοι μαντι- 3 
16 κὴν νομίζοντες οἰωνοῖς τε χρῶνται καὶ φήμαις καὶ συμ- 
] , \ , ἀν τ \ ε ΄ ohh Se 
Boros καὶ θυσίαις. οὗτοί τε yap ὑπολαμβάνουσιν οὐ 


Key 2QA ‘ > A 297 \ ΄ 
τους ὄρνιθας οὐδὲ τοὺυς αἀπαντωντας εἰδέναι Τα, συμφέρον- 


ἴω , 5 Ν ἈΝ Ν Ἂς ’ὔ 9 Ν 
τα τοῖς μαντευομένοις, ἀλλὰ τοὺς θεοὺς διὰ τούτων αὐτὰ 


3 \ y 
σημαίνειν, κἀκεῖνος δὲ οὕτως ἐνόμιζεν. 


ἀλλ᾽ οἱ μὲν πλεῖ- 


’ὔ £ ’ὔ “A 53 Θ \ ἴω 9 ͵ὕ 
2οστοί φασιν ὑπὸ τε τῶν ὀρνίθων καὶ τῶν ἀπαντώντων 


> ‘4 3 Ἁ ud , , ψ 
ἀποτρέπεσθαί τε καὶ προτρέπεσθαι: Σωκράτης δέ, ὥσπερ 


a2 17 = ¥ Ν ὃ ΄ \ x , 
ἐγίγνωσκεν, οὕτως ἔλεγε: TO δαιμόνιον yap ἔφη onpat- 


νειν. 


for which very reason especially. 
Other utterances of Socrates were 
also used by his opponents as evi- 
dence that he introduced καινὰ da- 
μόνια. Cf. κατηγόρουν αὐτοῦ, ws ὅτι 
καινὰ δαιμόνια εἰσφέρει τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις, 
λέγων δεῖν σέβειν ὄρνεα καὶ κύνας καὶ τὰ 
τοιαῦτα Isoc. xi (First Hypothesis), 
edit. Blass. 

3. τῶν ἄλλων : gen. of the per- 
son, although the real comparison is 
between things. 
mero πολλὸν ἐλάσσω Tod πατρός Hat. 
ii. 134. See G. 1178; H. 773 b. — 
μαντικήν (i.e. τὴν μαντικὴν τέχνην) : 
divination in general, followed by 
the four varieties οἰωνοῖς, φήμαις, cup- 
Boros, θυσίαις. In the case of birds, 
their flight and cries were observed 
(Lat. augurium); φῆμαι were say- 
ingsof men; σύμβολα (συμβάλλων) were 
originally coincidences, or meetings 
of men, then, generally, natural 
phenomena, or other occurrences 
which may serve as omina; θυσίαις 
refers to the inspection of the viscera 
of victims sacrificed. Cf. Theo- 


Cf. πυραμίδα ἀπελί- 


‘from the 


Ἁ A “ , / Ν Ν 
καὶ πολλοῖς τῶν συνόντων προηγόρευε τὰ μὲν 


phrastus περὶ δεισιδαιμονίας : Gardner 
and Jevons, Manual of Greek Antigq., 
p. 256 ff. For the dat. of means 
with χρῶνται (lit. serve themselves 
by), see G. 1183; H. 777. — οὐ 
τοὺς ὄρνιθας: not that the birds. — 
τὰ συμφέροντα τοῖς μαντευομένοις : 
what is of advantage to the persons 
resorting to divination. — διὰ τούτων : 
through these instrumentalities. The 
gen. is of means, as in ἔλεγε δι᾽ 
ἑρμηνέως, he spoke through an inter- 
preter, An. ii. 3.17. G. 1206, 1; H. 
795, 1. --- Οαὀὐτά : 1.6. τὰ συμφέροντα. 

4. οἱ πλεῖστοι : the great major- 
ity. — Φασίν : say, i.e. they so ex- 
press themselves, and yet believe, 
like Socrates, that the omens come 
gods. — τὸ δαιμόνιον 
σημαίνειν: the thought is, that 
Socrates said that he obeyed his éa:- 
μόνιον, and thus did not really differ 
from the others, who obeyed the 
gods while saying that they were 
following the signs. To him, the 
inner voice was a sign from the gods. 


-- - συνόντων: not μαθητῶν, since 


4 BENOSONTOS AIOMNHMONEYMATA A. 1. 


A Ν Ν A ε “A id ᾿ 
ποιεῖν, τὰ δὲ μὴ ποιεῖν, ὡς τοῦ δαιμονίου προσημαίνοντος" 
26 καὶ τοῖς μὲ θομέ ὑτῷ έφε ts δὲ μὴ 

καὶ τοῖς μὲν πειθομένοις αὐτῷ συνέφερε, τοῖς δὲ μὴ 


ld 4, 
πειθομένοις μετέμελε. 


΄ ΄ 3 x ε / 
καίτοι Tis οὐκ av ὁμολογήσειεν 


αὐτὸν βούλεσθαι μήτ᾽ ἠλίθιον μήτ᾽ ἀλαζόνα φαίνεσθαι 


τοῖς συνοῦσιν; 


3 ’ > x > 4 A > 
ἐδόκει δ᾽ dv ἀμφότερα ταῦτα, εἰ προ- 


, e e Ν ΄ "d ’ὔ 3 ’ὔ 
αγορεύων ὡς ὑπὸ θεοῦ φαινόμενα ψευδόμενος ἐφαίνετο. 
κι ΩΝ 4 > x τς 3 Ν Penk 3 
80δῆλον οὖν ὅτι οὐκ ἂν προέλεγεν, εἰ μὴ ἐπίστευεν ἀλη- 


θεύσειν. 
͵7ὔ 4 a nw > 
πιστεύων δὲ θεοῖς πῶς οὐκ 


Socrates did not have pupils, in the 
ordinary sense of the term; he did 
not teach for money, like the Sophists. 
Both Xenophon and Plato sedulously 
avoid the use of the term μαθηταί for 
the followers of Socrates, employing, 
in its stead, συνόντες, συνουσιασταί, 
συνδιατρίβοντες, etc. Cf.i. 2.38; 1.6.1; 
Plato Apol. 33 a.— τὰ μὲν ποιεῖν, τὰ δὲ 
μὴ ποιεῖν : acc. to Plato (Apol. 31p; 
Theag. 128 Ὁ), the δαιμόνιον confined 
its activity to restraining, and did not 
encourage or urge on. The apparent 
difference between this statement and 
that of Xenophon may be explained by 
assuming that to Socrates the silence 
of the divine monitor implied assent 
and even encouragement. Cf. Plato 
Apol. 40 a ff. — ὡς προσημαίνοντος : 
1.6. λέγων τὸ δαιμόνιον προσημαίνειν. 
The gen. or acc. abs. of a participle 
with ws or ὥσπερ assigns a reason on 
the part of the speaking or acting 
subject, without implying the truth 
or falsity of the statement expressed 
by the participle. Both cases (gen. 
and acc.) occur near each other in 
i. 6.5. See G. 1574, 1593; H. 978. 
- τοῦς πειθομένοις αὐτῷ : those who 
followed his counsel. — μετέμελε : 


εἶναι θεοὺς ἐνόμιζεν; 


“ Ν 7 x » 4 ἋἍ ἣν 
ταῦτα δὲ τίς ἂν ἄλλῳ πιστεύσειεν ἢ θεῷ; 


ἀλλὰ 


translate as if personal, ‘‘ had cause 
for regret.’’ 

5. ὁμολογήσειεν : for the poten- 
tial opt., see G. 13827ff; H. 872. 
- αὐτόν: i.e. Socrates. — ἠλίθιον 
μήτ᾽ ἀλαζόνα: a fool nor an impostor. 
-- ἐδόκει δ᾽ ἄν, εἰ ἐφαίνετο : impi., 
instead of aor., denoting cond. unful- 
filled in past time, the verbs express- 
ing continued acts. So οὐκ ἂν mpoé- 
λεγεν, ef μὴ ἐπίστευεν just below. See 
GMT. 410; H. 895 ἃ. --- ἀμφότερα 
ταῦτα: 1.6. ἠλίθιος καὶ ἀλαζών. For 
the gender of the pred. adj., see 
H. 617. Cf. ὁπότε (ἀδελφὸς) πᾶν τὸ 
ἐναντιώτατον εἴη ii. 3. 5.— ὧς : see 
on 4. --- ψευδόμενος : for the supple- 
mentary participle, see G. 1588; 
H. 981. —-ratra: in these matters. 
- πιστεύων δέ: equiv. to εἰ ἐπίστευε, 
cond. assumed as real, and itself a 
logical conclusion from the preced- 
ing sentence. For the circumstantial 
participle of cond., see G. 1563, 5; 
H. 969 d. —ov« εἶναι θεοὺς ἐνόμιζεν : 
this was the meaning of the charge 
quoted in 1, ovs μὲν ἡ. πόλις νομίζει 
θεοὺς οὐ νομίζων. 

6. ἀλλὰ μήν: but further, marks 
a transition to a new phase of the 





XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA I. 1, 5 


+ 5 ’ὔ \ (ὃ Ν \ > ὃ ,ὕ Ν A \ 
μην ετοιει KAL TAOE προς τους ΕΠΙΤΉ ειους᾽ τα μεν γὰρ 


3 A 4, Ἁ ’, ε , » " 

ἀναγκαῖα συνεβούλευε καὶ πράττειν ὡς νομίζοιεν ἄριστ 
ΕῚ An \ δὲ lal ΣΝ χὰ Ψ 9 , 

35av πραχθῆναι, περὶ O€ τῶν ἀδήλων ὅπως ἀποβήσοιτο 


> 
μαντευσομένους πέμπειν εἰ ποιῃτέα. 


καὶ τοὺς μέλλοντας 


Ψ' \ , la > 2 A ¥ 
οἴκους TE καὶ πόλεις καλῶς οἰκήσειν μαντικῆς ἔφη προσ- 


δεῖσθαι: τεκτονικὸν μὲν γὰρ ἢ χαλκευτικὸν ἢ γεωργικὸν 
ee 

[ἢ ἀνθρώπων ἀρχικὸν] ἢ τῶν τοιούτων ἔργων ἐξεταστικὸν 
Ἃ 

407) λογιστικὸν ἢ οἰκονομικὸν ἢ στρατηγικὸν γενέσθαι, πάντα 


discussion. Xenophon makes fre- 
quent use of thisphrase. Οὗ. 1. 1.10, 
iv. 5. 10. — ἐπιτηδείους : another 


substitute for ‘disciples’ (uaé@yrat). 
See on συνόντων in 4.— γάρ : after 
τάδε (in preceding clause) has an 
introductory force. Cf. ἐκ τῶνδε 
σκέψαι": εἰ yap κτλ. ii. 6. 88. --- τὰ 
ἀναγκαῖα : the necessary duties of 
life, the result of which can be readily 
foreseen. Cf. ii. 1. 6, iv. 5. 9.— 
καί (before πράττειν) : here equiv. 
ἰο οὕτω. Cf. ὡς δέ of ταῦτα ἔδοξε, 
καὶ ἐποίεε Hdt. i. 79. In compari- 
sons, καί often stands in both clauses. 
H. 1042. Cf. i. 6. 3. —ds νομίζοιεν : 
for the cond. rel. corresponding to 


past general cond., see G. 1431, 2; © 


H. 914 B (2). — dv πραχθῆναι : repre- 
sents the potential opt. of direct dis- 
course. G. 1522, 1328; H. 946. — 
ἀδήλων (sc. ὄντων) ὅπως ἀποβήσοιτο: 
‘‘whose result was doubtful.” 
ἀποβήσοιτο is fut. opt. (never used 
with ἄν in indirect question. 
GMT. 129; H. 932, 2. The adv. 
ὅπως should not be confounded with 
the conj. ὅπως. See GMT. 376. — 
μαντευσομένους πέμπειν : to send and 
consult the oracles. Xenophon him- 
self received this advice from Soc- 
rates (An. 111. 1. 5). Cf. εἴγε μὴν 


ταῦτα δόξειεν ὑμῖν πράττειν, συμβου- 
λεύσαιμ᾽ ἂν ἔγωγε πέμψαντας καὶ εἰς 
Δωδώνην καὶ εἰς Δελφοὺς ἐπερέσθαι (to 
question) τοὺς θεούς Vect. vi. 2; Hat. 
i. 46,85. For the fut. participle of 
purpose, see G. 1563, 4; H. 969 c. — 
el ποιητέα (86. εἴη): whether they should 
be done. For the verbal in -réos, 
see G. 1595; H. 989: and for the 
opt. in indirect question, see on ἀπο- 
βήσοιτο above. 

7. «al: introduces an illustration, 
‘so, for example.’? Cf. καὶ oi 
μοιχοί ii, I. . --- τοὺς μέλλοντας 


καλῶς οἰκήσειν : qui vellent bene 


administrare. Cf. εὖ οἰκοῦσι ἷ. 2. 
64, where the phrase is used in a 
pass. sense, ‘tare well managed.’’ 
For the periphrastic fut. inf. (with 
μέλλω), see G. 1254; H. 846. — 
οἴκους τε Kal πόλεις: ‘not only 
domestic, but also public affairs.’’? — 
προσϑεῖσθαι: needed in addition to 
their human abilities and attain- 
ments. —pév γάρ: for while, con- 
trasted with τὰ δὲ μέγιστα below. — 
τεκτονικόν : for the formation and 
accent of denominative adjs, in -ἰκός, 
see G. 851; H. 565. — τῶν τοιούτων 
ἔργων ἐξεταστικόν : a competent critic 
of such works. —doyorikév : lit. 
skilled in calculation, an accountant. 


6 EENO®ONTOS AITOMNHMONEYMATA A. 1. 


\ a , MoS ΄ , e ΕΣ» Be 
TA Τοιαῦτα μαθήματα και ἀνθρώπου γνωμῃ αιρετα ενο- 


> Ν la 
μιζεν εἶναι: τὰ δὲ μέγιστα τῶν ἐν τούτοις ἔφη τοὺς θεοὺς 


ἑαυτοῖς καταλείπεσθαι, ὧν οὐδὲν δῆλον εἶναι τοῖς ἀνθρώ- 


ποις. 


ΕἾ Ν las A ΕῚ Ν Ψ' ἊΜ 
οὔτε γὰρ τῷ καλῶς ἀγρὸν φυτευσαμένῳ δῆλον 


9 » an “ 3. 3 ld 
45 ὅστις καρπώσεται, OUTE τῳ καλῶς οἰκίαν οἰκοδομησαμένῳ 


dnd pe 3 ᾽ὔ κα lal a δηλ > 
7) ον OOTLS ενοικΉσει, OUTE T@ OTPAaTYNYLK@ 7) OV εἰ 


Ἴ ἵν. οὔτε τῷ λ » δὴλ i = 
συμφέρει στρατηγεῖν, ᾧ πολιτικῷ δῆλον εἰ συμ 


la A ~ lal 2 
φέρει τῆς πόλεως προστατεῖν, οὔτε τῷ καλὴν γήμαντι,’ 


% 9 > 4 A 3 ὃ \ , 3 , ἃ}. 
ἵν᾿ εὐφραίνηται, δῆλον εἰ διὰ ταύτην ἀνιάσεται, οὔτε 
δοτῷ δυνατοὺς ἐν τῇ πόλει κηδεστὰς λαβόντι δῆλον εἰ διὰ 


A , 
τούτους στερήσεται τῆς πόλεως. 


τοὺς δὲ μηδὲν τῶν 


, “3 ὕ iy ὃ , 9 Ν ’ὔὕ a 
τοιούτων οἰομένους εἶναι δαιμόνιον, ἀλλὰ πάντα τῆς 


ἀνθρωπίνης γνώμης, δαιμονᾶν ἔφη δαιμονᾶν δὲ καὶ 


---πάντα τὰ τοιαῦτα: sums up the 
preceding items, their common inf. 
γενέσθαι being understood with each. 
- μαθήματα: objects of study, pred. 
(like αἱρετά) to τὰ τοιαῦτα. --- καὶ 
ἀνθρώπου γνώμῃ αἱρετά: and atiain- 
able by human understanding. For 
the verbal in -rés, see G. 776, 2; 
H, 475. 

8. τὰ δὲ μέγιστα τῶν ἐν τούτοις : 
‘*but the point of greatest impor- 
tance in these matters’ (lit. of the 
things in these), i.e. the result in each 
case. — καταλείπεσθαι: reserve. — 
εἶναι: for the inf. by assimilation in 
indirect discourse, see G. 1524; 
H. 947. --- καλῶς (in both clauses) : 
well. — φυτευσαμένῳ : for denom- 
inative verbs, see G. 861; H. 570 
ff. — οἰκίαν olxoSopyncapéve: the 
apparent redundancy of ‘‘ house- 
building a house’’ is explained by 
‘the fact that olxodouéw (like Lat. 
aedificare) early lost its special 
meaning, and was used with τεῦχος, 


TOUS 
γέφυρα, vats, etc. Cf. oivoxde γλυκὺ 
νέκταρ Hom. A 598. —el ἀνιάσεται : 
after verbs or phrases expressing 
doubt or ignorance, εἰ should be 
translated whether, or whether not, 
acc. to the necessities of the Eng. 
idiom. For the fut. ind. with 
εἰ after expressions of uncertainty, 
see Kr. Spr. 65. 1. 8, --- στερήσεται 
(the usual form, instead of στερηθή- 
σεται) : passive, as is also ἀνιάσεται. 
G. 1248; H. 496, and a. 

9. μηδέν : for the occasional use 
of μή with the inf. after verbs which 
regularly take οὐ, see GMT. 685 
Jin. —Sa.péviov: adj., ** dependent 
on divine influence.’? —rfjs ἀνθρω- 
πίνης γνώμης : within the province 
of human understanding. For the 
pred. gen., see G. 1094, 1; H. 732 a. 
— Saipovadv: equivalent to ὑπὸ δαίμο- 
vos κατέχεσθαι. Notice the word-play 
(‘paronomasia’) between δαιμόνιον 
and δαιμονᾶν. The latter gains fur- 
ther emphasis by its repetition at the 


8 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA I. 1. 7 


ἃ a 
μαντευομένους ἃ τοῖς ἀνθρώποις ἔδωκαν ot θεοὶ μαθοῦσι 


Ὁ ¥ , 
55 διακρίνειν, ----οἷον εἴ τις ἐπερωτῴη πότερον ἐπιστάμενον 
ε A ee lal X A “A xX \ 5 , 
ἡνιοχεῖν ἐπὶ ζεῦγος λαβεῖν κρεῖττον ἢ μὴ ἐπιστάμενον, 
rr , A nw A 
ὃ πότερον ἐπιστάμενον κυβερνᾶν ἐπὶ THY ναῦν κρεῖττον 
Ἶ 


A x Ree , A A Y¥ > ΄ x 

λαβεῖν ἢ μὴ ἐπιστάμενον ---- a ἔξεστιν ἀριθμήσαντας ἢ 
“Δ ἃ , al 

μετρήσαντας ἢ στήσαντας εἰδέναι" τοὺς TA τοιαῦτα Tapa 


A A , 52 72 A ς A » 
ροτῶν θεῶν πυνθανομένους ἀθέμιστα ποιεῖν ἡγεῖτο: ἔφη 


δὲ δεῖν, ἃ μὲν μαθόντας ποιεῖν ἔδωκαν οἱ θεοί, μανθάνειν, 


ἃ δὲ μὴ δῆλα τοῖς ἀνθρώποις ἐστί, πειρᾶσθαι διὰ μαντι- 


A x A A , \ \ N ΟῚ 
KYS παρα τῶν θεῶν πυνθάνεσθαι: τους θεοὺς Yop ols αν 


Ss Xr , 
WOLV Lb εῳ σημαιψΨειν. 


66 ᾿Αλλὰ μὴν ἐκεῖνός γε ἀεὶ μὲν ἦν ἐν τῷ φανερῷ: πρωΐ 


3 δ ΄ Ν Ν , ¥ \ 
TE yap εἰς τους περιπάτους KAaL TA γυμνασια Yel και 


beginning of the next sentence. — 
pavrevopévous: sc. περὶ τούτων». --- 
ἔδωκαν : for the form, see G. 670; 
H. 432. — μαθοῦσι: by learning, 
. **by experience.’’ The participle is 
attracted to the case of ἀνθρώποις. 
6. 928, 1; H. 941. --- οἷον εἰ: as if 
for example. — κρεῖττον : sc. etn. — 
μή: with a participle, equivalent to 
a cond. rel. clause. G. 1612; 
H. 1028. --- ἐπὶ τὴν ναῦν: upon his 
ship, with reference to the implied 
subj. οἵ λαβεῖν. For the art. as 
possessive, see G. 949; H. 658. — 
ἢ ἃ ἔξεστιν εἰδέναι : or in regard to 
matters which we may determine. — 
στήσαντας: by weighing. For the 
circumstantial participle of means, 
see G. 1565, 3; H. 969 a. — rots τὰ 
τοιαῦτα κτλ.: sums up briefly (like 
πάντα τὰ τοιαῦτα in 7) what precedes ; 
hence the ‘asyndeton.’ Cf. ii. 1. 
33; iv. 3. 14. --- μαθόντας : see on 
μαθοῦσι above. — οἷς ἂν ὦσιν : cond. 
rel.clause. G.1431,1; H. 9148 (1). 


—rew: for the ‘ Attic’ 
decl., see G. 196; H. 227. 

10-20. While Socrates always 
lived in the public view, and spoke 
and taught openly in the city, yet no 
one ever heard him utter an impiety ; 
for he busied himself, not, like other 
philosophers, with speculations con- 
cerning the universe, but with the 
problems of-making men better and 
more self-controlled. How faithful 
he could be to his principles was 
amply shown at the trial of the nine 
generals. 

10. ἀλλὰ μήν: see on 6.—ded 
μέν : contrasted with οὐδεὶς δὲ πώποτε 
in 11. --΄ὰἰν τῷ φανερῷ: cf. Eng. ‘in 
the ορθη." --- πρωΐ : the day was 
divided into several parts (ὥραι), --- 
πρωΐ Or ὄρθρος, morning ; πλήθουσα 
ἀγορά, 9-12 a.m. ; μεσημβρία, noon; 
δείλη, afternoon ; and ἑσπέρα, evening. 
-- πέριπάτους : colonnades or halls. 
Aristotle and his followers, who car- 
ried on discussions while walking in 


second 





8 BENO®ONTOS AILOMNHMONEYMATA A. 1. 


, 3 A 9 “ Ν > Ν Ν Ν ΓῸΣ Wee 
πληθούσης ἀγορᾶς ἐκεῖ φανερὸς ἦν, καὶ τὸ λοιπὸν ἀεὶ 


A Pree 5 Y λ ΄ 7 ἃ. , θ 2 \ 
Τῆς ἡμέρας HV OTOU TAELOTOLS με οι συνεσεσῦσαι" KAL 


ἔλεγε μὲν ὡς τὸ πολύ, τοῖς δὲ βουλομένοις ἐξῆν ἀκούειν. 
0 οὐδεὶς δὲ πώποτε Σωκράτους οὐδὲν ἀσεβὲς οὐδὲ ἀνόσιον 


¥ , > ¥ , ¥ 
OUTE πράττοντος εἶδεν OUTE λέγοντος YKOVO ED. 


οὐδὲ γὰρ 


Ν a ἴω , , ine a ἂν ε a) 
περὶ τῆς τῶν πάντων Nason: ὕπερ Τῶν ἄλλων οἱ πλεῖ- 


στοι διελέγετο, σκοπῶν ὅπως ὁ καλούμενος ὑπὸ τῶν 


σοφιστῶν κόσμος ἔφυ καὶ τίσιν ἀνάγκαις ἕκαστα γίγνεται: 


the paths and colonnades of the 
Lyceum, were called Peripatetics. — 
ἀγορᾶς : for the gen. of time, see G. 
1186; H. 7689. --- πλείστοις : very 
many. —péAdAjouv: opt. in cond. rel. 
clause, denoting repeated action in 
past time. See on ὡς voulfouev 6. — 
ὡς τὸ πολύ : for the most part. 

11. οὐδεὶς δὲ πώποτε Σωκράτους 
κτλ. : but no one ever saw Socrates 
do, or heard him say, anything pro- 
fane or impious. Σωκράτους is gen. 
with verbs of perception. G. 1102; 
H. 742. The two participles rpdr- 
Tovros and λέγοντος are supplemen- 
tary. G. 1582; H. 982. --- οὐδὲ γάρ: 
the neg. extends also to σκοπῶν. --- 
τῶν πάντων: the universe. — ἧπερ: 
ea quidem ratione, qua. To 
serve ethical or teleological purposes, 
Socrates brought the consideration 
of the universe into his discussions 
(cf. i. 4, iv. 3). Xenophon is care- 
ful, however, to say that he did not 
discourse thereon after the manner 
of natural philosophers (in order to 
preclude the assumption that Socra- 
tes, by such discussions, laid himself 
open to the charge of ἀσέβεια, as did 
other philosophers, e.g., Anaxago- 
ras). Cf. of yap ἀκούοντες ἡγοῦνται 


τοὺς ταῦτα (ViZ. τά Te μετέωρα [celestial 
phenomena] καὶ τὰ ὑπὸ γῆς) ζητοῦντας 
οὐδὲ θεοὺς νομίζειν Plato Apol. 18 ο. 
-- καλούμενος: attrib. participle. 
G. 1559; H. 965. — τῶν σοφιστῶν : 
here, as in iv. 2. 1, philosophers, 
without unfavorable added meaning, 
which σοφιστής did not have before 
the time of Socrates. For its use in 
the less favorable sense, see i. 6. 13. 
The student may consult, on this 
subject, the histories of philosophy, 
as Zeller, Schwegler, Ueberweg, eéc.; 
and, especially, Grote’s famous dis- 
cussion (Hist. of Greece, c. Ixvii). — 
κόσμος : the world of order, corre- 
sponds exactly to the Lat. mundus, 
and is said to have been first em- 
ployed in this sense by Pythagoras 
(about 500 B.c.). — ἔφυ : the origin of 
the world was a favorite subject of 
speculation with the earliest Greek 
philosophers. .‘ Ay, sir, the world isin 
its dotage ; and yet the cosmogony, 
or creation of the world, has puzzled 
philosophers of all ages. What a 
medley of opinions have they not 
broached upon the creation of the 
world!’ Goldsmith, Vicar of Wake- 
field, c. 14. --- τίσιν ἀνάγκαις : by 
what eternal laws. — φροντίζοντας 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA 1.1. 9 


δτῶν οὐρανίων, ἀλλὰ καὶ τοὺς φροντίζοντας τὰ τοιαῦτα 


᾿μωραίνοντας ἀπεδείκνυεν. 


3 “ \ A 
Kal πρῶτον μὲν αὐτῶν ἐσκό- 


’, ’, 7 e a » 3 , 
Tel TOTEPA ποτε νομΐσαντες ἱκανῶς ἤδη τἀνθρώπινα 
\ Ν ἴω 
εἰδέναι ἔρχονται ἐπὶ τὸ περὶ τῶν τοιούτων φροντίζειν, 


x Ν \ > 4 , ὃ ͵ Ν ὃ , δὲ κι 
7) Ta μεν αν βώπεια παρέντες, Τα αυμονιαᾶ € σκοτπουν- 


a Ν 
80 TES, ἡγοῦνται τὰ προσήκοντα πράττειν. 


ἐθαύμαζε δ᾽ εἰ 


ἈΝ Ν ΕῚ aA 5 9 la) 3 ὃ ’, 3 
μὴ φανερὸν QUTOLS ἐστιν OTL Ταῦτα OV VVQATOV EOTLY 


5 4 e wn 
ἀνθρώποις εὑρεῖν. 


Ἀ Ν Ἁ la) 
ἐπεὶ καὶ TOUS μέγιστον φρονοῦντας 


ἐπὶ τῷ περὶ τούτων 'λέγειν οὐ ταὐτὰ δοξάζειν ἀλλήλοις, 


ἀλλὰ τοῖς μαινομένοις ὁμοίως διακεῖσθαι πρὸς ἀλλήλους. 


12 


8ὅ τῶν τε γὰρ μαινομένων τοὺς μὲν οὐδὲ τὰ δεινὰ δεδιέναι, 14 
΄ “΄ 


τὰ τοιαῦτα: pondering such subjects. 
τοιαῦτα replaces a cognate acc. im- 
pliedintheverb. G.1054; H.716 and 
b. Cf. μέγιστον and ταὐτά 13, and τὰ 
μετέωρα φροντιστής Plato Apol. 18 8. 
So Aristophanes (Clouds 94) calls 
Socrates’s house a φροντιστήριον, and 
(ibid. 102) the philosophers generally 
‘peptuvopporricrat ponderers of trifles. 

12. πρῶτον μέν : corresponds to 
ἐσκόπει δέ in 15.--- αὐτῶν ἐσκόπει 
πότερα: he would raise the question 
in regard to them, whether. 
(regarded as attrib. gen.) may be 
referred to the general rule given in 
G. 1084; H. 728, the other subst. in 
this case being the interr. sent. πότερα 
kth. Cf. ἐνενόησε δὲ αὐτῶν καὶ ὡς 


αὐτῶν 


ἐπηρώτων ἀλλήλους τοιαῦτα Cyr. Υ. 2. 
18, --- ποτέ: adds intensity to the 
question, asin 1 and 2. Cf. πότερά 
more πόλεμος, ἢ εἰρήνη εἴη Hell. v. 
4. 16. --- τἀνθρώπινα, ἀνθρώπεια : 
without perceptible difference in 
meaning. Cf. ἀνθρωπίνοις πράγμασι 
iv. 1. 2, with ἀνθρώπεια πράγματα iv. 
6. 5. — τὸ φροντίζειν : for the articu- 


lar inf., see G. 1546; H. 959. — 
παρέντες (παρίημι) : in ignoring. 

18. ἐθαύμαζε ci: the prot. with 
el, after verbs expressing emotion in 
past time, is equivalent to a causal 
clause, and might take the optative. 
GMT. 697; H. 926. εἰ μή is equiva- 
lent to ὅτι οὐ. --- ἐστίν, ἐστίν : such 
repetitions are frequent in Xenophon. 
So δοκεῖν εἶναι, εἶναι δοκεῖν in 14. — τοὺς 
μέγιστον φρονοῦντας : those who most 
pride themselves. μέγιστον, instead of 
μέγιστα, on the analogy of μέγα φρονεῖν. 
— od ταὐτὰ δοξάζειν : do not hold the 
same opinions. For the inf. in subord. 
clause of indirect discourse, see on εἶναι 
in 8. — ἀλλήλοις : for the abridged 
expression, see on τῶν ἄλλων 8. --- 
τοῖς μαινομένοις : madmen, as a class. 
For the generic use of the art., see 
G. 950; H. 659.— διακεῖσθαι πρὸς 
ἀλλήλους : are affected, in compari- 
son with one another. 

14. τῶν τε yap μαινομένων : for, 
as among madmen (part. gen.), 
followed by τῶν τε μεριμνώντων as a 
parallel. Notice the ‘concinnity’ 


10 ZENO®QNTOS AILOMNHMONEYMATA A. 1. 


τοὺς δὲ Kal τὰ μὴ φοβερὰ φοβεῖσθαι: καὶ τοῖς μὲν οὐδ᾽ 


9 »” A > Ν  Ὰ δ, x lal e ἴω A 
ἐν ὀχλῳ δοκεῖν αἰσχρὸν εἶναι λέγειν ἣ ποιεῖν ὁτιοῦν, τοῖς 


\ SN 59 4 > 3 ΄, > A y Ν Ν 
δὲ οὐδ᾽ ἐξιτητέον εἰς ἀνθρώπους εἶναι δοκεῖν: καὶ τοὺς 


μὲν οὔθ᾽ ἱερὸν οὔτε βωμὸν οὔτ᾽ ἄλλο τῶν θείων οὐδὲν 


ϑοτιμᾶν, τοὺς δὲ καὶ λίθους καὶ ξύλα τὰ τυχόντα καὶ θηρία 


, A \ “ la , , 
σέβεσθαι: τῶν TE περὶ τῆς TOV πάντων φύσεως μερι- 


, A Ν ὃ A ἃ / Ν x > A δ᾽ 
μνωντων τοις μεν ΟΚειν EV μονον TO OV εἰναι, TOLS 


¥ Ν ial \ A Ἂς Ἂν τῶν ’ A 
απειρα ΤΟ πλῆθος: και τοις μέν. Qel παντα κινεῖσθαι, 


A > SQA »» μ᾿ Ἀ A \ 4, 
τοις ὃ οὐδὲν QV ποτε κινηθῆναι: καὶ τοις μεν TAVTA 


95 γίγνεσθαί τε Kal ἀπόλλυσθαι, τοῖς δὲ οὔτ᾽ ἂν γενέσθαι 


ποτὲ οὐδὲν ovr ἀπολεῖσθαι. 


of this passage ; both the μαινόμενοι 
and the μεριμνῶντες are divided into 
three groups, each containing two 
contrasts. — δεδιέναι : see on δοξάζειν 
in 13. ---τὰ μὴ φοβερά : μή instead of 
οὐ, since τὰ φοβερά is indefinite. 
G. 1613; H. 1026. Distinguish 
between δεδιέναι and φοβεῖσθαι. --- 
ὁτιοῦν: -οῦν, like Lat. -cunque, is 
equivalent to Eng. ‘-ever,’ ‘-soever.’ 
G. 432; H. 285. — ἐξιτητέον : equiv- 
alent to ἐξιτέον.υ G. 808; H. 477. 
For the impers. const. of the verbal, 
see G. 1597; H. 990. ---τὰ τυχόντα : 
chanced on, hence ‘‘common.’’ The 
whole phrase is nearly equivalent to 
Eng. ‘ stocks and stones,’ and seems 
to indicate a sort of fetichism. 
Breitenbach understands it of gro- 
tesque stone or wooden images, and 
cites τὰ δὲ ἔτι mwadalrepa (in still 
more remote times)* καὶ τοῖς πᾶσιν 
Ἕλλησι τιμὰς θεῶν (divine honors) ἀντὶ 
ἀγαλμάτων (statues) εἶχον ἀργοὶ (un- 
dressed) λίθοι Paus. vii. 22. 3. — τὸ dv: 
all existence, ‘*the universe,’’ to be 
supplied also as subj. for ἄπειρα (εἶναι) 


τὸ πλῆθος. That the universe was a 
unit (ev μόνον) was the doctrine of 
the Eleatic philosophers, and esp. of 
Xenophanes (about 540 B.c.), the 
founder of that school. Plato dis- 
cusses this doctrine in the Parmeni- 
des. The contrary view (ἄπειρα τὸ 
πλῆθος) was held by the Atomists, 
esp. Leucippus (about 6500 B.c.) 
and his pupil Democritus, both of 
Abdéra in Thrace.— ἄν ποτε κινη- 
θῆναι : equivalent to ἄν ποτε κινηθείη 
in direct discourse. G. 1494; 
H. 964. The doctrine was that of 
the Eleatic Zeno (about 460 B.c.): 
‘ Motion is impossible,’ said he, ‘ for 
it must take place either where a 
body is, or where it is not; it can- 
not move where it is, and it certainly 
cannot where it’is not.’ On the 
other hand, the ‘ perpetual flux’ (de 
κινεῖσθαι) Was maintained by Heraclitus 
of Ephesus (about 500 8.c.). For an 
account of these various schools, see 
Schwegler’s, Zeller’s, or Ueberweg’s 
Hist. of Philosophy, or Marshall’s 
Hist. of Greek Philosophy. 


9 , \ Ν 5. A ΜΝ 
EO ΚΟΤΙΕι δὲ περι αὐτων 15 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA I. 1. 11 


5 9 
καὶ τάδε: “ Ap’, ὥσπερ οἱ τὰ ἀνθρώπεια μανθάνοντες 
la xn A ἴω 
ἡγοῦνται τοῦθ᾽, ὅ τι av μάθωσιν, ἑαυτοῖς τε καὶ τῶν 
¥ ῳ x- 4 : ? ν Ν ε Ν A 
ἄλλων ὅτῳ ἄν βούλωνται ποιήσειν, οὕτω Kal οἱ τὰ θεῖὰ 
100 ζητοῦντες νομίζουσιν, ἐπειδὰν γνῶσιν αἷς ἀνάγκαις ἕκα- 
στα γίγνεται, ποιήσειν, ὅταν βούλωνται, καὶ ἀνέμους καὶ 
Ψ ".ν ν Ὁ ὡς τος ΡΩΝ , las , 
ὕδατα Kal ὥρας Kal ὅτου ἂν ἄλλου δέωνται τῶν τοιούτων, 
aA. wn ἊΝ Oe δ᾽ aN , > A > 9 A 
ἢ τοιοῦτο μὲν οὐδὲν οὐδ᾽ ἐλπίζουσιν, ἀρκεῖ δ᾽ αὐτοῖς 
γνῶναι μόνον ἣ τῶν τοιούτων ἕκαστα γίγνεται; " περὶ μὲν 16 
106 οὖν τῶν ταῦτα πραγματευομένων τοιαῦτα ἔλεγεν - αὐτὸς 
Ἁ Ν ων 3 ’ > N ’ nw ’ 9 ὔ 
δὲ περὶ τῶν ἀνθρωπείων ἀεὶ διελέγετο, σκοπῶν τί εὐσεβές, 
ἌΝ », ’ ’ / > ’ 7 v4 ’ » Fh 
τί ἀσεβές, τί καλόν, τί αἰσχρόν, Ti δίκαιον, τί ἄδικον, τί 
4 7 ’ὔ yi > Δ ’ lA 4 ’ ’ 
σωφροσύνη, τί μανία, τί ἀνδρεία, τί δειλία, τί πόλις, τί 
Ξ , γε: rs , a) Ν 9 , Ν 
πολιτικός, τί ἀρχὴ ἀνθρώπων, τί ἀρχικὸς ἀνθρώπων, καὶ 
Ἁ “ » ἃ ‘\ Ν 3 Yi ε la) Ἁ 3 
110 περὶ τῶν ἄλλων, ἃ τοὺς μὲν εἰδότας ἡγεῖτο καλοὺς κἀγα- 
\ 5 Ἀ 9. 5 A 9 ΄ BN ΄ 
θοὺς εἶναι, τοὺς δ᾽ ἀγνοοῦντας ἀνδραποδώδεις ἂν δικαίως 


κεκλῆσθαι. 


15. ἄρα: whether, introducing νομί- 
ζουσιν, and followed by ἢ ἐλπίζουσιν as 
the alternative. — μάθωσιν, βούλωνται, 
γνῶσιν : for the cond. rel. subjv., see 
G. 1434 ; H. 916. — ἀνάγκαις: asin 11. 
— ὕδατα: rains. — ὅτου : for the form, 
see G.425; H.280a.—y7: qua ratione. 
The passage suggests a definition of 
‘pure’ and ‘applied’ science. 

16. περὶ μὲν οὖν : an extended 
enumeration of details is often 
closed, in Greek, with a clause or 
sent. which sums them all up; and 
which is commonly introduced by μὲν 
οὗν or δή. Cf. the beginnings. and 
endings of Xenophon’s chapters. — 
αὐτὸς δέ: for the uses of the inten- 
«siye pron., see G. 989; H. 680. — 
τί εὐσεβές, τί ἀσεβὲς κτλ. : Socrates 
sought to define his conceptions by 


examining opposed qualities, which 
accordingly are here arranged in’ 
pairs until πόλις is reached, when the 
opposition ceases. Since the ques- 
tion is as to the essential nature of 
each quality, εὐσεβές and the follow- 
ing adjs. are virtually abstract nouns. 
G. 933; H. 621 b (Rem.).—d tots 
εἰδότας κτλ. : Quas res quiscirent 
honestos esse arbitrabatur. 
To Socrates, the proper study of 
mankind was man. In his view the 
expression καλοὺς κἀγαθούς contained 
the idea of men of culture, viros 
liberaliter institutos; while 
ἀνδραποδώδεις servile conveyed the op- 
posite meaning. Other Greeks (than 
Socrates) often used καλοὶ κἀγαθοί 
in a political sense, like optimates. 
— Gv κεκλῆσθαι : equivalent to’ pf. 


12 EENO®QNTOS AITOMNHMONEYMATA A. 1. 


2 Ν > Ν Ν ἐκ ν : 
Οσα μὲν οὖν μὴ φανερὸς ἣν ὅπως ἐγίγνωσκεν, οὐδὲν 17 
Ν ε \ 4 Ἁ “ ἴω 
θαυμαστὸν ὑπὲρ τούτων περὶ αὐτοῦ παραγνῶναι τοὺς 
ὃ 4, . 4 de ’ "ὃ 3 θ Ν 3 \ 
115 δικαστάς: ὁσα ὃὲ πάντες ἤδεσαν, ov θαυμαστὸν εἰ μὴ 
4 5 θ 460 5 λ 4 U4 Ν Ν 
τούτων ἐνεθυμήθησαν; βουλεύσας γάρ ποτε καὶ τὸν 18 
XN 9 > 7 3 ΜΒ΄ ἐν é 
βουλευτικὸν Opkov ὀμόσας, ἐν ᾧ ἣν κατὰ τοὺς νόμους 
3 ’ 3 “~ v4 
βουλεύσειν, ἐπιστάτης ἐν τῷ δήμῳ γενόμενος, ἐπιθυμή- 
a / Ν Ν 
σαντος τοῦ δήμου παρὰ τοὺς νόμους [ἐννέα στρατηγοὺς] 


See on ἂν from each of the ten tribes (φυλαῖ). 


The whole collective body was 


opt. in direct discourse. 


κινηθῆναι 14. 

17. ὅσα μὲν οὖν μὴ φανερὸς ἦν 
κτλ. : the views and conversations of 
Socrates thus far described could 
not have been known to everybody, 
and might easily have remained 
unknown to the judges. μή is 
explained by the cond. force of the 
rel. clause. G. 1610; H. 1021. ὅσα 
is loosely connected with φανερός and 
ἐγίγνωσκε, Which verb, in the sense of 
‘think’ or ‘believe,’ is often em- 
ployed with περί and the genitive. 
Cf. i. 2.19. For the pers. const. of 
φανερός, see Oni. 1. 2. --- ὑπέρ : chosen 
to avoid a repetition of περί. --- παρα- 
γνῶναι : ‘went astray in their judg- 
ment.’? — ἐνεθυμήθησαν : with the 
gen., had regard to ; with the acc., 
more in the sense of ‘ponder.’ For 
εἰ with the ind. after θαυμαστόν, see 
on 13 above. 

18. βουλεύσας: senator fac- 
tus. So ii. 6. 25, where ἄρξας is 
equivalent to magistratus fac- 
tus. The aor. denotes the election 
to the office, the pres. would indicate 
continuance init. G. 1260; H. 841. 
The senate, or council (βουλή), of the 
_Athenians was, under the constitu- 
tion of Clisthenes, composed of five 
hundred citizens, fifty being chosen 


divided into ten sections of fifty each, 
corresponding to the ten tribes. Each 
of these sections (called rpurdveis) in 
turn served as an executive commit- 
tee of the βουλή for a period of 
thirty-five or thirty-six days in ordi- 
nary years (thirty-eight or thirty- 
nine days in intercalary years). 
From the prytany of fifty members 
one man was chosen by lot each day 
to act as presiding officer (ἐπιστάτης) 
in conducting the debate and in put- 
ting questions to vote. This latter 
function, in the present instance, 
as we see, Socrates refused to exer- 
cise. Cf. Plato Apol. 32 8, and 
for an account of the βουλή, its 
functions, divisions, etc., see Sché- 
mann, Antig. of Greece, i. 371 ff., 
Gardner and Jevons, Manual of Greek 
Antiq., 484 ff. -- τὸν βουλευτικὸν 
ὅρκον ὀμόσας: having taken the 
senatorial oath of office. ὅρκον is 
cognate accusative. —év ᾧ ἦν: in 
which it was stipulated. We might 
expect ἐν ᾧ ἐστι, but the impf. indi- 
cates what obligations Socrates 
assumed when he took the oath. — 
παρὰ τοὺς νόμους ἐτλ.: after the 
naval victory of the Athenians over 
the Spartans off the Arginusae 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA I. 1. 13 


120 μιᾷ ψήφῳ τοὺς ἀμφὶ Θράσυλλον καὶ Epacwidnv ἀποκτεῖ- 


ναι πάντας, οὐκ ἠθέλησεν ἐπιψηφίσαι, ὀργιζομένου μὲν 
7. A A / a) δὲ \ ὃ A 9 ͵ὕ 
αὐτῷ τοῦ δήμου, πολλῶν δὲ καὶ δυνατῶν ἀπειλούντων " 


ia Ν Ν ΄ 3 , > A x» , aA 
ἀλλὰ περὶ πλείονος ἐποιήσατο εὐορκεῖν ἣ χαρίσασθαι TO 
« 

/ Ν Ν / Ν ’ \ > A 
δήμῳ παρὰ τὸ δίκαιον καὶ φυλάξασθαι τοὺς ἀπειλοῦντας. 

Ν Ν 3 A \ ον 3 , > ἃ 

125 καὶ yap ἐπιμελεῖσθαι θεοὺς ἐνόμιζεν ἀνθρώπων, οὐχ ov 19 
τρόπον οἱ πολλοὶ νομίζουσιν: οὗτοι μὲν yap οἴονται τοὺς 


θεοὺς τὰ μὲν εἰδέναι, τὰ δ᾽ οὐκ εἰδέναι - Σωκράτης δ᾽ ἡγεῖτο 


΄, \ δ 297 , ΄ Ν ΄, \ 
παντα μεν θεοὺς εἰδέναι, TATE λεγόμενα KQL TPATTOMEVA και 


islands (406 B.c.), the Athenian gen- 
erals omitted to take adequate meas- 
ures to rescue the crews of the 
disabled vessels, or to gather the 
dead for burial. A violent storm, 
arising after the battle, hindered the 
detachment left behind for that pur- 
pose from performing this duty, so 
sacred in Hellenic eyes. The gen- 
erals were publicly impeached ; and, 
in spite of Socrates’s protest, were 
condemned to death in one vote 
(μιᾷ ψήφῳ). This proceeding, and 
the refusal of a fair trial to the gen- 
erals, were illegal (παρὰ τοὺς véyous) ; 
for the law expressly provided that 
when several persons were accused 
together, a separate trial and vote 
should be held in the case of each 
(Hell. i. 7. 26). The full num- 
ber of generals was ten: but Conon 
was blockaded at Mytilene, Arches- 
tratus had died, two had fled to 
avoid trial; and only six were 
actually executed. Cf. Hell. i. 7, 
Plato Apol. 32 8, and see Grote, Hist. 
of Greece, c. |xiv. — τοὺς ἀμφὶ Opa- 
΄σύυλλον καὶ “EpaciwiSnv: Thrasyllus 
and Erasinides with their colleagues. 
For the phrase οἱ ἀμφί τινα, see H. 791, 


3. In the nine here spoken of should 
probably be included Leon, who was 
superseded in command by Lysias 
during or just before the battle 
(Hell. i. 5. 16, 6. 30, 7. 2); Keno- 
phon must therefore omit his name 
when speaking (Hell. i. 7. 34) of 
sentence being passed on ‘eight.’ — 
οὐκ ἠθέλησεν : refused. The illegal 
vote must have been taken, after 
Socrates’s refusal, by the ‘ prytanes’ 
directing some other more compliant 
member of their body to put the 
question. — εὐορκεῖν: to keep his 
οαἴῆ. ----φυλάξασθαι : for differences 
of meaning in the act. and mid. of 
certain verbs, see G. 1246; H. 816. 

19. θεούς : ‘* beings who deserve 
the name of gods.’’ τοὺς θεούς might 
be understood to mean the special 
divinities of the Athenians. — ov 
τρόπον: equivalent to τὸν τρό- 
πον, ᾧ. ---τά τε λεγόμενα κτλ.: Cf. 
‘For there is not a word in my 
tongue, but lo, O Lord, thou know- 
est it altogether,’ ‘ thou understand- 
est my thought afar off,’ ‘whither 
shall I flee from thy presence ?’ 
Psalm exxxix; and οὗτοι τοίνυν οἱ 
πάντα μὲν εἰδότες πάντα δὲ δυνάμενοι 


14 


EENO®ONTOS ATLOMNHMONEYMATA A. 1, 2. 


τὰ σιγῇ βουλευόμενα, πανταχοῦ δὲ παρεῖναι Kal σημαίνειν 


ESR ΄, Nit ον, 9 ,ὕ , 
130 τοις ἀνθρώποις πέρυ τῶν ἀνθρωπείων πάντων. 


Θαυμάζω οὖν ὅπως ποτὲ ἐπείσθησαν ᾿Αθηναῖοι Σωκρά- 20 


XN Ν \ ‘a Ν 3 \ Ν 3 ΄ 
την περὶ θεοὺς μὴ σωφρονεῖν, τὸν ἀσεβὲς μὲν οὐδέν ποτε 


Ν δ ‘ ¥ 59 ΑΝ » ΄ὕ a 
πέρι τους θεοὺς OUT €L7TOVTH OUTE πράξαντα, Τοιαῦτα 


ὃ Ν Ν U4 Ν 4 \ A δ. x Ἁ 
ὲ καὶ λέγοντα καὶ πράττοντα [περὶ θεῶν], οἷά τις ἂν καὶ 


, \ 4 » Ν ΄, > la 
135 λέγων Kal πράττων εἰη TE Kal νομίζοιτο εὐσεβέστατος. 


eee 


\ 4 νὴ lal 
Θαυμαστὸν δὲ φαίνεταί μοι καὶ τὸ πεισθῆναί Twas ws 2 


Σωκράτης τοὺς νέους διέφθειρεν, ὃς πρὸς τοῖς εἰρημένοις 


las \ 3 5 , \ Ν ,ὕ > θ , 
T PWTOV μεν ἄφρο LOLWVY Και γαάστρος TAVT@V AV po- 


πων ἐγκρατέστατος ἦν, εἶτα πρὸς χειμῶνα καὶ θέρος 


Ν ΄ ΄ ΄, » Ν \ Ν 
5KQL πάντας πονους καρτερικώτατος, €TL δὲ προς TO 


fal ν ν 
μετρίων δεῖσθαι πεπαιδευμένος οὕτως ὦστε πάνυ μικρὰ 


θεοὶ οὕτω μοι φίλοι εἰσὶν wore διὰ τὸ 
ἐπιμελεῖσθαί μου οὔποτε λήθω αὐτοὺς 
οὔτε νυκτὸς οὔθ᾽ ἡμέρας οὔθ᾽ ὅποι ἂν 
ὁρμῶμαι οὔθ᾽ & τι ἄν μέλλω πράττειν 
Sym. iv. 48. 

20. θαυμάζω οὖν κτλ. : repeats, in 
conclusion, the thought of 1. --- μὴ 
σωφρονεῖν : did not hold sound opin- 
ions. For μή instead of ov, after 
οἶμαι, cf. i. 2. 41; after ὑποπτεύειν, 
An. ii. 3. 18. GMT. 685 fin. ; 
H. 1024. --- τὸν ἀσεβὲς xrd.: the rest 
of the section is an expansion of the 
idea περὶ θεοὺς σωφρονεῖν. Note the 
significant change in tense from 
εἰπόντα and πράξαντα to λέγοντα and 
mparrovra, —ota: Obj. of λέγων and 
πράττων. For the cond. force of 
these participles, see on i. 1. 5. 

2. 1-11. In refutation of the sec- 
ond charge against Socrates, that of 
corrupting the youth, Xenophon shows 
that he dissuaded young men from vice 
and impiety, and led them, by the ex- 


ample of his own life, to revere the 
laws and abhor violence. 

1. τὸ πεισθῆναί τινας: that any 
were persuaded (by the arguments of 
the accusers). For the inf. with τό, 
as subj., see G. 1555; H. 959. — és: a 
man who. Cf. 64; of i. 4. 11, iii. 5. 
15. — πρὸς τοῖς εἰρημένοις : sc. in the 
previous chapter. — γαστρός : appe- 
tite, as in i. 6. 8, a case of ‘ meton- 
ymy.’ For the gen. with adjs., see 
G. 1140; H. 753 Ὁ. --- εἶτα : without 
δέ, as often after a πρῶτον μέν. So 
ἔπειτα ini. 4. 11, iv. 2.31. On Socra- 
tes’s hardy endurance of heat and 
cold, and other physical discomforts, 
cf. i. 6. 2, Plato Sym. 220 B. — kap- 
τερικώτατος : most inured. —mpds τὸ 
μετρίων δεῖσθαι : ‘‘to moderation in 
his wants.’’ For the articular inf. as 
obj. of aprep., see GMT. 800; H. 959. 
— πάνν μικρά : Socrates estimated 
his entire estate at five minae, or 500 
drachmae (Oec, ii. 3.). Reckoning 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA 1. 2. 15 


7 4 ε ’ » 5 a 
κεκτημένος πάνυ ῥᾳδίως ἔχειν ἀρκοῦντα. 


πῶς οὖν, αὐτὸς 2 


x “ ¥ x » 9 aA x , x 7 
ὧν τοιοῦτος, ἄλλους av 7 ἀσεβεῖς ἣ παρανόμους ἢ λίχνους 


ἡ ὦ 4 > A . Ἅ Ν Ν m ἈΝ 3 ἊΝ 
ἢ ἀφροδισίων ἀκρατεῖς ἢ πρὸς τὸ πονεῖν μαλακοὺς ἐποί- 


yee; ἀλλ᾽ ἔπαυσε μὲν τούτων πολλούς, ἀρετῆς ποιήσας 


3 “~ Ν 3 / ’ x ε “ 3 »“ 
ἐπιθυμεῖν καὶ ἐλπίδας παρασχών, ἀν EAUVTOV ἐπιμελῶνται, 


καλοὺς κἀγαθοὺς ἔσεσθαι. 


, 3 ΄ eos 
KQLTOL YE οὐδεπώποτε UTT€E- 


σχετο διδάσκαλος εἶναι τούτου, ἀλλὰ τῷ φανερὸς εἶναι 


the drachma at eighteen cents, this 
would nominally be equivalent to 
ninety dollars. The purchasing 
power of money, however, was much 
greater in ancient than in modern 
times. The orator Lysias, who was 
reputed rich, was robbed by the 
Thirty of the bulk of his fortune, 
amounting to about 312 minae (Lys. 
xii. 11.). Boeckh (Staatshaushaltung 
der Athener 142 ff.) estimates that in 
the time of Socrates a family of 
four grown persons could live com- 
fortably on five minae per annum ; 
but as a man’s entire estate, this sum 
would be, indeed, πάνυ μικρόν. On 
Attic money and its purchasing 
power, see Gow, Companion to School 
Classics, p. 88 Τῇ, --- κεκτημένος : for 
the circumstantial participle of con- 
cession, see G. 1563, 6; H. 969 e, 
and, for the case of the pred. partici- 
ple, G. 927; H. 940. Cf. τῷ φανερὸς 
εἶναι 8. --- ἔχειν: inf. of result. 
G. 1450; H. 953. 

2. πῶς οὖν ἂν ἐποίησεν : how then 
could he have made. For the poten- 
tial indic., see G. 1338; H. 903. — 
πρὸς TO πονεῖν μαλακούς : soft as to 
toil. —GAN ἔπαυσε τούτων πολλούς : 
nay, he freed many from these vices. 
— ἂν ἐπιμελῶνται : the use of ἄν for 
ἐάν is not infrequent in Xenophon. 


Cf. dv τι ὁρῶμεν i. 6. 14. Οὗ the 
three forms of the cond. conj. with ἄν, 
it may be remarked that in Attic in- 
scriptions of the classical period (fifth 
to third century B.c.) ἄν is found but 
six times, ἐάν being the prevailing 
form; while ἤν does not occur at all, 
though frequent in Mss. of literature 
of the fifth century. Meisterhans, 
Grammatik der attischen Inschriften, 
p. 218. For the subjv. in indirect 
discourse, see G. 1497, 2; H. 982, 
933. ---ἔσεσθαι : fut. inf. after ἐλπί- 
das, as after a verb of hoping. In 
direct discourse, we should have ἂν 
ὑμῶν αὐτῶν ἐπιμελῆσθε, καλοὶ κἀγαθοὶ 
ἔσεσθε. 

3. καίτοι ye: and yet, indeed, 
opposed to μέν in the preceding sen- 
tence. So yé μέντοι in ii. 1.9. The 
restrictive force of γέ applies to the 
whole clause. — διδάσκαλος : cf. ovs 
οἱ διαβάλλοντές μέ φασιν ἐμοὺς μαθητὰς 
ἐγὼ δὲ διδάσκαλος μὲν οὐδενὸς 
πώποτ᾽ ἐγενόμην Plato Apol. 88 a. 
See on i. 1. 
καλοὺς κἀγαθοὺς ἔσεσθαι. --- ἀλλὰ τῷ 
φανερὸς εἶναι τοιοῦτος dv: but because 
it was evident that he was such a 
one. For the articular inf. in the 
dat., see G. 1547; H. 959, and for 
wy, see on θύων i. 1.2. For the case 
of φανερός, see On κεκτημένος 1, — 


εἶναι. 


4, - -τούτου; 1.6. τοῦ 


16 ἘΕΝΟΦΩΝΤΟΣ AILOMNHMONEYMATA A. 2. 


aA “ἡ 3 ’, 3 / ba’ 4 ε ~ 
τοιοῦτος wy ἐλπίζειν ἐποίει τοὺς συνδιατρίβοντας ἑαυτῷ 
16 μιμουμένους ἐκεῖνον τοιούτους γενήσεσθαι. ἀλλὰ μὴν 
\ “ la 
καὶ τοῦ σώματος αὐτός TE οὐκ ἠμέλει τούς T ἀμελοῦντας 
οὐκ ἐπήνει. τὸ μὲν οὖν ὑπερεσθίοντα ὑπερπονεῖν ἀπεδο- 
/ Ἂν, δὲ ν AO ΄, ε Ν ὃ / al ε ων 
κίμαζε, τὸ δὲ ὅσα ἡδέως ἡ ψυχὴ δέχεται, ταῦτα ἱκανῶς 
ἐκπονεῖν ἐδοκίμαζε: ταύτην γὰρ τὴν ἕξιν ὑγιεινήν τε 
~ > . ΄ῪΝ ΄Ν 
20 ἱκανῶς εἶναι καὶ τὴν τῆς ψυχῆς ἐπιμέλειαν οὐκ ἐμποδίζειν 
» 
ἔφη. 


9 ΄ὕ YQ? ε ΄ ¥ a » ,ὕ 9 Ν 
αμπεέεχον) οὐθ ὑποδέσει OUVTE ΤΊ) ἄλλῃ διαίτῃ: OU μὴν 


ἀλλ᾽ οὐ μὴν θρυπτικός γε οὐδὲ ἀλαζονικὸς Hv ovT’ 


οὐδ᾽ ἐρασιχρημάτους γε τοὺς συνόντας ἐποίει: τῶν μὲν 
N " 9 A » \ ν. ε nA 3 aA 
yap ἄλλων ἐπιθυμιῶν eave, τοὺς δὲ ἑαυτοῦ ἐπιθυμοῦντας 


συνδιατρίβοντας : see on διδάσκαλος 
above. — ἑαυτῷ: for the indir. ΤΘΗ͂., 
see 6. 993; H. 683 a. — μιμουμένους : 
imitando. — ἐκεῖνον : refers more 
distinctly to Socrates, from the point 
of view of the συνδιατρίβοντες, than 
αὐτόν would do. ἐκεῖνος is apt to be 
used when the person has already 
been mentioned by αὐτοῦ or ἑαυτοῦ. 
Cf. οὐκ ἔφη ἑαυτοῦ γε ἄρχοντος οὐδένα 
Ἑλλήνων εἰς τὸ ἐκείνου δυνατὸν ἀνδρα- 
ποδισθῆναι Hell. i. 6. 14. 

4, ἀλλὰ μήν : as ἴῃ ἱ. 1. 6. ---- οὐκ 
ἔπνει: improbabat. Cf. ὅτι Δέξιπ- 
πον μὲν οὐκ ἐπαινοίη, εἰ ταῦτα πεποιη- 
κὼς εἴη An. Vi. 6. 25. --- τὸ μὲν οὖν 
ὑπερεσθίοντα κτλ. : he accordingly dis- 
approved of overeating along with over- 
working. ὑπερεσθίοντα agrees with the 
understood subj. (τινά) of ὑπερπονεῖν. 
The allusion is to the enormous appe- 
tites of athletes while in training, a 
process which must have been more 
one-sided in its results than our mod- 
- ern training is. In Plato and Eurip- 
ides the professional athletes are 
stigmatized as lazy, greedy, and 


sleepy. In the fourth idyl of Theoc- 
ritus, the boxer Aegon is described 
as taking with him twenty sheep for 
his month of training, and as eating 
eighty barley-cakes in one day. 

5. ἀλλ’ οὐ μὴν θρυπτικὸς ἦν: ‘ but 
he did not carry care for the body so 
far as to be effeminate.’’ — ἀλαζονι- 
κός : ostentatious, as the professional 
Sophists often were. See oni. 6. 2. 
— ἀμπεχόνῃ; ὑποδέσει : clothing, foot- 
gear. Cf. col μὲν γὰρ οὐκ ἂν πρέποι 
τοιούτων ὀνομάτων ἀναπίμπλασθαι (to be 
soiled by), καλῶς μὲν οὑτωσὶ ἀμπεχομένῳ 
(clothed), καλῶς δὲ ὑποδεδεμένῳ (shod) 
Plato Hipp. Maj. 291 a.— οὐ μὴν οὐδέ: 
ac ne quidem. — ἐπιθυμιῶν, ἐπιθυ- 
potvras: obs. the ‘paronomasia.’ 
‘¢ Not only did Socrates free his asso- 
ciates from the tyranny of other pas- 
sions (beside avarice) which demand 
money for their satisfaction, but he 
gratified the sole desire aroused by 
himself (i.e. to hear him converse) . 
without putting them to any outlay 
of money ’’ (Gilbert). — τοὺς ἐπιθυ- 
potvras érparrero χρήματα : for the 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA 1. 2. LZ 
25 οὐκ ἐπράττετο χρήματα. τούτου δ᾽ ἀπεχόμενος ἐνόμιζεν 6 
3 7 3 “Ὁ Ἁ \ , wn ε 
ἐλευθερίας ἐπιμελεῖσθαι: τοὺς δὲ λαμβάνοντας τῆς ὁμι- 
las μισθὸν ἀνδραποδιστὰς ἑαυτῶν ἀπεκάλει διὰ τὸ 
3 a > a“ > , Ey x , 
ἀναγκαῖον αὐτοῖς εἶναι διαλέγεσθαι παρ᾽ ὧν av λάβοιεν 
Ν ’ 3 4 > » > \ 3 la 
τὸν μισθόν. ἐθαύμαζε δ᾽ εἴ τις ἀρετὴν ἐπαγγελλόμενος 7 
80 ἀργύριον πράττοιτο καὶ μὴ νομίζοι τὸ μέγιστον κέρδος 
ἕξειν φίλον ἀγαθὸν κτησάμενος, ἀλλὰ φοβοῖτο μὴ ὃ 
γενόμενος καλὸς κἀγαθὸς τῷ τὰ μέγιστα εὐεργετήσαντι 
μὴ τὴν μεγίστην χάριν ἕξοι: Σωκράτης δὲ ἐπηγγείλατο 8 
μὲν οὐδενὶ πώποτε τοιοῦτον οὐδέν, ἐπίστευε δὲ τῶν συνόν- 
35 των ἑαυτῷ τοὺς ἀποδεξαμένους ἅπερ αὐτὸς ἐδοκίμαζεν εἰς 
τὸν πάντα βίον ἑαυτῷ τε καὶ ἀλλήλοις φίλους ἀγαθοὺς 


ἔσεσθαι. 


A > ek se A 2 AN , N 
πῶς οὖν ἂν ὁ τοιοῦτος ἀνὴρ διαφθείροι τοὺς 


- 5 \ » ε ῪΜ 5 “Ὁ 5 ’ δ 
νέους; εἰ μὴ ἄρα ἡ τῆς ἀρετῆς ἐπιμέλεια διαφθορά ἐστιν. 


double acc. with ἐπράττετο, see 
G. 1069; H. 724. This also is aimed 
at the Sophists, many of whom 
charged extravagant prices for their 
instruction. Protagoras is said to 
have received 100 minae (nominally 
about $1800, but see on πάνυ μικρά 
in 1), which must have been out of all 
proportion to ordinary fees. 

6. ἐλευθερίας ἐπιμελεῖσθαι : he was 
preserving his independence. —avipa- 
ποδιστὰς ἑαυτῶν : enslavers of them- 
selves. Cf. i. 5. 6. --- διαλέγεσθαι : sc. 
τούτοις. Cf. i. 6. ὅ. ---- ἂν λάβοιεν : for 
ἂν λάβωσι οἵ direct discourse. For 
the retention of ἄν in rel. and tem- 
poral clauses even when the verb 
has been changed to the opt., see 
GMT. 702. On this section, cf. Plato 
Apol. 318, c, 33 a. 

7. émayyedAspevos: professing to 
teach, a technical expression. — πράτ- 
τοιτο: for the opt., see on i. 1. 13, 


and G. 1502, 2 (2), last example but 
one; H. 932, 2. — ph, μὴ ἕξοι: we 
should expect μὴ οὐχ ἕξοι, ace. to the 
rule (G. 13864; H. 887), but ‘after μή 
had come to be felt as a conjunction, 
and its origin was forgotten, the chief 
objection to μή, μή was probably in 
the sound, and we find a few cases 
of it where the two particles are so 
far apart that the repetition is not 
offensive ’ GMT. 306 (where the sent. 
of the text is cited). Another in- 
stance of this rare usage is found in 
Thue. ii. 13. 

8. ἐπηγγείλατο, ἐπίστευε: note the 
difference between the aor. and the 
imperfect. — διαφθείροι : potential 
optative. — εἰ μὴ apa: unless, for- 
sooth. Cf. εἰ μὴ ἄρα δεινὸν καλοῦσιν 
οὗτοι λέγειν τὸν τἀληθῆ λέγοντα unless, 
Fforsooth, these gentlemen call him 
eloquent who speaks the truth Plato 
Apol. 17 8. 


18 EENO®ONTOS ATTOMNHMONEYMATA A. 2. 


“᾿Αλλὰ νὴ Alia,” ὁ κατήγορος ἔφη, “ ὑπερορᾶν ἐποίει τῶν 9 
«οκαθεστώτων νόμων τοὺς συνόντας, λέγων ὡς μῶρον εἴη 
A ¥ 
TOUS μὲν τῆς πόλεως ἄρχοντας ἀπὸ κυάμου καθιστάναι, 
Tn δὲ μηδένα θέλ ησθ D μηδὲ 
κυβερνήτῃ δὲ μηδένα θέλειν χρῆσθαι κυαμευτῷ μηδὲ 
, δ᾽ ἢ ΤῊΝ A 5° 9 9 + la) ἃ “A 
τέκτονι μηὸ αὐλητῇ μηὸ ἐπ᾽ ἄλλα τοιαῦτα, ἃ πολλῷ 
ὅλ. Ψ ΄΄ ε ’ a) “ Ν \ 
ἐλάττονας βλάβας αμαρτανόμενα ποιεῖ τῶν περὶ τὴν 
45 πόλιν ἁμαρτανομένων -" τοὺς δὲ τοιούτους λόγους ἐπαίρειν 
ἔφη τοὺς νέους καταφρονεῖν τῆς καθεστώσης πολιτείας 
καὶ ποιεῖν βιαίους. ἐγὼ δ᾽ οἶμαι τοὺς φρόνησιν ἀσκοῦν- 10 
τας καὶ νομίζοντας ἱκανοὺς ἔσεσθαι τὰ συμφέροντα 
΄, ‘ ’ ν , / 2Q 7 
διδάσκειν τοὺς πολίτας ἥκιστα γίγνεσθαι βιαίους, εἰδό- 
δ0 ν Ἂ Ν βί , » a] Ν , ὃ ; ὃ Ἀ 
τας ὅτι τῇ μὲν βίᾳ πρόσεισιν ἔχθραι καὶ κίνδυνοι, διὰ 
A A ’ 3 , Ν A 7 5 Ν ’ 
δὲ τοῦ πείθειν ἀκινδύνως τε καὶ μετὰ φιλίας ταὐτὰ γίγνε- 
ε Ν Ν ’ ε 9 dh A 
οἱ μὲν yap βιασθέντες ws ἀφαιρεθέντες μισοῦσιν, 
οἱ δὲ πεισθέντες ὡς κεχαρισμένοι φιλοῦσιν. 


ται. 

οὔκουν τῶν 

φ ’ὕ 5 , © iC θ Ἰλλὰ ἴω. 5 A » 
ρόνησιν ἀσκούντων τὸ βιάζεσθαι, ἀλλὰ τῶν ἰσχὺν ἄνευ 


9. ἀλλὰ νὴ Ala: often used to 
introduce an objection. For the use 
of the advs. νή and μά in swearing, 
see 6. 1067; H. 723. — 6 κατήγορος : 
possibly the author of a κατηγορία 
Σωκράτους, written after Socrates’s 
death. See Dakyns, Works of Xeno- 
phon Vol. III, Part I, pp. xxxviii ff. 
--ἔφη: in direct discourse usually 
before its subj., as in 12. — ὑπερορᾶν 
τῶν νόμων : the gen. after the analogy 
of ἀμελεῖν Tivos. The acc. is more 
‘usual, as ini. 3. 4, 4. 10. ----ἀπὸ κυά- 
μου : by the bean. The Athenians used 
black and white beans in selecting cer- 
tain officials by lot; hence κυαμευτός is 
equivalent to κληρωτός or αἱρετός. 

10. Xenophon cannot wholly re- 
fute the charge that the teachings of 
Socrates weakened public respect for 


existing laws; so he blends it with 
the other charge ποιεῖν βιαίους, Main- 
taining that while Socrates criticised 
certain governmental institutions, his 
criticism could never lead to acts of 
violence. — tos φρόνησιν ἀσκοῦν- 
tas: those who cultivate practical 
wisdom. —Ta& συμφέροντα: as in i. 1. 
3. For the double ace., see G. 1069; 
H. 724. — τοὺς πολίτας : their fellow- 
citizens.—eld6ras: because they know. 
— ot μὲν γὰρ βιασθέντες κτλ. : for men 
who have suffered violence are filled 
with hatred, feeling that they have been 
robbed. For the thought, cf. Aesop’s 
fable of the Wind and the Sun.— κεχα- 
ρισμένοι : beneficiis affecti. — 
οὔκουν: declarative negation. — τῶν 
ἀσκούντων: pred. gen.of characteristic, 
--τὸ τοιαῦτα πράττειν: ͵.6. τὸ βιάζεσθαι. 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA I. 2. 


3 ’ὔ Fi Ν A 
δ γνώμης ἐχόντων TO τοιαῦτα πράττειν ἐστίν. 


19 


ἀλλὰ μὴν 11 


καὶ συμμάχων ὃ μὲν βιάζεσθαι τολμῶν δέοιτ᾽ ἂν οὐκ 
ae ε δὲ (0 ὃ , 10 Lae Χ Ν , 
ὀλίγων, ὁ ὃὲ πείθειν δυνάμενος οὐδενός: Kal yap μόνος 


ἡγοῖτ᾽ ἂν δύνασθαι πείθειν. 


A 4 Ἁ ~ 
Kat φονεύειν δὲ τοῖς τοιού- 


τοις ἥκιστα συμβαίνει: τίς γὰρ ἀποκτεῖναί τινα βούλοιτ᾽ 
60 ἂν μᾶλλον ἢ ζῶντι πειθομένῳ χρῆσθαι; τὸ 

«᾿Αλλ᾽, ἔφη γε ὁ κατήγορος, “ Σωκράτει ὁμιλητὰ 12 
γενομένω Κριτίας τε καὶ ᾿Αλκιβιάδης πλεῖστα κακὰ τὴν 


11. ἀλλὰ μήν : as in 4, i. 1. 6. --- 
᾿ συμμάχων : for the gen. with verbs of 
wanting, see G. 1112; H. 743. — οὐκ 
ὀλίγων: ‘litotes’; the position also 
helps the emphasis. — μόνος : by him- 
861. ---- ἥκιστα συμβαίνει : it least of 
all occurs, a strong negation. — ζῶντι 
πειθομένῳ χρῆσθαι: ‘to have his 
faithful service while living.’’ For the 
pred. dat. with χράομαι, see H. 777 a. 

12-48. The fact that Alcibiades 
and Critias wrought great evil in the 
state should not be laid to the account 
of Socrates. They were impelled by 
measureless ambition and lust for 
power ; and in Socrates they only 
sought a man from whom they could 
learn the art of persuasion, so as to 
win thereby positions of political 
influence. But they sufficiently showed 
in the sequel that they had not learned 
to imitate the character and life of 
their teacher. Socrates did not fail 
to set before them the attractions of a 
virtuous life; and, in fact, so long as 
they remained with him, they showed 
moderation. But virtue must be prac- 
ticed to be retained ; and they quickly 
᾿ς fell a prey to all manner of tempta- 
tions after leaving Socrates. For this 
he is not to be held responsible, the less 


so as he reproached them severely for 
their unworthy conduct, — incurring 
thereby the hate of Critias, as he later 
had cause to know. Thus they only 
followed their own natural bent after 
leaving Socrates; while many other 
friends of Socrates remained true 
through life to the principles of virtue 
which they had learned from him. 

12. ἔφη ye: with marked empha- 
sis, like Mark Antony’s ‘ But Brutus 
says he was ambitious.’ — γενομένω : 
the κατήγορος seems to insinuate a 
causal, as well as a temporal, force 
of the participle; post hoc, prop- 
ter hoc. —Kopurtas: son of Callaes- 
chrus, was one of the thirty men 
who were placed in power at Athens 
(by the aid of the victorious Lacedae- 
monians) at the close of the Pelopon- 
nesian war (404 B.c.). He took a 
prominent part in the cruelties prac- 
ticed by the Thirty, and fell in the 
final conflicts with the Liberators 
under Thrasybulus. He had asso- 
ciated, asa young man, with Socrates 
and Gorgias of Leontini, and was a 
poet and dramatist of some repute. 
For an account of his activity, see 
Hell. ii. 3. 11 ff. — ᾿Αλκιβιάδης : son of 
Clinias, born at Athens about 450x.c. ; 


20 EENO®ONTOS ATIOMNHMONEYMATA A. 2. 


, 3 , id \ Ν A 3 ἈΦ ’ 
πόλιν ἐποιησάτην. Kpitias μὲν γὰρ τῶν ev Th ὀλιγαρχίᾳ 
πάντων κλεπτίστατός τε καὶ βιαιότατος καὶ φονικώτατος 


65 ἐγένετο, ᾿Αλκιβιάδης δὲ αὖ τῶν ἐν τῇ δημοκρατίᾳ πάντων 


9 , , wg - ’ \ , ” 
ἀκρατέστατός τε Kal ὑβριστότατος Kal βιαιότατος. 


ἐγὼ 13 


3 > , Ν 3 »)} Ν / 3 ’ > 
δ᾽, εἰ μέν τι κακὸν ἐκείνω THY πόλιν ἐποιησάτην, οὐκ 


59 ’ὔ Ἂ \ Ν ’ὔ ᾽’ὕ 3 “ 
ἀπολογήσομαι: τὴν δὲ προς Σωκράτην συνουσιαν αὕτοιν 


ὡς ἐγένετο διηγήσομαι. ἐγενέσθην μὲν γὰρ δὴ τὼ avdpe 14 


γο τούτω φύσει φιλοτιμοτάτω πάντων ᾿Αθηναίων, βουλομένω 
μ ἢ μ 


,ὕ ἘΞ. la , \ , 
TE TAVTA δι εαὐυτῶν πράττεσθαι και πάντων ὀνομαστο- 


’ ἐφ μ4 Ν Ψ 9 B= 2 id \ 
τάτω γενέσθαι: ἤδεσαν δὲ Σωκράτην ἀπ᾽ ἐλαχίστων μὲν 


χρημάτων αὐταρκέστατα ζῶντα, τῶν ἡδονῷν δὲ πασῶν 


he was distinguished for his personal 
beauty, talents, and wealth, and was 
notorious for his reckless profligacy. 
Socrates took great interest in him, 
and seems in return to have been re- 
spected and loved by him. At the 
siege of Potidaea (432 B.c.) Socrates 
saved his life, a service which Alci- 
biades returned by aiding Socrates 
at the battle of Delium (424 B.c.). 
For his connection with the Sicilian 
expedition (415 B.c.), see Thuc. vi, 
passim. Plutarch brackets him with 
Coriolanus in the Parallel Lives. — 
τὴν πόλιν: for the double acc., see 
G. 1073; H. 725 a. —év τῇ ὀλιγαρχίᾳ: 
i.e. in 404 8.c., when the Thirty, with 
Critias at their head, were in power 
at Athens. Cf. Hell. ii. 3. 11 ff. See 
on νομοθέτης 31. Aeschines (Contra 
Timarchum 178) says, with exaggera- 
tion, ἔπειτ᾽ ὑμεῖς, ὦ ᾿Αθηναῖοι, Σωκράτη 
μὲν τὸν σοφιστὴν ἀπεκτείνατε, ὅτι Κρι- 
τίαν ἐφάνη πεπαιδευκώς, ἕνα τῶν τριά- 
κοντα τῶν τὸν δῆμον καταλυσάντων (who 
“ overthrew the democracy). — κλεπτί- 
στατος, βιαιότατος : 850, in ii. 6. 24, 


χρήματά τε κλέπτειν καὶ βιάζεσθαι 
ἀνθρώπους are mentioned as low 
motives for attaining power in the 
state. —év τῇ δημοκρατίᾳ : refers to 
the public and private life of Alci- 
biades, down to his return to the 
army at Samos in 411. See Grote, 
Hist. of Greece, ce. lv, Ixiii. 

13. εἰ ἐποιησάτην : for the past 
supposition assumed as real (a simply 
logical cond.), see G. 1890; H. 893. 
--- συνουσίαν : ‘prolepsis.? Cf. ‘I 
knew thee, that thou art a hard 
man’ Matt. xxv. 24. 

14. ἐγενέσθην μέν : corresponds to 
ἤδεσαν δέ in the following sentence. 
In this case, μέν and δέ will scarcely 
be over-translated by on the one hand, 
on the other. —8q: ‘‘as is known,”’ 
almost equivalent to our colloquial 
‘you know.’ --- ἤδεσαν : changes from 
dual to pl. and vice versa, in the same 
sent.,arecommon. G. 903; H. 634. 
Cf. 16, 18, 33; Hell. iv. 4. 7.—tavra: 
for the supplementary participle in 


. indirect discourse, see on i. 1. 5.— 


ἡδονῶν : equivalent to ἐπιθυμιῶν, the 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA 1. 2. 21] 


3 / Ν A de ὃ X , 9. τ A 
ἐγκρατέστατον ὄντα, τοῖς δὲ διαλεγομένοις αὐτῷ πᾶσι 
75 χρώμενον ἐν τοῖς λόγοις ὅπως βούλοιτο. ταῦτα δὲ ὁρῶντε 15 
καὶ ὄντε οἵω προείρησθον, πότερόν τις αὐτὼ φῇ τοῦ βίου 
τοῦ Σωκράτους ἐπιθυμήσαντε καὶ τῆς σωφροσύνης ὴν 
ἐκεῖνος εἶχεν, ὀρέξασθαι τῆς ὁμιλίας αὐτοῦ, ἢ νομίσαντε, 
εἰ ὁμιλησαίτην ἐκείνῳ, γενέσθαι ἂν ἱκανωτάτω λέγειν τε 
A A la A 
80 Καὶ πράττειν; ἐγὼ μὲν yap ἡγοῦμαι, θεοῦ διδόντος αὐτοῖν 16 
Xa A 4 Ν , ν A , CLP Δ 
ἢ ζῆν ὅλον τὸν βίον ὠσπερ ζῶντα Σωκράτην ἑώρων, ἢ 


τεθνάναι, ἑλέσθαι ἂν μᾶλλον αὐτὼ τεθνάναι. 


δήλω δ᾽ 


3 4 3 Ὧν 3 , ε \ , v4 

ἐγενέσθην ἐξ ὧν ἐπραξάτην: ws yap τάχιστα κρείττονε 
τῶν συγγιγνομένων ἡγησάσθην εἶναι, εὐθὺς ἀποπηδή- 
85 σαντε Σωκράτους ἐπραττέτην τὰ πολιτικά, ὧνπερ ἕνεκα 


Σωκράτους ὠρεχθήτην. 


¥ = » ΕἸ Ν A Ψ 3 A \ 
Iows οὖν εἴποι τις ἄν πρὸς ταῦτα, ὅτι ἐχρὴν TOV17 
Σωκράτην μὴ πρότερον τὰ πολιτικὰ διδάσκειν τοὺς 


x A 
συνόντας ἢ σωφρονεῖν. 


object of desire being substituted 
for the desire itself. Cf. 23.— 
χρώμενον : ‘influenced.’’— βούλοιτο : 
for the opt., see on μέλλοι i, 1.10. 

15. ὁρῶντε, ὄντε: accs. agreeing 
with αὐτώ, and having a causal force. 
— φῇ : interr. subjunctive. G. 1359; 
H. 866,3c. To complete the sense, 
φῇ Tis (86. αὐτὼ ὀρέξασθαι τῆς ὁμιλίας 
αὐτοῦ) should be repeated after ἤ. -- 
el ὁμιλησαίτην, γενέσθαι av: for the 
modes in indirect discourse, see 
G. 1494, 1495, 1497; H. 932, 2 (2), 946. 
- ἱκανωτάτω λέγειν τε kal πράττειν : 
very proficient in speech and action. 
The Greeks often used λέγειν καὶ πράτ- 
τειν to indicate the theory and prac- 
tice of an art ora profession. Cf. iv. 
2.6. For the inf. with adjs., see 
G. 1526; H. 952. 


> XN \ Ν “A \ > 
ἐγὼ δὲ πρὸς τοῦτο μὲν οὐκ 


16. θεοῦ διδόντος : if God had of- 
fered. The gen. abs. is equivalent 
to a past unfulfilled condition. For 
the force of the pres. participle, see 
G. 1255; H. 825.— ζῶντα : supplemen- 
tary participle, to be distinguished 
from ζῶντα in 14, which also is a sup- 
plementary participle, but in indirect 
discourse. G. 1582, 1588, 1588; 
H. 982. — ἑλέσθαι ἂν τεθνάναι : ini. 
6. 4, Socrates imputes this same dis- 
position to Antiphon. Const. ἄν with 
ἑλέσθαι. ----δήλω δ᾽ ἐγενέσθην κτλ.: 
‘‘their motives became manifest 
from their actions.’? — ἀποπηδή- 
σαντε, ἐπραττέτην : they leaped away, 
and were busied in. Note the 
change of tense. 

17. σωφρονεῖν : correlative with 
τὰ πολιτικά. --- πρὸς τοῦτο μὲν οὐκ 


22 ΞΕΝΟΦΩΝΤΟΣ ΑΠΟΜΝΗΜΟΝΕΎΜΑΤΑ A, 2. 


90 ἀντιλέγω: πάντας δὲ τοὺς διδάσκοντας ὁρῶ αὑτοὺς 
δεικνύντας τε τοῖς μανθάνουσιν, ἧπερ αὐτοὶ ποιοῦσιν ἃ 
διδάσκουσι, καὶ τῷ λόγῳ προσβιβάζοντας. οἶδα δὲ καὶ 
Σωκράτην δεικνύντα τοῖς συνοῦσιν ἑαυτὸν καλὸν κἀγαθὸν 
ὄντα καὶ διαλεγόμενον κάλλιστα περὶ ἀρετῆς καὶ τῶν 

9% ἄλλων ἀνθρωπίνων. οἶδα δὲ κἀκείνω σωφρονοῦντε ἔστε! 18 

Σωκράτει συνήστην, οὐ φοβουμένω μὴ ζημιοῖντο ἢ 

παίοιντο ὑπὸ Σωκράτους, ἀλλ᾽ οἰομένω τότε κράτιστον 

εἶναι τοῦτο πράττειν. ΄σ 
Ἴσως οὖν εἴποιεν av πολλοὶ τῶν φασκόντων φιλο- 19 

100 σοφεῖν, ὅτι οὐκ ἄν ποτε 6 δίκαιος ἄδικος γένοιτο, οὐδὲ 
ὁ σώφρων ὑβριστής, οὐδὲ ἄλλο οὐδὲν ὧν μάθησίς ἐστιν, 
ὁ μαθὼν ἀνεπιστήμων ἄν ποτε γένοιτο. ἐγὼ δὲ περὶ 
τούτων οὐχ οὕτω γιγνώσκω: ὁρῶ γάρ, ὥσπερ τὰ τοῦ 
σώματος Epya τοὺς μὴ τὰ σώματα ἀσκοῦντας οὐ δυναμέ. 

105 vous ποιεῖν, οὕτω καὶ τὰ τῆς ψυχῆς ἔργα τοὺς μὴ τὴν 


ἀντιλέγω κτλ.: “1 do not deny that 
this was the duty of Socrates; but I 
claim that he actually did lead his 
friends to virtue through his precepts 
and example.’’ Xenophon postpones 
the formal refutation of the charge 
here suggested to iv. 3. 1 ff., where 
he shows that Socrates strove to se- 
cure for his friends a firm founda- 
tion in morals, before advising them 
to enter public life. — προβιβάζοντας : 
86. αὐτοὺς (τοὺς μανθάνοντας) as Object. 
— δεικνύντας, δεικνύντα : for the first, 
cf. ζῶντα in 16; for the second, 
cf. ζῶντα in 14. — rdv ἄλλων ἀνθρω- 
aivev: not different in meaning from 
τῶν ἀνθρωπείων in i. τ. 16. 

18. κἀκείνω : i.e. Critias and Al- 
- cibiades. — συνήστην, ζημιοῖντο : for 
the change of number, see on 14, 


and for the opt. in clauses express- 
ing apprehension, see G. 13878; 
H. 887.— φοβουμένω : causal. 

19. τῶν φασκόντων φιλοσοφεῖν : 
refers to the Sophists. φάσκων often 
suggests the idea of alleging, pre- 
tending. For the form, see G. 812; 
H. 481 a. — ἄλλο οὐδέν: best const. 
as the obj. of the trans. phrase 
H. 7138. Cf. 
ἐπιστήμονες ἦσαν τὰ προσήκοντα they 
were acquainted with their duty Cyr. 
iii. 3. 9. —dv: with antec. omitted. 
G. 1026; H. 996. —6 μαθών: he who 
has once learned it. —yvyvacke: 
think, judge. — ὥσπερ ta... δυνα- 
μένους ποιεῖν: the const. of the 
subord. clause is attracted to that 
of the main clause. — ἔργα : obj. of 
ποιεῖν, to be supplied with δυναμένους. 


ἀνεπιστήμων γένοιτο. 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA I. 2. 


23 


A 5 K A 9 ὃ , 4 ¥ Ν ἃ ὃ A 4 
ψυχὴν ασκουντοας OV υναμέενους OUTE Yop a Et TT Pat- 


Y a PS oe , 
τειν, οὔτε ὧν Set ἀπέχεσθαι δύνανται. 


ὃ Ν A \ can 
LO Και TOUS VLELS 20 


4 xX 5 - ἐς A nw 
οὗ πατέρες, κἂν ὦσι σώφρονες, ὁμως ἀπὸ τῶν πονηρῶν 
3 , » ε \ \ la A 
ἀνθρώπων εἴργουσιν, ὡς THY μὲν TOV χρηστῶν ὁμιλίαν 

» a A A A A 
l0acKkynow οὖσαν τῆς ἀρετῆς, τὴν δὲ τῶν πονηρῶν κατά- 


λυσιν. 


a de Ν a ΣΎ ΟΡ 2 
μαρτυρεῖ 0€ Kal τῶν ποιητῶν ὁ TE λέγων 


“ἐσθλῶν μὲν γὰρ am ἐσθλὰ διδάξεαι: ἣν δὲ κακοῖσι 
συμμίσγῃς, ἀπολεῖς καὶ τὸν ἐόντα νόον," 


τ. , 
καὶ ὁ λέγων 


115 “αὐτὰρ ἀνὴρ ἀγαθὸς τοτὲ μὲν κακός, ἄλλοτε δ᾽ ἐσθλός." 


κἀγὼ δὲ μαρτυρῶ τούτοις: ὁρῶ γάρ, ὥσπερ τῶν ἐν μέτρῳϑι 

πεποιημένων ἐπῶν τοὺς μὴ μελετῶντας ἐπιλανθανομένους, 
nd Ν a Ἂ A > “ ΄ 

οὕτω καὶ τῶν διδασκαλικῶν λόγων τοῖς ἀμελοῦσι λήθην 


ἐγγιγνομένην. 


20. διό [διὰ 8]: for which reason. 
— ὡς ὁμιλίαν οὖσαν : for the acc. abs., 
see ON ὡς προσημαίνοντος i. 1. 4, and 
G. 1570; H. 974. --ἐ σθλῶν κτλ. : 
these verses, forming an elegiac dis- 
tich, are from Theognis, a gnomic 
poet of Megara, who flourished about 
530 B.c., and are Nos. 35 and 36 of 
his 1400 extant verses; for which, 
see Bergk’s Anthologia Lyrica and 
Poetae Lyrici Graeci. The sympa- 
thies and tendencies of Theognis were 
all aristocratic ; his ἐσθλοί were the 
. nobles, and his κακοί the common 
people: but his sententious wisdom 
lent itself readily to quotation, and 
his poetry was popular in Attica. 
This couplet is quoted by Socrates 
(Sym. ii. 4) in answer to the question 


Ψ \ ἴω la ’ 3 ’ὔ 
ὅταν δὲ τῶν νουθετικῶν λόγων ἐπιλα- 
120 θηταί τις, ἐπιλέλησται καὶ ὧν ἡ ψυχὴ πάσχουσα τῆς 


as to whence καλοκἀγαθία could be 
learned ; and again (Plato Meno 95 p) 
as proof that virtue can be learned. 
For the meter, see G. 1670, 1671; 
H. 1101. --- αὐτὰρ ἀνὴρ κτλ.: the au- 
thor of this verse is unknown. It is 
quoted by Plato (Prot. 544 p) in con- 
firmation of the assertion τῷ μὲν yap 
ἐσθλῷ ἐγχωρεῖ κακῷ γενέσθαι for it is 
possible for the good man to become a 
wicked one. 

21. womep... ἐπιλανθανομένους : 
for the attraction, cf. 19. — ἐν μέτρῳ 
πεποιημένων ἐπῶν : poetry. ἐπῶν 15 obj. 
of ἐπιλανθανομένους. ---- διδασκαλικῶν : 
instructive.—voverikav :admonitory. 
--- ἐπιλέλησται κτλ. : he has forgotten 
also the frame of mind in which his 
soul once longed for virtue. — ὧν : i.e. 


24 EENO®QNTOS ATITOMNHMONEYMATA A. 2. | 


σωφροσύνης ἐπεθύμει: τούτων δ᾽ ἐπιλαθόμενον οὐδὲν 
θαυμαστὸν καὶ τῆς σωφροσύνης ἐπιλαθέσθαι. ὁρῶ δὲ: 
καὶ τοὺς εἰς φιλοποσίαν προαχθέντας καὶ τοὺς εἰς ἔρωτας 
ἐγκυλισθέντας ἧττον δυναμένους τῶν τε δεόντων ἐπιμε- 
~ ἃ ἰωὶ Ν ὃ ’ 3 4 θ \ Ν \ 
125 Neto Oar Kal τῶν μὴ ὁεοντων ἀπεχέεσθαι: πολλοὶ yap και 
, ὃ 4 (ὃ θ Ά, a > , 
χρημάτων δυνάμενοι φείδεσθαι πρὶν ἐρᾶν, ἐρασθέντες 
οὐκέτι δύνανται: καὶ τὰ χρήματα καταναλώσαντες, ὧν 
πρόσθεν ἀπείχοντο κερδῶν αἰσχρὰ νομίζοντες εἶναι, τού- 
των οὐκ ἀπέχονται. πῶς οὖν οὐκ ἐνδέχεται σωφρονή- 28 
, Ὁ Ν A \ 3 / 
130 σαντα πρόσθεν αὖθις μὴ σωφρονεῖν καὶ δίκαια δυνηθέντα 
πράττειν αὖθις ἀδυνατεῖν; πάντα μὲν οὖν ἔμοιγε δοκεῖ 
Ν A Ν Ν 3 Ν 9 \ 3S 5 ν Ν 
τὰ καλὰ καὶ τὰ ἀγαθὰ ἀσκητὰ εἶναι, οὐχ ἥκιστα δὲ 
σωφροσύνη: ἐν τῷ γὰρ αὐτῷ σώματι συμπεφυτευμέναι 
A A ε ε \ 4 5 Ν Ν A > Ν 
τῇ ψυχῇ αἱ ἡδοναὶ πείθουσιν αὐτὴν μὴ σωφρονεῖν, ἀλλὰ 
186 τὴν ταχίστην ἑαυταῖς τε καὶ τῷ σώματι χαρίζεσθαι. 
Καὶ Κριτίας δὴ καὶ ᾿Αλκιβιάδης, ἕως μὲν Σωκράτει 
συνήστην, ἐδυνάσθην, ἐκείνῳ χρωμένω συμμάχῳ, τῶν 
\ A 5 ἴω A 5 ’ 3 > ’ 
μὴ καλῶν ἐπιθυμιῶν κρατεῖν: ἐκείνου δ᾽ ἀπαλλαγέντε, 


24 


τούτων ἅ, the latter to be closely con- 
nected with πάσχουσα. For the case 
of the rel., see G. 1082; H. 996 a (2). 

22. προαχθέντας : swept away. 
mapaxdévras would mean led aside. 
-- ἔρωτας : concrete, love affairs. — 
ἧττον δυναμένους : sc. than they were 
before surrendering to these pas- 
sions. —KepSav: incorporated in the 
rel. sentence. G. 1037; H. 995. — 
νομίζοντες : causal. — οὐκ : we might 
expect οὐκέτι. 

23. πῶς οὖν οὐκ ἐνδέχεται: how 
then is it not possible? The indic. 
strengthens the rhetorical force of 
‘the question. Cf. πῶς οὐκ ἐνόμιζεν i. 
1. ὃ. --- ἀσκητὰ εἶναι : to be capable of 


attainment by practice. —ovy ἥκιστα: 
most of all, ‘litotes.’ Cf. οὐκ ἀφανής 


i, I. 2, od τοὺς χειρίστους i. 2. 82, οὐκ 


ὀλίγα iv. 2. 12, οὐδὲν ἧττον iii. 7. 4. — 
σωφροσύνη : without the article. So 
often abstract nouns, regarded as 
simple conceptions, e.g., κάλλος 24, 
nBnv ii. τ. 21, wpa ii. 1. 22, ἀρετή iv. 
I. 2, σοφία iv. 6. 7. — ἡδοναί: vo- 
luptates, the passions. Cf. 14.— 
πείθουσιν : tentative present. Cf. δι- 
δόντος 16. — τὴν ταχίστην : sc. ὁδόν. 
For the adv. acc., see G. 1060; 
H. 719. —éavrats: to them, i.e. ταῖς 
ἡδοναῖς. See on ἑαυτῷ 3. 

24. δή: 80, then, returning to the 
discussion in 12-16. — συμμάχῳ: as 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA 1. 2. 25 


Κριτίας μὲν φυγὼν εἰς Oerrahiay ἐκεῖ συνὴν ἀνθρώποις 
140 ἀνομίᾳ μᾶλλον ἢ δικαιοσύνῃ χρωμένοις, ᾿Αλκιβιάδης δ᾽ 
αὖ διὰ μὲν κάλλος ὑπὸ πολλῶν καὶ σεμνῶν γυναικῶν 
“θηρώμενος, διὰ δὲ δύναμιν τὴν ἐν τῇ πόλει καὶ τοῖς συμ- 
μάχοις ὑπὸ πολλῶν καὶ δυνατῶν [κολακεύειν] ἀνθρώπων 
διαθρυπτόμενος, ὑπὸ δὲ τοῦ δήμου τιμώμενος καὶ ῥᾳδίως 
146 πρωτεύων, ὥσπερ οἱ τῶν γυμνικῶν ἀγώνων ἀθληταὶ 
ῥᾳδίως πρωτεύοντες ἀμελοῦσι τῆς ἀσκήσεως, οὕτω κἀκεῖ- 
νος ἠμέλησεν αὑτοῦ. τοιούτων δὲ συμβάντων αὐτοῖν, 
καὶ ὠγκωμένω μὲν ἐπὶ γένει, ἐπηρμένω δ᾽ ἐπὶ πλούτῳ, 
πεφυσημένω δ᾽ ἐπὶ δυνάμει, διατεθρυμμένω δὲ ὑπὸ πολ- 
1560 λῶν ἀνθρώπων, ἐπὶ δὲ πᾶσι τούτοις [διεφθαρμένω] καὶ 
πολὺν χρόνον ἀπὸ Σωκράτους γεγονότε, τί θαυμαστὸν εἰ 
ὑπερηφάνω ἐγενέσθην; εἶτα, εἰ μέν τι ἐπλημμελησάτην, 
τούτου Σωκράτην ὁ κατήγορος αἰτιᾶται ; ὅτι δὲ νέω ὄντε 
αὐτώ, ἡνίκα καὶ ἀγνωμονεστάτω καὶ ἀκρατεστάτω εἰκὸς 
155 εἶναι, Σωκράτης παρέσχε σώφρονε, οὐδενὸς ἐπαίνου δοκεῖ 


25. αὐτοῖν: dative. — Notice the 
different metaphors employed. ὀγ- 
κόω is lit. swell, as of a tumor; ἐπαίρω 
lift up, φυσάω puff up, as of a 
bladder or bellows; διαθρύπτω break 
down, hence enervate; διαφθείρω 


a helper. — φυγών : in technical sense, 
being exiled. In 407 B.c., Critias 
was banished from Athens, and 
betook himself to the Thessalians, 
who had an undesirable reputation 
for license and immorality (cf. ἐκεὶ 


γὰρ πλείστη ἀταξία καὶ ἀκολασία Plato 
Crito ὅ8 p). He did not return till 
after the disaster of Aegospotami, 
405 B.c. Cf. Hell. ii. 3. 36; Grote, 
Hist. of Greece, c. xv. — σεμνῶν : 
highborn. — θηρώμενος : a common 
metaphor. — κολακεύειν: prob. an 
interpolation to explain δυνατῶν. 
— κἀκεῖνος: renewal of the remote 
subj.. (᾿Αλκιβιάδης) for the sake of 
the contrast to ἀθληταί. Cf. iv. 
2. 25. 


corrupt. —émi δὲ πᾶσι τούτοις : and 
in addition to all this. — τ(θαυμαστόν: 
why is it surprising ? — εἰ ἐγενέσθην : 
for the cond. in causal sense, see on 
1 Sy 

26. ἐπλημμελησάτην: went wrong. 
For the cond., see on ἐποιησάτην 13, 
and obs. that here there is also a 
causal force. —rovrov: for the gen. of 
cause, see G. 1126; H. 744. — ἡνίκα: 
at an age when. —elkds: sc. ἐστί. ---- 
δοκεῖ: 80, ὁ Σωκράτης. 


26 


26 EENO®QNTOS AITOMNHMONEYMATA A. 2. 


3 Som ἄξιος εἶναι; οὐ μὴν τά γε ἄλλα οὕτω κρίνε- 
τῷ κατηγόρῳ ἄξιος εἶναι; οὐ μὴ Ύ α οὕτω κρίν 


ται" τίς μὲν γὰρ αὐλητής, τίς δὲ κιθαριστής, τίς δὲ ἄλλος 27 


’ ε Ν 7 Ν , 28 Ν 
διδάσκαλος ἱκανοὺς ποιήσας τοὺς μαθητάς, ἐὰν πρὸς 
Ψ 3 ’ ΄, fe a, Ψ , , 
ἄλλους ἐλθόντες χείρους φανῶσιν, αἰτίαν ἔχει τούτου; τίς 


A , aN ε a > la) ὃ ’ὔὕ nx 
160 δὲ TATHP, ἐαν O TALS AVTOV συν ιατρίβων Τῳ σωφρονῇῃ, 


165 


170 


/ 
ὕστερον δὲ ἄλλῳ τῳ συγγενόμενος πονηρὸς γένηται, τὸν 
ἴω > σ x ~ 
πρόσθεν αἰτιᾶται, ἀλλ᾽ οὐχ ὅσῳ ἄν παρὰ τῷ ὑστέρῳ 
χείρων φαίνηται, τοσούτῳ μᾶλλον ἐπαινεῖ τὸν πρότερον; 
¢ Ν A A 
ἀλλ᾽ οἵ ye πατέρες αὐτοὶ συνόντες τοῖς υἱέσι, τῶν παίδων 
4 5 Wenig » 3N > ‘ “ 
πλημμελούντων, οὐκ αἰτίαν ἔχουσιν, ἐὰν αὐτοὶ σωφρονῶ- 
9 \ \ , ΄, = , 9 \ 
σιν. οὕτω δὲ καὶ Σωκράτην δίκαιον ἣν κρίνειν: εἰ μὲν 
5% 3 ΄ AX + Ep ὁ x 2Q 7 Ἂς > 
αὐτὸς ἐποίει τι φαῦλον, εἰκότως ἂν ἐδόκει πονηρὸς εἶναι" 
9 9 4: ἃς A , A x , A 9 
εἰ δ᾽ αὐτὸς σωφρονῶν διετέλει, πῶς ἂν δικαίως τῆς οὐκ 
ἐνούσης αὐτῷ κακίας αἰτίαν ἔχοι ; 
3 > > Ν Ν . potas > Ν. “A 9 4 
Αλλ᾽ εἰ καὶ μηδὲν αὐτὸς πονηρὸν ποιῶν ἐκείνους 
A a x 
φαῦλα πράττοντας ὁρῶν ἐπήνει, δικαίως ἂν ἐπιτιμῷτο. 


28 


29 


, Ν ’ > ΄, 2 > / 2 κα 
Κριτίαν μὲν τοίνυν αἰσθανόμενος ἐρῶντα Ἐῤθυδήμον καὶ 


ἴω A Ud e Ν Ν 5 , “A 
πειρῶντα χρῆσθαι καθάπερ ot πρὸς τὰ ἀφροδίσια τῶν 


27. οὐμήν: neque vero. Cf. πλημμελούντων: with conditional 


i. 2. 5. — αὐλητής : master of the flute. 
—édav φανῶσιν : for the pres. general 
supposition, see G. 13893; H. 894. — 


αἰτίαν ἔχει : is διαηιοᾶ. --- τούτου : as” 


in 20. --- τὸν πρόσθεν : for the adv. as 
adj., see G. 952; Η. 600. ---- ἀλλ᾽ οὐχ 
ὅσῳ ἄν κτλ.: ‘‘on the contrary, does 
he not rather award praise to the 
first teacher, just in proportion as 
his son seems to have deteriorated 
while in the society of the second ἢ" 
-- ὅσῳ, τοσούτῳ: for the dat. of 
degree of difference, see G. 1184; 
H. 781. — ἀλλ᾽ ot ye πατέρες αὐτοί: 


“nay, the very fathers themselves. — 


συνόντες : concessive. — τῶν παίδων 


force. —éav: provided. 

28. el ἐποίει, av ἐδόκει: see on 
ἐδόκει δ᾽ ἄν, εἰ ἐφαίνετο 1. 1. ὅ. --- εἰ 
σωφρονῶν διετέλει: for the supple- 
mentary participle with διατελέω, see 
G. 1587; H. 981. For the simple 
past supposition (assumed as real), 
see on ἐποιησάτην 13. The unful- 
filled cond. is again returned to in εἰ 
ἐπήνει 29. 

29. Κριτίαν μὲν τοίνυν : the μέν 
(without a correlative δέ, as ini. 1. 1) 
introduces the passage closing with 38. 
τοίνυν marks the transition from the 
previous sentence. — Ev@vSqpov: in 


iv. 2. 1, designated as ὁ καλός. --- 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA 1. 2. 27 


’ > 4 b 4 4 5 4 , 
σωμάτων ἀπολαύοντες, ἀπέτρεπε φάσκων ἀνελεύθερόν τε 
> \ > , 3 ὃ \ a 3 an ἈΝ $308 
175 εἰναι και OV πρέπον AVOPL καλῷ κἀγαθῷ τον ἐρώμενον, 
ἴω ¥ A 
ᾧ βούλεται πολλοῦ ἄξιος φαίνεσθαι, προσαιτεῖν ὥσπερ 
τοὺς πτωχοὺς ἱκετεύοντα καὶ δεόμενον προσδοῦναι, καὶ 
ταῦτα μηδενὸς ἀγαθοῦ. τοῦ δὲ Κριτίου τοῖς τοιούτοις 
οὐχ ὑπακούοντος οὐδὲ ἀποτρεπομένου, λέγεται τὸν Σωκρά- 
180THv, ἄλλων τε πολλῶν παρόντων καὶ τοῦ Εὐθυδήμου, 
3 lal 4 ton “ἃ 5 ~ 7 ’ ε ’ 5 
εἰπεῖν ὅτι ὑϊκὸν αὐτῷ δοκοίη πάσχειν ὁ Κριτίας, ἐπι- 
ἴω > 7 “ ν Ν ν A 
θυμῶν EvOvdyu@ προσκνῆσθαι, ὥσπερ τὰ ὕδια τοῖς 
λίθοις. 


Ψ δ ΠῚ ¢ A , x , \ 
WOTE Καὶ OTE Τῶν Τριάκοντα ὧν νομοθέτης μέτα Χαρι- 


3 e& Ν Ν > Vd Ν 4, ε ’ 
ἐξ ὧν δὴ καὶ ἐμίσει τὸν Σωκράτην ὁ Κριτίας, 


185 λέ 3 ᾽ὕ 3 ’ὔ > “A \ 9 A , 
κλεους εγένετο, απεμνὴημονευσεν αυτῳ και εν TOLS νομοις 
» , , \ ὃ ὃ tas 3 ’ὔ > 4 

ἔγραψε λόγων τέχνὴν μὴ OLOATKELY, ἐπηρεάζων ἐκεινῳ 


ἀπέτρεπε : for the impf. of attempted 
action, see G. 1255; H. 832. — ὥσπερ 
τοὺς πτωχούς: 1.6. ὥσπερ of πτωχοὶ 
προσαιτοῦσι, ἃ ἴοττη of attraction found 
alsoin Latin. Cf. te suspicor iis- 
dem rebus, quibus me ipsum, 
interdum gravius commoveri 
Cic. de Am. i. 1.— προσϑοῦναι : to 
grant also, followed by the part. 
gen. μηδενός. Cf. οὐδεὶς προσδώσει μοι 
σπλάγχνων Ar. Peace111l. For the 
thought, cf. Sym. viii. 22. 

30. τοῦ Κριτίου, τὸν Σωκράτην: 
the arts. in this section seem intended 
to heighten the contrast between the 
persons. Thus far in this chap. 
the proper names have lacked the 
article. 

31. ἐξ ὧν δὴ καὶ ἐμίσει ὁ Kpirias: 
as a result of which, accordingly, 
Critias even hated. This does not 
contradict what is said in 15 and 
47: Critias had a grudge against 
Socrates, yet remained with him un- 


til he thought he had learned enough 
from him. — τῶν τριάκοντα : for the 
pred. gen., see G. 1094, 7; H. 732. 
-- νομοθέτης : in the year 404 B.c., 
the oligarchical party at Athens, 
backed by the all-powerful Spartan 
Lysander, succeeded in having a 
commission of thirty appointed, os- 
tensibly to exercise the ancient func- 
tion of Nomothetae, or revisers of 
the laws. Among these, Critias (see 
on 12), Theramenes, and Charicles 
were the most prominent. The 
Thirty soon usurped all the powers 
of government and inaugurated a 
reign of terror, which lasted for eight 
months, For an account of these 
events, see Grote, Hist. of Greece, 
c.lxv, and Hell. ii. 3, 4.---΄πεμνημόνευ- 
σεν: here in a hostile sense, he remem- 
bered it against him. —déyov τέχνην : 
the art of speaking. The law was 
broad enough to include the conver- 
sational utterances of Socrates. — 


28 


EENO®ONTOS AILTOMNHMONEYMATA A. 2. 


Kal οὐκ ἔχων ὅπῃ ἐπιλάβοιτο, ἀλλὰ τὸ κοινῇ τοῖς φιλο- 


σόφοις ὑπὸ τῶν πολλῶν ἐπιτιμώμενον ἐπιφέρων αὐτῷ 
μωμ ρ ι 


καὶ διαβάλλων πρὸς τοὺς πολλούς. οὐδὲ γὰρ ἔγωγε οὔτε 


φάσκοντος ἀκηκοέναι ἠσθόμην. 


5. Ν ΩΝ ΄ ,ὕ »¥ ἂν ὧν 
190 αὐτὸς τοῦτο πώποτε Σωκράτους ἤκουσα, οὔτ᾽ ἄλλου του 


ἐδήλωσε δέ: ἐπεὶ γὰρ 82 


ε , Ν Ν “A A \ 3 Ν 
οἱ τριάκοντα πολλοὺς μὲν τῶν. πολιτῶν καὶ οὐ τοὺς χει- 


ρίστους ἀπέκτεινον, πολλοὺς δὲ προετρέποντο ἀδικεῖν, 


vg ε ΄ Ἂ» , ε ᾽ > Ψ 
εἶπέ που ὁ Σωκράτης oTt θαυμαστόν οἱ δοκοίη εἶναι εἴ 


’ “~ > 4 Ν Ν Ν Lal 3 4 
195 τις γενόμενος βοῶν ἀγέλης νομεὺς καὶ Tas βοῦς ἐλάττους 


Ν ΄ὔ a A ee / Ν ΄, ἐν 
τε καὶ χείρους ποιῶν μὴ ὁμολογοίη κακὸς βουκόλος εἶναι, 


¥ \ ΄ ¥ , , ΄ 
ετι δὲ θαυμαστότερον €l τις πΤρΟστατηὴς γένομενος πόλεως 


Ν “A ‘\ “4 > ’ Ν ’ Ν 
καὶ ποιῶν τοὺς πολίτας ἐλάττους τε καὶ χείρους μὴ 


3 > » AQ > , A Σ 
αἰσχύνεται μηδ᾽ οἴεται κακὸς εἶναι προστάτης τῆς πόλεως. 


ὅπῃ ἐπιλάβοιτο: howto reachhim. For 
the opt. representing interr. subjv. of 
direct discourse, see G. 1490; H. 932, 
2. ---τὸ κοινῇ... ἐπιτιμώμενον : the 
charge commonly brought by the many 
against philosophers. Acc. to Sym. 
vi. 6; Oec. xi. 3; Ar. Clouds 100 ff. ; 
Plato Apol. 18 Β, this charge was that 
philosophers were a race of busy- 
bodies, who meddled with things in 
‘the heaven above, the earth beneath, 
and the water under the earth’; and 
secondly, that they were jugglers 
with words, making the worse ap- 
pear the better reason. Cf. also ra 
κατὰ πάντων τῶν φιλοσοφούντων πρό- 
χειρα (commonplaces) ταῦτα λέγουσιν, 
ὅτι τὰ μετέωρα (celestial phenomena), 
καὶ τὰ ὑπὸ γῆς, καὶ θεοὺς μὴ νομίζειν, 
καὶ τὸν ἥττω λόγον κρείττω ποιεῖν 
(διδάσκει) Plato Apol. 23 ν. --- γάρ: 
explains the preceding διαβάλλων, 
‘sslander must we call it,’? for. — 
φάσκοντος : seeonl9. For the sup- 


plementary participle, see on οὐδεὶς δὲ 
πώποτε Σωκράτους. τ. 11. ---"σθόμην: 
instead of ἤκουσα, to avoid repetition. 

32. ἐδήλωσε: impers., events - 
showed, that the prohibition was 
aimed at Socrates. Cf. Cyr. vii. 1. 
80. — αὐ τοὺς χειρίστους : see on οὐχ 
ἥκιστα 23. For the comparison of 
the adj., see G. 361, 2; H. 254, 2. — 
ἀδικεῖν : to commit unlawful acts. 
Cf. πολλοῖς πολλὰ προσέταττον βουλό- 
μενοι ὡς πλείστους ἀναπλῆσαι (to in- 
volve) αἰτιῶν Plato Apol. 32 σ. --- εἶπέ 
που: said, I suppose. Xenophon 
vouches for the thoughts, not for 
the words. Seeoni. 1. 1. -- οὗ: for 
the indir. refl. use of the pron., see 
G. 987; H. 685. — - βοῶν ἀγέλης vo- 
μεύς : a comparison perhaps suggested 
by Hom. B 474-483. Cf. iii. 2. 1; 
Plato Gorg. 516 a, B. —el ὁμολογοίη : 
see on ἐθαύμαζε i. 1. 18. --- εἰ αἰσχύνε- 
ται: above, where an imaginary case 
was suggested, the opt. (ὁμολογοίη) 


215 00a.” 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA I. 2. 


29 


Ν ~ Ν ’ 
καὶ ὃ Χαρικλῆς τὸν Σωκράτην τόν τε νόμον ἐδεικνύτην 


ς. A \ A , > , \ ὃ ΄, 
αὐτῷ καὶ τοῖς νέοις ἀπειπέτην μὴ διαλέγεσθαι. 


ὁ δὲ 


: ᾽ὔ > , + ee > 3 , , ¥ 
Σωκράτης ἐπήρετο αὐτὼ εἰ ἐξείη πυνθάνεσθαι, εἴ τι 


ἀγνοοῖτο τῶν προαγορευομένων. 
4 4“ οἱ (a4 , Ν ’ A , 
205 τοίνυν," ἔφη, “παρεσκεύασμαι μὲν πείθεσθαι τοῖς νόμοις - 


τὼ δ᾽ ἐφάτην. s Ἐγὼ 


Ψ Se \ ὃ > » λ ‘0 , A 
OTT@S € μη υ αγνοιαν αὕω τι παρανομήῆσας, TOUTO 


βούλομαι σαφῶς μαθεῖν παρ᾽ ὑμῶν, πότερον τὴν τῶν 
λόγων τέχνην σὺν τοῖς ὀρθῶς λεγομένοις εἶναι νομίζον- 
τες ἢ σὺν τοῖς μὴ ὀρθῶς ἀπέχεσθαι κελεύετε αὐτῆς εἰ 


210 pev γὰρ σὺν τοῖς ὀρθῶς, δῆλον ὅτι ἀφεκτέον ἂν εἴη τοῦ 


ὀρθῶς λέγειν: εἰ δὲ σὺν τοῖς μὴ ὀρθῶς, δῆλον ὅτι πει- 


΄ > A 4 ” > € A 9 Ν ἄντ τὰς 
ρατέον ὀρθῶς λέγειν." καὶ ὁ Χαρικλῆς ὀργισθεὶς αὐτῷ, 
“Ἐπειδή, ἔφη, “@ Σώκρατες, ἀγνοεῖς, τάδε σοι εὐμαθέ. 


3, 4 “A , 9 ἈΝ , 
στερα OVTA προαγορεύομεν, τοῖς νέοις ὁλως μὴ διαλέγε- 


ἀμφίβολον ἢ [ὡς ἄλλο τι 


was used; here, to mark the actual 
fact, the indic. of direct discourse is 
retained. Cf. ii. 6. 4. 

33. καλέσαντες, ἐδεικνύτην : for 
the change in number, see on 14. --- 
τὸν νόμον: 80. τὴν λόγων τέχνην μὴ 
διδάσκειν. ---- μιῇ : for the neg. particle 
with verbs of forbidding, see G. 1615; 
H. 1029. —et ἐξείη : indir. question. 
—el dyvootro: in case he failed to 
understand. —r&v προαγορενομένων : 
‘‘the published injunctions.’’ —ro δ᾽ 
ἐφάτην: and they said yes. For the 
dem. use of the art., see G. 983; 
H. 654 6: and for φημί as an affirm- 
ative answer, cf. the trial-scene of 
Orontas, An. i. 6. 

34. λάθω παρανομήσας : for the 
supplementary participle with λαν- 


ν 
καὶ ὁ Σωκράτης, “ἵνα τοίνυν, ἔφη, “μὴ 
a x \ 
ποιῶ ἢ TA Tponyopevpeva |, 


θάνω, see G. 1586; H. 984. — τὴν τῶν 
λόγων τέχνην: cf. 31. From this 
definite reference, it would seem that 
Socrates knew very well what was 
meant by the prohibition τοῖς νέοις μὴ 
διαλέγεσθαι. --- σὺν τοῖς ὀρθῶς λεγομέ- 
νοις εἶναι: to be associated with right 
teachings. — μὴ ὀρθῶς : sc. λεγομένοις. 
For μή with the participle, see on i. 
1. 9. --- ἀφεκτέον : for the impers. use 
of the verbal in -réos, see on i. 1. 14. 

35. τἀδεεὐμαθέστερα ὄντα: ‘these 
orders in more intelligible terms.’’ 
- ὅλως μὴ διαλέγεσθαι: well illus- 
trates the arrogance of arbitrary 
power. —tva μὴ ἀμφίβολον 7: ‘that 
there may be no question,” lit. that 
it may not be doubtful.—as... 
προηγορευμένα : ‘‘as to the question 


200 ἀπαγγελθέντος δὲ αὐτοῖς τούτου, καλέσαντες 6 TE Κριτίας 33 


36 


30 EENO®ONTOS ATIOMNHMONEYMATA A. 2. 


ε ’ὔ , , ’ὔ ΘΟΕΨΑΆ A ’ὔ , 3 
ὁρίσατέ μοι, μέχρι πόσων ἐτῶν δεῖ νομίζειν νέους εἶναι 
Ν 9 θ , ” » eee ἡ al “a? 3) > 
τοὺς ἀνθρώπους. Kal ὁ Χαρικλῆς, “Οσουπερ," εἶπε, 

“ , , > » ε » , > 
χρόνου βουλεύειν οὐκ ἔξεστιν, ὡς οὔπω φρονίμοις οὖσι: 


« Μηδ᾽ 


27 ee. ”» » ς-ς Ἃ A , , 3. Δὰ 
ἐάν τι ὠνῶμαι,᾽ ἔφη, “ἣν πωλῇ νεώτερος τριάκοντα ἐτῶν, 


A nw 
220 μηδὲ σὺ διαλέγου νεωτέροις τριάκοντα ἐτῶν." 86 
ἔρωμαι ὁπόσου πωλεῖ;" “Ναὶ τά γε τοιαῦτα," ἔφη ὁ Χαρι- 
lal “> ’ὔ 4, 5 , 3» 3 , las 
κλῆς: “ἀλλά τοι σύ γε, ὦ Σώκρατες, εἴωθας εἰδώς, πῶς 
“M 5° 
1) 


3 , > » » ad , 3 “ ΄ » Sa 
225 ἀποκρίνωμαι ovv, ἔφη, “αν Tis με ἐρωτᾷ νέος ἐὰν εἰδῶ, 


» Q A 5 A lal 3. Ἂς 3 Ψ 3) 
ἔχει, τὰ πλεῖστα ἐρωτᾶν: ταῦτα οὖν μὴ ἐρώτα. 


ae A A A x la 
οἷον ποῦ οἰκεῖ Χαρικλῆς ἢ ποῦ ἐστι Κριτίας ;" “Nat τά 
ὁ δὲ Κριτίας: “᾿Αλλὰ 
a 5 ΄, ΄ 3. τὴ θ ” »¥ « ΄ . 5 ΄ κ᾿ 
τῶνδέ τοί σε ἀπέχεσθαι," ἔφη, “ δεήσει, ὦ Σώκρατες, τῶν 


γε τοιαῦτα, ἔφη ὁ Χαρικλῆς. 81 
, A ἴω. nw “" 
σκυτέων καὶ τῶν τεκτόνων καὶ τῶν χαλκέων. καὶ γὰρ οἶμαι 


2380 αὐτοὺς ἤδη κατατετρίφθαι διαθρυλουμένους ὑπὸ σοῦ." 


whether I am acting in violation of 
the injunctions.’’ —épleare: define. 
— μέχρι πόσων ἐτῶν : until what age. 
For πόσων, see on τίσι i. 1. 1. --- νέους : 
predicate. —Scovumep χρόνου : for just 
as long a period. — βουλεύειν : see on 
βουλεύσας i. τ. 18. — ὡς οὔπω φρονί- 
μοις οὖσιν : as not yet having arrived 
at years of discretion. For the parti- 
ciple, see on i. 1. 4. All members 
of the βουλή must be at least thirty 
years of age. See Gardner and 
Jevons, Manual of Greek Antigq., 
δ. ix. 

36. ἐὰν ὠνῶμαι, ἣν πωλῇ: if 1 
wish to purchase, if he offer to sell. 
The pres. implies desired action. 
See on διδόντος 16. For the variant 
forms of the conj., see on i. 2. 2. — 
μηδ᾽ Epwpar: for the interr. subjv., 
see G. 1358; H. 866, 3; and, for 
μηδέ with the interr. subjv. expect- 
ing an affirmative answer, GMT. 293. 


Cf. ph ἀποκρίνωμαι, ἀλλ᾽ ἕτερον εἴπω 
Plato Rep. 337 8. -- εὀἰδώς : conces- 
sive. — πῶς ἔχει : ‘‘the facts of the 
case.’’—Ta πλεῖστα : cognate accusa- 
tive. —éav: provided that, intro- 
duces a second and subord. protasis. 
GMT. 510. —otov: for example. Cf. 
A as 9. 

37. ἀπέχεσθαι δεήσει: if will be 
necessary to keep away from, with 
sarcastic formality. —okutéwv, τεκτό- 
νων, χαλκέων: Socrates, like a greater 
Teacher, sought his illustrations in 
the familiar and homely things of 
daily life, and especially in the handi- 
crafts. Cf. iv. 2. 6, 4.5; also, ἀτέ- 
xvws (actually) ye ἀεὶ σκυτέας τε καὶ 
κναφέας (fullers) καὶ μαγείρους (cooks) 
λέγων καὶ ἰατροὺς οὐδὲν παύει, ὡς περὶ 
τούτων ἡμῖν ὄντα τὸν λόγον Plato Gorg. 
491 a. —Kal γὰρ οἶμαι... ὑπὸ σοῦ: 
for I think that they have become 
worn out, being constantly talked of 


, 
245 τικα. 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA I. 2. 


31 


> ~ 3» ε ’,’ Ν A 
“Οὐκοῦν, ἔφη ὁ Σωκράτης, “Kat τῶν ἑπομένων τούτοις, 


wn ὃ v4 \ me / Ν a) ¥ las , ” 
TOU TE δικαίου καὶ τοῦ ὁσίου Kal τῶν ἀλλων τῶν τοιούτων ; 
\ Ν »3}»)»ΊἨ»Ἥ ε A ἴω 
“Ναὶ μὰ Ai,” ἔφη ὁ Χαρικλῆς, “καὶ τῶν βουκόλων γε: 
> de , Xr A ν Ν Ν Ἀ 3 ’ Ν lal 
εἰ δὲ μή, φυλάττου ὅπως μὴ Kal σὺ ἐλάττους τὰς βοῦς 


235 ποιήσῃς. ἔνθα καὶ δῆλον ἐγένετο ὅτι, ἀπαγγελθέντος 


3 A nw ‘\ “ ἴω , > ͵ὔ ἴω , 
αὐτοῖς τοῦ περὶ τῶν βοῶν λόγου, ὠργίζοντο τῷ Σωκράτει. 


Ola μὲν οὖν ἡ συνουσία ἐγεγόνει Κριτί ὃς Σ 4 
ἴα μὲν οὖν ἡ συν α ἐγεγόνει Κριτίᾳ πρὸς Σωκρά- 


. \ ε > Ν 3 4 ¥ 
τὴν Kal ws εἶχον πρὸς ἀλλήλους, εἴρηται. 


φαίην δ᾽ av 


ἔγωγε μηδενὶ μηδεμίαν εἶναι παίδευσιν παρὰ τοῦ μὴ 


240 ἀρέσκοντος. Κριτίας δὲ καὶ ᾿Αλκιβιάδης οὐκ ἀρέσκοντος 


9 A , ε ’ὔ ἃ 3, ε F 9 ἴω 
αὐτοῖς Σωκράτους ὠμιλησάτην ὃν χρόνον ὠμιλείτην αὐτῷ, 
3 > 92 Χ : > aA ε , , A ’ 
ἀλλ᾽ εὐθὺς ἐξ ἀρχῆς ὡρμηκότε προεστάναι τῆς πόλεως * 
» Ν ’ὔ ’ 5 ¥ Χ “A 3 
ἔτι yap Σωκράτει συνόντες οὐκ ἄλλοις τισὶ μᾶλλον ἐπε- 


,ὕ ὃ λ td θ “Δ A aN , Ν 
χέειρουν ta εγέσ αι ω) τοις μα στα πράττουσι Ta πολι- 


λέγεται γὰρ ᾿Αλκιβιάδην, πρὶν εἴκοσιν ἐτῶν εἶναι, 


Περικλεῖ, ἐπιτρόπῳ μὲν ὄντι ἑαυτοῦ. προστάτῃ δὲ TH 
ρ ) PpoT@m μ » TPOOTATY TS 


by you. — τῶν ἑπομένων τούτοις : the 
subjects which are connected with these, 
sc. in our conversations. τῶν ἑπομέ- 
νων is explained by the following ap- 
positives τοῦ δικαίου etc. — καὶ τῶν 
βουκόλων ye: This allusion by Chari- 
cles to the words of Socrates in 32 
completes the list of prohibited topics; 
and completes, also, the évidence 
introduced in 32 by ἐδήλωσε δέ. ---- 
ὅπως μὴ ποιήσῃς κτλ.: A thinly dis- 
guised threat; for the failure of such 
attempts to coerce Socrates, cf. the 
incident related in Plato Apol. 
82 c, Ὁ. 

39. ota μὲν οὖν: closes what was 
begun in 13. Both there and here 
the relation between Socrates and 
the two young men is called συνουσία. 
A παίδευσις is denied in the following 


sentence, —pydevl μηδεμίαν: for μή 
and its compounds with the inf. of 
indirect discourse, instead of οὐ, see 
GMT. 685, and Gildersleeve, Am. 
Jour. Philol., i. p. 51. — οὐκ : belongs 
grammatically to ὠμιλησάτην, but 
practically denies ἀρέσκοντος as a mo- 
tive for the action of Critias and 
Alcibiades, and contrasts it with the 
real motive wpunkére. — ὡμιλησάτην, 
ὧμιλείτην: note the significant change 
of tense. —GAX’ εὐθὺς ἐξ ἀρχῆς ὡρμη- 
Kote: but because from the very begin- 
ning they had set out. 

40. πρὶν εἴκοσιν ἐτῶν εἶναι : viz. 
before 430 s.c.; for Alcibiades was 
born about 450 B.c. For the inf. with 
temporal particles, see G. 1469 ff.; 


Ἢ. 955; and, for the pred. gen. cf 


measure, G. 1094, 5; H. 732. — 


38 


40 


92 ΞΕΝΟΦΩ͂ΝΤΟΣ AITOMNHMONEYMATA A. 2. 


πόλεως, τοιάδε διαλεχθῆναι περὶ νόμων. “ἙΕἰπέ pou,” 41 
φ , ἐς > Tl 7 λ μ᾿ » ὃ ὃ , 5 ..5 ΄ : 3) 
dvat, “ὦ Περίκλεις, ἔχοις ἂν με διδάξαι τί ἐστι νόμος; 
“Πάντως δήπου," φάναι τὸν Περικλέα. “Δίδαξον δὴ πρὸς 

250Tav θεῶν, φάναι τὸν ᾿Αλκιβιάδην: “ὡς ἐγὼ ἀκούων 

τινῶν ἐπαινουμένων ὅτι νόμιμοι ἄνδρες εἰσίν, οἶμαι μὴ ἂν 

δικαίως τούτου τυχεῖν τοῦ ἐπαίνου τὸν μὴ εἰδότα τί ἐστι 
νόμος." “᾿Αλλ᾽ οὐδέν τι χαλεποῦ πράγματος ἐπιθυμεῖς, 42 

ὦ ᾿Αλκιβιάδη,᾽ φάναι τὸν Περικλέα, “ βουλόμενος γνῶναι 

257 ἐστι νόμος: πάντες γὰρ οὗτοι νόμοι εἰσὶν οὖς τὸ 

πλῆθος συνελθὸν καὶ δοκιμάσαν ἔγραψε, φράζον a τε δεῖ 

A ΕὟΡ. 4%) “ Tl ΄ δὲ 3 θ Ν / 5 A 

ποιεῖν καὶ ἃ μή. ότερον δὲ τἀγαθὰ νομίσαν δεῖν 

“Τάγαθά, νὴ Δία, φάναι, “ ὦ μει- 
“Ἐὰν δὲ μὴ τὸ πλῆθος, ἀλλ᾽ 43 

260 ὥσπερ ὅπου ὀλιγαρχία ἐστίν, ὀλίγοι συνελθόντες γράψω- 


A “ἡ Ν 4 99 
ποιεῖν, ) τὰ KAKA; 
la Ν Ν Ν ¥ 9) 
ράκιον, τὰ δὲ κακὰ οὐ. 
ν A A ΄΄ 4 3 3) ς( , 3) ». 
σιν ὁ τι χρὴ ποιεῖν, ταῦτα τί ἐστι; Πάντα, φάναι, 
“? x ν κ΄ A , 4, ἃ Ν 
σα ἂν τὸ κρατοῦν τῆς πόλεως βουλευσάμενον a χρὴ 
A U4 V4 A ᾽) (a3 \ x 4 5 
ποιεῖν γράψῃ, νόμος καλεῖται. Καὶ ἀν τύραννος οὖν 


A A aN rd A Wi a Ν A 
κρατῶν τῆς πόλεως γραψῇῃ τοῖς πολίταις a χρὴ ποιεῖν, 


τοιάδε διαλεχθῆναι: had some such 
conversation as this, a good example 
of how the younger friends of Socra- 
tes imitated their master in ἐξετάζειν. 
Cf. καὶ αὐτοὶ (οἱ νέοι μοι ἐπακολουθοῦν- 
Tes) πολλάκις ἐμὲ μιμοῦνται, εἶτα ἐπιχει- 
ροῦσιν ἄλλους ἐξετάζειν Plato Apol. 28 ο. 

41. εἰπέ: for the accent, see 
G. 131, 2; ΗΠ. 387 b. — Περίκλεις : 
for the decl. of proper nouns in -κλέης, 
see G. 231; H. 194. --- ἔχοις ἄν : po- 
tential opt. of courteous inquiry. — 
μέ: for double acc. with verbs of 
teaching, see ἃ. 1069; H. 724. — τί 
ἐστι νόμος : for a short definition of 
νόμος, cf. iv. 4. 138. — τινῶν ἐπαινουμέ- 
γων : for the supplementary participle 


with verbs of perception, see on i. 1. 
11. — οἶμαν μὴ τυχεῖν : see on μηδενί 
39, and oni, 1. 20. 

42. οὐδέν τι: not at all, adv. acc. 
with χαλεποῦ. See on τὴν ταχίστην 
23. — τὸ πλῆθος : the people, plebs. 
The orators often used the phrase τὸ 
ὑμέτερον πλῆθος, referring to the de- 
mocracy at Athens. —éypawe: enacts. 
— φράζον : stating. — νομίσαν : sc. τὸ 
πλῆθος ἔγραψε. --- ὦ μειράκιον : my 
lad. 

43. ὥσπερ ὅπου: as is the case 
where. — τὸ κρατοῦν τῆς πόλεως : ‘the 
powers that be’ in the state. For 
the subst. use of the participle, see 
G. 1560; H. 966. --- τύραννος : with 


Ν A , > Lae) 
265 καὶ TAVTA VOMOS ἐστι: 
‘ , Ν A / A ” 
γράφει, Kal ταῦτα νόμος καλεῖται. 


270 φάναι τὸν Περικλέα. 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA I, 2. 33 


φάναι, ‘ 


, « Wa ἃ , | oe > Tl , λ 
φάναι, “καὶ ἀνομία τί ἐστιν, ὦ ἹΠερίκλεις : 


( ἌΣ , Ψ ” 
Kat οσα τύραννος ἄρχων, 


49) 


“Bia 06,” 44 
ἄρ᾽ οὐχ ὅταν 


ε ’ Ν. 9 \ ’ > ἈΝ , > 
ὁ κρείττων τὸν ἥττω μὴ πείσας, ἀλλὰ βιασάμενος avay- 


4 ~ ν x 5 nw ὃ ἴω ᾽᾽ 
Ka07) TOLELV O TL AV AUT OKY) ; 


X , 5 / ~ , 5 ’ὔ 3 ee 
Tous πολίτας ἀναγκάζει ποιεῖν γράφων, ἀνομία ἐστί; 


»ν A 
“"Epouye δοκεῖ; 


(a3 Ἂν ἊΝ ¥ , ἣν / 
Kat ova apa τύραννος μὴ πείσας 


’ 


“Δοκεῖ pot,” φάναι Tov Περικλέα: “ἀνατίθεμαι yap τὸ ὅσα 


, \ 7 / ’, > ” 
τύραννος μὴ πείσας γράφει, νόμον εἶναι. 


“Ὅσα δὲ 0645 


3 ’ ‘\ Ν \ / 5 Ν lal , 
ὀλίγοι τοὺς πολλοὺς μὴ πείσαντες, ἀλλὰ κρατοῦντες ypa- 


A iy « + A 
275 ovat, πότερον βίαν φῶμεν εἶναι, ἢ μὴ φῶμεν ;" “Πάντα 


,Ἅ Ψ 
μοι δοκεῖ; φάναι τὸν Περικλέα, “ὅσα τις μὴ πείσας 


3 / ἣς al » ’ ¥ ’ ’ A 
ἀναγκάζει τινὰ ποιεῖν, εἴτε γράφων εἴτε μή, Bia μᾶλλον 


x , + ” 
ἡ νόμος εἰναι. 


“Kat ὅσα a ὁ πᾶν πλὴθ v 
pa τὸ πᾶν πλῆθος κρατοῦν 


τῶν τὰ χρήματα ἐχόντων γράφει μὴ πεῖσαν, βία μᾶλλον ἢ 


no implied reproach as in Eng. 
‘tyrant.’ The word is one of many 
which have degenerated. C/f., and 
trace to their origin, our villain, 
knave, and υαγϊοί. ---- γράφει: ind., 
being an accepted particular case of 
the previous general supposition. 

44. dp οὐ: sc. βία ἐστί. --- πείσας : 
participle of means. — βιασάμενος : a 
rigid definition of Bla would exclude 
βιασάμενος here, as containing in it- 
self the idea to be defined. Yet, as 
ἀνομία also was to be defined, the 
participle contrasted with πείσας may 
be admitted, as suggesting some of 
the elements of ἀνομία. ---- ἀνατίθεμαι: 
I retract, lit. put back, a term bor- 
rowed from games like checkers, in 
which the player ‘takes back’ the 
pieces moved (ἀνατιθέναι πεττούς). 
The mid. voice is significant. — ph 


πείσας : these words were not uttered 
in 43 (καὶ ὅσα τύραννος γράφει), but 
they are inserted here, as having 
been easily understood in the words 
of Pericles, and as having actually 
been used by Alcibiades. 

45. μὴ φῶμεν : see on ἔρωμαι 36, 
— Bia: nom. after εἶναι, as πάντα is 
subj. of δοκεῖ as well as of the infini- 
tive. See 6. 927; H. 940. --- τὸ πᾶν 
πλῆθος : the collective people. — ἄρα : 
sc. *¢according to your view.’’ — ἂν 
εἴη: for the ‘mixed’ const. ,see G. 1421, 
1, 1487; H. 901 Ὁ, 918. --- ἢ νόμος : a 
positive answer to the question τί ἐστι 
νόμος (41) is, after all, not given. 
Xenophon is only trying to show what 
subjects Alcibiades liked to discuss, 
and how well he had learned from 
Socrates the art of ‘cornering’ an 
adversary. 


34 EENO®ONTOS AIOMNHMONEYMATA A. 2. 


= 
ἡδὺ νόμος ἂν ein;” “Mada τοι," φάναι τὸν Περικλέα, “ὦ 46 
"AX (ὃ 1 A ry A » ὃ \ Ἂν la! : 
κιβιάδη, καὶ ἡμεῖς, τηλικοῦτοι ὄντες, δεινοὶ τὰ τοιαῦτα 
5 κ᾿ N \ 3 a es , ar 
ἦμεν τοιαῦτα yap Kal ἐμελετῶμεν Kal ἐσοφιζόμεθα, ota- 
περ Kal σὺ νῦν ἐμοὶ δοκεῖς μελετᾶν." τὸν δὲ ᾿Αλκιβιάδην. 
΄, “ DY, 5 ΄ , ΄, ψ 
φάναι: “Εἴθε σοι, ὦ Περίκλεις, τότε συνεγενόμην, ὅτε 
285 δεινότατος σαυτοῦ [ταῦτα] ἦσθα." 
3 \ / , “ ld ε la 
Ἐπεὶ τοίνυν τάχιστα τῶν πολιτευομένων ὑπέλαβον 47 
κρείττονες εἶναι, Σωκράτει μὲν οὐκέτι προσήεσαν οὔτε γὰρ 
9 an 5» » » Ψ ε Ν & e / 
αὐτοῖς ἄλλως ἤρεσκεν, εἴ TE προσέλθοιεν, ὑπὲρ ὧν ἡμάρ- 
Ψ A 
Tavov ἐλεγχόμενοι ἤχθοντο: τὰ δὲ τῆς πόλεως ἔπραττον, 
e 
290 ὧνπερ ἕνεκεν Kal Σωκράτει προσῆλθον. ἀλλὰ Κρίτων τε 48 
, mo ε \ \ “A Ν ’ 
Σωκράτους ἣν ὁμιλητὴς καὶ Χαιρεφῶν καὶ Χαιρεκράτης 
καὶ Ἑρμογένης καὶ Σιμμίας καὶ Κέβης καὶ Φαιδώνδας καὶ 
» ar. / ia > ν Ἁ ἃ Ν 
ἄλλοι, οὗ ἐκείνῳ συνῆσαν οὐχ ἵνα δημηγορικοὶ ἢ δικανικοὶ 
’ > > ¢ 3 \ , Ν ¥ 
γένοιντο, ἀλλ᾽ ἵνα, καλοί τε κἀγαθοὶ γενόμενοι, Kal οἴκῳ 
Ἁ 3 4 Ν 5 4 Ν / ‘\ ’ὔ’ ν A 
295 καὶ οἰκέταις καὶ οἰκείοις καὶ φίλοις Kal πόλει καὶ πολί- 
δύ λῶ an A J \ , We) / » 
ταις δύναιντο καλῶς χρῆσθαι: καὶ τούτων οὐδείς, οὔτε 


46. μάλα τοι : connect with δεινοί. 
-- καὶ ἡμεῖς: for the pl. of ‘ modest 
assertion,’ see H.637. Pericles speaks 
with a touch of ironical humor, as 
the next words show. — δεινοὶ τὰ 
τοιαῦτα : strong at such things (the 
arts of debate). — ἐσοφιζόμεθα : we 
used to discuss. — συνεγενόμην : for 
the indic. in expressions of wishing, 
see G. 1511; H. 871. —S8e.véraros σαυ- 
τοῦ: ““ at the height of your powers.”’ 
Pericles is compared with himself at 
different periods of his life. The gen. 
is partitive. G. 1088 (last example) ; 
H. 729 e. 

47. ἐπεὶ τάχιστα : as soon as. — 
οὔτε, τέ: NEC, et. —GAdras, for other 
reasons, than the one to be men- 
tioned. — προσέλθοιεν: for the opt. in 


past general suppositions, see G. 
15938, 2; H. 894, 2. — ὑπὲρ ὧν: for the 
assimilation, see on dv 21. — ὧνπερ 
ἕνεκεν kal: for which very reason also. 

48. Κρίτων... Φαιδώνδας : for 
Crito, see ii. 9. 1 ff. ; for Chaerephon, 
Ar. Clouds 104; Plato Aol. 20 n, 21, 
and ii. 3, g.v. also for Chaerecra- 
tes. Cebes and Simmias left their 
native Thebes to become compan- 
ions of Socrates. Cf. iii. 11. 17 and 
Plato Phaedo ὅθ. Phaedondas also 
wasa Theban. For Hermogenes, see 
on ii. το. 3; iv. 8. 4. --- δημηγορικοὶ 
ἢ ϑικανικοί: public or forensic ora- 
tors. — οὐδείς, οὔτε, οὔτε: for the 
strengthened negation expressed by 
a series of compound negs. following 
a neg., see G. 1619; H. 1030, — 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA I. 2. 


35 


, ¥ ͵ ¥ » 5 3 ’, ες ὑδὲ 
νεώτερος OUTE πρεσβύτερος ων, OUT ETTOLNOE KQKOV OUVOEV 


S905; 4.9 » 
OUT ALTLAV eo KEV. 


“co? 


Αλλὰ Σωκράτης γ᾽, ἔφη ὁ κατήγορος, “ τοὺς πατέρας 49 


300 προπηλακίζειν ἐδίδασκε, πείθων μὲν τοὺς συνόντας αὐτῷ 


, A A , , δὲ Ν , 
σοφωτέρους ποιεῖν TOV πατέρων, φάσκων ὃὲ κατὰ νόμον 


535 κ , εᾺ 7 es” , A , 
ἐξεῖναι TAPAVOLAS ἑλόντι καὶ TOV TATEPA δῆσαι, τΤεΚμηριῳ 


, , ε Ν 9 θέ So ἃ A , 
τουτῳ χρώμενος, WS TOV ALAVEOTEPOV V7TTO TOU σοφωτέρου 


νόμιμον εἴη δεδέσθαι." 


, Ν Ν Ν 3 ’ 
Σωκράτης δὲ τὸν μὲν ἀμαθίας 50 
Ψ 4 ΞΖ x ‘ | Pe ὮΝ ld ε Ν 
305 ἕνεκα δεσμεύοντα δικαίως ἂν καὶ αὐτὸν wero δεδέσθαι ὑπὸ 


A , N \ Ν ΠΟΥ, Ν κ᾿ , 
των ἐπισταμένων ἁ μη αὐτὸς ETLOTATAL* καὶ Τῶν Τοιου- 


ν ’ὔ > ’ὔ’ ΑΝ ’ 7 > ’ 
των ἕνεκα πολλάκις ἐσκόπει τί διαφέρει μανίας ἀμαθία" 


Ν Ν Ν 4, » ͵ ’ x ὃ ὃ / 0 
καὶ TOUS μὲν μαινομένους WETO συμφερόντως ἂν δεὸδέσθαι 


BE 4 A Ἀ A ᾽ὔ Ν \ \ 3 ’ Ἀ 
και EQUTOLS και TOLS φίλοις, TOVS δὲ μη επισταμένους Ta 


αἰτίαν ἔσχεν : incurred reproach. See 
on αἰτίαν ἔχει 27. 

49-55. Socrates had no desire to 
disturb the relations of children with 
parents, or of kindred to one another. 
But he recognized how external and 
material these relations remain in the 
case of many; while in other affairs 
little value is assigned to the material 
unless inspired by a soul: and he set 
himself, accordingly, to give to the 
relations of kinsfolk a moral content 
and a firmer basis, by the aid of 
mutual forbearance and assistance. 

49. κατήγορος : see on 9. — προ- 
πηλακίζειν ἐδίδασκε: in Ar. Clouds 
1321 ff., Phidippides strikes his 
father, and argues that he has the 
right to do so. —avr@: for the use 
of αὐτός in its oblique cases as a refl. 
pron., see G. 992; H. 684 ἃ. CY. 
τοὺς ὁμιλοῦντας αὐτῷ iv. 7. 1. --- τῆς 
παρανοίας ἑλόντι : if one convicted 
{his father) of dementia. For the 


gen., see G. 1121; H. 745. The 
reference is to the legally author- 
ized complaint παρανοίας, as it was 
brought, e.g., against Sophocles by 
his sons. Cf. οἴμοι, τί δράσω παρα- 
φρονοῦντος τοῦ πατρός; | πότερον παρα- 
volas αὐτὸν εἰσαγαγὼν ἕλω, | ἢ τοῖς 
σοροπηγοῖς τὴν μανίαν αὐτοῦ φράσω; 
(or inform the coffin-makers of his 
insanity) Ar. Clouds 844 ff. The 
accuser charged Socrates with using 
the existence of this law as an 
argument that the ignorant could 
always be legally imprisoned by the 
more learned.—kal τὸν πατέρα: 
even his father. —rexpyplo: as an 
indication, pred. appos. with τούτῳ. 
G. 916; H. 777 a. 

50. δεσμεύοντα : sc. ἄλλον τινά. ---- 
ἂν αὐτὸν δεδέσθαι : would himself be 
kept in prison. — τί διαφέρει μανίας 
ἀμαθία: discussed in iii. 9. 6. --- 
ἑαυτοῖς, φίλοις : depend on συμφερόν- 
G. 1174; H. 767. 


TWS. 


36 BENO®ONTOS AILOMNHMONEYMATA A. 2. 


, ’ x , Ν ἴω 9 ld 
310 δέοντα δικαίως ἂν μανθάνειν παρὰ τῶν ἐπισταμένων. 
“᾿Αλλὰ Σωκράτης ye,” ἔφη ὁ κατήγορος, “ οὐ μόνον τοὺς 51 
’ 3 Ν \ Ν + “~ 3 ’ 3 > 4 
πατέρας ἀλλὰ Kal τοὺς ἄλλους συγγενεῖς ἐποίει EV ἀτιμίᾳ, 
a ΄- ~ ant e », 
εἶναι παρὰ τοῖς ἑαυτῷ συνοῦσι, λέγων ὡς οὔτε τοὺς κάμνον- 
» \ , ε A 3 κι 9 N 
Tas οὔτε τοὺς δικαζομένους οἱ συγγενεῖς ὠφελοῦσιν, ἀλλὰ 
: δ A ee, / hy! de ε ὃ a 3 ΄ 3) 
B15 TOUS μὲν οἱ ἰατροί, τοὺς δὲ οἱ συνδικεῖν ἐπιστάμενοι. 
ἔφη δὲ καὶ περὶ τῶν φίλων αὐτὸν λέγειν ὡς οὐδὲν ὄφελος 52 
» 3 9 N \ 5 A ͵΄ , A 
εὔνους εἶναι, εἰ μὴ Kal ὠφελεῖν δυνήσονται: μόνους δὲ 
4 : eee 5 δ᾽’; > A Ν io ld Ν ὃ 4 Ν 
φάσκειν αὐτὸν ἀξίους εἶναι τιμῆς τοὺς εἰδότας τὰ δέοντα καὶ 
ἑρμηνεῦσαι δυναμένους - ἀναπείθοντα οὖν τοὺς νέους αὐτὸν 
ε 3 νιν »ν» ’ ’ ᾿. ΝΡ ε , al 
320 WS AUTOS εἴη σοφώτατός TE Kat ἀλλους ἱκανώτατος ποιῆσαι 
A Y 
σοφούς, οὕτω διατιθέναι τοὺς ἑαυτῷ συνόντας ὥστε μηδα- 
A A » > 
μοῦ παρ᾽ αὐτοῖς τοὺς ἄλλους εἶναι πρὸς ἑαυτόν. ἐγὼ δ8 
3 | eel | Ss \ \N \ v4 Ν ἴω. »Ὰ 
δ᾽ αὐτὸν οἶδα μὲν καὶ περὶ πατέρων τε καὶ τῶν ἄλλων 
A a) ‘ 
συγγενῶν καὶ περὶ φίλων ταῦτα λέγοντα: Kal πρὸς τούτοις 
, 9 A A 3 , 9 Ὁ / , 
g25ye δή, ὅτι τῆς ψυχῆς ἐξελθούσης, ἐν ἣ μόνῃ γίγνεται 
φρόνησις, τὸ σῶμα τοῦ οἰκειοτάτου ἀνθρώπου τὴν ταχίστην 


51. παρά: in the opinion of.— An. i. 1. ὅ. --- μηδαμοῦ: of no 


ὡς οὔτε τοὺς κάμνοντας κτλ. : the 
Eng. idiom is best attained by pre- 
serving the Greek order of words and 
translating ὠφελοῦσιν as passive. — οἱ 
συνδικεῖν ἐπιστάμενοι : ‘their legal 
advisers.’’ 

52. ws ὄφελος : 86. ἐστί. --- εἰ μὴ 
δυνήσονται : unless they are going to 
be able. For the ind. in fut. cond. 
of the ‘more vivid’ form, see 
G. 1387; H. 899. — ἑρμηνεῦσαι : cf. 
Thuc. ii. 60, where Pericles says 
οὐδενὸς οἴομαι ἥσσων εἶναι γνῶναί τε τὰ 
δέοντα καὶ ἑρμηνεῦσαι I think I am 
inferior to none in both seeing and 
explaining what ought to be done. 
- - ἀναπείθοντα: by persuading. — 
διατιθέναι: disposed. Cf. διατιθείς 


account. Cf. Plato Gorg. 456 c. — 
πρὸς ἑαυτόν : in comparison with him. 

53. οἶδα pév: not correlative to 
ἔλεγε δέ of the next section. Rather 
in both sections is the assumption of 
the accuser admitted, and even rein- 
forced by other assertions of Socrates 
which stand in close connection with 
it. This admission is introduced by 
οἶδα μέν, the implied contrast being 
anticipated from 55, viz., that the 
accuser wholly misconceived the 
meaning of the assertions cited. For 
μέν, see on i. 1. 1. ---λέγοντα : for 
the supplementary participle, see on 
i. 2. 14. — καί, γέ: nay, even. — ὅτι 
ἀφανίζουσιν : depends on λέγοντα. --- 
τοῦ olkevorarou ἀνθρώπου: their nearest 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA I. 2. 37 


ἐξενέγκαντες ἀφανίζουσιν. 


ἔλεγε δὲ ὅτι καὶ ζῶν ἕκαστος 54 


ε nw ἃ ’ , A A , 7 x 
ἑαυτοῦ, ὃ πάντων μάλιστα φιλεῖ, TOU σώματος oO TL ἂν 
3 A > ye: ΄ ΑἸ tae > A ae 

ἀχρεῖον ἢ Kal ἀνωφελές, αὐτός τε ἀφαιρεῖ καὶ ἄλλῳ 


Ἵ , > , , δὶ τ »” , Ἁ , A 
330 παρέχει" QUTOL TE YE AUTWY ονυχᾶς TE και τρίχας και 


τύλους ἀφαιροῦσι, Kal τοῖς ἰατροῖς παρέχουσι μετὰ πόνων 


oe. , Tt Ss , oS ΄ . Ν 
TE Και ἀλγηδόνων KQL QTOTEMVELY KAL αποκαίειν, και 


, , ¥ A 2 A \ \ , \ 
TOUTOU Xap OLOVTQL δεῖν αυτοις Και μισθὸν τινειν" Και 


Ν 4 3 A ’ > , ε 4 
TO σίαλον €K TOV στοματος αἀποπτυουσιν ὡς δύνανται 


δὲ πολὺ μᾶλλον. 


$35 πορρωτάτω, διότι ὠφελεῖ μὲν οὐδὲν αὐτοὺς ἐνόν, βλάπτει 
ταῦτ᾽ οὖν ἔχεγεν οὐ τὸν μὲν πατέρα δὅ 


“A 4, , e Ν \ ’, 5 3 
ζῶντα κατορύττειν διδάσκων, ἑαυτὸν δὲ κατατέμνειν, ἀλλ 


3 ὃ , 9 Ν ᾿Ξ + , 9 , 5 
ETLOELKVUMY OTL TO ad pov ἀτιμὸν ἐστι, παρεκάλει ἐπι- 


μελεῖσθαι τοῦ ὡς φρονιμώτατον εἶναι καὶ ὠφελιμώτατον, 


ν 37 ε Ν. Ἂς >7 ε Ν > “A 37 ε Ν 
340 O7TWS, εἐαν TE ὑπο πατρος €aV TE VTO ἀδελφοῦ εαν TE VITO 


¥ A κα aA 5 
ἄλλου τινὸς βούληται τιμᾶσθαι, μὴ τῷ οἰκεῖος εἶναι 


πιστεύων ἀμελῇ, ἀλλὰ πειρᾶται, ὑφ᾽ ὧν ἂν βούληται 


A , 9 , > 
τιμᾶσθαι, τούτοις ὠφέλιμος εἶναι. 


kinsman. — ἀφανίζουσιν : a term freq. 
used for burial. Cf. Soph. Ant. 255. 

54. ἕκαστος ἑαυτοῦ κτλ. : const. 
ἕκαστος ὅ τι ἂν τοῦ σώματος (ὃ ἑαυτοῦ 
πάντων μάλιστα φιλεῖ which of all 


things belonging to himself he most 


loves) ἀχρεῖον 7 καὶ ἀνωφελές, αὐτός τε 
ἀφαμρεῖ κτλ. ---- παρέχει : permits, sc. 
ἀφαιρεῖν. ---- αὐτοί τέ γε αὑτῶν ἀφαι- 
potter: men both themselves rid them- 
selves of. — καὶ rots ἰατροῖς... ἀπο- 
Kaley: naturally refers only to 
τύλους. --- χάριν : for the adv. acc., 


see on i. 2. 29. --- τίνειν : in this 
sense, ἀποτίνειν or τελεῖν iS more 


common. --- ἐνόν : sc. τῷ σώματι. 
55. ἐπιδεικνύων : not correlative 

with διδάσκων, but belonging as a 

circumstantial participle of manner 


to παρεκάλει. —ros εἶναι: for the 
articular inf., see on i. 1. 12, --- τῷ 
οἰκεῖος εἶναι πιστεύων : relying on his 
being a relation. For the nom., see on 
Bia i. 2. 45. — ἀμελῇ : for the subjv. 
in final clauses, see G. 1365; H. 881. 

56-64. The charge that Socrates 
spread immoral and pernicious doc- 
trines by perverting passages from 
the poets is refuted by citing two quo- 
tations on which Socrates put a quite 
different interpretation from that 
imputed to him by the accuser: and 
is also sufficiently disproved by his 
blameless, unselfish, and patriotic life. 
To sum up, this man of pure char- 
acter, this promoter of all that was 
good, deserved from the state, not 
death, but the highest honor. 


38 EENO®ONTOS ATOMNHMONEYMATA A. 2. 


Ἔφη δ᾽ 


la) Ν Ν 
845 ποιητῶν ἐκλεγόμενον τὰ πονηρότατα καὶ τούτοις μαρτυ- 


» Meh, ε , A “A 3 ’, 
αὐτὸν ὁ κατήγορος καὶ τῶν ἐνδοξοτάτων 56 


/ Ἁ 
ρίοις χρώμενον διδάσκειν τοὺς συνόντας κακούργους τε 
3 \ ε Ν 
εἶναι καὶ τυραννικούς, Ἡσιόδου μὲν τὸ 


“ ἔργον δ᾽ οὐδὲν ὄνειδος, ἀεργίη δέ τ᾽ ὄνειδος, 


A Ν 9 URS ε ε Ν 4 x 
τοῦτο δὴ λέγειν αὐτὸν ws ὁ ποιητὴς κελεύει μηδενὸς 
» , 50. , > ἴω 3 , > Ν ' Ἁ 
860 ἔργου μήτε ἀδίκου μήτε αἰσχροῦ ἀπέχεσθαι, ἀλλὰ καὶ 
ταῦτα ποιεῖν ἐπὶ τῷ κέρδει. Σωκράτης δ᾽ ἐπεὶ διομο- δἹ 
la Ν Ν 3 3 3 ’ 4 9 4 
λογήσαιτο τὸ μὲν ἐργάτην εἶναι ὠφέλιμόν τε ἀνθρώπῳ 
XN 3 Aa > Ν δὲ 3 Ν λ ’ Ἁ 
καὶ ἀγαθὸν εἶναι, τὸ δὲ ἀργὸν βλαβερόν τε καὶ κακόν, 
Ν Ν Ν 3 ’, 3 , Ν δὲ 3 A , ‘ 
καὶ TO μὲν ἐργάζεσθαι ἀγαθόν, τὸ δὲ ἀργεῖν κακόν, τοὺς 
Ν 3 ’ “ 3 , 7 » Ν 3 / 
355 μὲν ἀγαθόν τι ποιοῦντας ἐργάζεσθαί τε ἔφη καὶ ἐργάτας 
3 \ > Ν Ν , » ¥ Q 
[ἀγαθοὺς] εἶναι, τοὺς δὲ κυβεύοντας ἡ τι ἄλλο πονηρὸν 


A: Ua , ‘al 3 Ν > ’ 
καὶ ἐπιζήμιον ποιοῦντας ἀργοὺς ἀπεκάλει. 


9 A x » Ἂς 
ὀρθῶς ἂν ἔχοι τὸ 


5 A 4 
ἐκ δὲ τούτων 


“ ἔργον δ᾽ οὐδὲν ὄνειδος, ἀεργίη δέ τ᾽ ὄνειδος." 


56. ἐκλεγόμενον. . . διδάσκειν : 
for the basis of fact underlying this 
distorted assertion, cf. i. 6. 14.— 


τῶν ἐνδοξοτάτων ποιητῶν : of the 


three divisions of instruction, γράμ- 


para, μουσική, and γυμναστική, the 
first-named, as a rule, included most 
of the formal instruction in language 
and literature received by the Greek 
boy at school. As soon as a boy had 
learned to read and write, he was 
‘encouraged or compelled to learn by 
heart great masses of poetry, especially 
of Homer or Simonides, or the gnomic 
poets. Many a Greek knew by heart 
the whole of the Iliad and Odyssey.’ 
Gardnerand Jevons, Manual of Greek 
Antig., pp. 307, 308. C/. Sym. iii. s, 
6. — τούτοις μαρτυρίοις χρώμενον : (7. 


τεκμηρίῳ τούτῳ χρώμενος 49. --- ἔργον δ᾽ 
οὐδὲν ὄνειδος κτλ. : from Hesiod’s 
didactic poem Works and Days 311, 
where the reference is to agricultural 
labor only. The accuser seems to 
have perverted the sense of the 
verse by connecting οὐδέν with ἔργον, 
whereas it belongs to 8vevdos.— ἀεργίη : 
with long penult. So Hom. w 251, 
kaxoepylns x 514. ---δή: now, with 
resumptive force. So in 58; in both 
places δή has a somewhat fainter 
effect than, e.g., in 24. 

57. ἐπεὶ διομολογήσαιτο : for the 
opt., see on μέλλοι i. 1. 10. --- τὸ μὲν 
ἐργάτην εἶναι : subj. of ὠφέλιμόν τε καὶ 
ἀγαθὸν εἶναι. ---- τὸ δὲ ἀργόν : sc. εἶναι. --- 
ἀπεκάλει : see on i. 2. 6. — ἐκ δὲ τού- 
των: ‘‘and with this interpretation.” 


ewe 
reas 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA I. 2. 


39 


3607o δὲ Ὁμήρου ἔφη ὁ κατήγορος πολλάκις αὐτὸν λέγειν, 58 


370 


ὅτι Ὀδυσσεὺς 


“ὅν τινα μὲν βασιλῆα καὶ ἔξοχον ἄνδρα κιχείη, 


τὸν δ᾽ ἀγανοῖς ἐπέεσσιν ἐρητύσασκε παραστάς: 


ς ὃ Pues x ¥ \ ἃ § δὲ θ 
QLLOVL , OU σε €OLKE KAKOV WS OCELOLOC ECV AL, 


ἀλλ᾽ αὐτός Te κάθησο Kai ἄλλους ἵδρυε λαούς." 


ὃν δ᾽ αὖ δήμου ἄνδρα ἴδοι βοόωντά τ᾽ ἐφεύροι, 


N , KS ε , , , 
TOV σκήπτρῳ ἐλάσασκεν ὁμοκλήσασκέ τε μύθῳ: 


ς ὃ , > 5 ΄, - Ν TAX DO Ξ 
αιμόνι, ἀτρέμας YOO, καὶ ἀλλων μυθον ἀκουε, 


ἃ , , ee Ν ἅν 4 ΄ὔ le 
οἱ σέο φέρτεροί εἶσι, σὺ ὃ ἀπτόλεμος Kal ἀναλκις, 


¥ > > , 3 , ν 9» δι a 
οὔτε ποτ᾽ ἐν πολέμῳ ἐναρίθμιος οὔτ᾽ ἐνὶ βουλῇ. 


9») 


A δὴ Ke" ¥ > A θ ε ε Ν 9 ’ ’ 
ταῦτα Ἴ αυτον ἐξηγεῖσ al, WS O TOLYTHS €7T ALVOLY) Tat- 


‘ ’ \ ’ 
εσθαι τοὺς δημότας καὶ πένητας. 


Σωκράτης δ᾽ οὐ ταῦτ᾽ 59 


¥ >” Ν ε Ν ν 959 «ἃ » ~ ’ 

ἔλεγε: καὶ γὰρ ἑαυτὸν οὕτω γ᾽ ἄν wero δεῖν παίεσθαι" 
ἀλλ᾽ ἔφη δεῖν τοὺς μήτε λόγῳ μήτ᾽ ἔργῳ ὠφελίμους ὄντας 
815 μήτε στρατεύματι μήτε πόλει μηδὲ αὐτῷ τῷ δήμῳ, εἴ τι 


, ε A ε ’ὔ » 3 μι Ἂν ’ Ἁ 
δέοι, βοηθεῖν ἱκανούς, ἄλλως T ἐὰν πρὸς τούτῳ καὶ 


58. ὅν τινα μὲν βασιλῆα κτλ. : 
the verses are from Hom. B 188-191, 
and 198-202, and depict Odysseus 
repressing the tumult among the 
Achaeans. — κιχείη : for the opt., 
cf. διομολογήσαιτο 67. --- πέεσσιν : 
Epic for ἔπεσιν. --- ἐρητύσασκε: for 
the form, see G. 778, 1298; H. 493. 
- ὥς : for the accent, see G. 138, 2; 
H. 112 Ῥ. --- σέο: for the form, see 
G. 393; H. 261 Ὁ. --- ἐξηγεῖσθαι, ὡς : 
interpreted, to the effect that. —8np6- 
τας: of Greek prose writers only 
Herodotus and Xenophon use δημό- 
τῆς in the sense of ‘a common man,’ 
the usual Attic word for which is 
δημοτικός. In 60, however, δημοτικός 


is equivalent to popularis, a friend 
of the people. 

59. οὕτω γ᾽ ἂν wero: in that case 
he would have been thinking, i.e. 
ἐς would have been forced to think,”’ 
as Socrates himself was one of the 
πένητες. For the impf., see on i. 1. 
5; and for the meaning of πένητας, 
cf. the discussion between Socrates 
and Euthydemus iv. 2. 37 τῇ, -- ἀλλὰ 
δεῖν κτλ. : ‘*he who neither in war 
nor in public life can serve the 
state or be useful to the people 
should be kept out of public and 
military life.» — ἄλλως τε: and 
especially, not to be confused with. 
the similar and more common ἄλλως 


40 EENO®ONTOS ATTOMNHMONEYMATA A. 2. 


A nN / ’ 4 x , , 
θρασεῖς ὦσι, πάντα τρόπον κωλύεσθαι, κἂν πάνυ πλούσιοι 
ἀλλὰ Σωκράτης γε τἀναντία τούτων 

Ν > Ν Ν Ἀ ’ὔ » 3 ~~ 
φανερὸς ἣν καὶ δημοτικὸς καὶ φιλάνθρωπος wv: ἐκεῖνος 


τυγχάνωσιν ὄντες. 60 
880γὰρ πολλοὺς ἐπιθυμητὰς καὶ ἀστοὺς καὶ ἕένους λαβὼν 
> ’ ’ὔ Ν ΜᾺ ’ 5 4, 5 Ν 
οὐδένα πώποτε μισθὸν τῆς συνουσίας ἐπράξατο, ἀλλὰ 
πᾶσιν ἀφθόνως ἐπήρκει τῶν ἑαυτοῦ" ὧν τινες μικρὰ μέρη 
ee ee a , a A » fy 
Tap ἐκείνου προῖκα λαβόντες πολλοῦ τοῖς ἄλλοις ἐπώ- 
λουν, καὶ οὐκ ἦσαν ὥσπερ ἐκεῖνος δημοτικοί: τοῖς γὰρ 
885 μὴ ἔχουσι χρήματα διδόναι οὐκ ἤθελον διαλέγεσθαι. 
3 Ν “4 Ν Ν Ν + 3 , 
ἀλλὰ Σωκράτης ye Kal πρὸς τοὺς ἄλλους ἀνθρώπους 61 
, κι ,ὕ A an κι mY ΄ an 
κόσμον TH πόλει παρεῖχε, πολλῷ μᾶλλον ἢ Λίχας TH 
Δ ὃ ’ a > Ἂς > PE 4 id Δί 
ακεδαιμονίων, ὃς ὀνομαστὸς ἐπὶ τούτῳ γέγονε. Λίχας 
μὲν γὰρ ταῖς γυμνοπαιδίαις τοὺς ἐπιδημοῦντας ἐν Λακε- 
890 δαίμονι ἕένους ἐδείπνιζε, Σωκράτης δὲ διὰ παντὸς τοῦ βίου 
τὰ ἑαυτοῦ δαπανῶν τὰ μέγιστα πάντας τοὺς βουλομένους 
3 ᾽’ ’ Ν ~ Ν ’ 5 ὔ 
ὠφέλει: βελτίους γὰρ ποιῶν τοὺς συγγιγνομένους ἀπέ- 
πεμπεν. 


τε καί both in other respects, and 
particularly. 
60. τἀναντία τούτων : 806. 


61. πρὸς τοὺς ἄλλους ἀνθρώπους : 
in his relations to other θη. Cf. καὶ 
πρὸς φίλους δὲ καὶ ξένους i. 3. 8, --- 


τῶν 


θρασέων καὶ τῷ δήμῳ βοηθεῖν μὴ ἱκανῶν. 
τἀναντία is adv., and takes the gen. 
after the analogy of certain adjs. 
of place. G. 1146; H. 754 f. —ém- 
θυμητάς : eager followers. — ἀστούς, 
ξένους: in partitive appos. with 
ἐπιθυμητάς. -G. 914; H. 624 d.— 
οὐδένα, μισθόν : for the double acc., 
see on ὅ. --- συνουσίας : cf. 39. — τῶν 
ἑαυτοῦ : ‘‘of his own good things.” 
— ov tives: Aristippus of Cyrene was 
the first of Socrates’s followers to 
demand pay for his services. (Cf. 
Diog. Laert. ii. 65. —xphpara διδό- 
vat: for the limiting inf. with nouns, 
see G. 1530; H. 952. 


Atxas: acc. to Plutarch (Cim. 10), 
Lichas was renowned for his hospi- 
tality toward strangers who visited 
Sparta at the festival of the Gymno- 
paedia, when naked youths danced 
and sang round the statue of Apollo 
Carneius, in honor of the Spartans 
who fell at the battle of Thyrea, — 
γυμνοπαιδίαις : for the dat. of time, 
see G. 1192; H. 782. --- τὰ μέγιστα, 
τοὺς βουλομένους : for the double acc., 
see on τὴν πόλιν 12. — ποιῶν : equiv. 
to impf. ἐποίει, the action being re- 
garded as freq. repeated. Here, as 
often, the partic. contains the main 
thought, the finite verb the subord. 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA I. 2. 41 


Ἐμοὶ μὲν δὴ Σωκράτης τοιοῦτος ὧν ἐδόκει τιμῆς 
395 ἄξιος εἶναι τῇ πόλει μᾶλλον ἢ θανάτου. καὶ κατὰ τοὺς 
κατὰ γὰρ τοὺς 
er 4 27 Ν ,ὕ , x κι 
νόμους, ἐάν τις φανερὸς γένηται κλέπτων ἢ λωποδυτῶν 
x ἄντα τῆς m8 Mee ἃ , nN 
ἢ βαλαντιοτομῶν ἢ τοιχωρυχῶν ἢ ἀνδραποδιζόμενος ἢ 
ἱεροσυλῶν, τούτοις θάνατός ἐστιν ἡ ζημία: ὧν ἐκεῖνος 


, Ν A ¥ af ν 
νόμους δὲ σκοπῶν av τις τοῦθ᾽ εὕροι. 


,ὕ 9 , A 3 A 9 \ \ A > 

400υπάντων ἀνθρώπων πλεῖστον ἀπεῖχεν. ἀλλὰ μὴν TH πόλει 

γε οὔτε πολέμου κακῶς συμβάντος οὔτε στάσεως οὔτε 

ὃ , ¥ ἵλλ ἴω He) % , » 3 , 

προδοσίας οὔτε ἄλλου κακοῦ οὐδενὸς πώποτε αἴτιος eye 
δὲ Ν ἰδί ὑδέ ἣ ΄ > θ ΄ ¥ 

νετο. οὐδὲ μὴν ἰδίᾳ ye οὐδένα πώποτε ἀνθρώπων οὔτε 

3 aA 3 , » A / > 3 90. 
ἀγαθῶν ἀπεστέρησεν οὔτε κακοῖς περιέβαλεν, ἀλλ᾽ οὐδ 

405 αἰτίαν τῶν εἰρημένων οὐδενὸς πώποτ᾽ ἔσχε. πῶς οὖν ἂν 

ἴω A ἃ ‘ \ A 

ἔνοχος εἴη TH γραφῇ; ὃς ἀντὶ μὲν τοῦ μὴ νομίζειν θεούς, 

ὡς ἐν τῇ γραφῇ γέγραπτο, φανερὸς ἦν θεραπεύων τοὺς 

ἈΝ 4 , > , > \ Ἂς A ’ 

θεοὺς μάλιστα πάντων ἀνθρώπων. ἀντὶ δὲ τοῦ διαφθεί- 

Ν ’ὔ ἃ δὴ ε ’ ὅς ἍΝ, > A ἈΝ 

pew τοὺς νέους, ὃ δὴ ὁ γραψάμενος αὐτὸν ἠτιᾶτο, φανερὸς 

410ἦν τῶν συνόντων τοὺς πονηρὰς ἐπιθυμίας ἔχοντας τούτων 

μὲν. παύων, τῆς δὲ καλλίστης καὶ μεγαλοπρεπεστάτης 

ἀρετῆς, ἧ πόλεις τε καὶ οἶκοι εὖ οἰκοῦσι, προτρέπων 


one. Cf. τούτους εὖ ποιήσαντες ἀπο- 


G. 1139, 1140; H. 758, ande. (Cf. 


πέμπετε Cyr. Vili. 7. 27. 

62. ἐμοὶ δὴ κτλ. : with allusion to 
i. 1. 1, where see on μέν and τῇ πόλει. 
— καὶ δέ: see on κἀκεῖνος δέ 1. 1. 3. — 
τούτοις : refers, by ‘synesis,’ to the 
collective rls. H. 633. Cf. ἕκαστος, 
αὐτοί 54.—@dvaros: for the omis- 
sion of the art. with a pred. noun or 
adj., see G. 956; H. 669. 

63. ἀλλὰ μήν : see on i. 1. 6. — 
πολέμου κακῶς συμβάντος : Of a war's 
turning out badly. The participle 
contains the main idea, and the 
whole phrase may be conveniently 
const. as objective gen. with αἴτιος. 


the acc. with prep. in such phrases 
as μετὰ Κῦρον θανόντα after Cyrus's 
death, and the Lat. ab urbe con- 
dita. 

64. ἔνοχος εἴη: be liable to (lit. 
held in). —6s: see on 1. -- νομίζειν : 
as in i. 1. 1.—-yéypamro: stood 
charged. The aug. omitted, as freq. 
with the plpf. in prose, apparently 
for the sake of euphony.— 6, αὐτόν : 
for the double acc., see G. 1076; 
H. 725. Cf. οὐκ αἰτιῶμαι τάδε τὸν 
θεόν Cyr. vii. 2. 22, τὸ γενόμενον 
τὸ θεῖον αἰτιᾶσθαι Hell. vii. 5. 12. 
—et οἰκοῦσι: are prosperous. Cf. 


62 


63 


64 


42 EENOSQNTOS AILOMNHMONEYMATA A. 2, 3. 


3 θ A A δὲ ’ A > » » > 
ἐπιθυμεῖν: ταῦτα δὲ πράττων πῶς οὐ μεγάλης ἄξιος ἦν 
τιμῆς τῇ πόλει; 
‘Os δὲ δὴ καὶ ὠφελεῖν ἐδόκει μοι τοὺς συνόντας τὰ 
᾿ ¥ ὃ , ε Ν @ > Ν δὲ Ν ὃ ’, 
μὲν ἔργῳ δεικνύων ἑαυτὸν οἷος ἦν, τὰ δὲ καὶ διαλεγόμενος, 
τούτων δὴ γράψω ὁπόσα av διαμνημονεύσω. τὰ μὲν 
τοίνυν πρὸς τοὺς θεοὺς φανερὸς ἦν καὶ ποιῶν καὶ λέγων 
δ ἧπερ ἡ Πυθία ὑποκρίνεται τοῖς ἐρωτῶσι πῶς δεῖ ποιεῖν ἢ 
Ν , x Ν ’ ’, x Ν y¥ 
περὶ θυσίας ἢ περὶ προγόνων θεραπείας ἢ περὶ ἄλλου 
A -» “Ὁ 
τινὸς τῶν τοιούτων. ἢ τε γὰρ Πυθία νόμῳ πόλεως ἀναιρεῖ 
A κι x a 9 
ποιοῦντας εὐσεβῶς av ποιεῖν, Σωκράτης τε οὕτω καὶ 
~ > ’, Ν A » , Ἀ a ¥ 
αὐτὸς ἐποίει Kal Tots ἄλλοις παρήνει, τοὺς δὲ ἄλλως πως 


ποῖαι δὲ πόλεις νομίμως ἂν οἰκήσειαν ; 
Cyr. viii. τ. 2. In Homer, the mean- 
ing of ναιετᾶν, ναίειν is, in like man- 
ner, weakened to something like 
εἶναι. --- μεγάλης τιμῆς : such as the 
reward suggested in Plato Apol. 
36 Dp. — ἄξιος τῇ πόλει : as ini. 1. 1. 

3. In the two preceding chapters 
it was shown that Socrates did not in- 
fluence his followers to their injury 
(negative proof) ; in what follows, it 
is shown in detail that he understood 
how to encourage them in all that is 
good, by word and example (positive 
proof). His piety is first depicted, 
and especially the manner in which 
he would have the gods honored ; 
afterwards, his temperance in all 
bodily pleasures is described. 

1, ὡς, δή: (to show) that, really. 
—Kal ὠφελεῖν : even to be. aiding, 
not only to be abstaining from 
injuring. --- τὰ μέν, τὰ δέ: partly, 
partly. G. 982; Η. 684 b.— δει- 
κνύων ἑαυτόν, οἷος ἦν : for the ‘ pro- 
lepsis,’ see on συνουσίαν i. 2. 18. 
— διαμνημονεύσω : for the mode, see 


G. 1434; H. 916. --- τὰ μὲν τοίνυν: 
τοίνυν indicates the transition to the 
detailed discussion of what has been 
announced ; μέν introduces the first 
part of the discussion, and δέ at the 
beginning of 5, the second. — ἣ 
Πυθία: the Pythia, the priestess of 
Apollo at Delphi. For an account 
of the oracles in general, and the 
Delphic oracle in particular, see 
Gardner and Jevons, Manual of 
Greek Antiq., pp. 106, 107, 264, 265. 
—m@s: see on τίσι 1. 1. 1. --- προ- 
γόνων θεραπείας : for the place of an- 
cestor worship in Greek religion, see 
Gardner and Jevons, p. 72 ff. — ἥ τε 
γὰρ Πυθία, Σωκράτης te: ““ for as the 
Pythia, so Socrates.’’ Cf. ἐγώ re γάρ, 
αἵ re πόλεις ii. 1. 9. — ἀναιρεῖ: the 
technical term for the answers of the 
Pythia. Cf. καὶ ἀνεῖλεν αὐτῷ ὁ 
᾿Απόλλων θεοῖς οἷς ἔδει θύειν An. iii. 
1. 16. --- παρήνει : sc. ποιεῖν. Cf. 
Deinceps in lege est, ut de 
ritibus patriis colantur op- 
timi: de quo cum consule- 
rent Athenienses Apollinem 


3 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA I. 3. 43 


la) ’ Χ > 
᾿ ΤΟ ποιοῦντας περιέργους καὶ ματαίους ἐνόμιζεν εἶναι. 


Ν 
και 


εὔχετο δὲ πρὸς τοὺς θεοὺς ἁπλῶς τἀγαθὰ διδόναι, ὡς τοὺς 


θεοὺς κάλλιστα εἰδότας ὁποῖα ἀγαθά ἐστι: τοὺς δ᾽ 
3 YBa ΄, a 9 , Ἃ , » » 
εὐχομένους χρυσίον ἣ ἀργύριον ἢ τυραννίδα ἢ ἄλλο τι 
ἴω ’ > \ 4 > ’ » x > 
TOV τοιούτων οὐδὲν διάφορον ἐνόμιζεν εὔχεσθαι ἢ εἰ 
16 κυβείαν ἢ μάχην ἢ ἄλλο τι εὔχοιντο τῶν φανερῶς ἀδήλων 


ν 3 4 
ὅπως ἀποβήσοιτο. 


θυσίας δὲ θύων μικρὰς ἀπὸ μικρῶν 


οὐδὲν ἡγεῖτο μειοῦσθαι τῶν ἀπὸ πολλῶν καὶ μεγάλων 


πολλὰ καὶ μεγάλα θυόντων. 


οὔτε γὰρ τοῖς θεοῖς ἔφη 


καλῶς ἔχειν, εἰ ταῖς μεγάλαις θυσίαις μᾶλλον ἢ ταῖς 


20 μικραῖς ἔχαιρον. πολλάκις γὰρ ἂν αὐτοῖς τὰ παρὰ τῶν 


πονηρῶν μᾶλλον ἢ τὰ παρὰ τῶν χρηστῶν εἶναι κεχα- 


᾽’ὔ Ψ' ἃ x A 3 , ¥ iy A > A 
βρισμενα" οὐτ ἂν τοις ἀνθρώποις ἄξιον εἰναι ζην, εἰ Τὰ 


παρὰ τῶν πονηρῶν μᾶλλον ἦν κεχαρισμένα τοῖς θεοῖς ἢ 


Ν Ἁ “ “Ὁ 3 te | l4 Ἁ Ἁ A Ἀ 
τὰ παρὰ τῶν χρηστῶν. ἀλλ᾽ ἐνόμιζε τοὺς θεοὺς ταῖς παρὰ 


265 τῶν εὐσεβεστάτων τιμαῖς μάλιστα χαίρειν. ἐπαινέτης δ᾽ 


> Ἁ Ἦν , 
Hv και TOV εἐποῦυς Τουτου᾽ 


“ κὰδ δύναμιν δ᾽ ἔρδειν ἱέρ᾽ ἀθανάτοισι θεοῖσι -" 


Pythium, quas potissimum 
religiones (rites) tenerent, ora- 
culum editum est, eas quae 
essent in more maiorum Cic. 
de Legg. ii. 15. 40. 

2. εὔχετο πρὸς τοὺς θεούς : εὔχε- 
σθαι πρός τινα is usual when an inf. 
follows. Kr. Spr. 48. 7. 14. Cf. 
Bépéns εὔχετο πρὸς τὸν ἥλιον Hat. vii. 
54. -- ὡς εἰδότας : see on ὡς προση- 
μαίνοντος i. 1. 4. τοὺς θεούς is pur- 
posely repeated. For the thought, 
ef. Socrates, inquit, nihil ultra 
petendum a diis immorta- 
libus arbitrabatur, quam quid 
unicuique esset utile, nos 
autem id plerumque votis ex- 


petere, quod non impetrasse 
melius foret Valer. Max. vii. 2. 
— εἰ εὔχοιντο : for the ellipsis of the 
apod., see G. 1420; H. 905 a, 3. — 
ὅπως ἀποβήσοιτο : depends on ἀδήλων 
(sc. ὄντων). See oni. 1. 6. 

3. μειοῦσθαι: fall short of. — 
καλῶς ἔχειν: without ἄν, after the 
analogy of καλῶς εἶχε, καλὸν ἣν, ἐξῆν, 
etc. See G. 1400; H. 897. --- εἰ ἔχαι- 
pov: for the impf. in dependent 
clauses of indirect discourse, see 
GMT. 691; H. 986. --- ἂν εἶναι κεχα- 
ρισμένα : 86. εἰ ἔχαιρον. --- κὰδ δύναμιν : 
equivalent to κατὰ δύναμιν. For the 
‘apocope’ and ‘ assimilation,’ see G. 


68; H.84D. The verse is from Hesiod 


44 EENO®QNTOS AIITOMNHMONEYMATA A. 3. 


καὶ πρὸς φίλους δὲ καὶ ξένους καὶ πρὸς τὴν ἄλλην δίαι- 


ταν καλὴν ἔφη παραίνεσιν εἶναι τὴν “κὰδ δύναμιν δ᾽ 


80 ἔρδειν." 


3 x / > ~ - μὴ “A 
εἰ δέ τι δόξειεν αὐτῷ σημαίνεσθαι Tapa τῶν 


A e x Ν. Ν. ἴω 
θεῶν, ἧττον ἂν ἐπείσθη παρὰ τὰ σημαινόμενα ποιῆσαι ἢ 
¥ 3 τ τᾶς » θ δὃ la oN A e 4 : Xe Ἂς \ 
εἴ τις αὐτὸν ἔπειθεν ὁδοῦ λαβεῖν ἡγεμόνα τυφλὸν Kal μὴ 


εἰδότα τὴν ὁδὸν ἀντὶ βλέποντος καὶ εἰδότος: καὶ τῶν ἄλλων 


δὲ μωρίαν κατηγόρει, οἵτινες παρὰ τὰ ὑπὸ τῶν θεῶν σημαι- 


“ ΄ / Ν Ν A 
35 νόμενα ποιοῦσί TL, φυλαττόμενοι τὴν παρὰ τοῖς ἀνθρώποις 


ἀδοξίαν. 


παρὰ θεῶν συμβουλίαν. 


“en δ , 3 , ε ΄ Ν \ 
αυτος δὲ TAVTA τἀνθρώπινα πυπέρέεωρα προς ΤῊΝ 


‘ A 
Avairn δὲ τήν τε ψυχὴν ἐπαίδευσε Kal τὸ σῶμα, 7 


, ¥ 9 ΄ ,ὔ ¥ 7 Ν 
χρώμενος ἂν τις, εἰ μὴ τι δαιμόνιον εἴη, θαρραλέως καὶ 


5 A , Ν 9 “Ὁ 3 , 4 ’, 
40 ἀσφαλῶς διάγοι καὶ οὐκ ἂν ἀπορήσειε τοσαύτης δαπά- 


νης. 
ὀλίγα ἐργάζοιτο 


y 
WOTE 


2 Ν > λὴ > ον 3 3 75: ΕΣ ν x 
οὕτω γὰρ εὐτελὴς HY WOT οὐκ οἶδ᾽ εἴ τις οὕτως ἂν 
ἈΝ »Ἤ Ν 4 
μὴ λαμβάνειν τὰ Σωκράτει 


ἀρκοῦντα: σίτῳ μὲν γὰρ τοσούτῳ ἐχρῆτο ὅσον ἡδέως 


Works and Days 5986. --- τὴν ἄλλην 
δίαιταν : ‘‘ our other relations in life.” 
τὴν κὰδ δύναμιν δ᾽ Epderv : the admoni- 
tion (παραίνεσιν) to act according to our 
powers. Cf. τὸ γνῶθι σαυτόν iv. 2. 24. 

4. εἰ δόξειεν αὐτῷ : ‘as often as it 
seemed to him.’’ See on ἐπεί ἱ. 2. 57. 
— dv ἐπείσθη : the prot. really sug- 
gested by this apod. is εἴ τις αὐτὸν 
ἔπειθεν, if any one tried to per- 
suade him; and this prot. is found, 
without its apod., in the next 
sentence. —€mevOev: impf. of at- 
tempted and continued past action. 
--τῶν ἄλλων: for the gen. with 
compounds of κατά, see G. 1128; H. 
752. — πάντα, ὑπερεώρα : see on i. 2. 
9. -- πρός : in comparison with, as in 
i. 2. 52. The Lat. ad is used in the 
same sense. 


5. χρώμενος : for the participle 
of cond., see on λέγων i. 1. 20. — τὶ 
δαιμόνιον : ‘‘something extraordi- 
nary.”? Cf. ἢν μή τι δαιμόνιον κωλύῃ 
Eq. xi. 13. For the two prots. with 
same apod., see GMT. 610. --- καὶ 
οὐκ av... δαπάνης: and would not 
lack the means for such an outlay. 
For the gen. of plenty or want, see 
G. 1112; H. 749. --- εὐτελής (sc. ἡ 
δίαιτα) : frugal.—ovx οἶδ᾽ εἴ τις: 
ἐς ΒΟΔΙΌΘΙΥ any one.’’ --- ἐργάζοιτο : 
would work for, potential optative. 
For ἐργάζομαι in this sense, cf. τὰ ἐπι- 
τήδεια ἐργάζεσθαι ii. 8. 2. --- ὥστε 
μὴ λαμβάνειν: for the inf. of result, 
see G. 1450; H. 953. — τὰ Σωκράτει 
ἀρκοῦντα : what sufficed for Socrates. 
For the thought, cf. i. 6. 4. — ἡδέως : 
with relish. Cf. ἥδιστα ἐσθίων i, 6. 5. 


ae 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA I. 3. 45 


Ν a ν 
ἤσθιε, καὶ ἐπὶ τοῦτο οὕτω παρεσκευασμένος ἤει ὥστε τὴν 


ἴω », “ > A 
45 ἐπιθυμίαν Tov σίτου ὄψον αὐτῷ εἶναι" ποτὸν δὲ πᾶν ἡδὺ 
> '- ΤῊΝ ὃ Ν ᾿ \ / 3 3 Ν ὃ , > ὃ , 
ἣν αὐτῷ διὰ TO μὴ πίνειν, εἰ μὴ διψῴη. εἰ δέ ποτε 


κληθεὶς ἐθελήσειεν ἐπὶ δεῖπνον ἐλθεῖν, ὃ τοῖς πλείστοις 
3 ΄, δον τ Ψ , EIEN \ , 
ἐργωδέστατόν ἐστιν, ὥστε φυλάξασθαι τὸ ὑπὲρ τὸν κόρον 
3 , A ς , , 9 ΄ A \ \ 
ἐμπίπλασθαι, τοῦτο ῥᾳδίως πάνυ ἐφυλάττετο. τοῖς δὲ μὴ 
50 δυναμένοις τοῦτο ποιεῖν συνεβούλευε φυλάττεσθαι τὰ 
πείθοντα μὴ πεινῶντας ἐσθίειν μηδὲ διψῶντας πίνειν. 
Ν Ν ἭΚΩΝ ’ὔ Ἢ ῪὟ ‘\ Ν Ν. 
καὶ γὰρ τὰ λυμαινόμενα γαστέρας καὶ κεφαλὰς καὶ ψυχὰς 
A 3 » > Ψ δ᾽ » 5 ᾽ὔὕ \ Ν 
ταῦτ᾽ ἔφη εἶναι. οἴεσθαι δ᾽ ἔφη ἐπισκώπτων καὶ τὴν 
Κίρκην ts ποιεῖν τοιούτοις τοὺς πολλοὺς δειπνίζουσαν. 
ε An 
s5TOv δὲ Ὀδυσσέα “Eppov τε ὑποθημοσύνῃ καὶ αὐτὸν 
ι 


΄ῪΝ Ἧ ἴω. nw 
ἐγκρατῆ ὄντα Kal ἀποσχόμενον τοῦ ὑπὲρ τὸν κόρον τῶν 


, gy Ν κ΄ 9 , a 
TOLOUT@YV ἅπτεσθαι, διὰ TAVUTA OV γενέσθαι υν. 


τοιαῦτα 


Ν \ 4 »ἬᾺ ν 
μὲν περὶ τούτων ἔπαιζεν ἅμα σπουδάζων. 


- ἐπὶ τοῦτο: i.e. ἐπὶ τὸ ἐσθίειν. --- τὴν 
ἐπιθυμίαν ὄψον εἶναι : cf. λιμῷ δὲ ὅσα- 
περ ὄψῳ διαχρῆσθε ΟὟΥ. 1. 5.12. Cf. 
the Lat. proverb fames optimum 
condimentum. Athenaeus (4, p. 
157) describes Socrates as taking long 
walks in the evening, ‘to collect,’ 
as he said, ‘sauce (ὄψον) for his sup- 
per.’ — διὰ τὸ πίνειν : see on ἐπὶ τὸ 
φροντίζειν i. τ. 12. 

6. 6: precedes its grammatical 
antec. τοῦτο. --- ὥστε φυλάξασθαι : 
namely, to guard against, added in 
explanation of the rel. clause. For 
wore with the inf., instead of the 
simple inf. assubj., see GMT. 588. — 
τὰ πείθοντα κτλ. : ““ tempting dishes.”’ 
Cf. ὁ Σωκράτης παρακελευόμενος φυλάτ- 
τεσθαι τῶν βρωμάτων ὅσα μὴ πεινῶντας 
ἐσθίειν ἀναπείθει (as persuade those 
who are not hungry to eat) Plut. Mor. 
128 pv. For ἐσθίειν and πίνειν as 


objs. of πείθοντα, see G. 1519; H. 
948. 

7. τὴν Κίρκην : the famous sor- 
ceress who bewitched the com- 
panions of Odysseus. Cf. Hom. x 
229 ff. — τοὺς πολλούς : opposed to 
tov ‘Odvocéa. For the double acc. 
with ποιεῖν, see G. 1077; H. 726. — 
ὑποθημοσύνῃ: Ionic for συμβουλῇ, 
like ὑποτίθεσθαι for συμβουλεύειν. --- 
ὄντα : causal.—rod ἅπτεσθαι : for 
the gen. of the articular inf. with 
verbs of hindering or freedom, see 
G. 1549; H. 9653. --- διὰ ταῦτα : like 
εἶτα, ἔπειτα, οὕτως, often used after 
participles to bring out the relation 
(in this case a causal one) of these 
to the main verb. GMT. 857; H. 
976 Ὁ. 

8. ἔπαιζεν ἅμα σπουδάζων : ‘he 
used to say jestingly but with an 
earnest inner meaning.’’ See on 


46 EENO®ONTOS ATIOMNHMONEYMATA A. 3. 


᾿Αφροδισίων δὲ παρήνει τῶν καλῶν ἰσχυρῶς améye- 

θοσθαι: οὐ γὰρ ἔφη ῥᾷδιον εἶναι τῶν τοιούτων ἁπτόμενον 

σωφρονεῖν. ἀλλὰ καὶ Κριτόβουλόν ποτε τὸν Κρίτωνος 

πυθόμενος ὅτι ἐφίλησε τὸν ᾿Αλκιβιάδου υἱὸν καλὸν ὄντα, 
παρόντος τοῦ Κριτοβούλου ἤρετο Ἐενοφῶντα- “Εἰπέ pou,” 9 

ἔφη, “ὦ Ἐενοφῶν, οὐ σὺ Κριτόβουλον ἐνόμιζες εἶναι τῶν 

la 9 4 A x “ ΄, 3. a 

65 σωφρονικῶν ἀνθρώπων μᾶλλον ἢ τῶν θρασέων, καὶ TOV 

προνοητικῶν μᾶλλον ἢ τῶν ἀνοήτων τε καὶ ῥιψοκινδύνων;" 

“Πάνυ μὲν ovr,” ἔφη ὁ Ἐενοφῶν. “Νῦν τοίνυν νόμιζε 

αὐτὸν θερμουργότατον εἶναι καὶ λεωργότατον- οὗτος κἂν 

> , , ΤΟΣ ΤΠ ἄρ τ ἡ, ὅὰ 5 « ere, 
εἰς μαχαίρας κυβιστήσειε κἂν εἰς πῦρ αλοιτο. Kat τίτο 

7057,” ἔφη ὁ Ἐενοφῶν, “ἰδὼν ποιοῦντα τοιαῦτα κατέγνωκας 

ι α 
αὐτοῦ;" “Οὐ γὰρ οὗτος," ἔφη, “ἐτόλμησε τὸν ᾿Αλκιβιά- 
δου υἱὸν φιλῆσαι, ὄντα εὐπροσωπότατον καὶ ὡραιότατον ;” 


3 3 3 ὔ 3) » ε “A nw 
“"ANN εἰ μέντοι, ἔφη ὁ Ἐενοφῶν, “τοιοῦτόν ἐστι τὸ 


iv. 1. 1. --- τῶν καλῶν : limiting gen. 
with ἀφροδισίων. G. 1085; H. 729. 
Cf. τοῖς τῶν ἀφροδισίοις 
ἡδόμενοι ii. 6. 22. --- ἁπτόμενον : see 
on πιστεύων i. 1. ὅ. --- ἀλλὰ καί: 
atque adeo.—KopiréBovdov: for 
the ‘prolepsis,’ see on i. 2. 15. In 
Oec. ii. 7, Socrates says to Crito- 
bulus ὁρῶ ce οἰόμενον πλουτεῖν καὶ 
ἀμελῶς μὲν ἔχοντα πρὸς τὸ μηχανᾶσθαι 
χρήματα, παιδικοῖς δὲ πράγμασι προσέ- 
χοντα τὸν νοῦν (giving your mind to 
Frivolous matters). —rov ᾿Αλκιβιάδου 
υἱόν : as Alcibiades, so far as known, 
had but one son, born in 416, after 
the probable date of this conversa- 
tion, it has been conjectured that 
both here and in 10 the reference is 
to Clinias, the son of Axiochus and 
a cousin of Alcibiades. Cf. Sym. 
iv. 12. 


ὡραίων 


9. εἰπέ: for the accent, see oni. 
2. 41. — ἀνθρώπων : for the partitive 
pred. gen., see on τῶν τριάκοντα i. 2. 
31. — ῥιψοκινδύνων : foolhardy, lit. 
hurlers of risks. —\ewpyétarov: one 
who will do anything, hence most 
reckless, —els μαχαίρας κτλ, : prover- 
bial expressions for incurring great 
risks. Cf. δοκεῖ οὖν μοι εἰς μαχαίρας κυβι- 
στᾶν κινδύνου ἐπίδειγμα (an exhibition) 
εἶναι, ὃ συμποσίῳ οὐδὲν προσήκει Sym. 
vii. 3. — els πῦρ ἅλοιτο: cf. ἐγὼ μετὰ 
Κλεινίου κἂν διὰ πυρὸς loinv Sym. iv. 16. 

10. τί : obj. of ποιοῦντα. --- τοι- 
atta κατέγνωκας αὐτοῦ: have you 
formed such a bad opinion of him. 
For the gen. and acc. with com- 
pounds of κατά, cf. 4. ---οὐ γάρ: 
in a question containing a quick 
retort, as in ii, 3. 16.—a@AN et 
μέντοι: at si profecto. — τὸ 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA I. 3. 47 


ε ’ὔ » x : \ A Ν ,ὕ ἴω 
ῥιψοκίνδυνον epyov, KQaV cyw δοκῶ μοι TOV κίνδυνον TOUTOV 


παθεῖν καλὸν φιλήσας ; 


A ” 5 o 29. . ‘ 

75 ὑπομεῖναι." “Ὦ τλῆμον," ἔφη ὁ Σωκράτης, “kal τί ἂν οἴει 11 
WE. > x CEN 5 ΄ὔ la 

ap οὐκ ἂν αὐτίκα μάλα δοῦλος 


μὲν εἶναι ἀντ᾽ ἐλευθέρου, πολλὰ δὲ δαπανᾶν εἰς βλαβερὰς 


ἡδονάς, πολλὴν δὲ ἀσχολίαν ἔχειν τοῦ ἐπιμεληθῆναί τινος 


καλοῦ κἀγαθοῦ, σπουδάζειν δ᾽ ἀναγκασθῆναι ἐφ᾽ οἷς οὐδ᾽ 


x / ” 3 ε 
80 ἂν μαινόμενος σπουδάσειεν ;” ““Ὦ Ἡράκλεις, ἔφη ὁ 


Ξενοφῶν, “as δεινήν τινα λέγεις δύναμιν τοῦ φιλήματος 


5 ” 
Ewa. 


“Kai τοῦτο, ἔφη ὁ Σωκράτης, “θαυμάζεις; οὐκ 


οἶσθα," ἔφη, “ὅτι τὰ φαλάγγια, οὐδ᾽ ἡμιωβελιαῖα τὸ μέγε- 
θος ὄντα, προσαψάμενα μόνον τῷ στόματι ταῖς τε ὀδύναις 


85 ἐπιτρίβει τοὺς ἀνθρώπους καὶ τοῦ φρονεῖν ἐξίστησιν ;” 


“Ναὶ μὰ Δί᾽," ἔφη ὁ Ἐενοφῶν - “ ἐνίησι γάρ τι τὰ haddy- 
ee δῇ ” “FO A ”» » ε Σ , “ ἈΝ 

για κατὰ τὸ δῆγμα. μῶρε," ἔφη ὁ Σωκράτης, “τοὺς 18 

δὲ καλοὺς οὐκ οἴει φιλοῦντας ἐνιέναι τι, ὅτι σὺ οὐχ 


ὁρᾷς; οὐκ οἶσθ᾽ ὅτι τοῦτο τὸ θηρίον ὃ καλοῦσι καλὸν 


ῥιψοκίνδυνον ἔργον : “what you have 
just described as a foolhardy act.’’ 
τό is equivalent to illud. —av ὑπο- 
μεῖναι : see on ἄν ποτε κινηθῆναι i. te. 
14. 

11. dp οὐκ : For the interr. par- 
ticle, see G. 1603; H. 1015. — 
πολλὴν δὲ ἀσχολίαν κτλ. : ““ἴο have 
no leisure for giving attention to 
any noble or honorable thing,’’ lit. 
to have great lack of leisure. For the 
gen. of the articular inf., see GMT. 
798 ; H. 959. —éq' ots: sc. ἐπὶ τούτοις 
as antecedent. ἐπί with the dat. here 
denotes the motive or end in view. 
See G. 1210, 2 ὁ; H. 799, 2 α. — 
μαινόμενος : for the omission of the 
art. with a subst. participle, see G. 
1560, 2; H. 966. 


\ ε A 4, ὃ ’ ’ὔ 3 A , 
90KaL ὠραιον, τοσούτῳ OELVYOTEPOY ἐστι των φαλαγγίων, 


12. Ἡράκλεις : for the decl., see 
on Περίκλεις i. 2. 41. — ὡς δεινήν τινα: 
what a terrible sort of thing. τὶς, 
like Lat. quidam, may be added to 
adjs. to express indefiniteness of 
nature. G. 1016; H. 702.—ra 
φαλάγγια : for the generic art., see 
G. 950; H. 659. — ὄντα ; concessive. 
—rtot φρονεῖν ἐξίστησι : mente 
destituit, deprives of reason. Cf. 
ἐξιστάμενοι τοῦ ἀναλογίζεσθαι ii. τ. 4. 
—évinor, κατὰ τὸ δῆγμα: inject along 
with their bite. 

13. τοὺς δὲ καλοὺς κτλ. : With 
ellipsis of the correlative μέν clause 
τὰ μὲν φαλάγγια ἐνιέναι τι λέγεις. Cf. 
οὐ δ᾽ ᾧου iii. 3. 11. --- θηρίον : for the 
application of this term to human 
beings, cf. iii, 11. 11. --- τοσούτῳ 


48 EENO®ONTOS AIIOMNHMONEYMATA A. 3. 


ὅσῳ ἐκεῖνα μὲν ἁψάμενα, τοῦτο δὲ οὐδ᾽ ἁπτόμενον [, ἐάν τις 
αὐτὸ θεᾶται,] ἐνίησί τι καὶ πάνυ πρόσωθεν τοιοῦτον ὥστε 
μαίνεσθαι. ποιεῖν; [ἴσως δὲ καὶ οἱ Ἔρωτες τοξόται διὰ 

τοῦτο καλοῦνται, ὅτι καὶ πρόσωθεν οἱ καλοὶ τιτρώσκου- 
95 ov. | 


Ἀ ’; 4 , 
τινὰ καλόν, φεύγειν προτροπάδην. 


ἀλλὰ συμβουλεύω σοι, ὦ Ἐενοφῶν, ὁπόταν ἴδῃς 
σοὶ δέ, ὦ Κριτόβουλε, 
, > / Z Ἂν x » 3 4 
συμβουλεύω ἀπενιαυτίσαι": μόλις yap av Lows ἐν τοσούτῳ 
χρόνῳ [τὸ δῆγμα] ὑγιὴς γένοιο." 
4 ἣν AN? A » Ν ΕῚ , » 
σιάζειν τοὺς μὴ ἀσφαλῶς ἔχοντας πρὸς ἀφροδίσια ᾧετο 


οὕτω δὴ καὶ ἀφροδι- 14 


100 χρῆναι πρὸς τοιαῦτα οἷα, μὴ πάνυ μὲν δεομένου τοῦ σώμα- 
τος, οὐκ ἂν προσδέξαιτο ἡ ψυχή, δεομένου δέ, οὐκ ἂν 
πράγματα παρέχοι, αὐτὸς δὲ πρὸς ταῦτα φανερὸς ἣν οὕτω 
παρεσκευασμένος ὦστε ῥᾷον ἀπέχεσθαι τῶν καλλίστων 
καὶ ὡραιοτάτων ἢ οἱ ἄλλοι τῶν αἰσχίστων καὶ ἀωροτάτων. 

106 [περὶ μὲν δὴ βρώσεως καὶ πόσεως καὶ ἀφροδισίων οὕτω 15 
παρεσκενασμένος ἣν: καὶ ᾧετο οὐδὲν ἂν ἧττον ἀρκούν- 
τως ἤδεσθαι τῶν πολλὰ ἐπὶ τούτοις πραγματευομένων, 
λυπεῖσθαι δὲ πολὺ ἔλαττον. | 


δεινότερον, ὅσῳ : as much more dan- 
gerous, in proportion as. In the 
clauses introduced by ὅσῳ there is 
another comparison, between the 
easier method of avoiding (suggested 
by dyduera), and the more difficult 
one (suggested by οὐδ᾽ ἁπτόμενον): 
Cf. Cyr. vi. 2. 19. ---- κεῖνα, τοῦτο: 
τοῦτο sometimes, as here, refers to 
what is nearer in importance to the 
speaker, though more remote in the 
sentence. ἐκεῖνα, therefore, refers 
to τῶν φαλαγγίων. 

14. καί: refers back to the ad- 
vice given in 6, which here finds its 
application to sensual pleasures. 
For the thought, cf. Sym. iv. 38. — 


ἀφροδισιάζειν : const. with πρὸς τοι- 
αὕτα. 

15. οὕτω παρεσκευασμένος ἦν: 
sic paratam sententiam habe- 
bat. —@v ἥδεσθαι: see on ἂν κινη- 
θῆναι i. τ. 14. --- λυπεῖσθαι : 86. ἄν. 

4. In a conversation with Aristo- 
demus, Socrates shows that there are 
gods: they have given to man powers 
of mind and body admirably adapted 
to his needs: and they will care for 
his welfare, if he will only honor 
them. Whoever is thoroughly con- 
vinced of this is lastingly won to 
virtue. So Socrates understood not 
only τὸ προτρέπειν, but also τὸ mpo- 
dyew ἐπ᾿ ἀρετήν. 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA 1. 4. 49 


Εἰ δέ τινες Σωκράτην νομίζουσιν, ὡς ἔνιοι γράφουσί 4 
τε καὶ λέγουσι περὶ αὐτοῦ τεκμαιρόμενοι, προτρέψασθαι 
μὲν ἀνθρώπους ἐπ᾽ ἀρετὴν κράτιστον γεγονέναι, προάγα: 
γεῖν δ᾽ ἐπ᾽ αὐτὴν οὐχ ἱκανόν, σκεψάμενοι μὴ μόνον ἃ 
5 ἐκεῖνος κολαστηρίου ἕνεκα τοὺς πάντ᾽ οἰομένους εἰδέναι 


ἐρωτῶν ἤλεγχεν, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἃ eae συνημέρευε τοῖς συν- 


διατρίβουσι, δοκιμαζόντων εἰ ἱκανὸς ἣν βελτίους ποιεῖν 


τοὺς συνόντας. 


λέξω δὲ πρῶτον ἃ ποτε αὐτοῦ ἤκουσα 


περὶ τοῦ δαιμονίου διαλεγομένου πρὸς ᾿Αριστόδημον τὸν 


10 μικρὸν ἐπικαλούμενον. καταμαθὼν γὰρ αὐτὸν οὔτε θύοντα 


τοῖς θεοῖς οὔτε μαντικῇ MPSS, ἀλλὰ Kal τῶν ποιούν- 


των ταῦτα καταγελῶντα, “Εἰπέ μοι, edn, “ ὦ ᾿Αριστόδημε, 


» ν 3 , 4 “τὸν 7 ” 
ἔστιν οὕστινας ἀνθρώπους τεθαύμακας ἐπὶ σοφίᾳ; 


1. τεκμαιρόμενοι : ““ conjecturing, 
on superficial observation,’’ without 
obj., as in Cyr. i. 3. ὅ. --- προτρέ- 
Ψασθαι: that Socrates regarded the 
most important step as taken when 
enthusiasm for virtue had been 
aroused, is stated by several writers, 
e.g., Plut. Mor. Ὁ. 798 B, Plato Rep. 
i. 3386. Cf. ut Socratem illum 
solitim aiunt dicere, perfec- 
tum sibi opus esse, si quis 
satis esset concitatus cohor- 
tatione sua ad studium cog- 
noscendae percipiendaeque 
virtutis: quibus enim id per- 
suasum esset, ut nihil mallent 
se esse quam bonos viros, iis 
reliquam facilem esse doc- 
_trinam Cic. de Or. i. 47. —oxepa- 
μενοι, δοκιμαζόντων : ‘let them first 
examine, and then decide.’? ---μή: 
instead of οὐ, as the participle is 
subordinated to the imy. δοκιμα- 
ζόντων. G. 1614; H. 1027.—a 


ἐρωτῶν ἤλεγχεν : the questions by 
which he used to refute, e.g., iii. 6, iv. 
2. — συνδιατρίβουσι : see on τῶν 
συνόντων i, τ. 4.—el qv: for the 
mode, see G. 1487; H. 932. 

2. ἅ ποτε αὐτοῦ ἤκουσα διαλε- 
γομένου : a conversation of his that I 
once heard. For the supplementary 
participle, see on i. 1. 1]. -- τοῦ 
δαιμονίου : the Deity, as manifested 
to men. —’AptordSnpov: afterward 
a warm friend of Socrates; cf. 
᾿Αριστόδημος ἣν Tis, 
ἀνυπόδητος ἀεί, 


Κυδαθηναιεύς, 
σμικρός, Σωκράτους 
ἐραστὴς ὧν ἐν τοῖς μάλιστα τῶν 
τότε Plato Sym. 173 8. --- θύοντα : 
for the supplementary participle 
in indirect discourse, cf. i. 2. 14. 
-- ἀλλὰ καί: but even. — τῶν ποιούν- 
των: for the gen., cf. τῶν ἄλλων i. 
3. 4. tori οὕστινας : equivalent 
to dpa ἐνίους. ἃ. 1029; H. 998 c. 
--- τεθαύμακας : admire, i.e. ‘* have 
come to admire.’’ — σοφίᾳ : genius. 


“A ” 
15 αὐτῶν. 


50 EENO®ONTOS AIOMNHMONEYMATA A. 4. 


“"Eywye,” ἔφη. 


Ν : Ν 
καὶ os, “Λέξον ἡμῖν," ἔφη, “τὰ ὀνόματα 8 
« 9 Ν \ ,ὕ ». κα ΄ ν » 

ἔπι μὲν τοίνυν ἔπων ποιήσει Ὅμηρον ἔγωγε 


μάλιστα τεθαύμακα, ἐπὶ δὲ διθυράμβῳ Μελανιππίδην, 
ἐπὶ δὲ τραγῳδίᾳ Σοφοκλέα, ἐπὶ δὲ ἀνδριαντοποιίᾳ Πολύ- 
κλειτον, ἐπὶ δὲ ζωγραφίᾳ Ζεῦξιν." “Πότερά σοι δοκοῦσιν 
ε 3 ’ἅ ν » , \ ΦΌΩΣ ΚΑ > 

ol ἀπεργαζόμενοι εἴδωλα adpovd τε Kal ἀκίνητα ἀξιο- 
20 θαυμαστότεροι εἶναι ἢ οἱ ζῷα. ἔμφρονά τε καὶ ἐνεργά;" 
« ΄ \ , ε A x \ , Prick yee 
Πολύ, νὴ Δία, ot Coa, εἴπερ γε μὴ τύχῃ τινί, ἀλλὰ ἀπὸ 


γνώμης ταῦτα γίγνεται." 


ςς A A 5 7. 9 4 
Τῶν δὲ ἀτεκμάρτως ἐχόντων 


4 Y » Ν ~ A 5 δ 3 4 »” 
OTOV ἕνεκα ἔστι, καὶ TOV φανερῶς eT ὠφελείᾳ οντων 


πότερα τύχης καὶ πότερα γνώμης ἔργα κρίνεις ;” 


i Πρέπει 


Ν τὰ 3.63 3 λ ΄ 4 , 53 » 3) 
25 meV TH ἐπ wpe ELA γιγνομενα YVWUNS εἰναι Epya. 


3. καὶ ὅς: and he. For the rel. 
in its original dem. meaning, see G. 
1023, 2; H. 275 Ὁ. --- τοίνυν : well 
then. —érav ποιήσει : epic poetry. — 
διθυράμβῳ : often in pl., like ἴαμβοι, 
ἀνάπαιστοι, hence some editors read 
ἐπὶ δὲ διθυράμβων (sc. ποιήσει). --- 
“ῬΜελανιππίδην : there were two lyric 
poets of this name, grandfather and 
grandson, both of the island Melos. 
The younger was a contemporary of 
Socrates, and is prob. the one here 
meant. — Σοφοκλέα : the famous 
tragic poet of Athens, 495-406 B.c. 
- Πολύκλειτον : the sculptor, of 
Sicyon, who flourished about 430 
B.c. and was celebrated for his 
statues of athletes. — Ζεῦξιν : the 
painter, of Heraclea in Magna 
Graecia, of about the same date. 
For an account of these artists, see 
Tarbell’s History of Greek Art. 

4. πότερα, 4: for the use of par- 
ticles in alternative questions, see G. 
1606 ; H. 1017. πότερα is omitted in 
translation. — εὔπερ ye: an emphatic 


if indeed, intimating that Aristo- 
demus reserves decision on this 
point. Cf. καὶ εἴπερ γέ τινας δέοι, 
περὶ τῆς ἀναιρέσεως οὐδένα μᾶλλον ἔχειν 
αὐτοὺς αἰτιάσασθαι ἢ τούτους, οἷς προσε- 
τάχθη and if blame should attach to 
any one with regard to the failure 
to rescue (the shipwrecked crews, 
after the battle of the Arginusae), 
they could hold no one more responsi- 
ble than those to whom this duty had 
been assigned Hell. i. 7. θ.--- τύχῃ 
τινί: obs. the difference between 
the dat. of means and ἀπὸ γνώμης, 
which suggests a creative agency. 
—Tav... ἐχόντων. .. ἔστι: of 
those things which afford no indi- 
cation of the purpose for which they 
exist. Cf. ἀδήλων ὅπως ἀποβήσοιτο 
i. 1.6. The gens. τῶν ἐχόντων and 
τῶν ὄντων depend respectively upon. 
the pronominal adjs. πότερα, πότερα. 
- πρέπει μέν: it certainly stands to 
reason, with the inf. εἶναι as subj. of 
πρέπει. For μέν with the force of 
μήν, see Η. 1087, 12. 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA 1. 4. 


51 


«Οὔκουν δοκεῖ σοι 6 ἐξ ἀρχῆς ποιῶν ἀνθρώπους ἐπ᾽ ὠφε- 
, al 5 A 9 @ 5 , 4 > 
λείᾳ προσθεῖναι αὐτοῖς du ὧν αἰσθάνονται ἕκαστα, ὀφθαλ- 


Ν Ν ν Φ- & Ν ε , > \ σ 
μοὺς μὲν ὥστε ὁρᾶν τὰ ὁρατά, ὦτα δὲ ὥστε ἀκούειν τὰ 


᾿ἀκουστά; 
A »” ky 
30dav ἡμῖν ὄφελος ἦν; 


ὀσμῶν γε μήν, εἰ μὴ ῥῖνες προσετέθησαν, τί 
, 9 ἃ ¥ > Vs Ἁ 
τίς δ᾽ ἂν αἴσθησις ἦν γλυκέων καὶ 


x 4, ἴω 
δριμέων καὶ πάντων τῶν διὰ στόματος ἡδέων, εἰ μὴ 


γλῶττα τούτων γνώμων ἐνειργάσθη ; 


Ν ὃ x , 3 
TPOS O€ τουτοις OV 


δοκεῖ σοι καὶ τάδε προνοίας ἔργοις ἐοικέναι, τό, ἐπεὶ 

3 “A c 
ἀσθενὴς μέν ἐστιν ἡ ὄψις, βλεφάροις αὐτὴν θυρῶσαι, ἃ 
86 ὅταν μὲν αὐτῇ χρῆσθαί τι δέῃ ἀναπετάννυται, ἐν δὲ τῷ 


ν Χ ’ : 
ὕπνῳ συγκ ειἰεται: 


ὡς δ᾽ ἂν μηδὲ ἄνεμοι βλάπτωσιν, 


ἡθμὸν βλεφαρίδας ἐμφῦσαι: ὀφρύσι TE ἀπογεισῶσαι τὰ 
ε A «ε 3 A A 

ὑπὲρ τῶν ὀμμάτων, ws μηδ᾽ ὁ ἐκ τῆς κεφαλῆς ἱδρὼς 
κακουργῇ᾽ τὸ δὲ τὴν ἀκοὴν δέχεσθαι μὲν πάσας φωνάς, 
40 ἐμπίπλασθαι δὲ μήποτε: καὶ τοὺς μὲν πρόσθεν ὀδόντας 


5. οὔκουν : nonneigitur. For 
the distinction between οὔκουν and 
οὐκοῦν, see on ii. 1. 8. --- ἐπ᾿ ὠφελείᾳ 
προσθεῖναι αὐτοῖς : bestowed upon 
them for a useful purpose. —8v ὧν 
αἰσθάνονται ἕκαστα: the organs 
through which they perceive differ- 
ent objects. For the omission of 
the antec., see on i. 2. 19. — ὀφθαλ- 
pots, ara: for the partitive appos., 
see on i. 2. 60. — ὀσμῶν : subjective 
gen. with ὄφελος. G. 1085, 2; H. 
729 Ὁ. --- γὲ μήν: further, employed 
here to avoid the monotony of ἃ 
too frequent repetition of δέ. --- εἰ 
μὴ προσετέθησαν : for the supposition 
contrary to fact, see G. 1397; H. 
895. — ὄφελος : for defective nouns, 
see G. 289; H. 215 Ὁ. --- τῶν διὰ 
. στόματος ἡδέων : ‘‘ things pleasant to 
the taste.”? — γνώμων : α critic (not 


to be confused with γνωμῶν). Cf. 
Eng. ‘gnomon’ of a sundial. For 
the pred. nom., see G. 907; H. 614. 

6. οὐ δοκεῖ σοι κτλ.: do you not 
think that the following things also 
resemble works of design? τάδε in- 
troduces the infs. with τό as far as 
ἀπογεισῶσαι, and the remaining infs., 
beginning with τὸ δέχεσθαι, are 
summed up in ταῦτα οὕτω πεπραγμένα. 
- τὸ βλεφάροις αὐτὴν θυρῶσαι: the 
providing it with a door of eyelids, 
lit. dooring it with eyelids. Similarly 
ἀπογεισῶσαι below. For the denom- 
inative verbs, cf. φυτευσαμένῳ 1. 1. 
8.— αὐτῇ χρῆσθαί τι : to use it for 
any purpose. For the neut. pron. 
with χράομαι and the dat. of means, 
see H. 777 a. — ὡς Gv: for ἄν in final 
clauses, see G. 1367; H. 882. — 
ἣθμόν : as a screen, pred. accusative. 


52 EENO®ONTOS AILTOMNHMONEYMATA A. 4. 


A , ν ᾽ > Ν δὲ “4 ν 
πᾶσι ζῴοις οἴους τέμνειν εἶναι, τοὺς δὲ γομφίους οἵους 
\ 4 ᾽ 4 οὗ / ’ 3 
παρὰ τούτων δεξαμένους λεαίνειν: καὶ στόμα μέν, δι 
a ® : Ἂς A κ᾿ > , , > las 
ov ὧν ἐπιθυμεῖ τὰ Coa εἰσπέμπεται, πλησίον ὀφθαλμῶν 
καὶ ῥινῶν καταθεῖναι: ἐπεὶ δὲ τὰ ἀποχωροῦντα δυσχερῆ, 
45 ἀποστρέψαι τοὺς τούτων ὀχετοὺς [καὶ ἀπενεγκεῖν) ἧ 
δυνατὸν προσωτάτω ἀπὸ τῶν αἰσθήσεων. ταῦτα οὕτω προ- 
“ A : xX 
νοητικῶς πεπραγμένα ἀπορεῖς πότερα τύχης ἢ γνώμης 
Y 

ἔργα ἐστίν; “Οὐ μὰ τὸν At’,” ἔφη, “ἀλλ᾽ οὕτω γε σκο- 
πουμένῳ πάνυ ἔοικε ταῦτα σοφοῦ τινος δημιουργοῦ καὶ 
δ0 φιλοζῴου τεχνήμασι.᾽ “Τὸ δὲ ἐμφῦσαι μὲν. ἔρωτα τῆς 
τεκνοποιίας, ἐμφῦσαι δὲ ταῖς γειναμέναις ἔρωτα τοῦ ἐκτρέ- 
φειν, τοῖς δὲ τραφεῖσι μέγιστον μὲν πόθον τοῦ ζῆν, μέγιστον 
δὲ φόβον τοῦ θανάτου; " “᾿Αμέλει καὶ ταῦτα ἔοικε μηχα- 


- ᾽ὔ ῪΜ icy λ - 3” 
νήμασί τινος ζῴα εἶναι βουλευσαμένου. 

5 A A ~ 
“Ἐρώτα γοῦν Kat ἀποκρινοῦ- 


55 δοκεῖς τι φρόνιμον ἔχειν; ” 
᾽») 


μαι. 


--΄λῴοις : dat. of possessor. Η. 7608 Ὁ. 
-- οἵους : 1.6. τοιούτους, wore. For 
οἷος alone with the inf., see G. 1526, 
last example; H. 1000. — τοὺς 
γομφίους : the molars. — παρὰ τούτων 
δεξαμένους λεαίνειν : to receive it (the 
food) from these, and masticate it. 
- καταθεῖναι : placing, with resump- 
tion of the subj. of θυρῶσαι and 
ἀπογεισῶσαι. Here, as in 11, the 
Creator is thought of as an artist 
who arranges at will the mate- 
rials before him. — ἐπεὶ δυσχερῆ : sc. 
ἐστί. --- ἀποστρέψαι Kal ἀπενεγκεῖν : 
turning away and removing.— ἢ Svva- 
τόν προσωτάτω: quantum fieri 
potest remotissime. 

7. od pa τὸν Ala: sc. ἀπορῶ For 
the particles of swearing, cf. i. 2. 9. 
-,- οὕτω ye σκοπουμένῳ (Sc. τινί): to 


Σὺ δὲ σαυτὸν 


“Ἄλλοθι δὲ οὐδαμοῦ οὐδὲν οἴει φρόνιμον εἶναι; 


any one considering it from that 
point of view. For the dat. of rela- 
tion, see on τῇ πόλει 1. 1. 1. — τεχνή- 
μασι : contrivances. — τὸ δὲ ἐμφῦσαι : 
the omitted pred. (τίνι ταῦτα ἔοικε ;) 
of this sent. may be readily antici- 
pated from the answer. — ἀμέλει : 
originally an imy. equivalent to feel 
no anxiety, hence, as adv., assuredly. 
---μηχανήμασι : not essentially differ- 
ent from τεχνήμασι. --- τινὸς ζῷα κτλ. : 
of one who has determined the exist- 
ence of living beings. 

8. Aristodemus has now con- 
ceded the existence of a being who, 
with wise forethought, has _ pro- 
vided men with admirably contrived 
bodies and the impulse toward propa- 
gation and support of offspring. In 
this section, he is shown that the 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA I. 4. 53 


καὶ ταῦτα εἰδὼς OTL γῆς TE μικρὸν μέρος ἐν τῷ σώματι TOA- 
A ἃ a a ~ 
λῆς οὔσης ἔχεις καὶ ὑγροῦ βραχὺ πολλοῦ ὄντος, Kal τῶν 
» 7 ’ὔ ᾿, ε ’ Ν 7 , 
ἄλλων δήπου μεγάλων ὄντων ἑκάστου μικρὸν μέρος λαβόντι 


θ0τὸ σῶμα συνήρμοσταΐ σοι; 


»“3ν Ν , » 3 ἴω 
VOUV δὲ μονον apa οὐδαμοῦ 


Ν A A aA , Ἁ 
ὄντα σὲ εὐτυχῶς πως δοκεῖς συναρπάσαι, καὶ τάδε τὰ ὑπερ- 


4 \ nO » ὃ > 3 , ΝΕ οἱ ¥ 
μεγε YQ KGL TANVOS ἄπειρα OL ἀφροσύνην τινα OUVTWS OLEL 


> , Ψ 5. ἐς Ν 79 3 Ν ε A Ν ld ν 
εὐτάκτως ἔχειν; “Ma Δί ’ οὐ γὰρ ope τους κυρίους, ὠὡσπερ 


wn 5 ’ 7 Ν ’ ” 
των ἐνθάδε γιγνομένων τους δημιουργούς. 


“ Οὐδὲ γὰρ 


\ ~ , \ ε ἊὉ ἃ “ , / 3 4 
65 τὴν σαυτου ov ye ψυχὴν Opas, ἣ του σώματος κυρία ἐστίν' 


Ψ , A » , , Ψ 2QA , 
WOTE κατα YE TOUTO ἔξεστί σοι λέγειν ΟΤι οὐδὲν γὙΡνΩωβμῇ); 


κ᾿ , , ” ν εν ; ¥ 
ἀλλὰ τύχῃ πάντα πράττεις." καὶ ὁ ᾿Αριστόδημος, “Οὔτοι, 


ἔφη, “ἐγώ, ὦ Σώκρατες, ὑπερορῶ τὸ δαιμόνιον, ἀλλ᾽ ἐκεῖνο 


existence of gods may also be 
inferred from the intellectual nature 
of man. As the component ele- 
ments (γῇ and ὑγρόν) of our bodies 
have been obtained from an external 
material universe, so our reason may 
be supposed to be a part of a Reason 
to be sought beyond ourselves; in 
default of whose presence and power 
the world of order could owe its 
existence to blind chance only. In 
opening this line of thought, Socra- 
tes begins with the abrupt question 
σὺ δὲ σαυτὸν δοκεῖς τι φρόνιμον ἔχειν ; 
to which Aristodemus, not seeing 
the connection of this with the 
preceding discussion, cautiously 
answets: ‘ Well, ask on, and I will 
answer.’ The substance of the 
passage is given by Cicero, Pro Mil. 
31. 84. Cf. also his De Nat. Deor. 
li. 6, Plato Philebus 80 a.—kal 
ταῦτα, εἰδώς : and that too, although 
you know. For the participle, see 
On κεκτημένος i. 2. 1.— νοῦν δὲ μόνον 
κτλ.: but mind alone then, which 


does not exist elsewhere, you think 
that you have caught up by some. 
lucky chance? Cf. unde enim 
hanc mentem homo arripuit? 
ut ait apud Xenophontem 
Socrates Cic. de Nat. Deor. ii. 6. 18. 

9. pa Δία: certainly, i.e. “1 do 
not believe in an overruling intelli- 
gence.’’ μὰ Ala, instead of οὐ μὰ Ala, 
may be used when a neg. precedes 
(as here ἄλλοθι οὐδαμοῦ οὐδὲν εἶναι), or 
follows, or is implied in the context. 
--αὐδὲ γάρ : why, neither. γάρ, inan 
answer, generally refers to an asser- 
tion implied in the question or state- 
ment preceding, or readily supplied 
from the connection, as here ovy 
ὁρᾶς τοὺς κυρίους" οὐδὲ yap κτλ. Cf. 
i. 3. 10, ii. τ. 2. ---κατά γε τοῦτο: 
according to this reasoning, at least. 
For the position of γέ, see H. 1037, 
1a. Cf. ἤκουσεν οὐδεὶς ἔν ye τῷ 
φανερῷ An. i. 3. 21. 

10. τὸ δαιμόνιον: the Deity, as 
in 2. --- ἐκεῖνο: expressing remote- 
ness, hence chosen instead of αὐτό. 


70 προσδεῖσθαι." 


δ4 


ΞΕΝΟΦΩ͂ΝΤΟΣ ΑΠΟΜΝΗΜΟΝΕΎΜΑΤΑ A. 4. 


μεγαλοπρεπέστερον ἡγοῦμαι ἢ ὡς τῆς ἐμῆς θεραπείας 


“Οὔκουν, ἔφη, “dow μεγαλοπρεπέστερον 


x Ρ] Ὁ Ἂν 4 4 “~ ’ 3 | ie 
dv ἀξιοῖ σὲ θεραπεύειν, τοσούτῳ μᾶλλον τιμητέον αὐτό; 


“Eb toi,” ἔφη, “ὅτι, εἰ νομίζοιμι θεοὺς ἀνθρώπων τι 


φροντίζειν, οὐκ av ἀμελοίην αὐτῶν." 


» 3 "» 
“"EretT οὐκ οἴει 


φροντίζειν; ot πρῶτον μὲν μόνον τῶν ζῴων ἄνθρωπον 


75 ὀρθὸν ἀνέστησαν: ἡ δὲ ὀρθότης καὶ προορᾶν πλέον 


v7 


« 


ποιεῖ δύνασθαι καὶ τὰ ὕπερθεν μᾶλλον θεᾶσθαι καὶ 


χὰ A @ Ν » Ἁ 5 Ν . 4 
ἧττον κακοπαθεῖν οἷς καὶ ὄψιν Kal ἀκοὴν καὶ στόμα 


5 ᾽ὕ Y¥ A \ » ε A “ὃ 28 
ἐνεποίησαν ἔπειτα τοῖς μὲν ἄλλοις ἑρπετοῖς πόδας €0W- 


ἃ \ , : , ΄, 9 ΄, \ 
καν, Ol TO πορεύεσθαι μονον παρέχουσιν, ἀνθρώπῳ δὲ 


\ “ ᾽ ἃ Ν “ a) 3 ’ 
80 καὶ χειρας προσέθεσαν, αἱ τὰ πλεῖστα οἷς εὐδαιμονέσ- 


3 4 3 \ 5 ’ὔ 
τεροι ἐκείνων ἐσμὲν ἐξεργάζονται. 


καὶ μὴν γλῶττάν γε12 


πάντων τῶν ζῴων ἐχόντων, μόνην τὴν τῶν ἀνθρώπων 


3 ’ὔ ν »¥ > “~ 4 nw , 
ἐποίησαν ovav ἄλλοτε ἀλλαχῃ ψαύουσαν τοῦ στόματος 


3 a Ν \ \ ΄ / 3 , a 
ἀρθροῦν τε τὴν φωνὴν καὶ σημαίνειν πάντα ἀλλήλοις a 


— as: equivalent to ἢ ὥστε, cf. iii. 
5. 17. For ws and the inf. after the 
comparative with 7, see G. 1458; 
H. 9864. --- οὔκουν: as in ὅ. -- ὅσῳ 
μεγαλοπρεπέστερον κτλ.: the more 
magnificent he is and yet deigns to care 
for you. The very sublimity of the 
Deity, taken with his benevolence, is 
an additional reason for honoring him, 
and not an excuse for ignoring him. 
11. εἰ νομίζοιμι, οὐκ ἂν ἀμελοίην : 
for fut. conds. of the less vivid form, 
see G. 1408 ; H. 900. — φροντίζειν: the 
omitted subj. (αὐτούς) is unmistakably 
suggested by the preceding αὐτῶν. --- 
οἵ : see on ds i. 2. 1. — μόνον τῶν ζῴων: 
alone among living beings. — ἀνέστη- 
σαν: laor., thetrans. use. For trans. 
and intr. senses in the same verb, see 
G. 1231; H. 500, and a. — πλέον : 


belongs to προορᾶν. ---- ἔπειτα: without 
δέ, as εἶτα in i. 2. 1. — ἑρπετοῖς : else- 
where used for ¢@a chiefly by the 
poets. Cf. ὅσσ᾽ ἐπὶ γαῖαν | ἑρπετὰ 
γίγνονται καὶ ὕδωρ καὶ θεσπιδαὲς πῦρ 
Hom. 6 418. — ots: for the dative of 
means, see G. 1181; H. 776. — 
ἐκείνων : i.e. τῶν ἑρπετῶν. 

12. καὶμήν: ac profecto, and 
further. See on ἀλλὰ μήν i. 1. 6.— 
οἵαν: capable. See on ofovs 6.— 
ἄλλοτε ἀλλαχῇ κτλ.: Cf. (lingua) 
sonos vocis distinctos et 
pressos efficit, cum et ad 
dentes et ad alias partes pel- 
lit oris Cic. de Nat. Deor. ii. 59. 
149. -- στόματος : for the gen. with 
verbs of touching, see G. 1099; H. 
738. —dpOpotv φωνήν : to produce ar- 
ticulate speech. — καὶ σημαίνειν : 1.6. 


So oa, ee 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA I. 4. | 55 


85 βουλόμεθα. [τὸ δὲ καὶ τὰς τῶν ἀφροδισίων ἡδονὰς τοῖς 


» ἴω al 
μὲν ἄλλοις ζῴοις δοῦναι περιγράψαντας τοῦ ἔτους χρόνον, 


ἡμῖν δὲ συνεχῶς μέχρι γήρως ταῦτα παρέχειν ;] 
νυν μόνον ἤρκεσε τῷ θεῷ τοῦ σώματος ἐπιμεληθῆναι, 


᾽’ὕ 
οὐ τοί- 18 


> > 9 , l4 3 Ν \ \ ’ ~ 
ἀλλ΄, ὁπερ μέγιστόν ἐστι, Kal THY ψυχὴν κρατίστην τῷ 


90 ἀνθρώπῳ ἐνέφυσε- τίνος γὰρ ἄλλου ζῴου ψυχὴ πρῶτα 


μὲν θεῶν τῶν τὰ μέγιστα καὶ κάλλιστα συνταξάντων 


ἤσθηται ὅτι εἰσί; τί δὲ φῦλον ἄλλο ἢ ἄνθρωποι θεοὺς 


θ ’ Z / de ἣν ~ > θ ’ ε ’ 
εραπεύουσι; ποία Oe ψυχὴ τῆς ἀνθρωπίνης ἱκανωτέρα 


προφυλάττεσθαι ἢ λιμὸν ἢ δίψος ἢ ψύχη ἢ θάλπη, ἢ 


, 3 A x es 3 “ x Ν , 
95 VOT OLS ἐπικουρῆσαι, ἢ ρώμην ἀσκῆσαι, [7 προς μάθησιν 


3 A A & x > , x »¥ x ’ ε , 
ἐκπονῆσαι,] ἢ οσα ἂν AKOVON ἢ ἴδῃ 7) μάθῃ LKAVWTEPa 


3 \ ἰοὺ > ἈΝ 4 4 4 
ἐστὶ διαμεμνῆσθαι; οὐ yap πάνυ σοι κατάδηλον ὅτι 14 


παρὰ τὰ ἄλλα ζῷα ὥσπερ θεοὶ ἄνθρωποι βιοτεύουσι, 


Ν ~ , \ [οὐ “ ΕΣ 
φύσει καὶ TH σώματι καὶ TH ψυχῇ κρατιστεύοντες ; οὔτε 


καὶ wore ἡμᾶς σημαίνειν, the subj. of 


the inf. being anticipated from ἀλλή- 
λοις and βουλόμεθα. --- τὸ δὲ δοῦναι 
KTX.: 86. οὐ θαυμαστόν ἐστιν; --- Tatra: 
refers to τὰς ἡδονάς, the neut. gen- 
eralizing the conception. Cf. δεῖ 
πρὸς ταῦτα (sc. ἐπιθυμίας) οὐκ ἧττον 
διαμάχεσθαι Oec. i. 23. 

13. τοίνυν : further. For τοίνυν 
as a particle of transition, see Kr. 
Spr. 69. 62. —pévov: the usual posi- 
tion of μόνον belonging to the inf., 
when the latter is preceded by οὐκ 
ἀρκεῖ. Cf. Cyr. viii. 8. 16, Ἔνι 
κρατίστην : as supreme. For the 
pred. position of the adj., see 
G. 971; H. 670. — ἐνέφυσε: im- 
planted, as in 7. ---ψυχή: ‘‘intel- 
ligence.’? — πρῶτα μέν : rarer than 
πρῶτον μέν, and followed here by δέ 
only, instead of ἔτι δέ, or ἔπειτα. --- 


θεῶν ἤσθηται, ὅτι εἰσί :. has perceived 
that the gods exist, lit. has perceived 
the gods that they exist. For the 
‘prolepsis,’ see on συνουσίαν i. 2. 13. 
--- φῦλον : race. —Qepamedovor: for 
the pl. after a collective subj., see 
G. 900; H. 609. — ψύχη, θάλπη: 
pl. in abstract sense. H. 636. — 
ixavetépa ἐστί: the closing of a 
sent. with a question which recalls 
the beginning, and repeats its words, 
is common with Xenophon, e.g., 
iy 0. Op ed, av. 4. 12; Ocec.. ii 
15. 

14. παρά: in comparison with. 
G. 1218, 3 d; H. 802, 8 c. — φύσει: 
by nature. For the dat. of manner, 
see reference on οἷς 11.— καί, καί: 
correlative, and subordinating the 
two dats. σώματι and ψυχῇ to φύσει. 
--- κρατιστεύοντες : ‘being lords of 


56 EENO®ONTOS ATLOMNHMONEYMATA. A. 4. 


100 yap Bods ἂν ἔχων σῶμα, ἀνθρώπου δὲ γνώμην, ἐδύνατ᾽ 


x / Gea 4 »25 ὦ fal ΕἾ Ε 9 
ἂν πράττειν ἁ ἐβούλετο, οὐθ᾽ ὅσα χεῖρας ἔχει, ἄφρονα ὃ 
3 , Ἂν; , We) Ν » Ν ὃ ban ΄ ‘ a / 

ἐστί, πλέον οὐὸὲν EXEL’ σὺ OE ἀμφοτέρων τῶν πλείστου 


ἀξίων τετυχηκὼς οὐκ οἴει σοῦ θεοὺς ἐπιμελεῖσθαι; ἀλλ᾽ 


9 , , A 3 \ ΜᾺ / 3) 
ὅταν τί ποιήσωσι νομιεῖς αὐτοὺς σοῦ φροντίζειν ; 

, 9 \ \ , 9 , , Ψ 
105 πέμπωσιν, ὥσπερ σοὶ φῃς πέμπειν αὐτούς, συμβούλους, ὅ 


Ν A Ν A wn 9 
Tl XP” TOLELY Καὶ μὴ Ποιειν. 


“Ὅταν δὲ ᾿Αθηναίοις," ἔφη, 


« θ , ὃ Ν a ζ΄ 3 Ν Ν 
πυνὕανομενοις TL OLA μαντικὴς φράζωσιν, οὐ και σοι 


δοκεῖς φράζειν αὐτούς, οὐδ᾽ 


ὅταν τοῖς Ἕλλησι τέρατα 


’ 3 ν lal 
πέμποντες προσημαίνωσιν, οὐδ᾽ ὅταν πᾶσιν ἀνθρώποις, 


53 Ν ’ Ν 3 ~ 3 5 ’ὔ’ ’ὔ ΡΨ 
110 ἀλλὰ μόνον σὲ ἐξαιροῦντες ἐν ἀμελείᾳ κατατίθενται; οἴει 16 


>_> x Ν Ἃ A 5 θ ’ὔ δό 3 ἴω ε ε , 

δ᾽ ἂν τοὺς θεοὺς τοῖς ἀνθρώποις δόξαν Euddoa ὡς ἱκανοί 
a A ἴω A > Ν Ν > Ν 

εἰσιν εὖ καὶ κακῶς ποιεῖν, εἰ μὴ δυνατοὶ ἦσαν, καὶ τοὺς 


3 , > , Ν , ΄ 5. 2 > ἃ 
ἀνθρώπους ἐξαπατωμένους τὸν πάντα χρόνον οὐδέποτ᾽ ἂν 


creation.”’—av ἔχων, ἐδύνατ᾽ ἄν: 


for the cond., see on εἰ προσετέθησαν 
5, and, for the partic. containing a 
prot., oni. 1. 20. For the repetition 
of dv, see G. 1812; H. 864. Cf. 
λαβὼν δ᾽ ἂν τὸν ἵππον ἐκ τοῦ παρα- 
χρῆμα ἂν ἐστρατεύετο Heil. vi. 4. 11. 
-- ἃ ἐβούλετο: quae vellet (not 
volebat). For the assimilation of 
the mode in cond. rel. sents., see 
G. 1440; H. 919b. . Cf. iii. 5. 8. — 
ἔχει, ἐστί: ind., as Socrates is now 
speaking of animals that really exist, 
€.g., apes. — πλέον οὐδὲν ἔχει : have 
no advantage. — ἀμφοτέρων : i.e. 
σώματος and ψυχῆς. --- ὅταν τί ποιή- 
σωσι νομιεῖς : when they do what, 
will you think? i.e. ‘*what must 
they do to make you think?” For 
the interr. depending on a depend- 
ent word, see H. 1012. . 

15. συμβούλους : Aristodemus is 
thinking of the δαιμόνιον of Socrates, 


of which he has no very clear con- 
ception, and uses συμβούλους, per- 
haps with a touch of irony, for the 
impersonal συμβουλήν, advisers in- 
stead of ‘‘ advice.’’ — 6 τι χρὴ ποιεῖν 
κτλ. : the clause may be taken as obj. 
of the verbal idea in συμβούλου-. --- 
᾿Αθηναίοις, “Ἕλλησι, πᾶσιν ἀνθρώ- 
ποις : an ascending climax. — πυνθα- 
νομένοις : inquiring. —adAAad ... 
κατατίθενται : the change from in- 
direct to direct discourse adds to the 
sarcastic emphasis, ‘‘ but they select 
you alone, do they, and leave you in 
neglect ἢ ᾽" 

16. ἂν ἐμφῦσαι : for examples of 
the inf. with ἄν in indirect discourse, 
see G. 1808; H. 964 Ὁ. Cf. iii. 5. 


2. — ὡς: that, depends on δόξαν belief. 


- καί (before rods ἀνθρώπους) : ΟΥ̓́, 
since ἐξαπατωμένους suggests an al- 
ternative condition. —8vvarol: sc. εὖ 
καὶ κακῶς ποιεῖν. ---- πολυχρονιώτατα : 


«Ὅταν 15 


ee 13. ΡΥ ὙῚ Pie 
a lodd 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA I. 4. 57 


3 4 5 ε “~ ν A 4 A 4 
αἰσθέσθαι; οὐχ ὁρᾷς ὅτι τὰ πολυχρονιώτατα Kal σοφώ- 
»ΝὉ»Ἤ, 5 4 4 ἈΝ »Ὰ ᾽ὕὔ ’ 
stata τῶν ἀνθρωπίνων, πόλεις καὶ ἔθνη, θεοσεβέστατά 
5 A e 4 e 4 ἴω 5 4 
ἐστι, καὶ αἱ φρονιμώταται ἡλικίαι θεῶν ἐπιμελέσταται; 
“9 4339 »¥ ςς ’ ν A ε QA A 3 \ XV ἣν 
ὠγαθέ; ἔφη, “κατάμαθε ὅτι καὶ ὁ σὸς νοῦς ἐνὼν τὸ σὸν 17 
A 9 4 4 » > Ν 
σῶμα ὅπως βούλεται μεταχειρίζεται. οἴεσθαι οὖν χρὴ 
καὶ τὴν ἐν τῷ παντὶ φρόνησιν τὰ πάντα, ὅπως ἂν αὐτῇ 
ε A > σ ͵ὕ ἈΝ A X Ἀ A » 4 
120 ἡδὺ ἡ, οὕτω τίθεσθαι, καὶ μὴ TO σὸν μὲν ὄμμα δύνασθαι 
ἐπὶ πολλὰ στάδια ἐξικνεῖσθαι, τὸν δὲ τοῦ θεοῦ ὀφθαλμὸν 
950. 7 ΑΝ 9 , en Ciera \ \ \ 
ἀδύνατον εἶναι ἅμα πάντα ὁρᾶν, μηδὲ THY σὴν μὲν ψυχὴν 
A A ~ 5 ’ A A A ~ 5 5 4 A 5 
Kal περὶ τῶν ἐνθάδε καὶ περὶ τῶν ἐν Αἰγύπτῳ καὶ ἐν 
Σικελίᾳ δύνασθαι φροντίζειν, τὴν δὲ τοῦ θεοῦ φρόνησιν 
"μὴ ἱκανὴν εἶναι ἅμα πάντων ἐπιμελεῖσθαι. ἣν μέντοι, 18 
ὥσπερ ἀνθρώπους θεραπεύων γιγνώσκεις τοὺς ἀντιθερα- 
πεύειν ἐθέλοντας καὶ χαριζόμενος τοὺς ἀντιχαριζομένους, 
καὶ συμβουλευόμενος καταμανθάνεις τοὺς φρονίμους, 
ν » an a 
οὕτω καὶ τῶν θεῶν πεῖραν λαμβάνῃς θεραπεύων εἴ τι σοὶ 
180 θελήσουσι περὶ τῶν ἀδήλων ἀνθρώποις συμβουλεύειν, 
γνώσῃ τὸ θεῖον ὅτι τοσοῦτον καὶ τοιοῦτόν ἐστιν ὥσθ᾽ ἅμα 


most time-honored. —@e@v: for the nate; i.e. ἐγοὰ must not believe only 
gen., see references on yaorpési. 2.1. in your own vision and intelligence, 

17. ἔξη: he continued, the but must infer from them those of 
speaker remaining unchanged, Lat. the Deity.’’ For a similar use of 
inquit.—évav: sc. ἐν τῷ σώματι. the a fortiori argument, cf. Plato 
Cf. ἐνόν i. 2. 84. --- ὅπως ἂν αὐτῇ ἡδὺ 4οϊ. 28 v, Ε 


ἡ: as it pleases. —perayxepiterar : 18. jv: introduces the subjy. 
administrat, manages.—otv: so, λαμβάνῃς, the sent. from ὥσπερ to 
then, *‘in like manner.’’—kKalpy: sc. φρονίμους being parenthetical. — 
χρὴ οἴεσθαι, Which is also to be sup- θεραπεύων : by serving. — θεῶν : 


plied with the following μηδέ. ----τὸ obj. gen. with πεῖραν. G. 1085, 3; 
σὸν μὲν ὄμμα : that, while your eye. H. 729 c.—et: whether. G. 1605; 
The neg. μή grammatically attaches H. 1016. On the thought of the 
to the whole of the following sent., passage, cf. i. 1. 9. --- τῶν ἀδήλων 
but really belongs only to the second ἀνθρώποις: sc. ὄντων. Cf. i. 1.6. — 
inf. in each pair (ὁρᾶν, ἐπιμελεῖσθαι), γνώσῃ τὸ θεῖον, ὅτι ἐστίν : ‘prolep- 
the μέν clauses being really subordi- sis.’ Cf. 18, and συνουσίαν i. 2. 18. 


58 ἘΕΝΟΦΩΝΤΟΣ AIIOMNHMONEYMATA A. 4, 5. 


’, ε ΄“ ‘\ re > 4 Ν ; “A 
πάντα OPav καὶ TAVTQA QAKOVELY και TAVTA\ OU παρεῖναι 


Ν ν , 3 A ” 
Kal ἅμα πάντων ἐπιμελεῖσθαι. 


9 Ἁ Ν 3 na 
E“Ol μὲν οὖν ταῦτα 19 


Ψ A , 5 4 ε , e 
λέγων οὐ μόνον τοὺς συνόντας ἐδόκει ποιεῖν ὁπότε ὑπὸ 


“A > 4 ε ~ > , A“ 9 4 Ν 
135 των ἀνθρώπων OPwVTo, ἀπέχεσθαι των ανοσιων TE KAL 


3 / Ν 5 “ > Ν \ ε / > > 4 3 
ἀδίκων καὶ αἰσχρῶν, ἀλλὰ Kal ὁπότε ἐν ἐρημίᾳ εἶεν, 


\ ¥ ae la 
ἐπείπερ ἡγήσαιντο μηδὲν av ποτε ὧν πράττοιεν θεοὺς 


διαλαθεῖν. 


Ei δὲ δὴ καὶ ἐγκράτεια καλόν τε καὶ ἀγαθὸν ἀνδρὶ 


κτῆμά ἐστιν, ἐπισκεψώμεθα εἴ τι προὐβίβαζε λέγων εἰς 
4 (ὃ «59 » ὃ > λέ δον οὐδῷ , 
ταύτην τοιάδε: “᾿ avdpes, εἰ πολέμου Hut γενομένου 


βουλοίμεθα ἑλέσθαι ἄνδρα ὑφ᾽ οὗ μάλιστ᾽ ἂν αὐτοὶ μὲν 
δ σῳζοίμεθ ὺς δὲ πολεμίο ειροίμεθα, ἄρ᾽ ὅντιν᾽ 
σῳζοίμεθα, τοὺς πολεμίους χειροίμεθα, ἄρ᾽ ὅντιν 
3 / ν Ν x ἊΨ x > ,, x 
αἰσθανοίμεθα ἥττω γαστρὸς ἢ οἴνου ἢ ἀφροδισίων ἢ 
πόνου ἢ ὕπνου, τοῦτον ἂν αἱροίμεθα ; καὶ πῶς ἂν οἰηθείη- 


κι “ la) x 
μεν τὸν τοιοῦτον ἢ ἡμᾶς σῶσαι ἢ τοὺς πολεμίους Kpa- 
la > > ee “~ “ ’ὔ ’ὔ / ’ὔ 
τῆσαι; εἰ δ᾽ ἐπὶ τελευτῇ τοῦ Biov γενόμενοι βουλοίμεθά 


19. ἐμοὶ μὲν οὖν κτλ.: SUMS Up 
the chapter, as in i. 1. 20, 2. 62, οἱ 
al.—od μόνον: belongs to ὁπότε 
ép@vro. See on μόνον 13. — ἀπέχε- 
σθαι: depends on ποιεῖν. --- ἐπείπερ 
ἡγήσαιντο : since (as we have seen) 
they had come to believe. For the opt. 
in causal sents., see GMT. 714; H. 
925 Ὁ. For the thought, cf. the in- 


junctions of Christ against osten- - 


tatious almsgiving and praying 
‘to be seen of men,’ Matt. vi. 
1-18. 


5. Self-control is the foundation 
of every virtue recommended and 
practiced by Socrates. 

1. εἰ δή: si iam, introduces a 
settled and recognized fact. —et 
προὐβίβαζε: whether he led (his 
friends) forward. For εἰ with 


indir. question, cf. i. 4. 18. --- εἰς 
ταύτην (sc. ἐγκράτειαν») : connect 
with mpovBiBage. For the disloca- 
tion of the usual order (‘hyper- 
baton’), see H. 1062. --- ὦ ἄνδρες : 
there was evidently a circle of 
hearers. So in 6. 1, 
αὐτῶν. --- ὅντινα : equivalent to εἴ 
τινα. --- αἰσθανοίμεθα : for the assimi- 
lation of the cond. rel. clause, see 
G. 1489; H. 919 8ἃ. --- ἥττω (sc. 
ὄντα): **one who is not master οἵ," 
For Socrates’s self-control in these 
matters, cf. 3. — σῶσαι, κρατῆσαι : 
save, conquer. ‘The aor. shows that 
the actions are conceived without 
reference to a def. time or duration. 
GMT. 127, Kr. Spr. 53. 6.9. κρατεῖν 
(τινα) is equivalent to conquer, κρατεῖν 
(τινος) to have control. 


παρόντων 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA 1. 5. 59 


3 ᾽ὕ x to ¥ ὃ la x / 
10T@ ἐπιτρέψαι ἢ παῖδας ἄρρενας παιδεῦσαι ἢ θυγατέρας 
παρθένους διαφυλάξαι ἢ χρήματα διασῶσαι, ἄρ᾽ ἀξιό- 
> ww“ ε ’ Ν 3 ~ , tout 
πιστον εἰς ταῦτα ἡγησόμεθα τὸν ἀκρατῆ ; δούλῳ δ᾽ ἀκρα-.. 
ς A 3 ΄ x x , x A x ¥ 
τεῖ ἐπιτρέψαιμεν av ἢ βοσκήματα ἢ ταμιεῖα ἢ ἔργων 
ἐπιστασίαν; διάκονον δὲ καὶ ἀγοραστὴν τοιοῦτον ἐθελή- 
ιόσαιμεν ἂν προῖκα λαβεῖν; ἀλλὰ μὴν εἴ γε μηδὲ δοῦλον 8 
ἀκρατῆ δεξαίμεθ᾽ ἄν, πῶς οὐκ ἄξιον αὐτόν γε φυλάξα- 
σθαι τοιοῦτον γενέσθαι; καὶ γὰρ οὐχ ὥσπερ οἱ πλεονέ 
A + ‘a 
KTal TOV ἄλλων ἀφαιρούμενοι χρήματα ἑαυτοὺς δοκοῦσι 
ν A 
πλουτίζειν, οὕτως ὁ ἀκρατὴς τοῖς μὲν ἄλλοις βλαβερός, 
20 ἑαυτῷ δ᾽ ὠφέλιμος, ἀλλὰ κακοῦργος μὲν τῶν ἄλλων, ἕαυ- 
τοῦ δὲ πολὺ κακουργότερος, εἴ γε κακουργότατόν ἐστι μὴ 
4 Ν 3 Ν ε ~ θ ’ 3 Ν Ἁ ‘\ ~ 
μόνον τὸν οἶκον τὸν ἑαυτοῦ φθείρειν, ἀλλὰ καὶ TO σῶμα 
καὶ τὴν ψυχήν. 
ἃ 3 ᾽’ὕ “ » Ἃ nA » , 
τοιούτῳ ὃν εἰδείη τῷ ὄψῳ TE καὶ τῷ οἴνῳ χαίροντα 
25 μᾶλλον ἢ τοῖς φίλοις, καὶ τὰς πόρνας ἀγαπῶντα μᾶλλον 
ἢ τοὺς ἑταίρους; apa γε οὐ χρὴ πάντα ἄνδρα, ἡγησά- 
μενον τὴν ἐγκράτειαν ἀρετῆς εἶναι κρηπῖδα, ταύτην 


3 , \ / x ε ’ ῪΝ 
εν συνουσίιᾳ δὲ τίς ἂν ἡσθείη Τῳ 4 


2. παιδεῦσαι : for the inf. ex- 
pressing a purpose, see G. 1552; 
H. 961. --- διαφυλάξαι, διασῶσαι: 
obs. the force of διά in composition, 
thoroughly, to the end. — hynoopeBa : 
the fut. ind. in apod. breaks the 
monotony of the repeated opts. with 
ἄν. ---τὸν ἀκρατῆ : the man without 
self-control. --- ἔργων ἐπιστασίαν : 
supervision of works. — ἀγοραστήν : 
the term for the slave who went to 
market. For the formation of nouns 
denoting the agent, see G. 833; H. 
550. — τοιοῦτον : i.e. τὸν ἀκρατῆ. 

3. ἀλλὰ μὴν el: atqui si, and yet 
—el δεξαίμεθ᾽ av: for the potential 
opt. (with ἄν) in a cond., see G, 


1421, 3; H. 900 8. --- αὐτόν : a man 
himself, subj. of φυλάξασθαι. Not in 
the pl., although δεξαίμεθα precedes, as 
αὐτός indicates the master, in contrast 
with δοῦλον in the previous clauses. — 
γενέσθαι : for the inf. with verbs of 
caution, see GMT. 374; H. 948. — 
κακοῦργος, κακουργότερος, κακουρ- 
γότατος : obs. the climax, heightened 
in rhetorical effect by the chiastic 
order of the first two clauses. — τὸν 
οἶκον τὸν ἑαυτοῦ : one’s own house. 

4. ὃν εἰδείη : for the assimilation 
of the mode, see on αἰσθανοίμεθα in 1. 
—dpa ye οὔ : nonne certe. — ἥγη- 
odpevov: for the participle of cond., 
see on πιστεύων i. 1. 5, 


60 


EENO®ONTOS AILTOMNHMONEYMATA A. 5, 6. 


πρῶτον ἐν TH ψυχῇ κατασκευάσασθαι; Tis yap ἄνευ ταύτης 5 
x / “Ἁ 3 θὲ “Ὁ λ / > 6 x ,’ 
ἢ μάθοι τι ἂν ἀγαθὸν ἢ μελετήσειεν ἀξιολόγως ; ἢ τίς 

3 x A e A 4 > a , Ν Ν 
30 0UK ἂν Ταις ἡδοναῖς δουλεύων αἰσχρως διατεθείη Kal TO 

“ Ν Ν ΄ 3 Ν Ν ὃ A Ν Ν ἊΨ, 3 
σῶμα καὶ τὴν ψυχήν; ἐμοὶ μὲν δοκεῖ νὴ τὴν Ἥραν ἐλευ- 
θέρῳ μὲν ἀνδρὶ εὐκτὸν εἶναι μὴ τυχεῖν δούλου τοιούτου, 
δουλεύοντα δὲ ταῖς τοιαύταις ἡδοναῖς ἱκετευτέον τοὺς 
A A A ν 

θεοὺς δεσποτῶν ἀγαθῶν τυχεῖν- οὕτως γὰρ av μόνως ὃ 


35 τοιοῦτος σωθείη." 


“w Ἁ ,ἷ »Ὰ 5 4 
τοιαῦτα δὲ λέγων ἔτι ἐγκρατέστερον 


A ¥ x A , e Ν 3 ’ 3 ἣν 
τοῖς ἔργοις ἢ τοῖς λόγοις ἑαυτὸν ἐπεδείκνυεν: οὐ γὰρ 
’ “A Ν A , e A 3 ’ὔ > Ν \ ~ 
μόνον τῶν διὰ τοῦ σώματος ἡδονῶν ἐκράτει, ἀλλὰ Kal τῆς 
διὰ τῶν χρημάτων, νομίζων τὸν παρὰ τοῦ τυχόντος χρή- 
ματα λαμβάνοντα δεσπότην ἑαυτοῦ καθιστάναι καὶ δου- 

40 λεύειν δουλείαν οὐδεμιᾶς ἧττον αἰσχράν. 
“Agvov δ᾽ αὐτοῦ καὶ ἃ πρὸς ᾿Αντιφῶντα τὸν σοφιστὴν 6 
διελέχθη μὴ παραλιπεῖν. ὁ γὰρ ᾿Αντιφῶν ποτε βουλόμενος 


5. οὐκ αἰσχρῶς διατεθείΐη : would 
not be put into a shameful condi- 
tion. So διακεῖσθαι in i. 1. 19. --- νὴ 
τὴν Ἥραν: an expression used by 
women, and, among men, appar- 
ently used by Socrates only. Cf. iii. 
10. 9). τὰ 5, iv. 25 9, 4. °8..=4B8ou- 
λεύοντα: sc. τινά. The dat. is the 
usual case for the agent with verbals 
- in -réos. When the acc. was used, 
it was perhaps because the verbal 
was regarded as equivalent to de 
with the infinitive. G. 1188; H. 
991 ἃ. ---δεσποτῶν ἀγαθῶν : i.e. mas- 
ters who set their servants a good 
example (Kiihner). Cf. Oec. i. 23. 

6. τοιαῦτα δὲ λέγων κτλ. : ‘his 
practice was even better than his 
preaching.”? — τῶν διὰ τοῦ σώματος 
ἡδέων : ο΄. τῶν διὰ στόματος ἡδέων i. 4. 
δ. ---παρὰ τοῦ τυχόντος: from any 


one who happened along. (ΤΥ. ἱ. 2. 6, 
and see oni. 1. 14. — δεσπότην ἑαυ- 
τοῦ κτλ.: was establishing a master 
over himself; and entering upon a 
slavery than which none is more 
shameful. For the special form of 
‘litotes’ involved in οὐδεμιᾶς ἧττον 
αἰσχρόν, cf. iv. 2.12. Cf. also οὐδα- 
μῶν εἰσι kaxloves ἀνδρῶν Hat. vii. 104. 
Kr. Spr. 47. 27. 3. 

G. 1-10. Ina conversation with 
Antiphon, Socrates defends himself 
against the charge that his simple 
mode of life makes him and those who 
imitate him unhappy rather than 
happy. 

1. αὐτοῦ: depends on ἃ διελέχθη 
‘those conversations of his.’’? H. 733. 
—’Avripdvra: described by Suidas 
as follows : ᾿Αντιφῶν ᾿Αθηναῖος, τερα- 
τοσκόπος καὶ ἐποποιὸς καὶ σοφιστής, 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA I. 6. 61 


τοὺς συνουσιαστὰς αὐτοῦ 
Σωκράτει" παρόντων αὐτῶν, 


παρελέσθαι προσελθὼν τῷ 


ἔλεξε τάδε: 


“FO Σώκρατες, 


δ 5 ἐγὼ μὲν ᾧμην τοὺς φιλοσοφοῦντας εὐδαιμονεστέρους χρῆ- 
ναι γίγνεσθαι. σὺ δέ μοι δοκεῖς τἀναντία τῆς φιλοσοφίας 
ἀπολελαυκέναι- ζῇς γοῦν οὕτως ὡς οὐδ᾽ ἂν εἷς δοῦλος 


’ lal ’ “A 
ὑπὸ δεσπότῃ διαιτώμενος μείνειε: σῖτά TE σιτῇ καὶ ποτὰ 


’ὔ x ’ \ ε ’ > 7 > ’ 
πίνεις τὰ φαυλότατα, καὶ ἱμάτιον ἠμφίεσαι οὐ μόνον 
‘al Ν lal 
10 φαῦλον ἀλλὰ τὸ αὐτὸ θέρους τε Kal χειμῶνος, ἀνυπόδητός 


ἐκαλεῖτο δὲ λογομάγειρος. He was the 
author of a work on the interpreta- 
tion of dreams which had considera- 
ble reputation. Cf. de quibus (som- 
niis) disputans Chrysippus 


multis et minutis somniis 
colligendis facit idem quod 
Antipater, ea conquirens, 


quae Antiphontis interpreta- 
tione explicata declarant illa 
quidem acumen interpretis, 
sed exemplis grandioribus 
decuit uti Cic. de Div. i. 20. He 
should not be confused with the ora- 
tor Antiphon. — συνουσιαστάς: see 
on συνόντων i. 1. 4.— Σωκράτου: 
the name expressed for clearness, 
after the twice-used αὐτοῦ. Cf. πολλὴ 
ἣν ἀφθονία αὐτῷ τῶν θελόντων Kivdv- 
νεύειν, ὅπου τις οἴοιτο Κῦρον αἰσθήσεσθαι 
An. i. 9. 15, where the emphasis of 
Κῦρον is even more marked. 

2. @pnv: 
Impf. of habitual past action. — τοὺς 
φιλοσοφοῦντας : lovers of knowledge. 
Cf. the Platonic use of φιλοσόφους 
equivalent to φιλομαθεῖς, and ἀλλὰ 
μέντοι, εἶπον ἐγώ, τό γε φιλομαθὲς καὶ 
φιλόσοφόν ταὐτόν ; ταὐτὸν γάρ, ἔφη 
Plato Rep. 3768. Cf. also Plato’s 
use of ὀρθῶς φιλοσοφοῦντες (Phaedo 


I always supposed. - 


67 Ε) to avoid the use of φιλόσοφοι in 
a technical sense. —evSatpoveorépous : 
happier, ‘*more prosperous.’’ The 
opposite condition is κακοδαιμονία in 3. 
- χρῆναι γίγνεσθαι: necessarily 
become. — ἀπολελαυκέναι : to have 
enjoyed, ironical. For a similar use of 
ἐπαυρίσκομαι, Cf. ἵνα πάντες ἐπαύρωνται 
βασιλῆος Hom. A 410. ---- οὐδ᾽ ἂν eis: 
stronger than οὐδεὶς ἄν. Cf. iv. 3. 
15, and the Eng. ‘no one’ and ‘none.’ 
—os: connect with διαιτώμενος. 
—peivere: opposed to ἀποδιδράσκειν. 
In this sense, παραμένειν is generally 
used, as, e.g., Oec. iii. 4, Plato Meno 
97 ". --- σῖτά τε xrd.: in explanatory 
appos. with the preceding. What 
conj. might have been used? For 
the decl. of otra, see G. 288; H. 214. 
- ἠμφίεσαι: pf. with pres. meaning. 
For aug. before prep., see G. 544; 
H. 361. — οὐ μόνον, ἀλλά: like the 
Lat. non solum, sed. The second 
notion, as the more important, is 
added to the first, but without ex- 
cluding it, as would be the case with 
οὐκ, ἀλλά (NON, 56... ----ἀνυπόδητος : 
no special singularity is implied in 
assigning to Socrates a custom 
adopted by many of the more as- 
cetic philosophers. Aristophanes 


62 EENO®QNTOS AIOMNHMONEYMATA 


A 5 4 A 
τε καὶ ἀχίτων διατελεῖς. 


Α. 6. 


καὶ μὴν χρήματά γε οὐ 8 


ἃ εἶ 
λαμβάνεις, ἃ καὶ κτωμένους εὐφραίνει καὶ κεκτημένους 


9 ’ ’ Ν ν A A 
ἐλευθεριώτερόν τε καὶ ἥδιον ποιεῖ ζῆν. 


> > ν : 
εἰ οὖν, WOTTED 


καὶ τῶν ἄλλων ἔργων οἱ διδάσκαλοι τοὺς μαθητὰς μιμη- 


Ἀ ε ἴω > 4 ν Ν Ν Ν ’ὔ 
15Tas εαὐτῶν ἀποδεικνύουσιν, OUT@ Καὶ OV TOVS συνοντας 


διαθήσεις, νόμιζε κακοδαιμονίας διδάσκαλος εἶναι." 


\ 
και 


ἴω > A 5 95 A 
ὁ Σωκράτης πρὸς ταῦτα eime: “ Δοκεῖς μοι, ὦ ᾿Αντιφῶν, 


ε / Ψ > A la y , \ 
ὑπειληφέναι με ουτως ανιαρως Cnv wore πέπεισμαι σὲ 


A A A 9 
μᾶλλον ἀποθανεῖν ἂν ἑλέσθαι ἢ ζῆν ὥσπερ ἐγώ. ἴθι 


20 οὖν ἐπισκεψώμεθα τί χαλεπὸν ἤσθησαι τοῦ ἐμοῦ βίου. 


l4 9 a Ν / 3 4 > “7 
πότερον, OTL τοῖς μὲν λαμβάνουσιν ἀργύριον ἀναγκαῖόν 


ἐστιν ἀπεργάζεσθαι τοῦτο ἐφ᾽ ᾧ ἂν μισθὸν λάβωσιν, 


ἐμοὶ δὲ μὴ λαμβάνοντι οὐκ ἀνάγκη διαλέγεσθαι ᾧ ἂν μὴ 


΄ x Ν , , , aE @ \ 
βούλωμαι; ἢ τὴν δίαιτάν pov φαυλίζεις, ὡς ἧττον μὲν 


ε A Se v4 9 a x aA. @ de > ἈΝ , 
25 υγιεινα ἐσθίοντος ἐμοῦ ἢ σοῦ, ἧττον δὲ ἰσχυν παρέχοντα; 


x ε , / Ν 5 Ν ᾽7ὔ lanl 
7) ως χαλεπώτερα πορίσασθαι Τα εμα διαιτήματα Τῶν 


(Clouds 103) applies this epithet, 
with others, to the followers of Soc- 
rates. For an interesting account of 
Greek shoes in the classical period, 
see an article by A. A. Bryant in 
Harvard Studies in Classical Philol- 
ogy, vol. x. p. 57 ff.; and for the 
hardihood manifested by Socrates at 
the siege of Potidaea, see Plato Sym. 
220 a, B. — ἀχίτων : i.e. without the 
outer χιτών (érevddrns). Under this 
outer garment was generally worn 
an inner χιτών (ὑπενδύτης), with which 
and his ἱμάτιον Socrates seems to 
have been content. See Guhl and 
Koner, The Life of the Greeks and 
Romans, Ὁ. 161 ff. — διατελεῖς : with- 
out ὦν, as Cyr. i. 5. 10. 

3. καὶ μήν: see on i. 4. 12, and 
cf. 8; ii. 3. 4. -- χρήματα: emphatic 


position. — ὥσπερ καί, οὕτω καί: the 
first καί remains untranslated, like καί 
before πράττειν ini. 1.6. Soin Oec. 
vi. 3. Cf. καὶ ἡμῖν ταὐτὰ δοκεῖ ἅπερ 
καὶ βασιλεῖ An. ii. τ. 22. --- διαθήσεις : 
for the fut. denoting pres. intention, 
see G. 13891; H. 898 c. 

4. τί: see on riovi. 1. 1.— βίου : 
for the case, see on αὐτῶν i. 1. 12. 

5. πότερον (sc. χαλεπὸν ἤσθησαι), 
ὅτι: is it because. πότερον is correla- 
tive to 7 below. — τοῖς μέν, ἐμοὶ δέ: 
for μέν with subordinate effect, see on 
τὸ σὸν μὲν ὄμμα i. 4. 11. ---- ἧττον (with 
παρέχοντα): to a less degree. — χαλε- 
πώτερα: pred. after ὄντα (to be sup- 
plied from the following sent.), with 
which διαιτήματα is acc, abs. with ws, 
while ἐμοῦ ἐσθίοντος in the preceding 
sent. is gen. absolute. G. 1568, 1570; 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA I. 6. 63 


nw Ν A 4 ’ ‘\ , > x 
σῶν διὰ τὸ σπανιώτερά TE Kal πολυτελέστερα εἶναι; ἢ 


ε eqs \ ae Ν al ads 3, a 9 Ν a Ὁ v4 > 

ως ἡδίω σοια συ παρασκευάζῃ OVTQ 1) ἐμοιυ a eyo; ουκ 
5 θ᾽ ν ε Ν "ὃ 3 θί. ν »” ὃ a ε Ν 
οἶσθ᾽ ὅτι ὃ μὲν ηδιστα ἐσθίων ἤκιστα οψου δεῖται, ὃ δὲ 


CR. 4 , 9 “A Ν ’ A an 
30 ἥδιστα πίνων NKLOTA TOV μὴ TAPOVTOS ἐπιθυμεῖ ποτου: 


’ Ν ε , Ss eke ε , , Ν 
τά γε μὴν ἱμάτια οἶσθ᾽ ὅτι ot μεταβαλλόμενοι ψύχους καὶ 


θάλπους ἕνεκα μεταβάλλονται, καὶ ὑποδήματα ὑποδοῦνται 


9 \ Α ἈΝ ἴω Ν “ὃ 4 4 
ὅπως μὴ διὰ τὰ λυποῦντα τοὺς πόδας κωλύωνται πορεύε- 


σθαι: ἤδη οὖν ποτε ἤσθου ἐμὲ ἢ διὰ ψῦχος μᾶλλόν του 


35 ἔνδον μένοντα, ἢ διὰ θάλπος μαχόμενόν τῳ περὶ σκιᾶς, ἢ 


διὰ τὸ ἀλγεῖν τοὺς πόδας οὐ βαδίζοντα ὅπου ἂν βούλω- 


9 53 θ᾽ 9 e , 3 θ ΄ a , 
μαι; οὐκ οἶσθ᾽ ὅτι ot φύσει ἀσθενέστατοι τῴ σώματι 


ἴω ’ 
μελετήσαντες τῶν ἰσχυροτάτων ἀμελησάντων κρείττους τε 


δ Ν δ ἃ ’ Χ en > \ ’ 
γίγνονται πρὸς ἃ ἂν μελετήσωσι καὶ ῥᾷον αὐτὰ φέρου- 


τ Sy. --% de » 3 » “ , - Ν 4. 
40 ol. ; εμε € apa OVK OLEL, TM σωματι αει Τα συντυγχάνοντα 


μελετῶντα καρτερεῖν, πάντα ῥᾷον φέρειν σοῦ μὴ μελετῶν- 


σι δὲ \ § , A δ᾽ ν Ἁ ’ 
TOS; τοῦ ὃὲ μὴ δουλεύειν γαστρι μηὸ VTV@ καὶ λαγνείᾳ 


Ψ δ > , iy x Ἂν ΠΕ 4 » ͵ ες 
οἴει TL ἄλλο αὐτιωτερον εἰναι ἢ TO ετερὰ ἐχειν τουτων ἡδίω, 


ὰ 3 4 3 ΄, »” 3 ΄ 3 Ν Ν 3 / 
ἃ ov μόνον ἐν χρείᾳ ὄντα εὐφραίνει, adda καὶ ἐλπίδας 


’ 3 ὔ ιν ve Ν Ν ἴω , > 
45 παρέχοντα, ὠφελήσειν ἄει; καὶ μὴν TOVTO γε οἶσθα, 


9 ε A >7 δὲ > U4 > > , 
OTL OL μεν οιἰομενοὶ μη €V €U πράττειν ουκ εὐφραΐίνονται, 


H. 970, 974. --- ἥδιστα : with greatest 
relish. Cf. ἡδέως 1.53. ὅ. Note the 
assonance of ἧδιστα, ἥκιστα. --- μὴ 
παρόντος : not at hand. 

6. ἱμάτια: emphatic position. — 
πορεύεσθαι: for the inf. with verbs 
of hindering, see G. 1519; H. 948. 
— τοῦ (equivalent to τινός): for the 
form, see G. 416; H. 277. — ἔνδον: 
indoors. —7Td ἀλγεῖν τοὺς πόδας : Pain 
in my feet. πόδας is acc. of specifi- 
cation. G. 1058; H. 118. --- ὅπου : for 
ὅποι, like our ‘ where’ for ‘ whither.’ 

7. μελετήσαντες : by practicing. — 
αὐτά: sc. ἃ ἂν μελετήσωσι. --- ἀεί: 


const. with καρτερεῖν, at all times to 
bear patiently. — μελετῶντα καρ- 
vepetv: for the inf. with verbs of 
practicing, cf. ili. 9. 14, and ἐμελέτων 
τοξεύειν An. iii. 4. 17. 


8. rod δουλεύειν: const. with 
αἰτιώτερον.υ G. 1140; H. 753 e. — 
γαστρί: appetite. Cf. i. 2. 1; i. 5. 


1.— τὸ ἔχειν : sc. ἐμέ as subject. — 
ἐν χρείᾳ ὄντα: while in use. — od 
μόνον, ἀλλὰ Kal: see on οὐ μόνον, 
ἀλλά in 2. ---καὶ μήν: as in 3, — 
pndév: for the use of μή with verbs 
of thinking etc., cf. i. 1. 20; 2. 39, 
41. -- εὖ πράττειν: are fortunate, 


64 EZENO®QNTOS AITOMNHMONEYMATA AA. 6. 


οἱ δὲ ἡγούμενοι καλῶς προχωρεῖν ἑαυτοῖς ἢ γεωργίαν ἢ 
Ψ a. > Ἃ , 3 4 e > 
ναυκληρίαν ἢ add’ ὁ τι ἂν τυγχάνωσιν ἐργαζόμενοι ὡς εὖ 


πράττοντες εὐφραίνονται. 


¥ 5 δ. ἃς , ΄ 
OLEL ουν ATO TAVTWY Τούτων 


δ0τοσαύτην ἡδονὴν εἶναι ὅσην ἀπὸ τοῦ ἑαυτόν τε ἡγεῖσθαι 
, / Ν ΄, 3 ’, A 9 Ν , 
βελτίω γίγνεσθαι Kat φίλους ἀμείνους κτᾶσθαι; ἐγὼ τοί- 


νυν διατελῶ ταῦτα νομίζων. 


ἐὰν δὲ δὴ φίλους ἢ πόλιν 


ὠφελεῖν δέῃ, ποτέρῳ ἡ πλείων σχολὴ τούτων ἐπιμελεῖσθαι, 
la κι “ἡ ~ ε 
τῷ ὡς ἐγὼ νῦν, ἢ τῷ ὡς σὺ μακαρίζεις, διαιτωμένῳ; 
x A ᾿ 
δ στρατεύοιτο δὲ πότερος av ῥᾷον, ὁ μὴ δυνάμενος avev 
΄ 4 “A x Ὁ μὴ Ν 3 ’ 3 
πολυτελοῦς διαίτης ζῆν, ἢ ᾧ τὸ παρὸν ἀρκοίη ; ἐκπο- 
x A lal 
λιορκηθείη δὲ πότερος av θᾶττον, ὁ τῶν χαλεπωτάτων 


΄-Ο “Ο “ 4 4 
εὑρεῖν δεόμενος, ἢ ὁ τοῖς ῥᾷστοις ἐντυγχάνειν ἀρκούντως 
nm 3 nw 
χρώμενος; ἔοικας, ὦ ᾿Αντιφῶν, THY εὐδαιμονίαν οἰομένῳ 10 


θοτρυφὴν καὶ πολυτέλειαν εἶναι: ἐγὼ δὲ νομίζω τὸ μὲν 
ἐν A A > Ν 3 ε 5 4 3 

μηδενὸς δεῖσθαι θεῖον εἶναι, τὸ δ᾽ ὡς ἐλαχίστων ἐγγυ- 

τάτω τοῦ θείου, καὶ τὸ μὲν θεῖον κράτιστον, τὸ δὲ ἐγγυτάτω 


τοῦ θείου ἐγγυτάτω τοῦ κρατίστου." 


‘‘doing well.’’ Some editors see a 
play on words between this and εὖ 
πράττοντες below, where the sense 
seems to be ‘‘managing matters 
well.’’ — ἐργαζόμενοι : for the sup- 
plementary participle with τυγχάνω, 
see G. 1586; H. 984. 

9. ἑαυτόν: oneself. — φιλοὺς ἀμεί- 
vous κτᾶσθαι: acquiring better friends, 
not by getting new friends, but by 
improving those we have. ἀμείνους 
is pred. adjective. G.919; H. 594 Ὁ. 
— ἐγὼ τοίνυν. . . νομίζων : well then, 
I never cease to believe this (that I am 
improving myself and my friends). 
— ἐάν, δή : see oni. 5. 1.---ὀκπολιορκη- 
θείη: would succumb to a siege. — 
τοῖς ῥάστοις ἐντυγχάνειν: what is 
easiest to obtain, opposed to τῶν χαλε- 


πωτάτων εὑρεῖν. On the use of the 
inf. with adjs., see G. 1528; H. 952. 
Cf. ii. τ. 22; iii. 8. 8. --- ἀρκούντως 
χρώμενος: ‘contented to  use,’’ 
“ἐ contented with.”’ 

10. ἔοικας otopévw: you are like 
one who thinks, ‘‘ you seem to think.”’ 


- εἶναι : ‘consists in.’? —@elov: for 
the gen. with advs., cf. ii. 1. 28. --- 
κράτιστον: ‘‘perfect.”’ The self- 


denial here described was carried to 
an extreme by the sect of philoso- 
phers known as Cynics, founded by 
Antisthenes, a devoted follower of 
Socrates (cf. iii. 11. 17; Sym. viii. 
4). Its most famous representative 
was Diogenes, who came from 
Sinope to Athens some years after 
the death of Socrates, and was 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA I. 6. 65 


Πάλιν δέ ποτε ὁ ᾿Αντιφῶν διαλεγόμενος TO Σωκράτει 11 
5 
θ6 εἶπεν: “Ὦ Σώκρατες, ἐγώ τοί σε δίκαιον μὲν νομίζω, 
A A 5 που Νδ Lal Lal , A > A ~~ 
σοφὸν δὲ οὐδ᾽ ὁπωστιοῦν. δοκεῖς δέ μοι Kal αὐτὸς τοῦτο 
γιγνώσκειν οὐδένα γοῦν τῆς συνουσίας ἀργύριον πράττῃ. 
͵ὕ , ε , ΕΝ A = 2 x » es , 
καίτοι TO γε ἱμάτιον ἢ THY οἰκίαν ἢ ἄλλο τι ὧν κέκτησαι 
4 5 4 » > 5 Ἀ xX A ν .»Ὀ-“ 
νομίζων ἀργυρίου ἄξιον εἶναι οὐδενὶ ἂν μὴ ὅτι προῖκα 
0 δοίης, ἀλλ᾽ οὐδ᾽ ἔλαττον τῆς ἀξίας λαβών. δῆλον δὴ 12 
ὅτι εἰ καὶ τὴν συνουσίαν ᾧου τινὸς ἀξίαν εἶναι, καὶ ταύ- 
x sera A s¢e7 3 , > , , 
TNS ἂν οὐκ ἔλαττον τῆς ἀξίας ἀργύριον ἐπράττου. δίκαιος 
\ > EN ¥ Y 9 Β aA a8 , Ἀ 
μὲν οὖν ἂν εἴης, ὅτι οὐκ ἐξαπατᾷς ἐπὶ πλεονεξίᾳ, σοφὸς 
δὲ 9 ¥ ὃ , »” 3 , 4) ε δὲ ͵ 
€ οὐκ ἄν, μηδενός γε ἄξια ἐπιστάμενος." ὃ δὲ Σωκράτης 18 
κ΄ > Φ > A A 
75 πρὸς ταῦτα εἶπεν: “Ὦ ᾿Αντιφῶν, Tap ἡμῖν νομίζεται τὴν 
2 A A 4 ε 4 A , | 4 , A 
ὥραν Kat τὴν σοφίαν ὁμοίως μὲν καλόν, ὁμοίως δὲ 
[2 
τήν τε γὰρ ὥραν ἐὰν μέν τις 
> a ~ “~ 4 , φον > wn 
ἀργυρίου πωλῃ τῴ βουλομένῳ, πόρνον αὐτὸν ἀποκαλοῦσιν, 


αἰσχρὸν διατίθεσθαι εἶναι. 


speedily attracted to the school of 
Antisthenes. The extravagances and 
ostentation of his ascetic life are in 
strong contrast to the generally 
sane and unaffected simplicity of 
Socrates. 

11-14. In another conversation 
Socrates refutes Antiphon when he 
charges him with folly in teaching 
without compensation. 

11. οὐδ᾽ ὁπωστιοῦν: π tantil- 
lum quidem. For -οῦν, cf. i. 1. 
14. — τοῦτο γιγνώσκειν : to be aware 
of this. — οὐδένα: for the double 
acc. with πράττῃ, see on i. 2. 
5. — τῆς συνουσίας: gen. of ‘the 
thing bought,’ by analogy to the gen. 
of price. G. 1134; H. 746 ο. --- ὧν: 
for the ‘assimilation’ of the rel. to 
the case of its omitted antec., see on 
i, 2. 21. — μὴ ὅτι : ““ ποῦ to say,”’ ‘‘ let 
me not say that,’’ with ellipsis of the 


verb of saying. Cf. on οὐχ ὅτι ii. 9. 
8. 6. 1504; H. 1035 a. 

12. καὶ τὴν συνουσίαν, kal ταύτης: 
for the repetition of καί in compound 
sents., see on ὥσπερ καί 8. For the 
case of ταύτης, see On συνουσίας in 11. 
- οἰπράττου : note the transition from 
the opt. δοίης in 11 to the indic. of un- 
fulfilled condition. — δίκαιος μὲν οὖν 
av εἴης : emphatically put, honest, 
then, you would be. — émordpevos : 
change of const. from ὅτι οὐκ ἐξαπα- 
ras. Thucydides is specially fond of 
this change to participial construc- 
tion. 

13. παρ᾽ ἡμῖν: with us, apud nos. 
-νομίζεται. .. εἶναι: ‘‘there is a 
noble as well as an ignoble disposition 
of wisdom as of personal charms. ’? — 
διατίθεσθαι : to expose for sale. Obs. 
the condensed expression in wpap, 
σοφίαν, καλόν, αἰσχρόν. Each adj. 


66 EENO®QNTOS AIOMNHMONEYMATA A. 6. 


oA 4 a x ~ ’ > Ν 3 \ » 
ἐὰν δέ τις ὃν ἂν γνῷ καλόν τε κἀγαθὸν ἐραστὴν ὄντα, 
βϑοτοῦτον φίλον ἑαυτῷ ποιῆται, σώφρονα νομίζομεν: καὶ 
τὴν σοφίαν ὡσαύτως τοὺς μὲν ἀργυρίου τῷ βουλομένῳ 
A ν la! 
πωλοῦντας σοφιστὰς | ὥσπερ πόρνους | ἀποκαλοῦσιν, ὅστις 
δὲ ὃν ἂν γνῷ εὐφυᾶ ὄντα, διδάσκων ὅ τι ἂν ἔχῃ ἀγαθόν, 
φίλον ποιεῖται, τοῦτον νομίζομεν ἃ τῷ καλῷ κἀγαθῷ 
85 πολίτῃ προσήκει, ταῦτα ποιεῖν. ἐγὼ δ᾽ οὖν καὶ αὐτός, τά 
τς la ν A 
ὦ ᾿Αντιφῶν, ὥσπερ ἄλλος τις ἢ ἵππῳ ἀγαθῷ ἢ κυνὶ ἢ 
ὄρνιθι ἥδεται, οὕτω καὶ ἔτι μᾶλλον ἥδομαι φίλοις ἀγαθοῖς, 
» ἢ» 3» > θ , ὃ ὃ 4 \ » ’ 
καὶ ἐάν τι ἔχω ἀγαθόν, διδάσκω καὶ ἄλλοις συνίστημι, 
> Μῇ Δ ε A > , θ ’ > ἈΝ 3 3 ΄ 
Tap ὧν ἂν ἡγῶμαι ὠφελήσεσθαϊΐ τι αὐτοὺς εἰς ἀρετήν. 
90 καὶ τοὺς θησαυροὺς τῶν πάλαι σοφῶν ἀνδρῶν, οὕς ἐκεῖνοι 
κατέλιπον ἐν βιβλίοις γράψαντες, ἀνελίττων κοινῇ σὺν 
τοῖς φίλοις διέρχομαι, καὶ ἄν τι ὁρῶμεν ἀγαθόν, ἐκλεγό- 
μεθα: καὶ μέγα νομίζομεν κέρδος ἐὰν ἀλλήλοις φίλοι 
’ θ 3) 3 Ν Ν δὴ “ > 4 286 5 / 
γιγνώμεθα." ἐμοὶ μὲν δὴ ταῦτα ἀκούοντι ἐδόκει αὐτός TE 
95 μακάριος εἶναι καὶ τοὺς ἀκούοντας ἐπὶ καλοκἀγαθίαν 


ΕΣ 
αγέειν. 


belongs to each noun in turn. — τὴν 
σοφίαν, τοὺς πωλοῦντας : the noun is 
placed beforeits governing participle, 
to correspond with τήν τε yap wpay in 
the preceding sentence. For asimi- 
lar order, cf. τούτου τῶν ἀπολυσόντων 
ii, 2. 4, wept ἀριθμῶν τοῖς ἐρωτῶσιν iv. 
4. Ἴ. ---σοφιστάς : seeoni.r.11. In 
setting a price on their wisdom, they 
dishonored it, as did πόρνοι beauty. — 
6 τι ἂν ἔχῃ : ‘* what he has in him,” 
‘¢what he understands.’? Cf. ἐάν τι 
ἔχω in 14, and see on iii. το. 1. -- ἃ 
προσήκει, ταῦτα ποιεῖν : for the dem. 
referring back with emphasis to the 
omitted antec. of the rel., see 
G. 1030; H. 996 b. 


14. ὄρνιθι: perhaps an allusion 
to the Greek fondness for train- 
ing quails to fight. See Becker, 
Charicles (Eng. transl.), p. 77 ff. — 
ἄλλοις συνίστημι : introduce them to 
others. Cf. iv. 7. 1. — ὠφελήσεσθαι : 
passive. — τοὺς θησαυροὺς... γρά- 
Ψαντες: cf. γράμματα πολλὰ ποιητῶν 
τε καὶ σοφιστῶν iv. 2. 1. --- κατέλιπον 
γράψαντες : wrote and left behind. 
Eng. idiom would use γεγραμμέ- 
vous agreeing with ovs. — φίλοι γιγνώ- 
μεθα: become dear. ‘ Already friends 
(rots φίλοις), we are glad to have our 
mutual affection strengthened by the 
uniting force of a noble sentiment.”’ 
— ἐμοὶ μέν : for μέν, see oni. 1. 1. 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA I. 6, 7. 67 


A , 5 A a 3 A 3 , gs. ἧς a 
Kat πάλιν ποτὲ τοῦ Αντιφῶντος ἐρομένου αὐτὸν πῶς 15 


ΕἾ \ e A Ἀ A 2 N \ 9 ΄ὕ 
ἄλλους μὲν ἡγοῖτο πολιτικοὺς ποιεῖν, αὐτὸς δὲ οὐ πράττοι 


4 » 3 4 ? > » 
τὰ πολιτικά, εἴπερ ἐπίσταιτο, “ Ποτέρως δ᾽ av,” ἔφη, “ ὦ 


¥ 


100᾽᾿Αντιφῶν, μᾶλλον τὰ πολιτικὰ πράττοιμι, εἰ μόνος αὐτὰ 


’ x > 3 Y “ ε ’ ε Ν 
πράττοιμυ, εἰ ἐπιμελοίμην Του ὡς πλείστους ικανους 


> , > | AD φᾷ 
ELV QL πράττειν αυτα: 


᾿Ἐπισκεψώμεθα δὲ εἰ καὶ ἀλαζονείας ἀποτρέπων τοὺς ἢ 


’ 3 “Ὁ > A , ae: \ » 
συνόντας ἀρετῆς ἐπιμελεῖσθαι προέτρεπεν- ἀεὶ γὰρ ἔλεγεν 


ὡς οὐκ εἴη καλλίων ὁδὸς ἐπ᾽ εὐδοξίαν ἢ δι᾿ ἧς ἀν τις 


ἀγαθὸς τοῦτο γένοιτο ὃ καὶ δοκεῖν βούλοιτο. ὅτι δ᾽ ἀληθῆ 


δ ἔλεγεν, ὧδε ἐδίδασκεν: “᾿Ἐνθυμώμεθα γάρ, ἔφη, “εἴ 


\ x > AS ὃλ \ ὃ lal aN eo > “A 
TLS μὴ ὧν αγαῦος AVANTYNS OOKELV βούλοιτο, τί ἂν QUT@ 


, ¥ 
ποιητέον εἰη. 


ας 3 Ν » A ’ ld ‘\ 
ap ov τὰ ἔξω τῆς τέχνης μιμητέον τοὺς 


5 Ν 5 ’ὔ ἃ la , 4 3 A 4 
ἀγαθοὺς αὐλητας ; και T PWTOV μέν, OTL εκεινοι O KEV?) TE 


Ν , be pe. 4 Ν , ἃ 
καλὰ κέκτηνται καὶ ἀκολούθους πολλοὺς περιάγονται, καὶ 


4 “A ’ » 9 > / Ν 3 
Ἰοτούτῳ ταῦτα ποιητέον" ἔπειτα, OTL ἐκείνους πολλοὶ ἐπαι- 


nw \ \ , , 
νοῦσι, καὶ τούτῳ πολλοὺς ἐπαινέτας παρασκευαστέον. 


15. Another answer to Antiphon. 
---ο-Οοὐτὸς δέ: while he himself. — εἴπερ : 
if indeed (as Antiphon doubted). — 
ποτέρως: in which way, introduces 
the double question ef. . . ἢ εἰ, hence 
does not correspond to 7, and should 
not be confused with πότερον or 
πότερα. Cf. ii. 7. 8.— τοῦ εἶναι : for 
the gen. of the articular inf. with 
verbs, see G. 1547; H. 959. 

7. Socrates dissuades his friends 
From boastful pretense, which not only 
brings ridicule and misfortune upon 
the pretender, but also injures others. 

1. ἀλαζονείας : Cf. Xenophon’s 
own explanation of the term, ὁ μὲν 
yap ἀλαζὼν ἔμοιγε δοκεῖ ὄνομα κεῖσθαι 
ἐπὶ τοῖς προσποιουμένοις καὶ πλουσιωτέ- 


"» 


pois εἶναι ἤ εἰσι καὶ ἀνδρειοτέροις καὶ 


ποιήσειν ἃ μὴ ἱκανοί εἰσιν ὑπισχνουμέ- 
νοις, καὶ ταῦτα φανεροῖς γιγνομένοις, ὅτε 
τοῦ λαβεῖν ἕνεκα καὶ κερδᾶναι ποιοῦσι 
Cyr. ii. 2. 12. See also Theophras- 
tus Char. c. 23.—%: 86. αὕτη. --- 
τοῦτο: for the case, see on πόδας 
i. 6. 6. —Gv γένοιτο : would become, 
potential optative. See on ὁμολογή- 
σειεν 1. 1.5. For the thought, cf. ii. 
6. 89: Cyr. 1. 6. 22.— For καί after 
8; see on i. 1. 6. 

2. yap: its use suggests that 
the preceding οὐκ εἴη καλλίων κτλ. 
is felt as the beginning of the 
conversation. —Ta ἔξω: the exter- 
nals. For the double acc. with 
μιμητέον, see G. 1076; H. 725. — 
σκεύη : collective pl., equipment. 
Cf. Lat. apparatus. — ἔπειτα: 


68 EENO®QNTOS AIOMNHMONEYMATA AA. 7. 


ἀλλὰ μὴν ἔργον ye οὐδαμοῦ ληπτέον, ἢ εὐθὺς ἐλεγχθή- 
A » \ 5 ’ 3 Ἀ ’ > Ἂς Ν 
σεται γελοῖος ὧν, καὶ οὐ μόνον αὐλητὴς κακός, ἀλλὰ καὶ 
ἄνθρωπος ἀλαζών. καίτοι πολλὰ μὲν δαπανῶν, μηδὲν δὲ 
3 4 ἣν Ν 4 “A “A 5 3 , 
15 ὠφελούμενος, πρὸς δὲ τούτοις κακοδοξῶν, πῶς οὐκ ἐπιπό- 
νως τε καὶ ἀλυσιτελῶς καὶ καταγελάστως βιώσεται ; 
ε > » ¥ 4 Ἂς 3 Ν \ x 
ws δ᾽ αὕτως, εἴ τις βούλοιτο στρατηγὸς ἀγαθὸς μὴ ὧν 
’ x ’ > ~ Pn ae > ~ ’ 
φαίνεσθαι ἢ κυβερνήτης, ἐννοῶμεν τί ἂν αὐτῷ συμβαΐ- 
νοι. dp οὐκ av, εἰ μὲν ἐπιθυμῶν τοῦ δοκεῖν ἱκανὸς εἶναι 
20TavTa πράττειν μὴ δύναιτο πείθειν, τοῦτ᾽ εἴη λυπηρόν, 
3 A ’ » 3 ’ ~ Ν 4 ἴω 
εἰ δὲ πείσειεν, ἔτι ἀθλιώτερον ; δῆλον γὰρ ὅτι κυβερνᾶν 
τε κατασταθεὶς 6 μὴ ἐπιστάμενος ἢ στρατηγεῖν ἀπολέ- 

ἃ Ψ A 
σειεν av ovs ἥκιστα βούλοιτο καὶ αὐτὸς αἰσχρῶς ἂν Kal 
A 9 ’ 3) ε r Ν Ν Ν 4 ἃ 
κακῶς ἀπαλλάξειεν." ὡσαύτως δὲ καὶ τὸ πλούσιον καὶ 
ἃν 3 A φ- κ᾿ 19 Ν . » ad bc ‘ 
257d ἀνδρεῖον Kal τὸ ἰσχυρὸν μὴ ὄντα δοκεῖν ἀλυσιτελὲς 
3 ’ , \ 3 A ¥ ’, x Ν 
ἀπέφαινε: προστάττεσθαι γὰρ αὐτοῖς ἔφη μείζω ἢ κατὰ 
δύναμιν, καὶ μὴ δυναμένους ταῦτα ποιεῖν, δοκοῦντας ἱκα- 
vous εἶναι, συγγνώμης οὐκ av τυγχάνειν. ἀπατεῶνα δ᾽ 


without δέ, as in i. 2. 1. — ἀλλὰ 
μήν: at vero. — ἤ: or else. — 
ἀλαζών: adj. use, gloriosus. — 
δαπανῶν: circumstantial participle 
of condition. See on πιστεύων i. 
1. 5. 

3. ὡς δ᾽ αὔτως: and in the 
same way. Cf. ὡσαύτως in 4. ---τί 
ἂν αὐτῷ συμβαίνοι: what would 
happen to him?—dp’ οὐκ ἂν... 
τοῦτ᾽ εἴη λυπηρόν : the sent. is twice 
interrupted, as ἐπιθυμῶν is equiv. toa 
clause. For an even more involved 
structure, cf. ἢ ὅστις, ὥσπερ KTH. iv. 
2. 28. ---λυπηρόν : painful. — κυ- 
βερνᾶν re: instead of καὶ στρατηγεῖν, 
this is followed by ἢ στρατηγεῖν, 
with a slight change in the thought. 
Cf. ἡ γῆ; ὑγροτέρα re οὖσα πρὸς τὸν 


σπόρον ἢ ἁλμοδεστέρα (too saltish) πρὸς 
φυτείαν Oec. XX. 12. --- ἀπαλλάξειεν : 
would come out of it. In this sense, 
the pass. is somewhat more com- 
mon. 

4. δοκεῖν (sc. εἶναι): the pretense 
of being. The thought is ‘‘if one 
should endeavor to seem to excel 
(§2), he would have much trouble; 
and the false reputation, when 
acquired, is injurious.’? --- ἀλυσιτελὲς 
ἀπέφαινε : sc. ὄν. After verbs of 
knowing, declaring, etc., the parti- 
ciple of εἰμέ is sometimes omitted. 
Cf. ii. 3. 14; An, iii. 1. 36.—q 
κατὰ δύναμιν : ‘‘than their strength 
would bear.’’ —ovyyvepns: indul- 
gence. For the case, see on στόματος 
i. 4. 12. 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA I. 7. 69 


ἐκάλει οὐ μικρὸν μὲν εἴ τις ἀργύριον ἢ σκεῦος παρά του 
A A > ’ ‘ \ ld Ἀ 
80πειθοῖ λαβὼν ἀποστεροίη, πολὺ δὲ μέγιστον ὅστις μηδενὸς 
¥ Δ 3 , , ε ε \ ¥ A , 
ἄξιος ὧν ἐξηπατήκοι πείθων ws ἱκανὸς εἴη τῆς πόλεως 


ἡγεῖσθαι. 


\ A > A κ΄ 
ἐμοὶ μὲν οὖν ἐδόκει καὶ τοῦ ἀλαζονεύεσθαι, 


3 4, Ν ’ὔ / 4 
ἀποτρέπειν τοὺς συνόντας τοιάδε διαλεγόμενος. 


5. οὐ μικρόν : “ litotes,’ as shown 
by the following πολὺ δὲ μέγιστον. 
Cf. i. 2. 25. --- εἴ tis: ‘* whoever,” 
referring to ἀπατεῶνα. --- ὅστις : 
instead of ef ris. For the same 
variation, cf. i. 6. 18. — ἐξηπατήκοι : 
the pf. emphasizes the deception as 


an accomplished fact. — ἐμοὶ μὲν κτλ. : 
Xenophon’s conclusion. For μέν, 
see on i. 1. 1. --- τοιάδε: instead of 
the more usual τοιαῦτα, perhaps as 
bringing the whole conversation 
more vividly before the eye. See 
H. 696 a. 


> , , A La! , , 4 
Ἐδόκει δέ μοι καὶ τοιαῦτα λέγων προτρέπειν τοὺς συν- 1 


Β 


’ 3 “ 3 , Ν 3 ’ὔ’ lal Ἂ 
ὄντας ἀσκεῖν ἐγκράτειαν [πρὸς ἐπιθυμίαν] βρωτοῦ καὶ 

ἴων A 4 Ἄν ἘΦ’ Ν ε,ὕ \ ’ Ν 
ποτοῦ καὶ λαγνείας καὶ ὕπνου καὶ ῥίγους καὶ θάλπους καὶ 


, 
πονοῦυ. 


γνοὺς γάρ τινα τῶν συνόντων ἀκολαστοτέρως 


δ ἔχοντα πρὸς τὰ τοιαῦτα, “Εἰπέ μοι, ἔφη, “ ὦ ᾿Αρίστιππε, 


εἰ δέοι σε παιδεύειν παραλαβόντα δύο τῶν νέων, τὸν μὲν 


ν ε Ν » » Ν δὲ ν ὃ᾽ 3 , 
ὅπως ἱκανὸς ἔσται ἄρχειν, τὸν OE ὁπως MNO ἀντιποιὴή- 


9 ~ la) x ε ΄ 4 4 A 
σεται ἀρχῆς, πῶς ἂν ἑκάτερον παιδεύοις ; βούλει σκοπῶ- 


μεν ἀρξάμενοι ἀπὸ τῆς τροφῆς ὥσπερ ἀπὸ τῶν στοιχείων ;” 
eee, Ie) ’ » (a4 A a ε re Ἁ 
10 καὶ ὁ ᾿Αρίστιππος ἔφη" “Δοκεῖ γοῦν μοι ἡ τροφὴ ἀρχὴ 


1. No one can govern who does 
not govern himself. He who does 
not rule must serve: there is no mid- 
dle path. To reach self-mastery, we 
must take pains. This thought 
is illustrated by the allegory (21-88) 
of Hercules at the parting of the ways. 

1. τοιαῦτα: in the rare use of 
pointing forward. Cf. An. v. 8. 7. 
It has been conjectured that this 
pron. and τοιάδε at the close of the 
preceding chap. have changed places. 
— ἐγκράτειαν: self-control. This 
virtue shows itself as temperance in 


respect to the pleasures of sense, as" 


perseverance and endurance where 
difficulties are to be met. Hence 
its use with the gen. not only of 
nouns which denote pleasures, but 
of those also which denote hardships. 
In this more comprehensive mean- 
ing the term has already been used 
(1. 5).— πρὸς ἐπιθυμίαν : inapplica- 


70 


ble to the last three gens. (ῥίγους, 
θάλπους, πόνου), and prob. a gloss. — 
γνοὺς yap: the conj. is introductory, 
and serves to connect its sent. with 
the preceding τοιαῦτα. ---᾿ Αρίστιππε: 
of Cyrene in Africa, founder of the 
Cyrenaic school of philosophy, 
which regarded pleasure as the 
highest good, and pain as the great- 
est evil. Another conversation with 
him is recorded iii. 8. --- ὅπως ἔσται : 
fut. ind. in obj. clause, on account 
of the idea of ‘caring for,’ ‘ effect- 
ing,’ contained in the foregoing 
παιδεύειν. G. 13872; H. 885. —dpyfs: 
for the gen. with verbs of disputing 
or contesting, see G. 1128; H. 739 a. 
- βούλει σκοπῶμεν: Visne con- 
sideremus rem? For the interr. 
subjv. with βούλει, see G. 1358; 
H. 866, 3 b. ---ἀπὸ τῶν στοιχείων : 
ab elementis literarum, from 
the A B 63. --- γοῦν : certainly. 


ΝΥ ΔΝ ae ee ee ἴω 2 | δὰ. ἀμ) ee 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA ILI. 1. 71 


> ἡδὲ Ν , 3»ϑ» 3 Ν , ” “ 3 A 

εἶναι: οὐδὲ yap ζῴη γ᾽ ἂν τις, εἰ μὴ τρέφοιτο. Οὐκοῦν 
Ν Ν 4 7 ν 9 ν ν > 

τὸ μὲν βούλεσθαι σίτου ἅπτεσθαι ὅταν apa nKy, ἀμφο- 


ὔ > ee 4 ” 
τέροις εἰκὸς παραγίγνεσθαι ; 


“Εἰκὸς yap, ἔφη. “Τὸ οὖν 


n Ν A A , xa Ὁ“ Ν 
προαιρεῖσθαι τὸ κατεπεῖγον μᾶλλον πράττειν ἢ τῇ γαστρι 


’ὔ , a > “A 52 3) 
15 χαρίζεσθαι πότερον av αὐτῶν ἐθίζοιμεν ; 


5 
“Top εἷς τὸ 


¥ ” ¥ “ A , ὃ ’ὔ ν Ν A “A aN 
ἄρχειν," ἔφη, “νὴ Δία, παιδευόμενον, ὅπως μὴ TA τῆς πόλεως 


" , \ \ ee, 9 A 99 ον ee 3 a” 
AT PAKTa γιγνήῆται παρα TYV EKELYOU αρχῆν. Ούκουν, 


ἔφη, “ καὶ ὅταν πιεῖν βούλωνται, τὸ δύνασθαι διψῶντα ἀνέ. 


χεσθαι τῷ αὐτῷ προσθετέον ;” 


’ Ν > b ν» 
“Πάνυ μὲν οὖν, ἔφη. 


30“ Τὸ δὲ ὕπνου ἐγκρατῆ εἶναι, ὥστε δύνασθαι καὶ ὀψὲ κοι- 


ia \ » 9° A ae 19, A » , 
μηθῆναι και TT P@t αναστήναι και αγρυπνήσαι, ει Τι δέοι, 


’, x ’ 3) 
ποτέρῳ av προσθείημεν ; 


‘ “A > 2 “ Aa 9 
“Kat τοῦτο, ἔφη, “τῷ avTo. 


“Ti δέ ἔφη, “τὸ ἀφροδισίων ἐγκρατῆ εἶναι, ὥστε μὴ διὰ 


al , ’, » , ” 
TAVUTa κωλύεσθαι πράττειν, €l TL δέοι ; 


25 “τῷ αὐτῳ. 


\ “~ ” + 
“Καὶ tovro,” ἔφη, 


“Τί δέ, τὸ μὴ φεύγειν τοὺς πόνους, ἀλλ᾽ ἐθε- 


X \ ε 4 7 x θ ’ -: 3) ςς Κ \ “ ” 
οντὴν ὑπομένειν, ποτέρῳ ἂν προσθείημεν ; αἱ τοῦτο, 


» « wn » 7 ” 
ἔφη, “τῷ ἄρχειν παιδευομένῳ. 


’ A ¥ 
“TT? δέ, τὸ μαθεῖν, εἰ τι 


3 / , 3 ’ Ν Ν ~ ~ > 4 
ἐπιτήδειόν ἐστι μάθημα πρὸς TO κρατεῖν τῶν ἀντιπάλων, 


2. οὐκοῦν : in questions, οὔκουν is 
equivalent to nonne igitur, expect- 
ing an affirmative answer ; οὐκοῦν (so 
then) introduces the view of the 
speaker, giving it an interr. inflection. 
The latter particle often seems more 
suited to the gentle irony of Socrates’s 
method, in which he apparently 
let his interlocutor find out his 
answer for himself, while really 
suggesting it tohim. So twice just 
_ belowin 4. Cf. the use of this par- 
ticle in the examination of Orontas 
by Cyrus, An. i. 6. — ὥρα : the right 
time. —eixés: 80. ἐστί. --- γάρ: see 
on i. 4. 9. --- τὸ κατεπεῖγον : pressing 

duty. —mpoatpeto Gar μᾶλλον : cf. the 


same pleonasm in the Lat. malle 
potius.—métepov: which of them 
(sc. the two young men). For the 
double acc. with a verb of teaching, 
see on i. 2. 10. Cf. καὶ τοὺς per 
αὐτοῦ δὲ ταὐτὰ εἴθικεν Hell. vi. τ. 15, 
and (with τό and the inf., as here) 
ἀγαθὸν δὲ ἐθίζειν αὑτὸν καὶ τὸ ἐρημεῖν 
Eq. ix. 9.—ph ἄπρακτα γίγνηται : 
may not be left undone. — παρά : 
during, lit. along the course of. G. 
1213, 3 (6); H. 802, 3 b. 

3. τῷ ἄρχειν παιδευομένῳ : short 
form of expression equiv. to τὸν eis τὸ 
ἄρχειν madevduevovin 2. Cf. οἱ εἰς τὴν 
βασιλικὴν τέχνην παιδευόμενοι 17. — τὸ 
μαθεῖν, εἴ τι μάθημα : the acquirement 


72. EENO®QNTOS AITOMNHMONEYMATA BB. 1. 


, Ἃ A A , 3) 
ποτέρῳ av προσθεῖναι μᾶλλον πρέποι ; 


80 ἔφη, “τῷ ἄρχειν παιδευομένῳ-: καὶ γὰρ τῶν ἄλλων οὐδὲν 


» » A , , ” 
ὄφελος ἄνευ τῶν τοιούτων μαθημάτων. 


ἴω ε ν 
«Οὐκοῦν ὁ οὕτω 


᾽ κα x ~ c τς A 3 , x Ν 
πεπαιδευμένος ἧττον ἂν δοκεῖ σοι ὑπὸ τῶν ἀντιπάλων ἢ τὰ 


λοιπὰ ζῷα ἁλίσκεσθαι ; τούτων γὰρ δήπου τὰ μὲν γαστρὶ 


, Ν 4, » 4 ν ~ 3 
δελεαζόμενα, Kal μάλα ἔνια δυσωπούμενα, ὅμως TH ἐπιθυ- 


35 pia τοῦ φαγεῖν ἀγόμενα πρὸς τὸ δέλεαρ ἁλίσκεται, τὰ δὲ 
μις Yew ἄγομενα προς ρ ἢ 


aA 3 , ” 
TOT @ ἐνεδρεύεται. 


, Ν Ki. Ἄχ > NRE ὦ 
“Πάνυ μὲν οὖν," Edy. 


lal A 
«Οὐκοῦν Kat 


¥ es , @ Y » \ ε , 
ἄλλα ὑπὸ λαγνείας, οἷον οἱ τε ορτυγες καὶ οἱ πέρδικες, 


πρὸς τὴν τῆς θηλείας φωνὴν τῇ ἐπιθυμίᾳ καὶ τῇ ἐλπίδι 


A > , / I ’, a) Ν Ν 
τῶν ἀφροδισίων φερόμενοι καὶ ἐξιστάμενοι τοῦ τὰ δεινὰ 


> , A 4, 3 ’, 3) ’, Ν 
40 ἀναλογίζεσθαι τοῖς θηράτροις ἐμπίπτουσι ;" συνέφη καὶ 


ταῦτα. 


¥ A 9 Ν 5 5 , ira 
Οὔκουν δοκεῖ σοι αἰσχρὸν εἶναι ἀνθρώπῳ ταὐτὰ 


πάσχειν τοῖς ἀφρονεστάτοις τῶν θηρίων; καὶ οἱ μοιχοὶ 


3 ’ 3 Ν ε ’ > a Ψ ,ὔ “A 
εἰσέρχονται εἰς Tas εἱρκτάς, εἰδότες ὅτι κίνδυνος τῷ μοι- 


χεύοντι ad τε ὁ νόμος ἀπειλεῖ παθεῖν καὶ ἐνεδρευθῆναι καὶ 


45 ληφθέντα ὑβρισθῆναι: καὶ τηλικούτων μὲν ἐπικειμένων 


w~ , »“2λ 4 > “ 3, + al 
τῷ μοιχεύοντι κακῶν TE καὶ αἰσχρῶν, ὄντων δὲ πολλῶν 


of whatever knowledge. — πολύ : sc. 
μᾶλλον. — τῶν ἄλλων ὄφελος : for 
the subjective gen. with ὄφελος, see 
on ὀσμῶν i. 4. 5, and, for the decl. of 
ὄφελος, Same section. Cf. ἀκολάστου 
yap στρατεύματος οὐδὲν ἡγεῖτο ὄφελος 
εἶναι An. ii. 6. 10. 

4. ἧττον ἂν δοκεῖ ἁλίσκεσθαι: seems 
less likely to be captured. For the inf. 
with ἄν in indirect discourse, cf. yevé- 
σθαι ἄν 1. 2. 18. ---- καὶ μάλα ἔνια δυσω- 
πούμενα : and some (of these) very shy 
by nature. For the partitive appos., see 
G. 914; H. 624d. Cf. ἀκούομεν ὑμᾶς 
els τὴν πόλιν βίᾳ παρεληλυθότας ἐνίους 
σκηνοῦν (are quartered, some of you) ἐν 
ταῖς οἰκίαις An. V. 5. 11. — ot πέρδικες: 


cf. Xenophon’s description of the bus- 
tards (wridas) as easily caught, πέτον- 
ται yap βραχύ, ὥσπερ πέρδικες An. i. 
5. 3. — ἐξιστάμενοι τοῦ ἀναλογίζεσθαι : 
see on τοῦ φρονεῖν ἐξίστησι ἱ. 3. 12. 

5. οὔκουν: at nonne, seems 
preferable to οὐκοῦν, as being fol- 
lowed by the decisive ἄρ᾽ οὐκ, 
ἐστίν at the close of the section. 
- καί : introduces anexample. Cf. 
i. 1. 7.— τὰς eipxrds : i.e. the women’s 
apartments, γυναικωνῖτις. ---- κίνδυνος : 
sc. ἐστί. --- ὁ νόμος ἀπειλεῖ : acc. 
to Attic law, the injured husband 
could either himself punish the 
adulterer, or accuse him before the 
Thesmothetae. — ὄντων δὲ πολλῶν 


Ἄν" 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA Il. 1. 73 


TOV ἀπολυσόντων τῆς τῶν ἀφροδισίων ἐπιθυμίας ἐν ἀδείᾳ, 
9 > ιν. ’ ὃ la 9 > » lal 
ὅμως εἰς TA ἐπικίνδυνα φέρεσθαι, ἄρ᾽ οὐκ ἤδη τοῦτο παν- 


τάπασι κακοδαιμονῶντός ἐστιν; 


“Ἔμοιγε δοκεῖ," ἔφη. 


> ἈΝ 9 
50 “Τὸ δὲ εἶναι μὲν τὰς ἀναγκαιοτάτας πλείστας πράξεις 


lal 5 4 > ε ’ Φ' Φ A A ἈΝ 
τοῖς ἀνθρώποις ἐν ὑπαίθρῳ, οἷον τάς τε πολεμικὰς καὶ τὰς 


Ν Ἂν “ 3, > Ν 3 ’ἅ 2 A 
γεωργικὰς καὶ τῶν ἄλλων ov τὰς ἐλαχίστας, τοὺς δὲ 
Ν > 4 » ’ 4 Ἁ ’ 
πολλοὺς ἀγυμνάστως ἔχειν πρός τε ψύχη καὶ θάλπη, 
3 ~ \ 3 , > ” id ἃ A 
ov δοκεῖ σοι πολλὴ ἀμέλεια εἶναι ; συνέφη καὶ τοῦτο. 


a 9 “ / ” 
ταῦτα εὐπετῶς φέρειν ; 


’ 
“Πάνυ μὲν οὖν," ἔφη. 


55“ Οὐκοῦν δοκεῖ σοι τὸν μέλλοντα ἄρχειν ἀσκεῖν δεῖν καὶ 


5 ~~ 
“Οὐκουν, 


A A ε 4 
εἰ TOUS ἐγκρατεῖς τούτων ἁπάντων εἰς τοὺς ἀρχικοὺς τάττο- 


ξ ’ “A A 
μεν, τοὺς ἀδυνάτους ταῦτα ποιεῖν εἰς τοὺς μηδ᾽ ἀντιποιησο- 


4 a »¥ , ” - \ aA 
μένους τοῦ ἄρχειν τάξομεν ;” συνέφη καὶ τοῦτο. 
60 ἐπειδὴ καὶ τούτων ἑκατέρου τοῦ φύλου τὴν τάξιν οἶσθα, 


bar rac aie 
“Ti οὖν ; 


» 3. > ΄ > ΄ las ΄ , Ν 
ἤδη TOT ἐπεσκέψω εις TOTEPQv Των τάξεων TOUT@V σαῦτον 


τῶν ἀπολυσόντων : although there 
are so many means to free him 
from (i.e. gratify). τῶν ἀπολυσόν- 
των is neuter. —év ἀδείᾳ : with im- 
punity. —dp οὐκ ἤδη τοῦτο κτλ.: is 
not that, then, the act of an utter 
madman? κακοδαιμονάω, lit. to be pos- 
sessed by an evil genius. The par- 
ticiple is pred. genitive. 

6. εἶναι μέν, τοὺς δὲ ἔχειν: for 
this use of μέν, δέ, see on i. 4. 17. — 
Tas ἀναγκαιοτάτας amdeloras πράξεις : 
the greatest part of the most necessary 
employments. —avO@pamois: connect 
With εἶναι. --- οὐ τὰς ἐλαχίστας : see 
on οὐχ ἥκιστα i. 2. 23. --- ἀγυμνάστως 
ἔχειν : are untrained. —Soxet: sc. 
τοῦτο. --- καὶ ταῦτα : sc. ψύχη καὶ 
θάλπη. --- φέρειν : const. with ἄσκειν, 
and for the inf., see on μελετῶντα 
καρτερεῖν i. 6. 7. 


7. ἐγκρατεῖς : see on 1. —el τάτ- 
τομεν : “1 we include,’’ a good ex- 
ample of the simple logical condition. 
G. 1890; H. 893. — τοὺς μηδ᾽ ἀντι- 
ποιησομένους τοῦ ἄρχειν : those who 
will not even contend for high office. 
For the gen. rod ἄρχειν, see on ἀρχῆς 
1, and for the attrib. participle, 
cf. i. 2. 43.— τάξομεν : distinguish 
the simple fut. ind. in apod. 
from the interr. subjv., shall we 
include. — τούτων ἑκατέρου Tod φύλου 
τὴν τάξιν : the respective position of 
each of these classes of men, lit. the 
rank of each class of these men. The 
two individuals are now identified 
with the classes of which they are 
types. For the position of the dem. 
pronominal adj., see G. 974; 
H. 673 a. Cf. ἐφ᾽ ἑκατέρῳ τῷ κέρᾳ 
Thue. v. 67. ; 


74 EENO®OQNTOS AILOMNHMONEYMATA 


Ψ x , 3) 
δικαίως ἂν τάττοις ; 


mm ἃ. 


» 
“Ἔγωγ᾽, ἔφη ὁ ᾿Αρίστιππος, “Kat 8 


3 ~ , 5 Ν 5 \ ἴω ¥ 
οὐδαμῶς γε τάττω ἐμαυτὸν εἰς THY TOV ἄρχειν Bovdo- 


’ὔ’ 
μένων τάξιν. 


\ \ , a» 9 ΄ 
και γὰρ TAVU μοι δοκεῖ ἄφρονος ἀνθρώπου 


5 ΄ , ¥ 54 ὄν Ae A Ν / 
65 εἰναι TO, μεγάλου epyov ονῖος TOV εαύτῳ TA δέοντα 


’ Ν 3 A fa) > \ , 
παρασκευάζειν, μὴ ἀρκεῖν τοῦτο, ἀλλὰ προσαναθέσθαι 


Ν \ A » 7 a , ’ὔ A Ve “ 
τὸ καὶ τοῖς ἄλλοις πολίταις ὧν δέονται πορίζειν: καὶ ἑαυτῷ 


μὲν πολλὰ ὧν βούλεται ἐλλείπειν, τῆς δὲ πόλεως προε- 


a - pe” Ν , bd ε / 4, = 
στῶτα, ἐὰν μὴ πάντα ὁσα ἡ πόλις βούλεται καταπραττ, 


4 , ε Ψ ἴω lal > Ν 5 ’ 3 ’ 
τοτούτου δίκην ὑπέχειν, τοῦτο πῶς οὐ πολλὴ ἀφροσύνη ἐστί; 


\ \ 3 a ε , A x y 5 Ν 
και Yop ἀξιοῦσιν αι πόλεις τοις ἀβχουσιν WOTEP eyo 


A > 4 ial > ’ὔ Ν 3 “ Ν , 
τοῖς οἰκέταις χρῆσθαι: ἐγώ Te yap ἀξιῶ τοὺς θεράποντας 


3 Ν \ » Ν Ε] , 4 > Ν Ν 
ἐμοὶ μὲν ἄφθονα τὰ ἐπιτήδεια παρασκευάζειν, αὐτοὺς δὲ 


Ψ 9 ¥ A 
μηδενὸς τούτων ἅπτεσθαι, at τε πόλεις οἴονται χρῆναι 


Ἰδτοὺς ἄρχοντας ἑαυταῖς μὲν ὡς πλεῖστα ἀγαθὰ πορίζειν, 


SANK \ ΄ , 9) oP 
αυτους δὲ TAVT@V τούτων ἀπέχεσθαι. 


3 Ν > Ν \ 
€y@ οὖν TOUS μεν 


, Ν , ¥ Joa \ » 
βουλομένους πολλὰ πράγματα ἔχειν αὑτοῖς τε Kal ἄλλοις 


8. ἔγωγε (Sc. ἐσκεψάμην) : yes, in- 
αθοά. --- ἀνθρώπου : for the pred. gen. 
of characteristic, see on γνώμης 
i. 1. 9.---οτὸ μὴ ἀρκεῖν τοῦτο : sc. 
We might have expected 
ἀρκεῖσθαι (contentum~ esse) 
τούτῳ, ἀλλὰ προσαναθέσθαι, but it is 
common in Greek for a dependent 
word of one clause to become the 
subj. in the next, as here, where 
αὐτόν is to be supplied as subj. of 
mpocavabéc bar. — ἑαυτῷ μὲν ἐλλείπειν, 
τούτου δίκην ὑπέχειν : a compound 
subj. as in 6, here summed up by 
τοῦτο.---τοῦτο mwas... ἐστί: the 
thought stated as a belief at the 
beginning of this passage (πάνυ... 
ἄφρονος... εἶναι) is repeated at its 
close in the form of a question. See 
on i. 4. 19. 


αὐτῷ. 


9. ἐγώ τε γάρ, αἵ τε πόλεις : for 
as I, so also the states. See on i. 
3. 1. --τοὺς μὲν βουλομένους κτλ.: 
with these words Aristippus indi- 
cates the position and function of a 
statesman who, at the demand of the 
state, must lay on himself and others 
heavy burdens: and, in rejecting 
this for himself, Aristippus indirectly 
gives utterance to the view after- 
ward developed by his pupil Epicu- 
rus. Cf. 
οὔτε αὐτὸ πράγματα ἔχει, οὔτε ἄλλῳ 
παρέχει Diog. Laert. x. 39, words 
which Cicero renders quod aeter- 
num beatumque. est, id nec 
habere ipsum negoti quic- 
quam nec exhibere alteri De 
Nat. Deor. i. 17. The use of the 
dat. αὑτοῖς with may be 


TO μακάριον καὶ ἄφθαρτον 


ἔχειν 


ΠΥ πε vo . 


ia 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA II. 1. 75 


9 
παρέχειν οὕτως ἂν παιδεύσας εἰς τοὺς ἀρχικοὺς καταστή- 
Tae ἐμαυτόν γε μέντοι τάττω εἰς τοὺς βουλομένους ἧ 
en , XN nO 4 ” Ν ε , » 
80 ῥᾷστά τε καὶ ἥδιστα βιοτεύειν." καὶ 6 Σωκράτης ἔφη 10 
“Βούλει οὖν καὶ τοῦτο σκεψώμεθα, πότεροι ἥδιον ζῶσιν, οἱ 
» ἈΞ 5 , 9). ἐξ \ a 9 »¥ ᾿» A 
ἄρχοντες ἢ οἱ ἀρχόμενοι; “Πάνυ μὲν οὖν," ἔφη. “Πρῶ- 
τον μὲν τοίνυν τῶν ἐθνῶν ὧν ἡμεῖς ἴσμεν ἐν μὲν τῇ ᾿Ασίᾳ 
Πέρσαι μὲν ἄρχουσιν, ἄρχονται δὲ Σύροι καὶ Φρύγες καὶ 
86 Λυδοί: ἐν δὲ τῇ Εὐρώπῃ Σκύθαι μὲν ἄρχουσι, Μαιῶται 
, » 3 Ν “ ’ A » 
δὲ ἄρχονται: ἐν δὲ τῇ Λιβύῃ Καρχηδόνιοι μὲν ἄρχουσι, 
AiBves δὲ ἃ 5 Ἵ “8 ζει ζῆν; 
ρχονται. τούτων οὖν ποτέρους ἤδιον οἴει ζῆν; 
“ἡ A ε ’ 3 a A Ξ, ΝΠ ΑΝ > , , ἴω 
ἢ τῶν Ἑλλήνων, ἐν οἷς καὶ αὐτὸς εἶ, πότεροί σοι δοκοῦσιν 
ν ω A 
ἥδιον, οἱ κρατοῦντες ἢ οἱ κρατούμενοι, ζῆν; “AN ἐγώ 
ϑύτοι,᾽ ἔφη ὁ ᾿Αρίστιππος, “ οὐδὲ εἰς τὴν δουλείαν αὖ ἐμαυτὸν 
4 > 3 > , ἊΝ A / , ες » ἃ 
τάττω: ἀλλ᾽ εἶναί τίς μοι δοκεῖ μέση τούτων ὁδός, HY 
πειρῶμαι βαδίζειν, οὔτε δι’ ἀρχῆς οὔτε διὰ δουλείας, ἀλλὰ δι᾿ 
“ANN 12 


5 , Wir lA Ν > ’ » ” 
ἐλευθερίας, ἥπερ μάλιστα πρὸς εὐδαιμονίαν ἄγει. 


explained by the analogy of the fol- 
lowing ἄλλοις. --- οὕτως : i.e. as pre- 
viously described. —av παιδεύσας : 
**would educate and.’’ — μέντοι : a 


stronger adversative than δέ. --- ἧ 


ῥᾷστα : for the strengthened super- 
lative, see H. 651. 

10. βούλει, σκεψώμεθα : see on 1. 
— ὧν : for the attraction, see G. 1031 ; 
H. 994; ὅπως οὖν ἔσεσθε ἄνδρες ἄξιοι 
τῆς ἐλευθερίας ἧς κέκτησθε An. i. 7. 3. 
--Πέρσαι μὲν ἄρχουσιν, ἄρχονται δὲ 
Σύροι : obs. the chiastic order. In 
the two following sents. the more 
natural order is followed. — Σύροι, 
Φρύγες, AvSou: purposely mentioned, 
as names of races despised by the 
Greeks. —Marérar: a people near 
the Sea of Azof. — ἐν οἷς καὶ αὐτὸς 


et: **to come a little nearer home.”’ 


— oi κρατοῦντες, οἱ κρατούμενοι : 1.6. 
the more powerful states and their 
tributary allies. Under the leader- 
ship of Pericles, Athens had devel- 
oped to its utmost the system of 
a central power with many depend- 
ent allies. For an account of it, 
see Schémann, Antig. of Greece, i. 
passim. 

11. αὖ: on the other hand, with 
reference to the beginning of 8, εἰς 
τὴν δουλείαν being used for εἰς τὴν 
τῶν δούλων τάξιν. --- τούτων : const. 
as a gen. of place with μέση, which 
heré is equivalent to ἐν μέσῳ between. 
- ἥν : for the cognate acc. with verbs 
of motion, see G. 1057; H. 712. — 
εὐδαιμονίαν : for true happiness de- 
scribed as the reward of virtue, cf. 
33. See Introd. § 22. : 


76 EENO®QNTOS AITOMNHMONEYMATA Β. 1. 


9 yo» ε , “ Κ » ὃ > 9 A " 5 . 
εἰ μέν," ἔφη ὁ Σωκράτης, “ ὥσπερ οὔτε OL ἀρχῆς οὔτε διὰ 
ν Y 

95 δουλείας ἡ ὁδὸς αὕτη φέρει, οὕτως μηδὲ δι᾿ ἀνθρώπων, 
ἴσως ἄν τι λέγοις. εἰ μέντοι ἐν ἀνθρώποις ὦν μήτε ἄρχειν 
3 4 4 ¥ \ ‘\ μέ ε XN 

ἀξιώσεις μήτε ἄρχεσθαι μηδὲ τοὺς ἄρχοντας ἑκὼν θερα- 
πεύσεις, οἶμαί σε ὁρᾶν ὡς ἐπίστανται οἱ κρείττονες τοὺς 


ν \ “~ aNd ’, 4 4 
ἥττονας καὶ κοινῇ καὶ ἰδίᾳ κλαίοντας καθιστάντες δούλοις 


100 χρῆσθαι. ἢ λανθάνουσί σε οἱ ἄλλων σπειράντων καὶ 13 


’ , a 4 Ἂς, A 
φυτευσάντων TOV TE OLTOV τέμνοντες και δενδροκοποῦντες 


καὶ πάντα τρόπον πολιορκοῦντες τοὺς ἥττονας καὶ μὴ 
4 4 ν x ’ὕ e 4 4 
θέλοντας θεραπεύειν, ἕως ἂν πείσωσιν ἑλέσθαι δουλεύειν 


9 \ a A A 4 A 5 a ἐφ" ἢ A 
αντι TOV πολεμεῖν TOLS KPELTTOCL ; Kat ἰδίᾳ αυ οι ἀνδρεῖοι 


καταδουλωσάμενοι καρποῦνται ;” 


Ν \ \ > + ὃ Ν 25 , 5 5 θ Ψ 
105 και δυνατοὶ τους αναν βους και QOVVATOVS οὐκ οἱἰισῦσῦα OTL 


“᾿Αλλ᾽ ἐγώ τοι," ἔφη, 


ἐ Ν 4 A δ᾽ 3 λ ’ 5 4, λ ’ 
να, μη πασχω TQAVUTA, OVO ELS πολιτειαν εμαντον κατακλειω, 


ἀλλὰ ξένος πανταχοῦ εἰμι." 


12. μέν, μέντοι : asin 9, (ὦ. iv. 
4. ἴ. ---οὕτως μηδὲ δι᾿ ἀνθρώπων : sc. 
φέροι. ----ἴσως ἄν τι λέγοις : *‘ perhaps 
there would be something in what 
you say.’? The opposite is οὐδὲν 
λέγειν. See Kr. Spr. 51. 16. 13. — 
εἰ ἀξιώσεις : for the fut. ind. ex- 
pressing present intention, cf. i. 6. 3. 
—pnde ἑκὼν θεραπεύσεις : and do not 
intend to yield voluntary allegiance. 
—kal κοινῇ καὶ ἰδίᾳ : ‘both states 
and individuals.’’ --- κλαίοντας καθί- 
σταντες : ‘‘by bringing them to 
grief.”’ Cf. our phrase ‘come to 
grief,’ for any disastrous result. Cf., 
also, Xenophon’s use of the similar 
κλαίοντας καθίζειν in Sym. iil. 11 ; Cyr. 
li. 2. 15. — δούλοις : as slaves. Cf. 
τεκμηρίῳ i. 2. 49, rpop7 iii. 11. 6. 

13. σπειράντων : for the omission 
of the art. with subst. participles, 


καὶ ὁ Σωκράτης ἔφη “Τοῦτο 14 


see on μαινόμενος i. 3. 11], --- τόν τε 
σῖτον τέμνοντες κτλ.: cf. the proceed- 
ings in the early years of the Pelo- 
ponnesian war, when aSpartan army 
under Archidamus regularly ravaged 
the Attic plain. For the attrib. par- 
ticiple used substantively, see on 
dvrimomncouévous 7Ἴ.---πολιορ- 
κοῦντεε: Vexantes, besieging. — 
πείσωσιν : euphemistic for ‘‘ com- 
pel.’ Cf. ἐπείσθησαν ἀνάγκῃ An. 
vil. 7. 29, φοβῶν ἔπεισε Cyr. v. 4. 51. 


τοὺς 


For the subjv. in a temporal clause, 


see G. 1465; H. 921, and cf. 38; iii. 
5. 0. ---Ο- καὶ ἰδίᾳ ad: transition from 
states to individuals. — ξένος παντα- 
χοῦ: ‘a citizen of the world.’’ 

14. τοῦτο μέντοι κτλ.: that is 
certainly a clever dodge you suggest. 
πάλαισμα lit. a trick of wrestling. 
For the pred. use of δεινόν, see 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA II. 1. iwi 


μέντοι ἤδη λέγεις δεινὸν πάλαισμα. τοὺς yap ἕένους, ἐξ 


110 οὗ ὅ τε Σίνις καὶ ὁ Σκείρων καὶ ὁ Προκρούστης ἀπέθανον, 


3 Ν » 5 “Ὁ > Ν a e \ ’ 3 “A 
οὐδεὶς ἔτι ἀδικεῖ: ἀλλὰ νῦν οἱ μὲν πολιτευόμενοι ἐν ταῖς 


: δ΄ be , ‘0 ν Ἂ, LO ‘a ἈΝ ’ 
πατρίσι καὶ νόμους τίθενται ἱνα μὴ ἀδικῶνται, καὶ φίλους 


Ν A > “4 ld ¥ A 

πρὸς τοῖς ἀναγκαίοις καλουμένοις addovs κτῶνται βοη- 
4 ‘\ ~ ’ὔ’ 3 4 4 x’ »¢ 

θούς, καὶ ταῖς πόλεσιν ἐρύματα περιβάλλονται, καὶ ὅπλα 


ἴω a Ἀ 3 ἴω \ 
115 κτῶνται, οἷς ἀμύνονται τοὺς ἀδικοῦντας, Kal πρὸς τούτοις 


» » ’ὔ , \ ε Ν 
ἄλλους ἔξωθεν συμμάχους κατασκευάζονται: καὶ οἱ μὲν 
πάντα ταῦτα κεκτημένοι ὅμως ἀδικοῦνται: σὺ δὲ οὐδὲν 15 


A 7 » 5 \ “A ε A ¥ “ 5 ἴω 
μὲν τούτων ἔχων, ἐν δὲ ταῖς ὁδοῖς, ἔνθα πλεῖστοι ἀδικοῦν- 
‘\ 4 , 3 ε 4 > x , 
Tat, πολὺν χρόνον διατρίβων, εἰς ὁποίαν δ᾽ ἂν πόλιν 


9 , A A , ν ¥ Ν A Y 
120 ἀφίκῃ, τῶν πολιτῶν πάντων ττων ὧν, καὶ τοιοῦτος οἵοις 


μάλιστα ἐπιτίθενται οἱ βουλόμενοι ἀδικεῖν, ὅμως διὰ τὸ 
? 53 3 eal ¥ > A > / ε , 
Eévos εἶναι οὐκ av οἴει ἀδικηθῆναι; ἢ διότι ai πόλεις 


\ Ν 
σοι κηρύττουσν ἀσφάλειαν καὶ προσιόντι καὶ ἀπιόντι, 
“ x Ἂς la) x » A 5 fog 
θαρρεῖς; n διότι καὶ δοῦλος av οἴει τοιοῦτος εἶναι οἷος 


Η. 618. ---ἐξ ov: sc. χρόνου. --- Σίνις, 
Σκείρων, IIpoxpoverys : three famous 
robbers, killed by Theseus. (Cf. 
Plut. Theseus 8. The way in which 
Procrustes treated his guests has 
become proverbial, and has given us 
‘the word ‘procrustean.’ Cf. otros 
δὲ τοὺς παριόντας ὁδοιπόρους ἠνάγκασεν 
ἐπί τινος κλίνης ἀναπίπτειν καὶ τῶν μὲν 
μακροτέρων τὰ προέχοντα μέρη (the 
projecting portions) τοῦ σώματος ἀπέ- 
κοπτε, τῶν δ᾽ ἐλαττόνων τοὺς πόδας 
προέκρουεν (hammered out) Diod. Sic. 
iv. 50. ---ἀλλὰ viv: i.e. when there 
are no longer such robbers. — τοῖς 
ἀναγκαίοις καλουμένοις : in general, 
οἱ ἀναγκαῖοι means all who are inti- 
mately associated with us; here, 
however, like the Lat. necessarii, 


125 μηδενὶ δεσπότῃ λυσιτελεῖν ; Tis yap dv ἐθέλοι ἄνθρωπον. 


the phrase is equivalent to kinsmen, 
hence the addition of καλουμένοις. ---- 
βοηθούς : pred. accusative. —ots ἀμύ- 
vovrat: with which they try to defend 
themselves. For the pres. of at- 
tempted action, see G. 1255; H. 825. 
— τοὺς ἀδικοῦντας : for the acc. with 
certain verbs of which the equiva- 
lents are intr. in Eng., see G. 1049; 
H. 712. 

15. ἔχων : although you have. — 
τοιοῦτος : i.e. without home or 
friends. —otois: for the pl. after 
a sing. antec. suggesting a class, 
see H. 629 a.— διὰ τὸ ξένος εἶναι : 
for the articular inf., see on i. 1. 
12.—%: 86. θαρρεῖς. --- οἷος λυσιτε- 
λεῖν : see on οἵους τέμνειν i, 4. θ. --- 
τίς γὰρ ἄν ἐθέλοι κτλ. : a question 


"8 ΞΕΝΟΦΏΝΤΟΣ AIIOMNHMONEYMATA BB. 1. 


5 - ay eae ἢ A Ν δὲ 2A Ζλ al δὲ Xx 

ἐν οἰκίᾳ ἔχειν πονεῖν μὲν μηδὲν ἐθέλοντα, TH δὲ πολυτε- 

λεστάτῃ διαίτῃ χαίροντα; σκεψώμεθα δὲ καὶ τοῦτο, πῶς 16 

οἱ δεσπόται τοῖς τοιούτοις οἰκέταις χρῶνται: apa οὐ τὴν 
\ 4 5 “ ~ ~ ’ ὕ \ 

μὲν λαγνείαν αὐτῶν τῷ λιμῷ σωφρονίζουσι ; κλέπτειν δὲ 


130 κωλύουσιν ἀποκλείοντες ὅθεν dv τι λαβεῖν H; τοῦ δὲ 


, “ > ig Ν 3 , \ “A 
δραπετεύειν δεσμοῖς ἀπείργουσι; THY ἀργίαν δὲ πληγαῖς 
ἐξαναγκάζουσιν; ἢ σὺ πῶς ποιεῖς, ὅταν τῶν οἰκετῶν τινα 


ww 3, ’ ” 
τοιοῦτον ὄντα καταμανθάνῃς ; 
“A ν x 4 > 4 
κακοῖς, ἕως ἂν δουλεύειν ἀναγκάσω. 
Ἂ A 
135 Tes, οἱ εἰς τὴν βασιλικὴν τέχνην παιδευόμενοι, ἣν δοκεῖς μοι 


“Kokalo,” ἔφη, “ πᾶσι 
ἀλλὰ γάρ, ὦ Σώκρα- 


Q 4 3 , > 4 4 A 3 5 , 
σὺ νομίζειν εὐδαιμονίαν εἶναι, τί διαφέρουσι τῶν ἐξ ἀνάγ- 
Ν»» A 
Kns κακοπαθούντων, εἴ ye πεινήσουσι καὶ διψήσουσι καὶ 


ε , \ > / Ν io ’ , 

βιγώσουσι Kal ἀγρυπνήσουσι και τάλλα πάντα μοχθή- 
ε / > \ \ \ 39 4.0.9 4 , 

σουσιν EKOVTES 5 eyw μεν γὰρ ουκ oto O Tt διαφέρει 


Ν > ox , Ce Ἃ ἂν A ef 
1407d αὐτὸ δέρμα ἑκόντα ἢ ἄκοντα μαστιγοῦσθαι ἢ ὅλως 


va aA A x » 

TO αὐτὸ σῶμα πᾶσι τοῖς τοιούτοις ἑκόντα ἢ ἄκοντα 
A 5» x 3 , , ἴω 

- πολιορκεῖσθαι, ἄλλο γε ἢ ἀφροσύνη πρόσεστι τῷ 


Ν Ν ε ΄, 3) 
θέλοντι τὰ λυπηρὰ ὑπομένειν. 


’ὕ 53 5 
“Ti δέ, ὦ ᾿Αρίστιππε," 


ὁ Σωκράτης ἔφη, “ οὐ δοκεῖ σοι τῶν τοιούτων διαφέρειν 


which seems to support the sup- 
position attributed to Aristippus, 
namely, that as a slave he would be 
of no account: its real application is 
found in the following section. 

16. dpa od: belongs to each of 
the three following questions. For 
the interr., see on i. 3. 11. — κλέ- 
πτεῖν : for the inf. with verbs of hin- 
drance, see on πορεύεσθαι i. 6. 6. 

17. ἀλλὰ γάρ : introduces (like 
at enim) an objection, γάρ being 
explained by some omitted thought 
like ‘‘an objection presents itself.’’ 
- τί : adv. accusative. —revqoover: 


\ ε 4, A > / ἍΝ ἃ Ν ε \ A 4 “ἡ 
145 τὰ ἑκούσια τῶν ἀκουσίων, ἢ ὁ μὲν ἑκὼν πεινῶν φάγοι ἂν 


for this and the following fut. inds., 
cf. ἀξιώσεις 12. —6 τι ἄλλο : to be 
read together, wherein else. After 
ἄλλο γε ἤ, acc. to Eng. idiom, a ὅτι 
might be expected, which is not 
necessary in Greek. Cf. τί yap 
ἄλλο ἢ κινδυνεύσεις ii. 3. 17. ‘The 
difference between willing and un- 
willing submission to indignities is 
only this, that he who submits 
willingly incurs, in addition to his 
suffering, the charge of folly.’’ 

18. ὁ Σωκράτης ἔφη: see on i. 
2. 9.— τῶν τοιούτων (80. λυπηρῶν) : 
part. gen. with τὰ ἑκούσια. ---- η: in so 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA II. 1. 79 


Ν ἴω = 
ὁπότε βούλοιτο, καὶ 6 ἑκὼν διψῶν πίοι, Kal τἄλλα ὡσαύτως, 
lal > 3 > , la) / 9 3, ε / 
τῷ δ᾽ ἐξ ἀνάγκης ταῦτα πάσχοντι οὐκ ἔξεστιν ὁπόταν 
t 
» ε \ ε , A 
βούληται παύεσθαι; ἔπειτα ὁ μὲν ἑκουσίως ταλαιπωρῶν 
Mae Mook > ~ 5 (ὃ a > ’ὔ Φ' ε Ν ’ὔ 
ἐπ᾿ ἀγαθῃ ἐλπίδι πονῶν εὐφραίνεται, οἷον ot τὰ θηρία 
160 θηρῶντες ἐλπίδι τοῦ λήψεσθαι ἡδέως μοχθοῦσι. καὶ τὰ μὲν 19 
ἴω Ss an » 
τοιαῦτα ἄθλα τῶν πόνων μικροῦ τινος aid ἐστι: τοὺς δὲ 
ἴω ν ΄ 3 Ἀ / x ¢ 5 Ν 
πονοῦντας, ἵνα φίλους ἀγαθοὺς κτήσωνται, ἢ ὅπως ἐχθροὺς 
x Ὁ Ν Ν A 
χειρώσωνται, ἢ ἵνα δυνατοὶ γενόμενοι Kal τοῖς σώμασι 
καὶ ταῖς ψυχαῖς καὶ τὸν ἑαυτῶν οἶκον καλῶς οἰκῶσι καὶ 
lal \ lal ἴω 
1δδτοὺς φίλους εὖ ποιῶσι καὶ τὴν πατρίδα εὐεργετῶσι, πῶς 
Ν A ἴω 
οὐκ οἴεσθαι χρὴ τούτους καὶ πονεῖν ἡδέως εἰς τὰ τοιαῦτα 
καὶ ζῆν εὐφραινομένους, ἀγαμένους μὲν ἑαυτούς, ἐπαινου- 
4 \ ‘ ld ε Ν a κά » \ e \ 
μένους δὲ καὶ ζηλουμένους ὑπὸ τῶν ἄλλων; ἔτι δὲ ai μὲν 20 
ἴω “A Ἁ » 
ῥᾳδιουργίαι καὶ ἐκ τοῦ παραχρῆμα ἡδοναὶ οὔτε σώματι 
Ψ 
160 εὐεξίαν ἱκαναΐ εἰσιν ἐνεργάζεσθαι, ὡς φασιν οἱ γυμνασταΐί, 
» Pe ’ > ’ὔ 3 A > ἴω ε 
οὔτε ψυχῇ ἐπιστήμην ἀξιόλογον οὐδεμίαν ἐμποιοῦσιν" αἱ 
δὲ διὰ καρτερίας ἐπιμέλειαι τῶν καλῶν τε καὶ ἀγαθῶν ἔργων 
far das, quatenus. --- ὁπότε βού- τους: repeats and emphasizes τοὺς 
λοιτο: for the opt. inarel.temporal δέ. Cf. 111. 5. 8, 7. 4. — dyapé- 


clause by assimilation, see on i. vous ἑαυτούς : well-pleased with them- 
5. 4; ii. 9. 2. — πίοι: without dv, _ selves. 





which is to be supplied from the pre- 
ceding φάγοι ἄν. --- ὁπόταν βούληται: 
obs. the ἄν retained with the subjv. 
in a rel. temporal clause, and omitted 
with the opt. (ὁπότε βούλοιτο). --- 
πονῶν : for the supplementary par- 
ticiple with verbs expressive of 
being pleased, see G. 1580; H. 
983. 

19. ἄθλα: praemia, rewards. 
—piKpod τινος ἄξιά ἐστι: have some 
small value. For the indef. pron. 
added to adjs., see on δεινήν τινα i. 3. 
12, and, for the gen. of value with 
ἄξιος, G. 1185; H. 753 f. —rov- 


20. ἐκ τοῦ παραχρῆμα ἡδοναί: 
pleasures of the moment, i.e. easily- 
won enjoyments (as shown by the 
contrasted ai διὰ καρτερίας ἐπιμέλειαι). 
Cf. τὰς ἐγγυτάτω ἡδονάς iv. 5. 10. --- 
σώματι, ψυχῇ : for the omission of 
the generic art., see H. 660.—ai διὰ 
καρτερίας ἐπιμέλειαι: for the use of 
the prep. with its case as an attrib. 
adj. (so ἐκ τοῦ παραχρῆμα above), see 
G. 952; H. 600; and for διά with 
the gen. denoting manner, cf. διὰ 
μέθης Plato Sym. 176 ».— ἔργων : re- 
sults. For the gen. with verbs of at- 
taining and touching, see on i. 4. 12. 


165 


170 


175 καὶ Πρόδικος δὲ ὁ σοφὸς ἐν TO συγγράμματι τῷ TeEpi2t 


80 ἘΕΝΟΦΩΝΤΟΣ AITOMNHMONEYMATA Β. 1. 


ἐξικνεῖσθαι ποιοῦσιν, ὡς φασιν οἱ ἀγαθοὶ ἄνδρες. 


δέ που καὶ Ἡσίοδος: 


λέγει 


“ 


ΣΟ ὩΣ \ \ , \ > ye e\ 2 
ν μὲν yap κακότητα Kal ἰλαδὸν ἔστιν ἑλέσθαι 

τὴν μὲν γὰρ κακότη 
ῥηιδίως. λείη μὲν ὁδός, μάλα δ᾽ ἐγγύθι ναίει. 
τῆς δ᾽ ἀρετῆς ἱδρῶτα θεοὶ προπάροιθεν ἔθηκαν 
ἀθάνατοι: μακρὸς δὲ καὶ ὄρθιος οἶμος ἐς αὐτὴν 
καὶ τρηχὺς τὸ πρῶτον. ἐπὴν δ᾽ εἰς ἄκρον ἵκηαι, 
ῥηιδίη δὴ ἔπειτα πέλει, χαλεπή περ ἐοῦσα. 


μαρτυρεῖ δὲ καὶ Ἐπίχαρμος ἐν τῷδε: 


‘ A , al e A ,ὔὕ ἊΨ »29 e 4) 
TWV TOV@MV πωλοῦσιν μιν TAVTA τἀγάθ Ou θεοί. 


[καὶ ἐν ἄλλῳ δὲ τόπῳ φησίν. 


“ὦ πονηρέ, μὴ τὰ μαλακὰ μῶσο, μὴ τὰ σκλήρ᾽ ἔχῃς.}} 


ε - 9 4 Ν ’ 9 , ε 4 

Ηρακλέους, ὅπερ δὴ καὶ πλείστοις ἐπιδείκνυται, ὡσαύτως 
Ν ~ > ~ 3 ’ὔ a , , 4 3 3 

περὶ τῆς ἀρετῆς ἀποφαίνεται, ὧδέ πως λέγων, ὅσα ἐγὼ 


- -Ἡσίοδος : the quotation is from 
his Works and Days 287 ff. — Kal ἴλα- 
Sov: and that in abundance. —éortw : 
why this accent?—Aeln: cf. the 
Lat. lévis. —vate: sc. ἡ κακότη-.--- 
οἶμος : seems first masc. (uaxpés), and 
then fem. (ῥηιδίη). It is more com- 
monly fem., like other words mean- 
ing way, €.g., ὁδός, κέλευθος, ἀτραπός, 
etc. Possibly the poet had one of 
these in mind with ῥηιδίη. See 
G. 194, 1; H. 152 c. — χαλεπή 
περ ἐοῦσα : sc. τὸ πρῶτον. --- Ἔπί- 
Xappos: a comic poet from Cos, 
who flourished in Syracuse about 
500 n.c. The two verses are ‘tro- 
chaic tetrameter catalectic.’ G. 
1651; H. 1088. --- τῶν πόνων : for 
the gen. of price, see on i. 6. 11.— 


kal... ἔχῃς : the passage is prob. 
interpolated, as τόπος was not used in 
Xenophon’s time to denote a ‘ place’ 
in an author’s works. See L. & S. 
8.v. τόπος 1, 4. --- μῶσο : from “dw. 
21. Πρόδικος : of Ceos, ἃ con- 
temporary of Socrates and Xeno- 
phon, the latter of whom may 
have heard him recite his apologue 
of Hercules at Thebes, in the course 
of a professional tour. Socrates 
spoke of him with respect, and in 
Plato several times calls himself a 
hearer of Prodicus.. The σύγγραμμα 
περὶ Ἡρακλέους was a part of a larger 
work entitled “Qpa:. — ἐπιδείκνυται : 
exhibits, ‘‘recites.’’ The exhibition or 
‘show’ speeches of the Sophists were 
generally called ἐπιδείξεις. ---- ὧδέ πως : 


ΒΝ a νὰν μπὰς... ἱ ὦ 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA It. 1. 81 


, Ν Ν ε , 3 ον ἃ ΄ 3 ἂν 
μέμνημαι: φησὶ γὰρ Ἣρακλέα, ἐπεὶ ἐκ παίδων εἰς ἥβην 
A a » Aw 
ὡρμᾶτο, ἐν H οἱ νέοι ἤδη αὐτοκράτορες γιγνόμενοι δηλοῦ- 
180 σιν εἴτε τὴν δι᾿ ἀρετῆς ὁδὸν τρέψονται ἐπὶ τὸν βίον εἴτε 
\ \ , > , > ε ,ν A ᾿ 
τὴν διὰ κακίας, ἐξελθόντα εἰς ἡσυχίαν καθῆσθαι ἀπο- 
ροῦντα ποτέραν τῶν ὁδῶν τράπηται: καὶ φανῆναι αὐτῷ 2 
4 
μεγάλας, τὴν μὲν ἑτέραν 
> A > A \ 3 is , ἣν 
εὐπρεπῆ τε ἰδεῖν καὶ ἐλευθέριον φύσει, κεκοσμημένην 
185 ἈΝ Ν al θ / ‘ de »” io A Ν δὲ 
τὸ μὲν σῶμα καθαρότητι, τὰ δὲ ὄμματα αἰδοῖ, τὸ δὲ 
al 4 3 An de λ ie Ν ὃ᾽ Ἐπ 
σχῆμα σωφροσύνῃ, ἐσθητι ὃὲ λευκῇ" τὴν ἑτέραν 
᾿ τεθραμμένην μὲν εἰς πολυσαρκίαν τε καὶ ἁπαλότητα, 


δύο γυναῖκας προσιέναι 


’ \ Ἂς Ν A V4 , 
κεκαλλωπισμένην δὲ τὸ μὲν χρῶμα, ὥστε λευκοτέραν τε 
Pe , ry ᾿ἊΡ ‘a , Ν Ν A 
καὶ ἐρυθροτέραν τοῦ ὄντος δοκεῖν φαίνεσθαι, τὸ δὲ σχῆμα, 
σ A > , A , > \ ira 
190 ὥστε δοκεῖν ὀρθοτέραν τῆς φύσεως εἶναι, τὰ δὲ ὄμματα 


see on roidde τις i. 1. 1. — ἐκ παίδων : 
from childhood, concrete for ab- 
stract. For the accent of παίδων, 
see G. 128; H. 172 a. —686v: for the 
case, see on ny 11.---ἐξελθόντα κτλ. : Cf. 
nam quod Herculem Prodicus 
dicit, ut est apud Xenophon- 
tem,—exisse in solitudinem 
atque ibi sedentem diu secum 
multumque dubitasse etc. Cic. 
de Off. i. 32. 118. --- τράπηται : for 
the interr. subjv. retained in indir. 
question, see G. 1490; H. 933. 

22. ἰδεῖν: for the limiting inf. 
with adjs., see G. 1528; H. 952. 
Cf. i. 6. 93; iii. 8. 8. — ἐσθῆτι : 
const. with κεκοσμημένην. --- τεθραμ.- 
μένην εἰς πολυσαρκίαν τε καὶ 
ἁπαλότητα : pampered up to plump- 
ness and delicacy. — κεκαλλωπισμέ- 
vyv δὲ τὸ μὲν χρῶμα κτλ.: this sent. 
does not correspond to the previous 
one, either in the order of the 
clauses or in the words themselves. 


Xenophon seems often to have 
avoided complete uniformity in the 
parallel clauses of a rhetorical 
period; though it certainly might 
have been justified here, as being 
quite in keeping with the character 
of professional declamations, which 
abounded in antitheses. — τοῦ ὄντος, 
τῆς φύσεως : equivalent to ἢ ἦν, ἢ 
See Kr. Spr. 47. 27. 2.— 
ὥστε δοκεῖν φαίνεσθαι : cf. ἐκπλα- 
yévres τῷ δόξαι μέγαν τε καὶ καλὸν 
φανῆναι τὸν Κῦρον Cyr. viii. 3. 14. — 
ὀρθοτέραν : more erect, in order to 
appear taller. Tallness was esteemed 
by the Greeks. C/f., on the pas- 
sage, ἰδών ποτε αὐτὴν ἐντετριμμένην 
πολλῷ ψιμυθίῳ (white lead), ὅπως 
λευκοτέρα ἔτι δοκοίη εἶναι ἢ ἣν, πολλῇ 
δὲ ἐγχούσῃ ( red dye, from the plant 
anchusa), ὅπως ἐρυθροτέρα φαίνοιτο τῆς 
ἀληθείας, ὑποδήματα δ᾽ ἔχουσαν ὑψηλά, 


ἐπεφύκει. 


ὅπως μείζων δοκοίη εἶναι ἢ ἐπεφύκει Occ. 
x. 2, where Ischomachus is describing 


82 ΞΕΝΟΦΩΝΤΟΣ AITOMNHMONEYMATA BB. 1. 


¥ 3 , 3 in “1.32 4Φ x 4 ν 
ἔχειν ἀναπεπταμένα, ἐσθῆτα δέ, ἐξ ἧς ἂν μάλιστα ὧρα 
διαλάμποι, κατασκοπεῖσθαι δὲ θαμὰ ἑαυτήν, ἐπισκοπεῖν 
x , Y ¥ ee A ΄, \ \ 9 
δὲ καὶ εἴ τις ἄλλος αὐτὴν θεᾶται, πολλάκις δὲ Kal εἰς 
\ e “Ὁ x > v4 ε 9 3 ὔὕ 4 
τὴν ἑαυτῆς σκιὰν ἀποβλέπειν. ὡς δ᾽ ἐγένοντο πλησιαΐί: 23 
195 Tepov τοῦ Ἡρακλέους, τὴν μὲν πρόσθεν ῥηθεῖσαν ἰέναι 
Ν Φ -" / Ν 3 Cc. ὧδ ’ , 
τὸν αὐτὸν τρόπον, τὴν δ᾽ ἑτέραν φθάσαι βουλομένην 
A ae “ Ν 3 A <¢ A 5 ¢ / 
. προσδραμεῖν τῷ Ἡρακλεῖ καὶ εἰπεῖν: “Ὁρῶ oe, ὦ “Hpa- 
ἐὰν 
> 9 \ 7 ’ 25 Ν ε ’,ὔ \ 
οὖν ἐμὲ φίλην ποιησάμενος, [ἐπὶ] τὴν ἡδίστην τε Kal 
200 ῥάστην ὁδὸν ἄξω σε, καὶ τῶν μὲν τερπνῶν οὐδενὸς ἀγευ- 
στος ἔσῃ, τῶν δὲ χαλεπῶν ἄπειρος διαβιώσῃ. 


> ἴω , eQqn aA Ν ’ὔ Ud 
κλεις, αποβουντα TOLaV ὁδὸν €7’ TOV βίον ΤΡρΑαΤΉ. 


πρῶτον 34 
Ν Ν 3 ΄, 3 Ν 4, “ 3 Ν 
μὲν γὰρ οὐ πολέμων οὐδὲ πραγμάτων φροντιεῖς, ἀλλὰ 
Ἂ , Ἃ + 
σκοπούμενος διέσῃ Ti ἂν κεχαρισμένον ἢ σιτίον ἢ ποτὸν 
ν x 7. ἃ io Ν x A a) , , x Ms x 
εὕροις, ἢ τί ἂν ἰδὼν ἢ τί ἀκούσας τερφθείης, ἢ τίνων ἂν 
> ’ὔ x ε 4 e 4 ᾽ὔ \ nw 
205 ὀσφραινόμενος η ATTOMEVOS ἡσθείης, τίσι δὲ παιδικοῖς 
ε las , > x > 4 Ν Le. x , 
ὁμιλῶν μάλιστ᾽ av εὐφρανθείης, kal πῶς dv μαλακώτατα 
καθεύδοις, ἀπονώτατα τούτων πάντων 


\ A Ἂ 
καὶ πὼς av 


΄ὕ 2\ , ΄ , ε ΄, , 
τυγχανοις. EQV δέ TOTE γένηται τις υποψία σπανεως 25 


9 9 @ »» nw 3 ’ὔ ’ὔ > ’ 8. xX Ν 
ἀφ᾽ ὧν ἔσται ταῦτα, οὐ φόβος μή σε ἀγάγω ἐπὶ τὸ 


his youthful wife. — dpa: youthful 
beauty, with art. omitted. — δια- 
λάμποι : for the potential opt. in rel. 
final clauses, see G. 1367 ; H. 987 a. 
--- ἐπισκοπεῖν : looked, to see if etc. 
23. “Hpaxdéovs: for the gen. 
with advs. of place, see on θείου 
i. 6. 10. ---τὸν αὐτὸν τρόπον : 
i.e. without altering her pace. — 
ἀποροῦντα : for the supplementary 
participle in indirect discourse, see 
on i. 2. 16. --- ὁδὸν ἐπὶ τὸν βίον : 
path in life. —rpaary: for the mode, 
cf τράπηται 21. — ποιησάμενος : parti- 
ciple of manner, with ellipsis of 


τὴν ὁδὸν τράπῃ. Cf. vouloav i. 2. 42. 


— οὐδενός : for the gen. with verbal 
adjs., ef.’ 1.2. 1, θοὴν Ὁ; 8: 

24. πολέμων : for the case, οὐ 
i. 1. 11. — φροντιεῖς : for the ‘ Attic’ 
future, see G. 665, 3; H. 425. 
— σκοπούμενος διέσῃ : you shall all 
the time be considering. For the 
supplementary participle with verbs 
of continuing, see G. 1580; H. 981. 
—otrlov, ποτόν : in appos. with ri. 
-- εαὕροις : potential opt. in indirect 
discourse. — παιδικοῖς : favorites. 

25. σπάνεως ἀφ᾽ ὧν: equivalent 
to σπάνεως τούτων, ἀφ᾽ ὧν. --- οὐ φόβος 
(sc. ἐστί) : no ground for anxiety. — 


τό: connect with πορίζεσθαι. ---- 


ae ee ee 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA II. 1. 83 


al »* A “~ 4 \ ἴω ἴω lal 
210 πονοῦντα καὶ ταλαυπωροῦντα τῷ σώματι καὶ τῇ ψυχῇ ταῦτα 
͵ὔ 5 3 e x ε ¥ 5 ’ὔ 4 ἃς 
πορίζεσθαι, ἀλλ᾽ οἷς av οἱ ἄλλοι ἐργάζωνται, τούτοις σὺ 
, ὍΝ Ν 3 , 50 x ὃ Ν + Sa 
χρήσῃ, οὐδενὸς ἀπεχόμενος ὅθεν av δυνατὸν ἢ τι κερδᾶναι" 
πανταχόθεν γὰρ ὠφελεῖσθαι τοῖς ἐμοὶ συνοῦσιν ἐξουσίαν 
Ψ ὕ ’ Nee d\n > , las (> , ’ 
ἔγωγε παρέχω. Kalo Ἡρακλῆς ἀκούσας Tavta,‘ 0 γύναι, 26 
215 ἔφη, “ὄνομα δέ σοι τί ἐστιν; ἡ δέ, “Οἱ μὲν ἐμοὶ φίλοι, 
4 ‘ Χ “ lA Evo , ε δὲ ἴω ᾽ὔ ε 
ἔφη, ᾿ καλοῦσί pe Εὐδαιμονίαν, οἵ δὲ μισοῦντές με ὕποκο- 
, 3 , 4 b] XN 3 , e δ...» 
ριζόμενοι ὀνομάζουσι Κακίαν. καὶ ἐν τούτῳ ἡ ἑτέρα 31 
\ A 5 ς PE eee, ees ἈΝ ζΖι, δι ἃ 7 ae 
γυνὴ προσελθοῦσα εἶπε: ‘Kat ἐγὼ ἥκω πρὸς σέ, ὦ “Hpa- 
> A A 4 ’ Ἁ Ν 4 \ \ 
κλεις, εἰδυῖα τοὺς γεννήσαντάς σε καὶ THY φύσιν THY σὴν 
3 A / A 3 Ὁ 3 ΄, > Ν Ν 
220 ἐν τῇ παιδείᾳ καταμαθοῦσα: ἐξ ὧν ἐλπίζω, εἰ τὴν πρὸς 
δι ἂν τα ον. , “ὃ a. x A λῷ ᾿ κι 
ἐμὲ ὁδὸν τράποιο, σφόδρ᾽ av σε τῶν καλῶν καὶ σεμνῶν 
> Ν 3 , - Ν 5 Ν » ‘\ 3 , ᾿ 
ἀγαθὸν ἐργάτην γενέσθαι καὶ ἐμὲ ἔτι πολὺ ἐντιμοτέραν 
καὶ ἐπ᾽ ἀγαθοῖς διαπρεπεστέραν φανῆναι. οὐκ ἐξα- 
, 5 , ’ὔ ‘© A BB he a e θ | 
πατήσω δέ σε προοιμίοις ἡδονῆς, a ἥπερ οἱ θεοὶ 
a , ἊΝ ΄ ΓΝ 8 , A ΟΝ 
225 διέθεσαν, τὰ ὄντα διηγήσομαι pet ἀληθείας. τῶν γὰρ 28 
»” 3 A \ A Oe ¥ “4 ee , 
ὄντων ἀγαθῶν καὶ καλῶν οὐδὲν ἄνευ πόνου Kal ἐπιμελείας 
θεοὶ διδόασιν ἀνθρώποις- ἀλλ᾽ εἴτε τοὺς θεοὺς ἵλεως 
εἶναί σοι βούλει, θεραπευτέον τοὺς θεούς, εἴτε ὑπὸ φίλων 


πονοῦντα, ταλαιπωροῦντα : agree 27. καταμαθοῦσα ; ‘* gauged.’? — 


with the omitted subj. of πορίζεσθαι. 
— ois, τούτοις : for ἅ, τούτοις with 
omitted indef. antec. of the relative. 
See G. 1030; H. 996 b. For the 
assimilation, see on ὧν 10. --- χρήσῃ: 
ἐς 5081] enjoy.’? --- πανταχόθεν : the 
position is emphatic. 

+ 26. ὄνομα δέ: for δέ, see on i. 3. 
13. - ἣ δέ: for the pronominal art., 
see on i. 2. 33. — ὑποκοριζόμενοι : 
nicknaming. The word properly 
means ‘to talk baby talk,’ from 
κόρος, ‘ child,’ — hence, ‘to give pet 
names,’ and so, in a bad sense, ‘to 
nickname.’ 


el τράποιο: less confident than the 
ἐὰν [τραπῇ] of Κακία in 23. — ἂν yevé- 
σθαι : see on ἂν κινηθῆναι i. 1. 14. — 
ἐπ᾿ ἀγαθοῖς : for good actions, i.e. 
those which Hercules would perform 
under her guidance; ‘lit with the 
luster shed by valorous deeds’ 
(Dakyns). — προοιμίοις ἡδονῆς: prom- 
ises of pleasure, like those in the 
speech of Κακία. 

28. ἀγαθῶν καὶ καλῶν : const. as 
preds. with ὄντων. --- ἵλεως : see on 
i. 1. 9 fin. — βούλει, ἐθέλεις, ἐπιθυμεῖς : 
prob. no difference in meaning is 
intended. — θεραπευτέον : see oni. 2. 


84 EENOSONTOS AILOMNHMONEYMATA Β. 1. 


ἐθέλεις ἀγαπᾶσθαι, τοὺς φίλους εὐεργετητέον, εἴτε ὑπό 
es0Tivos πόλεως ἐπιθυμεῖς τιμᾶσθαι, τὴν πόλιν ὠφελητέον, 
¥ ε Q A e (ὃ ’ὔ 5 A - ee 9 “ ’ 
εἴτε ὑπὸ τῆς Ἑλλάδος πάσης ἀξιοῖς ἐπ᾽ ἀρετῇ θαυμά- 
ζεσθαι, τὴν Ἑλλάδα πειρατέον εὖ ποιεῖν, εἴτε γῆν βούλει 
σοι καρποὺς ἀφθόνους φέρειν, τὴν γῆν θεραπευτέον, εἴτε 
5. ὦ , x4 ὃ A ΄, A , 
ἀπὸ βοσκημάτων οἴει δεῖν πλουτίζεσθαι, τῶν βοσκημά- 
3 , ¥ ὃ Ν ὕ ε A »» Q 
φβδτων ἐπιμελητέον, εἴτε διὰ πολέμου ὁρμᾷς αὔξεσθαι καὶ 
βούλει δύνασθαι τούς τε φίλους ἐλευθεροῦν καὶ τοὺς 
ἐχθροὺς χειροῦσθαι, τὰς πολεμικὰς τέχνας αὐτάς τε παρὰ 
τῶν ἐπισταμένων μαθητέον καὶ ὅπως αὐταῖς δεῖ χρῆσθαι 
3 , 3 δὲ Ν “5: ’ aN ὃ : Ν 5 ad 
. ἀσκητέον: εἰ δὲ καὶ τῷ σώματι βούλει δυνατὸς εἶναι, TH 
940 γνώμῃ ὑπηρετεῖν ἐθιστέον τὸ σῶμα καὶ γυμναστέον σὺν 
, δα 1 al cee ative p0 ἶξ A > σ 
πόνοις καὶ ἱδρῶτι. καὶ ἡ Κακία ὑπολαβοῦσα εἶπεν, ὧς 29 
A δε 

φησι Πρόδικος ‘’Evvoets, ὦ Ἡράκλεις, ὡς χαλεπὴν καὶ 

Ἂν ε > 4. ἊΝ Ν 5 , ᾿ ε Ψ 9 an) 

“μακρὰν ὁδὸν ἐπὶ Tas εὐφροσύνας ἡ γυνή σοι αὕτη διηγεῖ- 

3 Ν δὲ ε δί Ν A 500 ΣᾺ Ν > / 
Tar; ἐγὼ δὲ ῥᾳδίαν καὶ βραχεῖαν ὁδὸν ἐπὶ τὴν εὐδαιμονίαν 


84. Note the double meaning of 
θεραπεύω with θεούς and γῆν, like the 
Lat. colere. —atrds τε: the τέ is 
added, because the writer had in 
mind μαθητέον for both clauses, with 
some such obj. in the second as τὴν 
χρῆσιν αὐτῶν, instead of which, by a 
slight change of construction we have 
ὅπως αὐταῖς δεῖ χρῆσθαι ἀσκητέον. The 
whole idea is sufficiently rendered by 
our ‘*‘ military science and tactics.”’ 
εἰ δέ: after the sevenfold repetition 
of εἴτε, the emphatic concluding 
sent. is introduced with εἰ δέ, Cf. 
the Lat. si vero after sive. — 
τῇ γνώμῃ ὑπηρετεῖν: for when the 
body obeys the reason, it will do 
nothing which will interfere with its 
own best development. Cicero, in 
his version of this passage (exer- 


cendum corpus et ita affici- 
endum est, ut oboedire con- 
Silio rationique possit De Of. 
i, 23. 79), seems to have connected 
τῇ γνώμῃ ὑπηρετεῖν with δυνατός, 
rather than with what follows. — 
πόνοις, ἱδρῶτι: dats. of accompani- 
ment. Cf. ‘in the sweat of thy 
brow shalt thou eat bread’ Gen. 
ili. 19. 

29. ἣ γυνὴ αὕτη: that woman 
there. So the Lat. ista femina. 
— εὐφροσύνας : pleasures, in strong 
contrast to εὐδαιμονίαν. Observe 
the elaborate antitheses in the two 
clauses, and note that Vice usurps 
the nobler word happiness, conced- 
ing to Virtue only pleasures as the 
reward of toil and self-denial. — 
ὁδόν (after βραχεῖαν) : see on 21. 


— 9 eo 


- XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA IL. 1. 85 


245 ἄξω oe. καὶ ἡ ᾿Αρετὴ εἶπεν: ‘°O τλῆμον, τί δὲ σὺ aya- 30 
AG ¥ x , οδὺ τις θ δὲ , ν , 
ὃν ἔχεις ; ἢ TL NOV οἶσθα, μηδὲν τούτων ἕνεκα πράττειν 
30 ‘\ x Oe Ν aA AOE 3 θ , > , 
ἐθέλουσα; ἡτις οὐδὲ τὴν τῶν ἡδέων ἐπιθυμίαν ἀναμέ. 
5 Ν Ν 5 αἷς," ’ὕ 3 4 Ἁ A 
| ves, ἀλλὰ πρὶν ἐπιθυμῆσαι πάντων ἐμπίπλασαι, πρὶν μὲν 
A 3 , XN \ A 7 Fis «ἰῷ \ 
πεινὴν ἐσθίουσα, πρὶν δὲ διψῆν πίνουσα καί, ἵνα μὲν 
§ ἐς 2 , > δ , ν . Ὁ. 4 , 
᾿ς οφδθ ἡδέως φάγῃς, ὀψοποιοὺς μηχανωμένη, ἵνα δὲ ἡδέως πίῃς, 
' οἴνους τε πολυτελεῖς παρασκευάζῃ καὶ τοῦ θέρους χιόνα 
θέ en ν δὲ 9 ᾽ὔ δέ > / 
περιθέουσα ζητεῖς: wa δὲ καθυπνώσῃς ἡδέως, οὐ μόνον 
Ν Ν ’ὔ > Ν , Ν ’ὕ \ . 
. Tas στρωμνὰς μαλακάς, ἀλλὰ καὶ [τὰς κλίνας καὶ] τὰ 
ε , A ,ὔ ’ > Ν ἃς Ὃ 
ὑπόβαθρα ταῖς κλίναις παρασκευάζῃ: οὐ γὰρ διὰ τὸ 
A 5 Ν Αἷς Ν Ν ¥ ν “A ν | 
255 πονεῖν, ἀλλὰ διὰ τὸ μηδὲν ἔχειν ὁ τι ποιῇς, ὕπνου ἐπιθυ- 
wn ἈΝ δὲ 5 δί X nw ὃ A θ > 4 ’ 
pets: τὰ ὃὲ ἀφροόδίσια πρὸ τοῦ δεῖσθαι ἀναγκάζεις, πάντα 
μηχανωμένη καὶ γυναιξὶ τοῖς ἀνδράσι χρωμένη. οὕτω 
ὰ δεύεις τοὺς σεαυτῆς φίλ NS μὲ ὃς ὑβρί- 
; γὰρ παιδεύεις τοὺς σεαυτὴς φίλους, τῆς μεν νυκτὸς ὑβρί 
ἐς πυρῆς 
ζουσα, τῆς δ᾽ ἡμέρας τὸ χρησιμώτατον κατακοιμίζουσα. 


Σ 
[». 
ios 
Ἢ 
; 
; 
os 
i 
be 
‘4 
| 
; 





80. ἡ ᾿Αρετή: that Virtue has 
not been previously mentioned by 
name is a refinement of the allegory, 
which has left it to the hearer or 
reader to identify her by her descrip- 
tion at entrance, and by her words. 
- ὦ τλῆμον : wretched being, ut- 
tered with righteous indignation. — 
τί δέ: see on ὄνομα δέ 26. — ἥτις : you 
who. See H. 699 8ἃ. .--- οὐδὲ ἀνα- 
μένεις : cf. Sym. iv. 41. ‘*Not only 
will you not do anything to secure 
true enjoyment, but you will 
not wait for the desire (hunger, 
thirst, etc.) of enjoyment to come of 
itself.’’—mewfv, διψῆν: for the 
special form of contraction, see 
G. 496 ; H. 412. —pnxavepévy, παρα- 
σκευάζῃ : note the change of con- 
struction. The retention of the 
participle is prob. due to the influ- 
ence of the two preceding partici- 


ples, the finite const. being after- 
ward resumed. —xtdva: the use of 
snow to cool wine, sherbet, efc. is 
common in southern Europe. For 
the thought, cf. i. 6. 5. —orpwpvds: 
beds, mattresses. — μαλακάς : pred. 
adj., to be connected with zapa- 
σκευάζῃ. G. 971, 972; H. 618.— 
[τὰς κλίνας kal]: prob. an interpola- 
tion, as the possession of couches 
could not be a subject for reproach. 
—tréBa0pa: rockers. Cf. οὐ γὰρ ἐκ 
χρυσοῦ καὶ ἐλέφαντος κατεσκευασμέναι 
κλῖναι καὶ πορφυροῖ τάπητες οὔτε ὑπό- 
βαθρα καὶ παστάδες (colonnades) 
ὕπνους ποιοῦσιν, ἀλλὰ ἔργα καὶ νόμιμοι 
πόνοι καὶ τὸ τῆς φύσεως αὐτῆς ἀναγκαῖον 
Teles apud Stobaeum Flor. 93. 91. --- 
ποιῇς : see On τράπηται 21. --- γυναιξί: 
see on δούλοις 12. --- ὑβρίζουσα, κατα- 
κοιμίζουσα : the participles expand 
and explain the preceding οὕτω. (Cf. 


86 ἘΕΝΟΦΩΝΤΟΣ AILOMNHMONEYMATA B. 1. 


260 ἀθάνατος δὲ οὖσα ἐκ θεῶν μὲν ἀπέρριψαι, ὑπὸ δὲ ἀνθρώ- 8ι 
πων ἀγαθῶν ἀτιμάζῃ: τοῦ δὲ πάντων ἡδίστου ἀκούσμα- 
τος, ἐπαίνου ἑαυτῆς, ἀνήκοος εἶ καὶ τοῦ πάντων ἡδίστου 
θεάματος ἀθέατος: οὐδὲν γὰρ πώποτε σεαυτῆς ἔργον 

‘a , ’ 3 »» 4 4, 
καλὸν τεθέασαι. τίς δ᾽ av σοι λεγούσῃ τι πιστεύσειε; 
, yee. , δ 5 ΄ ΝΣ το. 3. A 

265 Tis δ᾽ ἂν δεομένῃ τινὸς ἐπαρκέσειεν; ἢ Tis av εὖ φρονῶν 

τοῦ σοῦ θιάσου τολμήσειεν εἶναι; οἵ νέοι μὲν ὄντες τοῖς 
5 

σώμασιν ἀδύνατοί εἰσι, πρεσβύτεροι δὲ γενόμενοι ταῖς 

ψυχαῖς ἀνόητοι, ἀπόνως μὲν λιπαροὶ διὰ νεότητος τρεφό- 

μενοι, ἐπιπόνως δὲ αὐχμηροὶ διὰ γήρως περῶντες, τοῖς 

210 μὲν πεπραγμένοις αἰσχυνόμενοι, τοῖς δὲ πραττομένοις 
βαρυνόμενοι, τὰ μὲν ἡδέα ἐν τῇ νεότητι διαδραμόντες, τὰ 

Ν Ν > ~~ A 3 ld 3 XN \ ’ Ν 
δὲ χαλεπὰ εἰς τὸ γῆρας ἀποθέμενοι. ἐγὼ δὲ σύνειμι μὲν 32 
A ’ A YS , “A > “ » \ Ν 
θεοῖς, σύνειμι δὲ ἀνθρώποις τοῖς ἀγαθοῖς. ἔργον δὲ καλὸν 
οὔτε θεῖον οὔτε ἀνθρώπειον χωρὶς ἐμοῦ γίγνεται: τιμῶμαι 

“15 δὲ μάλιστα πάντων καὶ παρὰ θεοῖς καὶ παρὰ ἀνθρώποις 
οἷς προσήκει, ἀγαπητὴ μὲν συνεργὸς τεχνίταις, πιστὴ 

Ν 4 Ἂ ’ 5 Ν Ν ’, 
δὲ φύλαξ οἴκων δεσπόταις, εὐμενὴς δὲ παραστάτις 


ἐμβολὴν ὧδε ποιοῦνται, ἅμα μὲν λαθεῖν 
πειρώμενοι, ἅμα δὲ φθάσαι An. iv. 
Ι. 4. 

31. ἐκ θεῶν: from the company 
of gods. —éraivov ἑαυτῆς : praise of 
yourself. For the use of the third 
pers. refl. instead of the second, see 
G. 995 ; H.686a. Forthethought, cf. 
Themistoclem dixisse aiunt, 
cum ex eo quaereretur quod 
acroama aut cuius vocem 
libentissime audiret: Eius, a 
quo sua virtus optime praedi- 
caretur Cic. pro Arch. 9. 82. --- εὖ 
φρονῶν: in his senses. — θιάσου : 
properly an assemblage of worship- 
ers: here scornfully applied to the 
followers of Kaxia.—ot νέοι : as if 


preceded by θιασωτῶν, instead of 
θιάσου, a const. κατὰ σύνεσιν. So ai 
πόλεις, παύσοντες in ii. 2. 8, -- λιπαροὶ 
τρεφόμενοι : for the pred. adj. used 
in adverbial sense, see H. 619, — 
ἀποθέμενοι : laying up. Cf. with 
this description Shakspeare’s Seven 
Ages of Man in As You Like It, 
and the imagery of Ecclesiastes xii. 

32. σύνειμι μέν, σύνειμι δέ: 
‘anaphora,’ as in i. 1. 2, 5. 3. — 
καλόν οὔτε... οὔτε. . . γίγνεται: 
acc. to Greek usage, we should ex- 
pect an οὐδέν before καλό». ---- οἷς : for 
παρ᾽ ols. So αἷς σύνει for ἐν αἷς σύνει 
iii. 7.3. Κακία receives indeed honor, 
but only from those παρ᾽ οἷς τιμᾶσθαι 
οὐ προσήκει. ---- συνεργός : 86. οὖσα. --- 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA IZ. 1. 87 


ἃ. ἘΠ \ de / aA 3 > / 4 
οἰκέταις, ἀγαθὴ δὲ συλλήπτρια τῶν ἐν εἰρήνῃ πόνων, 
’ δὲ la) 3 λέ , » 5 v4 \ 
βεβαία δὲ τῶν ἐν πολέμῳ σύμμαχος ἔργων, ἀρίστη δὲ 
280 φιλίας κοινωνός. ἔστι δὲ τοῖς μὲν ἐμοῖς φίλοις ἡδεῖα 88 
. μὲν καὶ ἀπράγμων σίτων καὶ ποτῶν ἀπόλαυσις ἀνέχον- 
ται γὰρ ἕως ἂν ἐπιθυμήσωσιν αὐτῶν. ὕπνος δ᾽ αὐτοῖς 
, e ’ὔ x “A > ‘4 \ + > ’ὔ 
πάρεστιν ἡδίων ἢ τοῖς ἀμόχθοις, καὶ οὔτε ἀπολείποντες 
7 8 ¥ » ὃ \ an ἃς ν Διο Oe ΄, ΄, 
αὐτὸν ἄχθονται οὔτε διὰ τοῦτον μεθιᾶσι τὰ δέοντα πράτ- 
28δ τειν. καὶ οἱ μὲν νέοι τοῖς τῶν πρεσβυτέρων ἐπαίνοις 
χαίρουσιν, ot δὲ γεραίτεροι ταῖς τῶν νέων τιμαῖς ἀγάλ- 
λονται: καὶ ἡδέως μὲν τῶν παλαιῶν πράξεων μέμνηνται, 
Ss δὲ Ν ΄ ro , ὃ SE rae / \ 
εὖ δὲ Tas παρούσας ἥδονται πράττοντες, du ἐμὲ φίλοι μὲν 
A »” 5 \ \ / , A 4 4 
θεοῖς ὄντες, ἀγαπητοὶ δὲ φίλοις, τίμιοι δὲ πατρίσιν: ὅταν 
, 
290 δ᾽ ἔλθῃ τὸ πεπρωμένον τέλος, οὐ μετὰ λήθης ἄτιμοι 
κεῖνται, ἀλλὰ μετὰ μνήμης τὸν ἀεὶ χρόνον ὑμνούμενοι 
΄, 2 nm P 5 A , > A ε , 
θάλλουσι. τοιαῦτά σοι, ὦ παῖ τοκέων ἀγαθῶν “Hpakdes, | 
» Ξ ἃ ’ 
ἔξεστι διαπονησαμένῳ τὴν μακαριστοτάτην εὐδαιμονίαν 
A 0 b] ν ὃ , TI “ὃ Ν ee Le A 
κεκτῆσθαι. οὕτω πως διώκει Πρόδικος τὴν ὑπ᾽ ᾿Αρετῆς 34 
ε ’ὔὕ ’ 3 ’ , Ν , » 
295 Ἡρακλέους παίδευσιν, ἐκόσμησε μέντοι τὰς γνώμας ἔτι 
: , ΓΔΑ, Ke 9 4 lal A 9 > » 5 
μεγαλειοτέροις ῥήμασιν ἢ ἐγὼ νῦν. σοὶ δ᾽ οὖν ἄξιον, ὦ 
᾿Αρίστιππε, τούτων ἐνθυμουμένῳ πειρᾶσθαΐ τι καὶ τῶν εἰς 
Ν ld /, ~ , ΄ ” 
τὸν μέλλοντα χρόνον Tov βίου φροντίζειν. 


συλλήπτρια: an αϑϑἰδίαηί. ---- κοινω- 49. 1106. --- τοιαῦτα oo: 
vos: ἃ Sharer. ‘asyndeton,’ see on i. 1. 9. 


for the 


Se ὝὙἫὙΨ ὙΠῸ 


33. ἀπράγμων : untroubled, op- 
posed to περιθέουσα in 380. — ἀνέ- 
xovrar: they hold out. — εὖ πράτ- 
τοντες : succeeding in. —-dtrav δ᾽ ἂν 
ἔλθῃ τὸ πεπρωμένον τέλος κτλ. : Cf. the 
concluding lines of Bryant’s Thana- 
topsis. —tpvotpevor θάλλουσι : * they 
are immortalized in song.’’ Cf. 
Harmodius in ore et Aris- 
togito, Lacedaemonius Leo- 
nidas, Thebanus Epaminon- 
das vigent Cic. Tusc. Disp. i. 


34. διώκει : unusual in this sense, 
which is a common one in Eng- 
lish. Cf. the Lat. persequi.—Thv 
ὑπ᾽ ᾿Αρετῆς παίδευσιν : for ὑπό and 
the gen. with a verbal noun, see Kr. 
Spr. 68. 48. 2. Cf. ἥδεσθαι τῇ ὑπὸ 
πάντων τιμῇ Cyr. iii. 3. 2. --- γνώμας : 
thoughts. — ἐνθυμουμένῳ : giving heed. 
--πειρᾶσθαί tr... φροντίζειν : to 
strive to pay some attention to those 
things also (καί) which belong to the 
later portion of your life. p 


88 ἘΕΝΟΦΩΝΤΟΣ AIIOMNHMONEYMATA BB. 2. 


Αἰσθόμενος δέ ποτε Λαμπροκλέα, τὸν πρεσβύτατον υἱὸν 2 

3 a Ν Ἁ , ae 6? 2 ” ἊΨ rT aes 
αὐτοῦ, πρὸς τὴν μητέρα χαλεπαίνοντα, “Eiiré μοι," ἔφη, “ ὦ 
παῖ, οἶσθά τινας ἀνθρώπους ἀχαρίστους καλουμένους ;” 


“ Ν , Ὁ» ε , «ς , > Ν 
Καὶ μάλα," ἔφη ὁ νεανίσκος. “ Καταμεμάθηκας οὖν, τοὺς 
A » aA 3 an » 
ὅ τί ποιοῦντας τὸ ὄνομα τοῦτο ἀποκαλοῦσιν ;” “"Eywye,” ἔφη: 


( Ν Ν > ΄ Ψ ὃ / ΄, 3 A 
τους Yap ευ παθόντας, ΟΤαν υνᾶάμενοι χάριν ἀποδοῦναι 


ἈΝ 3 δῶ > / λ A ” (a3 > A ὃ ιν SP 
μὴ ATOOWOLY, ἀχαρίστους καλουσιν. Οὐκουν δοκουσὶι 


5 “ 3 4 7 X\ 5 v4 9) 
σοι ἐν τοῖς ἀδίκοις καταλογίζεσθαι τοὺς ἀχαρίστους; 


“Ἔμοιγε," ἔφη. 
1070 ἀνδραποδίζεσθαι τοὺς μὲν φίλους ἄδικον εἶναι δοκεῖ, 


“Ἤδη δέ ποτ᾽ ἐπεσκέψω, εἰ ἄρα, ὥσπερ 2 


Ν A ’ ’ Ἂν % > . A Ἂν Ν 
τοὺς δὲ πολεμίους δίκαιον, καὶ τὸ ἀχαριστεῖν πρὸς μὲν 
Ν , » , 3 Ν Ν Ν 4 ’ὔ 3) 
τοὺς φίλους ἀδικόν ἐστι, πρὸς δὲ τοὺς πολεμίους δίκαιον ; 
“Καὶ pada,” ἔφη - “ καὶ δοκεῖ μοι, ὑφ᾽ οὗ av τις εὖ παθὼν 
ΕἾ , ᾿ , \ A , 9 , 
εἴτε φίλου εἴτε πολεμίου μὴ πειρᾶται χάριν ἀποδιδόναι, 


2. Ingratitude is an offense, the 
more heinous in proportion to the 
benefits received. Ingratitude to- 
wards parents, therefore, is a very 
grave offense, punished with ignominy 
by the state and with contempt by all 
men. These thoughts are brought out 
in a conversation between Socrates 
and his son Lamprocles. 

1. τὸν πρεσβύτατον : acc. to 
Suidas (8.0. Σωκράτης), the two other 
sons of Socrates, Sophroniscus and 
Menexenus, were by Myrto, a second 
wife. But Plato (Phaedo 60 a), in 
the well-known prison- and death- 
scene, describes Xanthippe as sit- 
ting beside Socrates with their child 
(παιδίον. Cf. also ibid. 116 8. 
Perhaps Myrto was his first wife; 
but there is no contemporary evi- 
dence for more than one, and that 
one Xanthippe. On the violent 
temper of Xanthippe, cf. χρῇ (you 


are provided with) γυναικὶ τῶν οὐσῶν, 
οἶμαι δὲ καὶ τῶν γεγενημένων καὶ τῶν 
ἐσομένων, χαλεπωτάτῃ Sym. ii. το. 
They were an ill-assorted couple, and 
each had doubtless much to complain 
of. — τοὺς τί ποιοῦντας, ἀποκαλοῦσιν: 
i.e. τί ποιοῦσιν οὗτοι, ovs τὸ ὄνομα τοῦτο 
καλοῦσιν; For the interr. depending 
on a participle or other dependent 
word, cf. i. 4.14; i. 3. 10; An. iii. 
1. 14. — τοὺς εὖ παθόντας : those who 
have received favors. Cf. ἀνθ᾽ ὧν ev 
ἔπαθον ὑπ᾽ ἐκείνου An. i. 5. 4. --- 
οὐκοῦν: as in ii. 1. 2. 

2. εἰ apa: whether possibly. — 
ὥσπερ : followed by a simple καί, in- 
stead of οὕτω καί. Cf. ὥσπερ σύ, καὶ 
ἐγώ iv. 4. 7. Cf. also Oec. xviii. 9. 
— ἄδικον, δίκαιον : wrong, right.— ὑφ᾽ 
οὗ ἄν Tis (equivalent to ἐάν τις ὑπό τινος) 
κτλ. : whoever has received favors 
from any one, whether friend or foe, 
and does not attempt to-return them. 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA Π 2. 89 


>» ἘΞ ἴω » ν A 
15 ἄδικος εἶναι. “Οὐκοῦν, εἴ γε οὕτως ἔχει τοῦτο, εἰλικρι- 
4 “ἡ ¥ iO ’ὔ ε 5 ’ ” ’ὔ’ 
νής τις ἂν εἴη ἀδικία ἡ ἀχαριστία;" συνωμολόγει. 
( > aA ψ + ΄, 3 a Ν θ Ἀ ἣν 3 ὃ ὃ an 
Οὐκοῦν, ὅσῳ av τις μείζω ἀγαθὰ παθὼν μὴ ἀποδιδῷ 
x » ” An 
χάριν, τοσούτῳ ἀδικώτερος av εἴη; συνέφη καὶ τοῦτο. 
«ς ’ Pi 5. (ὃν ἐῤ τ Ν ’, ν x is > 
Τίνας ovv,” ἔφη, “ὑπὸ τίνων evpoimev av μείζω εὐεργετη- 
x Ν Ἂ A 
20 μένους ἢ παῖδας ὑπὸ γονέων; οὖς οἱ γονεῖς EK μὲν οὐκ 
> a \ A 
ὄντων ἐποίησαν εἶναι, τοσαῦτα δὲ καλὰ ἰδεῖν Kal τοσούτων 
la 4 \ A 
ἀγαθῶν μετασχεῖν, ὅσα ot θεοὶ παρέχουσι τοῖς ἀνθρώποις 
ἃ on Ν ν ce ὃ A Ν ¥ iy Ψ / 
ἃ δὴ Kal οὕτως ἡμῖν δοκεῖ παντὸς ἄξια εἶναι ὥστε πάντες 
Ν A > Ν 4 4 4 \ ε 
τὸ καταλιπεῖν αὐτὰ μάλιστα πάντων φεύγομεν. καὶ αἱ 
/ $2.5, “ 7 LO 4 4 , 
25 πόλεις ἐπὶ τοῖς μεγίστοις ἀδικήμασι ζημίαν θάνατον 
΄ ε 3 x» iC aA / Ν LO if 
πεποιήκασιν, ὡς οὐκ av μείζονος κακοῦ φόβῳ THY ἀδικίαν 
\ “A > 
παύσαντες. Kal μὴν οὐ τῶν γε ἀφροδισίων ἕνεκα παιδο- 
A Ν 3 , ε ’ 5 Ν , 
ποιεῖσθαι τοὺς ἀνθρώπους ὑπολαμβάνεις, ἐπεὶ τούτου γε 
A > , Ν \ ε sO , Ν δὲ Ν ri aed 
TOV ἀπολυσόντων μεσταὶ μὲν αἱ ὁδοί, μεστὰ δὲ TA οἰκή- 
Ν eee, Ν \ 4 3 ε Ψ' x 
30pata: φανεροὶ δ᾽ ἐσμὲν καὶ σκοπούμενοι ἐξ ὁποίων ἂν 
av βέλ ἡμῖν τέ 3 i λθό 
- γυναικῶν βέλτιστα ἡμῖν τέκνα γένοιτο: αἷς συνελθόντες 


3.. εἰλικρινής tis: @ clear kind 
of, the adj. followed by the indef., 
as in Lat. by quidam with the 
same signification. G. 1016; H. 
702. —Gv εἴη : potential opt. in 
apodosis. See G. 1421,1; H. 901b. 
--- τίνας, ὑπὸ τίνων : two questions in 
one clause. G. 1601; H. 1013. The 
same usage is found in Latin; ¢f. 
difficile est enumerare quot 
viri quanta scientia fuerint 
Cic. de Or. i. 3. 9. —é« μὲν οὐκ ὄν- 
tev, εἶναι: out of non-existence into 
being. Cf ἐκ θεῶν ii. τ. 31. ** We 
owe to our parents all the blessings 
of life, the possession of which is re- 
garded as the greatest happiness, and 
their loss (through death) the greatest 
misfortune.’? — θάνατον: without 


the article. See on i. 2. 62, where 
ζημία has the art., which here it 
lacks. — os ... παύσαντες : rati 
metu mali, quo gravius nul- 
lum esset, iniuriam coercere 
se posse. See on ws προσημαίνον- 
τος i. 1.4. The participle, by a con- 
structio ad sensum, refers to οἱ πολῖται 
implied in ai πόλεις. See on θιάσου, 
of ii. τ. 81. 

4. τούτου, τῶν ἀπολυσόντων : for 
the position of the art., see on i. 6. 
18; and for the sing. τούτου (sc. 
τοῦ τῶν ἀφροδισίων ἐπιθυμεῖν), see on 
iii. 4.5. ἀπολυσόντων is neuter, as in 
ii. 1. 5,— βέλτιστα : finest. — αἷς : 
equivalent to καὶ ταύταις. Cf. the 
conversation between Ischomachus 
and his wife, Oec. vii. to ff. 


90 ΞΕΝΟΦΩ͂ΝΤΟΣ AIOMNHMONEYMATA Β. 2. 


A 
τεκνοποιούμεθα. Kal ὁ μέν γε ἀνὴρ τήν τε συντεκνοποιή- 5 
ε ~ , A A v4 » Ν 
σουσαν ἑαυτῳ τρέφει καὶ τοῖς μέλλουσιν ἔσεσθαι παισὶ 


4 / 4 x » / 
προπαρασκευάζει πάντα OTA ἂν οἴηται συνοίσειν αὐτοῖς 


Ν Ν ’ Ν lal ε x 4 al e ἣν Ν 
35 πρὸς τὸν βίον, καὶ ταῦτα ὡς ἂν δύνηται πλεῖστα ἡ δὲ γυνὴ 


ε di ᾽ Ἂς ’ ἴω 4 XN 
ὑποδεξαμένη τε φέρει TO φορτίον τοῦτο, βαρυνομένη τε καὶ 


, Ν A / Ν ἴω ΜᾺ “ a 
κινδυνεύουσα περὶ τοῦ βίου Kal μεταδιδοῦσα τῆς τροφῆς 7H 


Ν 3 Ἂς , \ Ν “A / a Ν 
καὶ αὐτὴ τρέφεται, καὶ σὺν πολλῷ πόνῳ διενεγκοῦσα καὶ 


aA ΄ STS A x a IQA 
TEKOVOA τρέφει TE Και ἐπιμελεῖται OUTE προπεπονθυῖα οὐδὲν 


» ’ » la) Ν ,ὕ ee es > , 50." 
40 ἀγαθόν, οὔτε γιγνῶσκον τὸ βρέφος ὑφ᾽ ὅτου εὖ πάσχει, οὐδὲ 


’, ΄ Y a 9 3 » ree ; 
σημαίνειν δυνάμενον ὅτου δεῦται, ἀλλ᾽ αὐτὴ στοχαζομένη 


τά τε συμφέροντα καὶ τὰ κεχαρισμένα πειρᾶται ἐκπλη- 


‘al Ν ’ὔ Ν ’ Ν ε , Ν ‘\ 
ροῦν καὶ τρέφει πολὺν χρόνον καὶ ἡμέρας Kal νυκτὸς 


ε , > “A / 4, > 
ὑπομένουσα πονεῖν, οὐκ εἰδυῖα τίνα τούτων χάριν ἀπο- 


45 λήψεται. καὶ οὐκ ἀρκεῖ θρέψαι μόνον, ἀλλὰ καί, ἐπειδὰν 
«. 


ὃ , ε Ν > e co θ , ἃ Ν x 
ὀξωσιν ἱκανοὶ ELVAL OL παιὸες Pav QVELVY τι, a μεν αν 


3 Ν » ε a > Ν Ν % ’ 4, 
αὐτοὶ ἔχωσιν ot γονεῖς ἀγαθὰ πρὸς τὸν βίον διδάσκου- 


σιν, ἃ δ᾽ ἂν οἴωνται ἄλλον ἱκανώτερον εἶναι διδάξαι, 


7 Ν ‘al A Ν fal / 
πέμπουσι T Pos TOUTOV δαπανῶντες και ἐπιμελοῦνται ταντα 


5. ὑποδεξαμένη τε φέρει: to this 
corresponds καί τρέφει below. — 
διενεγκοῦσα : sc. in the period of preg- 
nancy. — γυγνῶσκον τὸ βρέφος : best 
const. as obj. of τρέφει τε καὶ ἐπιμε- 
λεῖται taken as one idea (τρέφει 
ἐπιμελῶς). Kiihner suggests that 
Xenophon composed the passage 
rhetorically, and wrote γιγνῶσκον τὸ 
βρέφος in the nom. as a substitute for 
the gen. abs., in order to preserve 
‘concinnity ’ in the constructions. On 
the connection of the two participles 
(προπεπονθυῖα, γιγνῶσκον), one in the 
nom., the other in the acc., by οὔτε, 
οὔτε, cf. ii. 7. 8. ---- οὐδέ: and not. 
-- ἀλλ᾽ αὐτὴ κτλ. : from here the 


const. becomes freer, in order to 
avoid the obscurity resulting from 
too many participles. 

6. θρέψαι μόνον : an unusual posi- 
tion. See on i. 4. 18. — πέμπουσι: 
86. τοὺς παῖδας. The education of an 
Athenian boy included the study of 
(1) γράμματα (reading and writing) ; 
(2) % μουσικὴ τέχνη (poetry and 
music); (3) ἡ γυμναστικὴ τέχνη 
(physical culture). Cf. Aristophanes 
Clouds 961 ff., and esp. Plato Prot. 
325 ff.; and for a fuller account, 
see Becker, Charicles (Eng. transla- 
tion), p. 226 ff., and Guhl and Koner, 
Life of the Greeks and Romans, §§ 50, 
δ1. --- πάντα : everything possible. 





ee ee ee ΔΙ 


Ny 


oa 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA II. 2. 91 


Aw 3 9 4 A > A Y e QA 
δ0 ποιοῦντες, ὅπως OL παῖδες αὐτοῖς γένωνται ὡς δυνατὸν 
βέλτιστοι." «Αλλά 


3 \ ’ὔ la) 4 % » 4 
τοι, εἰ καὶ πᾶντα ταῦτα πεποίηκε καὶ adda τούτων 


A nw e , "” 
πρὸς TAaVTa O νεανίσκος εἶπεν" 


, “ἀν A ἦν , Pre ® , \ 
“πολλαπλάσια, οὐδεὶς dv δύναιτο αὐτῆς ἀνασχέσθαι τὴν 
χαλεπότητα." καὶ ὁ Σωκράτης, “Πότερα δέ ἔφη, “ οἴει 

θ ’ 3 ’ὔ ὃ ld 5 x / ᾽) «co? A 
55 θηρίου ἀγριότητα δυσφορωτέραν εἶναι ἢ μητρός ;" .“ Ἐγὼ 
\ > ”» »¥ ry Soe , ἐν ἥ a5” 

μὲν οἶμαι," ἔφη, “τῆς μητρός, τῆς γε τοιαύτης. Hdy 
πώποτε οὖν ἢ δακοῦσα κακόν Ti σοι ἔδωκεν ἢ λακτίσασα, 
οἷα ὑπὸ θηρίων ἤδη πολλοὶ ἔπαθον;" “᾿Αλλά, νὴ Ata,” 
ἔφη, “λέγει ἃ οὐκ ἄν τις ἐπὶ τῷ βίῳ παντὶ βούλοιτο 
60 ἀκοῦσαι." “Σὺ δὲ πόσα," ἔφη ὁ Σωκράτης, “ole ταύτῃ 
[δυσάνεκτα ] καὶ τῇ φωνῇ καὶ τοῖς ἔργοις ἐκ παιδίου δυσκο- 
λαίνων καὶ ἡμέρας καὶ νυκτὸς πράγματα παρασχεῖν, πόσα 


δὲ λυπῆσαι κάμνων; “᾿Αλλ᾽ οὐδεπώποτε αὐτήν," ἔφη, 
“TES; 


» νΨ << λ ’ὔ > z 5 4, a 9 , 
OLEL, € QAET@MTEPOV εἰναι σοι AKOVELY ὧν AUT λέ ει 
᾽ ᾽ Y ’ 


ΑΝ 


eS ee μ, 7 ὑδέ 34? 3 , θ ” 
OUT εἶπα OVT ἐποίησα οὐδέν, ἐφ᾽ ᾧ HoXUVON. 


σι 


6 
ΕῪ A e A 7] 9 A ΄, 9 , \ 
ἢ τοῖς ὑποκριταῖς, ὅταν ἐν ταῖς τραγῳδίαις ἀλλήλους τὰ 

» λ , Σ ” ςς » Ar’ > 3 ὃ \ 3 » lal 
ἐσχατα λέγωσιν; Αλλ΄, οἶμαι, ἐπειδὴ οὐκ οἰονται τῶν 

΄ ¥ \ »\ 2 3. 2 Y , » 
λεγόντων οὔτε τὸν ἐλέγχοντα ἐλέγχειν ἵνα ζημιώσῃ, οὔτε 
7. ἀλλά τοι κτλ. : Said in ἃ some- 


what grumbling tone. — πεποίηκε : 
the subj. is readily supplied from the 


Cyr. iii. 1.48. G. 1210, 2c; H. 799, 
2 c. — [δυσάνεκτα] : found only here, 
is perhaps an interpolation suggested 


ΠΑΡ A a ἀπ 


connection. — ἢ μητρός : or that of a 
mother. Lamprocles, who has his 


_ own mother in mind, answers with 


the article, τῆς μητρός, τῆς γε τοι- 
αὐτης the mother’s, if she be such a 
one as mine. —Saxotoa, λακτίσασα: 
for the aor. participle expressing 
time coincident with that of the 
main verb, see GMT. 150; H. 856 b. 

8. ἐπὶ τῷ βίῳ παντί: for his 
whole life, i.e. for all that life could 
bring him. Cf. ἐπὶ πόσῳ ἂν ἐθέλοις 
τὴν γυναῖκά σου ἀκοῦσαι ὅτι σκευοφορεῖς 


by ἀνασχέσθαι above. —etra : the rare 
first pers. sing. of the Ionic aorist. 
The second pers. is much more com- 
mon. Of εἶπα only six instances 
in Attic are cited by Veitch (Greek 
Verbs, p. 205 1,). ---- πόσα : cognate 
accusative. 

9. ἀλλήλους, ἔσχατα: for the 
two accs. with one verb, see oni. 2. 
12. — τῶν λεγόντων οὔτε τόν : that 
of those uttering (such things) either 
he who. —édéyxev: does so (i.e. 
utters abuse).—tva ζημιώσῃ : in 


-- 


92 EENO®QNTOS AITOMNHMONEYMATA BB. 2. 


τὸν ἀπειλοῦντα ἀπειλεῖν Wa κακόν TL ποιήσῃ, ῥᾳδίως 
70 φέρουσι." 

μόνον οὐδὲν κακὸν νοοῦσα λέγει, ἀλλὰ καὶ βουλομένη σοι 
ἢ νομίζεις 
“Οὐ δῆτα; ἔφη, “τοῦτό 
καὶ ὁ Σωκράτης, “Οὐκοῦν, ἔφη, “od ταύ-το 
75 THY, εὔνουν τέ σοι οὖσαν καὶ ἐπιμελομένην ὡς μάλιστα 


Ν 3 5 > \ ν ἃ ld ’ὔ 
“Σὺ δ᾽ εὖ εἰδὼς ὅτι ἃ λέγει σοι ἡ μήτηρ, οὐ 


3 Ν οὶ 4 Ν 5 
ἀγαθὰ εἶναι ὅσα οὐδενὶ ἄλλῳ, χαλεπαίνεις ; 
Ws 3) 
κακόνουν τὴν μητέρα σοι εἶναι; 
> ᾽) 
γε οὐκ οἶμαι. 


δύναται κάμνοντος, ὅπως ὑγιάνῃς τε καὶ ὅπως τῶν ἐπιτη- 
ὃ ld ὃ Ν 3 ὃ \ » \ Ν , Ν A 
εἰων μηδενὸς ἐνδεὴς ἔσῃ, Kal πρὸς τούτοις πολλὰ τοῖς 

A > la > Ν ε Ν A“ \ 3 Ν 3 nw 
θεοῖς εὐχομένην ἀγαθὰ UTEP σου και εὐχας ἀποδιδοῦσαν, 
χαλεπὴν εἶναι φής; ἐγὼ μὲν οἶμαι, εἰ τοιαύτην μὴ δύνα- 

, “d 3 ’ 5» ’ ’ 3 A 
soca φέρειν μητέρα, τἀγαθά σε οὐ δύνασθαι φέρειν. εἰπὲ 11 
ὃ » > » a4 , LAX Ν » ὃ A θ 4 
€ μοι, ἔφη, πότερον αλλον τινὰ over ὃὲειν ὔεραπεύειν ; 
ἢ παρεσκεύασαι μηδενὶ ἀνθρώπων πειρᾶσθαι ἀρέσκειν, 

\ ’ὔ 7 “ , 5» ΕἾ ” 
μηδὲ πείθεσθαι μήτε στρατηγῷ μήτε ἄλλῳ ἄρχοντι; 
“Ναὶ μὰ Δί᾽ ἔγωγε," ἔφη. “Οὐκοῦν, ἔφη 0 Σωκράτης, 12 
85 “καὶ τῷ γείτονι βούλει σὺ ἀρέσκειν ἵνα σοι καὶ πῦρ 

ἐναύῃ ὅταν τούτου δέῃ, καὶ ἀγαθοῦ τέ σοι γίγνηται συλ- 
λήπτωρ καί, av τι σφαλλόμενος τύχῃς, εὐνοϊκῶς ἐγγύθεν 
βοηθῇ σοι; “ἜἜγωγε,᾽ ἔφη. “Τί δέ; συνοδοιπόρον 
order to do harm. —ev εἰδώς : de- 11, ἄλλον τινά : obj. of Oepa- 
signedly stronger than οὐκ οἴονται in πεύειν. --- παρεσκεύασαι : are you pre- 
the previous sentence. —dya0a: ραγοᾶ --- πείθεσθαι : depends on 
good things. παρεσκεύασαι. 

10. ὅπως ὑγιάνῃς, ἔσῃ : subjy. 12. ἵνα σοι πῦρ ἐναύῃ: that he 
and fut. indic. in close connection, may kindle a fire for you, t.e. not 
with ὅπως. G. 13874; H. 885 Ὁ. refuse you a light. Cf. ex quo 
Kiihner suggests that the change to sunt illa communia: non pro- 
the indic. implies that the supplying hibere aqua profluente; pati 
of the child’s wants is more in the ab igne ignem capere Cic. de 
mother’s power than is the mainte- Off. i. 16. 52. — συλλήπτωρ : cf. 
nance of his health. — εὐχομένην συλλήπτρια ii. 1. 32. — ἄν τι σφαλλό- 


ἀγαθά : praying for blessings. —edxas 
ἀποδιδοῦσαν : paying her vows. —et 
δύνασαι : see on i. 2. 18. 


μενος τύχῃς : ‘if you fall into any 
misfortune.’? — ἐγγύθεν βοηθῇ cor: 
being at hand may aid you. — 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA ILI. 2. 93 


x , : “ἡ » Ν 9 , san ¥ 
ἢ σύμπλουν, ἢ εἴ τῳ ἄλλῳ ἐντυγχάνοις, οὐδὲν ἄν σοι 
90 διαφέροι φίλον ἢ ἐχθρὸν γενέσθαι, ἢ καὶ τῆς παρὰ τού- 


> , » A 3 A 3) 
των εὐνοίας οἴει δεῖν ἐπιμελεῖσθαι ; 


“Ἔγωγε;," ἔφη. 


> \ a 
“Eira τούτων μὲν ἐπιμελεῖσθαι παρεσκεύασαι, τὴν δὲ 18 


΄ \ ΄ ΄ , A ; ¥ ᾿ς 
μητέρα τὴν πάντων μάλιστά σε φιλοῦσαν οὐκ οἴει δεῖν 


θεραπεύειν; οὐκ οἶσθ᾽ ὅτι καὶ ἡ πόλις ἄλλης μὲν ἀχαρι- 


9ὅ στίας οὐδεμιᾶς ἐπιμελεῖται οὐδὲ δικάζει, ἀλλὰ περιορᾷ 


δ > ΄ ΄ὕ 3 > ΄ 2 , 
τους €U πεπονθότας χάριν ουκ ἀποδιδόντας, EaV δέ τις 


΄ \ θ , ΄ δὲ 3 (θ Ae 
yoveas μη EPATEVY), TOUTM OLKYV TE ἐπιτισύσησι καὶ απο- 


΄, > 20 oY» aA ε » zd νι εν ὦ 
δοκιμάζουσα ουκ EX ἀρχέιν TOVTOV, WS OUTE αν TA ιερα 


9 A , a ἊΝ A , , , ¥ 
εὐσεβῶς θυόμενα ὑπὲρ τῆς πόλεως τούτου θύοντος, οὔτε 


100 ἄλλο καλῶς καὶ δικαίως οὐδὲν ἂν τούτου πράξαντος ; καὶ 


Ν ’, 9.» la 4, / Ἁ 4 
νὴ Ala ἐάν τις τῶν γονέων τελευτησάντων τοὺς τάφους 


\ “A \ la) 3 ’ ε ’ 3 ~ ”~ > ’ 
μὴ ΚΟσμῇῃ; και TOUTO ἐξετάζει ω) πόλις εν TALS Τῶν αβρχον- 


των δοκιμασίαις. 


N > > A KR an \ \ 
σὺ οὖν, ὦ παῖ, ἂν σωφρονῇῃς, τοὺς μὲν 14 


θεοὺς παραιτήσῃ συγγνώμονάς σοι εἶναι, εἴ τι παρημέλη- 


105 Kas τῆς μητρός, μή σε καὶ οὗτοι νομίσαντες ἀχάριστον 


> > 3 ’ > A Ἀ Ν 3 ’ὔ 
εἶναι οὐκ ἐθελήσωσιν εὖ ποιεῖν, τοὺς δὲ ἀνθρώπους 


οὐδὲν ἄν σοι διαφέροι: would it make no 
difference to you ? — τῆς παρὰ τούτων 
εὐνοίας : the good will (emanating) 
Srom these. 

13. εἶτα : as in i. 2. 26. — ἔπιμε- 
λεῖται : takes cognizance of. — ἀπο- 
διδόντας : supplementary participle 
with περιορᾷ. --- ἐὰν δέ τις : correl. 
to ἄλλης μέν above. — ἄρχειν : to 
serve as archon, technical term. 
Cf. βουλεύσας i. 1. 18. A law of 
Solon provided for a rigid exam- 
ination into the ‘record’ of a 
candidate for the archonship, and if 
it was found that he had been guilty 
of violence or neglect toward 1.15 
parents (ef τὸν πατέρα τύπτει, ἢ τὴν 


μητέρα, ἢ μὴ παρέχει οἴκησιν) he was 
excluded from all public office. — ὡς 
οὔτε Gv τὰ ἱερὰ κτλ. : on the ground 
that the sacrifices would not be offered 
piously on behalf of the state if this 
man officiated. For the participle 
with ws, see on 3 and i. 1.4. Obs. 
the emphatic repetition of τούτῳ, 
τοῦτον, τούτου. --- οὐδὲν ἄν : SC. TpaT- 
τόμενον, to be const. like θυόμενα 
above. — ἐξετάζει : investigates. — 
δοκιμασίαις : on this whole subject, 
see Schdmann, Antig. of Greece, p. 
403 ff. Cf. Pollux viii. 44. 

14. ἂν σωφρονῇς : if you are 
wise. — μὴ οὐκ ἐθελήσωσιν : in Attic, 
the use of μὴ οὐ with the subjv. is 


94 EENO®ONTOS AITOMNHMONEYMATA BB. 2, 3. 


, 4 > ee “A , > “ 4 
φυλάξῃ, μή σε αἰσθόμενοι τῶν γονέων ἀμελοῦντα πάντες 


3 / > 3 > / , > ee 
ἀτιμάσωσιν, εἶτα ἐν ἐρημίᾳ φίλων ἀναφανῃς. 


εἶ γάρ σε 


ε ’ὔ Ν Ν al > , S 9 Ἂς “ἡ 
varoha ses T POs τους sibs ἀχάριστον ειναι, οὐδεὶς αν 


110 νομίσειεν εὖ σε ποιήσας χάριν ἀπολήψεσθαι." 


Χαμρρεφῶντα δέ ποτε καὶ Χαιρεκράτην, ἀδελφὼ μὲν ὄντε 63 


ἀλλήλοιν, ἑαυτῷ δὲ γνωρίμω, αἰσθόμενος διαφερομένω, 


ἰδὼν τὸν Χαιρεκράτην, “Εἰπέ pou,” ἔφη, “ ὦ Χαιρέκρατες, οὐ 


δήπου καὶ σὺ εἶ τῶν τοιούτων ἀνθρώπων οἱ χρησιμώτερον 


7 / x 3 , \ la) “A \ 
δνομίζουσι χρήματα ἢ ἀδελφούς ; Kal ταῦτα τῶν μὲν 


ἀφρόνων ὄντων, τοῦ δὲ φρονίμου, καὶ τῶν μὲν βοηθείας 


generally confined to clauses after 
verbs of fearing. See GMT. 305, 
3806; H. 1088. --- εἶτα : and then, 
without καί, as often. Cf. i. 2.1; 
iv. 5. 8, and καὶ αὐτοὶ πολλάκις ἐμὲ 
μιμοῦνται, εἶτα ἐπιχειροῦσιν ἄλλους ἐξ- 
ετάζειν Plato Apol. 28 c. — ἐν ἐρημίᾳ 
φίλων : without ὦν. So after ὁρᾶν, 
cf. ἐν εὐδίᾳ (security) yap ὁρῶ ὑμᾶς 
An. v. 8.19; and after καταλαμβάνειν, 
cf. κατελαμβάνομεν τοὺς μὲν ἡμετέρους 
ἐν φόβῳ Demosthenes de Cor. ὃ 211. 
— γονεῖς : this form of the acc. pl. of 
nouns in -εὖς is not rare in Xenophon. 
Cf. ἱππεῖς iii. 5. 19, γναφεῖς, σκυτεῖς, 
χαλκεῖς iii. 7. 6, δρομεῖς 111. το. 6. 

3. Of two brothers living in dis- 
cord, the younger is reminded by 
Socrates that a brother is worth more 
than money and land. On him, as 
the younger, it is incumbent to win 
his brother by affection; the latter 
will be ashamed to remain alienated : 
and thus the two will work with 
combined energies, to which, indeed, 
they are, as brothers, summoned by 
nature. 

1. Χαιρεφῶντα : from early 
youth a follower and friend of 


Socrates, so that Aristophanes 
brackets him with the latter, τοὺς 
ὠχριῶντας (pale-faced), rods ἀνυποδή- 
rous λέγεις, | ὧν ὁ κακοδαίμων Σωκρά- 
της καὶ Χαιρεφῶν Clouds 103, 104. 
He, too, it was who questioned the 
Pythia at Delphi as to whether any 
man was wiser than Socrates. The 
philosopher, when on trial, appealed 
to Chaerecrates to corroborate this, 
since Chaerephon was dead. Cf. 
Plato Apol. 21 Α. -- διαφερομένω : see 
on ζῶντα i, 2. 16. — οὐ δήπου : surely 
not, ironical in tone, yet implying a 
neg. answer. Cf. iv. 2. 1]. --- τῶν 
τοιούτων ἀνθρώπων : of that sort 
of men. — χρησιμώτερον : αὐ more 
useful possession. For the gender, 
see G. 925; H. 617. — χρήματα : 
purposely chosen, instead of, e.g., 
κτήματα (cf. li. 4. 1), on account of 
χρησιμώτερον, for the sake of the 
‘parechesis.’ Cf. ii. 4. 5.—kal 
ταῦτα τῶν μὲν ἀφρόνων ὄντων : and 
that, too, though the former are with- 
out sense. — τοῦ δέ: from ἀδελφούς, 
the generic idea, Socrates passes to 
τοῦ δέ, having in mind the special 
case of Chaerecrates. — βοηθείας : 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA II. 3. 


95 


ὃ ΕΝ cae δὲ θ A § , \ \ , A 
E€COMEV@V, του OE Bon ευν OVVALLEVOV, και προς TOUTOLS Τῶν 


μὲν πλειόνων ὑπαρχόντων, τοῦ δὲ ἑνός. θαυμαστὸν δὲ καὶ 


ἴω » Ἀ Ve LO λ \ ld e A ν > \ 
τοῦτο, εἴ TLS TOUS μὲν ἀδελφοὺς ζημίαν ἡγεῖται, OTL οὐ Kal 


10Ta τῶν ἀδελφῶν κέκτηται, τοὺς δὲ πολίτας οὐχ ἡγεῖται 


Ν ων “A la 
ζημίαν, ὅτι ov Kal τὰ τῶν πολιτῶν ἔχει, ἀλλ᾽ ἐνταῦθα μὲν 


4 / Ψ A ‘\ A 9 ἴω 
δύνανται λογίζεσθαι ὅτι κρεῖττον σὺν πολλοῖς οἰκοῦντα 


> Xe 5 A » x , ὃ , Ν ων 
ἄσφα ως ταρκουντα, EXELY, ω) μονον LOLT WILEVOV TQ Τῶν 


πολιτῶν ἐπικινδύνως πάντα κεκτῆσθαι, ἐπὶ δὲ TOV ἀδελ- 


al x FS wn 3 nw 
15 pov TO αὐτὸ τοῦτο ἀγνοοῦσι. 


Sin 5. ν ε , 
και OLKETAS μέν Ob δυνά- 


μενοι ὠνοῦνται ἵνα συνεργοὺς ἔχωσι, καὶ φίλους κτῶνται 
ὡς βοηθῶν δεόμενοι, τῶν δ᾽. ἀδελφῶν ἀμελοῦσιν, ὥσπερ 


ἐκ πολιτῶν μὲν γιγνομένους φίλους, ἐξ ἀδελφῶν δὲ οὐ 


γιγνομένους. 


‘\ ‘\ Xx ’, , \ ε , ‘\ 
καὶ μὴν πρὸς φιλίαν μέγα μὲν ὑπάρχει TO 


3 κι et ὋΝ A , \ %- ὁ an “ 9 Q \ 
20 ἐκ TOV αὐτῶν φῦναι, μέγα δὲ τὸ ὁμοῦ τραφῆναι, ἐπεὶ καὶ 
τοῖς θηρίοις πόθος τις ἐγγίγνεται τῶν συντρόφων. πρὸς 
δὲ 4 \ ες » » κ΄ , nA Q 

€ τούτοις καὶ ot αλλοι ἄνθρωποι τιμωσὶ TE μᾶλλον TOUS 


συναδέλφους ὄντας τῶν ἀναδέλφων Kal ἧττον τούτοις 


3 4 ” 
ἐπιτίθενται. 


% , P > ΕῚ a 
καὶ ὁ Χαιρεκράτης εἶπεν: “᾿Αλλ᾽ εἰ μέν, ὦ 


25 Σώκρατες, μὴ μέγα εἴη τὸ διάφορον, ἴσως av δέοι φέρειν 
Ν 5 Ν Ἁ \ “ 4 4 5 Ν £ 
τὸν ἀδελφὸν Kal μὴ μικρῶν ἕνεκα φεύγειν. ἀγαθὸν yap, 


the care and attention needed by 
crops and live-stock. 

2. ἵημίαν : a detriment. — 
ἐνταῦθα : here, ‘‘in this case.’? — 
δύνανται : the subj. is an indef. pl. 
implied in rls above. Cf. i. 2. 62. — 
κρεῖττον : sc. ἐστί. --- ἔπί : in the case 
of. — ἀγνοοῦσι : fail to recognize. 

3. ὥσπερ γιγνομένους φίλους : 
‘¢just as though friends were made 
from.’’ For the acc. abs. of the pers. 
verb, see GMT. 853; H. 974: and, 
for the comparison with an assumed 
case, GMT. 867. 


4, καὶ μὴν... φῦναι: and yet it 
is a great inducement to friendship 
to be born of the same parents. — 
πόθος τις : ἃ sort of yearning. πόθος 
is instinctive, φιλία rational. — τοὺς 
συναδέλφους : those who have brothers 
(to defend them). — rovrots : i.e. τοῖς 
συναδέλφοις, the prominent obj. of 
thought. 

5. τὸ διάφορον : the cause of dis- 
sension. Cf. τοῦτό ye δὴ Χειρισόφῳ 
καὶ Ἐβπενοφῶντι μόνον διάφορον ἐν τῇ 
πορείᾳ ἐγένετο An. iv. 6. 8. -- 
φεύγειν : to αὐνοΐϊά. --- ἀγαθόν : see on 


4 


35 λειά ἐστιν." 


90. 


ΞΕΝΟΦΩ͂ΝΤΟΣ ΑΠΟΜΝΗΜΟΝΕΥΜΑΤΑ B. 8. 


ν Ν % λέ LO Xr Ν x Ὁ ὃ aon ε , , 
WOTTEP και συ εγέις, Qoe hos ων OLOV O€EL OTTOTE βέντοι 


Ν 3 , Ν A Ν 3 , » ᾽ν» 
παντος ἐνδέοι καὶ παν TO EVAVTLWTATOV εὐὴ; Tl αν τις 


3 Ψ “ > ὃ , ” 
ET LK ELPOLY) τοις AOVVATOLS ;5 


καὶ ὁ Σωκράτης ἔφη: 


80 “ Πότερα δέ, ὦ Χαιρέκρατες, οὐδενὶ ἀρέσαι δύναται Χαιρε- 


lal ν 950.Ν cou @ Ν » > 4, ” 
pov, WOTTEP οὐδὲ σοι, ἢ ἐστιν OLS καὶ TAVU ἀρέσκει: 


“Διὰ 


κι ΄, Sa eB 3 , 5» , 3 ϑ Ν A 
TOUTO Yap TOL, Edn, @ Σώκρατες, ἀξιόν ἐστιν ἐμοι μισειν 


> 7 ψ » Ν 9 ἐν 4 3 ἃ Ἂς ἊΨ x 
αὐτόν, OTL ἄλλοις μὲν αρεσκειν δύναται, εμοι δέ, ὅπου ἂν 


παρῇ: πανταχοῦ καὶ ἔργῳ καὶ λόγῳ ζημία μᾶλλον ἢ adhe 


= 5 ν 
“Ap οὖν, ἔφη ὁ Σωκράτης, “ ὥσπερ ἵππος 


τῷ ἀνεπιστήμονι μέν, ἐγχειροῦντι δὲ χρῆσθαι, ζημία ἐστίν, 
οὕτω καὶ ἀδελφός, ὅταν τις αὐτῷ μὴ ἐπιστάμενος ἐγχειρῇ 


χρῆσθαι, ζημία ἐστίν; " 


“Πῶς δ᾽ ἂν ἐγώ, ἔφη 6 Χαιρε- 


΄, γ) 4... , » +> λ a A θ > ΄ , 
κράτης, “ ἀνεπιστήμων εἴην ἀδελφῳ χρῆσθαι, ἐπιστάμενός 


A Ἂκ , δ > ΄, \ 5 Α Ν > 
40 ye Kal εὖ λέγειν τὸν εὖ λέγοντα καὶ εὖ ποιεῖν τὸν εὖ ποι- 


la Ν ’ὔ Ν 4 a 4 3 \ 3 lal 
οὔντα; TOV μέντοι Kal λόγῳ καὶ ἔργῳ πειρώμενον ἐμὲ ἀνιᾶν 


9 “ἃ , ¥Y 3 5 , » 55 3 A 3 9 9 \ 
οὐκ ἂν δυναίμην οὐτ᾽ εὖ λέγειν οὔτ᾽ εὖ ποιεῖν, ἀλλ᾽ οὐδὲ πει- 


, 3) Ὁ 3 4 ¥ Ke 4 , 5S 
ράσομαι." Kal ὁ Σωκράτης ἔφη “ Θαυμαστά γε λέγεις, ὦ 


΄ > , ΄ » 5 SiN , 2 ΄, 
Χαιρέκρατες, εἰ κύνα εν, εἰ σου ἣν ἐπὶ προβατοις ἐπιτη- 
’ 


x Ν Ν Ν , 5 / Ν Ν 
45 δειος ὧν καὶ τοὺς μὲν ποιμένας ἠσπάζετο, σοὶ δὲ προσ- 


, 3 , 3 , x nA 3 ΄, 3 na ἧς 
ιόντι ἐχαλέπαινεν, ἀμελήσας ἂν τοῦ ὀργίζεσθαι ἐπειρῶ εὖ 


χρησιμώτερον 1. --- ὁπότε. .. ἐνδέοι : 
εἰ θα suppose he should be wanting 
in every brotherly quality.’? — ém- 
χειροίη : for the potential opt. in 
apod., cf. il. 2. 3. 

6. ὥσπερ οὐδέ: what was said of 
καί in the note on i. 1. 6 is true also 
of οὐδέ in neg. sentences. — ἔστιν οἷς : 
see on ἔστιν οὕστινας i. 4. 2. — καὶ 
πάνυ: vel maxime.—8&a τοῦτο 
yap... αὐτόν : why, just for that 
reason have I good ground to hate 
him. For γάρ in an answer, see 
on i. 4. 9. — ἔργῳ: see on λόγῳ, 
ἔργῳ 8. 


7. χρῆσθαι : belongs to both 
ἀνεπιστήμονι and ἐγχειροῦντι. 

8. λόγῳ, ἔργῳ: the usual order. 
Cf. 15, 17; iv. δ. 11; Here, too, it 
corresponds to εὖ λέγειν, εὖ ποιεῖν. 
In 6, ἔργῳ was placed first, prob. to 
emphasize its importance. — ἀλλ᾽ 
οὐδέ: ‘‘and neither.’? For ἀλλά in 
this sense, see Kr. Spr. 69. 4. 2. 

9. εἰ κύνα μὲν ἂν ἐπειρῶ xrr.: 
that while you would try etc. For 
μέν in logically subord. clauses, see 
on i. 4. 17. — εὀἰ ἦν, ἠσπάζετο, éxadé- 
παινεν: all in prot. to ἂν ἐπειρῶ. 
— τοῦ ὀργίζεσθαι : for the articular 


9 


δῦσθαι ὅπως σοι ws βέλτιστος 7.” 


55 


60 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA II. 3. 


97 


, : oh > / Ν δὲ LO λ Ν \ Ν , 
ποιήσας πραῦνειν αὑτόν, τὸν Oe ἀδελφὸν φῇς μὲν μέγα 


9 Ν 53 ” \ 1 8 a a 2 Cte 
ἀγαθὸν εινᾶι, OVTA προς GE OLOV δεῖ, ἐπίστασθαι δὲ ομο- 


X A A > A Ν 5S λ , 9 3 A A 
ογῶν και εὖ ποιειν Και EU εγέιν ουκ ἐπίχέειρεις μηχανα- 


Ν ε ri 
καὶ ὁ Xatpexparys, 10 


6“ “ὃ 42. # ἐξ 2 Σ ’ \ > » 3 \ , 
Δέδοικα," ἔφη, “ ὦ Σώκρατες, μὴ οὐκ ἔχω ἐγὼ τοσαύτην 
σοφίαν wate Χαιρεφῶντα ποιῆσαι πρὸς ἐμὲ οἷον δεῖ." 


’ 
“Καὶ μὴν οὐδέν γε ποικίλον," ἔφη ὁ Σωκράτης, “οὐδὲ καινὸν 


A Ss9 tee. a oe A A @ \ \ \ 
δεῖ €7 QUTOV, WS EOL δοκεῖ, μηχανᾶσθαι: ous δὲ και συ 


Mee = % ᾽ x XS iV 2 \ a) 
ἐπίστασαι αὐτὸς οἴομαι ἂν αὐτὸν adovTa περὶ πολλοῦ 


ποιεῖσθαί σε." “Οὐκ ἂν φθάνοις," ἔφη, “ λέγων, εἴ τι ἤσθη-τι 


4 a 5 ’ὔ’ Γι: x > \ , 3 , ” 
cai με φίλτρον ἐπιστάμενον, ὃ ἐγὼ εἰδὼς λέληθα ἐμαυτόν. 


“Λέγε δή μοι," ἔφη, “et τινα τῶν γνωρίμων βούλοιο κατερ- 


, e , , A ee! ὃ A 7K ld =A 
γάσασθαι, OTTOTE θύοι, καλεῖν σε ἐπὶ δεῖπνον, τί ἀν ποιοιης: 


“AnXr ν ’ὔ x ‘al > ’ 4 AY λ A 
YHAOV OTL καταρχοιμι αν TOU GQAuvUTOS, OTE VOL, KQAELV 


| ely, ” 
E€KELVOLV. 


“Ri δὲ βούλοιο τῶν φίλων τινὰ προτρέψασθαι, 12 


ε 4 3 , 3 A A ~ 4, x ’ ” 
ὁπότε ἀποδημοίης, ἐπιμελεῖσθαι τῶν σῶν, Ti ἂν ToLoins; 


inf. with ἀμελέω, see GMT. 793. 
--- αὐτόν: ἐ.6. For the 
use of this pron. to recall the main 
subst., cf. ἐγὼ μὲν οὖν βασιλέα. .. 
οὐκ οἶδα ὅ τι δεῖ αὐτὸν ὀμόσαι An. ii. 4. 
1. --- φῇς μέν : correlative to οὐκ 
ἐπιχειρεῖς, but δέ follows ἐπίστασθαι 
because this is placed first in the 
sentence. 

10. ἔχω: for the ind. with verbs 
of fearing, see G. 1380; H. 888. — 
σοφίαν : here practical wisdom, as 
distinguished from ἐπιστήμη, theo- 
retical knowledge. — καὶ μήν : as in 4. 
— ποικίλον : intricate, lit. variegated. 
Cf. οὐδὲν ποικίλον, ἀλλ᾽ womep οἱ 
πολλοὶ (νομίζουσι) Plato Gorg. 491 ν. 
- οἷς : equivalent to τούτοις ἅ, of 
which ἅ is obj. of ἐπίστασαι and 
τούτοις modifies ἑλόντα. 


τὸν κύνα. 


11. οὐκ dv φθάνοις λέγων : you 
could not be too quick in telling me, 
i.e. ὁ’ pray tell me at once.’’ Cf. iii. 
11.1. For the supplementary partici- 
ple with φθάνω, see G. 1586; H. 984. 
-Ἦ φίλτρον : a love charm, (properly 
φίλητρον, from φιλέω). --- εἰδώς : see 
on φθάνοις above. — κατεργάσασθαι : 
bring about, hence, induce. — ὁπότε 
θύοι: see on ὁπότε βούλοιτο ii. 1. 18. 
- ἐπὶ δεῖπνον : to the usual: feast 
held after sacrifices, to which kins- 
men and friends were invited. Cf. 
ii. 9. 4. -- κατάρχοιμι av τοῦ καλεῖν 
αὐτόν: I should take the lead in in- 
viting him. —atrés: for the nom. 
agreeing with omitted subj. of inf., 
cf. κεκτημένος i. 2. 1. 

12. προτρέψασθαι : 


to persuade. ᾿ 
Of. i. 2. 64. ᾿ 


98 EENO®OQNTOS AITOMNHMONEYMATA BB. 3. 


“APD Ψ , x 3 ΄ ee X A θ A 
λον OTL πρότερος ἄν ἐγχειροίην ἐπιμελεῖσθαι τῶν 
δι yp εἰν > 5 2 99 gg THD Se , ,Ἵ» A 
ἐκείνου ὁπότε ἀποδημοίη." “Et δὲ βούλοιο E€vov ποιῆσαι 13 
ε , Ν ε » » 3 3 3 7 7K 
65 ὑποδέχεσθαι σεαυτὸν ὁπότε ἔλθοις εἰς τὴν ἐκείνου, Ti ἂν 
,ὔ ” “ ~ ῳ Ν A 4 e / 
ποιοίης; Δῆλον ὅτι καὶ τοῦτον πρότερος ὑποδεχοίμην 
ἂν ὁπότε ἔλθοι ᾿Αθήναζε: καὶ εἴ γε βουλοίμην αὐτὸν προ- 
A / 4:9 ἂν A 9 \ “ 
θυμεῖσθαι διαπράττειν μοι ἐφ᾽ ἃ ἤκοιμι, δῆλον ὅτι καὶ τοῦτο 
ὃ td x , S048 ΕῚ , A ” (a9 , > »y , 
έοι ἂν πρότερον αὐτὸν ἐκείνῳ ποιεῖν. Πάντ᾽ apa σύ γειά 
Ν 3 5 ’ὔ 7 3 4 ’ὔ 3 , 
τοτὰ ἐν ἀνθρώποις φίλτρα ἐπιστάμενος πάλαι ἀπεκρύπτου᾽ 
x 9 Pa; ..5} Ὁ re a Ν 3 Ν “A 3X , 
ἢ ὀκνεῖς," ἔφη, “ἄρξαι, μὴ αἰσχρὸς φανῇς, ἐὰν πρότερος 
\ > Ν > fed XN ‘\ ’ Ὁ Ν 
τὸν ἀδελφὸν εὖ ποιῇς; καὶ μὴν πλείστου γε δοκεῖ ἀνὴρ 
9 , » > ἃ x 4 Ν Ν , 
ἐπαίνου ἄξιος εἶναι, ὃς av φθάνῃ τοὺς μὲν πολεμίους 
ἴω A ἈΝ δὲ ad 9 “A 3 Ν μὰ 530. 
κακῶς ποιῶν, τοὺς δὲ φίλους εὐεργετῶν. εἰ μὲν οὖν ἐδόκει 
75 μοι Χαιρεφῶν ἡγεμονικώτερος εἶναι σοῦ πρὸς τὴν φιλίαν 
ταύτην, ἐκεῖνον ἂν ἐπειρώμην πείθειν πρότερον ἐγχειρεῖν 
κι Α 7 A A , \ A 
τῷ σὲ φίλον ποιεῖσθαι: νῦν δέ μοι σὺ δοκεῖς ἡγούμενος 
αλλ x 3 , θ A ” Ν ε , 
μᾶλλον av ἐξεργάσασθαι TovTo.” Kat ὁ Χαιρεκράτης 15 
> «(Ὁ : , 3 ’ Ν 9 a) Ν 
εἶπεν: “ἼΑτοπα λέγεις, ὦ Σώκρατες, καὶ οὐδαμῶς πρὸς 
an ¢ , Θέ, , »” A , 
80 σου, ος YE κελεύεις ἐμὲ νεώτερον OVTA καθηγεῖσθαι: KQLTOL 
τούτου ye Tapa πᾶσιν ἀνθρώποις τἀναντία νομίζεται, 


13. ξένον ποιῆσαι ὑποδέχεσθαι 
σεαυτόν: for the unusual order of 


question. —aloyxpds φανῦς : ‘‘ appear 
to lower yourself.’’ — κ  αιρεφῶν : de- 


words, see on i. 5. 1. — αὀἰς τὴν éxel- 
vov: 86. πόλιν. ----αὐτόν (in line 69): 
myself. For the omission of the pers. 
pron., see G. 990 ; H. 680, 3. —éxelve: 
dat. of advantage. 
ποιήσῃς Cyr. vii. 2. 27. 
const. is ποιεῖν τινά τι. 

14. φίλτρα : with somewhat con- 
temptuous reference to φίλτρον in 
11. ---- ἀπεκρύπτου : have been keep- 
ing (this knowledge) to yourself. 
Cf. ii. 6. 29; iii. 6. 3. — ἢ ὀκνεῖς : the 
conj. like the Lat. an, when a pre- 
vious declarative sent. implies a 


Cf. ἢν ταῦτά μοι 
The usual 


scribed by Plato (Apol. 21 a) as 
σφοδρὸς ἐφ᾽ ὅ τι ὁρμήσειε. ---- hyepoviKe- 
τερος : better fitted to take the first 
step. Cf. ἡγεμονικοὶ πρὸς τὰ πονηρά 
Cyr. ii. 2. 25. --- τῷ ποιεῖσθαι : for the 
articular inf. after verbs and adjs., 
cf. 11; i. 2. 3. — ἡγούμενος : cond., 
if you take the lead. — τοῦτο : belongs 
in meaning to τὴν φιλίαν ταύτην, 
equivalent to ‘‘ good terms again.’’ 
15. πρὸς σοῦ (sc. ὄντα, cf. on ii. 1. 
82): ‘like yourself.’? — ὃς κελεύεις : 
for the causal rel., see G. 1461; H. 
910. — νομίζεται : see on νομέζων i. 1.1. 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA II, 8. 


99 


Q , e A Θ Ν \ ’ὔ \, y» ” 
τὸν πρεσβύτερον ἡγεῖσθαι παντὸς καὶ λόγου Kal ἔργου. 
« qn ᾽) » ε 4 ςς 3 Ν >  4 an A 

Πῶς; ἔφη ὁ Lwxparyns: “ov yap καὶ ὁδοῦ παραχωρῆ- 16 
σαι τὸν νεώτερον πρεσβυτέρῳ συντυγχάνοντι πανταχοῦ 
8ὅ νομίζεται καὶ καθήμενον ὑπαναστῆναι καὶ κοίτῃ μαλακῇ 


τιμῆσαι καὶ λόγων ὑπεῖξαι; ὠγαθέ, μὴ ὄκνει," ἔφη, “ ἀλλ᾽ 


ἐγχείρει τὸν ἄνδρα καταπραὕΐνειν, καὶ πάνυ ταχύ σοι ὑπα- 


, > ε ~ ε ’ὔ’ ’ 3 Ἁ 3 ΄ 
κούσεται:- οὐχ ὁρᾷς ὡς φιλότιμός ἐστι καὶ ἐλευθέριος ; 


τὰ μὲν γὰρ πονηρὰ ἀνθρώπια οὐκ ἂν ἄλλως μᾶλλον ἕλοις 


90 ἢ εἰ δοίης τι, τοὺς δὲ καλοὺς κἀγαθοὺς ἀνθρώπους προσφι- 


λῶς χρώμενος μάλιστ᾽ ἂν κατεργάσαιο.᾽" καὶ ὃ Χαιρεκρά- 


3 > Ν > ~ A“ 
τῆς εἶπεν: “᾿Ἐὰν οὖν, ἐμοῦ ταῦτα ποιοῦντος, ἐκεῖνος μηδὲν 


’ὔ ’ 3) 
βελτίων γίγνηται; 


“Τί γὰρ ἄλλο," ἔφη ὁ Σωκράτης, “ἢ 


κινδυνεύσεις ἐπιδεῖξαι σὺ μὲν χρηστός τε καὶ φιλάδελφος 


95 εἶναι, ἐκεῖνος δὲ φαῦλός τε καὶ οὐκ ἄξιος εὐεργεσίας; 


3 3 950." > ’ὔ » ’ Ν > 4 
ἀλλ᾽ οὐδὲν οἶμαι τούτων ἔσεσθαι: νομίζω yap αὐτόν, 


3 Ν » 4, 4 ε Ν > x 3 nw 
ἐπειδὰν αἴσθηταί σα προκαλούμενον EQUTOV ELS TOV αγώνα 


— τὸν πρεσβύτερον ἡγεῖσθαι : ex- 
planatory appos. to τἀναντία. 

16. οὐ yap: as ini. 3. 10.— ὁδοῦ : 
for the gen. of separation with verbs 
of withdrawing, see G. 1117; H. 
_748. — κοίτῃ μαλακῇ τιμῆσαι: cf. 
εὐνῇ ἐνὶ μαλακῇ Hom. I 619 and 
πυκινὸν λέχος 659. Recognition of 
superiority in age was character- 
istic of the Greeks. Cf. πᾶς ἡμῖν 
αἰδείσθω τὸν ἑαυτοῦ πρεσβύτερον 
ἔργῳ τε καὶ ἔπει Plato Laws 879 
σ. --- ἔφη : he continued. — τὸν ἄνδρα: 
more emphatic than 
ἐγχείρει, καὶ ὑπακούσεται : try, and 
he will hearken. For the same use 
of an ind. after an imv. implying a 
cond., see ii. 7. 10; iii. 6.17. Cf. 
‘Ask, and it shall be given you: 
seek, and ye shall find.’ — οὐχ ὁρᾷς: 
the omission of 7 (‘asyndeton’) adds 


αὐτόν. 


vivacity to the question. —Ta μὲν 
γάρ : the γάρ is to be explained by an 
omitted sent. like “1 say this to you 
(that he is φιλότιμος and ἐλευθέριος).᾽" 
For μέν equivalent to while, see on 
9. —Katepydcato: win over. 

17. ἐὰν γίγνηται: with an 
omitted apod. like τί λέγεις or ri 
ἔσται. --- τί yap ἄλλο ἢ κινδυνεύσεις : 
see on ii. 1. 17. Cf. σὺ οὐδὲν ἄλλο 
[ποιεῖς] ἢ αὐτὸς ἀπορεῖς καὶ τοὺς ἄλλους 
ποιεῖς ἀπορεῖν Plato Meno 80 a; and 
classis ad insulam se recepit, 
nihil aliud quam depopu- 
lato hostium agro Livy xxvii. 
21. κινδυνεύσεις has an adv. force 
with the following verb, ‘‘ you very 
likely will.’? So often in Plato. — 
émdet~ar: here with the inf. equiva- 
lent to show that you are. — ἐκεῖνος 
δέ: sc. κινδυνεύσει ἐπιδεῖξαι εἶναι. ᾿ 


100 


ERENO®ONTOS ATIOMNHMONEYMATA 5. 3, 4. 


aA ’ὔ ν / ’ Ν 
τοῦτον, πάνυ φιλονεικήσειν, ὅπως περιγένηται σου καὶ 


λόγῳ καὶ ἔργῳ εὖ ποιῶν. 


A Ν Ν ν 3) ¥ 
νῦν μὲν yap οὕτως, ey, 18 


100 “ διάκεισθον, ὦσπερ εἰ τὼ χεῖρε, ἃς ὁ θεὸς ἐπὶ τῷ συλλαμ- 


, 9 ’ 3 ’ὔ 3 Ψ 4 7 Ν 
βάνειν ἀλλήλοιν ἐποίησεν, ἀφεμένω τούτου τράποιντο πρὸς 


τὸ διακωλύειν ἀλλήλω, ἢ εἰ τὼ πόδε θείᾳ μοίρᾳ πεποιη- 


᾽ ν Ν “Ὁ 39 , > , 4 
μένω πρὸς TO συνεργεῖν ἀλλήλοιν ἀμελήσαντε τούτου 


ἐμποδίζοιεν ἀλλήλω. 


οὐκ ἂν πολλὴ ἀμαθία εἴη καὶ κακο-19 
th ~ >. 9 39 ’ ᾽ὔὕ 9.5 /, A 
105 δαιμονία τοῖς ἐπ᾽ ὠφελείᾳ πεποιημένοις ἐπὶ βλάβῃ χρῆ- 


σθαι; καὶ μὴν ἀδελφώ γε, ὡς ἐμοὶ δοκεῖ, ὁ θεὸς ἐποίησεν 


ἐπὶ μείζονι ὠφελείᾳ ἀλλήλοιν ἢ χεῖρέ τε καὶ πόδε καὶ 


ὀφθαλμὼ καὶ τἄλλα ὅσα ἀδελφὰ ἔφυσεν ἀνθρώποις. 


χεῖρες μὲν γάρ, εἰ δέοι αὐτὰς τὰ πλέον ὀργυιᾶς διέχοντα 


ν ΜᾺ 3 x 4 , ἈΝ δ᾽ x ΝΟ μὴ 
110 Aa ποιῆσαι, Οουκ QV δύναιντο, πόδες δὲ OU αν ἐπι Τα 


ὀργυιὰν διέχοντα ἔλθοιεν ἅμα, ὀφθαλμοὶ δέ, οἱ δοκοῦντες 


a. 4 A 3 A 50.» «ἃ οὶ »» 3 3, 
€77L πλεῖστον ἐξικνεῖσθαι ovo QV Τῶν ETL εγγυτέρω OVT@V 


τὰ ἔμπροσθεν ἅμα καὶ τὰ ὄπισθεν ἰδεῖν δύναιντο: ἀδελφὼ 


A é ” Ν \ A ’ 9 . eee Ped 
δέ, φίλω ὄντε, καὶ πολὺ διεστῶτε πράττετον ἅμα Kal ἐπ 


116 ὠφελείᾳ ἀλλήλοιν." 


Ἤκουσα δέ ποτε αὐτοῦ καὶ περὶ φίλων διαλεγομένου, 


ἐξ ὧν ἔμοιγε ἐδόκει μάλιστ᾽ ἄν τις ὠφελεῖσθαι πρὸς 


18. τὼ χεῖρε, ds: for the change 
in number, see on i. 2. 14. --- ἐπὶ τῷ 
συλλαμβάνειν : so ἐπὶ ὠφελείᾳ in 19. 
See on i. 3. 11. 

19. οὐκ av ety: so often in ani- 
mated discourse, where the opt. 
expresses a modest claim, without 
re gee τ i SC Gomes Oa Pa Mea 
18; iii, τ. 48. --- καὶ μήν ye: see 
on i, 4. 12. --- ἀδελφά: adj., in 
pairs. — ὀργυιᾶς : a fathom, from 
ὀρέγειν to reach, hence the out- 
spread arms’ reach. — ἅμα ποιῆσαι : 
to act together on.—olr\wo ὄντε: 
conditional. — διεστῶτε : concessive. 


— ἅμα mparrerov : conveys the idea 
of ‘‘ with united efforts,’ while ἅμα 
καί in the preceding clause is equiva- 
lent to simul ac. 

4. Although everybody praises 
Friendship, yet most men strive zeal- 
ously after almost any other pus- 
session rather than a true friend; 
nevertheless, no other blessing is so 
well fitted as this to help and delight 
us in every situation of life. 

1. διαλεγομένου : see on i. 1. 11. 
—é ov: its antec. is the omitted 
obj. of διαλεγομένου. --- ἐδόκει τις : 
best rendered impers., it seemed that 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA II. 4. 


101 


’ὔ ᾿ A bs Ἁ ’ ἰφὶ \ ‘\ \ A 
φίλων κτῆσίν TE καὶ χρείαν. τοῦτο μὲν yap δὴ πολλῶν 
ν 3 4 ε / , / x ΄ 
ἔφη ἀκούειν, ὡς πάντων κτημάτων κράτιστον εἴη φίλος 

Ἂς \ 3 ’ὔ 5 Psi Ν X ~ ε A 
ὅ σαφὴς καὶ ἀγαθός, ἐπιμελομένους δὲ παντὸς μᾶλλον ὁρᾶν 


ἔφη τοὺς πολλοὺς ἢ φίλων κτήσεως. 


\ \ δι 2 Ἀ 
και γαρ OLKLAS και 


3 \ Ν 3 ’ Ν , Ν 4 ’ 
ἀγροὺς καὶ ἀνδράποδα καὶ βοσκήματα καὶ σκεύη κτωμέ. 
vous τε ἐπιμελῶς ὁρᾶν ἔφη καὶ τὰ ὄντα σῴζειν πειρω- 
, 34 δέ ἃ , 9 θὲ 5 , aN 
μένους, φίλον δέ, ὃ μέγιστον ἀγαθὸν εἶναί φασιν, ὁρᾶν 
» \ \ ¥ 9 , ΄, 
10€py τοὺς πολλοὺς οὔτε ὅπως κτήσωνται φροντίζοντας, 


» ν Ὁ > ~ , 
οὔτε ὅπως οἱ OVTES αὐτοῖς σῴῳζωνται. 


ἀλλὰ καὶ καμνόν- 


Pd Χ > “A ε “A » A Ν 3 , 
Tov φίλων TE Kal οἰκετῶν ὁρᾶν τινας ἔφη τοῖς μὲν οἰκέ- 


“TS ‘\ > ’ὔ \ τ Ν Ν ε 7 
Tals Kal ἰατροὺς εἰσάγοντας καὶ τἄλλα τὰ πρὸς ὑγίειαν 
ἐπιμελῶς παρασκευάζοντας, τῶν δὲ φίλων ὀλιγωροῦντας, 
16 ἀποθανόντων τε ἀμφοτέρων ἐπὶ μὲν τοῖς οἰκέταις ἀχθο- 
’ Ἁ 4 e v4 mS \ “~ / > \ 
μένους τε καὶ ζημίαν ἡγουμένους, ἐπὶ δὲ Tots φίλοις οὐδὲν 
> ἴων A 
οἰομένους ἐλαττοῦσθαι, καὶ τῶν μὲν ἄλλων κτημάτων 


ὑδὲ 9 1θ , 5.9 9 ,ὕ A δὲ 
ουὸεν εὠντας a εράπευτον οὐὸ QAVETTLOKETTTOV, τῶν ε 


φίλων ἐπιμελείας δεομένων ἀμελοῦντας. 


» \ ἈΝ 
ΕΤι δὲ προς 


20 τούτοις ὁρᾶν ἔφη τοὺς πολλοὺς τῶν μὲν ἄλλων κτημάτων, 


any one. — τοῦτο, δή: hoc certe. 
--πολλῶν : gen. of source. — as κρά- 
τιστον εἴη: in explanatory appos. 
with τοῦτο. --- παντὸς μᾶλλον: for 
everything rather. Cf. πάντα μᾶλλον 
iv. 8. 4. 

2. With this section, cf. quid 
autem stultius, quam, cum 
plurimum copiis, facultatibus, 
opibus possint cetera parare, 
quae parantur pecunia, equos, 
famulos, vestem egregiam, vasa 
pretiosa; amicos non parare, 
optimam et pulcherrimam vitae, 
ut ita dicam, supellectilem? 


rel, in the gender of the pred. as in 
the Lat. amicum, quod bonum 
esse dicunt. 6. 1022; H. 631. — 
κτήσωνται, σῴζωνται : for the subjv. 
in obj. clauses, see G. 1374 ; H. 885 Ὁ. 
- αὐτοῖς: belongs to of ὄντες (sc. φίλοι, 
to be supplied from φίλον) as well as 
to og fwrrat. 

3. ἀλλὰ καί: quin etiam. — 
καμνόντων φίλων re kal οἰκετῶν : ““ ἴῃ 
the case of sick friends and sick 
servants.’? --- τάλλα τὰ πρὸς ὑγίειαν : 
‘¢the other means of restoration to 
health.’? — ζημίαν : sc. τὸν θάνατον. 
--- ἐλαττοῦσθαι : are the worse off. — 


οὐδὲν ἀθεράπευτον : the double neg. _ 


Cic. de Am. xv. 55. — κτωμένους : > ae 
(‘litotes ’) adds force. tIiBRaPy 


striving to acquire. —olrov δέ, 6: the 


102 EENO®QNTOS AITOMNHMONEYMATA BB. 4. 


\ 4 lal 9 A »” ἐν ἴων 5 , wn QA 
Kal πάνυ πολλῶν αὐτοῖς ὄντων, TO πλῆθος εἰδότας, TOY δὲ 

/ > / ” 3 , Ν A > A 
φίλων, ὀλίγων ὄντων, οὐ μόνον τὸ πλῆθος ἀγνοοῦντας, 
ἀλλὰ καὶ τοῖς πυνθανομένοις τοῦτο καταλέγειν ἐγχειρή- 

ἃ 3 »-“ ΄ » ΄ ’ 3 ,ὔ 

σαντας, οὗς ἐν τοῖς φίλοις ἔθεσαν, πάλιν τούτους ἀνατίθε- 
2500au: τοσοῦτον αὐτοὺς τῶν φίλων φροντίζειν. “καίτοι 
πρὸς ποῖον κτῆμα τῶν ἄλλων παραβαλλόμενος φίλος 

a θὲ 9 x λλ “ ’ φ 4 . “A Ν ν 
γαθὸς οὐκ ἂν πολλῷ κρείττων φανείη ; ποῖος γὰρ ἵππος 

A “ ee ν 
ἢ ποῖον ζεῦγος οὕτω χρήσιμον ὥσπερ 6 χρηστὸς φίλος; 
ποῖον δὲ ἀνδράποδον οὕτως εὔνουν καὶ παραμόνιμον; ἢ 
A A 4 

ϑοποῖον ἄλλο κτῆμα οὕτω πάγχρηστον; ὁ yap ἀγαθὸς 
’ ε Ἂν ’ὔ ~ ~ Ν 3 “A -~ ’ὔ ἈΝ 
φίλος ἑαυτὸν τάττει πρὸς πᾶν τὸ ἐλλεῖπον TO φίλῳ καὶ 
τῆς τῶν ἰδίων κατασκευῆς καὶ τῶν κοινῶν πράξεων, καί, 
av τέ τινα εὖ ποιῆσαι δέῃ, συνεπισχύει, ἄν τέ τις φόβος 
ταράττῃ, συμβοηθεὶ τὰ μὲν συναναλίσκων, τὰ δὲ συμ- 
’ Ν εν Ν ’ Ν Ν ’ \ > 
35 πράττων, Kal τὰ μὲν συμπείθων, τὰ δὲ βιαζόμενος, Kal εὖ 
4 , A 9 ᾽ὔὕ "4 \ 
μὲν πράττοντας πλεῖστα εὐφραίνων, σφαλλομένους δὲ 
πλεῖστα ἐπανορθῶν. ἃ δὲ αἵ τε χεῖρες ἑκάστῳ ὑπηρετοῦσι 
4. καὶ πολλῶν ὄντων : concessive, 
as is also ὀλίγων ὄντων. --- τὸ πλῆθος 


Similarly, δύναμιν is equivalent to 
weakness in An. i. 6. 7. 


εἰδότας : cf. querebatur (Scipio) 
quod omnibus in rebus_ ho- 
mines diligentiores essent: 
capras et oves quot quisque 
haberet dicere posse, amicos 
quot haberet non posse dicere 
Cic. de Am. xvii. 62. — ots... ἔθε- 
σαν: explanatory of τούτους. ----πάλιν 
ἀνατίθεσθαι : πάλιν is often added to 
verbs compounded with ἀνά, as we 
say ‘to take back again.’ Cf. πάλιν 
ἀνερασθῆναι iii. 5.7. For the meaning 
of the verb, see on i. 2.44. The inf. 
is used here where we might expect 
the participle (after ὁρᾶν), because 
the influence of ἔφη is still felt. — 
τοσοῦτον : only so much, i.e. 80 little. 


5. χρήσιμον, χρηστός: for the 
‘parechesis,’ see on χρήματα ii. 
Mig 

6. ἑαυτὸν τάττει : devotes himself. 
Cf. ws yap χρημάτων ἑώρα τὴν πόλιν 
δεομένην, ἐπὶ τὸ πορίζειν ταῦτα ἑαυτὸν 
ἔταξε Ages. ii. 25. --- πρὸς πᾶν τὸ 
ἐλλεῖπον, καί: against loss of every 
kind, whether etc. — κατασκευῆς: gen. 
of want, with ἐλλεῖπον. --- τῶν κοι- 
νῶν πράξεων : ‘brachylogy’ for τῆς 
τῶν κοινῶν πράξεων 
συναναλίσκων : this and the succeed- 
ing five participles well summarize 
the ways in which a friend in need 
shows himself a friend indeed. — 
πλεῖστα : frequently. 


κατασκευῆς. --- 





XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA II. 4, 5. 


108 


Ν ὅδ... ὁ Ν A \ Q 5S , 
και OU ὀφθαλμοὶ πρΌόορωσι Καὶ TA @TA T POAKOVOVOL 
A ε ’ 4 4 , 5 - s κ᾿ 
και OL πόδες διανύτουσι, τούτων φίλος EVEPYET OV οὐδενὸς 


ἃ a 
40 λείπεται: πολλάκις ἃ πρὸ αὑτοῦ τις οὐκ ἐξειργάσατο ἢ 


> Τὸ x > » x 9 ὃ / ἴω ε ΄ . 
οὐκ εἰδεν ἢ οὐκ κουσεν ἢ OV OLNVUGE, ταυτα O φίλος προ 


τοῦ φίλου ἐξήρκεσεν. 


ἀλλ᾽ ὅμως ἔνιοι δένδρα μὲν πει- 


ρῶνται θεραπεύειν τοῦ καρποῦ ἕνεκεν, τοῦ δὲ παμφορωτά- 


’ ἃ a) ΄, 3 “A Ν 5 4 ε 
του κτήματος, ὃ καλεῖται φίλος, ἀργῶς καὶ ἀνειμένως οἱ 


45 πλεῖστοι ἐπιμέλονται." 


Ψ a 
Ἤκουσα δέ ποτε καὶ ἄλλον αὐτοῦ λόγον, ὃς ἐδόκει 


\ 3 4 5 4 e 
μοι προτρέπειν τὸν ἀκούοντα ἐξετάζειν ἑαυτόν, ὁπόσου 


τοῖς φίλοις ἄξιος εἴη. 


> Ἁ ,ὔ wn 
ἰδὼν γάρ τινα τῶν συνόντων ἀμε- 


an 3.2 
λοῦντα φίλου πενίᾳ πιεζομένου, ἤρετο ᾿Αντισθένη ἐναν- 


» al ΄“ Ν ᾿Ξ, na * 
δτίον τοῦ ἀμελοῦντος αὐτοῦ καὶ ἄλλων πολλῶν: “*Ap’,” 


*= y ἴω 
ἔφη, “ ὦ ᾿Αντίσθενες, εἰσίτινες ἀξίαι φίλων, ὥσπερ οἰκετῶν; 


lal Ἀ 3 la ε ld A A + , 3 ε A 
TMV γαρ ΟἰΚέετων O μεν Του δυοῖν μναιν ἀξιός E€OTLY, O δὲ 


7. τὰ ὦτα προακούουσι: pl. with 
neut. subj., on account of the pre- 
ceding and following pls., to preserve 
‘concinnity.’ — τούτων : refers back 
with emphasis to the omitted antec. 
of & See G. 1030; H. 996 b. — 
εὐεργετῶν οὐδενὸς λείπεται : is behind- 
hand in none with his good offices. 
For the supplementary participle 
with λείπεται, see G. 1580; H. 981. 
Cf. ἐλλείπεσθαι ποιῶν ii. 6. 5. — πολ- 
λάκις &: with conj. omitted, as often 
in an explanatory clause (‘ explica- 
tive asyndeton’). Kr. Spr. sg. 1. 5. 
-πρὸ τοῦ φίλου: sc. ἐξεργαζόμενος, 
ἰδών, ἀκούσας, διανύσας. --- μέν, δέ: as 
ini. 4. 17. 

5. Friends are of various values. 
Men would not abandon a friend so 
readily as they do, if he strove more 
earnestly to be a valuable friend. 


1. ἐδόκει μοι κτλ. : seemed to me 
suited. —éavtov: for the ‘ prolepsis,’ 
see on συνουσίαν. 2. 18.---᾿ Αντισθένη: 
of Athens, an inseparable friend of 
Socrates. See on i. 6. 10. After 
his master’s death, he founded the 
Cynic school of philosophy, which 
defined the highest virtue as com- 
plete independence of material 


5 


wants. Cf. iii. 11. 17; Sym. viii. 4. 


This form of the acc. is exceptional 
with Xenophon, who usually writes 
᾿Αντισθένην, Σωκράτην, etc. G. 280; 
H. 193. --- αὐτοῦ : himself. 

2. ἀξίαι: prices. —Svoiv μναῖν: 
nominally equivalent to about thirty- 
six dollars, but in purchasing power 
equal to six or eight times that 
amount to-day. Ten minae ($180) 
is here indicated as a good price for 
a good slave, which would about 


104 


EENO®ONTOS ATLOMNHMONEYMATA B. 5. 


οὐδ᾽ ἡμιμναίου, ὁ δὲ πέντε μνῶν, ὁ δὲ καὶ δέκα- Νικίας δὲ 


ε , ΄ 5) , > 3 ΄, ΄ 
Ο Νικηράτου λέγεται EMLOTATYV εἰς ταβγυρέεια πρίασθαι 


, A δὲ A 9” » ἘΚ IRR σ lal 
10 TadavTov: σκοπουμαι OY TOUTO, ἔφη, εἰ Apa, ὠσπερ τῶν 


> a Ψ XN A / ΡΒ | ><’ ” Ἂ, Ν 
οἰκετῶν, οὕτω καὶ τῶν φίλων εἰσὶν ἀξίαι." “Nai μὰ AC, 


75. 99 


ἔφη ὁ ᾿Αντισθένης - “ ἐγὼ γοῦν βουλοίμην ἂν τὸν μέν τινα 


φίλον μοι εἶναι μᾶλλον ἢ δύο μνᾶς, τὸν δ᾽ οὐδ᾽ ἂν ἡμι- 


με ἴω 
μναίου προτιμησαίμην, τὸν δὲ καὶ πρὸ δέκα μνῶν ἑλοίμην 


dl Ἂς δὲ Ν , , ἃ ᾿ς ’ὔ x 
15 αν, TOV O€ TPO πάντων χρημάτων καὶ πόνων πριαίμην ἂν 


»). > 3) 
φίλον μοι εἶναι. 


A 5 » lal 
“Οὐκοῦν, ἔφη ὁ Σωκράτης, “εἴγε ταῦτα 


a: 2 τῷ A xr τ 3 , ee , ΄ 
τοιαῦτα €OTL, καλῶς αν ἔχου ἐξετάζειν τινα EAVTOV, ποσου 


» ’ὔ A , » » xX A ε 
apa τυγχάνει τους φίλοις ἄξιος ὦν, καὶ πειρᾶσθαι ως 


πλείστου ἀξιος εἶναι, ἵνα ἧττον αὐτὸν οἱ φίλοι προδιδῶσιν. 


PS , Ὅν »¥ aa , 9 , (a) , 4 + 
20 ἐγὼ γάρ Tou, ἔφη, “ πολλάκις ἀκούω τοῦ μέν, OTL προύδω- 


22° 7 3 la Aw , 4 ~ 5 > e A 
κεν αὑτὸν φίλος ἀνὴρ, TOU δέ, ὅτι μναν ἀνθ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ 


~ ν > ‘ ἃ » , 5 
μᾶλλον εἴλετο ἀνὴρ ov wero φίλον εἶναι. 


Ν nw 
Τα Τοιαῦτα 


, A \ Y Ψ > 7 Ν 
TAVTA Οσκοίτω, PY WOTEP OTAV TLS OLKETYVY ΠΟΡΉΡρΟΝν 


correspond to the $1000 or $1200 
often paid for a ‘likely’ house-servant 
in our own ante-bellum slavery 
days. See oni. 2. 1.—Nuxfas: the 
well-known Athenian general, who 
with his whole army was destroyed 
in the fatal Sicilian expedition (413 
B.c.). He had a profitable lease of 
silver mines at Laurium, in the 
southern part of Attica, and is said 
to have employed a thousand slaves. 
Cf. Thue. vii. 86. — ταλάντου : see 
on i. 2. 1. --- σκοποῦμαι δή: quaero 
igitur, resuming the thread of the 
conversation, as ini. 2. 24. --- εἰ apa: 
whether possibly. So dpa after πόσου 
in 4. 

3. τὸν μέν τινα : a certain man. — 
τὸν δέ, τὸν δέ: while another, and a 
third οἰο. --- πρὸ πάντων χρημάτων : it 


seems better to const. this phrase with 
ἑλοίμην, leaving πόνων as gen. of price 
Others join both gens. 
with πριαίμην. --- τόνων : cf. τῶν πόνων 


with πριαίμην. 


πωλοῦσιν ἡμῖν πάντα τἀγάθ᾽ οἱ θεοί ii. 
1. 20. --- φίλον μοι εἶναι : i.e. ὥστε φί- 
λον μοι εἶναι. 

4, εἴ ἐστι, καλῶς ἂν ἔχοι : for the 
‘mixed’ form of cond. sent., cf. i. 
2.45; iv. 2.381. —éavrdv: see on 1.— 
ἄρα: as in 2. --- ἄξιος εἶναι : instead 
of the regular ἄξιον εἶναι, as if after a 
pers. const., with subj. in the nom. 
case, prob. by assimilation to the 
preceding ἄξιος wv. —éavrod: for the 
indirect refl., see on i. 2. 32. 

5. τὰ τοιαῦτα πάντα σκοπῶ, μή: 
I am pondering all such matters, 
namely, whether. 'The clause begin- 
ning with μή completes epexegetically 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA IL. 5, 6. 


105 


A OES A lal ε ’ ν Ἁ Ν. Ν 
THY και ἀποδιδῶται TOV €UPOVTOS, OUT@M Και TOV TOVY Pov 


25 φίλον, ὅταν ἐξῇ τὸ πλεῖον τῆς ἀξίας λαβεῖν, ἐπαγωγὸν ἢ 


ἀποδίδοσθαι. 


Ἂς \ Ν » > v4 ’ 
τοὺς δὲ χρηστοὺς οὔτε οἰκέτας πάνυ τι 


πωλουμένους ὁρῶ οὔτε φίλους προδιδομένους." 


Ἐδόκει δέ μοι καὶ εἰς τὸ δοκιμάζειν φίλους, ὁποίους 6 


ἄξιον κτᾶσθαι, φρενοῦν τοιάδε λέγων: “Εἰπέ pou,” ἔφη, “ὦ 


Κριτόβουλε, εἰ δεοίμεθα φίλου ἀγαθοῦ, πῶς ἂν ἐπιχει- 


ροίημεν σκοπεῖν ; apa πρῶτον μὲν ζητητέον, ὅστις ἄρχει 


, A Y A , A ν ἈΝ 
α at φιλοποσίας καὶ λαγνείας καὶ ὑπνου καὶ 
δγαστρός τε καὶ λοποσίας ὑ λαγνε ς καὶ 


9 ΄ὕ ε \ e ἃς , , ee Cee an 
apyltas; oO yap UTO TOUT@V Κρατουμένος OUT AUTOS EAUTWM 


4 9 «ἃ » Ἃ Ν Fe 4 3) 
δύναιτ αν OUTE φίλῳ Ta δέοντα πράττειν. 


Ν 43> 
“Ma AZ, ov. 


ὃ A ψ 4. »¥ ς O 3 A ἴω Ν ε Ἂς 4 3 ’ 39 
nTa, ἔφη. ὑκοῦν τοῦ μὲν ὑπὸ τούτων ἀρχομένου ἀφεκ- 


’ A 3 3) 
τέον δοκεῖ σοι εἶναι ; 


Cf. εἰ τοίνυν τὸν 
νόμον τὸν καθεστηκότα δέδοικας, μὴ ὄνει- 
δός σοι γένηται Plato Phaedr. 251 π. 
-πωλῇ: wants to sell.—rod εὑρόν- 
τος: for what he will bring. Cf. 


πόσον ἂν ole εὑρεῖν τὰ σὰ κτήματα πω- 


τὰ τοιαῦτα πάντα. 


λούμενα Oec. ii. 3, and τοῦ εὑρίσκοντος 
Aesch. contra Timarch. 96. — ἔπαγω- 
γόν : atemptation. —wdavv τι : at all, 
when joined with a negation. 

6. Before choosing a man as 
friend, we should find out what 
he is, and how he treated his former 
associates: and if we still desire 
his friendship, the approval of the 
gods should be sought. He is then 
to be won by kind words and 
deeds; and only good men, who can 
add something to friendship, win 
friends. And although jealousy and 
strife arise even among such, still the 
virtue common to them all helps to 
reconcile and re-unite them. Sensual 
motives should have no place in form- 


“Πάνυ μὲν ovr,” ἔφη. 


«πήγάρ;" 


ing a friendship. Its best motive is 
found in our wish to further the noble 
aims of another, and to rejoice with 
him in their attainment. All pretense 
is of course to be eschewed; and we 
should strive to be just what we wish 
to seem to our friends. 

1. els τὸ δοκιμάζειν : with regard 
to judging, to be connected with φρε- 
νοῦν. --- ἄξιον : sc. ἐστί. --- hpevoiv (sc. 
τοὺς συνουσιαστάς): to give good advice 
to. —KpiréBovde: see on i. 3. 8.— 
dpa: like the Lat. ne, leaves it to 
the person addressed to determine 
the nature ofthe answer. Evidently 
Socrates expects an affirmative an- 
swer: and his use of apa instead of dpa 
οὐ (nonne) is simply courtesy of ex- 
pression. So iniii.2.1. See G. 1603; 
H. 1015. — od δῆτα: the neg. assents 
to the statement in the preceding 
sent., as if that had been a question. 

2. τί γάρ: ‘well, then,’’ used in 
lively transition. Less animated is 


106 EENO®QNTOS AILTOMNHMONEYMATA 


B. 6. 


» reek ὦ ὃ \ x \ 5 ’ : ’ ἀλλ᾽ >. Ἃ, A 
10 ἔφη, “ ὅστις δαπανηρὸς ὧν μὴ αὐτάρκης ἐστίν, ἀλλ᾽ ἀεὶ TOV 
- aA Ἂς ’ὔ A Ν 4 > ᾽ 
πλησίον δεῖται, καὶ λαμβάνων μὲν μὴ δύναται ἀποδιδό- 
Ν ’, Ν Ν ἈΝ , A 3 “ 
ναι, μὴ λαμβάνων δὲ τὸν μὴ διδόντα μισεῖ, οὐ δοκεῖ σοι 
“Πάνυ ye,” ἔφη. 


καὶ οὗτος χαλεπὸς φίλος εἶναι ;᾽ 
)] 


ἴω > 7 Ν 4 ε 3 , ld 
“Οὐκοῦν ἀφεκτέον καὶ τούτου; “ Adexréov pevTou,” 


15 ἔφη. 
λῶν δὲ χρημάτων ἐπιθυμεῖ, καὶ διὰ τοῦτο δυσσύμβολός 


“Τί γάρ; ὅστις χρηματίζεσθαι μὲν δύναται, πολ- 


ἐστι, καὶ λαμβάνων μὲν ἥδεται, ἀποδιδόναι δὲ μὴ βούλε- 
.} «ς τὰ ἣν Ἂς \ ὃ may) » (<4 <i » ’ 

ται; μοὶ μὲν δοκεῖ," ἔφη, “οὗτος ἔτι πονηρότερος 

ἐκείνου εἶναι. “Τί δέ; ὅστις διὰ τὸν ἔρωτα τοῦ χρη- 

20 ματίζεσθαι μηδὲ πρὸς ἕν ἄλλο σχολὴν ποιεῖται ἢ ὁπόθεν 

> “"Adexréov καὶ τούτου, ὡς ἐμοὶ 


“Τί δέ; 
ὅστις στασιώδης τέ ἐστι καὶ θέλων πολλοὺς τοῖς φίλοις 


3 / a _F 
αὐτός τι κερδανεῖ; 
A 3 Ν Ν x » ᾽Ν 4 39 
δοκεῖ: ἀνωφελὴς γὰρ av εἴη τῷ χρωμένῳ. 
ἐχθροὺς παρέχειν ;” “Φευκτέον νὴ Δία καὶ τοῦτον." “Εἰ 
25 δέ τις τούτων μὲν τῶν κακῶν μηδὲν ἔχοι, εὖ δὲ πάσχων 
“Ἂν- 
Γ aA ~~ 
ὠφελὴς av εἴη Kat οὗτος. ἀλλὰ ποῖον, ὦ Σώκρατες, 


9 ᾽’ Ν ’ ἴω 3 “A 3) 
ἀνέχεται, μηδὲν φροντίζων τοῦ AQVTEVEPYETELD ; 


the ri δέ in 4. — rv πλησίον δεῖται: 
‘tis borrowing’’ from his neighbors. 
For δέομαι with the gen. alone instead 
of gen. of pers. and acc. of thing, see 
Kr. Spr. 47. 16. 7. The ellipsis is 
common in Eng., e.g., ‘Give to him 
that asketh thee, and from him 
that would borrow of thee turn not 
thou away.’ — μέντοι : vero. 

3. δυσσύμβολος : hard to get on 
with. Cf. Plato Rep. 486 5. --- λαμ- 
Bavev ἥδεται: is glad to get. — ἐμοὶ 
μὲν δοκεῖ: like ἐμοὶ μὲν ἐδόκει i. 2. 
62. 

4. σχολὴν ποιεῖται : finds leisure. 
— 7 ὁπόθεν KepSavet: than the occu- 
pation from which he hopes to gain. 


-- παρέχειν : to raise up. — κακῶν: 
bad qualities. — εἰ ἔχοι, ἀνέχεται : the 
opt. supposes a case, the indic. then 
assumes it as real. 
χάνει in 5. 


So εἴη, τυγ- 
Cf. εἰ δέ τις τὸ παραυτίκα 
μὲν μὴ ἐθέλοι ξυμπλεῖν, μετέχειν δὲ βού- 
λεται τῆς ἀποικίας but suppose a man 
should not care to sail at once (with 
the expedition) and yet desires a share 
in the colony Thuc. i. 27. For the 
indic. in first place, cf. εἰ διαβέβληνται, 
εἰ φόβοιντο Plato Phaedo 67 Ε. --- εὖ 
πάσχων ἀνέχεται : lets himself receive 
favors. See on λαμβάνων 8. ἀνέχε- 
ται (lit. endures) is ironical. Cf. ἀν- 
εξόμεθα ὑπὸ σοῦ εὐεργετούμενοι Cyr. V. 1. 
26. 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA II. 6. 107 


9 ͵ / A Ih 4 ἐς — , ἃ x 5 
ἐπιχειρήσομεν φίλον ποιεῖσθαι ;” “Οἶμαι μέν, ὃς ἂν Tavar- 
τία τούτων ἐγκρατὴς μὲν ἢ τῶν διὰ τοῦ σώματος ἡδονῶν, 
80 εὔνους δὲ καὶ εὐσύμβολος ὧν τυγχάνῃ καὶ φιλόνεικος 
πρὸς τὸ μὴ ἐλλείπεσθαι εὖ ποιῶν τοὺς εὐεργετοῦντας 
; Eee Φ λ X A a , ” “TT al 5 
αὐτόν, ὥστε λυσιτελεῖν τοῖς χρωμένοις. ῶς οὖν 
dv ταῦτα δοκιμάσαιμεν, ὦ Σώκρατες, πρὸ τοῦ χρῆσθαι; 
“Τοὺς μὲν ἀνδριαντοποιούς,᾽ ἔφη, “ δοκιμάζομεν οὐ τοῖς 
lal ἃ ἴω, 
35 λόγοις αὐτῶν τεκμαιρόμενοι, ἀλλ᾽ ὃν ἂν ὁρῶμεν τοὺς πρό- 
σθεν ἀνδριάντας καλῶς εἰργασμένον, τούτῳ πιστεύομεν 
Ν ἈΝ \ > ’ὕ ᾽) ςς Ν ἮΝ ὃ δὴ ld ” 
καὶ τοὺς λοιποὺς εὖ ποιήσειν. Καὶ avdpa δὴ λέγεις, 
» ἐξ A. RK Ν ir Ν ΄, θ > τὸν f. 
ey, “ ὃς ἄν τοὺς φίλους τοὺς πρόσθεν εὖ ποιῶν φαίνηται, 
δῆλον εἶναι καὶ τοὺς ὕστερον εὐεργετήσοντα ;" “Καὶ γὰρ 
4«0ζ ΒΟ. ς-ς ἃ x e A A , θ λῶ ’ 
40 ἵπποις, ἔφη, “ὃν av ὁρῶ τοῖς πρόσθεν καλῶς χρώμενον, 
“Kiev,” ἔφη 
“ὃς δ᾽ dv ἡμῖν ἄξιος φιλίας δοκῇ εἶναι, πῶς χρὴ φίλον 
τοῦτον ποιεῖσθαι ;” 


τοῦτον κἂν ἄλλοις οἶμαι καλῶς χρῆσθαι." 


( a PRR ees 3 Ge ES Ν lal 
Πρῶτον μέν, ἔφη, “τὰ Tapa τῶν 


5. οἶμαι μέν : for μέν, see oni. 1. 
1. — - -τἀναντία τούτων : as ini. 2. 60. 
- τῶν διὰ τοῦ σώματος ἡδονῶν: cf. 
τῶν διὰ στόματος ἡδέων i. 4.5. Plato 
also (Rep. 828 p) has the expression 
ai κατὰ τὸ σῶμα ἡδοναί, which Aris- 
totle (Eth. Nic. vii. 8. 4) condenses 
Cf. also τῶν 
περὶ τὸ σῶμα ἡδονῶν Hell. vi. τ. 16. — 
εὔνους : the appropriate contrast to 
the quality described in 2 (ὅστις... 
μισεῖ). --- ἐλλείπεσθαι : middle. — 
ποιῶν : Supplementary participle, as 
in ii, 4. 7. — τοῖς χρωμένοις: his 
friends. 

6. ταῦτα: the qualities mentioned 
in 5. — πρὸ τοῦ χρῆσθαι : ‘* before we 
have tested them by experience.’’ — 
τούτῳ πιστεύομεν ποιήσειν : for the 
omission of the subj. of the inf. when 


into σωματικαὶ ἡδοναί. 


it is the same as the obj. of the main 
verb, see G. 895, 2; H. 941, and cf. 
τί οὖν ‘Ounpw οὐ πιστεύεις καλῶς λέγειν 
Plato Charm. 161 a. 

7. καὶ δή : so also. —avipa δῆλον 
εἶναι εὐεργετήσοντα : for the pers. 
const. with δῆλός εἰμι, see oni. 1. 2. 
- -ἴπποις : emphatic position. — ὁρῶ : 
equivalent to οἶδα. ---- χρώμενον: repre- 
sents an impf. indic. in direct dis- 
course. Cf. οἶδα δὲ κἀκείνω σωφρονοῦντε 
ἔστε Σωκράτει συνήστην i. 2.18. The 
context must determine whether 
the participle is pres. or imperfect. 
See GMT. 140, 119; H. 982. --- κἄν: 
equivalent to καὶ ἄν. 

8. elev: very well, introduces a 
transition. —Td παρὰ, τῶν θεῶν : the 
advice of the gods, to be obtained 
through divination. See oni. 1. 3. 


45 σθαι." 


108 


ΞΕΝΟΦΩ͂ΝΤΟΣ ATLOMNHMONEYMATA Β. 6. 


ἴω 3 ἢ > 4, Ψ ἃ / A 
θεῶν ἐπισκεπτέον, εἰ συμβουλεύουσιν αὐτὸν φίλον ποιεῖ- 


> 3) » ay x “A ~ 
“Ti obv;” ἔφη, “dv ἂν ἡμῖν τε δοκῇ καὶ οἱ θεοὶ μὴ 


3 a x 4. τος ἣν a) θ , > ¢¢ \ 7999 
ἐναντιωνταῖι, EXELS ELTELY ὁπως οὗτος UNpaTeos ; Μα Δι, 


» ς 9 \ , ν ε ᾽’ὔ 3 5.5 , ν ε 
ἔφη, “ov κατὰ πόδας, ὥσπερ ὁ λαγώς, οὐδ᾽ ἀπάτῃ, ὥσπερ at 
»” SQA , ν e 3 ᾽ὔὕ » Ν , 
ὄρνιθες, οὐδὲ Bia, ὥσπερ ot ἐχθροί: ἄκοντα γὰρ φίλον 
‘e ω ΕῚ lal Ν ἣν Ν , , ν 
ἐλεῖν ἐργῶδες ᾿ χαλεπὸν δὲ καὶ δήσαντα κατέχειν, ὠσπερ 


50 δοῦλον: ἐχθροὶ γὰρ μᾶλλον ἢ φίλοι γίγνονται οἱ ταῦτα 


πάσχοντες." “ Φίλοι δὲ πῶς ;" ἔφη. 


> , 
“ Kivau μέν τινάς τὸ 


3 , ἃ ε 3 ’, 3 / Ὁ x 
φασιν ἐπῳδάς, ας OL ἐπισταμενοι ἐπάδοντες OLS αν 


βούλωνται φίλους αὐτοὺς ποιοῦνται, εἶναι δὲ καὶ φίλτρα, 


a eo , N a Ἃ , , 
ois οἱ ἐπιστάμενοι πρὸς ovs av βούλωνται γρώμενοι 
55 φιλοῦνται ὑπ᾽ αὐτῶν." “Πόθεν οὖν," ἔφη, “ταῦτα μάθοιμεν 11 


¥ ” 
αν; 


a \ e A Pes A> ἄν ἣν 
““A μὲν αἱ Σειρῆνες ἐπῆδον τῷ ᾿Οδυσσεῖ, ἤκουσας 


ε 4 & 3 > \ , 
Ομήρου, ὧν ἐστιν ἀρχὴ τοιάδε τις" 


‘Acdp’ aye δὴ πολύαιν᾽ ᾿οδυσεῦ, μέγα κῦδος ᾿Αχαιῶν. ” 


--- εἰ συμβουλεύουσιν: indir. ques- 
tion, explaining τὰ παρὰ τῶν θεῶν. 
See on i. 5. 1. — Ov ἂν ἡμῖν τε δοκῇ: 
sc. φίλον ποιεῖσθαι. --- ὅπως : how. 

9. μὰ Δία: introduces a neg. 
statement, but does not answer ἔχεις 
negatively. — κατὰ πόδας: Cursu, 
by chasing them. Cf. iii. 11.8; Cyr. 
i. 6. 40; Cyn. v. 29. — ὥσπερ οἱ ἐχ- 
θροί: we might expect another ani- 
mal in the third place, as κάπροι 
(suggested by Ernesti). Perhaps οἱ 
ἐχθροί has strayed back from the fol- 
lowing sentence. ἐχθρός and πολέμιος 
are properly distinguished, like ini- 
micus and hostis in Latin; but 
occasionally confused, as here. Cf. 
oi πατέρες ἡμῶν τὸν Μῆδον ἐχθρὸν ἔχον- 
tes Thuc. Vi. 17. 

10. érwSds, φίλτρα: 86 8, 
charms. Cf. iii. 2.6; Plato Charm. 


157 Α. ---πάδοντες : cf. χρὴ τὰ τοιαῦτα 
ὥσπερ ἐπᾷάδειν ἑαυτῷ Plato Phaedo 
114 ν. ---- οἷς av: for τούτοις, οἷς dv. — 
φιλοῦνται ὑπ᾽ αὐτῶν: ‘gain their 
affection.’ 

11. ἃ μὲν αἱ Σειρῆνες ἐπῇδον : ΟἿ. 
‘what songs the Syrens sang, or what 
name Achilles assumed when he hid 
himself among the women, though 
puzzling questions, are not beyond 
conjecture.’ Sir Thomas Browne, 
Urn Burial, c. iv. Acc. to Homer, 
there were two Sirens, whose song 
is given, μ 184-191. Later writers 


name three, Ligeia, Leucosia, Par- 


thenope (or Aglaopheme, Molpe, 
Thelxiepeia). For a fuller account, 
see Seyffert, Dict. Class. Antigq., 8.v. 
Sirens. — τοιάδε τις : as in i. 1. 1. — 
Seip ἄγε δὴ κτλ.: cf. Hom. μ 184, 
where the verse begins δεῦρ᾽ dy’ ἰών. 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA IL. 6. 


109 


$ Re Wy \ oy A 
“Ταύτην οὖν," ἔφη, “τὴν ἐπῳδήν, ὦ Σώκρατες, Kal τοῖς 


¥ 9 ΄ ε A Pian ἢ A Y \ 
60 ἄλλοις ἀνθρώποις ai Σειρῆνες ἐπάδουσαι κατεῖχον, ὥστε μὴ 


3 / ae + ea Ν 3 θ [4 Σ ἐς ἊΡ 3 Ν A 2: 2 
ἀπιέναι ἀπ᾿ αὑτῶν τοὺς ἐπᾳσθέντας; “Οὐκ, ἀλλὰ τοῖς ἐπ 


9 wn , εὖ 3 ΝᾺ 3) 
ἀρετῇ φιλοτιμουμένοις οὕτως ἐπῇδον. 


“Σχεδόν τι λέγεις 12 


lal A e 4 2 4 e \ m~ , 8 ΓΙ NX 
τοιαῦτα χρῆναι ἑκάστῳ ἐπάδειν οἷα μὴ νομιεῖ ἀκούων τὸν 


ἐπαινοῦντα καταγελῶντα λέγειν. 


ν \ Ν 3 ’ 
οὕτω [LEV γὰρ ἐχθίων 


> RK » X39 4 ‘ > , 3 > e ἴω 3 Ν 
65T ἂν εἴη καὶ ἀπελαύνοι τοὺς ἀνθρώπους ad’ ἑαυτοῦ, εἰ τὸν 


> ’ὔ 4 4 ἃ 3 Ν \ 3 ᾽’ 3 
εἰδότα OTL μικρος TE και αισχβος και ἀσθενής εστιν 


3 id , 4 4, Ν , ba , 3 
ἐπαινοΐη λέγων OTL καλός τε καὶ μέγας καὶ ἰσχυρός ἐστιν. 


ἄλλας δέτινας οἶσθα ἐπῳδάς ;” 


“Οὔκ, ἀλλ᾽ ἤκουσα μὲν 18 


Y ἃ ’ “ 
ὅτι Περικλῆς πολλὰς ἐπίσταιτο, ἃς ἐπάδων τῇ πόλει ἐποίει 


A 9 
70 αὐτὴν φιλεῖν αὑτόν. 


- οὔκ : for the accent, see G. 138,1 ; 
Η. 112 8. ---- τοῖς ἐπ᾽ ἀρετῇ φιλοτιμου- 
μένοις : Chose who prided themselves on 
their valor. 

12. σχεδόν τι τοιαῦτα: talia 
fere. —ota μὴ νομιεῖ κτλ.: quae si 
audiat, a laudatore irridendi 
causa dici non existimabit. 
For μή with the fut. indic. in clauses 
of result, see G. 1447; H. 1021 b. 
For the ‘ Attic’ fut. (νομιεῖ), see on 
li. 1. 24. ---ἐχθίων : hated rather (than 
a friend). The subj. of εἴη is, of 
course, the person who seeks to make 
friends. — ἀπελαύνοι : sc. ἄν. --- εἰ 
ἐπαινοίη : explains οὕτω. 

13. οὔκ: see on 1]. --- μέν : fol- 
lowed by no correlative ; cf. πρῶτον 
μέν in 8, and ἃ μέν in 11. In this 
usage, it is a weak form of μήν 
indeed, truly. Kr. Spr. 69. 85. 1. — 
Περικλῆς : the most illustrious of 
Athenian statesmen, to whose wise 
and consistent policy Athens owed her 
growth to imperial power in the πεν- 
τηκονταετία or half-century between 


“ Θεμιστοκλῆς δὲ πῶς ἐποίησε τὴν 


the Persian and the Peloponnesian 
wars. Cf. Thuc. i. 89-118. — ἐποίει : 
for dependent secondary tenses of 
the indic. in indirect discourse, see G, 
1497, 2; H. 931. — Θεμιστοκλῆς : the 
famous leader of the Greeks at the 
battle of Salamis (480 B.c.). Foran 
account of his brilliant and success- 
ful leadership on that occasion, see 
Hat. viii. 56 ff., and, for later events 
in his checkered career, Thuc. i. 
136-138. Pericles owed his fame 
and influence chiefly to the magic of 
his eloquence, while Themistocles 
became the popular favorite by his 
deeds. Cf. iv. 2.2. That the Xen- 
ophontic Socrates had no intention of 
detracting from the glory of Pericles’s 
services may be seen from Sym. viii. 
39, σκεπτέον μέν σοι ποῖα ἐπιστάμενος 
Θεμιστοκλῆς ἱκανὸς ἐγένετο τὴν Ἑλλάδα 
σκεπτέον δὲ ποῖά ποτε 


ἐλευθεροῦν, 


εἰδὼς Περικλῆς κράτιστος ἐδόκει τῇ 
πατρίδι σύμβουλος εἶναι, ἀθρητέον δὲ 
Σόλων φιλοσοφήσας 


νόμους κρατίστους τῇ πόλει κατέθηκε --- 


καὶ πῶς ποτε 


110 EENO®QNTOS AITOMNHMONEYMATA BB. 6. 


πόλιν φιλεῖν αὑτόν; “Ma Δί᾽ οὐκ ἐπάδων, ἀλλὰ περι- 
άψας τι ἀγαθὸν αὐτῇ." “ Δοκεῖς μοι λέγειν, ὦ Σώκρατες, τά 
ε 3 , > w, , 7 > ᾷ 
ὡς εἰ μέλλοιμεν ἀγαθόν τινα κτήσεσθαι φίλον, αὐτοὺς 
ε A 3 Ἂς “Ὁ ΄, ’ Ἁ “4 ” ςς \ 
ἡμᾶς ἀγαθοὺς Set γενέσθαι λέγειν τε Kal πράττειν." “Σὺ 
75 δὲ Ἂν ” »¥ ε Σ , eee A 3 εἶ ὶ Ν » 
€ mov, ἔφη ὁ Σωκράτης, “ οἷόν T εἶναι καὶ πονηρὸν ὄντα 
χρηστοὺς φίλους κτήσασθαι; ““Edpwv yap,” ἔφη 615 
Κριτόβουλος, “ῥήτοράς τε φαύλους ἀγαθοῖς δημηγόροις 
φίλους ὄντας, καὶ στρατηγεῖν οὐχ ἱκανοὺς πάνυ στρατη- 


({ 


γικοῖς ἀνδράσιν ἑταίρους." “ἦΑρ᾽ οὖν, ἔφη, “Kal, περὶ 16 
80 οὗ διαλεγόμεθα, οἶσθά τινας ot ἀνωφελεῖς ὄντες ὠφελίμους 
Ἂν ’᾿ 9 Aa 39> ἫΝ 
“Ma Δί᾽ od δητ᾽, ἔφη: 
2D εἰ BSC ee % Se \ er N 
ἀλλ᾽ εἰ ἀδύνατόν ἐστι πονηρὸν ὄντα καλοὺς καὶ ἀγαθοὺς 


δύνανται φίλους ποιεῖσθαι; 


,ὕ 4 5 A » - > » >] X 
φίλους κτήσασθαι, ἐκεῖνο ἤδη μέλει μοι, εἰ ἔστιν αὐτὸν 
Ν 53 Ν ’ 5 e 4 A A 5 ῆἣ 
καλὸν κἀγαθὸν γενόμενον ἐξ ἑτοίμου τοῖς καλοῖς κάγα- 
85 θοῖς φίλον εἶναι." 
, » Ἁ A Ἀ ’ Ἁ aw 5 aA 
πολλάκις ἄνδρας καὶ τὰ καλὰ πράττοντας καὶ τῶν αἰσχρῶν 


«ὃ 


Ο ταράττει σε, ὦ Κριτόβουλε, ὅτι 11 


where the thought is, that The- 
mistocles was great in action, Peri- 
cles in counsel, Solon in legislation. 
Here, Socrates is emphasizing the ne- 
cessity of supplementing words with 
deeds. Both are essential to the win- 
ning of a worthy man’s friendship. 
14. εἰ μέλλοιμεν, Set γενέσθαι : 77 
we would succeed, we must become. 
The apod. to such a prot. as εἰ 
μέλλοιμι generally contains an idea 


of obligation, expressed by δεῖν or 


δεῖσθαι, as here, or by a verbal in -τέον. 
Cf. An. iii. 3. 16, Hell. iv. ὃ. 5.— 
λέγειν τε Kal πράττειν : these words 
may, as some editors think, refer to 
the eloquence of Pericles and the 
deeds of Themistocles; but the 
phrase is a common one, and serves 
to round the period. —ovd δ᾽ gov: 


see on τοὺς δὲ καλούς i. 3. 13. — kal: 
even. 
15. ἑώρων γάρ: for γάρ, see on 
a; 8. 

16. καί: also, belongs to οἶσθά 
τινας. --- περὶ ov διαλεγόμεθα : which 
is the point under discussion. ‘* Poor 
speakers and good ones may indeed 
find friends etc. ; it does not there- 
fore follow that men who are wholly 
worthless can win friends: and that 
is the point at issue.’’ —fAovs (after 
ἀγαθούς) : pred. acc.,. for friends, — 
ἐκεῖνο : that point, like Lat. illud, 
refers with emphasis to what fol- 
lows. —el ἔστιν : whether it is pos- 
sible. —@ ἑτοίμου : readily. Cf. ex 
facili Tacitus Agric. 15. 

17. ὃ ταράττει σε (sc. τοῦτό ἐστιν), 
ὅτι : what puzzles you is the fact that. 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA II. 6. 111 


9 , δ, ΣΝ eae, κ᾿ , > , 
ἀπεχομένους ὁρᾷς ἀντὶ τοῦ φίλους εἶναι στασιάζοντας 
> ’ Ν ’ὔ ld “ Ν > Ya 
ἀλλήλοις Kal χαλεπώτερον χρωμένους τῶν μηδενὸς ἀξίων 
ἀνθρώπων." “Kat οὐ μόνον y’,” ἔφη ὁ Κριτόβουλος, “ οἱ 18 
3 “ “ A > Ν Ν / ε A aA 
90 ἰδιῶται τοῦτο ποιοῦσιν, ἀλλὰ καὶ πόλεις al τῶν TE καλῶν 
: ν 
μάλιστα ἐπιμελόμεναι καὶ τὰ αἰσχρὰ ἥκιστα προσιέμεναι 
πολλάκις πολεμικῶς ἔχουσι πρὸς ἀλλήλας. a λογιζό- 19 
μενος πάνυ ἀθύμως ἔχω πρὸς τὴν τῶν φίλων κτῆσιν' 
¥ A ‘ Ν ε a ’ὔ 3 / , 
οὔτε γὰρ τοὺς πονηροὺς ὁρῶ φίλους ἀλλήλοις δυναμένους 
> A Ν xd a .9 , a A x / x 
9 εἰναι" πῶς yap ἂν ἢ ἀχάριστοι ἢ ἀμελεῖς 1 πλεονέκται 1 
¥ x > A ¥ 4, / ld 
ἄπιστοι ἢ ἀκρατεῖς ἄνθρωποι δύναιντο φίλοι γενέσθαι; 
ol μὲν οὖν πονηροὶ πάντως ἔμοιγε δοκοῦσιν ἀλλήλοις 
“Ὁ ῳ 
ἐχθροὶ μᾶλλον ἢ φίλοι πεφυκέναι. ἀλλὰ μήν, ὥσπερ σὺ 30 
x A A 
λέγεις, οὐδ᾽ dv τοῖς χρηστοῖς οἱ πονηροί ποτε συναρμό- 
100 σειαν εἰς φιλίαν: πῶς γὰρ οἱ τὰ πονηρὰ ποιοῦντες τοῖς 
Ν A fa) / , > » 3 \ % \ e 
τὰ τοιαῦτα μισοῦσι φίλοι γένοιντ᾽ av; εἶ δὲ δὴ καὶ οἱ 
ἀρετὴν ἀσκοῦντες στασιάζουσί τε περὶ τοῦ πρωτεύειν ἐν 
A , . nw ε A nw Ss 4 
ταῖς πόλεσι καὶ φθονοῦντες ἑαυτοῖς μισοῦσιν ἀλλήλους, 
, ¥ , ¥ \ 9 ΄ > , ¥ \ 
τίνες ἔτι φίλοι ἔσονται Kat ἐν τίσιν ἀνθρώποις εὔνοια Kal. 
105 πίστις ἔσται; “᾿Αλλ᾽ ἔχει μέν, ἔφη ὁ Σωκράτης, “ ποικί- 21 


a) 53 
hws πως ταῦτα, ὦ Κριτόβουλε. φύσει γὰρ ἔχουσιν ot 


Cf.0 μὲν πάντων θαυμαστότατον ἀκοῦσαι, 
ὅτι ὧν ἐπῃνέσαμεν Plato Rep. 491 b.— 
χαλεπώτερον χρωμένους : 86. ἀλλήλοις. 

18. ἰδιῶται : ἱπαϊτυϊαιιαί8. ---- προσ- 
ιέμεναι ; admitting to themselves. 
Cf. ἐγὼ γὰρ κακὸν οὐδὲν οὐδ᾽ αἰσχρὸν 
προσήσομαι Cyr, vii. 1. 13. — πολε- 
μικῶς: hostiliter. 

19. οὔτε yap: not followed by a 
correlative οὔτε, an _ irregularity 
easily explained by the vivacity of 
the conversation. Instead of a 
second οὔτε, we have (in 20) ἀλλὰ 
μὴν οὐδ᾽ ἄν, and, instead of a third 


οὔτε, the clauses beginning εἰ δὲ δή. 
— πεφυκέναι : to be by nature. 

20. εἰ δὲ. .. στασιάζουσι, καὶ 
μισοῦσιν : the third and strongest 
ground for Critobulus’s discourage- 
ment. The cond. is assumed as 
real, if, as you say. —éavrots: for 
ἀλλήλοις, the refl. for the reciprocal. 
G. 996; H. 686 b. So in iii. 5. 16, 
where, as here, ἀλλήλοις immediately 
follows. — τίνες €ru: who then.— 
ἔσται: will abide. 

21. ἔχει μὲν ποικίλως πως ταῦτα: 
these things (love and hate) have 


112 


BENO®ONTOS ATLOMNHMONEYMATA Β. 6. 


ἄνθρωποι τὰ μὲν φιλικά: δέονταί τε yap ἀλλήλων καὶ 


ww A wn 9 wn A nw 
ἐλεοῦσι Kal συνεργοῦντες ὠφελοῦσι καὶ τοῦτο συνιέντες 


, » 3 la \ Ν , 4 Ν ee 
χάριν ἔχουσιν ἀλλήλοις τὰ δὲ πολεμικά τά TE yap αὐτὰ 


γνωμονοῦντες ἐναντιοῦνται. 


λ \ N οὃ ld 4 ε \ 4 ’, Ν 
110 καλὰ καὶ ἡδέα νομίζοντες ὑπὲρ τούτων μάχονται καὶ διχο- 


Ν \ Ἀ » Ν 
πολεμικὸν δὲ καὶ ἔρις καὶ 


ἣν Ν A A 
épyy: καὶ δυσμενὲς μὲν ὁ τοῦ πλεονεκτεῖν ἔρως, μισητὸν 


δὲ ὁ φθόνος. 


΄ ’ x 4 > 0 
διαδυομένη συνάπτει τους καλούς TE κἀγαθούς. 


ἀλλ᾽ ὅμως διὰ τούτων πάντων ἡ φιλία 22 


διὰ γὰρ 


\ XN la \ ¥ ἴω, 
115 τὴν ἀρετὴν αἱροῦνται μὲν ἄνευ πόνου τὰ μέτρια κεκτῆσθαι 


arr x ὃ \ λέ ’ , Ν δύ 
μα OV 1) la oO εμου TOAVTWV KUPLEVELY, και υνανταυ 


Lal A “w 3 Ἂ A ἐ La) la) 
πεινῶντες Kal διψῶντες ἀλύπως σίτου Kal ποτοῦ κοινωνεῖν 


ἃ “ ~ ε / > ‘4 e / 3 “Ὁ 
καὶ τοῖς τῶν ὡραίων ἀφροδισίοις ἡδόμενοι ἐγκαρτερεῖν, 


ν Ν A ἃ Ν V4 4 \ Ν 
ὥστε μὴ λυπεῖν OVS μὴ προσήκει" δύνανται δὲ καὶ XPN- 28 


’ ‘al A 
Ἰ2ομάτων ov μόνον τοῦ πλεονεκτεῖν ἀπεχόμενοι νομίμως 


κοινωνεῖν, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἐπαρκεῖν ἀλλήλοις: δύνανται δὲ 


\ \ » 3 "4 > 4 > Ν Ν l4 
Kal τὴν ἔριν ov μόνον ἀλύπως, ἀλλὰ καὶ συμφερόντως 


ἀλλήλοις διατίθεσθαι καὶ τὴν ὀργὴν κωλύειν εἰς τὸ 


μεταμελησόμενον προϊέναι. 


somewhat complicated relations. — τὰ, 
φιλικά: dispositions toward friend- 
ship. — πολεμικόν : see On χρησιμώ- 
τερον li. 3. 1. --- δυσμενές : an element 
of discord. —prontov δὲ ὁ φθόνος: 
and envy leads to hate. The verbal 
in -rés, usually passive, has here an 
active meaning. 

22. GAN ὅμως : corresponds to 
μέν in 21. — διαδνομένη : slipping 
through. Cf. serpit enim nescio 
quo modo per omnium vitas 
amicitia Cic. de Am. xxiii. 87. — 
διὰ τὴν ἀρετήν : contrasted with 
φύσει 21. On the one hand, love 
and hate work as natural powers in 
men; on the other, the acquired and 
cultivated virtue in men controls 


Tov δὲ φθόνον παντάπασιν 


their lives as it will. —atpotvrar μέν : 
followed by καὶ δύνανται instead of 
δύνανται δέ, the καί strengthening the 
statement somewhat.— tots τῶν 
ὡραίων ἀφροδισίοις : see on i. 3. 8, 
10. — ἡδόμενοι : concessive. — ἔγκαρ- 
τερεῖν : to control their desires, not to 
be joined with ἡδόμενοι. 

23. ϑύνανται δὲ kal: see on ἀδικεῖ 
δὲ καί 1. 1. 1.— χρημάτων : gen. with 
κοινωνεῖν. ---- νομίμως : equivalent to 
δικαίως, keeping within the law. 
Cf. δίκαιος, wore βλάπτειν μὲν μηδὲ 
μικρὴν μηδένα κτλ., the closing 
words of the Memorabilia, iv. 8. 
11. — διατίθεσθαι : to adjust. — εἰς 
τὸ μεταμελησόμενον : to an extent 
which they would regret. — προϊέναι : 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA Il. 6. 118 


125 ἀφαιροῦσι, τὰ μὲν ἑαυτῶν ἀγαθὰ τοῖς φίλοις οἰκεῖα παρ- 
έχοντες, τὰ δὲ τῶν φίλων ἑαυτῶν νομίζοντες. πῶς οὖν οὐκ 24 
εἰκὸς τοὺς καλοὺς κἀγαθοὺς καὶ τῶν πολιτικῶν τιμῶν μὴ 
μόνον ἀβλαβεῖς, ἀλλὰ καὶ ὠφελίμους ἀλλήλοις κοινωνοὺς 
εἶναι; οἱ μὲν γὰρ ἐπιθυμοῦντες ἐν ταῖς πόλεσι τιμᾶσθαί τε 

\ ¥ ν 3 ’ » la , 4 \ 
130 καὶ ἄρχειν, ἵνα ἐξουσίαν ἔχωσι χρήματά τε κλέπτειν Kal 
> ’ὔ δ᾽ Ν ε “A ¥ ’ ἃ 
ἀνθρώπους βιάζεσθαι καὶ ἡδυπαθεῖν, ἀδικοί τε καὶ πονη- 
Ν ἃ ἘΣ \ LO 4 RA , > , 3 
pol ἂν εἶεν kal ἀδύνατοι ἄλλῳ συναρμόσαι. εἰ δέ τις ἐν 25 
’ A & 4 Ἂ΄. τς \ > “ 
πόλει τιμᾶσθαι βουλόμενος, ὅπως αὐτός τε μὴ ἀδικῆται 
ἃ A 
καὶ τοῖς φίλοις τὰ δίκαια βοηθεῖν δύνηται, καὶ ἄρξας 
185 ἀγαθόν τι ποιεῖν τὴν πατρίδα πειρᾶται, διὰ τί ὁ τοιοῦτος 
¥ x 
ἄλλῳ τοιούτῳ οὐκ ἂν δύναιτο συναρμόσαι; πότερον τοὺς 
’ὔ > A \ “ A > A -“ ’ 
φίλους ὠφελεῖν μετὰ τῶν καλῶν κἀγαθῶν ἧττον δυνή- 
x A 
σεται; ἢ τὴν πόλιν εὐεργετεῖν ἀδυνατώτερος ἔσται 
‘\ > ‘\ » ’ > ἣν Ν 3 A 
καλοὺς κἀγαθοὺς ἔχων συνεργούς; ἀλλὰ Kal ἐν τοῖς 26 
140 γυμνικοῖς ἀγῶσι δῆλόν ἐστιν ὅτι, εἰ ἐξὴν τοῖς κρατίστοις 
xX lal 
συνθεμένους ἐπὶ τοὺς χείρους ἰέναι, πάντας ἂν TOUS ἀγῶ- 
Ὅ ary Ν , NN © sy 
vas οὗτοι ἐνίκων Kal πάντα τὰ ἄθλα οὗτοι ἐλάμβανον. 
ἐπεὶ οὖν ἐκεῖ μὲν οὐκ ἐῶσι τοῦτο ποιεῖν, ἐν δὲ τοῖς πολιτι- 
“ 3 ω] ε Ν 3 ἃ Ψ 3 Ἂ 
κοῖς, ἐν οἷς οἱ καλοὶ κἀγαθοὶ κρατιστεύουσιν, οὐδεὶς 
a » A 
145 κωλύει μεθ᾽ ov av tis βούληται τὴν πόλιν εὐεργετεῖν, 
wn 9 A Ν 4 P ’ 
πῶς οὐ λυσιτελεῖ τοὺς βελτίστους φίλους κτησάμενον 
on βουλεύσας i. 1. 18. ---- ἧττον δυνή- 
σεται, ἀδυνατώτερος ἔσται : rhetor- 
ical variation in expression. 
26. ἀλλὰ Kal: nay, even. — 


συνθεμένους : to agree and, 1.6. with 
united powers. For the acc., see 


for the inf. with verbs of prevent- 
ing, cf. i. 6. 6; ii. 1. 16. ---ἀφαι- 
ροῦσι : exclude. —Ta τῶν φίλων : their 
friends’ interests. —éavtav: posses- 
sive gen. as predicate. G. 1095; H. 
732 b. 


24. τιμῶν: depends on κοινωνούς. --- 
ὠφελίμους ἀλλήλοις : mutually service- 
able. — ἂν elev: potential optative. 

25. τοῖς φίλοις τὰ δίκαια βοηθεῖν : 
to assist his friends in what is right. 
—iaptas: having become archon. See 


G. 928, 2; H. 941. — ἀγῶνας ἐνίκων : 
for the cognate acc., see G. 1052; 
H. 716 a. — ἐκεῖ : 1.6. ἐν Tots γυμνικοῖς 
ἀγῶσι. ---- πολιτικοῖς : 86. ἀγῶσι. --- 
τὴν πόλιν εὐεργετεῖν : SC. μετὰ τούτου. 


--ο-λυσιτελεῖ : ᾿αγϑύ. --- κτησάμενον : 


114 EENOSQNTOS AITOMNHMONEYMATA BB. 6. 


πολιτεύεσθαι, τούτοις κοινωνοῖς Kal συνεργοῖς τῶν πράξεων 
μᾶλλον ἢ ἀνταγωνισταῖς χρώμενον; ἀλλὰ μὴν κἀκεῖνο 21 
δῆλον ὅτι, κἂν πολεμῇ τίς τινι, συμμάχων δεήσεται, καὶ 
lal A Ν 
160 τούτων πλειόνων ἐὰν καλοῖς κἀγαθοῖς ἀντιτάττηται. καὶ 
\ ε ‘ “A 5 7 Ss , ν 4 
μὴν ot συμμαχεῖν ἐθέλοντες εὖ ποιητέοι, ἵνα θέλωσι 
A \ \ A ἢ 4 3 / 
προθυμεῖσθαι: πολὺ δὲ κρεῖττον τοὺς βελτίστους ἐλάτ- 
Tovas εὖ ποιεῖν ἢ τοὺς χείρονας πλείονας ὄντας. οἱ γὰρ 
πονηροὶ πολὺ πλειόνων εὐεργεσιῶν ἢ οἱ χρηστοὶ δέον- 
1δὅται. ἀλλὰ θαρρῶν," ἔφη, “ ὦ Κριτόβουλε, πειρῶ ἀγαθὸς 28 
γίγνεσθαι, καὶ τοιοῦτος γενόμενος θηρᾶν ἐπιχείρει τοὺς 
4 > , » > » la 3 XN A 
καλούς Te κἀγαθούς. ἴσως δ᾽ av τί σοι κἀγὼ συλλαβεῖν 
ae \ κα κ᾿ oe A , ¥ \ Ν 
εἰς τὴν τῶν καλῶν τε κἀγαθῶν θήραν ἔχοιμι διὰ τὸ 
3 Ν > A Ν Ξ x 3 , 9 ’ὔ 
ἐρωτικὸς εἶναι: δεινῶς γὰρ ὧν ἂν ἐπιθυμήσω ἀνθρώπων 
ν “2 A 
160 ὅλος ὥρμημαι ἐπὶ TO φιλῶν τε αὐτοὺς ἀντιφιλεῖσθαι ὑπ᾽ 
αὐτῶν καὶ ποθῶν ἀντιποθεῖσθαι καὶ ἐπιθυμῶν συνεῖναι 
καὶ ἀντεπιθυμεῖσθαι τῆς συνουσίας. ὁρῶ δὲ καὶ σοὶ 29 
τούτων δεῆσον, ὅταν ἐπιθυμήσῃς φιλίαν πρός τινας ποι- 
A N > 9 , aq Ny , , 
εἶσθαι. μὴ οὖν ἀποκρύπτου με ois av βούλοιο φίλος 


see 0} ἑπτόμενον i. 3. 8. --- κοινωνοῖς : 
for the const., see on δούλοις ii. 
ak Νὴ 

27. ἀλλὰ μήν : but further. See 
on i. 1. 6. --- κἀκεῖνο : see on 16. — 
καὶ μήν: strong transition, and 
again. — ot συμμαχεῖν ἐθέλοντες KTH. : 
i.e. you must win not merely their 


par: I strive with all my being. — 
φιλῶν: diligendo. — καὶ ἀντεπιθυ- 
μεῖσθαι τῆς συνουσίας : and to have 
my companionship sought also in 
return, the obj. of the act. being 
retained with the passive. This un- 
usual const. is prob. due to the desire 
to continue the parallelism of the 


willingness, but also their readi- 
ness. Cf. i. 4. 18. --- κρεῖττον (sc. 
ἐστί) : better, i.e. more advantageous. 
-- ἐλάττονας : sc. ὄντας, concessive. 
28. ἀλλά: breaks off the argu- 
ment. —épy: he continued. —®npav : 
cf. 1. 2. 24, —8ta τὸ ἐρωτικὸς εἶναι : by 
being inclined to love. — ὧν ἄν: 
equivalent to ἐάν τινων. --- ὅλος ὥρμη- 


preceding clauses. 
29. τούτων: sc. Tod φιλεῖν, τοῦ 
ποθεῖν, τοῦ ἐπιθυμεῖν συνεῖναι. Crito- 
bulus also must win love by show- 
ing love. —Sefjorov: for the participle 
as a special form of antec. for a 
cond. rel. clause, see GMT. 552. — 
ἀποκρύπτου : for the double acc. with 
verbs of concealing, see G. 1069; 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA II. 6. 115 


166 γενέσθαι: διὰ yap τὸ ἐπιμελεῖσθαι τοῦ ἀρέσαι τῷ ἀρέ 
σκοντί μοι οὐκ ἀπείρως οἶμαι ἔχειν πρὸς θήραν ἀνθρώ- 
πων." καὶ ὁ Κριτόβουλος ἔφη “Καὶ μήν, ὦ Σώκρατες, 80 

΄, δὲν ἀν ὡς τὰν ΄, 9 ~ » Ἢ 
τούτων ἐγὼ τῶν μαθημάτων πάλαι ἐπιθυμῶ, ἄλλως τε καὶ 
> 5 ’, ε 9; % 3 7 ee ‘\ > ἈΝ ‘ 
εἰ ἐξαρκέσει μοι 7) αὐτὴ ἐπιστήμη ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀγαθοὺς Tas 
Ν bs Fea: aa ‘ Ν Ν ’ὔ’ ᾽) ὙΠ - ’ 

ττοψυχὰς καὶ ἐπὶ τοὺς καλοὺς τὰ σώματα." καὶ ὁ Σωκράτης 81 
ἔφη: “᾿Αλλ᾽, ὦ 
3 7 Ν Ν ~ 4 ~ ε ’ 
ἐπιστήμῃ τὸ τὰς χεῖρας προσφέροντα ποιεῖν ὑπομένειν 

Ν 4 ’ Ν ᾿ 3 Ν ~ 4 Ν 
τοὺς καλούς. πέπεισμαι δὲ καὶ ἀπὸ τῆς Σκύλλης διὰ 


’ > » 3 “ 3 ἴω 
Κριτόβουλε, οὐκ ἔνεστιν ἐν τῇ ἐμῇ 


τοῦτο φεύγειν τοὺς ἀνθρώπους, ὅτι τὰς χεῖρας αὐτοῖς 
, \ , A “ κ A 3 Ἢ 
175 προσέφερε: τὰς δέ γε Σειρῆνας, OTL TAS KELPAS οὐδενὶ 
ὔ > ἈΝ ~ , 3 no - \ 
προσέφερον ἀλλὰ πᾶσι πόρρωθεν ἐπῇδον, πάντας φασὶν 
ε ud XA. 3 # > “ al ” oe ’ 
ὑπομένειν καὶ ἀκούοντας αὐτῶν κηλεῖσθαι." καὶ ὁ Κριτό- 82 
» «et 5 4 Ν A » » 
βουλος ἔφη: “Ὡς οὐ προσοίσοντος τὰς χεῖρας, εἴ τι ἔχεις 
ἀγαθὸν εἰς φίλων κτῆσιν, δίδασκε. “Οὐδὲ τὸ στόμα 
> » »¥ ε ΄ « Ν Ν , , ” 
180 οὖν, ἔφη ὁ Σωκράτης, “πρὸς TO στόμα προσοίσεις; 
“Θάρρει," ἔφη ὁ Κριτόβουλος - “ οὐδὲ γὰρ τὸ στόμα πρὸς 
(ςς 9 ἘΞ Σ 
Εὐθύς, 
> # A , 
τοὐναντίον τοῦ συμφέροντος 


Ν , ΄ > Yami | \ x ey 
τὸ στόμα προσοίσω οὐδενί, ἐὰν μὴ καλὸς ἡ. 
ἔφη, “σύ γε, ὦ Κριτόβουλε, 
εἴρηκας: οἱ μὲν γὰρ καλοὶ τὰ τοιαῦτα οὐχ ὑπομένουσιν, 


H. 124. ----οὐκ ἀπείρως ἔχειν : I have --- Σειρῆνας : see on 11. — ὑπομέ- 


some experience. 

30. πάλαι ἐπιθυμῶ : for the pres. 
with πάλαι, see G. 1258; H. 826. — 
ἄλλως τε kai: see on ἄλλως Te i. 2. 59. 
- ἐξαρκέσει : see on ἀξιώσεις ii. 1. 
12. --.Φψυχάς, σώματα : accs. of specifi- 
cation. 

31. τὸ τὰς χεῖρας κτλ.: Const. τὸ 
ποιεῖν τοὺς καλοὺς ὑπομένειν τινὰ προσ- 
φέροντα τὰς χεῖρας. Socrates asserts 
that his art (ἐπιστήμη) does not 
include submitting to physical 
caresses. —ZktAAyns: cf. Homer’s 
description of this monster (u 85 ff.). 


νειν (after φασίν) : equivalent to non 


fugere. This and the other infs. 
(φεύγειν, κηλεῖσθαι) represent the 


impf. of direct discourse. 

32. ὡς οὐ προσοίσοντος : 86. μοῦ, 
which is added to φιλήσοντος in 33. 
For ws with the gen. abs., see on ws 
σημαίνοντος i, 1. 4; GMT. 864; 
H. 978.—O@dppe.: never fear. — 
εὐθύς, σύ ye κτλ.: En, statim tu, 
Critobule, dixisti ea, quae 
inutilia tibi fore praedico 
(Schneider). —keAol, αἰσχροί : Crito- ᾿ 
bulus has been using the word καλός 


116 EENOSONTOS AILOMNHMONEYMATA BB. 6. 


185 οἱ δὲ αἰσχροὶ καὶ ἡδέως προσίενται, νομίζοντες διὰ τὴν 

καὶ ὁ Κριτόβουλος ἔφη. “Ὥς 88. 
Ν Ν Ν / ’ ‘\ ἘΦ; Ν 

τοὺς μὲν καλοὺς φιλήσοντός μου, τοὺς δ᾽ ἀγαθοὺς κατα- 


ψυχὴν καλοὶ καλεῖσθαι." 


φιλήσοντος, θαρρῶν δίδασκε τῶν φίλων τὰ θηρατικά." 
καὶ 6 Σωκράτης ἔφη: “Ὅταν οὖν, ὦ Κριτόβουλε, φίλος 
190τινὶ βούλῃ γενέσθαι, ἐάσεις με κατειπεῖν σου πρὸς αὐτὸν 
[ » , 9 A Ν 5 A , 9 “ 3 ” 
ὅτι ἄγασαΐ τε αὐτοῦ Kal ἐπιθυμεῖς φίλος αὐτοῦ εἶναι; 
“ Κατηγόρει,᾽ ἔφη 6 Κριτόβουλος: “οὐδένα γὰρ οἶδα 
μισοῦντα τοὺς ἐπαινοῦντας. “Ἐὰν δέ σου προσκατη- 34 
,ὕ ”’ »Y “oc ὃ Ν Ν » 0) 9 μι A > oA 
γορήσω,᾽ ἔφη, “ ὅτι διὰ τὸ ἄγασθαι αὐτοῦ καὶ εὐνοϊκῶς 
195 ἔχεις πρὸς αὐτόν, ἦρα μὴ διαβάλλεσθαι δόξεις ὑπ᾽ ἐμοῦ ;" 
ςς 3 Ν Χ δι ΕΝ 9), 3» ἐς 13 , ¥ Ν ἃ 
Αλλὰ καὶ αὐτῷ pot, ἔφη, “ ἐγγίγνεται εὐνοια πρὸς OVS 
x e 4, 3 ee lal » Ν 5 49) (a4 wn \ 499 
ἄν ὑπολάβω εὐνοϊκῶς ἔχειν πρὸς ἐμέ. Ταῦτα μὲν δή," 35 
» ε / ἐς ὃ , 4, Ν A Ν ἃ 
ἔφη ὁ Σωκράτης, “ ἐξέσται μοι λέγειν περὶ σοῦ πρὸς οὕς 


of outward beauty; Socrates now 
shifts its meaning to beauty of char- 
acter, while retaining αἰσχροί (ugly) 
in its physical sense. Critobulus 
then, by distinguishing between 
καλούς and ἀγαθούς, removes the 
ambiguity, and the conversation 
proceeds. — kal ἡδέως : and that with 
pleasure. — καλεῖσθαι : we expect 
ὑπολαμβάνεσθαι OY δοκεῖν εἶναι. 

33. τῶν φίλων τὰ θηρατικά : the 
arts for winning friends. — κατειπεῖν 
σου: to say in disparagement of you, 
humorously used of a favorable 
utterance. Critobulus, appreciating 
the pleasantry, replies κατηγόρει go 
on with your accusation. —ayacal 
τε αὐτοῦ: the gen. of the person 
with ἄγαμαι is very rare when the 
quality which occasions the admira- 
tion is omitted. Usually, when the 
gen. is used, the quality admired is 
expressed in an explanatory sent., 


as in iv. 2. 9, or by a participle 
added to the genitive. Cf. ἄγαμαι 
τοῦ καταμετρήσαντός (who has meas- 
ured off) co καὶ διατάξαντος ἕκαστα 
τούτων Oec. iv. 21. ---- τοὺς ἐπαινοῦν- 
τας: the idea of praising is con- 
tained in ἄγασαι and ἐπιθυμεῖς φίλος 
αὐτοῦ εἶναι. 

94, διαβάλλεσθαι: to be taken 
humorously, like κατειπεῖν and προσ- 
κατηγορήσω. The entire passage is 
a good example of one form of the 
Socratic method. Cf. ἔπαιζεν ἅμα 
σπουδάζων i. 3. 8. Its true meaning 
is ‘‘It is plain that the plan which I 
propose is the simplest and surest way 
to secure for yourself the friendship 
of others.’’ διαβάλλεσθαι is perhaps a 
heightening of κατειπεῖν, and εὐνοϊκῶς 
ἔχειν of dyaca.— ἀλλὰ Kal: nay, 
even, in spirited retort. —mpés ots: 
with omission of τούτους. So in the 
next section. 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA II. 6. 


dv βούλῃ φίλους ποιήσασθαι. 


117 


2\ ὃ , » 3 , 
εαν O€ μοι ETL ἐξουσίαν 


ἴω ta \ la) ν 5 ᾽, ἴω 
200 δῷς λέγειν περὶ σοῦ ὅτι ἐπιμελής τε τῶν φίλων εἶ καὶ 


3 Ἁ ν ’ὔ ε , > “ Ν ᾿ς A 
οὐδενὶ οὕτω χαίρεις ὡς φίλοις ἀγαθοῖς, καὶ ἐπί τε τοῖς 

A » A Sy. > , > Ὄ ἄς. ἴδ᾽ ὦ a 
καλοῖς ἔργοις τῶν φίλων ἀγάλλῃ οὐχ ἧττον ἢ ἐπὶ τοῖς 
ε A Ἁ 32:0 ἢ A > “A A , ΄ 90" 
ἑαυτοῦ καὶ ἐπὶ τοῖς ἀγαθοῖς τῶν φίλων χαίρεις οὐδὲν 


- ese tay A ε na ¢ ᾿ς ~ 
YHTTOV Ἢ ἐπι τοις EQUTOV, OTWS TE TAVTA γίγνηται τοις 


205 φίλοις οὐκ ἀποκάμνεις μηχανώμενος, καὶ ὅτι ἔγνωκας 


3 ὃ Ν > \ > “ ‘ \ , > an 

ἄνόρος ἀρετὴν εἰναι νικαν TOUS μεν φίλους εὖ ποιοῦντα, 
Ν δ᾽ 9 θ Ν A / x >? , 3 ͵ὕ 

τους εχ βους κακως, πανυ ἂν οιμαυι σοι ἐπιτήδειον 


εἶναί με σύνθηρον τῶν ἀγαθῶν φίλων." 


, ™ 
“Τὶ οὖν, ἔφη 636 


na . y 
Κριτόβουλος, “ἐμοὶ τοῦτο λέγεις, ὥσπερ οὐκ ἐπὶ σοὶ dv 6 


210τι ἂν βούλῃ περὶ ἐμοῦ λέγειν ;” 


\ 4> » ν 
“Ma Δί ovy, ws ποτε 


3 X13 , » » ἣν Ν 5 \ 

ἐγὼ ᾿Ασπασίας ἤκουσα: ἔφη yap τὰς ἀγαθὰς προμνη- 
/ Ν Ν > ’ 3 Ν ’ὔ Ν 

στρίδας μετὰ μὲν ἀληθείας τἀγαθὰ διαγγελλούσας δεινὰς 

εἶναι συνάγειν ἀνθρώπους εἰς κηδείαν, ψευδομένας δ᾽ οὐκ 


3 lA > A ‘\ Ν 5 ’ ν “ 
ἐθέλειν ἐπαινεῖν: τοὺς γὰρ ἐξαπατηθέντας ἅμα μισεῖν 


35. ἐπιμελὴς τῶν φίλων: obs. 
the gradation of feelings which help 
to establish friendship. First we 
have admiration (ἄγασαι), next good 
will (εὐνοϊκῶς ἔχειν), next desire to 
serve (ἐπιμελής) (Weiske). — οὐδενὶ 
οὕτω χαίρεις ὡς φίλοις ἀγαθοῖς : Soc- 
rates takes this position for himself 
in i. 6. 14. — rots ἑαυτοῦ : equivalent 
See on ii. τ. 31. — 
μηχανώμενος : for the supplementary 
participle, see on ii. 1. 24. — ἔγνω- 
Kas: you recognize. —dvdpds ἀρετήν : 
a man’s chief excellence. —rois δ᾽ 
ἐχθροὺς κακῶς : the Socratic ethics 
here does not rise above the ordina- 
ry Greek standard. Cf. Xenophon’s 
description of the character of Cyrus 
An. i. g. 11. Cf. also iii. 9. 8, 
where Socrates explains what he 


to τοῖς σεαυτοῦ. 


understands by φθόνος. --- εἶναί με: 
for the subj. of the principal verb 
expressed with the inf., see H. 940 b. 
-- σύνθηρον : see on θηρώμενος i. 2. 
24. So θηρατικά 33, θηρᾶν 39. 

36. ὥσπερ οὐκ ἐπὶ σοὶ dv: as if it 
were not in your power. For the 
participle with ὥσπερ, expressing 
comparison, see G. 1576; H. 978 a. — 
᾿Ασπασίας : the celebrated mistress 
of Pericles, famed for her beauty 
and intellect. Socrates, too, admired 
her brilliant gifts, but when he speaks 
of her as of a teacher, in Xenophon 
and Plato, the term must be accepted 
as ironical. It is obvious that no Aspa- 
sia was needed to teach Socrates the 
lessons here inculcated. — προμνη- 
otplias: matchmakers. —ov« ἐθέλειν: 
‘¢it was not their way.’ — ἐπαινεῖν : 


118 EENO®QNTOS AILOMNHMONEYMATA BB. 6. 


οἱ ἀλλήλους τε Kal THY προμνησαμένην- ἃ δὴ Kal ἐγὼ 
πεισθεὶς ὀρθῶς ἔχειν ἡγοῦμαι οὐκ ἐξεῖναί μοι περὶ σοῦ 
“ ἈΝ Ν 
Σὺ μεν 37 
apa,” ἔφη ὁ Κριτόβουλος, “ τοιοῦτός μοι φίλος εἶ, ὦ Σώ- 


λέ 9 A Oe 9 x Ν ir θ ” 
eyelv ETALYVOVUVYTL OVOEVY O TL αν μη α 7) ενω. 


ἣν x , 324 » 3 , > Ν ’, 
κρατες, οἷος, ἂν μέν τι αὐτὸς ἔχω ἐπιτήδειον εἰς τὸ φίλους 
220 κτήσασθαι, συλλαμβάνειν μοι: ei δὲ μή, οὐκ ἂν ἐθέλοις 
, eS ea LY eee. 2.99 gga s 9.» 5» 
πλάσας τι εἰπεῖν ἐπὶ τῇ ἐμῃ ὠφελείᾳ. Πότερα δ᾽ ἄν, 
ἔφη ὁ Σωκράτης, “ὦ Κριτόβουλε, δοκῶ σοι μᾶλλον ὠφε- 
λεῖν σε τὰ ψευδῆ ἐπαινῶν ἢ πείθων Tapacbai σε ἀγαθὸν 
3 \ Ν Ν ν 3 A 
εἰ δὲ μὴ φανερὸν οὕτω σοι, ἐκ τῶνδε 38 
225 σκέψαι. εἰ γάρ σε βουλόμενος φίλον ποιῆσαι ναυκλήρῳ 


ἄνδρα γενέσθαι; 


’ 3 ‘4 ἢ 3 Ν 53 ’ 
ψευδόμενος ἐπαινοίην, φάσκων ἀγαθὸν εἶναι κυβερνήτην, 
ε ’ Ν 3 ld ’ Ἀ A Ν 3 ΄, 

ὁ δέ μοι πεισθεὶς ἐπιτρέψειέ σοι τὴν ναῦν μὴ ἐπισταμένῳ 

ἴω » Ν > (ὃ Ν x / Ν 

κυβερνᾶν, ἔχεις τινὰ ἐλπίδα μὴ ἀν σαυτὸν τε καὶ τὴν 
“ 3 , a Ψ. / “ Ν / 

ναῦν ἀπολέσαι; ἢ εἰ-σοι πείσαιμι κοινῃ THY πόλιν ψευ- 

ε x “ Ν “A Ν 

230 δόμενος ὡς ἂν στρατηγικῷ τε καὶ δικαστικῷ καὶ πολιτικῷ 
ε Ν 3 ld FP OK » Ν Ἂ, Ἂν ’ ε Ν 
ἑαυτὴν ἐπιτρέψαι, τί ἂν OLEL σεαυτὸν καὶ τὴν πόλιν ὑπὸ 

» ww x » 3 lal A 

σοῦ παθεῖν; ἢ εἴ τινας ἰδίᾳ τῶν πολιτῶν πείσαιμι 

, δ᾽ τ δὰ 9 an tert see {Μῦς A 
ψευδόμενος ὡς ὄντι οἰκονομικῷ TE Kal ἐπιμελεῖ TA ἑαυτῶν 

Ψ ὁ9 A ° a Ν ν 
ἐπιτρέψαι, ap οὐκ av πεῖραν διδοὺς ἅμα. τε βλαβερὸς 


235 εἴης καὶ καταγέλαστος φαίνοιο; ἀλλὰ συντομωτάτη TE39 


join with ψευδομένας, to praise un- 
truthfully. — ἀληθεύω : say with truth. 

37. οἷος συλλαμβάνειν : see on 
οἵους τέμνειν i, 4. 6. — εἰ δὲ pH: other- 
wise. For the use of this phrase in 
alternatives, see GMT. 478; H. 906. 
-- οὐκ av ἐθέλοις : instead of continu- 
ing with the inf. (after ofos), we have 
the opt., as a more independent con- 
struction. — πότερα δ᾽ av: for dé, see 
oni. 3. 18. 

38. yap: that 8. ---τὴν ναῦν: 
his ship. — τινὰ ἐλπίδα : any idea. — 


μὴ ἀπολέσαι : for μή with the inf. of 
indirect discourse, see on μηδενί i. 2. 
39.— ὡς Gv... πολιτικῷ : 80. ὄντι. 
With ὡς ἄν should be supplied the 
clause πείσαιμι ἑαυτὴν ἐπιτρέψαι. Cf. 
111. 6.4. In the following ὡς ὄντι (with- 
out ἄν), however, the meaning is on 
the ground that you are a man skilled 
etc. — σεαυτόν : see on εἶναί με 35. 
39. συντομωτάτη κτλ.: cf. quam- 
quam praeclare Socrates hanc 
viam ad gloriam proximam et 
quasi compendiariam dicebat 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA II. 6, 7. 119 


aera 
καὶ ἀσφαλεστάτη καὶ καλλίστη ὁδός, ὦ Κριτόβουλε, 6 τι 
“Ὁ A “A 
dv βούλῃ δοκεῖν ἀγαθὸς εἶναι, τοῦτο καὶ γενέσθαι ἀγαθὸν 
πειρᾶσθαι. ὅσαι δ᾽ ἐν ἀνθρώποις ἀρεταὶ λέγονται, σκο- 
_ πούμενος εὑρήσεις πάσας μαθήσει τε καὶ μελέτῃ αὐξανο- 
/, \ \ > ν 5 > An 
240 u€vas. ἐγὼ μὲν οὖν οὕτως, ὦ Κριτόβουλε, οἶμαι δεῖν 
θηρᾶν ἡμᾶς. εἰ δὲ σύ πως ἄλλως γιγνώσκεις, δίδασκε." 
καὶ ὁ Κριτόβουλος, “᾿Αλλ᾽ αἰσχυνοίμην av,” ἔφη, “ὦ Σώ- 
3 ἵν» Fax 4 » Ν A A > ~ 
κρατες, ἀντιλέγων τούτοις: οὔτε yap Kaha οὔτε ἀληθῆ 
λέγοιμ᾽ ἄν." 
Ἁ A 
Kat μὴν τὰς ἀπορίας ye τῶν φίλων Tas μὲν δι᾽ ἄγνοιαν. 
3 A 4 3 A \ \ > » ’ὔ 9 
ἐπειρᾶτο γνώμῃ ἀκεῖσθαι, τὰς δὲ δι’ ἔνδειαν διδάσκων 
x ὃ , > ’ 3 “~ 3 ~ \ \ 3 4 
κατὰ δύναμιν ἀλλήλοις ἐπαρκεῖν. ἐρῶ δὲ καὶ ἐν τούτοις 
Ay A A 
ἃ σύνοιδα αὐτῷ. ᾿Αρίσταρχον γάρ ποτε ὁρῶν σκυθρω-. 
A ¥ 5 
δπῶς ἔχοντα, “Eouas,” ἔφη, “ὦ ᾿Αρίσταρχε, βαρέως 
/ Ν δὲ A , ὃ ὃ ΄ A / 
φέρειν τι. χρὴ δὲ Tov βάρους μεταδιδόναι τοῖς φίλοις - 
ἴσως γὰρ av τί σε καὶ ἡμεῖς κουφίσαιμεν." καὶ ὁ 
3 5 A 
Αρίσταρχος, “᾿Αλλὰ μήν, ἔφη, “ὦ Σώκρατες, ἐν πολλῇ 
4 > > ’ 3 \ Ν 3 / ε ’ “ 
γέ εἰμι ἀπορίᾳ. ἐπεὶ γὰρ ἐστασίασεν ἢ πόλις, πολλῶν 


esse, si quis id ageret, ut 1. τὰς ἀπορίας, τὰς μέν, τὰς δέ: 


qualis haberi vellet talis esset 
Cic. de Off. ii. 12. Cf., also, i. 7. 1. 
—tv ἀνθρώποις : see on iii. 6. 2.— 
ἀρεταί : excellencies, skill in different 
matters. —otras: i.e. in the manner 
described by me. 

7. Socrates gives good counsel to 
Aristarchus, who complains of the 
difficulty of supporting a large family 
of dependent female relatives. After 
advising him to give to them some use- 
ful employment, Socrates shows that 
honest work is not beneath the dignity 
of a freeman. By this, we gain for the 
home prosperity, mutual appreciation, 
and happiness. 


acc. of the whole, followed by its 
parts, in apposition. Cf. i. 2. 60. — 
γνώμῃ : ‘by counsel,’? as shown in 
chaps. 7, 8, contrasted with διδάσκειν 
κατὰ δύναμιν ἀλλήλοις 
chaps. 9, το. ---ἃἃ σύνοιδα αὐτῷ: 
what I know of him. συνειδέναι τί 
τινι is to know anything with 
another, then to know anything of 
another. Cf. ἵνα τούτῳ μὲν ταῦτα 
συνειδῶμεν in order that we may 
know this of him Plato Prot. 348 Β. 
— ᾿Αρίσταρχον : otherwise un- 
known. 

2. ἀλλὰ μήν: yes indeed. —éora- 


σίασεν ἣ πόλις : for the revolution 


ἐπαρκεῖν, in 


120 


ΞΕΝΟΦΩ͂ΝΤΟΣ ATLOMNHMONEYMATA BB. 7. 


10 φυγόντων εἰς τὸν Πειραιᾶ, συνεληλύθασιν ὡς ἐμὲ καταλε- 


λειμμέναι ἀδελφαί τε καὶ ἀδελφιδαῖ καὶ ἀνεψιαὶ τοσαῦται 


Y > > 9 ἄρρεν ἃ, , \ , \ 3 ΄ 
ὥστ᾽ εἶναι ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ τέτταρας καὶ δέκα τοὺς ἐλευθέρους. 
»” A ~ 
λαμβάνομεν δὲ οὔτε ἐκ τῆς γῆς οὐδέν. οἱ yap ἐναντίοι 
a) A Ψ ἴω la 
κρατοῦσιν αὐτῆς: οὔτε ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκιῶν: ὀλιγανθρωπία 


\ 3 A » 4 Ν » \ > XN 3 ἴω. 
15 γὰρ εν T@ αστει γέγονε’ Τα ἔπιπλα δὲ οὐδεὶς ὠνέειται, 


οὐδὲ δανείσασθαι οὐδαμόθεν ἔστιν ἀργύριον, ἀλλὰ πρό- 


» , ὃ EL 9 “A ὁδῷ C la e A x ὃ ay 
τερον αν τις μοι OKEL EV ΤΊ) O @ YTV ευβειν 7 QVEL 


ζόμενος λαβεῖν. 


χαλεπὸν μὲν οὖν ἐστιν, ὦ Σώκρατες, 


\ Rs a > ΄ 2Q 7 Q , 
TOUS OLKELOVS περιορᾶν ἀπολλυμένους, ἀδύνατον δὲ τοσου- 


goTovs τρέφειν ἐν τοιούτοις πράγμασιν." 


ὃ ΤᾺ , 3. 
ακουσας ουν 


nA ’ ’ ld » 
ταῦτα ὁ Σωκράτης, “Ti ποτέ ἐστιν," ἔφη, “ὅτι ὁ Κεράμων 


\ Vd , “A . 
. μὲν πολλοὺς τρέφων οὐ μόνον ἑαυτῷ TE Kal τούτοις TA ἐπι- 


τήδεια δύναται παρέχειν, ἀλλὰ καὶ περιποιεῖται τοσαῦτα 


ὦστε καὶ πλουτεῖν, σὺ δὲ πολλοὺς τρέφων δέδοικας μὴ 


26 δι᾿ ἔνδειαν τῶν ἐπιτηδείων ἅπαντες ἀπόλησθε;" 


4 ἢ 
“Ὅτι νὴ 


Δί᾽, ἔφη, “ὁ μὲν δούλους τρέφει, ἐγὼ δὲ ἐλευθέρους." 


“Kat πότερον," ἔφη, “τοὺς παρὰ σοὶ ἐλευθέρους οἴει βεὰ- 


΄, > x Ν Ν , ὃ aN ” 
Tlous εἰναι ἣ τοὺς Tapa Κεράμωνι δούλους ; 
5 ” » « \ 5 AS aN at θὲ 3) 
οἶμαι," ἔφη, “τοὺς παρὰ ἐμοὶ ἐλευθέρους. 


Ἐν ᾿Εγὼ μὲν 


x 3) 
“Οὐκουν, 


» ( Ψ Ν x \ > Ἂς »“ ’ὔ > “A \ 
30 ἔφη, αισχρβον TOV μεν ATO Τῶν TOVY) POTEPWV ευποβέειν, σε 


in Athens at the close of the 
Peloponnesian war, cf. Hell. ii. 3. 4; 
Grote, Hist. of Greece, c. Ilxv. — 
ἀδελφιδαῖ : brothers’ or sisters’ daugh- 
ters, nieces. —Tovs ἐλευθέρους : masc., 
as including himself. — λαμβάνομεν : 
we are getting. Cf. i. 3. ὅ. --- τῷ 
ἄστει: the city proper, as distin- 
guished from the country. — πρό- 
τερον, ἤ : with no temporal meaning, 
more likely, than. GMT. 654. — τοὺς 
οἰκείους περιορᾶν ἀπολλυμένους : to 
allow one’s relatives to starve. 


3. τί ποτέ ἐστιν: how in the 
world does it happen ?—Kepdapov: 
otherwise unknown.—owtd δὲ πολ- 
Aovs: we might expect σὺ δὲ ὀλί- 
yous, for the fourteen ἐλεύθεροι were 
very few in comparison with the 
immense number of slaves supported 
by rich men like Ceramon; but the 
phrase may be a simple repetition to 
maintain the parallelism with the 
πολλοὺς τρέφων of the preceding clause. 

4. παρὰ σοί: in your house. Cf. 
Lat. apud, Ger. bei, Fr. chez. — 


A ” 
40 OTQAVTQL ποιειν ; 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA ILI. 7. 


121 


δὲ πολλῷ βελτίους ἔχοντα ἐν ἀπορίᾳ elvar;” “Νὴ Δί᾽ 
ἔφη, “ὁ μὲν γὰρ τεχνίτας τρέφει, ἐγὼ δὲ ἐλευθερίως 
ὃ ΄ ” «ΓΑ 3 ΑΔ 33) ie “ A , > ε 
πεπαιδευμένους. ρ᾽ οὖν, ἔφη, “τεχνῖταί εἰσιν ot 
ἡσιμόν τι ποιεῖν ἐπιστάμενοι; “Μάλιστά ve,” & 
χρήσιμ μενου; ιστά γε," Edy. 


35 “Οὐκοῦν χρήσιμά γ᾽ addura;” 


¥ ” \ - ” 
ἄρτοι;" “Οὐδὲν ἧττον. 


“Σφόδρα ye.” “Τί δὲ 


ld ’ὔ ” ¥ 
“Τί yap;” ἔφη, “ἱμάτιά τε 


3 A A ΄ a . ’ὕ \ 4 Ν 
ἀνδρεῖα καὶ γυναικεῖα καὶ χιτωνίσκοι καὶ χλαμύδες καὶ 
eEwpides;” “Σφόδρα ye,” ἔφη, “καὶ πάντα ταῦτα χρή- 


” 
σιμα. 


’, Ν > ε s 
“Πάντα μὲν οὖν, ws ἐγῴμαι." 


» φΦ ἊΨ ε A Ν 
“Ἔπειτα, ἔφη, “οἱ παρὰ σοὶ τούτων οὐδὲν ἐπί. 


«Εἶτ᾽ 


“" [ 3 Ν Ν 
οὐκ οἶσθα ὅτι ad’ ἑνὸς μὲν τούτων, ἀλφιτοποιίας, Ναυσι- 


4 > / ε / Ν Ν 3 4 l4 > Ν 
κύδης οὐ μόνον ἑαυτόν τε καὶ τοὺς οἰκέτας τρέφει, ἀλλὰ 


Ν 4 Ν Ke Ν \ lal Ν A 
πρὸς τούτοις καὶ vs πολλὰς Kal βοῦς, καὶ περιποιεῖται 


τοσαῦτα ὦστε καὶ τῇ πόλει πολλάκις λειτουργεῖν, ἀπὸ δὲ 
45 ἀρτοποιίας Κύρηβος τήν τε οἰκίαν πᾶσαν διατρέφει καὶ 
ζῇ δαψιλῶς, Δημέας δὲ ὁ Κολλυτεὺς ἀπὸ χλαμυδουργίας, 
Μένων δ᾽ ἀπὸ χλανιδοποιίας, Μεγαρέων δ᾽ οἱ πλεῖστοι 


ἀπὸ ἐξωμιδοποιίας διατρέφονται ;" 


νὴ Ala: the affirmative formula here 
is perplexing; of the various expla- 
nations offered, that suggested by 
Kiihner’s paraphrase seems most 
reasonable, viz. ‘‘ Aye, truly, it is 
a shame that we should live in such 
poverty ; for I have to support gentle- 
women, whose standard of living is, 
and ought to be, different from that 
of slaves.’’ 

5. dp οὖν : introduces an appar- 
ently neutral question. — τί δὲ 
ἄρτοι: well, how about bread? — 
ἱμάτια κτλ. : the ἱμάτιον (toga) was 
a square cloak covering the whole 
body. Under this was worn the 
tunic (χιτών), of which χιτωνίσκος 
{tunicula) is a diminutive. The 


“Νὴ At,” edn, 
χλαμύς was a short military mantle ; 
the é&wuls, a sort of sleeveless short 
tunic worn by slaves and the lower 
classes generally. See Guhl and 
Koner, Life of the Greeks and 
Romans, Ὁ. 160 ff. — ἔπειτα : then. 
So εἶτα in 6. 

6. λειτουργεῖν : i.e. to perform 
those public services which the state 
required from its richer citizens, 
such as furnishing and training 
choruses for dramatic performances, 
and fitting out triremes for the use of 
the state. For an account of these 
and the less important ‘liturgies,’ see 
Schémann, Antig. of Greece, Ὁ. 459 
ff. For the derivation of the word, 
see Lex. 8.0. λειτουργός. ---- Κολλυτεύς : 


122 EENOSONTOS AITOMNHMONEYMATA BB. 7. 


“ Ὁ \ \ 9. “ἂν ,ὕ 9 , » 
οὗτοι μὲν γὰρ ὠνούμενοι βαρβάρους ἀνθρώπους ἔχουσιν, 
4 o. δ ν᾽: > 4 τ “A » 3 \ at 
δ0 ὦστ᾽ ἀναγκάζειν ἐργάζεσθαι ἃ καλῶς ἔχει, ἐγὼ δ᾽ ἐλευ- 
ld \ homes 2 «(Ὁ 3»), » .-ς“ 3 4, ’, 
θέρους τε καὶ συγγενεῖς. Ever,” ἔφη, “ὅτι ἐλεύθεροί 7 
τ᾽ εἰσὶ καὶ συγγενεῖς σοι, οἴει χρῆναι μηδὲν αὐτοὺς ποιεῖν 
Ἂν, re. , \ , ΄ Ν la A 
ἄλλο ἢ ἐσθίειν καὶ καθεύδειν; πότερον καὶ τῶν ἄλλων 
9 , \ y A » , etn \ 
ἐλευθέρων τοὺς οὕτω ζῶντας ἄμεινον διάγοντας ὁρᾷς καὶ 
δὅ μᾶλλον εὐδαιμονίζεις ἢ τοὺς ἃ ἐπίστανται χρήσιμα πρὸς 
τὸν βίον τούτων ἐπιμελομένους; ἢ τὴν μὲν ἀργίαν καὶ 
\ 3 ’ 3 ’ A 9 ’ὔ ’ὔ’ Ν A“ 
τὴν ἀμέλειαν αἰσθάνῃ τοῖς ἀνθρώποις πρός τε TO μαθεῖν 
ἃ προσήκει ἐπίστασθαι καὶ πρὸς τὸ μνημονεύειν ἃ ἂν 
μάθωσι καὶ πρὸς τὸ ὑγιαίνειν τε καὶ ἰσχύειν τοῖς σώμασι 
θ0 καὶ πρὸς τὸ κτήσασθαί τε καὶ σῴζειν τὰ χρήσιμα πρὸς 
Ν " 5 4 »” Ν \ 3 / Ν Ν 3 ’ 
τὸν βίον ὠφέλιμα ὄντα, τὴν δὲ ἐργασίαν καὶ τὴν ἐπιμέ- 
\ ἃ Ἁ 3 Ν 3 ’ 
δὲ ἃ φὴς αὐτὰς ἐπίστα- 8 
, ε Ψ» ͵ +” Ἂς Ν ld A 
σθαι πότερον ὡς οὔτε χρήσιμα ὄντα πρὸς τὸν βίον οὔτε 
ποιήσουσαι αὐτῶν οὐδέν, ἢ τοὐναντίον ὡς καὶ ἐπιμελη- 


λειαν οὐδὲν χρήσιμα; ἔμαθον 


65 σόμεναι τούτων Kal ὠφελησόμεναι aT αὐτῶν ; ποτέρως 
γὰρ ἂν μᾶλλον ἄνθρωποι σωφρονοῖεν, ἀργοῦντες, ἢ τῶν 
χρησίμων ἐπιμελόμενοι; ποτέρως δ᾽ ἂν δικαιότεροι εἶεν, 


3 3 / x > > “ , Ν ἴω 
εἰ ἐργάζοιντο, ἢ εἰ ἀργοῦντες βουλεύοιντο περὶ τῶν 


of the Attic deme Collytus. —avov- 
μενοι ἔχουσιν: purchase and keep. 
- ὥστ᾽ ἀναγκάζειν : so that they can 
compel. —a καλῶς ἔχει: ‘whatever 
is desirable,’’ sc. ἐργάζεσθαι. --- ἔγὼ 
δέ (sc. exw): while I have with 
me. 

7. ἔπειτα: well, then. —Gddo : for 
its position, see on ii. 1. 17. — 4, 
τούτων : see on τούτων li. 4. 7. —Thv 
ἀργίαν, τὴν ἀμέλειαν, ὠφέλιμα ὄντα : 
for the neut. pred. after fem. or 
masc. substs., see ON χρησιμώτερον 
1 Hae, ace 


8. ἔμαθον : placed at the begin- 
ning for emphasis, and also in order 
to bring πότερον next to ws. —as: 
belongs to both ὄντα and ποιήσουσαι. 
— ὄντα, ποιήσουσαι : for the partici- 
ples in different cases, connected by 
οὔτε, οὔτε, See ON ii. 2. 5. — ὠφελησό- 
μεναι : fut. mid. in pass. sense. — 
ποτέρως : introducing the double 
question, but not part of it. See 
on i. 6. 15. — dpyotvres (in line 66) : 
conditional.—et ἀργοῦντες βουλεύ- 
owrTo κτλ. : ‘*if they should listlessly 
plan for success.”’ 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA II. 7. 


123 


9 ὃ / ἐλλὰ Χ la) V ε 3 εν ¥ ει ἃ ͵ 
ΕΠΙΤῊ ειἰων: α α Καὶ νυν μέν, ως εγῳμαιυ, OUTE OU εκεινας 


x A » s la v4 \ Ν ε , 5 Ν 3 

70 gu εἰς OUTE ἐκεῖναι σέ, σὺ μὲν ἡγούμενος αὐτὰς ἐπιζη- 
’ὔ 3 “A 3 A de at - la) 5 θό 4,49. 

μίιους ειναι σέξαντῳ, EKELVYAL OE σε ορῶσαι αχ OMEVOV ἐφ 


ε “A > \ 4 ae / > /, ’ 
ἑαυταῖς. ἐκ δὲ τούτων κίνδυνος μείζω τε ἀπέχθειαν γίγνε- 


σθαι καὶ τὴν προγεγονυῖαν χάριν μειοῦσθαι. 


ἐὰν δὲ 


΄ ν 3 ee Ν \ 3 ΄, , 
προστατήσῃς ὅπως ἐνεργοὶ ὦσι, σὺ μὲν ἐκείνας φιλήσεις 
la ἰφὶ » A 
75 ὁρῶν ὠφελίμους σεαυτῷ οὔσας, ἐκεῖναι δὲ σὲ ἀγαπήσου- 


σιν αἰσθόμεναι Χαίροντα αὐταῖς, τῶν δὲ προγεγονυιῶν 


5 “ ν ’ \ Fe ὦ Y , > la 
εὐεργεσιῶν ἤδιον μεμνημένοι THY aT ἐκείνων χάριν αὐξή- 
Ν 5 4 ’ ’ \ > ’ὔ’ > ’ 

σετε, καὶ ἐκ τούτων φιλικώτερόν τε καὶ οἰκειότερον ἀλλή- 


λοις ἕξετε. εἰ μὲν τοίνυν αἰσχρόν τι ἔμελλον ἐργάσεσθαι, 


, > > > aA , 9 ἴων \ ἃ \ A 
80 θάνατον QVYT αὐυτου TT POGLPETEOV Hv" νυν δὲ α μεν δοκεῖ 


ld \ ᾽ Ν > ee 
κάλλιστα και πρεπωδέστατα γυναιξὶν ειναυ ETLOTAVTAL, 


cy , ae eee ee en , \ , 
ως €OLKE* WTAVTES δὲ Q €TLOTAVTAL βᾷστα Τε και τάχιστα 


Χ / pene 3 4 Ν S ” ” Κ 
καὶ κάλλιστα Kal ἥδιστα ἐργάζονται. μὴ οὖν ὄκνει,᾽ ἔφη, 


“ wn 3 A 5 A ἃ ’ὕ ’ὔὕ 3 y 2 
ταυτα εἰσηγεῖσθαι αὐταῖς ἃ σοΐ τε λυσιτελήσει κακείναις, 


, ε > I e ia ε ᾽ὔ ” 
85 καί, WS εἰκὸς, ἡδέως υπακούσονται. 


“᾿Αλλὰ νὴ τοὺς 11 


θεούς, ἔφη ὁ ᾿Αρίσταρχος, “ οὕτως μοι δοκεῖς καλῶς 


λέγειν, ὦ Σώκρατες, ὦστε πρόσθεν μὲν οὐ προσιέμην 


9. ἀλλὰ καὶ νῦν μέν: ‘nay, 
more, as things now are.’’ --- κίνδυ- 
vos (sc. ἐστί) ἀπέχθειαν γίγνεσθαι : 
for the inf. with xivévvos (a less com- 
mon const. than μή with the subjv.), 
see G. 1521; H. 952. —éav προστα- 
τήσῃς ὅπως : if you will provide 
that. Cf. καὶ κελεύουσι προστατῆσαι 
λαβόντα χρήματα ὅπως ἐκπλεύσῃ 7 
στρατιά An. v. 6. 21. --- τὴν ἀπ᾽ 
ἐκείνων : sc. εὐεργεσιῶν. --- αὐξήσετε : 
pl., as χάρις implies a mutual rela- 
tion between the giver and the 
recipients. 

10. εἰ μὲν τοίνυν ἔμελλον : if, to 
be sure, they were going. — προαιρε- 


réov ἦν: without ἄν, like the 
impfs. ἔδει, ἐχρῆν, and others denot- 
ing propriety or obligation. See 
on i. 3. 8. --- ὧς ἔοικε: sc. from 
your account. — πάντες : everybody. 
--- μὴ ὄκνει, καὶ ὑπακούσονται : see 
on ἐγχείρει, 
16. 

11 τἄλλα: ‘Swell, now,’ a 
lively expression of assent. — πρό- 
σθεν μέν, viv δέ: although formerly, 
now however. Only the second 
clause is introduced by wore. For 
pév equivalent to while, see on i. 
4. 17. —od προσιέμην δανείσασθαι : 
I would have nothing to do with 


kal ὑπακούσεται ii. 3. 


μ" 


124 EENOSQNTOS AILOMNHMONEYMATA BB. 7. 


δανείσασθαι, εἰδὼς ὅτι ἀναλώσας ὃ ἂν λάβω οὐχ ἔξω 
ἀποδοῦναι, aie δέ μοι δοκῶ εἰς ἔργων ἀφορμὴν ὑπομενεῖν 
90 αὐτὸ wean’ 
Ἔκ τούτων δὲ ἐπορίσθη μὲν ἀφορμή, ἐωνήθη δὲ ἔρια: 12 
καὶ ἐργαζόμεναι μὲν ἠρίστων, ἐργασάμεναι δὲ ἐδείπνουν, 
ε Ν Ν 3 \ fal io \ > A OVE ὕ 
ἱλαραὶ δὲ ἀντὶ σκυθρωπῶν ἦσαν καὶ ἀντὶ ὑφορωμένων 
ε ‘\ ε ’ 3 ’ὔ ΘΙ od \ ε A e ’ 
ἑαυτοὺς ἡδέως ἀλλήλους ἑώρων, καὶ αἱ μὲν ὡς κηδεμόνα 
95 ἐφίλουν, ὁ δὲ ὡς ὠφελίμους ἠγάπα. τέλος δὲ ἐλθὼν πρὸς 
τὸν Σωκράτην χαίρων διηγεῖτο ταῦτά τε καὶ ὅτι αἰτιῶνται 
3: “Ἂς ’ A 3 “ 3 ’ 3 Ν 3 ’ὔ Ν ε 
αὐτὸν μόνον τῶν ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ ἀργὸν ἐσθίειν. καὶ ὁ Σω-18 
΄ ¥ 
Kparns ἔφη" 
\ ΄ὕἽ Ψ , > κ᾿ A κ᾿ Soe Ν ΑἹ 
φασὶ γάρ, ore φωνήεντα ἣν τὰ ζῴα, τὴν οἷν πρὸς τὸν 


(ς Ky 3 / 3 A Ν la) Ν / 
Kira ov λέγεις αὐταῖς τὸν τοῦ κυνὸς λόγον ; 
Ν ’ 3 a ‘ Ἂς A. ἃ ε A \ A 
100 δεσπότην εἰπεῖν: ᾿ Θαυμαστὸν ποιεῖς, Os ἡμῖν μὲν ταῖς 
Ἂν ὁ ἐϑν AY Ν Ν ᾿᾽ δὲ Sio 
καὶ ἔριά σοι καὶ ἄρνας Kal τυρὸν παρεχούσαις οὐδὲν δίδως 
Y PN A A 
ὅ τι ἂν μὴ ἐκ τῆς γῆς λάβωμεν, 
τοιοῦτό σοι παρέχει, μεταδίδως οὗπερ αὐτὸς ἔχεις σίτου.᾽ 
ἐγὼ γάρ 14 


105 > ε \ e ἴω, 5 Ν oC ν / e r Bein | θ , 
εἰμι ὁ και VLAS AVTAS σῴζων, WOTE MITE UT ἀνϑρωπων 


“a Ν ᾽ὔ ἃ 5 Ν 
τῷ δὲ κυνί, ὃς οὐδὲν 


Ν 
‘Nat μὰ Δία: 


5 5 3 ῪΝΝ 
τὸν κύνα οὖν ακούσαντα, εἰπεῖν" 


’ ? ε Ν ’ὔ ε /, 3 Ν ε “A 
κλέπτεσθαι μήτε ὑπὸ λύκων ἁρπάζεσθαι: ἐπεὶ ὑμεῖς γε, 


borrowing. - ὃ ἂν λάβω, ἕξω. For 
the retention of the direct forms 


see on ἐλευθέρους 2.--- ἐφίλουν, ἠγάπα : 
sc. respectively αὐτόν and αὐτάς. --- 


in indirect discourse, see on ἐποίει 
ii. 6. 18. --- εἰς ἔργων ἀφορμήν : to 
provide materials for their work. — 
ὑπομενεῖν: that I will bring myself. — 
αὐτὸ ποιῆσαι : ἱ.6. δανείζεσθαι. 

12. ἐργαζόμεναι ἠρίστων κτλ.: 
the informal nature of the ἄριστον 
enabled them to take it while at 
their work; the δεῖπνον, as the chief 
meal of the day, was eaten at the 
close of the day’s work. For an 
account of the Greek meals, see 
Becker, Charicles (Eng. transl.), p 
310 ff. - ἑαντούς : for the gender, 


ἀργὸν ἐσθίειν : ‘‘ate the bread of 
idleness.”’ : 

13. εἶτα : as in i. 2. 26. --- ὄϊν : 
the Ionic form, generally used by 
Xenophon instead of the Attic con- 
tracted οἷν. Cf. iii. 2. 1; iv. 3. 10. 
— θαυμαστὸν ποιεῖς, ὅς : you are act- 
ing strangely, to. For the causal 
rel., see on ὃς κελεύεις ii. 3. 15. —6 
τι ἂν μὴ λάβωμεν : unless we get it. 

14, ναὶ μὰ Δία, ‘‘ yes, of course 
he does.’?— καὶ ὑμᾶς αὐτάς : i.e. 
you too, as well as my master’s 
other possessions. — ἐπεί: for. — 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA II. 7, 8. 


125 


εἰ μὴ ἐγὼ προφυλάττοιμι ὑμᾶς, οὐδ᾽ ἂν νέμεσθαι δύναισθε, 
OQ.” ae, eae ’ Ψ \ ΄ ‘4 , 
φοβούμεναι μὴ ἀπόλησθε. οὕτω δὴ λέγεται καὶ τὰ πρό- 


βατα συγχωρῆσαι τὸν κύνα προτιμᾶσθαι. 
Γ . > 
110 ἐκείναις λέγε ὁτι ἀντὶ κυνὸς εἶ φύλαξ Kal ἐπιμελητής, καὶ 


Ν \ > 
και συ ουν 


διὰ σὲ οὐδ᾽ ὑφ᾽ ἑνὸς ἀδικούμεναι ἀσφαλῶς τε καὶ ἡδέως 


3 rs A ” 
ἐργαζόμεναι ζῶσιν. 


ἼΛλλον δέ ποτε ἀρχαῖον ἑταῖρον διὰ χρόνου ἰδών, 


“Πόθεν, ἔφη, “EvOnpe, φαίνῃ;" 


ε Ν Ν \ 
“Ὑπὸ μὲν τὴν κατάλυ- 


a , ” ἊΨ ΗΝ ἢ ᾿ς 3 A 3 ,, 
σιν τοῦ πολέμου," ἔφη, “ὦ Σώκρατες, εκ τὴς ἀποδημίας, 


Ν la > ’ 3 Ν % > 4 \ 3 ~ 
νυνὶ μέντοι αὐτόθεν. ἐπειδὴ yap ἀφῃρέθημεν τὰ ἐν TH 
e ‘4 if 3 Ν ὄν Φ ἘΝῚ τς St sQ\ 
ὅ ὑπερορίᾳ κτήματα, ἐν δὲ TH ᾿Αττικῇ ὁ πατήρ μοι οὐδὲν 


κατέλιπεν, ἀναγκάζομαι νῦν ἐπιδημήσας τῷ σώματι ἐργα- 


’ Ν 3 4 7 
ζόμενος τὰ ἐπιτήδεια πορίζεσθαι. 


δοκεῖ δέ μοι τοῦτο 


A > “Ἃ A ΄ > ΄ Ξ \ 
ἰ ι wy, ως TE Ka 
KPELTTOV ELV AL 1) de σθαί τινος ἀνθρώπ V αλλ S$ TE Kat 


\ » 3 > ¢ x , 3) 
μηδὲν ἔχοντα ἐφ᾽ ὅτῳ ἂν δανειζοίμην. 


A , x 
“Kat πόσον av 


, ¥ ”» »¥ uN aA ε Ν > A Ν 
10 χρονον over σοι, ἔφη, το σωμα ικανον εἰναι μισθοῦ τα 


μὴ ἀπόλησθε: subjv. retained, to 
express vividly the object of fear. 
Cf. dxvoinv μὲν ἄν, μὴ ἡμᾶς καταδύσῃ 
An. i. 3. 117. --- ἀντὶ κυνός : in place 
of (‘‘as good as’’) a dog. Cf. ἐγὼ 
yap ἀντὶ τοῦ λέοντός εἰμί σοι Ar. 
Knights 1048. 

8. Euthérus, who has seen better 
days, is trying to support himself by 
the labor of his hands. Socrates 
advises him to seek a position as 
overseer of some estate, so as to secure 
a provision for his old age; and 
overrules his objections to assuming 
the position of a subordinate. 

1, διὰ χρόνου: interiecto 
aliquo tempore. --- πόθεν φαίνῃ : 
cf. πόθεν, ὦ Σώκρατες, φαίνῃ Plato 
Prot. init. — BvOnpe: not otherwise 
known. — ὑπὸ... πολέμου : the end 


of the Peloponnesian war (404 B.c.) 
is meant. By the terms of the 
treaty of peace, the Athenians lost 
all their possessions outside of 
Attica. —vuvl μέντοι αὐτόθεν : just 
at present, however, from the city 
itself. —adypéOnpev: pl., refers to 
the community as the sufferers. — ἐν 
τῇ ὑπερορίᾳ : i.e. in territories out- 
side of Attica. —xrfhpara: for the 
acc. of the obj. retained with the 
pass., see G. 1239; H. 724 ἃ. --- τῷ 
σώματι ἐργαζόμενος : by the labor of 
my hands. —Seic@ar: to beg a loan, 
as the next clause shows. — ἔχοντα : 
for the acc., see on μαθόντας ποιεῖν 
i, 1. 9.—ép ὅτῳ: on which, as 
security. 

2. μισθοῦ: gen. of price. —ra 
ἐπιτήδεια ἐργάζεσθαι : see on ὀλίγα 


8 


126 


ἐπιτήδεια ἐργάζεσθαι ;” 
χρόνον." 


“Καὶ μήν, ἔφη, ‘ 


ΞἘΕΝΟΦΩΝΤΟΣ AITOMNHMONEYMATA B. 8. 


“Ma τὸν Δί᾽, ἔφη, “ οὐ πολὺν 
“ὅταν γε πρεσβύτερος γένῃ, 


δῆλον ὅτι δαπάνης μὲν δεήσῃ, μισθὸν δὲ οὐδείς σοι 


? a “A , » / ” 
θελήσει τῶν τοῦ σώματος ἔργων διδόναι. 


16 λέγεις, ἔφη. 


«᾿Αληθῆ 


Py. 99 Ψ A 
“Οὐκοῦν, ἔφη, “κρεῖττόν ἐστιν αὐτόθεν 


an , ἴω ΕἾ ΕῚ , ἃ \ , 
TOLS TOLOVTOLS TWYV εργων ἐπιτίθεσθαι α Και πρεσβυτέρῳ 


γενομένῳ ἐπαρκέσει, καὶ προσελθόντα τῳ τῶν πλείονα 
« t 


"¢ ’ “A "4 “A / 
χρήματα κεκτημένων, τῷ δεομένῳ τοῦ συνεπιμελησομένου, 


ἔργων τε ἐπιστατοῦντα καὶ συγκομίζοντα τοὺς καρποὺς 
20καὶ συμφυλάττοντα τὴν οὐσίαν, ὠφελοῦντα ἀντωφελεῖ- 


σθαι." 
ε , ν᾽ 
ὑπομείναιμι. 


“Χαλεπῶς av,” ἔφη, “ ἐγώ, ὦ Σώκρατες, δουλείαν 
“Καὶ μὴν οἵ γε ἐν ταῖς πόλεσι προστα- 


’ \ ~ ’ὔ 3 ,ὔ > 4 
TevovTes Kal τῶν δημοσίων ἐπιμελόμενοι ov δουλοπρεπέ- 


9g 4 > > 3 δι: | Ψ ” 
στεροι ἕνεκα τούτου, ἀλλ᾽ ἐλευθεριώτεροι νομίζονται. 


9 2... Ψ = ’ NP, ἠδ 4 > A 
25 “Ὅλως, ἔφη, “ὠ Σώκρατες, TO ὑπαίτιον εἶναί τινι οὐ 


, ΄ ” 
πάνυ TPOT LEAL. 


“Kat μήν, ἔφη, “ EvOnpe, od πάνυ γε 


εν 3 Ss The. eee » Ἀν » 
ῥᾷδιόν εστιν ευρειν εργον ἐφ ῳ OUK ἂν τις ALTLAV εχοι. 


a . A 
χαλεπὸν yap οὕτω TL ποιῆσαι ὥστε μηδὲν ἁμαρτεῖν, χαλε- 


Ν ‘ 
mov δὲ Kal ἀναμαρτήτως τι ποιήσαντα μὴ ἀγνώμονι 


ἴω A > Ν Ν @ A 3 , \ 
80 Κριτῃ περιτυχεῖν" ἐπεὶ καὶ οἷς νῦν ἐργάζεσθαι φῃς θαυ- 


4 θυ ee, , > 3 4 / 
pale εἰ ῥᾷδιόν ἐστιν ἀνέγκλητον διαγίγνεσθαι. 


ἐργάζεσθαι i. 3. ὅ. --- ϑαπάνης : money 
to spend, on yourself. Socrates here 
lays stress on the needs of the aged ; 
other disadvantages of old age are 
mentioned iv. 8. 8, Apol. 6. 

3. αὐτόθεν : from this very point, 
immediately. — τῷ, τῷ δεομένῳ : to 
some one, who needs. — τοῦ συνεπι- 
μελησομένου: a man who will assist in 
taking charge. The art. is generic. 
Cf. i. τ. 18. — ἐπιστατοῦντα : equiv- 
alent to ἐπιστάτην ὄντα, hence 
used with the genitive. Cf. ὧν ἂν 


χρὴ οὖν 


ἐπιστατῶσι ζῴων Cyr. i. τ. ἃ. With 
the verb the dat. is more common. 

4. καὶ μήν : asin 2 and 5. 

5. τὸ ὑπαίτιον εἶναι : the idea of 
being answerable. The adj. is acc., 
as referring to a general subject ; 
otherwise we might have ὑπαίτιος.--- 
μὴ ἀγνώμονι : for μή with adjs., see 
on i. τ. 14. --- ἐπεὶ kal: see on ii. 7. 
14. — θαυμάζω εἰ : see on i. 1. 13. — 
ἀνέγκλητον διαγίγνεσθαι : without 
ὄντα, like διατελεῖς in i. 6. 2. ἀνέγ- 
κλητον is to be joined with οἷς νῦν 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA II. 8, 9. 


127 


a Ν , , Ν Ν > , 
πειρᾶσθαι τοὺς φιλαιτίους φεύγειν Kal τοὺς εὐγνώμονας 


, \ a , 9 ᾿ A 
διώκειν, καὶ τῶν πραγμάτων οσα μὲν δύνασαι ποιειν 


ὑπομένειν, ὅσα δὲ μὴ δύνασαι φυλάττεσθαι, ὅ τι δ᾽ ἂν 


, , ε / Ν ’ὔ > 
ο8δπράττῃς, τούτου ws κάλλιστα καὶ προθυμότατα ἐπιμε- 


λ A θ ᾿ ν Ν ν > K , φΦ. 5 “- ἢ 5 
εισῦαι" οὕτω YAP NKLOT ἂν MEV σε οἰμαι EV αἰτιᾳ ELVaL, 


’ Ν ~ al ἴω 
μάλιστα δὲ τῇ ἀπορίᾳ βοήθειαν εὑρεῖν, ῥᾷστα δὲ καὶ 


9 , A ν.. 9 Ν A , ” 
ἀκινδυνότατα ζῆν καὶ εἰς τὸ γῆρας διαρκέστατα. 


3 Ν N 
Οἶδα δέ ποτε αὐτὸν καὶ Κρίτωνος ἀκούσαντα ὡς 9 


χαλεπὸν ὁ βίος ᾿Αθήνησιν εἴη ἀνδρὶ βουλομένῳ τὰ ἑαυ- 


A , (ATA S395 Ἂν 3s 3 ΄ὔ ᾿, 
του πράττειν. Νυν yap, ἔφη, ἐμέ τινες εἰς δίκας αγου- 


5 ν 39 lal e > 3 a > > 4 / 
σιν, οὐχ OTL ἀδικοῦνται ὑπ᾽ ἐμοῦ, ἀλλ᾽ ὅτι νομίζουσιν 


ν » 5 4 , “ἡ ’ὔ’ » ” 
5 nOvov ἄν με ἀργύριον τελέσαι ἢ πράγματα ἔχειν. 
Σωκράτης, “Εἰπέ μοι," ἔφη, ‘ 


Ve 
και O 


3 
“ὦ Κρίτων, κύνας δὲ τρέφεις, 


ψ. \ , I =:% A ΄, 3 , ” 
Wa σοι τοὺς λύκους ἀπὸ τῶν προβάτων ἀπερύκωσι; 


“Kat pada,” ἔφη: “μᾶλλον γάρ μοι λυσιτελεῖ τρέφειν ἢ 


ἐργάζεσθαι φής without. blame from 
those for whom, as you say, you are 
now working. 

6. διώκειν : to seek. Cf. σὲ μὲν 
διώξονται καὶ φιλήσουσιν Plato Theaet. 
168 a. — ὑπομένειν : bear patiently. 
- ἂν εἶναι : the particle should be 
repeated with μάλιστα εὑρεῖν and 
ῥᾷστα ζῆν. See oni. 3. 15. 

9. Socrates recommends Crito, 
who complains of being pestered by 
sycophants, to secure against them 
the assistance of the poor but worthy 
Archedémus. By his efficient serv- 
ices Archedémus gains the grati- 
tude and friendship, not only of 
Crito, but also of other prominent 
citizens. 

1, Κρίτωνος: a wealthy Athe- 
nian, and one of Socrates’s best 
friends. After the philosopher’s 


condemnation, Crito vainly tried to 
induce him to escape from prison (cf. 
Plato Crito). Like other rich citi- 
zens, he suffered from the vexatious 
calumnies and lawsuits fastened 
on him by malicious accusers 
(συκοφάνται). This species of black- 
mail seems to have been viewed 
indulgently by the community, as 
affording a wholesome check to the 
rapacity of ‘ capital,’ and as conduc- 
ing to the success of the democracy. 
See Becker, Charicles, pp. 55, 56, 
and the passages there cited. — 
χαλεπὸν ὁ βίος : for the neut., see on 
χρησιμώτερον ii. 3. 1. -- τὰ éavrod: 
his own affairs. —mwpdypara ἔχειν : 
have trouble, occasioned by law- 
suits. 

2. κύνας δέ: for δέ, see on i. 3. 
18. --- ἀπερύκωσι : Ionic and poetic. 


128 - 


49) 


μή. 


EENO®ONTOS AITOMNHMONEYMATA OB. 9. 


«Οὐκ ἂν οὖν θρέψαις καὶ ἄνδρα ὅστις ἐθέλοι τε καὶ 


Ψ 4 > 4 Ν 3 ἴω ; LO A ” 
10 δύναιτό σου απέερυκειν τους επιχειρουντας αοικειν σε: 


“Ἡδέως γ᾽ av,” ἔφη, “εἰ μὴ φοβοίμην ὅπως μὴ ἐπ᾽ αὐτόν 


/ 
με τράποιτο." 


«Τί δ᾽; ἔφη, “οὐχ ὁρᾷς ὅτι πολλῷ 


"δ ΄ 3 ζό Y Ais ὃ Ἀν: rte θό 
Ὥοιον ἐστι Xape OMEVOVY οἱῳ σοι ἂν βι ἢ απεχ OMEVOV 


ὠφελεῖσθαι; 


3 » Y 2.2% 3 , A 4 a 
εὖ ἴσθι ὅτι εἰσὶν ἐνθάδε τῶν τοιούτων οἱ 


lb πάνυ ἂν φιλοτιμηθεῖεν φίλῳ σοι χρῆσθαι." 


Ν 3 4 3 ’ 3 “ὃ / A 
Kat ἐκ τούτων ἀνευρίσκουσιν Ἀρχέδημον, πάνυ μεν 


ε Ν 3 A ’ x “ , ὃ , 9 Ν io a@.. 
LUKQVOV ELTTELVY TE KAL πρᾶξαι, πενΉΤΑα δ΄ ὧν γὰρ HV οιος 


ἀπὸ παντὸς κερδαίνειν, ἀλλὰ φιλόχρηστός τε καὶ ἔφη 


en > De. A lal , 
ῥᾷστον εἶναι ἀπὸ τῶν συκοφαντῶν λαμβάνειν. 


τούτῳ οὖν 


ε , ε , v4 x a ΜΜ» x 53 
o Κρίτων, οπότε συγκομίζοι ἢ σῖτον ἢ ἔλαιον ἢ οἶνον 


ἢ ἔρια ἤ τι ἄλλο τῶν ἐν ἀγρῷ γιγνομένων χρησίμων 


πρὸς τὸν βίον, ἀφελὼν ἂν ἔδωκε καί, ὁπότε θύοι, ἐκάλει 


Cf. An. iii. 1. 28. ----οὐκ ἂν οὖν θρέ- 
Wats: should you not, then, keep ? — 
ὅστις ἐθέλοι : for the opt. by assimi- 
lation, see on αἰσθανοίμεθα i. 5. 1. — 
ἡδέως γ᾽ ἄν : sc. θρέψαιμι. ---- ὅπως μή : 
instead of the more usual simple μή. 
G. 1379; H. 887 8. --- ἐπ᾿ αὐτόν pe: 
stronger than ἐπ᾽ ἐμαυτόν. --- τρά- 
ποιτο : see on ἐθέλοι above. 

3. οἵῳ σοι dvipl: equivalent to 
τοιούτῳ ἀνδρὶ οἷος σὺ ei. For the pecu- 
liar assimilation of οἵῳ σοι, see G. 
1036; H. 1002. Cf. τοῖς οἵοις ἡμῖν τε 
καὶ ὑμῖν to such persons as we and you, 
Hell. ii. 3. 25. — εἰσὶν τῶν τοιούτων : 
there are some among such persons. 
-- πάνυ av φιλοτιμηθεῖεν : would feel 
greatly ποπογθα. ----φίλῳ: for the pred. 
dat. with χράομαι, see H. 777 a. 

4, ἐκ τούτων (sc. λόγων) : as a 
result of this conversation. —’ Apxé- 
δημον : prob. the same man that 
afterward attained considerable 


power in Athens. Cf. ᾿Αρχέδημος ὁ 
Tov δήμου τότε προεστηκώς Hell. i. 7. 2, 
where he is mentioned as having 
charge of the distribution of the 
διωβελία or theater fund. As a pop- 
ular orator, he was ridiculed by 
Aristophanes Frogs v. 417 ff. —otos 
κερδαίνειν : for the inf., see on οἵους 
i. 4. 0. --- ἀπὸ παντός : ‘‘ from any 
and every occupation,’’ good or bad. 
Cf. the adj. πανοῦργος ready to do 
anything, hence unscrupulous. — 
ἀπὸ τῶν συκοφαντῶν : ἀπό with the 
gen., instead of παρά, as implying an 
unwilling surrender on the part of 
the συκοφάνται, while λαμβάνειν παρά 
τινος is equivalent to accipere ab 
aliquo. Archedémus knew how 
to make the accusers disgorge their 
ill-gotten gains. —av ἔδωκε : for the 
iterative aor. with ἄν, see G. 1296 ; 
H. 835 a. — ἐκάλει : sc. tothe sacri- 
ficial feast. See on ii. 3. 11. — 


25 αὐτόν. 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA II. 9. 


A x A , 9 A 
και TQ TOLAVTA TFAVTA ἐπεμελεῖτο. 


129 


νομίσας δὲ ὁ ᾿Αρχέ 


9 , 49 Ἂν , > , A 
δημος ἀποστροφήν οἱ τὸν Κρίτωνος οἶκον μάλα περιεῖπεν 


Ν »ΩΝ las , \ , 
και εὐθὺς των συκοφαντούντων TOV Κρίτωνα 


ἀνευρίσκει πολλὰ μὲν ἀδικήματα, πολλοὺς δὲ ἐχθρούς 


\ 1m a > δί ὃ , 3 ® 
καὶ αὐτῶν τινα προσεκαλεῖτο εἰς LKY)V YMOO La), εν if] 


5, Af »»»Ἄ ἴω ν A ἴω ΕΝ 5 lal ᾿ ε \ 
αὐτὸν ἔδει κριθῆναι 6 τι Set παθεῖν ἢ ἀποτεῖσαι. ὁ δὲ 


Ἁ «-ἶνΜμ Ν \ Ν 4, > 3 / ν 
συνειδὼς αὑτῷ πολλὰ καὶ πονηρὰ πάντ᾽ ἐποίει ὥστε 


80 ἀπαλλαγῆναι τοῦ ᾿Αρχεδήμου. 


ὁ δὲ ᾿Αρχέδημος οὐκ 


> 4 4 ’ ’ 3 A \ 9 “~ , 
ἀπηλλάττετο, ews τόν TE Κρίτωνα ἀφῆκε Kal αὐτῷ χρή- 


ματα ἔδωκεν. 


ἐπεὶ δὲ τοῦτό τε καὶ ἄλλα τοιαῦτα, ὃ ᾿Αρχέ-: 


, » , ν Y Ν 3 Ν 
δημος διεπράξατο, ἤδη ΤΟΤΕ, WOTTEP OTQV νομεὺυς ἀγαθὸν 


4 » Ν ε » “ , δ > “Aw 
κύνα ἔχῃ, καὶ οἱ ἀλλοι νομεῖς βούλονται πλησίον αὐτοῦ 


Ν 9 / e / ν a) Ν 5 , 4 \ 
35 TAS ἀγέλας ἱστάναι ίνα τοῦ κυνὸς ἀπολαύωσιν, οὕτω δὴ 


καὶ Κρίτωνος πολλοὶ τῶν φίλων ἐδέοντο καὶ σφίσι παρέ 


χειν φύλακα τὸν ᾿Αρχέδημον. 


ὁ δὲ ᾿Αρχέδημος τῷ 


iA ε 7 > / \ > 4 la ε “4 3 
Κρίτωνι ἡδέως ἐχαρίζετο, καὶ οὐχ ὅτι μόνος ὁ Κρίτων ἐν 


ε , εκ > Ν Ἁ ε ’ὔ 3 ΄“ 5 ’ ἴω 
ἡσυχίᾳ ἦν, ἀλλὰ καὶ οἱ φίλοι αὐτοῦ: εἰ δέ τις αὐτῷ 


τὰ τοιαῦτα ἐπεμελεῖτο (Sc. αὐτοῦ): paid 
him similar attentions. For the cog- 
nate acc., see on φροντίζοντας τὰ 
τοιαῦτα i. τ. 11. Cf. ra ἄλλα Hell. 
iv. 1. 40. i 

5. ot: sibi. For the indir. 
refl., see on i. 2. 32. — μάλα περιεῖπεν 
(impf.) αὐτόν : treated him (Crito) 
with great respect. Cf. καί μιν ”Aua- 
σις εὖ περιεῖπε Hat. ii. 169. — προσ- 
εκαλεῖτο εἰς δίκην δημοσίαν : began 
public proceedings against. — ἔδει 
κριθῆναι : he would have had to sub- 
mit to decision. For ἔδει without dy, 
see On προαιρετέον ἣν ii. 7. 10. --- ὅ τι 
Set παθεῖν ἢ ἀποτεῖσαι : ἃ judicial for- 
mula, meaning corporal punishment 
or fine. Cf. Plato Apol. 36 5, and 
πολλάκις ἐκρίθην ὅ τι χρὴ παθεῖν ἢ 


ἀποτεῖσαι Oec. xi. 25. The passage 
thus implies that the fellows would 
not have got off without punish- 
ment. 

6. συνειδὼς αὑτῷ πολλὰ καὶ 
πονηρά : conscious of many ras- 
calities. — ἀπαλλαγῆναι : liberari. 
-- ἀφῆκε: released, withdrew the 
suit against him.—atrd: i.e. 
Archedemus. 

7. ἤδη τότε : for the more usual 
τότ᾽ ἤδη. Of. iv. 8.1. For ἤδη, see 
on ii. 1. 5. 

8. ἐχαρίζετο : sc. τοῦτο, 1.6. to 
serve Crito’s friends. — καὶ οὐχ ὅτι : 
and not only, condensed expression 
for οὐ λέγω ὅτι I do not say that, ** it 
is not enough to say that.’ G. 
1504; H. 1085. Cf. μὴ ὅτι i. 6. 11. 


130 ἘΕΝΟΦΩΝΤΟΣ AITOMNHMONEYMATA BB. 9, 10. 


40ToUTwY οἷς ἀπήχθετο dvedilor ὡς ὑπὸ Κρίτωνος ὠφελού- 
λ 4 3 ᾽ὔ « ’ ἫΝ 7. Ἂν e 3 “ὃ 
μενος κολακεύοι αὐτόν, “Πότερον οὖν,᾽ ἔφη ὁ ᾿Αρχέδημος, 
“αἰσχρόν ἐστιν εὐεργετούμενον ὑπὸ χρηστῶν ἀνθρώπων 
καὶ ἀντευεργετοῦντα τοὺς μὲν τοιούτους φίλους ποιεῖσθαι, 
A Ἀ A , x Ν A A 9 
τοῖς δὲ πονηροῖς διαφέρεσθαι, ἢ τοὺς μὲν καλοὺς κἀγα- 
\ 3 A , 5 Ν A a Ν 
45 θοὺς ἀδικεῖν πειρώμενον ἐχθροὺς ποιεῖσθαι, τοῖς δὲ πο- 
νηροῖς συνεργοῦντα πειρᾶσθαι φίλους ποιεῖσθαι καὶ 
χρῆσθαι τούτοις ἀντ᾽ ἐκείνων ;" ἐκ δὲ τούτου εἷς τε τῶν 
Κρίτωνος φίλων ᾿Αρχέδημος ἣν καὶ ὑπὸ τῶν ἄλλων 
Κρίτωνος φίλων ἐτιμᾶτο. , 
Οἶδα δὲ καὶ Διοδώρῳ αὐτὸν ἑταίρῳ ὄντι τοιάδε δια- 10 
λεχθέντα. “Εἰπέ pou,” ἔφη, “ὦ Διόδωρε, ἄν τίς σοι τῶν 
“Kat ἄλλους 2 
\ y>99 Κ « A A , . , 
ye νὴ Ai’,” ἔφη, “παρακαλῶ σῶστρα τούτου ἀνακηρύσ- 


iKe A 3 5 A 3 Xn 4 3 , eae 
οἰκετῶν ἀποὸρᾷᾳ ἐπιμελῃ OT WS ἀνασώσῃ; 
᾽) (a4 , ’ bb) » ‘37 , 4 aA 3 
ὅσων. Τί yap;” ἔφη, “ἐάν τίς σοι κάμνῃ τῶν οἴκε- 
la ‘an Ν A > Ἂς 4 \ 
TOV, τούτου ἐπιμελῇ καὶ παρακαλεῖς ἰατροὺς ὅπως μὴ 
3 ’ 3) 73) ¥ 
ἀποθάνῃ;" “Σφόδρα γ᾽,᾽ ἔφη. 


’ 4“3..ἕ τψΨὦ «ς λὺ ~ > “A ’ x 
ριμων, ἔφη, TOAVU Τῶν οἰκέετων χβησιμώτερος ων κιν- 


“Ri d€ τίς σοι τῶν γνω- 


, >» 9 ΄ . ¥ » > 
δυνεύει δι᾿ ἔνδειαν ἀπολέσθαι, οὐκ οἴει σοι ἄξιον εἶναι 

3 a Y n \ ἣ > , 9 
10 ἐπιμεληθῆναι ὅπως διασωθῇ; καὶ μὴν οἶσθά ye ὅτι 3 


3 3 4 3 Ν ε al > 4, > ¥ 3 
οὐκ ἀγνώμων ἐστὶν ‘Eppoyévyns: αἰσχύνοιτο δ᾽ ἄν, εἰ 


—el ὀνειδίζοι, ἔφη : like ὁπότε θύοι, 
ἐκάλει in 4. --- διαφέρεσθαι : to be at 
variance with. —7: 80. αἰσχρόν ἐστιν. 
--- πειρᾶσθαι φίλους ποιεῖσθαι: Xen- 
ophon seems to imply that true 
friendship among rascals is impos- 
sible. 

10. Socrates persuades Diodorus 
to extend aid to Hermogenes, a poor 
but worthy acquaintance, and thereby 
to win his friendship ; and points out 
- that it is well worth while to gain 
Friends so easily. 


1. Διοδώρῳ : otherwise unknown. 
- σοὶ ἀποδρᾷ : for the dat. of dis- 
advantage, see G. 1170; H. 767 a. 
Cf. ἀποφεύγειν μοι Oec. ii. 14. For 
the acc. with ἀποδρᾷ, cf. ἣν τις 
ἀποδρᾷ σε τῶν οἰκετῶν Cyr. i. 4. 18. 

2. καί, γέ : *¢ yes, indeed, and.”’ 
—rovrov: i.e. the runaway. —rl 
yap: see on ii. 6. 2. — κινδυνεύει : 
indic., anticipating the special case 
of Hermogenes. 

3. καὶ μήν: as in i. 6. 8. -- 
Ἑρμογένης : a loyal follower of 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA II. 10. ἘΞ] 


9 ae, e -% a N43 , , KLE , 
ὠφελούμενος ὑπὸ σοῦ μὴ ἀντωφελοίη σε. KaiTOLTO ὑπηρέτην 
ἑκόντα τε καὶ εὔνουν καὶ παραμόνιμον καὶ τὸ κελευόμενον 

A \ 
ἱκανὸν ποιεῖν ἔχειν καὶ μὴ μόνον TO κελευόμενον ἱκανὸν 
»” “ 3 Ν δι ’ Ν 4s eC la) , 
. 16 ὄντα ποιεῖν, ἀλλὰ δυνάμενον Kal ad ἑαυτοῦ χρήσιμον 
> Ἁ ~ Ν λ 4 θ ~ > ~ 
εἶναι Kal προνοεῖν καὶ προβουλεύεσθαι, πολλῶν οἰκετῶν 

> 3 ’ > ε , 3 Ν 3 ’ 9 
οἶμαι ἀντάξιον εἶναι. ot μέντοι ἀγαθοὶ οἰκονόμοι, ὅταν 
τὸ πολλοῦ ἄξιον μικροῦ ἐξῇ πρίασθαι, τότε φασὶ δεῖν 

> A ἴω δὲ ὃ Ν δ , 3 ’ » 
ὠνεῖσθαι: νῦν δὲ διὰ τὰ πράγματα εὐωνοτάτους ἔστι 
καὶ ὁ Διόδωρος, “᾿Αλλὰ 

Ὡς 
“λέγεις, ὦ Σώκρατες, καὶ κέλευσον 
“Μὰ Δί, ἔφη, “οὐκ 

» ’ὔ ‘ ¥ Ὗ 4 > Ν ᾿Ξ 

ἔγωγε" νομίζω γὰρ οὔτε σοὶ κάλλιον εἶναι τὸ καλέσαι 


20 φίλους ἀγαθοὺς κτήσασθαι." 
“ ”) » 

καλῶς γε, ἔφη, 

ἐλθεῖν ὡς ἐμὲ τὸν “Eppoyerny.” 


3 A A eS 3 A Ν 3 A m4 3 ’, A 
ἐκεῖνον τοῦ αὐτὸν ἐλθεῖν πρὸς ἐκεῖνον οὔτε ἐκείνῳ μεῖζον 
3 ἈΝ Ἂς “ “ x 49) y \ ε ’ 
25 ἀγαθὸν τὸ πραχθῆναι ταῦτα ἢ σοί. οὕτω δὴ ὁ Διόδω- 
A Ν Ἂς ε ld \ 9 Ἁ ’ 
ρος ᾧχετο πρὸς τὸν Ἑρμογένην καὶ οὐ πολὺ τελέσας 
3 ᾽’ , ἃ » ἫΝ la ν x x ig x 
ἐκτήσατο φίλον ὃς ἔργον εἶχε σκοπεῖν ὅ τι ἄν ἢ λέγων ἢ 
9 3 ’ \ 3 ’ὔ ’ 
πράττων ὠφελοίη τε καὶ εὐφραίνοι Διόδωρον. 


He was ἃ son of the rich 
but lived ἴῃ great 


Socrates. 
Hipponicus, 


On the thought, cf. vilis ami- 
corum est annona, bonis ubi 


poverty, the father’s immense quid deest Horace Epist. i. 12. 24. 
wealth having passed to Callias, ason 5. GANG: see on ii. 7. 11,— 
by another wife. Cf. Sym. iii. 14; αὐτόν: yourself. — τὸ πραχθῆναι 


iv. 46-50; Plato Crat. 384c,391c.— ταῦτα: for this (the friendship 


τὸ ὑπηρέτην ἔχειν, οἶμαι ἀντάξιον 
εἶναι : the possession of an assistant 
is, in my judgment, an equivalent. — 
παραμόνιμον : lit. remaining with, 
loyal, in contrast with the runaway 
slave. Cf. ii. 4. 5. 

4. διὰ τὰ πράγματα : by reason 
of the hard times, Cf, ii. 7. 2 fin. 


between you) to be brought about. 

6. od πολὺ τελέσας : without 
much outlay. Cf. ἀργύριον τελέσαι ii. 
g. 1. — ἔργον εἶχε: made it his task. 
Cf. ἀεὶ δὲ τιθεὶς τὰ τῶν φίλων ἀσφαλῶς 
ἀεὶ ἀμαυροῦν (to impair) τὰ τῶν πολε- 
μίων ἔργον εἶχε Ages. xi. 12. --- ὅ Tt: 
const. with both participles. 


9 \ Ν 2 , mn a 3 A @ 
Or. δὲ τοὺς ὀρεγομένους τῶν καλῶν ἐπιμελεῖς ὧν 1 


> ¢ ~ > rd la) A 4 > ’ὔ 
ὀρέγοιντο ποιῶν ὠφέλει, νῦν τοῦτο διηγήσομαι. ἀκούσας 


΄" , > \ ΄ y 3 , 
yap TOTE Διονυσόδωρον εἰς THV πόλιν YKELV ἐπαγγελλό- 


μενον στρατηγεῖν διδάξειν, ἔλεξε πρός τινα τῶν συνόν- 


ἃ 3 , ’ὔ Ὺ ~ 4 3 ἴω 
ὅτων, ὃν ἠσθάνετο βουλόμενον τῆς τιμῆς ταύτης ἐν τῇ 


/ , a4 9 Ν ? > Pies’ x 4 
πόλει τυγχάνειν: “Αἰσχρὸν μέντοι, ὦ νεανία, τὸν Bovdo- 


μενον ἐν τῇ πόλει στρατηγεῖν, ἐξὸν τοῦτο μαθεῖν, ἀμε- 


λῆσαι αὐτοῦ: 


\ ’ “Ὁ «e e Ν A / 
καὶ δικαίως av οὗτος ὑπὸ τῆς πόλεως 


ζημιοῖτο πολὺ μᾶλλον ἢ εἴ τις ἀνδριάντας ἐργολαβοίη μὴ 


1. The man who aspires to the 
commandership of an army must un- 
derstand the art of war, if he would 
not bring disaster upon the state which 
he serves. Good generalship neces- 
sarily includes other qualifications 
besides an acquaintance with tactics. 
‘A good commander must above all 
know how to secure the best disposi- 
tion of his forces. In order to do 
this, he should be able accurately to 
estimate the good or bad qualities of 
his troops, so as to make the best use of 
each division when occasion demands. 

1, ὅτι: instead of the more usual 
ὡς how. So ἐντεθύμησαι ὅτι iii. 3. 11. 
Cf. ὅτι δὲ ἐπεμελεῖτο, viv τοῦτο λέξω iv. 
7. 1.— τῶν καλῶν : public honors, 
such as the καλοὶ κἀγαθοί should as- 
pire to; a phrase borrowed from the 
Spartans, cf. De Rep. Lac. iii. 3; iv. 
‘4; Cyr. vii. 3. 16. — ἐπιμελεῖς : stu- 
dious of. — ὀρέγοιντο : for the opt., 


182 


see on i. 2. 57. — Διονυσόδωρον: a 
Sophist from Chios, who, with his 
brother Euthydemus (not the one > 
mentioned in iv. 2), taught rhetoric 
and the art of war in Athens. Cf. 
Plato Huthyd. 271 oc. — ἐπαγγελλόμε- 
νον : professing. —év τῇ πόλει: 
‘‘among his fellow-citizens,’’ ὑ.6. 
not as a mercenary from abroad. 
2. μέντοι : really. — στρατηγεῖν : 
the Athenians divided the military 
command among ten generals, chosen 
annually. ΑΒ late as the first Per- 
sian war (490 s.c.), they held the 
supreme command in rotation (¢f. 
the well-known story of Miltiades 
and his colleagues, Hdt. vi. 110). In 
later wars, it rarely happened that 
the entire board of strategi took 
the field. For an account of their 
military and civil functions, see 
Schémann, Antig. of Greece, p. 420 


ff. —atrod: i.e. τοῦ μαθεῖν. 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA III. 1. 


10 μεμαθηκὼς ἀνδριαντοποιεῖν. 


133 


ὅλης yap τῆς πόλεως ἐν 


τοῖς πολεμικοῖς κινδύνοις ἐπιτρεπομένης τῷ στρατηγῷ, 


μεγάλα τά TE ἀγαθὰ κατορθοῦντος αὐτοῦ καὶ τὰ κακὰ 


ὃ ΄, aK , θ a S 3 EN ὃ ΄ 
ἐς ιαμαρτᾶνοντος εἰκὸς γιγνεσ αι. πῶς ουν οὐκ αν OLKALWS 


ε ἴω A ? “ > ~ wn Ἁ ε A“ 
O του μεν μανθάνειν τοῦτο ἄμελων, τοῦ δὲ αἱρεθῆναι 


5 , “ 3) 
15 ἐπιμελόμενος ζημιοῖτο; 
> Ν 5 ,’ὔ ’ὕ 
αὐτὸν ἐλθόντα μανθάνειν. 


A Ν \ / ¥ 
τοιαῦτα μὲν δὴ λέγων ἔπεισεν 
ἐπεὶ δὲ μεμαθηκὼς ἧκε, προσ- 


, wn , > oe τὰς + » ν 
έπαιζεν αὐτῷ λέγων: “Od δοκεῖ ὑμῖν, ὦ ἄνδρες, ὥσπερ 
ν \ 9 , Ν ϑ > 7 \ ¢ 
Opnpos τὸν ᾿Αγαμέμνονα yepapor ἔφη εἶναι, οὕτω καὶ ὅδε 


στρατηγεῖν μαθὼν γεραρώτερος φαίνεσθαι; 


\ \ 
KQL yop 


20 ὥσπερ ὁ κιθαρίζειν μαθών, καὶ ἐὰν μὴ κιθαρίζῃ, κιθαρι- 


΄, 3 ἈΝ \ 2A x Ν 3 , Ψ 
στής ἐστι, καὶ ὃ μαθὼν ἰᾶσθαι, κἂν μὴ ἰατρεύῃ, ὅμως 


> , 3 ν ον, 9 Ν κι ἴω , A 
LaT POS εστιν, OUTW Καὶ ὅδε Q7TO τοῦδε TOU χβονου διατελεῖ 


εἶ » x Ν 3% 4 ε a. Ν 3 
στρατηγὸς ὦν, κἂν μηδεὶς αὐτὸν ἕληται: ὁ δὲ μὴ ἐπι- 
, » ϑ, > 
στάμενος οὔτε στρατηγὸς οὔτε ἰατρός ἐστιν, οὐδ᾽ ἐὰν ὑπὸ 


25 πάντων ἀνθρώπων αἱρεθῇ. 


“ἕν ee: WIR “we? ἃ ay 
ἀτάρ, ἔφη, “wa καὶ ἐὰν 


ἡμῶν τις ἢ ταξιαρχῇ ἢ λοχαγῇ σοι, ἐπιστημονέστεροι 


τῶν πολεμικῶν ὦμεν, λέξον ἡμῖν πόθεν ἡρξατό σε διδά- 


σκειν τὴν στρατηγίαν." 


Ἁ yy > ‘al A»? »¥ 
καὶ os, “Ex τοῦ avrov, ἔφη, 


ςς .3 Ψ Ν 3 Ἂ Ν Ν Ἀ 3 ᾽’ Ἁ 
εις OTTEp και ἐτελεύτα" Ta γὰρ Τακτικα εμε YE και 


βϑ0οἄλλο οὐδὲν ἐδίδαξεν." 


“᾿Αλλὰ μήν, ἔφη ὁ Σωκράτης, 


ἰὼ Ὁ ac \ , 8. ΟΝ ΄, Ν \ 
TOUTO YE πολλοστὸν Epos €OTL στρατηγιας" και γὰρ 


3. ὅλης τῆς πόλεως : the state’s 
whole interests. For the position of 
ὅλης, see G. 979; H. 672 and c. — 
μεγάλα: pred. with γίγνεσθαι. ---- éd- 
θόντα μανθάνειν: to go and learn. 
Cf. ἐλθόντας Κῦρον αἰτεῖν πλοῖα An. i. 


3. 14. 
4, μεμαθηκώς : ‘after finishing 
his course.’’ ---Ὅμηρος κτλ. : the pas- 


sage is in Τ' 169, 170, where Priam 
says of Agamemnon καλὸν δ᾽ οὕτω 
ἐγὼν οὔπω ἴδον ὀφθαλμοῖσιν | οὐδ᾽ οὕτω 


γεραρόν: βασιλῆι γὰρ ἀνδρὶ ἔοικεν. ---- 
γεραρόν : stately. — οὔτε στρατηγός: 
before these words οὔτε κιθαριστής 
might be expected ; prob. omitted as 
inappropriate to οὐδ᾽ ἐὰν αἱρεθῃ. 

5. σοί: under you. For the dat. 
with verbs of serving, see G. 1159; 
H. 764, 2. ---- πόθεν : at what point. — 
τὰ τακτικά : tactics, i.e. military 
drill. 

6. ἀλλὰ μήν : atqui. — πολλο- 
στὸν μέρος : a very small part. Of. 


134 RENO®ONTOS ATITOMNHMONEYMATA Τ. 1. 


παρασκευαστικὸν τῶν Els TOV πόλεμον τὸν στρατηγὸν εἶναι 
χρὴ καὶ ποριστικὸν τῶν ἐπιτηδείων τοῖς στρατιώταις καὶ 
μηχανικὸν καὶ ἐργαστικὸν καὶ ἐπιμελῆ καὶ καρτερικὸν 
A 93 , XA 4 4 . 9 4 A ε A 
35 Kal ἀγχίνουν Kal φιλόφρονά TE Kal ὠμόν, Kal ἁπλοῦν TE 
QA 5 4 A , A , A 
Kal ἐπίβουλον, καὶ φυλακτικόν TE καὶ κλέπτην, Kal προ- 
Ν Ἀ ν a, , A ὕὔ A 
ετικὸν καὶ ἀρπαγα, Kal φιλόδωρον καὶ πλεονέκτην, καὶ 
ἀσφαλῆ καὶ ἐπιθετικόν, καὶ ἄλλα πολλὰ καὶ φύσει καὶ 
9 , een. > , » ἈΝ \ 
ἐπιστήμῃ δεῖ τὸν εὖ στρατηγήσοντα ἔχειν. καλὸν δὲ 
Qa ϑ ἃς N > δ Ἀ , , ; 
40 καὶ TO τακτικὸν εἶναι: πολυ γὰρ διαφέρει στράτευμα τετα- 
, 9 , ν , A 4 Ἀ 4 . 
γμένον QTAKTOV, ὠσπερ λίθοι τε καὶ πλίνθοι καὶ ξύλα καὶ 
κέραμος ἀτάκτως μὲν ἐρριμμένα οὐδὲν χρήσιμά ἐστιν, 
Ss Ἀ A ~ ᾿ 4 A A 5 Lal A 4 , 
ἐπειδὰν δὲ ταχθῃ κάτω μὲν καὶ ἐπιπολῆς τὰ μήτε σηπό- 
ὔ , y ’ὕ ε, 72 4 5 ὕὔ A 
μενα μήτε τηκόμενα, οἵ TE λίθοι καὶ ὁ κέραμος, ἐν μέσῳ δὲ 
Y 4 ἈΝ A 4 ν 9 3 ͵ὕὔ ¥ 
45 αἵ τε πλίνθοι καὶ τὰ ξύλα, ὥσπερ ἐν οἰκοδομίᾳ συντίθεται, 
«᾿Αλλὰ πάνυ," 
¥ ε , «-ΨψΨ 3 , x \ ᾿ 
ἔφη ὁ νεανίσκος, “ ὅμοιον, ὦ Σώκρατες, εἴρηκας" καὶ γὰρ 
ἐν τῷ πολέμῳ πρώτους τοὺς ἀρίστους δεῖ τάττειν καὶ 


, ’ an OY» κ΄. ϑ' ” 
τότε γίγνεται πολλοῦ ἀξιον KTY LO OLKLA. 


, 3 ΄, \ Ν , Y ες \ a 
τελευταίους, εν μέσῳ δὲ TOUS XELPLOTOUS, LWA VTO MEV τῶν 


μικρόν τι μέρος εἴη στρατηγίας τὰ τακ- 
τικά Cyr. 1. 6. 14. ---- τῶν εἰς τὸν πόλε- 
pov: the material of war. For the 
gen., see G. 1142; H. 754 b. — 
μηχανικόν: fertile in device. —vdak- 
τικόν, κλέπτην : on his guard (against 
plunderers), ready to seize (another’s 
property by stealth). —aogadrq: safe 
(i.e. cautious), in movement. — φύσει 
καὶ ἐπιστήμῃ: by nature and science. 

7. κέραμος : tile, in collective 
sense. The same comparison of a 
well-built house with an army occurs 
in Cyr. vi. 3. 25. ---Οὀἀἀτάκτως ἐρριμμένα: 
thrown together in confusion. — ἔπυπο- 
λῆς : on top, refers to the roof of tile 
(κέραμος). Similarly, λίθος belongs to 


κάτω. ---- συντίθεται : sing., agreeing 
with the nearest substantive (τὰ 
ξύλα), or having as subj. the entire 
mass of material, thought of as 
neuter. 

8. πάνυ ὅμοιον : rem plane si- 
milem, a very apt comparison. — 
πρώτους τοὺς ἀρίστους κτλ.: cf. the 
arrangement of Nestor’s forces, ἱπ- 
πῆας μὲν πρῶτα σὺν ἵπποισιν καὶ ὄχε- 
σφιν | πέζους δ᾽ ἐξόπιθε στῆσεν πολέας τε 
καὶ ἐσθλούς, | ἕρκος ἔμεν πολέμοιο - κακοὺς 
δ᾽ ἐς μέσσον ἔλασσεν, | ὄφρα καὶ οὐκ ἐθέ- 
λων τις ἀναγκαίῃ πολεμίζοι Hom. A297— 
300. — ὑπὸ μὲν τῶν, ὑπὸ δὲ τῶν : for 
ὑπὸ τῶν μέν, ὑπὸ τῶν δέ, ποῦ uncom- 
mon in Attic. Cf. ii. 2. 2. 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA III. 1. 135 


δ0 ἄγωνται, ὑπὸ δὲ τῶν ὠθῶνται." “Ei μὲν τοίνυν, ἔφη, 9 
“cc Ν 4 Ἁ 3 θ Ἁ Ν ‘\ Ν δέ 
καὶ διαγιγνώσκειν σε τοὺς ἀγαθοὺς καὶ τοὺς κακοὺς Edi 
5 \ ’, ’ὔ 3», “4 Ψ 50ΝἝ \ ¥ 
δαξεν εἰ δὲ μή, τί σοι ὄφελος ὧν ἔμαθες ; οὐδὲ yap εἴ σε 
ο: ἀργύριον ἐκελευσε πρῶτον μὲν καὶ τελευταῖον τὸ κάλλι- 
’ὔ 3 , δὲ Ν ’ Ν ὃ ὃ LE ὃ 
στον τάττειν, ἐν μέσῳ δὲ τὸ χείριστον, μὴ διδάξας διαγι- 
’ / Ν \ ἈΝ ’ 3 \ ¥ » 
55 γνώσκειν τό TE καλὸν Kal τὸ κίβδηλον, οὐδὲν ἄν σοι ὄφελος 


> > ν 
ἦν. “᾿Αλλὰ μὰ Δί᾽, ἔφη, “οὐκ ἐδίδαξεν: ὥστε αὐτοὺς 
x e A l4 4 > Ἀ Ἁ Ν ‘\ ’ ” 
dv ἡμᾶς δέοι τούς τε ἀγαθοὺς καὶ τοὺς κακοὺς κρίνειν. 
“ , > 5 “A bb aimee 4 “ “ x 3 »“ A ὃ 
Τί οὖν οὐ σκοποῦμεν," ἔφη, “πῶς ἂν αὐτῶν μὴ διαμαρ- 10 
, ” “ 4\ > ἊΝ ε ar ςς 3 m τ 33 
τάνοιμεν ; Βούλομαι," ἔφη ὁ νεανίσκος. Ovkovr, 
¥ τε ὃν \ 3 ΄ δὲ ε , δ λ 
60 ἔφη, “εἰ μὲν ἀργύριον δέοι ἁρπάζειν, τοὺς φιλαργυ- 
la) - A , 
ρωτάτους πρώτους καθιστάντες ὀρθῶς ἂν τάττοιμεν ;” 
¥ A 
“Ἔμοιγε δοκεῖ. “Ti δὲ τοὺς κινδυνεύειν μέλλοντας ; 
5s ‘ ’ , 3) (a4 a » 
ἄρα τοὺς φιλοτιμοτάτους προτακτέον ; Οὗτοι γοῦν 
> ” »¥ “ee 9% 4, + ὃ , OLX 3 
εἰσιν, ἔφη, “οἱ ἕνεκα ἐπαίνου κινδυνεύειν ἐθέλοντες. οὐ 
a ¥ 3 A »” 
65Toivuy οὗτοί ye ἄδηλοι, ἀλλ᾽ ἐπιφανεῖς πανταχοῦ ὄντες 
> 2 Ἂ ee yr > Eee , 9 » ἐξ 4 , , 
εὐεύρετοι av εἶεν. Ατάρ,᾽ ἔφη, “πότερά σε τάττειν 11 
’ 25 (ὃ x Ν ν ἃ 9 ’ ε ’ 
μόνον ἐδίδαξεν, ἢ καὶ ὅπῃ καὶ ὅπως χρηστέον ἑκάστῳ 
ς ” 


τῶν Taypatev;” “Οὐ πάνυ, ἔφη. “Kat μὴν πολλά γ᾽ 


9. εἰ μὲν κτλ. : with apod. omitted, 
a not unusual ellipsis. See G. 1416; 
H. 904 a, and cf. εἰ μὲν δώσουσι γέρας 
if they shall give me a prize (sc. well 
and good) Hom. A 135, καὶ νῦν, av μὲν 
ὁ Κῦρος βούληται (8c. παρέστω σὺν ὑμῖν), 
εἰ δὲ μή, ὑμεῖς τὴν ταχίστην πάρεστε 
Cyr. iv. 5. 10. ---- τό τε καλὸν καὶ τὸ 
κίβδηλον : the correlatives τέ, καί, are 
sometimes used to connect two ob- 
jects which are to be distinguished 
or compared, where the Eng. usage 
would employ a simple ‘and.’ So 
τούς Te ἀγαθοὺς καὶ τοὺς κακούς below. 
Cf. διαφέρει ὁ τυραννικός τε καὶ ὁ ἰδιω- 
τικὸς βίος Hiero i. 2. 


10. τί οὖν οὐ σκοποῦμεν : equiva- 
lent to σκοπῶμεν let us consider. — πτῶς 
ἂν αὐτῶν μὴ διαμαρτάνοιμεν : how we 
can avoid mistaking them. For μή 
with the potential opt. in questions, 
see GMT. 292, 2. --- τί δὲ τοὺς κινδυ- 
νεύειν μέλλοντας : SC. ποιήσομεν what 
shall we do with those about to engage 
in a hazardous enterprise ?— ot ἕνεκα 
ἐπαίνου κινδυνεύειν ἐθέλοντες : cf. 
‘Seeking the bubble reputation | 
Even in the cannon’s mouth’ Shak. 
As You Like It ii. 7. 

11. οὐ πάνυ: not at all, answers 
the last half of the previous question. 
- καὶ μήν : see oni. 4. 12. --- πολλά, 


136 ἘΕΒΝΟΦΩΝΤΟΣ AITOMNHMONEYMATA TI. 1, 2. 


9 ‘\ Ν. ἃ » ’ » Ψ ε , , 3) 
ἐστὶ πρὸς ἃ οὔτε τάττειν οὔτε ἄγειν ὡσαύτως προσήκει. 
Ἁ 3 A 
τὸ “᾿Αλλὰ μὰ Δί᾽, ἔφη, “od διεσαφήνιζε ταῦτα. “Νὴ Δί᾽, 
» « ae , 20 \ 3 , x \ 5... ἃ 
ἔφη, “πάλιν τοίνυν ἐλθὼν ἐπανερώτα- ἣν γὰρ ἐπίστηται 
\ \ Ρ] Ν “J > “A 9 ’ὔ > Ν > “A 
καὶ μὴ ἀναιδὴς ἢ, αἰσχυνεῖται ἀργύριον εἰληφὼς ἐνδεᾶ σε 
ἀποπέμψασθαι." 
Ἦ \ ὃ ’ὕ A e v4 «<c ἐλ la) 4 git 
ντυχὼν δέ ποτε στρατηγεῖν ἡρημένῳ Tw, “ Τοῦ Eve 
” Y¥ oc? ¥ Ν > , ἴω 
Kev,” ἔφη, “ Ὅμηρον οἴει τὸν ᾿Αγαμέμνονα προσαγορεῦσαι 
la 5 ν A 
ποιμένα λαῶν; apa γε ὅτι WoTEp TOV ποιμένα δεῖ ἐπι- 
A ν a ’ ¥ ε Yeo ‘\ Xe2 “ὃ 
μελεῖσθαι ὅπως σῶαΐί τε ἔσονται αἱ ὄϊες καὶ τὰ ἐπιτήδεια 
4 \ a2 Ὅν lal ν οὖ 
δ ἕξουσι, καὶ οὗ ἕνεκα τρέφονται, τοῦτο ἔσται, οὕτω καὶ τὸν 
στρατηγὸν ἐπιμελεῖσθαι δεῖ ὅπως σῶοί τε οἱ στρατιῶται 
\ Q a 
ἔσονται Kal τὰ ἐπιτήδεια ἕξουσι, Kal οὗ ἕνεκα στρατεύον- 
ται, τοῦτο ἔσται; στρατεύονται δὲ ἵνα κρατοῦντες τῶν 
53 a : 
πολεμίων εὐδαιμονέστεροι ὦσιν. ἢ τί δήποτε οὕτως 
4 > 
10 ἐπήνεσε τὸν ᾿Αγαμέμνονα εἰπών 
ζ 2 , ws \ , sf sy 
ἀμφότερον, βασιλεύς T ἀγαθὸς κρατερός τ᾽ αἰχμητής᾽; 
+ ee 4 MS , Ve. δ ¥ 3 > / 
dpa γε ὅτι “αἰχμητής τε κρατερὸς᾽ ἂν εἴη, οὐκ εἰ μόνος 
- ΨΘΝ oy > ’ ms Ἁ a 5 > > Ἁ 
αὐτὸς εὖ ἀγωνίζοιτο πρὸς τοὺς πολεμίους, GAN εἰ καὶ 


\ a ἽΝ , ¥ ¥ A ὡς Ν 
παντὶ τῴ στρατοπέδῳ τούτου αἴτιος εἴη; καὶ ‘ βασιλεὺς 


[ 


πρὸς a&: ‘‘many occasions, where.’ the thought, ¢f. Cyr. viii. 2. 14. — καὶ 


- σαύτως : in the same way, sc. as 
on others. — ἐνδεᾶ : the missing gen. 
can readily be supplied. — ἀποπέμψα- 
σθαι: for the inf. with αἰσχύνομαι, 
instead of the supplementary par- 
ticiple, see G. 1581; H. 986. 

2. A general should make it his 
chief care to secure the welfare of his 
troops. 

1. Ὅμηρον: in B 2438. —dpa: 
the connection shows that an affirm- 
- ative answer is expected. See on ii. 
6. 1.— ὄϊες : see on ii. 7. 18, and, for 


οὗ ἕνεκα τρέφονται, τοῦτο ἔσται: and 
that the purpose for which they are 
reared shall be attained. 

2. τί δήποτε : see on τίσι roré i. 
1. 1. --- ἀμφότερον xrrX.: Hom. Τ' 
179. For the gender, see on χρῆησι- 
μώτερον ii. 3. 1. Plutarch tells us 
that this was the favorite verse of 
Alexander the Great, who always 
carried a copy of the Iliad with him 
on his campaigns. —dpd ye: sc. ἐπή- 
νεσεν αὐτόν. ---- οὐκ εἰ : not in case that. 
-, - καὶ βασιλεὺς ἀγαθόφ : 1.6. καὶ ὅτι 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA III. 2, 3. 137 


9 f_Y 3 3 , A ε A ΄ va 
16 ἀγαθός, οὐκ εἰ μόνον Tov ἑαυτοῦ βίου καλῶς προ- 
, 3 > > Pa , 4 > , 
εστήκοι, GAN εἰ Kal ὧν βασιλεύοι, τούτοις εὐδαιμονίας 
Ν ᾿ A A 
αἴτιος εἴη; Kal yap βασιλεὺς αἱρεῖται οὐχ ἵνα ἑαυτοῦ 3 
. καλῶς ἐπιμελῆται, ἀλλ᾽ ἵνα καὶ οἱ ἑλόμενοι δι᾿ αὐτὸν εὖ 
πράττωσι: καὶ στρατεύονται δὲ πάντες, ἵνα ὁ βίος αὐτοῖς 
20 ὡς βέλτιστος ἢ, καὶ στρατηγοὺς αἱροῦνται τούτου ἕνεκα, 
δεῖ οὖν τὸν 4 
A “ 2 A ε ᾽’ FES 
στρατηγοῦντα τοῦτο παρασκευάζειν τοῖς ἑλομένοις αὐτὸν 
. ’ XN Ν » ’ , ¥ δ, 
στρατηγόν. καὶ γὰρ οὔτε κάλλιον τούτου ἄλλο ῥάδιον 
lal ¥ A 
εὑρεῖν οὔτε αἴσχιον τοῦ ἐναντίου." 


ν la A 5 
ἵνα πρὸς τοῦτο αὐτοῖς ἡγεμόνες ὦσι. 


καὶ οὕτως ἐπισκοπῶν 
’ » 3 A ε ’ 3 ’ \ Ν ¥ ’ 
2δτίς εἴη ἀγαθοῦ ἡγεμόνος ἀρετή, τὰ μὲν ἄλλα περιΐήρει, 
κατέλιπε δὲ τὸ εὐδαίμονας ποιεῖν ὧν ἂν ἡγῆται. 
Κ ὶ ε A δέ ε , 78 , 2% (ὃ 3 
al LTTapKYELV O€ τινι ῃρημένῳ οἶδά ποτε αὐτὸν τοιάδε 
ὃ θέ «Ὗ RS ne ΟΣ M4 > A es 
ιαλεχθέντα: “'Eyous av,” ἔφη, “ὦ νεανία, εἰπεῖν ἡμῖν 
ὅτου ἕνεκα ἐπεθύμησας ἱππαρχεῖν; οὐ γὰρ δὴ τοῦ πρῶ- 


Ae , 2 ΄ \ δ ee , , 
TOS Τῶν UTTTEWV eNavvely: καὶ yap οι ἱπποτοξόται τουτου 


βασιλεὺς ἀγαθὸς ἂν εἴη. ---- προεστήκοι : 
should conduct. 

3. ἑαυτοῦ : it is not necessary to 
supply μόνου, as the sole aim in choos- 
ing him was the welfare of the peo- 
ple. Ashe would naturally, however, 
care for his own interest, ἵνα καί 
appropriately follows. —kal, δέ: and 
also. Cf. i. 1. 3. 

4. στρατηγόν : is not redundant, 
but refers with emphasis to τὸν 
στρατηγοῦντα. --- κάλλιον, αἴσχιον : 
const. with ἄλλο, the obj. of εὑρεῖν. 
—TG μὲν ἄλλα περιήρει κτλ. : ‘‘dis- 
missing consideration of all other 
qualities, he emphasized only this, 
that a general must provide for the 
welfare of those under him.’’ On 
περιήρει, κατέλιπε, Cf. τῶν πολεμικῶν 
περιελὼν καὶ τὸ τόξῳ μελετᾶν καὶ ἀκοντίῳ 


κατέλιπε τοῦτο μόνον αὐτοῖς τὸ σὺν 
μαχαίρᾳ μάχεσθαι Cyr. ii. τ. 21. 

3. The commander of cavalry 
must himself see that his horses are 
in good condition. His men must 
be trained in riding and in prompt 
obedience. The leader must above all 
be able to do anything he requires of 
his men; and must know how to 
stimulate by words the ambition of 
his subordinates. 

1. twrapxetv: in Athens, two 
commanders of cavalry (ἵππαρχοι) 
were chosen in addition to the ten 
generals of infantry. Xenophon has 
left us a special treatise (Ἱππαρχικός) 
on the duties of the hipparchs. —od 
yap δή: for surely not. — τοῦ ἐλαύ- 
γειν: sc. ἕνεκα. For the articular 
inf., see on i, 1. 12. --- ἱπποτοξόται: 


138 EENOSONTOS AITOMNHMONEYMATA TI. 3. 


Bye ἀξιοῦνται: προελαύνουσι γοῦν Kal τῶν ἱππάρχων." 
“᾿Αληθῆ λέγεις," edn. 
γε: ἐπεὶ καὶ οἱ μαινόμενοί γε ὑπὸ πάντων γιγνώσκονται.᾽" 
«“᾿Αληθές," 


ε Ν » ΄ Ὁ / ’ x , ὃ A \ 
ἱππικὸν OLeL TH πόλει βέλτιον ἀν ποιήσας παραὸδοῦναι, καὶ 


“᾿Αλλὰ μὴν οὐδὲ τοῦ γνωσθῆναί 


ἔφη, “καὶ τοῦτο λέγεις. “᾿Αλλ᾽ ἄρα ὅτι τὸ 
0 » , , e ᾿» » e 4 3 θ a 
10εἰ TLS χρεία γίγνοιτο ἱππέων, τούτων Ἡγούμενος ἀγαθοῦ 
“Kat pada " ἔφη 
>} © 

a3 K Ἃ y» “ν »5» Ὁ}λ» ε , (a4 λ ’ἢ 5A ὃ , 
αἱ ἐστι ye νὴ Al, ἔφη O Σωκράτης, καλὸν, ἐὰν δύνῃ 


¥ , “ ’ 3) 
τινος αἴτιος γενέσθαι τῇ πόλει; 


ἡ δὲ ἀρχή που ἐφ᾽ ἣν ἤρησαι, ἵππων TE 
Ἴθι δὴ 
16 λέξον ἡμῖν τοῦτο πρῶτον, ὅπως διανοῇ τοὺς ἵππους βελ- 
καὶ ὅς, “᾿Αλλὰ 


25m 53 ἃς » <2 3 Ν 
ἐμὸν οἶμαι τὸ ἔργον εἶναι, ἀλλὰ 


ταῦτα ποιῆσαι. 
N a ¥ 5. ¥ 
καὶ ἀμβατῶν ἐστιν; “Ἔστι yap οὖν," én. 
/ ΜᾺ ” a dat) elt: 2 (43 > 
τίους ποιῆσαι; τοῦτο μέν," ἔφη, “οὐκ 
350.2, "4 A la) 
ἰδίᾳ ἕκαστον δεῖν τοῦ 
“ιν A SaaS ἄμ, ὅδ᾽ ὦ ε , 
ἑαυτοῦ ἵππου ἐπιμελεῖσθαι. “Ἐὰν οὖν, ἔφη ὁ Σωκρά- 
Ψ Ν ν Ν Y 
τῆς, “παρέχωνταΐ σοι τοὺς ἵππους οἱ μὲν οὕτως κακό- 
x A "ἡ 3 ‘al e \ Ψ 3 ’ 
2οποδας ἢ κακοσκελεῖς ἢ ἀσθενεῖς, οἱ δὲ οὕτως ἀτρόφους, 
ν Ν ὃ "4 θ 3 λ A “ ε δὲ ψ 3 ’ 
ὥστε μὴ δύνασθαι ἀκολουθεῖν, οἱ δὲ οὕτως ἀναγώγους 
9 Ἂς , ν x Ἁ ’ ε δὲ Wh 4 λ Ν. 
ὦστε μὴ μένειν ὅπου ἂν σὺ τάξῃς, οἱ δὲ οὕτως λακτιστὰς 
ν \ 4, Ν iy 4 A 2 nan » 
ὦστε μηδὲ τάξαι δυνατὸν εἶναι, τί σοι τοῦ ἱππικοῦ ὄφελος 
» XK A , 39 ’ 
ἔσται; ἢ πῶς δυνήσῃ τοιούτων ἡγούμενος ἀγαθόν τι 
A beg 3 A 
2 ποιῆσαι τὴν πόλιν;" καὶ ὅς, “᾿Αλλὰ καλῶς τε λέγεις," 


» “ \ 4 ἴω 9 9 X ὃ ‘ 
ἔφη, και πειράσομαι TWV UTT@MV ες TO VVQATOV 


a body of mounted archers, 200 in by ‘apocope’ from ἀναβατῶν. So 


number, thrown out as light skir- 
mishers in advance of the main 
army.— τοῦ γνωσθῆναι : for the sake 
of becoming known. —émel καί : cf. 
ii. 8. 5. 

2. GAN ἄρα: sc. ἱππαρχεῖν ἐπεθύ- 
μησας. --- ἂν παραδοῦναι : sc. εἰ ἱππαρ- 
χοίης. ---πού : I suppose, with a touch 
of irony. Cf. ὅτι μὲν γὰρ ἐκ τῆς 
χειρὸς δεῖ ῥίπτεσθαι τὸ σπέρμα καὶ σύ 
mov οἷσθα Oec. xvii. 7. —GpBarav: 


ἀνάμβατος Cyr. iv. 5.46. See 6. 53; 
H. 84 D. — yap οὖν : yes, of course. 
For ydp, see on i. 4. 9. 

3. τοῦτο (after ἀλλά) : connect 
with τὸ pyov. —i8lq: ‘* for himself.’’ 

4. οἱ μέν, ot δέ: the well-to-do 
citizens of Athens were expected to 
serve in the cavalry, and to furnish 
their own horses. See Gow, Com- 
panion to School Classics, p. 128. 
— καλῶς τε λέγεις, Kal πειράσομαι : 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA 


ETE. ©. 139 


Α Ἀ 
ἐπιμελεῖσθαι." “Tide; τοὺς ἱππέας οὐκ ἐπιχειρήσεις," ἔφη, 


~ 3) 
“βελτίονας ποιῆσαι; 


“ "Eyoy,” ἔφη. 


“Οὐκοῦν πρῶτον 


Ἢ 9 ΄, — oh ΧΦ ἦν , + pees 

μὲν ἀναβατικωτέρους ἐπὶ τοὺς ἵππους ποιήσεις αὐτούς; 
a ‘ Ἃ » A A 

80 “Δεῖ γοῦν, ἔφη " “καὶ yap εἴ τις αὐτῶν καταπέσοι, μᾶλ- 


x Ψ ’ 
λον ἄν οὕτω σῴζοιτο." 


ςς 4 4 3. 7 ὃ 4 
Tt yap; ἐᾶν που Kivdvvevev 


, , ee \ , ΔΝ \ ¥ 
δέῃ, πότερον ἐπάγειν τους πολεμίους ἐπι τὴν ἄμμον 


, ¥ 27 e , a , κ᾿ ΄, 
κελεύσεις, ἔνθαπερ εἰώθατε ἱππεύειν, ἢ πειράσῃ τὰς μελέ. 


39 , A Y 3 ν ε / 
TAS ἐν TOLOVUTOLS ποιεῖσθαι χώριοις, εν Οιοίσίπερ οι πόλε- 


35 μοι γίγνονται; “Βέλτιον your,” ey. 


“Τί γάρ; τοῦ 


4 ε ᾽ὕὔ 3 A ~ ν 3 4 , 
βάλλειν ws πλείστους ἀπὸ τῶν ἵππων ἐπιμέλειάν τινα 


Ya .»? 
ποιήσῃ; 


lal A lal 
“Βέλτιον your,” ἔφη, “Kat τοῦτο." 


“Θήγειν 


\ Ν Ν “A e 4 \ 3 Χ' A ‘\ 
δὲ Tas ψυχὰς τῶν ἱππέων καὶ ἐξοργίζειν πρὸς τοὺς πολε- 


᾽’ὔ ν 5 , A ὃ ’ 3) 
μίους, ἅπερ ἀλκιμωτέρους ποιεῖ, διανενόησαι; 
40 μή, ἀλλὰ νῦν γε πειράσομαι, ἔφη. 


“Ei δὲ 
ν 
“Ὅπως δέ σοι 


’,ὕ δ. κα A , ’ ¥ Ν Ν 4, 
πείθωνται οι LITTTELS, TEP POVTLKAS TL; AVEV γὰρ δὴ Τουτου 


» ν ¥ ε , 3 ~ ἃ 3 ’ > A 3, 
οὔτε ἵππων οὔτε ἱππέων ἀγαθῶν καὶ ἀλκίμων οὐδὲν ode- 


” 


dos. 


“᾿Αληθῆ λέγεις, ἔφη: “ἀλλὰ πῶς ἂν τις μάλιστα, 


“ uA Ἀν ον A _ > Ν , ” “6? A 
@ Σώκρατες, ἐπὶ τουτο GUTOUS προτρέψαιτο: Εκεινο 


“Cf. ἀλλὰ δέχομαί τε καὶ τοῦτο ἔστω 
Ane 3.3. 17: 

5. ἀναβατικωτέρους: cf. πρῶτον 
μὲν τοὺς ἱππέας ἀσκητέον, ὅπως ἐπὶ τοὺς 
ἵππους ἀναπηδᾶν (to leap on) δύνων- 
ται Hipp. i. κ5. --- καταπέσοι ; the 
Greek rider sat without stirrups, on 
the horse’s bare back; and hence 
had to reckon with the danger of 
falling off, in case of attack. In the 
encouraging speech which Xenophon 
makes to his men (An. iii. 2. 19), he 
emphasizes this danger as a weak 
point of the enemy’s cavalry. 

6. τὴν ἄμμον : sandy ground, 
the race-track.—% πειράσῃ . . . 
γίγνονται : cf. δεύτερον δέ, ὅπως ἐν 


παντοίοις χωρίοις ἱππάζεσθαι δυνή- 
σονται. καὶ γὰρ οἱ πολέμιοι ἄλλοτε ἐν 
ἀλλοίοις τόποις γίγνονται (appear) 
Hipp. i. 5. —BéArvov: refers to the 
second of the two suggestions. 

7. τοῦ βάλλειν : obj. gen. with 
ἐπιμέλειαν. --- ὡς πλείστους : subj. of 
βάλλειν. Cf. Hipp. i. 6. ---- ἀλλὰ νῦν 
ye: like at in Lat., ἀλλά sometimes 
follows a cond. sent. in the sense of 
yet at any rate. G. 1422; H. 1046, 
2 (a). 

8. πείθωνται: cf. ἐκ τούτων mapa- 
σκευαστέον, ὅπως εὐπειθεῖς of ἄνδρες 
wow Hipp. i. 7. 

9. On the passage, ο΄. Hipp. iv. 
4. — ἐκεῖνο : see on ii. 4. 1. 


140  SENO®QNTOS AIITOMNHMONEYMATA ΓΤ. 3. 


\ , 5 Ψ 2 \ , τῶν , 
45 μεν δήπου οἶσθα, ὅτι ἐν παντὶ πραγματι οι ἄνθρωποι του- 
Ἂ x a) 
τοις μάλιστα ἐθέλουσι πείθεσθαι ovs ἂν ἡγῶνται βελτί-: 
5 Ν Ἂ x A 
στους εἶναι. καὶ yap ἐν νόσῳ ὃν ἂν ἡγῶνται ἰατρικώτατον 
i , ΄ ΄, ΝΡ. aA Δ x 
εἶναι, τούτῳ μάλιστα πείθονται, καὶ ἐν πλῷ ὃν ἂν κυβερ- 
\ 
νητικώτατον, καὶ ἐν γεωργίᾳ ὃν ἂν γεωργικώτατον." 
50 “Καὶ pada,” ἔφη. 
ἃ x , > Ν ’ a A A , , 
ὃς ἂν μάλιστα εἰδὼς φαίνηται ἃ Set ποιεῖν, τούτῳ μάλιστα 


“Οὐκοῦν εἰκός," ἔφη, “Kat ἐν ἱππικῇ 
¥ ΡῚ - 
ἐθέλειν τοὺς ἄλλους πείθεσθαι. “Ἐὰν οὖν," ἔφη, “ ἐγώ, ὦ 10 
’ὔ’ , x > A “ S > , 
Σώκρατες, βέλτιστος ὧν αὐτῶν δῆλος ὦ, ἀρκέσει μοι 


ἴω > ἈΝ ’ > Ἁ 3 FF? 
TOUTO εἰς TO πείθεσθαι αὐυτοὺυς εμοιυι:;: 


““Eav γε πρὸς 
δῦ TOUT, ἔφη, “διδάξῃς αὐτοὺς ὡς τὸ πείθεσθαί σοι κάλ- 

λιόν τε καὶ σωτηριώτερον αὐτοῖς ἔσται. “Πῶς οὖν," 
ἔφη, “τοῦτο διδάξω;" 


“4 , 5 Ν Ν A > “A 3 ’, a 
σοι δέοι διδάσκειν ως TA KAKA Τῶν ἀγαθῶν αμεινω και 


“Πολὺ νὴ At’,” ἔφη, “ῥᾷον ἢ εἴ 
λυσιτελέστερά ἐστι. “Λέγεις, ἔφη, “ σὺ τὸν ἵππαρχον 11 
N a » 9 A ὃ a Ν al , ὃ 4 

60 πρὸς τοῖς ἄλλοις ἐπιμελεῖσθαι δεῖν Kal τοῦ λέγειν δύνα- 


θ > gg wad δ᾽ » 5) Κ ες ee ne A x 
σθαι; Σὺ δ᾽ ῴου,᾽ ἔφη, “χρῆναι σιωπῇ ἱππαρχεῖν; ἢ 
οὐκ ἐντεθύμησαι ὅτι ὅσα τε νόμῳ μεμαθήκαμεν κάλλιστα 

ΕΣ 959 5 A 9 ’ὔ A ’ Ν / 
ὄντα, du’ ὧν γε ζῆν ἐπιστάμεθα, ταῦτα πάντα διὰ λόγου 
5 , Ν » » Ν ’ 3 Ν 
ἐμάθομεν, καὶ εἴ τι ἄλλο καλὸν μανθάνει τις μάθημα, διὰ 

’ὔ 4 Ν ἘΠ Ψ 4 4 ᾽ὔ 
65 λόγου μανθάνει, καὶ οἱ ἄριστα διδάσκοντες μάλιστα λόγῳ 


a \ Ν ’ 4 
χρῶνται, καὶ οἱ TA σπουδαιότατα μάλιστα ἐπιστάμενοι 


10. εἰς τὸ πείθεσθαι αὐτοὺς ἐμοί : 
to secure me their obedience. — ἐάν γε: 
yes, if. — διδάξω : for the interr. subjyv., 
see on i. 2. 36. — On the passage, cf. 
els ye μὴν τὸ εὐπειθεῖς εἶναι τοὺς ἀρχο- 
μένους μέγα μὲν καὶ τὸ λόγῳ διδάσκειν 
ὅσα ἀγαθὰ ἔνι ἐν τῷ πειθαρχεῖν, μέγα δὲ 
καὶ τὸ ἔργῳ [κατὰ τὸν νόμον] πλεονεκτεῖν 
μὲν ποιεῖν τοὺς εὐτάκτους, μειονεκτεῖν δὲ 
ἐν πᾶσι τοὺς ἀτακτοῦντας Hipp. i. 24. 
᾿ 11, ἐπιμελεῖσθαι δεῖν καὶ τοῦ 

λέγειν δύνασθαι : should cultivate also 


the ability to speak. For the artic- 
ular inf. with ἐπιμελεῖσθαι, see GMT. 
793, 1798. ---- ὅσα te: correlative with 
καὶ εἴ τι ἄλλο. --- νόμῳ : more, ‘as 
laid down by law and custom.’’ — 
{av: ‘‘to order our lives,’’ in the 
best sense. — διὰ λόγου : cf. ἑρμηνείαν, 
δὲ ἧς iv. 3. 12. --- μάθημα : i.e. what 
one is impelled by his own taste 
to learn. — ἄριστα: adverb. — τὰ 
σπουδαιότατα: matters of greatest 
importance. 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA III. 3. 


141 


κάλλιστα διαλέγονται; ἢ τόδε οὐκ ἐντεθύμησαι, ὡς ὅταν 12 
.γε χορὸς εἷς ἐκ τῆσδε τῆς πόλεως γίγνηται, ὥσπερ 6 
εἰς Δῆλον πεμπόμενος, οὐδεὶς ἄλλοθεν οὐδαμόθεν τούτῳ 


᾿χοἐφάμιλλος γίγνεται οὐδὲ εὐανδρία ἐν ἄλλῃ πόλει ὁμοία 


ἄν τ ὦ ’ ’ ” 
τῇ ἐνθάδε συνάγεται; 


“᾿Αληθῆ λέγεις," ἔφη. 


«Αλλὰ 18 


\ mA > ΄ a) ὃ / > a a) 
μὴν οὔτε εὐφωνίᾳ τοσοῦτον διαφέρουσιν ᾿Αθηναῖοι τῶν 
ἄλλ υ ΐ εγέθει καὶ ῥώμῃ ὅ φιλοτιμί 

@V OUTE σωμάτων μεγ καὶ ῥώμῃ ὅσον φιλοτιμίᾳ, 
9 , f Ν. Ν ‘\ Ἁ νΨ» ” 
ἥπερ μάλιστα παροξύνει πρὸς τὰ καλὰ Kal ἔντιμα. 


15 “᾿Αληθές,᾽ ἔφη, “καὶ τοῦτο. 


a) » 4.4). ἊΨ \ ‘al 
“Οὐκοῦν οἴει," ἔφη, “Kat τοῦ 14 


ε al an 3 , » 3 , ε ΑΓ ἃ Ν 4 
ἱππικοῦ Tov ἐνθάδε εἴτις ἐπιμεληθείη, ὡς πολὺ ἂν καὶ τούτῳ 


, vas Ξ Y \ 9 a Q 
διενέγκοιεν τῶν ἄλλων, ὅπλων τε καὶ ἵππων παρασκενῇ καὶ 


> , eM. ay pe ΄ \ ‘ ΄, > 
εὐταξίᾳ KQL τῳ ETOLLWS κινδυνεύειν προς τους πολεμίους, ει 


A cal ἃ a 
νομίσειαν ταῦτα ποιοῦντες ἐπαίνου καὶ τιμῆς τεύξεσθαι; 


80“ Εἰκός ye,” ἔφη. 


3 ”» “A 
“My τοίνυν oxve, ἔφη, “ἀλλὰ πειρῶ 16 


Ν ¥ ae +X aA 4 δ κι" OS Φὺν ΟΝ 3 
τοὺς ἄνδρας ἐπὶ ταῦτα προτρέπειν ἀφ᾽ ὧν αὐτός τε ὠφε- 
λήσῃ καὶ οἱ ἄλλοι πολῖται διὰ σέ. “᾿Αλλὰ νὴ Δία 


’ b) ἂν 
πειράσομαι," ἔφη. 


12. χορὸς eis: contrasted with 
οὐδεὶς ἄλλοθεν οὐδαμόθεν. ““ΝΟΠΘ of 
the numerous choruses sent by the 
various states can compete with the 
one sent from Athens.’’ Every four 
years festival delegations, including 
choruses, were sent to Delos from 
the different states of Hellas, in 
honor of Apollo and Artemis. — 
evavipia: ‘‘a collection of fine- 
looking men.’’ The handsomest 
men were chosen to head the proces- 
sion. So, also, at the Panathenaic 
festival, the θαλλοφόροι (bearers of 
the sacred olive branch) were chosen 
from among the finest-looking old 
men. Cf. θαλλοφόρους yap τῇ ᾿Αθηνᾷ 
τοὺς καλοὺς γέροντας ἐκλέγονται Sym. 
iv. 17. 


13. ἀλλὰ μὴν κτλ. : the thought 
of the passage is, that the Athenians 
excel all other Greeks in sweetness 
of voice (εὐφωνίᾳ, referring back 
to xopés) and in physical beauty - 
(σωμάτων μεγέθει καὶ ῥώμῃ, referring 
to εὐανδρία), and, above all, in am- 
bition (φιλοτιμίᾳ), the motive to all 
noble action. Cf. iii. 5. 3. 

14. ὡς : uncommon after οἶμαι, 
ὅτι being the usual conjunction. 
Cf. Hell. vi. 3. 12. — τούτῳ : antici- 
pative, referring to ὅπλων τε καὶ 
ἵππων παρασκευῇ κτλ. See 6. 1005; 
H. 696 a. — διενέγκοιεν : sc. of 
᾿Αθηναῖοι. 

15. ὄκνει : ἀοίαψ. --- ὠφελήσῃ: fut. 
mid. for passive. Cf. ii. 7. 8.— 
ἀλλὰ νὴ Ala: see on ii. 7. 11. 


142 


EENO®ONTOS ATIOMNHMONEYMATA ΓΤ. 4. 


Ἰδὼν δέ ποτε Νικομαχίδην ἐξ ἀρχαιρεσιῶν ἀπιόντα 4 


ἤρετο" “Τίνες, ὦ Νικομαχίδη, στρατηγοὶ ἤρηνται;" 


Ν 
και 


3 A > al 
ὅς, “Οὐ yap,” ἔφη, “ὦ Σώκρατες, τοιοῦτοί εἰσιν ᾿Αθηναῖοι, 
ν ν a) 
ὥστε ἐμὲ μὲν οὐχ εἵλοντο, OS EK καταλόγου στρατευόμε- 


δ νος κατατέτριμμαι καὶ λοχαγῶν καὶ ταξιαρχῶν καὶ τραύ- 
ματα ὑπὸ τῶν πολεμίων τοσαῦτα ἔχω," --- ἅμα δὲ καὶ τὰς 


3 \ A “4 > 4 3 ἥδιον ἃ 
οὐλὰς τῶν τραυμάτων ἀπογυμνούμενος ἐπεδείκνυεν ---- 


Ψ ¥ 
«᾿Αντισθένην δέ; ἔφη, “εἵλοντο, τὸν οὔτε ὁπλίτην πώποτε 


᾽ὔ » A ε “A ὑδὲ 7 λ 
στρατευσάμενον ἐν TE TOLS ππευσιν OVOEV περίβ ΕἾΤΤΟΨΝ 


΄, 3 , , ¥y 9QA Ἃ , d 
10ποιήσαντα ἐπιστάμενόν TE ἄλλο οὐδὲν ἢ χρήματα συλλέ 


3) 
γειν; 


» ”» e ᾿ , A Q Ψ 
“Οὔκουν, ἔφη ὁ Σωκράτης, “τοῦτο μὲν ἀγαθόν, εἴ 2 


A 4 e Ν » Ἂς 3 Ἂ" / 3) 
γε τοῖς στρατιώταις ἱκανὸς ἔσται τὰ ἐπιτήδεια πορίζειν ; 
a3 Ν Ν ε » 3) » ε (ὃ (a4 7 

Kat yap ot ἔμποροι," ἔφη ὁ Νικομαχίδης, “χρήματα 


4. Nicomachides complains that 
in the election of generals the Athe- 
nians have ignored him, an experi- 
enced officer, and have chosen a man 
who has no knowledge of war. But 
Socrates urges that a man who can 
successfully equip and train a chorus, 
and especially a man who can suc- 
cessfully manage his own house, 
- must possess qualities which will ren- 
der him a useful general; for the 
demands on ability are essentially the 
same in all these positions. 

1. στρατηγοί : predicate. — od 
yap τοιοῦτοί εἰσιν ᾿Αθηναῖοι : ‘now 
is not that just like the Athenians ἢ" 
—ék καταλόγου στρατευόμενος : ‘in 
serving the State as a private soldier 
on the list.*” The κατάλογος was 
the roll which contained the name 
of every Athenian capable of bear- 
ing arms. It will be noticed that 
- Nicomachides bases his claim to be 
chosen general simply on his long 


service as private, captain, and 
colonel. — κατατέτριμμαι : 1 have 
worn myself out. Cf. the Lat. 
detritus. — λοχαγῶν, ταξιαρχῶν : 
circumstantial participles with κατα- 
τέτριμμαι. ---- ὑπό: takes the gen. of 
agent, aS τραύματα ἔχω is equiv- 
alent to τετραυμάτισμαι. --- ἅμα . . - 
ἐπεδείκνυεν : cf. nudasse deinde 
se dicitur et quo quaeque 
bello vulnera accepta essent, 
retulisse Livy xlv. 39. —’Avr- 
σθένην : like Nicomachides, un- 
known. — ἐν ἱππεῦσιν : the ἱππεῖς 
or knights were the second of the 
four property classes established 
by Solon. See Schémann, Antigq. 
of Greece, p. 329. — περίβλεπτον : 
cf. the Lat. respectabilis. — 
τέ: correlative with οὔτε, as in i. 
2. 47. 

2. οὔκουν: as in i. 4. 5. — 
ἔμποροι : traders, i.e. importers, not 
retailers. 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA III. 4. 143 


, e 74 > 5 3 3 4 4 Ν 
συλλέγειν ἱκανοΐ εἰσιν" ἀλλ᾽ οὐχ ἕνεκα τούτου καὶ στρα- 
ιὅ τηγεῖν δύναιντ᾽ ay.” καὶ ὁ Σωκράτης ἔφη: “᾿Αλλὰ καὶ 
φιλόνικος ᾿Αντισθένης ἐστίν, ὃ στρατηγῷ προσεῖναι 
ἐπιτήδειόν ἐστιν: οὐχ ὁρᾷς OTL καὶ ὁσάκις κεχορήγηκε, 
πᾶσι τοῖς χοροῖς νενίκηκε; “Ma At,” ἔφη ὁ Νικομα- 
χίδης, “ ἀλλ᾽ οὐδὲν ὅμοιόν ἐστι χοροῦ τε καὶ στρατεύμα- 
\ , 
20T0s προεστάναι." “Kat μήν, ἔφη ὁ Σωκράτης, “ οὐδὲ 
ὠδῆς γε ὁ ᾿Αντισθένης οὐδὲ χορῶν διδασκαλίας ἔμπειρος 
ὧν ὅμως ἐγένετο ἱκανὸς εὑρεῖν τοὺς κρατίστους ταῦτα." 
“Kal ἐν τῇ στρατιᾷ οὖν, ἔφη ὁ Νικομαχίδης, “ἄλλους 
\ e 7 Ἀ ’ὔ > θ᾽ ε nw χλλ δὲ ‘ 

μὲν εὑρήσει TOUS τάξοντας ἀνθ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ, ἄλλους δὲ τοὺς 
25 μαχουμένους." “Οὐκοῦν, ἔφη ὁ Σωκράτης, “ἐάν ye καὶ 
ἐν τοῖς πολεμικοῖς τοὺς κρατίστους, ὥσπερ ἐν τοῖς χορι- 
κοῖς, ἐξευρίσκῃ τε καὶ προαιρῆται, εἰκότως ἂν καὶ τούτου 
νικηφόρος εἴη: καὶ δαπανᾶν δ᾽ αὐτὸν εἰκὸς μᾶλλον ἂν 
352 72 3 Ν Ἃ ν ah / A aA , xX 
ἐθέλειν εἰς THY σὺν ὅλῃ TH πόλει τῶν πολεμικῶν νίκην ἢ 
80εἰς τὴν σὺν τῇ φυλῇ τῶν χορικῶν." “Λέγεις ov,” ἔφη, 
8. ὅ: a quality which, refers to «--- ἐγένετο ἱκανός : proved himself 
φιλόνικος. Cf. 5. 3.—Kexophynke: it competent. — τοὺς κρατίστους ταῦτα : 
was the duty of the χορηγός to equip those who were most skilled in these 
and train a chorus to represent his matters, sc. ᾧδήν and διδασκαλία». ---- 
tribe (φυλή) at public festivals. καί, οὖν : and so, also. — ἄλλους μέν, 
This was one of the regular public τοὺς rdfovras: some who will draw 

services (λειτουργία) imposed on up (the troops). 
wealthy citizens. See on ii. 7. 6.— 5. ἐάν ye: provided that. — ἐὰν 
μὰ Δία: see on i. 4. 9. --- τὲ καί; ἐξευρίσκῃ, ἂν νικηφόρος εἴη : for the 
the Eng. idiom uses a simple and. form of cond. sent., see on ii. 5. 4. 
Cf. iii. 7. 4; iv. 4. 12. So Cicero —vrovtrov: instead of the preceding 
(Tusc. Disp. v. 3. 9) similem_ τοῖς πολεμικοῖς, a generic word of 
sibi videri vitam hominum _ similar meaning is to be supplied as 


et mercatum eum qui habere-_ the antec. of the demonstrative. So 
tur maximo ludorum appa- in ii. 2. 4. --- καί, δέ: see oni. 1. 3. 


ratu totius Graeciae cele- —ow τῇ φυλῇ: see on 3. Attica 
britate. was then divided into ten tribes, 
4, καὶ μήν: see on i. 4. 12.— named after legendary national 


@5fjs: song, i.e. music in general. heroes. 


144 EENO®QNTOS AITOMNHMONEYMATA T. 4. 


“cc 


5 ε A fa) > fal 
ὦ Σώκρατες, ὡς τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἀνδρός ἐστι χορηγεῖν τε 
A Ἀ A ” (ς 4 » δε ἑν “lt 9 
“καλῶς καὶ στρατηγεῖν; Λέγω eywy,” ἔφη, “ὡς ὅτου 
: Ν Ὁ “ Ν a 
ἄν τις προστατεύῃ, ἐὰν γιγνώσκῃ τε ὧν δεῖ Kal ταῦτα 
’ὔ 4 > Ἂν x » 4 » ἴω 
πορίζεσθαι δύνηται, ἀγαθὸς ἂν εἴη προστάτης, εἴτε χοροῦ 
¥ ¥ 
35 εἴτε οἴκου εἴτε πόλεως εἴτε στρατεύματος προστατεύοι.᾽" 
’ ἣν » 
Kat ὁ Νικομαχίδης, “Ma Δί, ἔφη, “ὦ Σώκρατες, οὐκ av 
» A A ε ἣν 
ποτε ᾧμην ἐγὼ σοῦ ἀκοῦσαι ὡς οἱ ἀγαθοὶ οἰκονόμοι 
᾿ A (Ὁ > 3) » ’ 
ἀγαθοὶ στρατηγοὶ ἂν εἶεν. “Ἴθι δή, ἔφη, “ἐξετάσωμεν 
a 9 σι 
τὰ ἔργα ἑκατέρου αὐτῶν, ἵνα εἰδῶμεν πότερον τὰ αὐτά 
x 4 γτν lal Ph Pie 2 
40 ἐστιν ἢ διαφέρει τι. “Πάνυ ye,” ἔφη. “Οὐκοῦν, ἔφη, 
rom: A 
“τὸ μὲν τοὺς ἀρχομένους κατηκόους τε καὶ εὐπειθεῖς 
ε A 4 > 4 3 Ψ » 3) (a4 ἃ 
ἑαυτοῖς παρασκευάζειν ἀμφοτέρων ἐστὶν ἔργον; Καὶ 
΄ὕ 5) »¥ «wn? δέ Ν , Y A 3 
para,” ἔφη. “Τί δέ, τὸ προστάττειν ἕκαστα τοῖς ἐπιτη- 
ae , % οὐδὲ \ A>) »¥ ἐς \ \ ke 
Selous πράττειν; Kat τοῦτ, edn. “Kat μὴν καὶ τὸ 
Ν Ν Ν A 
45 TOUS κακοὺς κολάζειν Kal τοὺς ἀγαθοὺς τιμᾶν ἀμφοτέ 
5 , \ “ 33. »ν \ 
pots οἶμαι προσήκειν. “Πάνυ μὲν οὖν," ἔφη. “Τὸ de 
τοὺς ὑπηκόους εὐμενεῖς ποιεῖσθαι πῶς οὐ καλὸν ἀμφο- 
Ν rae De} ΝΣ, od 4 \ Ν 
τέροις ;" “Καὶ τοῦτ᾽, ἔφη. “Συμμάχους δὲ καὶ βοηθοὺς 
’ A a ΕἾ 
προσάγεσθαι δοκεῖ σοι συμφέρειν ἀμφοτέροις ἢ ov;” 
\ = ¥ 3 \ N A »” 
50“ Πάνυ μὲν οὖν, ἔφη. “᾿Αλλὰ φυλακτικοὺς τῶν ὄντων 
“" 3.3) τς 
οὐκ ἀμφοτέρους εἶναι προσήκει ;" “Σφόδρα γ᾽," ἔφη. 
ἴω a “ Ν “a 
“Οὐκοῦν καὶ ἐπιμελεῖς Kat φιλοπόνους ἀμφοτέρους εἶναι 
’ὕ Ν Ν ε “A » 3) a4 Lal ’ὕ bb) » 
προσήκει περὶ τὰ αὑτῶν ἔργα; Ταῦτα μέν, ἔφη, 
6. τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἀνδρός ἐστι : it is in 8. τοὺς ἀρχομένους : their subor- 


the nature of the same man. Forthe dinates. —éxacra: every duty. — 
pred. gen. of characteristic, see on πράττειν : for the inf. of purpose, 


τῶν ἀσκούντων i. 2. 10. --- ἐὰν γιγνώ- see on παιδεῦσαι i. 5. 2. — οἶμαι : 

σκῃ; ἀγαθὸς ἂν εἴη : see on 5. affirmative, instead of the usual 
7. οὐκ ἂν ᾧμην : for the potential Socratic question. 

indic., see GMT. 243, 244. Cf. θᾶττον 9. προσάγεσθαι : to attach to 


ἢ ws τις ἂν ero An.i. κ5. 8. -- ἀκοῦσαι: themselves. — φυλακτικοὺς τῶν ὄντων: 
since ᾧμην is here ἃ verb of expecting, watchful of their property. (Cf. 
the inf. is not in indirect discourse. [1]. 1. 6. ----ὠὠὀμφοτέρους εἶναι προσήκει: 
For its tense, see G. 1286; H. 948a. the impers. προσήκει here takes the 


10 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA III. 4. 


145 


rT eae « uae ,ὕ > , 3 ΄ 3 \ Ν ΄ 
TAVTA ομοιως ἀμφοτέρων ἐστιν" ἀλλὰ ΤΟ μάχεσθαι 


5B οὐκέτι ἀμφοτέρων." 
γίγνονται;" 


’ 4 > ΄, / 3) 
. περιγενέσθαι τούτων ἀμφοτέροις συμφέρει ; 


“PANN? ἐχθροί γέ τοι ἀμφοτέροις 
“Καὶ pada,” ἔφη, “τοῦτό ye.” 


“Οὐκοῦν τὸ 
’ὕ 
“Πάνυ ye,” 11 


ἔφη: “ἀλλ᾽ ἐκεῖνο παρίης, ἂν δέῃ μάχεσθαι, τί ὠφελήσει 


ε 3 7) 
ἢ οἰκονομικὴ ; 


“Evtav0a δήπου καὶ πλεῖστον," ἔφη: 


60 “ὁ γὰρ ἀγαθὸς οἰκονόμος, εἰδὼς ὅτι οὐδὲν οὕτω λυσιτελές 


Ἁ , 3 ε ε Ν / ‘ , 
τε Kal κερδαλέον ἐστὶν ὡς TO μαχόμενον τοὺς πολεμίους 


“A > \ 7 > , \ ~ ε Ἂς 
νικᾶν, οὐδὲ οὕτως ἀλυσιτελές τε καὶ ζημιῶδες ὡς τὸ 
ἡττᾶσθαι, προθύμως μὲν τὰ πρὸς τὸ νικἂν συμφέροντα 
ζητήσει καὶ παρασκευάσεται, ἐπιμελῶς δὲ τὰ πρὸς τὸ 
66 ἡττᾶσθαι φέροντα σκέψεται καὶ φυλάξεται, ἐνεργῶς δ᾽, 
x A = A 
ἄν τὴν παρασκευὴν ὁρᾷ νικητικὴν οὖσαν, μαχεῖται, οὐχ 
"4 δὲ , 2N\ > , εχ ΄ 
ἥκιστα δὲ τούτων, ἐὰν ἀπαράσκευος ἥ, φυλάξεται συν- 


’ 
άπτειν μάχην. 


μὴ καταφρόνει," ἔφη, “ ὦ Νικομαχίδη, τῶν 12 


> A > “A ε Ν a > ’ 3 ’ ’ 
οὐκονομίκων ἀνδρῶν. ω) γαρ τῶν ἰδίων ἐπιμέλεια πλήθει 


70 μόνον διαφέρει τῆς τῶν κοινῶν, τὰ δὲ ἄλλα παραπλήσια 


» Ν δὲ , Y ¥ » > A ᾽ὔ ἡὸ la 
EXEL, TO € μέγιστον, OTL OUTE ανεὺυ αν βώπων ου ετέερα 


_acc. and inf., in 8 the dative. For 
a similar use of the two consts. near 
each other, cf. προσήκει δὲ τοῖς μὲν 
ἄλλοις στέργειν, σὲ δὲ νομίζειν 1500. v. 
127. 

10. οὐκέτι: no longer, i.e. the 
comparison cannot hold, when fight- 
ing is in question. For a similar 
use of οὐκέτι, cf. An. i. το. 12. --- 
ἐχθροί γέ ror: enemies surely, at any 
rate. —rotré ye: 80. ἀληθές ἐστιν. 

11. ἢ οἰκονομική (sc. τέχνη) the 
art of domestic management. — 
ἐνταῦθα : in that case. — πλεῖστον 
(sc. ὠφελήσει) : will be of the greatest 
service. —@s: a8, in a comparison. 
— pax dpevov: acc. sing. masc., agree- 
ing with omitted subj. of νικᾶν. ---- οὐδ᾽ 


οὕτως: sc. τὶ from the preceding 
οὐδέν. ---οὐχ ἥκιστα δὲ τούτων : ‘and 
what. is of most importance among 
all these,’’ i.e. ** when he has made 
preparations for victory and is re- 
solved on battle under favorable 
conditions, he will yet’’ etc. For 
the ‘litotes,’ cf. i. 2. 23. — φυλάξεται 
συνάπτειν : for the inf., see on mpo- 
ἰέναι li. 6. 23. 

12. τὸ δὲ μέγιστον : the fact of 
greatest significance. For neuter 
words in apposition with a sent., 
see H. 626 b. — οὐδετέρα : neither 
sphere of action. The whole section 
shows that Socrates regarded a well- 
managed household as differing only 
in degree from a well-managed state. 


146 ZENO®QNTOS AITOMNHMONEYMATA TI. 4, 5. 


, ΣΝ Aes bod a , 
γίγνεται, οὔτε Ov ἄλλων μὲν ἀνθρώπων Ta ἴδια πράττεται, 
ΕΝ 
dv ἄλλων δὲ τὰ κοινά. οὐ γὰρ ἄλλοις τισὶν ἀνθρώποις 
οἱ τῶν κοινῶν ἐπιμελόμενοι χρῶνται ἢ οἷσπερ οἱ τὰ ἴδια 
16 οἰκονομοῦντες - οἷς οἱ ἐπιστάμενοι χρῆσθαι καὶ τὰ ἴδια 
καὶ τὰ κοινὰ καλῶς πράττουσιν, οἱ δὲ μὴ ἐπιστάμενοι 
3 , A 3) 
ἀμφοτέρωθι πλημμελοῦσιν. 

Περικλεῖ δέ ποτε τῷ τοῦ πάνυ Περικλέους υἱῷ διαλεγό- 
μενος, “᾿Εγώ τοι," ἔφη, “ὦ Περίκλεις, ἐλπίδα ἔχω σοῦ 
στρατηγήσαντος ἀμείνω τε καὶ ἐνδοξοτέραν τὴν πόλιν εἰς 
τὰ πολεμικὰ ἔσεσθαι καὶ τῶν πολεμίων κρατήσειν." καὶ 

δ ὁ Περικλῆς, “Βουλοίμην av,” ἔφη, “ὦ Σώκρατες, ἃ λέγεις" 
9 Se A , 9: “ὧν > ὃ , A ὅλου  ae , 
ὅπως δὲ ταῦτα γένοιτ᾽ av, οὐ δύναμαι γνῶναι. Βούλει 

>: 88 » ε , « ὃ / εἴ 9. A 
ouv, ἔφη ὁ Σωκράτης, ιαλογιζόμενοι περὶ αὐτῶν 


Xenophon elaborated his own views 
on household management (put- 
ting them into the mouth of 
Socrates) in a special treatise, the 
Oeconomicus. 

5. Socrates sets before the 
younger FPericles the best way to 
recall the Athenians to their pristine 
courage and energy. The successive 
reverses which the Athenians have 
suffered at the hands of the Thebans 
have demoralized their public spirit 
and obscured the undoubted fact of 
their natural superiority. Delium 
and Lebadéa (Coronéa) were severe 
lessons, but should be made profit- 
able. The citizens should, above all, 
be reminded of the lofty fame of their 
ancestors; and if that is not enough, 
they should be urged to imitate the 
steady and effective discipline of the 
Lacedaemonians. Then, too, their 
generals should be chosen with greater 
‘care than at present. Finally, Soc- 
rates expresses the hope that Pericles, 


who has been elected as one of the 
generals, has qualified himself for the 
position; and suggests that it would 
be well to employ the younger citizen 
soldiery in an effective defense of the 
Attic frontier. 

1. Περικλεῖ : third son of the 
great Pericles. His mother was of. 
foreign birth, the beautiful and ac- 
complished Aspasia of Miletus, and 
he was consequently not entitled to 
Athenian citizenship; but after the 
death of his two brothers he was 
legitimated by the Athenians and 
accepted as a citizen, for his father’s 
sake. He was one of the six 
generals who were executed for 
their failure to rescue the ship- 
wrecked crews after the battle of 
the Arginusae. See oni. 1. 18, and 
cf. Plutarch Pericles 37.— τοῦ πάνυ 
IIepuxAéovs: the celebrated Pericles. 
So οἱ πάνυ τῶν στρατιωτῶν Thue. viii. 
1. 1. --οστρατηγήσαντος : see on βου- 
Aevoas i. τ. 18, --- βούλει, ἐπισκοπῶμεν : 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA III. 5. 


147 


3 A 9 no Ν ὃ / 3 9? ἐς aN ” 
ἐπισκοπῶμεν OTTOV YOY TO OVVATOV ἐστιν; ‘“Bov ομαιυ, 


ἔφη. 


10 εἰσὶν ᾿Αθηναῖοι Βοιωτῶν ;” 


“A 53 3) 
“Οὐκοῦν οἶσθα," ἔφη, ‘ 


‘Ore πλήθει μὲν οὐδὲν μείους 
“Οἶδα γάρ," ἔφη. 


“Σώματα 


4, 3 Ἁ \ \ ἢ, 5 ἴων » , KA 
, δὲ ἀγαθὰ καὶ καλὰ πότερον ἐκ Βοιωτῶν οἴει πλείω ἂν 


ἐκλεχθῆναι ἢ ἐξ ᾿Αθηναίων ;” 


λείπεσθαι." 
4 ᾽) 
νομίζεις ; 


16 λοὶ πλεονεκτούμενοι ὑπὸ Θηβαίων δυσμενῶς 
» > la Ν SQA ε A la) ” 
ἔχουσιν, ᾿Αθήνησι δὲ οὐδὲν ὁρῶ τοιοῦτον. 


\ A 
“Οὐδὲ ταύτῃ μοι δοκοῦσι 


«( 3 /, de , ε A 5 
Kupeveotepous € ποτέρους EAUTOLS εἰναι 
“᾿Αθηναίους ἔγωγε: Βοιωτῶν μὲν yap πολ- 


αὐτοῖς 


ANAS μον 


’ὔ ’ Ν 4 , 3 ep 
ιλοτιμότατοί γε Kal μεγαλοφρονέστατοι πάντων εἰσίν, 
μ Y μεγ 


ν 9 ν 4 , e Ν 9 ld 
ἅπερ οὐχ ἥκιστα παροξύνει κινδυνεύειν ὑπὲρ εὐδοξίας τε 


\ , ” 
και πατρίδος. 


3 A 
«Οὐδὲ ἐν τούτοις ᾿Αθηναῖοι μεμπτοί." 


20 “Καὶ μὴν προγόνων γε καλὰ ἔργα οὐκ ἔστιν οἷς μείζω 


XN , e , x > 7 Ὄ Ν 9 / 
καὶ πλείω ὑπάρχει ἢ ᾿Αθηναίοις: ᾧ πολλοὶ ἐπαιρόμενοι 


ff ’, 3 A 3 “A \ » 4 
προτρέπονταί τε ἀῤετῆς ἐπιμελεῖσθαι καὶ ἄλκιμοι γίγνε- 


σθαι." 


“Tadra μὲν ἀληθῆ λέγεις πάντα, ὦ Σώκρατες" 


ἀλλ᾽ ὁρᾷς ὅτι ἀφ᾽ οὗ ἡ τε σὺν Τολμίδῃ τῶν χιλίων 


as in ii. 1. 1. ---ἶὥὔπου ἤδη τὸ δυνατόν 
ἐστι: wherein now the possibility 
lies. 

2. οὐκοῦν : see on ii. 1. 2, — ὅτι 
πλήθει κτλ. : the population of Attica 
(including slaves) was prob. not 
more than half a million; that of 
the Boeotian confederacy consider- 
ably less. 
Attica was a citizen of Athens, the 
comparison of ᾿Αθηναῖοι with Βοιωτῶν 
is a proper one. Athens and Attica 
were politically identical; not so 
Thebes and Boeotia. —cdpara aya- 
θὰ καὶ καλά : ‘‘sturdy, fine-looking 
men.’? --- ἂν ἐκλεχθῆναι : could be 
picked out. For the inf. with ἄν, 
see G. 1308; H. 964. The 2 aor. 
pass. -λεγῆναι is more common in 


As every free citizen of - 


Attic. —ratry : in this respect. For 
the dat., see G. 1182; H. 780.— 
δοκοῦσι λείπεσθαι: sc. of ᾿Αθηναῖοι 
τῶν Βοιωτῶν. --- ἑαυτοῖς : inter se 
among themselves. Cf. φθονοῦσιν 
ἑαυτοῖς 16, and see on ii. 6. 20.— 
᾿Αθήνησι : for the locative, see G. 
200 H. 220. 

3. eloiv: sc. οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι. ---- ἅπερ : 
cf. 8 4. 8. ---;Ἔ στιν ois: see on i. 4. 
2. Cf. καὶ μὴν ἐπί ye τοῖς προγόνοις 
οὐ μεῖον ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἢ Βοιωτοὶ φρονοῦ- 
σιν (pride themselves) Hipp. vii. 3, 
where the claim is more modest. — 
προτρέπονταί tre: for the position 
of the encl., cf. ἅ τε ἐνόμιζεν iv. 
2. 40. 

4. ἀληθῆ: for the pred. adj., 
see G. 919; Η. 014. ---᾽φ᾽ οὗ: ie. 


148 EENO®OQNTOS AILTOMNHMONEYMATA Τ, 5. 


25 ἐν Λεβαδείᾳ συμφορὰ ἐγένετο καὶ ἡ μεθ᾽ “Ἱπποκράτους ἐπὶ 
Ψ 3 , ’ A ε a 3 ’ / 
Δηλίῳ, ἐκ τούτων τεταπείνωται μὲν ἡ τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων δόξα 
Ἂς Ἀ , 5 ~ \ Ν “A 7 ’ 
πρὸς τοὺς Βοιωτούς, ἐπῆρται δὲ τὸ τῶν Θηβαίων φρόνημα 
Ν ‘ > ’ὔ ν᾽ τ ld ε ’ 3 9 
πρὸς τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους, ὥστε Βοιωτοὶ μέν, ot πρόσθεν οὐδ 
3 Af “A “A 3 4 » 4 
ἐν TH ἑαυτῶν τολμῶντες ᾿Αθηναίοις ἄνευ Λακεδαιμονίων 
ἃ A ἂν ’ 3 , “ 
80τε καὶ τῶν ἄλλων Πελοποννησίων ἀντιτάττεσθαι, νῦν 
3 nn 3 ‘ 3 ε Ν 3 A 3 ΄ς 3 Fd 
ἀπειλοῦσιν αὐτοὶ καθ᾽ αὑτοὺς ἐμβαλεῖν εἰς τὴν ᾿Αττικήν, 
3 A 4 ε ’ ν Ν ’ 5 7 
Αθηναῖοι δέ, οἱ πρότερον [ὅτε Βοιωτοὶ μόνοι ἐγένοντο] 
ἴω Ν / al \ \ ’ὔ 
πορθοῦντες τὴν Βοιωτίαν, φοβοῦνται μὴ Βοιωτοὶ δῃώσωσι 
τὴν ᾿Αττικήν.᾽ καὶ ὁ Σωκράτης, “᾿Αλλ᾽ αἰσθάνομαι per,” 
a 9 ἴω 
856 ἔφη, “ταῦτα οὕτως ἔχοντα: δοκεῖ δέ μοι ἀνδρὶ ἀγαθῷ 
ἄρχοντι νῦν εὐαρεστοτέρως διακεῖσθαι ἡ πόλις. τὸ μὲν 
Ν᾿ θ , > Ζλ ’ Ν ε θ ’ὔ \ 39 (θ 
γὰρ θάρσος ἀμέλειάν τε καὶ ῥᾳθυμίαν καὶ ἀπείθειαν 
ἐμβάλλει, ὁ δὲ φόβος προσεκτικωτέρους τε καὶ εὐπειθε- 
στέρους καὶ εὐτακτοτέρους ποιεῖ. τεκμήραιο δ᾽ ἂν τοῦτο 
40 καὶ ἀπὸ τῶν ἐν ταῖς ναυσίν: ὅταν μὲν γὰρ δήπου μηδὲν 
la) Mi 8s > ’ ¥ > x TEA aA x 
φοβῶνται, μεστοί εἰσιν ἀταξίας: ἔστ᾽ ἂν δὲ ἢ χειμῶνα ἢ 


ἀπὸ τοῦ χρόνου, ἐν ᾧ. --- ἐν Λεβαδείᾳ : 
by the victory of Oenophyta (456 
B.c.), the Athenians gained com- 
plete ascendency over the Boeotian 
towns, and established in them 
democratic forms of government. 
Many of the banished oligarchs 
banded together, raised an army, 
and, in 447 3.c., inflicted an over- 
whelming defeat on the Athenian 
army under Tolmides, who lost his 
life in the battle. The conflict took 
place between Lebadéa and Coronéa 
in Boeotia, and is usually known as 
the battle of Coronéa. Cf. Thue. i. 
108, 113, and see Grote, Hist. of 
Greece, c. xlv.— ἐπὶ Δηλίῳ: not ἐν 
. Δηλίῳ, as at that time (424 B.c.) 
Delium was only an enclosure and 


temple sacred to Apollo, near Ordpus 
on the Boeotian frontier. Cf. Plato 
Apol. 288. In this battle the Athe- 
nian general was defeated and slain. 
Socrates is said to have shown great 
gallantry in the retreat which en- 
sued. See Introd. 2, 61, — ἐκ τού: 
των : since these events, repeats ἀφ᾽ ov. 
-- πρὸς τοὺς Βοιωτούς : see on πρὸς 
ἑαυτόν i, 2. 52.—év τῇ ἑαυτῶν : sc. 
χώρᾳ. ---- οὗ τολμῶντες : rel., who 
ventured. The participle is ‘imper- 
fect.’ See G. 1289; H. 856 a. So 
πορθοῦντες below. 

5. εὐαρεστοτέρως διακεῖσθαι : ‘is 
more favorably disposed.’’ —Odpoos : 
over-confidence. — ἐμβάλλει : begets. 

6. τῶν ἐν rats ναυσίν: i.e. τῶν 
ναυτῶν. --- ἔστ᾽ ἄν: quamdiu. For 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA ΤΠ. 5. 


149 


“- ὃ ΄ 3 , Ν + , , A 
πολεέμιοῦυς OELOWOLY, OV μονον TA KEAECVOMEVA πάντα TOLOU- 


> ‘ Χ A “~ Ν ’ 
σιν, ἀλλὰ καὶ σιγῶσι καραδοκοῦντες τὰ προσταχθησό- 


μενα, ὥσπερ χορευταί." 


“᾿Αλλὰ μήν, ἔφη ὁ Περικλῆς, 


A 9 la 
45 “ εἴ ye νῦν μάλιστα πείθοιντο, wpa ἂν εἴη λέγειν πῶς ἂν 


5 Ἀ ’ὕ 4 5 A nw 9 , 
αὐτοὺς προτρεψαίμεθα πάλιν ἀνερασθῆναι τῆς ἀρχαίας 


5 A Ἁ > ’ Ἁ > ’ 3) 
ἀρετῆς τε καὶ εὐκλείας καὶ εὐδαιμονίας. 


“A 3) 
“Οὐκοῦν, ἔφη 


ὁ Σωκράτης, “εἰ μὲν ἐβουλόμεθα χρημάτων αὐτοὺς ὧν 
Ψ ΚΞ“ A A 
ἄλλοι εἶχον ἀντιποιεῖσθαι, ἀποδεικνύντες αὐτοῖς ταῦτα 


“a? 3, Χ # / 3 x y 
50 TaTp@a TE ὄντα Kal προσήκοντα, μάλιστ ἂν οὕτως 


> Ἀ 3 “Ὁ 5 ’ , 3 Ἁ Ν “A > 
αὐτοὺς ἐξορμῷμεν ἀντέχεσθαι τούτων. ἐπεὶ δὲ τοῦ μετ 


3 A 4, > Ἀ 3 ‘a ’ ἘΠῚ 
ἀρετῆς πρωτεύειν αὐτοὺς ἐπιμελεῖσθαι βουλόμεθα, τοῦτ 


3 , 3 a , Lal 9 A A ε 
αὖ δεικτέον ἐκ παλαιοῦ μάλιστα προσῆκον αὕτοις, καὶ ὡς 


ld x > , ᾽ 

τούτου ἐπιμελούμενοι πάντων ἄν εἶεν κράτιστοι." 
> x a 4 

δοῦν ἂν τοῦτο διδάσκοιμεν ;” 


«Πῶς 
« > , > 4 
Oiwar μέν, εἰ τούς γε 


4 - 3 ’ A > ’ὔ 
παλαιοτάτους ὧν ἀκούομεν προγόνους αὐτῶν ἀναμιμνῇ- 


Ἀ ” 
σκοιμεν αὐτοὺς ἀκηκοότας ἀρίστους γεγονέναι. 


temporal clauses with ἄν and the 
subjv., see G. 1465; H. 923. — καρα- 
δοκοῦντες : eagerly expecting, lit. with 
outstretched head, an Ionic expres- 
sion. Cf. Πάριοι δὲ ὑπολειφθέντες ἐν 
Κύθνῳ, ἐκαραδόκεον τὸν πόλεμον KF 
ἀποβήσεται Hdt. viii. 67.— ὥσπερ 
χορευταί : like members of a chorus, 
who keep their eyes on the leader 
during the whole performance. 

7. wpa: the proper time. For 
the inf. with substs., see G. 1521; 
H. 952.— ἀνερασθῆναι : to yearn 
anew for. 

8. οὐκοῦν : well, then. —el éBov- 
λόμεθα: see on εἰ προσετέθησαν i. 4. 
5. —elyov: see on a ἐβούλετο. 4. 14. 
— foppopev: for the potential opt. 
in apod. after the ind. in prot., see 
on ἂν εἴη i. 2. 45. — τοῦ μετ᾽ ἀρετῆς 


“Apa 10 


πρωτεύειν : ““ preéminence in valor.”’ 
— τοῦτο: 86. τὸ μετ᾽ ἀρετῆς πρωτεύειν. 
— δεικτέον : impers. const. ; it takes 
as objs. both τοῦτο. .. αὐτοῖς and 
WS... κράτιστοι. 

9. οἶμαι μέν: as in ii, 6. ὅ. --- εἰ 
τούς γε παλαιοτάτους κτλ. : the Eng. 
order of thought seems to be εἰ ἀνα- 
μιμνήσκοιμεν αὐτοὺς ἀκηκοότας τούς ye 
παλαιοτάτους ὧν (equivalent to τούτων, 
οὖς) ἀκούομεν προγόνους αὐτῶν ἀρίστους 
γεγονέναι. ‘* We have only to re- 
mind them of the fact, which they 
have heard often enough (at school 
and elsewhere), that their ancestors, 
as far back as we have any record, 
were men of highest valor.’? The 
omitted apod. is, of course, διδά- 
σκοιμεν ἄν, to be const. (with ws or ὅτι) 
as obj. of οἶμαι. 


150 


EFENO®ONTOS ATLOMNHMONEYMATA TI. 5. 


, N “ A 4 ἃ ε Ν 4 3 
λέγεις τὴν τῶν θεῶν κρίσιν, ἣν ot περὶ Κέκροπα δι 


9 \ » ” 
ἀρετὴν ἐκριναν; 


“Λέγω γάρ, καὶ τὴν ᾿Βρεχθέως γε 


Ν Ν , Ἀν τ τας, aN \ ee: eas: WEEN , 
60 τροφὴν και γένεσιν, KQL TOV TTOAEMOV TOV ΕἾ EKELYOU γένο- 


μενον πρὸς τοὺς ἐκ τῆς ἐχομένης ἠπείρου πάσης, καὶ τὸν 


ἐφ᾽ Ἡρακλειδῶν πρὸς τοὺς ἐν Πελοποννήσῳ, καὶ πάντας 


ἈΝ + τῆς / 4 > “' A 3 “Ὁ A 
τοὺς ἐπὶ Θησέως πολεμηθέντας, ἐν οἷς πᾶσιν ἐκεῖνοι δῆλοι 


, A 9. ε \ 9 , 3 , 3 
γέγονασι TOV καθ E€AVTOVS ἀνθρώπων αριστευσαντες" εὐ 


ν 
66 δὲ βούλει, ἃ ὕστερον οἱ ἐκείνων μὲν ἀπόγονοι, οὐ πολὺ δὲ 


ς τυ Shee. ΄ » ἕ \ \ 9-154 θ᾽ ε Ν 
T po μων γέγονοτεέες, eT Pa αν, TA μὲν AVTOL Κα QUTOVS 


> 4 Ἂ Ν vd ~ 3 ’ ’ὔ 
ἀγωνιζόμενοι πρὸς τοὺς κυριεύοντας τῆς τε Ασίας πάσης 


10. τὴν τῶν θεῶν κρίσιν : the de- 
cision between the deities. θεῶν is 
objective genitive. The reference is 
to the contest between Athena and 
Poseidon for the sovereignty of 
Attica, which was decided by 
Cecrops, legendary king of Athens. 
Cf. Apollodorus iii. 14. The legend 
formed the subject of the sculptures 
in the west pediment of the Par- 
thenon. — oi περὶ Κέκροπα : seems 
to indicate Cecrops himself and the 
tribunal over which he presided. 
Cf. rods ἀμφὶ Θράσυλλον i. 1. 18, — 
᾿Ἐρεχθέως : another legendary hero 
and king of Attica, who shared with 
Athena the honor of a temple (the 
Erechtheum) on the Acropolis. — 
τροφὴν καὶ γένεσιν : for the ‘ hysteron 
proteron,’ by which the more im- 
portant or obvious action is men- 
tioned before another which pre- 
ceded it in order of time, cf. dua 
τράφεν ἠδὲ γένοντο Hom. A 251, ‘ For 
I was bred and born | not three 
hours’ travel from this very place.’ 
Shak. Twelfth Night i. 2, and mo- 
riamur, et in media arma 
ruamus Virgil Aen. ii. 353. — 


ἐπ᾽ ἐκείνου: in his reign. — πρὸς τοὺς 
... πάσης: in very early times the 
Thracians were said to have occu- 
pied the country as far as the bor- 
ders of Attica, and to have been 
repulsed from Athens by Erechtheus. 
— τὸν ἐφ᾽ Ἡρακλειδῶν : the sons of 
Heracles sought and obtained aid 
from Athens against Eurystheus. — 
τοὺς ἐπὶ Θησέως πολεμηθέντας (sc. 
πολέμους) : ὁ.6. the wars against the 
Amazons and Thracians. For these 
legendary events, cf. Isoc. iv. 65, 68; 
Hat. ix. 27; Thue. ii. 15. — τῶν καθ᾽ 
ἑαυτούς: the men of their day. Cf. 
the eulogy on Athenian achieve- 
ments in Plato Menex. 239 8 ff. 
11. εἰ δὲ βούλει: polite formula, 
marks a transition to another phase 
of the subject. —atrol καθ᾽ αὑτούς : 
contrasted with καὶ μετὰ Πελοποννη- 
σίων below. The battle of Marathon 
(490 8.6.) is meant. Although the 
Athenians had on that occasion 
the assistance of 1,000 Plataeans, 
the phrase αὐτοὶ κτλ. may pass, 
as a rhetorical exaggeration. — 
τοὺς κυριεύοντας κτλ. : 1.6. the Per- 
sians. See Grote, Hist. of Greece, 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA III. 5. 


151 


A fa a > ’ , ’ XN / A 
καὶ τῆς Εὐρώπης μέχρι Μακεδονίας καὶ πλείστην τῶν 


’ ΄ Ν > Ν 4 Ν 
προγεγονότων δύναμιν καὶ ἀφορμὴν κεκτημένους καὶ 


710 μέγιστα ἔργα κατειργασμένους, τὰ δὲ καὶ μετὰ Πελοπον- 


4 > \ Ν “A Ν 
, νησίων ἀριστεύοντες καὶ κατὰ γὴν καὶ κατὰ θάλατταν. 


ἃ A A , + A A 3 ε A 
οἵ δὴ καὶ λέγονται πολὺ διενεγκεῖν τῶν καθ᾽ αὑτοὺς 


ἀνθρώπων." “Λέγονται yap,” ἔφη. “Τοιγαροῦν πολλῶν 12 


\ δ 5 a e¢ ’ a , > 
μὲν μεταναστάσεων ἐν TH Ἑλλάδι γεγονυιῶν διέμειναν ἐν 


15TH ἑαυτῶν, πολλοὶ δὲ ὑπὲρ δικαίων ἀντιλέγοντες ἐπέτρεπον 


ἐκείνοις, πολλοὶ δὲ ὑπὸ κρειττόνων ὑβριζόμενοι κατέφευ- 


” 
γον πρὸς ἐκείνους. 


καὶ ὁ Περικλῆς, “Καὶ θαυμάζω γε," 13 


» rT Wek , e , ν 3 Dard Ν A 
ἔφη, “@ Σώκρατες, Ἢ πόλις ὅπως TOT ἐπὶ τὸ χειρον 


ἔκλινεν." 


(εϑ \ , 99 τοῖν ‘ 
Kyo μέν, ἔφη, 


‘ > 3 ὁ , ςς ν 
οἶμαι, ὁ Σωκράτης, “ὠσπερ 


80 καὶ ἀθληταί τινες διὰ τὸ πολὺ ὑπερενεγκεῖν καὶ κρατι- 


στεῦσαι καταρρᾳθυμήσαντες ὑστερίζουσι τῶν ἀντιπάλων, 


ν x3 / \ , > al ε ων 
οὕτω καὶ ᾿Αθηναίους πολὺ διενεγκόντας ἀμελῆσαι ἑαυτῶν 


cc. xxxii-xxxiv. — πλείστην τῶν 
προγεγονότων : equivalent to πλείονα 
See on καινό- 
τερον τῶν ἄλλων i. 1. 8. --- μέγιστα 
ἔργα: i.e. the achievements of Cyrus 
and Darius in establishing the Per- 
sian empire. — ot δὴ καί: who also, 
we see, refers to of ἐκείνων ἀπόγονοι, 
and hence does not include the 
Peloponnesians, whom the argument 
does not touch. — λέγονται γάρ: 
they are indeed. Cf. οἷδα γάρ 2. 
12. πολλῶν μεταναστάσεων : 6.0.; 
those which followed the inroads of 
the Dorians. — διέμειναν : held their 
ground. The Attic Greeks were 
proud of being αὐτόχθονες and γηγε- 
Cf. ταύτην (τὴν πόλιν) γὰρ 
οἰκοῦμεν οὐχ ἑτέρους ἐκβαλόντες (bY 
dispossessing) οὐδὲ ἐρήμην καταλα- 
βόντες οὐδὲ ἐκ πολλῶν ἐθνῶν μιγάδες 


τῆς τῶν προγεγονότων. 


Ὁ 
vets. 


συλλεγέντες (a8 mingled immigrants) 
ἀλλ᾽ οὕτω καλῶς καὶ γνησίως γεγό- 
ναμεν, ὥστε ἐξ ἧσπερ (γῆς) ἔφυμεν, 
ταύτην ἔχοντες ἅπαντα τὸν χρόνον 
διατελοῦμεν, αὐτόχθονες ὄντες Isoc. iv. 
24. Cf. also Thuc. i. 2. ---ἐπέτρεπον : 
entrusted their cause (τὰ δίκαια). 

13. καὶ θαυμάζω ye: yes, and I 
marvel. —éyo μέν, ἔφη, οἶμαι, ὁ Σω- 
κράτης : for ἃ similar order of words, 
cf. καὶ τί δέ, ἔφη, ὁρᾷς, ἡ γυνή Oec. 
vii. 16, quid igitur, inquit, est 
causae, Brutus Cic. Brut. 91. — 
ὥσπερ kal, οὕτω kal: see oni. 1. 6. 
On the comparison with athletes, 
cf. 1. 2. 24. —rév ἀντιπάλων : for the 
gen. with verbs of comparison, see G. 
1120; H. 749. Cf. ὁρῶν ὑστερίζουσαν 
τὴν πόλιν τῶν καιρῶν seeing the city 
falling behind its opportunities Dem. 
xviii. 102. 


152 EENO®QNTOS AILOMNHMONEYMATA T. 5 


’ὕ 
γι 14 
Ἀ ε 

Kat O 


\ N A , ΄ ” (ATA a 9» »¥ 
καὶ διὰ τοῦτο χείρους γεγονέναι. Νῦν οὖν, ἔφη, 
A A 9 , \ > , 9 Vet 
dv ποιοῦντες avahaBouev THY ἀρχαίαν ἀρετήν; 
85 Σωκράτης. “Οὐδὲν ἀπόκρυφον δοκεῖ μοι εἶναι, add’, εἰ 
μὲν ἐξευρόντες τὰ τῶν προγόνων ἐπιτηδεύματα μηδὲν 
χεῖρον ἐκείνων ἐπιτηδεύοιεν, οὐδὲν ἂν χείρους ἐκείνων 
γενέσθαι: εἰ δὲ μή, τούς γε νῦν πρωτεύοντας μιμούμενοι 
καὶ τούτοις τὰ αὐτὰ ἐπιτηδεύοντες, ὁμοίως μὲν τοῖς αὐτοῖς 
4 > \ x ’ 3 4 > > Ἂν ,9 ld 
90 χρώμενοι οὐδὲν ἂν χείρους ἐκείνων εἶεν, εἰ δ᾽ ἐπιμελέστε- 
pov, καὶ βελτίους." “Λέγεις, ἔφη, “πόρρω που εἶναι τῇ 15 
᾿' ‘\ > , ἐφ Ἂν, ν 3 A 
πόλει THY καλοκἀγαθίαν. πότε yap οὕτως ᾿Αθηναῖοι 
9 / x hg io ur A; 492-4 
ὥσπερ Λακεδαιμόνιοι ἢ πρεσβυτέρους αἰδέσονται, ot ἀπὸ 
τῶν πατέρων ἄρχονται καγοξ ρον τῶν γεραιτερὼν, ἢ 
95 σωμασκήσουσιν οὕτως, OL οὐ μόνον αὐτοὶ εὐεξίας one 
os ἀλλὰ Kal τῶν ἐπ pha cont ΚΑΤΑΡΟΝΟΟΝῚ TOTE 16 
δὲ οὕτω πείσονται τοῖς ἄρχουσιν, OL Kal ἀγάλλονται ἐπὶ 
A A A 9 ’ x ’ Ψ 
τῷ καταφρονεῖν τῶν ἀρχόντων ; ἢ πότε οὕτως ὁμονοήσου- 
σιν, οἵ γε ἀντὶ μὲν τοῦ συνεργεῖν ἑαυτοῖς τὰ συμφέροντα 


14. οὐδὲν ἀπόκρυφον : no secret. 
-- ἂν χείρους γενέσθαι : depends on 
δοκεῖ μοι understood after ἀλλά, or 
δοκοῦσιν may be supplied, making the 
const. personal. For an example of 
both consts. in the same sent., cf. 
ἔδοξεν αὐτῷ βροντῆς γενομένης σκηπτὸς 
πεσεῖν εἰς τὴν πατρῴαν οἰκίαν, καὶ ἐκ 
τούτου λάμπεσθαι πᾶσαν An. iii. τ. 11. 
See G. 1522, 2; H. 944 a.— εἰ δὲ 
ph: and if not (that).—-Tods πρω- 
revovras: i.e. the Lacedaemonians. 
Xenophon never omits an oppor- 
tunity to praise Spartan institutions. 
--- τούτοις τὰ αὐτά : the same things 
that they do. For the abridged com- 
parison, see on τῶν ἄλλων i. 1. 38. — εἰ 
.δ᾽ ἐπιμελέστερον : 86. χρῷντο. --- καί: 
even. 


15. ‘* You are then, I take it, of 
thé opinion that the Athenians have 
fallen far away from their pristine 
virtue, and you wish them to take 
for their model the Lacedaemonians, 
who certainly could give them many 
a good lesson.’’? — πού : see on iii. 3. 
2. --- ὥσπερ «Λακεδαιμόνιοι: cf. De 
Rep. Lac. x. 2, and Cic. de Sen. 
xviii. 63, where Lysander boasts 
Lacedaemona esse honestissi- 
mum domicilium senectutis. 
--- οἵ: so és i. 2. 64. — ἀπὸ τῶν πατέ- 
pov κτλ. : starting with their fathers, 
look down on. 

16. ἑαυτοῖς : const. with τὰ συμ- 
φέροντα. This and the two other 
refl. prons. (ἑαυτοῖς, αὑτούς) in this sec- 
tion are equivalent to the reciprocal. 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA III. 5. 


153 


100 ἐπηρεάζουσιν ἀλλήλοις καὶ φθονοῦσιν ἑαυτοῖς μᾶλλον ἢ 


a ¥ > y ’, Ν ’ὔ’ » A 
Tots ἄλλοις ἀνθρώποις, μάλιστα δὲ πάντων ἔν τε ταῖς 


3 ’ ’ὔ Ν A A "4 Ν ’ 
ἰδίαις συνόδοις και TALS κΚοιναις διαφέρονται και πλείστας 


- δίκας ἀλλήλοις δικάζονται καὶ προαιροῦνται μᾶλλον οὕτω 


κερδαίνειν ἀπ᾿ ἀλλήλων ἢ συνωφελοῦντες αὑτούς, τοῖς δὲ 
ρ ήλων ἢ 


106 κοινοῖς ὥσπερ ἀλλοτρίοις χρώμενοι περὶ τούτων αὖ 


Ἀ A > ἊΝ ‘al 4 
μάχονται καὶ ταῖς εἰς τὰ τοιαῦτα δυνάμεσι μάλιστα χαΐ- 


Ν ἴω 
ρουσιν; ἐξ ὧν πολλὴ μὲν ἀτηρία καὶ κακία τῇ πόλει 11 


ἐμφύεται, πολλὴ δὲ ἔχθρα καὶ μῖσος ἀλλήλων τοῖς πολί- 


ταις ἐγγίγνεται, δι’ ἃ ἔγωγε μάλα φοβοῦμαι ἀεὶ μή τι 


110 μεῖζον ἢ ὥστε φέρειν δύνασθαι κακὸν τῇ πόλει συμβῇ." 


“Μηδαμῶς, ἔφη ὁ Σωκράτης, “ὦ Περίκλεις, οὕτως ἡγοῦ 18 


5 ’ ᾽ὔ “~ > 4, 
ἀνηκέστῳ πονηρίᾳ νοσεῖν ᾿Αθηναίους. 


οὐχ ὁρᾷς ὡς 


¥ ’ > “ 4 > A 
εὔτακτοι μέν εἰσιν ἐν τοῖς ναυτικοῖς, εὐτάκτως δ᾽ ἐν τοῖς 


~ nw ’ὕ 
νικοῖς ἀγῶσι πείθονται τοῖς ἐπιστάταις, οὐδένων δὲ 
᾽ 


λοις; 


/, 3 ἊἊ A ε A A , 
115 καταδεέστερον ἐν τοῖς χοροῖς ὑπηρετοῦσι τοῖς διδασκά- 
“ an ᾿ ΚᾺ ” »¥ “ Ν / 3 Ν 
Τοῦτο γάρ τοι," ἔφη, “καὶ θαυμαστόν ἐστι, τὸ 


Ν \ ’ “A A 2 ~ \ A 
TOVS μὲν TOLOUTOUS πειθαρχεῖν τοις ἐφεστῶσι, τους δὲ 


Cf. 2. — ἀλλήλοις δικάζονται: the 
verb, as indicating strife, takes the 
dat., like φθονοῦσιν above. The fond- 
ness of the Athenians for litigation is 
evidenced by their numerous courts, 
and the large body of their extant 
forensic literature. Aristophanes 
lashed this love of lawsuits in his 
Wasps. — συνωφελοῦντες : for the 
circumstantial participle of means, 
see on i. 1. 9.—ad: item, with 
reference to διαφέρονται and δικά- 
ζονται. --- ταῖς . . « χαίρουσιν : ‘* they 
delight especially in having their 
faculties trained for such strife.’’ 

17. ἐξ ov: i.e. because they 
neglect physical training and de- 
spise discipline; hence arise ἀτη- 


pla and κακία, while ἔχθρα and μῖσος 
are an immediate result of the 
continual strife with one another. — 
ἢ ὥστε: see oni. 4. 10. 

18. πονηρίᾳ νοσεῖν : a common 
metaphor with the Greeks, as with 
us. Cf. τὰ ᾿Νδρυσῶν πράγματα évbon- 
σεν An. vii. 2. 32. For the causal 
dative, see G. 1181; H. 776. — τοῖς 
ἐπιστάταις : i.e. the trainers. — 
οὐδένων καταδεέστερον : in a manner 
unsurpassed by any. Cf. i. 5. 6. 

19. τοῦτο γάρ τοι καὶ θαυμαστόν 
ἐστι : that is just what is so strange. 
τοῦτο serves 85 energetic introduc- 
tion to τὸ πειθάρχειν, εἶναι. Cf. ii. 
4. 1. — τοιούτους : i.e. sailors, 
gymnasts, dancers, efc., who were 


125 “ τούτοις." 


184 


ERENO®ONTOS AILTOMNHMONEYMATA IT. 5. 


ε ’ Ἀ Ν ε “a ἃ “A 9 ’ὔ 
ὁπλίτας καὶ τοὺς ἱππεῖς, οἱ δοκοῦσι καλοκἀγαθίᾳ προκε- 


, A a 9 , > , 3) 
κρίσθαι τῶν πολιτῶν, ἀπειθεστάτους εἶναι πάντων. 


καὶ 20 


120 ὁ Σωκράτης ἔφη “Ἢ δὲ ἐν ᾿Αρείῳ πάγῳ βουλή, ὦ Περί- 


lal ‘\ 
κλεις, οὐκ ἐκ τῶν δεδοκιμασμένων καθίσταται;" “Kat 


pada,” ἔφη. 


3 > a 
“Οἶσθα οὖν τινας," ἔφη, “ κάλλιον ἢ νομιμώ- 


Ἃ , x , , ΄ , 
τερον ἢ σεμνότερον ἢ δικαιότερον τάς τε δίκας δικάζοντας 


‘\ > 4 ’ 3) 
καὶ τάλλα πάντα πράττοντας: 


> , 5», 3 ’ 3) 
εὐτάκτων ὄντων ᾿Αθηναίων. 


“Οὐ μέμφομαι," ἔφη, 


’ ᾽ » 9 A e 
“Οὐ τοίνυν, ἔφη, “det ἀθυμεῖν ὡς οὐκ 


“Καὶ μὴν ἔν γε τοῖς στρα-31 


τιωτικοῖς, ἔφη, “ἔνθα μάλιστα δεῖ σωφρονεῖν τε καὶ 


εὐτακτεῖν καὶ πειθαρχεῖν, οὐδενὶ τούτων προσέχουσιν." 


«Ὗ ’ 3) » ε ’ ςς 3 4 e ν 
Ισως yap, ἔφη ὁ Σωκράτης, “ἐν τούτοις οἵ ἠκιστα 


’, » nw 
130 ἐπιστάμενοι ἄρχουσιν αὐτῶν. 


9 en» a 
οὐχ ὁρᾷς ὅτι κιθαριστῶν 


μὲν καὶ χορευτῶν καὶ ὀρχηστῶν οὐδὲ εἷς ἐπιχειρεῖ ἄρχειν 


4 8 , ἡ δὰ λ A aa ae 
μὴ ἐπιστάμενος, OVOE παλαϊστων OVOE παγκρατιαστων; 


3 Ν ’ ε 4 ¥ »» A ε ’ 
ἀλλὰ πάντες οἵ τούτων ἄρχοντες ἔχουσι δεῖξαι ὁπόθεν 


4 ω 99 Ὁ 3 aA “a Ν rm ε 
ἔμαθον ταῦτα ἐφ᾽ οἷς ἐφεστᾶσι, τῶν δὲ στρατηγῶν οἱ 


135 πλεῖστοι αὐτοσχεδιάζουσιν. 


generally of the lower classes ; while 
hoplites and cavalry were composed 
of the free and well-to-do citizens. — 
καλοκἀγαθίᾳ : dat. of respect. 

20. ἣ δὲ ἐν ᾿Αρείῳ πάγῳ βουλή: 
this ancient court derived its name 
from the sacred hill of Ares (west of 
the Acropolis, and separated from it 
only by a narrow and shallow valley), 
where its sittings were held. It was 
composed of ex-archons who had 
‘clean records,’ as established by the 
δοκιμασία (official investigation) ; and 
it had jurisdiction over cases of 
intentional homicide, poisoning, and 
arson. See Schémann, Antig. of 
Greece, passim. —od μέμφομαι: 1 


’ A 
ov μέντοι σέ γε τοιοῦτον 22 


have no fault to find. —rotrois: 1.6. 
᾿Αρειοπαγίται. For another 
example of ‘synesis,’ cf. οἱ νέοι after 
θιάσου ii. τ. 81. See H. 6338. — ὡς, 
ὄντων : see oni. 1. 4. 


τοῖς 


21. καὶ μήν: and yet. See on 
i. 4. 12. --- τούτων : i.e. σωφρονεῖν, 


εὐτακτεῖν, πειθαρχεῖν. ---- προσέχουσιν : 
they give heed to. —év τούτοις : i.e. 
τοῖς στρατιωτικοῖς. --- οὐδὲ εἷς : See ON 
i, 6. 2. --- ἔχουσι: are able. — αὐτο- 
σχεδιάζουσιν : ‘hold command 
without preparation.’’? Cf. the con- 
versation with Euthydemus in iv. 2, 
where Socrates scores the presump- 
tion of would-be impromptu states- 
men. 


150TavTa.” 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA IIL. 5. 


155 


δὼ, Ἢ ie > 3 3 > , 50.Ν & ¥ 3 “ 
ἐγὼ νομίζω εἶναι, ἀλλ᾽ οἶμαί σε οὐδὲν ἧττον ἔχειν εἰπεῖν 


ε , “~ A C¢ ’ ’ A ’ 
ὁπότε στρατηγεῖν ἢ ὁπότε παλαίειν ἤρξω μανθάνειν. 


Ν 
και 


πολλὰ μὲν οἶμαΐ σε τῶν πατρῴων στρατηγημάτων παρει- 


ληφότα διασῴζειν, πολλὰ δὲ πανταχόθεν συνηχέναι, 


οἶμαι δέ σε πολλὰ μεριμνᾶν, ὅπως μὴ λάθῃς σεαυτὸν 38 ° 


140 ὁπόθεν οἷόν τε ἣν μαθεῖν τι ὠφέλιμον εἰς στρατηγίαν. 


lal ἴων 3 ’ > ’ὔ Ν ’ὔ A 
ἀγνοῶν τι τῶν εἰς στρατηγιαν ὠφελίμων, καὶ ἐάν τι τοιοῦ- 


¥ θ Ἂς \ io / “A ‘\ > , 
tov αἴσθῃ σεαυτὸν μὴ εἰδότα, ζητεῖν τοὺς ἐπισταμένους 


aA ¥ , ¥ 4 ’ ν ’ 
ταῦτα, OUTE δώρων OUTE χαρίτων φειδόμενον, οπως μάθῃς 


3 : G2 ἃ bh ew oats Ν ‘\ > ‘ ¥ ” 
145 παρ αὐτῶν α μὴ ἐπίστασαι KAL συνεργους ἀγαθοὺς ΕΧΉς“: 


καὶ ὁ Περικλῆς, “ Οὐ λανθάνεις με, ὦ Σώκρατες," ἔφη, “ ὅτι 34 
5.5 3.» , , 3 aA A , > 3 
οὐδ᾽ οἰόμενός με τούτων ἐπιμελεῖσθαι ταῦτα λέγεις, ἀλλ 


39 ΛΜ ’ ν Ν 4 “Ὁ , 
EVXELP@V με διδάσκειν OTL TOV με λλοντα στρατήγειν τούτων 


ε / 3 “A A ε ~ ’ 3 ’ 
ἁπάντων ἐπιμελεῖσθαι δεῖ: ὁμολογῶ μέντοι κἀγώ σοι 


“Touro δ᾽, ἔφη, “ὦ Περίκλεις, κατανενόηκας, 2 


ὅτι πρόκειται τῆς χώρας ἡμῶν ὄρη μεγάλα, καθήκοντα 
5... Ν tA ig > Ν ee ¥ ’ 
ἐπὶ τὴν Βοιωτΐαν, du ὧν εἰς τὴν χώραν εἴσοδοι στεναΐ τε 


Ἀ 4 > 4 \ 4 ’ 4 »” 
KGL προσάντεις εἰσι, Kat OTL PEO?) διέζωσται οβέσιν 


ἅ," a) 3) 
ἐρυμνοις ; 


22. οὐδὲν ἧττον : connect with 7 
after στρατηγεῖν. ---τῶν πατρῴων 
στρατηγημάτων : your father’s prin- 
ciples of generalship. 

23. πολλὰ μεριμνᾶν : see oni. 1. 
11. --- λάθῃς σεαυτὸν ἀγνοῶν : see on 
i, 2. 84. -- μὴ εἰδότα : instead of οὐκ 
εἰδότα, because of the force of the pre- 
ceding ἐάν, making the participle part 
of the condition. G. 1614; H. 1027. 

24. οὐ λανθάνεις pe, ὅτι : you do 
not elude me, ‘‘I fully understand 
that,” with pers. for impers. con- 
struction. Cf. ὅτι πονηρότατοί γέ 
εἰσιν, οὐδὲ σὲ λανθάνουσιν Oec. i. 19. — 


“Kat μάλα," ἔφη. 
156 ὅτι Μυσοὶ καὶ Πισίδαι ἐν τῇ βασιλέως χώρᾳ κατέχοντες 


’ »’ 
“Τί δέ; ἐκεῖνο ἀκήκοας, 26 


οὐδ᾽ οἰόμενος : in 22 and 23, Socra- 
tes used the word οἶμαι. Pericles 
perceives the underlying irony, and 
says, ‘* You do not even believe it (to 
say nothing of knowing it).’’ 

25. ὄρη: Cithaeron and others. — 
μέση : 86. ἡ xGpa. — ὄρεσιν ἐρυμνοῖς : 
Parnes, Pentelicus, and Hymettus. 

26. Μυσοὶ καὶ Πισίδαι : cf. οἶδα 
γὰρ ὑμῖν Μυσοὺς λυπηροὺς (trouble- 
some) ὄντας, οἶδα δὲ καὶ Πισίδας An. 
ii. 5. 138. Cyrus the Younger made 
a defensive campaign against the 
Pisidians the pretext for muster- 
ing one of his armies. — βασιλέως, 


156 


ΞΕΝΟΦΩΝΤΟΣ ΑΠΟΜΝΗΜΟΝΕΎΜΑΤΑ TI. 5. 


> Ν , ’ Ν , ε ’ 4 

ἐρυμνὰ πάνυ χωρία καὶ κούφως ὡπλισμένοι δύνανται 
Ν Ν x , , 4 A 

πολλὰ μὲν τὴν βασιλέως χώραν καταθέοντες κακοποιεῖν, 


αὐτοὶ δὲ ζῆν ἐλεύθεροι; 


\ ’ὔ 9 4 Ψ > 
“Kat τοῦτό γ᾽, ἔφη, “akovw.” 


“᾿Αθηναίους δ᾽ οὐκ ἄν ole,” ἔφη, “ μέχρι τῆς ἐλαφρᾶς 27 


160 ἡλικίας ὡπλισμένους κουφοτέροις ὅπλοις καὶ τὰ προκεί- 


A , » , x Ν A 
μενα τῆς χώρας ὁρὴ κατέχοντας βλαβεροὺς μὲν Tots 
τς > / \ \ “a Zz lal 
πολεμίοις εἶναι, μεγάλην δὲ προβολὴν τοῖς πολίταις τῆς 


’ ’ 3) 
χώρας κατεσκευάσθαι; 


» “ 5 , Ν nA , 5 ” 

ἔφη, “ὠ Σώκρατες, Kal ταῦτα χρήσιμα εἶναι. 
, ”» »Y ε ’ re 3 ’ ‘al 39 ’, 

166 τοίνυν, ἔφη ὁ Σωκράτης, “ἀρέσκει σοι ταῦτα, ἐπιχείρει 


Ν “~ ’ὔ > 3 
καὶ ὁ Περικλῆς, “Πάντ᾽ οἶμαι," 
“Et 28 


ὡς “" EY “Δ 
αὐτοῖς, ὦ ἄριστε: ὅ τι μὲν γὰρ ἂν τούτων καταπρά- 
οἷ Ἂ Ἂς » Ν ΄Ν ΄ 3 / 3 
Ens, καὶ σοὶ καλὸν ἔσται καὶ TH πόλει ἀγαθόν: ἐὰν 
ld 3 ἰοὺ Ἂν \ 4 / » XN 
δέ τι ἀδυνατῇς, οὔτε THY πόλιν βλάψεις οὔτε σαυτὸν 


ἴω >] 
καταισχυνεῖς." 


without the art., the Great King, 
the king of Persia ; so freq. in the 
Anabasis. —mdavv: follows its adj. 
for emphasis. — ὡπλισμένοι : circum- 
stantial participle of cause, rather 
than of concession. — πολλά (sc. 
κακά) : cognate acc. with κακοποιεῖν. 
For the double acc., see on τὴν πόλιν 
a SbF 

27. μέχρι τῆς ἐλαφρᾶς ἡλικίας : 
so long as they are of the active age, 
i.e. from 18 to 20. The Athenian 
youth of this age served in the army 
as περίπολοι, a kind of home guard, 
or constabulary force, to serve only 
in Attica. — ὡπλισμένους, κατέχον- 
ras: equivalent to ef ὡπλισμένοι εἶεν, 
εἰ κατέχοιεν, Serving as prots. to ἂν 
(before οἴει) εἶναι, κατεσκευάσθαι. 
For the circumstantial participle of 
cond., see on πιστεύων i. 1. 5.— 
“προβολὴν κατεσκευάσθαι : form a 
rampart. 


28. ὅ τι μὲν Gv, ἐὰν δέ τι: for 
a similar change of const., ο΄. i. 
7. 5. " 
6. Glauco, a brother of Plato, a 
youth of less than twenty years, is 
eager to take a leading part in public 
affairs. Socrates shows him that he 
is unacquainted with any of the 
details of government, and earnestly 
warns him against taking up, for 
public speech or action, matters on 
which he has not first informed him- 
self thoroughly. 

In this and the succeeding chap- 
ter, we have a pair of contrasted 
pictures: first, of the conceited strip- 
ling, whose zeal is without knowl- 
edge; and second, of the modest 
man of abilities, who withholds his 
valuable services from the state. 
Socrates performs a public duty in 
showing each of these men his 
mistake. 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA III. 6. 157 


ς > 
Γλαύκωνα δὲ τὸν ᾿Αρίστωνος, ὅτ᾽ ἐπεχείρει Snunyo- 6 
ρεῖν, ἐπιθυμῶν προστατεύειν τῆς πόλεως οὐδέπω εἴκοσιν 
ἔτη γεγονώς, τῶν ἄλλων οἰκείων τε καὶ φίλων οὐδεὶς 
, ἐδύνατο παῦσαι ἑλκόμενόν τε ἀπὸ τοῦ βήματος καὶ κατα- 
δ γέλαστον ὄντα: Σωκράτης δὲ εὔνους ὧν αὐτῷ διά τε Xap- 
(ὃ μὴ , XN ὃ Ἂν ’, / » 
μίδην τὸν Γλαύκωνος καὶ διὰ Πλάτωνα μόνος ἔπαυσεν. 
ἐντυχὼν γὰρ αὐτῷ πρῶτον μὲν εἰς τὸ ἐθελῆσαι ἀκούειν 2 
τοιάδε λέξας κατέσχεν: “ὮὮ, Γλαύκων, ἔφη, “προστα- 
ἡ, “mp 
«(Ὗ 399 » iy 
Kywy, ἔφη, “ὦ 
“Ny Δί, ἔφη, “καλὸν γάρ, εἴπερ τι καὶ 


’ὕ ε “A ’ ~ ’ὔ ” 
τεύειν ἡμῖν διανενόησαι τῆς πόλεως; 
10 Σώκρατες." 

ἄλλο τῶν ἐν ἀνθρώποις. δῆλον γὰρ ὅτι ἐὰν τοῦτο δια- 
’ Ν Ν ¥ SX ¥ ν x 3 

πράξῃ, δυνατὸς μὲν ἔσῃ αὐτὸς τυγχάνειν ὅτου ἂν ἐπιθυ- 
“ ε Ν δὲ Ἀ (λ 3 λ A 3 a δὲ Ν 
μῇῃς, ἱκανὸς ὃὲ τοὺς φίλους ὠφελεῖν, ἐπαρεῖς δὲ τὸν 
δε 53 2 7 \ Ν ΄, > Ν > 
πατρῷον οἶκον, αὐξήσεις δὲ τὴν πατρίδα, ὀνομαστὸς ὃ 

» A \ 9 A , » 9 Ae , Ψ 
165 ἔσῃ πρῶτον μὲν ἐν τῇ πόλει, ἔπειτα ἐν TH ᾿Ελλάδι, ἴσως 


1. Γλαύκωνα: a brother of Plato. 
The Glauco mentioned just be- 
low was the father of Perictione, 
Aristo’s wife, and of Charmides, 
uncle of Plato and Glauco. — οὐδέπω 
εἴκοσιν ἔτη : at eighteen an Athenian 
, youth attained the rights of citizen- 
ship, but from eighteen to twenty 
military service claimed most of his 
time. 'Tosome offices, like the sena- 
torship and the judgeship (cf. i. 1.1), 
he was not eligible before the age of 
thirty. —&Aképevov ἀπὸ τοῦ βήματος : 
unpopular or intolerable speakers 
were occasionally hooted from the 
bema, or led away by the police 
(τοξόται). Cf. Aristophanes Knights 
665; Acharnians 45 ff.; Plato Prot. 
319 c. For the supplementary par- 
ticiple with παῦσαι, see G. 1580; H. 
981. Cf. τοὺς βαρβάρους ἔπαυσεν ὑβρί- 


ζοντας Isocrates xii. 83. — καταγέ- 
λαστον ὄντα: being a laughing-stock. 
— XapplSynv: see on iii. 7. 1. — 
Πλάτωνα : the only mention of Plato 
in Xenophon’s writings. In the 
Republic, Plato gives a very differ- 
ent representation of his brother 
Glauco. 

2. πρῶτον μέν: corresponds to 
μετὰ δὲ ταῦτα 3.—els τὸ ἐθελῆσαι 
ἀκούειν: ‘‘in order to make him 
willing to hear,’’ the purpose of 
λέξας. For εἰς with the articular inf., 
cf. eis τὸ φοβεῖσθαι An. vii. 8. 20. — 
κατέσχεν (sc. αὐτόν) : he checked him. 
--ἡμῖν : ethical dative. G. 1171; H. 
770. — εἴπερ τι kal ἄλλο (sc. ἐστίν) : SO 
in iv. 3. 14. Cf. also Cyr. iii. 3. 42. 
—év ἀνθρώποις : in the world. Cf. 
εὖ ἴσθι, 
κάλλιστον καὶ μακαριώτατον κτῆμα 


πάντων τῶν ἐν ἀνθρώποις 


158 ΞΕΝΟΦΩΝΤΟΣ AITOMNHMONEYMATA TIT. 6. 


9 A A 
δὲ ὥσπερ Θεμιστοκλῆς καὶ ἐν τοῖς βαρβάροις: ὅπου δ᾽ 
x 9S an A > 
av ἧς, πανταχοῦ περίβλεπτος ἔσῃ." ταῦτ᾽ οὖν ἀκούων ὃ 8 
, 3 , \ ε ’ Yo QA Ἁ 
Γλαύκων ἐμεγαλύνετο καὶ ἡδέως παρέμενε. μετὰ δὲ 
la) ε ’, lal “ 53 
ταῦτα ὃ Σωκράτης, “Οὐκοῦν, ἔφη, “τοῦτο μέν, ὦ Γλαύ- 
20 κων, δῆλον ὅτι εἴπερ τιμᾶσθαι βούλει, ὠφελητέα σοι ἡ 
πόλις ἐστίν; “Πάνυ μὲν οὖν, ἔφη. “Πρὸς θεῶν," ἔφη, 
τς. -ἃ , 3 ΄ δ." «ἢ en 2 , 3 ᾿ 
μὴ τοίνυν ἀποκρύψῃ, ἀλλ᾽ εἶπον ἡμῖν ἐκ τίνος ἀρξῃ τὴν 
aN 9 laure) 3 Ν δὲ ε r ΄ ὃ ΄ ε 
πόλιν εὐεργετεῖν. ἐπεὶ δὲ ὁ Γλαύκων διεσιώπησεν, ὡς 4 
x 4 “ ε ’, MA «-ς5 29 ὃ» ε , 
dv τότε σκοπῶν ὁπόθεν ἄρχοιτο, “"Ap, ἔφη ὁ Σωκράτης, 
σ 35 δ 
36 “ὥσπερ φίλου οἶκον εἰ αὐξῆσαι βούλοιο, πλουσιώτερον 
αὐτὸν ἐπιχειροίης ἂν ποιεῖν, οὕτω καὶ τὴν πόλιν πειράσῃ 
πλουσιωτέραν ποιῆσαι;" “Πάνυ μὲν οὖν, ἔφη. “Οὐκοῦν 5 
πλουσιωτέρα γ᾽ ἂν εἴη προσόδων αὐτῇ πλειόνων γενομέ. 
νων;" “Εἰκὸς γοῦν, ἔφη. “Λέξον 8%,” ἔφη, “ἐκ τίνων 
A iad \ al 
80ονῦν at πρόσοδοι TH πόλει Kal πόσαι τινές εἰσι; δῆλον 
Ν ν » ν 3 ᾽ὔ » Hae 25" 3 al » 
γὰρ ὅτι ἔσκεψαι, ἵνα εἰ μέν τινες αὐτῶν ἐνδεῶς ἔχου- 
σιν, ἐκπληρώσῃς, εἰ δὲ παραλείπονται, προσπορίσῃς." 
“᾿Αλλὰ μὰ Δί᾽, ἔφη ὁ Γλαύκων, “ταῦτά γε οὐκ ἐπέσκεμ- 


μαι. “ANN εἰ τοῦτο, ἔφη, “παρέλιπες, τάς γε δαπάνας 6 
κεκτήσῃ Hiero xi. τ5. --- Θεμιστοκλῆς : 4. διεσιώπησεν : lapsed into 
see on ii. 6.13; iv. 2. 2.--- περίβλεπτος: silence. — ὡς av τότε σκοπῶν : SC. 
‘the observed of all observers.’ διασιωπήσειε. τότε iS equivalent to 

3. ἐμεγαλύνετο: was greatly tum demum then for the first time. 


elated. —@dedntéa : for the pers. Cf. καὶ τὸν Κῦρον ἐπερέσθαι προπετῶς, 
const. of the verbal in -réos, see G. ὡς ἂν παῖς μηδέπω ὑποπτήσσων and 
1595; H. 989. ---ἀποκρύψῃ : for the Cyrus asked eagerly, as a child 
aor. subjv. in prohibitions, see G. (would) who had not yet learned 
1346; H. 874. On the use of the to be shy Cyr. i. 3. 8. — αὐτόν: 
mid., Kiihner remarks, ἀποκρύπτειν .€. τὸν οἶκον. --- πειράσῃ: fut. indic. 
τι refertur ad res extra nos’ middle. 

positas (occulere aliquid) ; 5. οὐκοῦν : see on ii. 1. 2. --- εἰκός : 
ἀποκρύπτεσθαι contra ad id, sc. ἐστί. --- πόσαι τινές : see on i. I. 
quod in nobis est (celare 1.—airév: depends on τινές. --- 
aliquid). —etwov: first aor. imv. ἐνδεῶς ἔχουσιν: are insufficient. — 
active. See on ii. 2. 8. παραλείπονται: are being neglected. 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA III. 6. 


A , ea SF A Ν y Χ 4 Ν 
βϑδτῆς πόλεως ἡμῖν εἰπέ: δῆλον γὰρ ὅτι καὶ τούτων τὰς 


A > A S99 
περιττὰς ἀφαιρεῖν διανοῇ. 
« 55 Ν an 2? 3 , ” 

οὐδε πρὸς TAUTA πω ἐσχόλασα. 


“᾿Αλλὰ μὰ τὸν Δί᾽, ἔφη, 


A ” » 
S Οὐκοῦν, ἔφη, “τὸ 


A , A . , A ΕῚ , A 
μὲν πλουσιωτέραν THY πόλιν ποιεῖν ἀναβαλούμεθα: πῶς 


Ν δ, Ν τ Nn. 58 , Ν \ 
γαρ OLOV TE μὴ ELOOTA YE Ta ἀναλώματα και τας πτρβροσ- 


40 όδους ἐπιμεληθῆναι τούτων ;” 


“ ANN’, ὦ Σώκρατες," ἔφη 6 


‘\ > 
Γλαύκων, “δυνατόν ἐστι καὶ ἀπὸ πολεμίων τὴν πόλιν 


πλουτίζειν." 


“Νὴ Δία σφόδρα y’,” ἔφη 6 Σωκράτης, “ἐάν 


A , Φ ν \ oN Ν ἃς; Sa 
τις αὐτῶν KPELTT@V 7) . HTT OV δὲ ων Και TA Οντα τροσαπο- 


βάλοι ἄν." 


“᾿Αληθῆ λέγεις," ἔφη. 


> “A ”’ Ψ , 
“Οὐκοῦν, ἔφη, “τόν 


’ Ν 9 A a , A 
45 γε βουλευσόμενον πρὸς οὕστινας δεῖ πολεμεῖν, τήν TE τῆς 


, ΄ ἌΝ [οὶ 3 ΄, 207 A Ὁ 2\ 
πόλεως δύναμιν KQL Τὴν τῶν EVAVTLWV εἰδέναι δεῖ, νὰ €av 


μὲν ἡ τῆς πόλεως κρείττων ἢ, συμβουλεύῃ ἐπιχειρεῖν τῷ 


ν la A 
πολέμῳ, ἐὰν δὲ ἥττων τῶν ἐναντίων, εὐλαβεῖσθαι πείθῃ." 


“᾿Ορθῶς λέγεις," ἔφη. 


“Πρῶτον μὲν τοίνυν," ἔφη, “λέξον 


50 ein τῇ aX / ζ Ν Ν Ν Ν δύ 
μιν HS TOAEWS ΤῊΝ ΤΕ ΡΕ ὑκῸ ν και THV ναυτικὴν υναμιν, 


> Q lal 9 ’ὔ ᾽) 
ELT TYHV TMV EVAVTLOWYD. 


x ¥ , Ψ μονας" ’ 3 a 9 

ἄν ἔχοιμί σοι οὕτως γε ἀπὸ στόματος εἰπεῖν. 
“ ) 

γέγραπταί σοι, ἔνεγκε," Edn: 


3 , ” 
QAKOVO ALLL. 


> Ν Ν ἧς 73-99 ᾿ > 
“᾿Αλλὰ μὰ τὸν At,” ἔφη, “οὐκ 


“"AXN’, εἴ 


«ςς , Ν ὃ ’ x nw 
TAVU yap 7) EWS αν TOUTO 


“᾿Αλλὰ μὰ τὸν Δί᾽, ἔφη, “οὐδὲ γέγραπταί 


’ὔ ” “ 3) » Ν \ 
55 μοί πω." “OvKovr, ἔφη, “Kal περὶ πολέμου συμβου-1ο 


4 / , > , » Ν Ἦ Ν Ν 
λεύειν τήν γε πρώτην ἐπισχήσομεν. ἴσως γὰρ καὶ διὰ τὸ 


μέγεθος αὐτῶν ἄρτι ἀρχόμενος τῆς προστατείας οὔπω 


6. ἀφαιρεῖν : retrench. — ἐσχό- 
λασα : found ἐΐηιο. --- ἀναβαλούμεθα : 
we will ροδίροηο. --- μὴ εἰδότα : see 
on πιστεύων i. τ. ὅ. 

7. σφόδρα : sc. πλουτίζειν. --- καὶ 
τὰ ὄντα : even what he had, to say 
nothing of what he had hoped to 
win from the enemy. 

8. ἥττων : sc. ἡ THs πόλεως δύνα- 
jus τῆς τῶν ἐναντίων. For a similar 
instance of ‘ brachylogy,’ cf. 111. 5. 4. 


9. ἀπὸ στόματος : by word of 
mouth, i.e. from memory. Cf. ἔχοις 
ἂν διηγήσασθαι (repeat them) ; Οὐ μὰ 
τὸν Δία οὔκουν οὕτω γε ἀπὸ στόματος 
Plato Theaet. 142 ν. --- εἰ γέγραπταί 
σοι: if you have it written down. 

10. τήν ye πρώτην (sc. ὥραν or 
ὁδόν) : for the present. For the 
omission of the noun, see G. 932, 2; 
H. 621 c; and, for the adv. acc., 
G. 1060; H. 719. — αὐτῶν : i.e. τῶν 


160 ΞΕΝΟΦΩΝΤΟΣ AIOMNHMONEYMATA T. 6. 


ἐξήτακας. ἀλλά τοι περί ye φυλακῆς τῆς χώρας οἶδ᾽ ὅτι 
¥ , \ 9 Spee a ae ee , 
ἤδη σοι μεμέληκε, καὶ οἶσθα ὁπόσαι τε φυλακαὶ ἐπίκαιροί 
60 εἰσι καὶ ὁπόσαι μή, καὶ ὁπόσοι τε φρουροὶ ἱκανοί εἶσι καὶ 
ὁπόσοι μή εἰσι: καὶ τὰς μὲν ἐπικαίρους φυλακὰς συμ- 
4 ’ὔ ~ Ν \ Ν 3 a ” 
βουλεύσεις μείζονας ποιεῖν, Tas δὲ περιττὰς ἀφαιρεῖν. 
“Νὴ Δί᾽ ἔφη ὁ Γλαύκων, “ἁπάσας μὲν οὖν ἔγωγε, ἕνεκά 11 
lal ν 5 Ν. ’ὔ V4 - Ν 5 
γε τοῦ οὕτως αὐτὰς φυλάττεσθαι ὥστε κλέπτεσθαι τὰ ἐκ 
6579S χώρας." 
οὐκ οἴει καὶ ἁρπάζειν ἐξουσίαν ἔσεσθαι τῷ βουλομένῳ; 
υ t a ρ t Me {7 


«᾽Εὰν δέτις ἀφέλῃ γ᾽, ἔφη, “τὰς φυλακάς, 


δι ες Ὁ τὸν a4 / βλθὼ ἂν ἐὺς tay) A x 
ἀτάρ, ἔφη, “πότερον ἐλθὼν αὐτὸς ἐξήτακας τοῦτο, ἢ 
9 4 3) » 
“Eixalo, edn. 

(a4 + > ἊΨ (a4 \ \ 4, ν ’ὔ 3 ’ὔ 
Ovkovr,” ἔφη, “καὶ περὶ τούτων, ὅταν μηκέτι εἰκάζωμεν 

«Ὁ ” » 
Iows,” ἔφη 


A > 9 nA , ” 
πῶς οἶσθα ὅτι κακῶς φυλάττονται; 


70 ἀλλ᾽ ἤδη εἰδῶμεν, τότε συμβουλεύσομεν ;” 
ὁ Γλαύκων, “ βέλτιον." 
GAP Ὁ > Le nal ν > »¥ > A , A 3 Ξ x 
οἶδ᾽ ὅτι οὐκ ἀφῖξαι, ὥστ᾽ ἔχειν εἰπεῖν διότι νῦν ἐλάττω ἢ 


“Kis ye μήν, ἔφη, “τἀργύρεια 12. 


, 4 5 4 3) 
πρόσθεν προσέρχεται αὐτόθεν. 


ἔφη. 


“Οὐ γὰρ οὖν ἐλήλυθα," 


“Καὶ γὰρ νὴ Δί᾽, ἔφη ὁ Σωκράτης, “λέγεται βαρὺ 


Q , > ν σ \ 4, , , 
75 TO χωριον εἰναι, WOTE οταν περὶ τούτου δέῃ συμβουλεύειν, 


ν ε 2 > 4 ” 
αὐτὴ TOL ἢ πρόφασις ἀρκέσει. 


τοῦ πολέμου implied in πολέμου. --- 
ἐξήτακας : from ἐξετάζω. --- οἵδ᾽ ὅτι: a 
formula of assurance, here (as in 
13) ironical. — ὁπόσαι φυλακαὶ ἐπί- 
καιροί εἰσι: how many outposts are 
advantageously placed. — φρουροί : 
garrisons. 

11. ἁπάσας: sc. ἀφαιρεῖν συμβου- 
λεύσω. --- τὰ ἐκ τῆς χώρας : condensed 
form of τὰ ἐν τῇ χώρᾳ ἐξ αὐτῆς. H. 
788 a. Cf. ἁρπασόμενοι τὰ ἐκ τῶν 
οἰκιῶν Cyr. vii. 2. 5. --- ἁρπάζειν : 
to rob openly, contrasted with κλέ- 
πτειν to steal. —&hy: he continued.— 
ἐλθὼν αὐτὸς κτλ. : have you gone in 
gerson and investigated this? — 


“Σκώπτομαι," ἔφη ὃ 


εἰκάζωμεν, εἰδῶμεν : the use of the 
first pers. pl., and perhaps the 
assonance of the verbs, serve to 
heighten the playful irony of the 
passage. — βέλτιον : sc. ay εἴη. 

12. τἀργύρεια : the silver mines, 
at Laurium. See on ii. 5. 2. —od 
yap οὖν: certainly not. For οὖν 
adding emphasis to an affirmative, 
see on iii. 3. 2.— καὶ γάρ: and with 
good reason, for. —déyerar βαρὺ τὸ 
χωρίον εἶναι : the district is said to be 
unhealthy. —attn σον ἣ πρόφασις 
ἀρκέσει : this will serve you as an 
excuse. —oKoTrropar: you are mock- 
ing me. Cf. οἴμοι γελῶμαι Soph, Ant. 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA III. 6. 161 


Γλαύκων. “AN ἐκείνου γέ Tot,” ἔφη, “οἶδ᾽ ὅτι οὐκ ἠμέ 13 
ληκας, ἀλλ᾽ ἔσκεψαι πόσον χρόνον ἱκανός ἐστιν ὁ ἐκ τῆς 
χώρας γιγνόμενος σῖτος διατρέφειν τὴν πόλιν, καὶ πόσου 

80els τὸν ἐνιαυτὸν προσδεῖται, ἵνα μὴ τοῦτό γε λάθῃ σέ ποτε 
ε / 3 ὃ Ν , ἡλλ᾽ iO \ » Ee WN “A 3 
ἡ πόλις ἐνδεὴς γενομένη, ἀλλ᾽ εἰδὼς ἔχῃς ὑπὲρ τῶν ἀναγ- 
καί βουλεύων τῇ πόλει βοηθεῖν τε καὶ σῴζειν αὐτήν." 

aiwv συμβουλεύων τῇ πό ηθεὶ αἱ σῴζειν αὐτήν. 
ςς ’, 3) » ε λ 4 (ς ᾽ὔ θ ie! » 
Λέγεις, ἔφη 0 Γλαύκων, “παμμέγεθες πρᾶγμα, εἴ γε 
“᾿Αλλὰ μέντοι, 14 
86 ἔφη ὁ Σωκράτης, “οὐδ᾽ ἂν τὸν ἑαυτοῦ ποτε οἶκον καλῶς 


Ν a , > A , ”? 
Kal τῶν τοιούτων ἐπιμελεῖσθαι δεήσει. 


τις οἰκήσειεν, εἰ μὴ πάντα μὲν εἴσεται ὧν προσδεῖται, 
’ Ἂς 3 / 3 ᾿ς 3 3 5 Ν ε Ν 
πάντων δὲ ἐπιμελόμενος ἐκπληρώσει: ἀλλ᾽ ἐπεὶ ἡ μὲν 
πόλις ἐκ πλειόνων ἢ μυρίων οἰκιῶν συνέστηκε, χαλεπὸν 
gy A A 

δέ ἐστιν apa τοσούτων οἴκων ἐπιμελεῖσθαι, πῶς οὐχ ἕνα, 
Ν aA θ ’, a 3 (θ ὑξῆ ᾿ ὃ a ὃ 4 
90TOv τοῦ θείου, πρῶτον ἐπειράθης αὐξῆσαι; δεῖται δέ. 
Kav μὲν τοῦτον δύνῃ, καὶ πλείοσιν ἐπιχειρήσεις: ἕνα δὲ 

ὴ δυνά pern DS ἂν πολλού δυνηθεί 
μὴ δυνάμενος ὠφελῆσαι πῶς ἄν πολλούς γε δυνηθείης ; 
ν ¥ a Ἂ ἈΝ δύ t A 3 
ὥσπερ εἴ τις ἕν τάλαντον μὴ δύναιτο φέρειν, πῶς οὐ 

Ν 9 ’ / . δ᾽ 3 , > eN«. 39 

φανερὸν ὅτι πλείω γε φέρειν οὐδ᾽ ἐπιχειρητέον αὐτῷ; 
95 “᾿Αλλ᾽ ἔγωγ᾽, ἔφη ὁ Γλαύκων, “ὠφελοίην dv τὸν τοῦ 1ὅ 


832, ὑβριζόμεθα Aristophanes Peace 
1264. Glauco is as earnest as he is 
foolish, and Socrates now adopts a 
more serious tone. 

13. προσδεῖται (sc. ἡ πόλις) : γ6- 
quires in addition, i.e. by importa- 
tion. —tva μὴ τοῦτό ye... γενομένη: 
‘‘in order that the city may never 
run short of grain through your over- 
sight.’? — εἰδὼς ἔχῃς συμβουλεύων : 


you may be able, by giving advice ᾿ 


based on knowledge. — παμμέγεθες 
πρᾶγμα: an enormous task. 

14. οὐδ᾽ ἂν οἰκήσειεν, εἰ ph 
εἴσεται : for the ‘mixed form’ of 
cond. sent., see on i. 2. 45.— 


μυρίων : a similar approximate esti- 
mate of the number of houses in 
Athens is given by Ischomachus, 
Oec. viii. 22. — οἰκιῶν, οἴκων, houses, 
households. — rot θείου : mother’s- 
brother, uncle. Charmides is meant. 
The Greek was much more exact in 
terms of relationship than the Eng- 
lish. — δεῖται δέ: for the use of δέ 
where the Eng. would employ a 
conj. of cause or reason, cf. ἦρχον δέ 
An. vi. 6. 9. It is freq. in Homer, 
cf. βίηφι δὲ φέρτεροι ἦσαν ¢ 6.—é€v 
τάλαντον : about 57 lbs. For Greek 
weights, see Gow, Companion to 
School Classics, p. 88. 


162 EENOSQNTOS AILOMNHMONEYMATA T. 6. 


θείου οἶκον, εἴ μοι ἐθέλοι πείθεσθαι. “Eira,” ἔφη 6 

, ee A 3 , , 9 ,» 
Σωκράτης, “τὸν θεῖον οὐ δυνάμενος πείθειν, ᾿Αθηναίους 
πάντας μετὰ τοῦ θείου νομίζεις δυνήσεσθαι ποιῆσαι πεί- 
θεσθαί σοι; φυλάττου, ἔφη, “ὦ Γλαύκων, ὅπως μὴ τοῦ 16 

100 εὐδοξεῖν ἐπιθυμῶν εἶ Ἶ tov ἔλθῃς: ἢ ovy ὁρᾷς ὦ 
ὑδοξεῖ μῶν εἰς τοὐναντίον ἔλθῃς: ἢ οὐχ ὁρᾷς ὡς 

’ὔ’ 3 Ν ἃ Ν > raf ~ x ’ “ἡ , 
σφαλερόν ἐστι TO ἃ μὴ οἶδέ τις ταῦτα ἢ λέγειν ἢ πράτ- 

9 A AG) ¥ 9 > , a 
τειν ; ἐνθυμοῦ δὲ τῶν ἄλλων, ὅσους οἶσθα τοιούτους, οἷοι 
φαίνονται καὶ λέγοντες ἃ μὴ ἴσασι καὶ πράττοντες, 
πότερά σοι δοκοῦσιν ἐπὶ τοῖς τοιούτοις ἐπαίνου μᾶλλον ἢ 

106 ψόγου τυγχάνειν καὶ πότερον θαυμάζεσθαι μᾶλλον ἢ 
A 3 ἴω \ \ “A > , 4 
καταφρονεῖσθαι: ἐνθυμοῦ δὲ καὶ τῶν εἰδότων 6 τι TE1T 
ν ἴω 
λέγουσι καὶ ὁ τι ποιοῦσι: καί, ὡς ἐγὼ νομίζω, εὑρήσεις 
ἐν πᾶσιν ἔργοις τοὺς μὲν εὐδοκιμοῦντάς τε καὶ θαυμα- 
ζομένους ἐκ τῶν μάλιστα ἐπισταμένων ὄντας, τοὺς 
Ν A 4 Ν , 3 A 
110d€ κακοδοξοῦντάς τε Kal καταφρονουμένους ἐκ τῶν 
> , ae. eee A 3 A \ , 
ἀμαθεστάτων. εἶ οὖν ἐπιθυμεῖς εὐδοκιμεῖν τε καὶ θαυμά- 18 
ζεσθαι ἐν τῇ πόλει, πειρῶ κατεργάσασθαι ὡς μάλιστα τὸ 
3 , ἃ 4 ’ Φ᾽᾿ Ν ’ὕ ᾽’ὕ 
εἰδέναι ἃ βούλει πράττειν: ἐὰν γὰρ τούτῳ διενέγκας 
τῶν ἄλλων ἐπιχειρῃῇς τὰ τῆς πόλεως πράττειν, οὐκ ἂν 
115 θαυμάσαιμι εἰ πάνυ ῥᾳδίως τύχοις ὧν ἐπιθυμεῖς." 


15. μετὰ τοῦ θείου : uncle and all. would seem to know what they do 
-- δυνήσεσθαι ποιῆσαι πείθεσθαι : an not know. 


accumulation of infs. contrasting 17. ἐνθυμοῦ, καὶ εὑρήσεις : see on 
awkwardly with Xenophon’s usual ἐγχείρει, καὶ ὑπακούσεται ii. 3. 16. 
well-balanced arrangement. The obj. of εὑρήσεις (the fact that 


16. ὅπως μὴ ἔλθῃς : for obj. everywhere the well-informed are 
clauses after φυλάττομαι, see GMT. respected, and the ignorant are 
370; H. 885 Ὁ. --- ὦ μὴ οἷδέ τις: for despised) is felt also, as obj., with 
the rel. cond. assumed as real, see ἐνθυμοῦ. ----ἐκ, ὄντας : consist of. 

G. 1480; H. 914 A. — ἐνθυμοῦ δὲ τῶν 18. τῶν ἄλλων: i.e. your fellow- 

ἄλλων: const. with πότερά σοι δο- citizens. —odK ἂν θαυμάσαιμι : apod. 

κοῦσιν. See on αὐτῶν ἐσκόπει, πότερα to εἰ τύχοις. --- εἰ τύχοις : a true fut. 

i, 1. 12. Socrates says τῶν ἄλλων, cond. of the ‘less vivid’ form, not 
' reckoning Glauco among those who (as freq. after θαυμάζω) causal. 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA III. 7. 


163 


Xappidnv δὲ τὸν Γλαύκωνος ὁρῶν ἀξιόλογον μὲν avdpa ἢ 


»¥ Ἁ δὰ 4 “A Ν Ν ’ 
ὄντα καὶ πολλῷ δυνατώτερον τῶν τὰ πολιτικὰ τότε πρατ- 


’ “Ὁ Ν ’ ~ ’ ἃ A “A 
τόντων, ὀκνοῦντα δὲ προσιέναι τῷ δήμῳ Kal τῶν τῆς 


, πόλεως πραγμάτων ἐπιμελεῖσθαι, “Riwé μοι; 


ἔφη, “ὦ 


δ Χαρμίδη, εἴ τις ἱκανὸς ὧν τοὺς στεφανίτας ἀ ἀγῶνας νικᾶν 


καὶ διὰ τοῦτο αὐτός 4Ὲ τιμᾶσθαι καὶ τὴν πατρίδα ἐν τῇ 


Ἑλλάδι εὐδοκιμωτέραν ποιεῖν, μὴ θέλοι ἀγωνίζεσθαι, 


A? “ , x \ ¥ ὃ > ” 
WOvLOV TLYA TOVUTOV νομίζοις QV TOV αν pa ειναυ: 


Ψ ¥ 
ὅτι," ἔφη, 


“μαλακόν τε καὶ δειλόν." 


“Δῆλον 


ἐφη, 


” 
“Ri δέ τις, 


10 “δυνατὸς ὧν τῶν τῆς πόλεως πραγμάτων ἐπιμελόμενος 


, , » ee μὰς \ A fas 3 ΄ 
TYHV TE πόλιν αὔξειν και QUTOS διὰ TOUTO τιμᾶσθαι, OKVOLY) 


δΥ A ’ > x 3 , ὃ XO iL ἮΝ 
7) TOUTO πράττειν, Ουκ QV ELKOTWS ειλος νομι OLTO ; 


« Ἴσως," ἔφη ᾿ 


A We \ ΄, ae oes. 
ατὰρ προς TL ME TAVT ἐρωτᾷς; 


Ψ ’ 
“Or, 


¥ Mt Seok ἡ ΄, ὃ Ν »” 9 Ax $s A θ Ἢ a 
ἔφη, οιμαυι σε ουνατον OVTA ΟΚνειν ἐπιμελεῖσ αι, KAL TAVTA 


7. Charmides, a man who is 
thoroughly acquainted with public 
affairs, but has yet, by reason of 
excessive modesty, never ventured to 
speak in public, is urged by Socrates 
no longer to withhold his services 
from the state. As he has not hesi- 
tated in private to give advice which 
was accepted by the most experienced 
statesmen, he will be able to speak in 
the presence of the less intelligent 
multitude in a manner which will re- 
dound to his own credit and the 
welfare of the commonwealth. 

1, XapplSyv: brother-in-law of 
Aristo, who had married his sister 
Perictione, and hence uncle of Plato 
and the younger Glauco. (See on 
iii. 6. 1.) His kinsman and guard- 
ian Critias had introduced him to 
Socrates after the siege of Potidaea 
(432 B.c.); cf. Plato Charm. 154. 
Together with Critias he fought on 


the side of the oligarchy, and fell in 
the fight at the Piraeus (403 B.c.). 
Cf. Hell. 
80. πράττειν τὰ πολιτικά. --- προσιέναι 
τῷ δήμῳ: to come forward as speaker 
in the popular assembly. — τοὺς στε- 
φανίτας ἀγῶνας νικᾶν : for the acc. 
with νικᾶν, see on ii. 6. 26. The 
ἀγῶνες were of two kinds, χρηματῖται 
and orepavira, the former offering 
a prize of money value, the latter 
(and more distinguished) the coveted 
wreath of olive, bay, or parsley. — 
ποῖόν τινα : see On τοιάδε Tis i. 1. 1. 
— δῆλον oti: was generally regarded 
as one word, hence the position of 
ἔφη after ὅτι, as in iv. 2. 14, 4. 23. 
Cf. iv. 2. 39. 

2. ἐπιμελόμενος : by giving atten- 
tion, modifies αὔξειν. ---- ὀκνοίη δή: 
should then hesitate. δή glances 
back to the words δυνατὸς ὧν κτλ. --- 
καὶ ταῦτα : and that too, sc. τούτων 


ii. 4. 19.— δυνατώτερον : 


164 


-“ 3 , ζ΄ ’ + ” 
15 ὦν. ἀνάγκη σοι μετέχειν πολίτῃ γε οντι. 


ἘΕΝΟΦΩΝΤΟΣ AILOMNHMONEYMATA 


1. de 


“pay. δὲ 


ἐμὴν δύναμιν," ἔφη ὁ Χαρμίδης, “ἐν ποίῳ ἔργῳ καταμα- 


θὼν ταῦτά μου καταγιγνώσκεις ;" 


«ς 3 Ε ἴω. ’ἢ bd] 
ν ταῖς συνουσίαις, 


5», « a , A \ A aN ’ὔ Ν Ν ξ 
ἔφη, “αἷς σύνει τοῖς τὰ τῆς πόλεως πράττουσι’ καὶ γὰρ 
ὅταν τι ἀνακοινῶνταί σοι, ὁρῶ σε καλῶς συμβουλεύοντα, 


Ἂν fr ε , > A > ~ 3) 
20 και οταν τι αμαρτάνωσιν, ὀρθῶς επιτιμῶωντα. 


“Ov Tav- 


τόν ἐστιν," ἔφη, “ὦ Σώκρατες, ἰδίᾳ τε διαλέγεσθαι Kal ἐν 


A , > / ” 
τῷ πλήθει ἀγωνίζεσθαι. 


ἣ eek: 4 > 
“Kat μήν, ἔφη, “ὃ γε ἀρι- 


‘a , SQA a 3 A ΄ x , 9 A 
θμεῖν δυνάμενος οὐδὲν ἧττον ἐν τῷ πλήθει ἢ μόνος ἀριθμεῖ, 
καὶ οἱ κατὰ μόνας ἄριστα κιθαρίζοντες οὗτοι καὶ ἐν τῷ 


25 πλήθει κρατιστεύουσιν.᾽" 


«“«Αἰδῶ δὲ καὶ φόβον, ἔφη, 


“οὐχ ὁρᾷς ἔμφυτά τε ἀνθρώποις ὄντα καὶ πολλῷ μᾶλλον 


ἐν τοῖς ὄχλοις ἢ ἐν ταῖς ἰδίαις ὁμιλίαις παριστάμενα;" 
“Καὶ σέ ye διδάξων,᾽ ἔφη, “ὥρμημαι, ὅτι οὔτε τοὺς φρο- 
νιμωτάτους αἰδούμενος οὔτε τοὺς ἰσχυροτάτους φοβούμε- 
30 vos ἐν τοῖς ἀφρονεστάτοις τε καὶ ἀσθενεστάτοις αἰσχύνῃ 


Δ ’ Ν ‘ ~ 3 an x ‘\ A 
λέγειν: πότερον γὰρ τοὺς γναφεῖς αὐτῶν ἢ TOUS σκυτεῖς 


ἐπιμελεῖσθαι. G. 1573; H. 612 ἃ. --- 
πολίτῃ γε ὄντι : as a citizen. 

9. ταῦτά μου καταγιγνώσκεις : do 
you pass this criticism on me. Cf. 
i. 3. 10. — ais: equivalent to ἐν als. 
See on ii. 1. 92. --- ἀνακοινῶνταί σοι: 
consult with you. So Xenophon (An. 
iii, 1. 5) referred (ἀνακοινοῦται) the 
invitation of Proxenus to Socrates, 
for his advice. — ὀρθῶς ἐπιτιμῶντα : 
rightly assigning the blame. 

4. τέ, καί : asin iii. 4. 3.— κατὰ 
μόνας (sc. μοίρας or δυνάμεις): ** by 

. themselves.’’ Cf. αὐτοὶ κατὰ μόνας 
ἀπεωσάμεθα Κορινθίους we by ourselves 
repulsed the Corinthians Thue. i. 
32. — κρατιστεύουσι : excel. For a 
different meaning, cf. i. 4. 14; ii. 

6. 26. 


5. ἐν τοῖς ὄχλοις : i.e. in public 
meetings, but with a depreciatory 
added meaning. Cf. ἐν δικαστηρίοις 
τε καὶ ἄλλοις ὄχλοις Plato Gorg. 454 EB. 
— καὶ σέ ye διδάξων κτλ.: Charmides 
has just said that bashfulness in 
speaking before a public audience 
has a rational ground in the nature 
of man. Socrates retorts, ‘‘ Not so; 
for you, who do not hesitate to speak 
before the most intelligent individu- 
als, yet shrink from addressing the 
unintelligent populace,’’? — which is 
not nature, but perversity. — διδάξων 
ὥρμημαι : I desire to show, lit. I have 
set out with the intention of showing. 
For the fut. participle of intention, 
see ἃ. 1565, 4; H. 969 ο. --- αἰσχύνῃ 
λέγειν : see on iii. 1. 11. 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA III. 7. 


165 


a ee x ‘ aA OK ‘ ‘ a ΙΝ 
ἢ τοὺς τέκτονας ἢ τοὺς χαλκεῖς ἢ τοὺς γεωργοὺς ἢ τοὺς 
3 ’ “ἡ Ν > ~ 5 ~ l4 Ν 
ἐμπόρους ἣ τοὺς ἐν τῇ ἄγορᾳ μεταβαλλομένους καὶ φρον- 
’ la 
τίζοντας 0 τι ἐλάττονος πριάμενοι πλείονος ἀποδῶνται, 
ἵ ε 
86 αἰσχύνῃ; ἐκ γὰρ τούτων ἁπάντων ἡ ἐκκλησία συνίστα- 


Tal. 


7 εἶ » /, ἃ ἈΝ A x A 3 la ” 
τί δὲ οἴει διαφέρειν ὃ σὺ ποιεῖς ἢ TOY ἀσκητῶν ὄντα 


’ Ν > ’ὔ A x 4 ἴω , 
κρείττω τοὺς ἰδιώτας φοβεῖσθαι; od γάρ, τοῖς πρωτεύου- 
σιν ἐν τῇ πόλει, ὧν ἔνιοι καταφρονοῦσί σου, ῥᾳδίως 

/ Ἂ “A > 4 ~ “~ , , 
διαλεγόμενος Kal τῶν ἐπιμελομένων τοῦ TH πόλει διαλέ 
40γεσθ λὺ ὄν, ἐν τοῖς μηδὲ πώ Ἵ a 

γεσθαι πολὺ περιών, ἐν τοῖς μηδὲ πώποτε φροντίσασι τῶν 


πολιτικῶν μηδὲ σοῦ καταπεφρονηκόσιν ὀκνεῖς λέγειν, 


δεδιὼς μὴ καταγελασθῇς." 


«Τί δ᾽; ἔφη, “οὐ δοκοῦσί 


, ε 9 ῪΜ 3 ’ὔ “ 9 lal , 
σοι πολλάκις οἱ ἐν TH ἐκκλησίᾳ τῶν ὀρθῶς λεγόν- 


“A 3) 
των καταγελᾶν; 


“Kat γὰρ οἱ ἕτεροι, ἔφη “διὸ καὶ 


45 θαυμάζω σου εἰ ἐκείνους, ὅταν τοῦτο ποιῶσι, ῥᾳδίως χει- 
ρούμενος, τούτοις μηδένα τρόπον οἴει δυνήσεσθαι προσ- 


ενεχθῆναι. 


6. τοὺς μεταβαλλομένους (Sc. τὰ 
ava): shopkeepers, opposed to ἐμπό- 
ρους merchants (i.e. importers). See 
on ἔμποροι iii. 4.2. Cf. the distinc- 
tion made in England (but not in 
America) between ‘tradesmen’ and 
‘merchants.’ For this and the other 
acces. with αἰσχύνῃ, see G. 1049; H. 
712. 

7. τί δὲ οἴει διαφέρειν κτλ.: and 
how do you suppose your behavior is 
any wiser than that of the athlete who, 
when proved superior to trained 
opponents, yet fears the untrained ? 
Cf. ἀσκηταὶ ὄντες τῶν καλῶν κἀγαθῶν 
ἔργων ἴωμεν ἐπὶ τοὺς πολεμίους, ἰδιώτας 
ὄντας Cyr. i. 5. 11. The Olympic 
victors are contrasted with ἰδιῶται in 
iii. 12. 1. —év τῇ πόλει : “in public 
life.’? —povricact, μηδὲ κατεφρονη- 


> 4, \ > , , Ν ε , ἃ 
ὠγαθέ, μὴ ἀγνόει σεαυτόν, μηδὲ ἁμάρτανε ἃ 


κόσι: note the difference between 
the aor. and the pf. participle, men 
who never gave a thought, and have 
conceived no contempt for you. 

8. οἱ ἕτεροι : the others, sc. in 
private circles, mentioned in 3.— 
θαυμάζω σου εἰ : see on ἐθαύμαζε εἰ 
i. 1. 19. ---ἐκείνους : refers to οἱ ἕτεροι, 
nearest mentioned, but farther from 
the speaker’s thought. — τούτοις : 
i.e. the people in the public as- 
sembly. —mpooevexOfjvar: ‘‘ to face.”’ 

9. μὴ ἀγνόει σεαυτόν : do not 
underestimate your own powers. Cf. 
cessator esse noli (uh ἀπορρᾳθύ- 
pe) et illud γνῶθι σεαυτόν noli 
putare ad arrogantiam minu- 
endam solum esse dictum, 
verum etiam, ut bona nostra 
norimus Cic. Ep. ad Quint. iii. 6. 


166 


EENO®ONTOS AILTOMNHMONEYMATA ΓΤ. 7, 8. 


e A ε ’ὔ ε Ν Ν ε ’ Sa 
οἱ πλεῖστοι ἁμαρτάνουσιν: οἱ yap πολλοὶ ὡὠρμηκότες ἐπὶ 


XV A Ἂς lal »» ook 3 ἊΝ Sve, a 
τὸ σκοπεῖν τὰ τῶν AAAWV πράγματα οὐ τρέπονται ἐπὶ τὸ 


560 ἑαυτοὺς ἐξετάζειν. 


Ν > > θύ 4 tANG 
μη ουν απορρᾳ υμέει Τουτου, a a 


διατείνου μᾶλλον πρὸς TO σεαυτῷ προσέχειν: Kal μὴ 


ἀμέλει τῶν τῆς πόλεως, εἴ τι δυνατόν ἐστι διὰ σὲ βέλτιον 


¥ , N a 3-2 9 , εν 
ἔχειν: τούτων γὰρ καλῶς ἐχόντων οὐ μόνον οἱ ἄλλοι 


πολῖται, ἀλλὰ καὶ οἱ σοὶ φίλοι καὶ αὐτὸς σὺ οὐκ ἐλάχιστα 


55 ὠφελήσῃ." 


> ’ 3 Ψ a 3 ra Ν , 
Αριστίππου ὃ ἐπυχέειβρουντος ἐλέγχειν TOV Σωκράτην, 


ν ee , Se: ’ Ν ’ > id ’ὔ’ 
ὥσπερ AUTOS UT ἐκείνου τὸ πρότερον ἠλέγχετο, βουλόμενος 


‘\ , > A ε 4 9 : ’ 3 
τοὺς συνόντας ὠφελεῖν 0 Σωκράτης ἀπεκρίνατο οὐχ 


ὥσπερ ot φυλαττόμενοι μή πῃ ὁ λόγος ἐπαλλαχθῇ, ἀλλ᾽ 


ε x , 4 4, ‘\ ‘2 
5 WS av TETELO [LEVOL μάλιστα πράττειν TA δέοντα. 


ε X 
O μὲν 


Ἀ “ον ας » ¥ > ’ 3 ld ν » 5» Lal 
yap QUTOV YPETO EL TL εἰδείη ἀγαθόν, Wa €l Τι ELTTOL Τῶν 


, e x ΄ x Ν Xd ΄ 2. Sere 
TOLOUT@V, OLOV Ἢ OLTLOV Ἢ TWOTOV 1) χρήματα 7) υγιειαν 


“Ὁ ε»ὔ, x , ὃ 4 δὴ a Ν 9 2 
ἢ ῥώμην n τόλμαν, δεικνύοι δὴ τοῦτο κακὸν ἐνίοτε 


»” e εἶ > Ν 9 ΒΡ 
ὯΝ’. -Ὁ δὲ εἰδὼς OTL εαν 
-- τούτου : gen. of separation with 
ἀπορρᾳθύμει. --- ὠφελήσῃ : middle as 
passive, as in i. 6. 14; iii. 3. 15. 

8. ‘Good’ and ‘ beautiful’ are 
relative terms. The same thing can 
be good or bad, beautiful or ugly, 
according as it answers its purpose. 
Houses, temples, and altars are most 
beautiful when they best serve the end 
for which they were constructed. 

1. ᾿Αριστίππου : see on i. 2. 60, 
and ii. 1. 1. --- ἠλέγχετο : the impf. 
may mean that. Xenophon here had 
in mind other conversations than 
the one recorded in ii. 1. — οὐχ 
ὥσπερ κτλ. : not like those who are 
on their guard lest their words be 
perverted. —a@s ἂν πεπεισμένοι (86. 
ἀποκρίναιντο) κτλ. : as they would 


τι ἐνοχλῇ ἡμᾶς, δεόμεθα 


answer if persuaded that they are 
above all things doing what is right. 
Cf. ὁ τὰ δέοντα πράττων οὐ σωφρονεῖ; 
Plato Charm. 164 B. Socrates’s 
method of discussion, which aimed 
at the discovery of truth, is con- 
trasted with the ways of the 
Sophists, who were chiefly con- 
cerned with wresting the victory 
from an opponent by rhetorical 
artifice. 

2. δεικνύοι δή : for δή, see on iii. 
7. 2. -- ἐάν τι ἐνοχλῇ pds κτλ. : 
Socrates, knowing well that if any- 
thing annoys us, we seek the 
remedy, felt that, the word ἀγαθόν 
could best be explained as a relative 
term by applying it- to special cases, 
as, é€.g., ‘good for a fever,’ ‘good 


8 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA III. 8. 


167 


Ξ Ξ Ὁ 
Ἰοτοῦ παύσοντος, ἀπεκρίνατο ἧπερ καὶ ποιεῖν κράτιστον. 


“Fe 


Apa ye,” ἔφη, “ ἐρωτᾷς pe εἴ τι οἶδα πυρετοῦ ἀγαθόν ;” 


“Οὐκ ἔγωγ᾽, ἔφη. “᾿Αλλ᾽ ὀφθαλμίας ;" “Οὐδὲ τοῦτο." 


ος “᾿Αλλὰ λιμοῦ ;” 


“ Οὐδὲ λιμοῦ." 


“᾿Αλλὰ μήν, ἔφη, “ εἴ 


ae ‘al ¥ > θὲ ἴὸ ἃ ὃ Ν > θό 3 
γ EPWTAS με ει Τι aya OV OLOA O μη ενος aya OV ἐστιν, 


¥> » ¥ 
τ οὔτ᾽ οἶδα," ἔφη, “ οὔτε δέομαι." 


a > A 
Πάλιν δὲ τοῦ ᾿Αριστίππου ἐρωτῶντος αὐτὸν εἴ τι εἰδείη 


καλόν, “Καὶ πολλά; ἔφη. 


4 

ὅμοια ἀλλήλοις ;” 

τατα ἔνια." 
x Γ᾿ 

20 καλὸν ἀν εἴη ;" 


5 3 ΠΝ ἂν ΄, 
““Ap οὖν," edn, “πάντα 


ε ar ‘ me 18> Py , 

“Ὡς οἷόν τε μὲν οὖν, ἔφη, “ἀνομοιό- 
A > ¥ \ na al 

“Πῶς οὖν," ἔφη, “τὸ TH καλῴ ἀνόμοιον 

ν A 47> 99 ¥ » A A ἴω 

“Ὅτι νὴ At,” ἔφη, “ἔστι μὲν τῷ καλῷ 


πρὸς δρόμον ἀνθρώπῳ ἄλλος ἀνόμοιος καλὸς πρὸς πάλην, 


ἔστι δὲ ἀσπὶς καλὴ πρὸς τὸ προβάλλεσθαι ὡς ἔνι ἀνο- 


’ Me τῷ ’, “ Ν 4, / ‘\ ‘ 
μοιοτάτη τῷ ἀκοντίῳ, καλῷ πρὸς τὸ σφόδρα TE καὶ ταχὺ 


φέρεσθαι." 


4 > ’ ¥ 3 ἈΝ 3 7 3) 
25 ὅτε σε ἠρώτησα εἴ τι ἀγαθὸν εἰδείης. 


“ Οὐδὲν διαφερόντως," ἔφη, “ἀποκρίνῃ μοι ἢ 


“Σὺ δ᾽ ote,” ἔφη, 


“ἄλλο μὲν ἀγαθόν, ἄλλο δὲ καλὸν εἶναι; οὐκ οἶσθ᾽ ὅτι 


Ν 1% ΄ λ , 3 θ rope ‘ A . δ 
προς TAVTA TAVTA KAAA TE καγασα ἐστι; TPWTOV MEV y2p 


ἡ ἀρετὴ οὐ πρὸς ἄλλα μὲν ἀγαθόν, πρὸς ἄλλα δὲ καλόν 


3 » © 7 \ 4 τὰ Ν Ν Ν ἅν ον 
€OTLY, ETELTA OL ἄνθρωποι TO αὐτο TE Και προς TA αὐτὰ 


80καλοί τε κἀγαθοὶ λέγονται, πρὸς τὰ αὐτὰ δὲ καὶ τὰ 


for hunger,’ etc. It should be re- 
membered that the Platonic Socrates 
held a very different view. Cf. Plato 
Alc. I, 116 a ff. See Introd. § 20 ff. 
— τοῦ παύσοντος (86. τὸ ἐνοχλοῦν) : 
something to check it. —ovetv: ἡ. 6. 
ἀποκρίνεσθαι. Like facere in Lat. 
and ‘do’ in Eng., ποιεῖν is often 
made to do duty for another verb, 
to avoid repetition. — κράτιστον : 
8C. ἦν. 

3. épwras: do you mean to ask. 
- πυρετοῦ : for a fever, obj. genitive. 


-- ἀὀλλὰ μήν: at vero, introduces 
the conclusive statement. — δέομαι : 
86. εἰδέναι. 

4. καὶ πολλά : aye, many things. 
ὡς οἷόν τε (Sc. ἐστί) ἀνομοιότατα : as 
unlike as it is possible to be. — ὡς 
ἔνι (equivalent to ἔνεστι) : like ws 
οἷόν τε above. —éort: for the accent, 
see G. 144, 5; H. 480. For the 
thought of the passage, cf. iv. 6. 9. 

5. ἢ ὅτε: than (you did) when. 
- πρὸς ταὐτά : with reference to the 
same objects. — τὸ αὐτό : in the same 


168 EENO®ONTOS AITOMNHMONEYMATA TIT. 8. 


, A 9 ͵ , 9 Ν , Ἀ 
σώματα τῶν ἀνθρώπων καλά τε κἀγαθὰ φαίνεται, πρὸς 
ταν Ν Ν Ss , @ » “ , 
ταὐτὰ δὲ καὶ τἄλλα πάντα οἷς ἄνθρωποι χρώνται, καλά τε 


> Ν ’ ἧς 9 rN » a9) i s 
κἀγαθὰ νομίζεται πρὸς ἀπερ av ευὐχρήηστα ἢ. Αρ 
οὖν," ἔφη, «καὶ κόφινος κοπροφόρος καλόν ἐστιν; “Ny 


42 99 


¥ ες \ A 3 \ 9 , 3N Ν \ 
35 At, ἔφη, “Kal χρυσὴ γε ἀσπὶς αἰσχρόν, ἐὰν πρὸς τὰ 
ἑαυτῶν ἔργα ὁ μὲν καλῶς πεποιημένος 7, ἡ δὲ κακῶς." 
(a4 ’ὕ 49> y» “ la Ν 3 Ν Ν 5 Ν Ss ” 
Λέγεις ov,” ἔφη, “καλά TE Kal αἰσχρὰ τὰ αὐτὰ εἶναι; 
“Kat νὴ Δί᾽ ἔγωγ᾽, ἔφη, “ἀγαθά τε καὶ κακά: πολλάκις 
γὰρ τό τελιμοῦ ἀγαθὸν πυρετοῦ κακόν ἐστι, καὶ τὸ πυρε- 
he \ ~ 4 > , Ν Ν Ν Ν 
40Tov ἀγαθὸν λιμοῦ κακόν ἐστι" πολλάκις δὲ τὸ μὲν πρὸς 
ὃ , Ν Ν uA > 4 \ δὲ Ν , 
ρόμον καλὸν πρὸς πάλην αἰσχρόν, TO δὲ πρὸς πάλην 
ἃς Ν ’ 3 ’ ’ Ν > Ν Ν \ 
καλὸν πρὸς δρόμον αἰσχρόν: πάντα yap ἀγαθὰ μὲν καὶ 
δι Ἂς a ἃ Ἂν με Ν Ν 3 Ν Ν ἃ 
καλά ἐστι πρὸς ἃ ἂν εὖ ἔχῃ, κακὰ δὲ καὶ αἰσχρὰ πρὸς ἃ 
ἂν κακῶς." 
45 Καὶ οἰκίας δὲ λέγων τὰς αὐτὰς καλάς τε εἶναι καὶ χρη- 
“ 4, » > 3 / ν A > “ 
σίμους παιδεύειν ἔμοιγ᾽ ἐδόκει οἵας χρὴ οἰκοδομεῖσθαι. 
9 / de 50 elt  Ν / Ν ‘rv es 4 
ἐπεσκόπει OE WOE Apa ye τὸν μέλλοντα οἰκίαν ovay 
χρὴ ἔχειν τοῦτο det μηχανᾶσθαι, ὅπως ἡδίστη τε ἐνδιαι- 
τᾶσθαι καὶ χρησιμωτάτη ἔσται;" τούτου δὲ ὁμολογου- 
50 μένου- “Οὐκοῦν ἡδὺ μὲν θέρους ψυχεινὴν ἔχειν, ἡδὺ δὲ 


ἴω ἐλ » 3) 3 or de \ ἴω A 
χειμωνος ἀλεεινὴν ; ἐπειδὴ O€ καὶ τοῦτο updater: 


ταν. ---- πρὸς ἅπερ κτλ. : added in 
explanation οἵ πρὸς ταὐτά, ‘ with 
reference to their usefulness.’ 

6. καί, ye: and even. — τὰ ἑαυτῶν 
ἔργα : ‘‘their respective uses.’? — 
τὰ αὐτά: subj., with καλά and 
αἰσχρά for preds. in this sent., and 
ἀγαθά and κακά in the next. 

7. λιμοῦ, πυρετοῦ: asin3. Food is 
good for hunger, but we must ‘starve 
a fever.’ — τὸ πρὸς δρόμον καλόν : 
what is admirable for running. —ev 
ἔχῃ: are well adapted. 


.« 


8. παιδεύειν : to be giving us a 
lesson.— οἵας χρὴ οἰκοδομεῖσθαι : obj. 
of παιδεύειν, what kind of houses we 
ought to build. — τοῦτο : see on ii. 4. 
1. -- ἡδίστη ἐνδιαιτᾶσθαι: for the 
inf. act. or mid. with adjs., see 
GMT. 763; H. 952, and a. 

9. ἐπειδὴ συμφαῖεν : see on ἐπεὶ 
διομολογήσαιτο i. 2.ὄ ὅ7. The subj. is 
the persons who on each occasion 
were conversing with Socrates. 
This sent. shows, too, that τούτου 
ὁμολογουμένου above is equivalent to 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA III. 8. 


169 


ςς 3 a a 3 “A Ν 7 , eg 
Οὐκοῦν ἐν ταῖς πρὸς μεσημβρίαν βλεπούσαις οἰκίαις 
τοῦ μὲν χειμῶνος 6 ἥλιος εἰς τὰς παστάδας ὑπολάμπει, 
τοῦ δὲ θέρους ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν αὐτῶν καὶ τῶν στεγῶν πορευ- 
55 όμενος σκιὰν παρέχει; οὔκουν, εἴ γε καλῶς ἔχει ταῦτα 
ν ’ 3 A A e ’ Ν Ν Ν 
οὕτω γίγνεσθαι, οἰκοδομεῖν Set ὑψηλότερα μὲν τὰ πρὸς 
ψ 
μεσημβρίαν, ἵνα ὃ χειμερινὸς ἥλιος μὴ ἀποκλείηται, χθα- 
’ Ν Ν Ν + ν ε % x 3 / 
μαλώτερα δὲ τὰ πρὸς ἄρκτον, ἵνα οἱ ψυχροὶ μὴ ἐμπίπτω- 
σιν ἄνεμοι; ὡς δὲ συνελόντι εἰπεῖν, ὅποι πάσας ὥρας 10 


5 , x 4 , Ν , » 9 la 
60 aUTOS TE ἂν ἥδιστα καταφεύγοι KQL TA OVTA ἀσφαλέστατα 


“A ν “ἡ 3 , ε ’ \ / » 
τιθοῖτο, αὕτη av εἰκότως ἡδίστη τε καὶ καλλίστη οἴκη- 
¥ ‘\ \ Ν &. , > , 
σις εἴη. γραφαὶ δὲ καὶ ποικιλίαι πλείονας εὐφροσύνας: 


ἀποστεροῦσιν ἢ παρέχουσι. 


ναοῖς γε μὴν καὶ βωμοῖς 


χώραν ἔφη εἶναι πρεπωδεστάτην ἥτις ἐμφανεστάτη οὖσα 
θὅ ἀστιβεστάτη εἴη: ἡδὺ μὲν γὰρ ἰδόντας προσεύξασθαι, 
ἡδὺ δὲ ayvas ἔχοντας προσιέναι. 


ὁπότε ὁμολογοῖεν (sc. οἱ mapdyres). — 
πρὸς μεσημβρίαν βλεπούσαις : SO we 
say ‘looking toward the south.’ Cf. 
Oec. ix. 4. The house should be 
built high and open toward the 
south, so that the slanting rays 


of the sun in winter may enter. 


the portico (racrds) at the front of 
the «pen court in the center of 
the dwelling. Toward the north it 
should be low and protected against 
storms. 

10. ὡς συνελόντι εἰπεῖν : fo sum it 
up in a word. For the dat., see G. 
1172, 2; H. 771 b, and, for the abs. 
inf., G. 1534; H. 9856. --- αὐτός : the 
owner, in distinction from his 
property (τὰ ὄντα). --- ἂν καταφεύγοι : 
potential opt. in cond. rel. clause. 


See GMT. 557. — γραφαὶ καὶ 
ποικιλίαι : paintings and wall- 
decorations. It is not clear whether 


Socrates objects to these because so 
much money is ‘locked up’ in them, 
or on the ground that they ‘are 
more trouble than they are worth.’ 
- ναοῖς : instead of the ‘ Attic’ 
form vegs. So ναόν An. v. 3. 9. -- 
χώραν : a situation. —éypaverrary : 
most conspicuous, being on high 
ground. — οὖσα : concessive. —dortt- 
βεστάτη : lit. most untrodden, ‘far 
from the madding crowd.’ —i86vras : 
sc. from a distance. — ἁγνῶς ἔχοντας 
προσιέναι : helps to explain ἀστιβε- 
ordrn, **to approach it unsullied”’ 
sc. by contact with the throng. 

9. Socrates discusses and defines 
the terms ἀνδρεία (courage), σοφία 
(wisdom), φθόνος (envy), σχολή (leis- 
ure), βασιλεύς and ἄρχων (king and 
commander), εὐπραξία (good conduct), 
and εὐτυχία (good fortune). See 
Introd. §§ 20, 22. 


170 


EENO®ONTOS AITOMNHMONEYMATA Γ΄. 9. 


Πάλιν δὲ ἐρωτώμενος, ἡ ἀνδρεία πότερον εἴη διδακτὸν 9 
x ΄ & OQ? , 9 ὦ τὲ ἐσ A , 
ἢ φυσικόν, iar μέν, ἔφη, “ὥσπερ σῶμα σώματος 
4 
ἰσχυρότερον πρὸς τοὺς πόνους φύεται, οὕτω Kal ψυχὴν 
ψυχῆς ἐρρωμενεστέραν πρὸς τὰ δεινὰ φύσει γίγνεσθαι: 
ὅ ὁρῶ γὰρ ἐν τοῖς αὐτοῖς νόμοις τε καὶ ἔθεσι τρεφομένους 


πολὺ διαφέροντας ἀλλήλων τόλμῃ. 


’, lal 
νομίζω μέντοι πᾶσαν 


, 6 Χ , Ν. 3 , » 
φύσιν μαθήσει καὶ μελέτῃ πρὸς ἀνδρείαν αὐξεσθαι- 
a \ Ν 9 , \ ex 3 x , 
δῆλον μὲν yap ὅτι Σκύθαι Kal Θρᾷκες οὐκ ἂν τολμήσειαν 


ἀσπίδας καὶ δόρατα λαβόντες Λακεδαιμονίοις διαμάχε- 
10c0a, φανερὸν δὲ ὅτι καὶ Λακεδαιμόνιοι οὔτ᾽ ἂν Θρᾳξὶ 


πέλταις καὶ ἀκοντίοις οὔτε Σκύθαις τόξοις ἐθέλοιεν ἂν 


διαγωνίζεσθαι. 


<= aw > » Xx 5 Ν ΄ῪΚᾺ » ’ 
ὁρῶ ὃ ἔγωγε καὶ ἐπὶ τῶν ἄλλων πάντων 


ὁμοίως καὶ φύσει διαφέροντας ἀλλήλων τοὺς ἀνθρώπους 


καὶ ἐπιμελείᾳ πολὺ ἐπιδιδόντας. 


ἐκ δὲ τούτων δῆλόν 


3 ψ , \ \ δ 3 , \ ‘ 
15€OTLW OTL TAVTAS XP Kat TOUS εὐφυεστέρους και τους 


ἀμβλυτέρους τὴν φύσιν ἐν οἷς ἂν ἀξιόλογοι βούλωνται 


nw A \ nw 
γενέσθαι, ταῦτα Kat μανθάνειν καὶ μελετᾶν." 


1. 7 ἀνδρεία πότερον : for the same 
order, see ii. 7.8. Cf. iv. 6. 10, 11, 
and i. 1. 16, where Xenophon speaks 
of Socrates as discussing just such 
themes as these in this chapter. — 
διδακτὸν ἢ φυσικόν: capable of 
being taught, or a gift of nature. 
For the gender, see on χρησιμώτερον 
ii. 3. 1. — οἶμαι pév: corresponds 
to νομίζω μέντοι in 2. Cf. ii. τ. 12, 
and An. ii. 1. 18. — ἰσχυρότερον 
φύεται: is by nature stronger. — τὰ 
δεινά : as in i. 1. 14. — γίγνεσθαι: 
grows. 

2. μαθήσει καὶ μελέτῃ: cf. ii. 6. 
959. --- πρὸς ἀνδρείαν: as regards 
courage. — Σκύθαι καὶ Θρᾷκες : races 
often cited by Greek writers as ex- 
amples of half-savage daring. ‘‘ Yet 


even these, brave as they are, would 
scarce venture to fight with shield 
and spear against the veteran in- 
fantry of Lacedaemon.’’ Cf. the 
story of David in Saul’s armor, 
1 Sam. xvii. 39. — τολμήσειαν : for 
the potential opt., see G. 1328; 
H. 872. — διαμάχεσθαι : to fight it 
out. — ovr ἄν, ἐθέλοιεν Gv: for the 
repetition of the particle, see on 
i. 4. 14. -- πέλταις : Thracian peltasts 
formed a considerable part of the 
army of Cyrus the Younger. Cf. An. 
£20. 

3. ἐπὶ τῶν ἄλλων πάντων ὁμοίως : 
similarly in all other matters. — ἔπιδι- 
δόντας : intr., improving. Cf. Lat. 
proficere. — εὐφυεστέρους : more 
highly endowed by nature. 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA III. 9. 


171 


Σοφίαν δὲ καὶ σωφροσύνην οὐ διώριζεν, ἀλλὰ τῷ τὰ 

μὲν καλά τε καὶ ἀγαθὰ γιγνώσκοντα χρῆσθαι αὐτοῖς καὶ 
~ Ν > Ν 3 A 

90 τῷ τὰ αἰσχρὰ εἰδότα εὐλαβεῖσθαι σοφόν τε kal σώφρονα 


_ ἔκρινεν. 


’ \ > ‘\ 
προσερωτώμενος δὲ εἰ τοὺς ἐπισταμένους μὲν ἃ 


δεῖ πράττειν, ποιοῦντας δὲ τἀναντία σοφούς τε καὶ ἐγκρα- 
τεῖς εἶναι νομίζοι, “Οὐδέν γε μᾶλλον," ἔφη, “ἢ ἀσόφους 
τε καὶ ἀκρατεῖς: πάντας γὰρ οἶμαι προαιρουμένους ἐκ 


as > 5 , ἃ » 7 3 A εὺ 
25T@V EVOEXOMEVMV A OLOVTAL συμφορώτατα QUTOLS εἰναι, 


nw ’ 
ταυτα πράττειν. 


/ Ἵν ‘ > EE A , 
νομίζω οὖν τοὺς μὴ ὀρθῶς πράττοντας 
» Ἀ ¥ , > ” 
οὔτε σοφοὺς ovTe σώφρονας εἶναι. 


ἔφη δὲ καὶ τὴν 


ὃ , Ν A » A - ‘ , > 
ικαιοσύνην Kal THY ἀλλην πᾶσαν ἀρετὴν σοφίαν εἶναι- 


’ Ν ’ὔ Ἁ τον ἊΝ 4 > “A , , 
τα TE Y2p δίκαια καὶ TAVTA οσα QpPEeTy πράττεται, καλά TE 


A 3 A > ᾿ » 3 xX A wn 
30 Kal ἀγαθὰ εἶναι: καὶ OUT ἂν τοὺς ταῦτα εἰδότας ἄλλο 


> \ ͵ ὑδὲ λέ θ » Ν Ν > V4 
QVTt TOUTWY OVOEV TT PoE EOUAL OUTE τους μη ἐπισταμένους 


͵7ὔ , > Ν aX 3 a ε ’ 
δύνασθαι πράττειν, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἐὰν ἐγχειρωσιν, αμαρτάνειν. 


ν Ν Ν / Vs Ν Ν Ν Ἁ ’ 
οὕτω [καὶ] τὰ καλά τε καὶ ἀγαθὰ τοὺς μὲν σοφοὺς πράτ- 


τειν, τοὺς δὲ μὴ σοφοὺς οὐ δύνασθαι, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἐὰν ἐγχει- 


a ε , 3 Ν a , ΄ Ν Ν x 
35 ρῶσιν, ἁμαρτάνειν: ἐπεὶ οὖν τά τε δίκαια Kal τὰ ἄλλα 


4. σοφίαν καὶ σωφροσύνην : pru- 
dence and temperance. Σοφία (wis- 
dom or prudence) is right judgment 
about what ought to be done; cw¢po- 
σύνη is» temperance, self-control or 
self-regulation, in acting. Cf. So- 
crates primus philosophiam 
devocavit a caelo et in urbi- 
bus collocavit et in domos 
etiam introduxit, et coégit 
de vita et moribus rebusque 
bonis et malis quaerere Cic. 
Tusc. Disp. v. 4. 41. ---ἀλλὰ τῷ τὰ 
μὲν καλὰ xrd.: ‘* but by a man’s 
knowing and practicing the higher 
virtues, and recognizing and avoid- 
ing baseness, he judged him to be 


both wise and virtuous.’’ τῷ xpf- 
σθαι is dat. of instrument, and as 
inf. has for its subj. ἄνθρωπον under- 
stood, with which γιγνώσκοντα agrees. 
The condensed form of expression 
in this sent. seems to emphasize the 
identity of ‘ knowing’ and ‘doing.’ 

5. δικαιοσύνην : it is difficult to 
find an Eng. equivalent; perhaps 
righteousness is nearest it. — édv 
ἐγχειρῶσιν : direct discourse const. 
retained for. vividness. — ἐπεὶ οὖν 
τά τε δίκαια κτλ. : the logical form 
which this argument takes may be 
condensed as follows: ““ righteous- 
ness is included in wisdom. For, 
(a) upright and virtuously-wrought 


172 


EENO®ONTOS ATLOMNHMONEYMATA 


᾿ς 9. 


, De θὰ , 9 a , δὴλ > 
Kaha TE Kal ayava πᾶντα ἀρετῇ πράττεται, ONAOV εἰναι 


ν Ν 4 \ e ,» A > Ν ra 3 ’, 
ὅτι καὶ δικαιοσύνη καὶ ἡ ἄλλη πᾶσα ἀρετὴ σοφία ἐστί. 


la ‘3 > / Ν » Ss ΜΝ 3 ’ 
μανίαν γε μὴν ἐναντίον μὲν ἔφη εἶναι σοφίᾳ, οὐ μέντοι γε 


Ν 3 , ἐφ >. @f 
τὴν ἀνεπιστημοσύνην μανίαν ἐνόμιζε. 


Ν \ 5 re 
TO δὲ αγνόοειν 


40 ἑαυτὸν καὶ ἃ μὴ οἶδε δοξάζειν τε καὶ οἴεσθαι γιγνώσκειν 


3 , ΄ 3 ΄ > 
ἐγγυτάτω μανίας ἐλογίζετο εἶναι. 


Ν 4 ‘\ 
τοὺς μέντοι πολλοὺς 


3 ἃ Ν ε λ A 5 ἴω Ν ὃ : / 4 
ἔφη, ἁ MEV OL πλεῖστοι ἀγνοοῦσι, τοὺς διημαρτήκότας τού- 


3 , , Ν Ν , Ὁ ε 
των οὐ φάσκειν μαίνεσθαι, τοὺς δὲ διημαρτηκότας ὧν οἱ 


Ν ’ὔ ΄ A > ἡ , 
πολλοὶ γιγνώσκουσι μαινομένους καλεῖν: ἐάν TE γάρ TLS 


σ ¥ 5 σ \ A 
45 μέγας οὕτως οἴηται εἶναι ὠστε KUTTEW τὰς πύλας TOU 


’ ’ ΦΥ͂ ν 3 Ν ν 3 5 lal 
TELYOUS διεξιών, εαν TE οὕτως LOKUVUPOS WOT επίχεέειβειν 


οἰκίας αἴρεσθαι ἢ ἄλλῳ τῳ ἐπιθέσθαι τῶν πᾶσι δήλων 


ν 3 4 ’ 3 A ’ὔ , Ἂς Ν 
ΟΤι ἀδύνατά €OTL, τουτον μαίνεσθαι φάσκειν, TOUS δὲ 


μικρὸν διαμαρτάνοντας οὐ δοκεῖν τοῖς πολλοῖς paive- 


δοσθαι, ἀλλ᾽ ὥσπερ τὴν ἰσχυρὰν ἐπιθυμίαν ἔρωτα καλοῦ- 


ν Χ 4 , 
σιν, οὕτω Kal τὴν μεγάλην παράνοιαν μανίαν αὐτοὺς 


καλεῖν. 


actions are καλὰ κἀγαθά, (Ὁ) the 
wise and they alone choose τὰ 
καλὰ xayabd. Hence the wise and 
they alone choose righteousness ; 
so wisdom includes righteousness.”’ 
See Introd. § 19 ff. — δικαιοσύνη : 
for the omission of the art., see on 
i. 2. 238. — ἡ ἄλλη ἀρετή: reliqua 
virtus. Cf. Plato Prot. 323 a. 

6. paviav: in accordance with 
the definition of Socrates, madness 
(μανία, insania) is logically op- 
posed to wisdom (σοφία, sapien- 
tia), and hence is ignorance of one’s 
own strength and weakness ; wisdom 
being distinguished by its knowledge 
of these. But people in general give 
the name of madness to the igno- 
rance of otherthings. Cf. the vagaries 


of μαινόμενοι as described in i. 1. 14. — 
γὲ μήν : as in iii. 8. 10. --- οἷδε : the 
subj. (τὶς) is to be supplied from the 
subj. (τινά) of the infs. ἀγνοεῖν etc. — 
ἐγγυτάτω: for the adv. as pred., cf. i. 
6. 10. — τοὺς μέντοι πολλούς : subj. of 
φάσκειν and καλεῖν. --- ἃ... ἀγνοοῦσι : 
rel. clause preceding its grammatical 
antec. τούτων. 

7. péyas: tall. — otras: placed 
with emphasis after μέγας. See on 
i. 2. 4. — ἄλλῳ τῳ ἐπιθέσθαι: to 
attempt anything else. — τῶν πᾶσι 
δήλων ὅτι ἀδύνατά ἐστι: see on 
ἀδήλων (ὄντων) i. 1. 6. --- φάσκειν : 
86. τοὺς πολλούς as Subject. — ὥσπερ 
τὴν κτλ. : just as they call strong 
desire love, so they call great mental 
disorder madness. 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA III. 9. 


173 


Φθόνον δὲ σκοπῶν 6 τι εἴη, λύπην μέν τινα ἐξεύρισκεν 
ψιἷΝ »” cad , ἣ “ΘΝ ΄, 3 ’ ¥ \ 
αὐτὸν οντα, οὔτε μέντοι τὴν ἐπὶ φίλων ἀτυχίαις οὔτε τὴν 
δ ἐπ᾿ ἐχθρῶν εὐτυχίαις γιγνομένην, ἀλλὰ μόνους ἔφη φθο- 
νεῖν τοὺς ἐπὶ ταῖς τῶν φίλων εὐπραξίαις ἀνιωμένους. 

, , » A te. ~ > ΄ 
θαυμαζόντων δέ τινων εἴ τις φιλῶν τινα ἐπὶ τῇ εὐπραξίᾳ 


> la) A ε , ν Ν ν ’ 
avTov λυποῖτο, υπεμίμνησκεν OTL πολλοὶ οὕτως πρὸς τινας 


» ν A 
ἔχουσιν WOTE κακῶς μὲν πράττοντας μὴ δύνασθαι περι- 


60 ορᾶν ἀλλὰ βοηθεῖν ἀτυχοῦσιν, εὐτυχούντων δὲ λυπεῖσθαι. 
τοῦτο μέντοι φρονίμῳ μὲν ἀνδρὶ οὐκ ἂν συμβῆναι, τοὺς 


< > af A > ee, | ͵7ὕ 3 , 
ἠλιθίους δὲ ἀεὶ πάσχειν αὐτό. 


\ A ἴω ’ » ἴω ’ὔ Ν ΄ 
Σχολὴν δὲ σκοπῶν τί εἴη, ποιουντας μέν τι τοὺς πλεί- 


στους εὑρίσκειν ἔφη: καὶ γὰρ τοὺς πεττεύοντας καὶ τοὺς 
65 γελωτοποιοῦντας ποιεῖν TL: πάντας δὲ τούτους ἔφη σχολά- 
5 a) Ν > A of , Ν ’ 4 
ζειν- ἐξεῖναι yap αὐτοῖς ἰέναι πράξοντας τὰ βελτίω Tov- 
> Ν i4 ~ , Su % Ν ’ φ > ’ 
των: ἀπὸ μέντοι τῶν βελτιόνων ἐπὶ τὰ χείρω ἰέναι οὐδένα 


’ὔ 3 ’ » lal 9 , 5 A » 
σχολάζειν: εἰ δέ τις ἴοι, τοῦτον ἀσχολίας αὐτῷ οὔσης 


lal » wn ’ὔ’ 
κακῶς ἔφη τοῦτο πράττειν. 


8. φθόνον, ὅ τι ety: for the ‘ pro- 
lepsis,’ see on i. 2. 18. So σχολήν, 
rt εἴη in 9. ---.λύπην τινά : a kind of 
pain. — οὔτε τὴν ἐπ᾽ ἐχθρῶν εὐτυχίαις 
γιγνομένην : for this feature of the 
Socratic ethics, see on ii. 6, 35. —et 
τις φιλῶν τινα: that any one who 
really loved a friend. For εἰ after. 
verbs of wondering, cf. 7. 8. — 
βοηθεῖν : grammatically co-ord. with 
δύνασθαι, but opposed in thought 
to περιορᾶν. ---- ἀτυχοῦσιν : ‘in their 
misfortune.’? — φρονίμῳ : sensible. — 
“πάσχειν αὐτό: have this feeling. Cf, 
on this passage, Rochefoucauld’s 
cynical maxim, that ‘there is some- 
thing not wholly displeasing to us 
in the misfortunes of our best 
friends.’ 


9. τί εἴη : for τί in indir. ques- 
tions, see on i. 1. 1.— καὶ γὰρ τοὺς 
πεττεύοντας : Cf. i. 2. 57, where τοὺς 
κυβεύοντας (dicers) is the term used for 
gamblers. The game of πεττοί was 
something like our draughts and was 
played on a board of thirty-six squares. 
— γελωτοποιοῦντας : buffoons. — σχο- 
Adferv: were idlers. Idleness, thus, 
is a relative term ; when we could be 
better employed than we are, we are 
idle. — ἐξεῖναι γὰρ αὐτοῖς κτλ. : for it 
was in their power to go and do better 
things than these. — οὐδένα σχολά- 
fev: no one had leisure, in the better 
sense of the word. — ἀσχολίας αὐτῷ 
οὔσης : as he had no leisure (for 
such things). —kakés τοῦτο πράτ- 
τειν : acted badly in this respect. 


174 ἘΕΝΟΦΩΝΤΟΣ ATLOMNHMONEYMATA ΓΤ. 9. 


A κ᾿ . » 9 4 Ν A » 
70 Βασιλεῖς δὲ καὶ ἄρχοντας ov τοὺς TA σκῆπτρα ἔχοντας 10 
» > sQA Ν νῶι “A ’ ε ᾽ 50" 
ἔφη εἶναι οὐδὲ τοὺς ὑπὸ τῶν τυχόντων αἱρεθέντας οὐδὲ 
Ν 4 , SQA Ν ΄, ὑδὲ Ν 
τοὺς κλήρῳ λαχόντας οὐδὲ τοὺς βιασαμένους οὐδὲ τοὺς 
Ψ 
ἐξαπατήσαντας, ἀλλὰ τοὺς ἐπισταμένους ἄρχειν. ὁπότε! 
nr » 5 
yap τις ὁμολογήσειε τοῦ μὲν ἄρχοντος εἶναι TO προστάτ- 
75TEW ὅ τι χρὴ ποιεῖν, τοῦ δὲ ἀρχομένου τὸ πείθεσθαι, Ere 
δε + 
δείκνυεν ἔν TE νηὶ TOV μὲν ἐπιστάμενον ἄρχοντα, τὸν δὲ 
4 ‘\ Ν dl ἈΝ 3 A i. / 
ναύκληρον καὶ τοὺς ἄλλους τοὺς ἐν τῇ νηΐ πάντας πειθο- 
A Ἁ ’ὔ Ἀ 4 
μένους τῷ ἐπισταμένῳ, καὶ EV γεωργίᾳ τοὺς κεκτημένους 
Ν “ Ἃ, 
ἀγρούς, καὶ ἐν νόσῳ τοὺς νοσοῦντας, καὶ ἐν σωμασκίᾳ 
“A Ν ¥ ao 4 
80 TOUS σωμασκοῦντας, καὶ TOUS ἄλλους πάντας οἷς ὑπάρχει 
x Ν A 
τι ἐπιμελείας δεόμενον, ἂν μὲν αὐτοὶ ἡγῶνται ἐπίστασθαι 
ἐπιμελεῖσθαι ---- εἰ δὲ μή, τοῖς ἐπισταμένοις οὐ μόνον 
A Ν 
παροῦσι πειθομένους, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἀπόντας μεταπεμπομέ- 
νους, ὅπως ἐκείνοις πειθόμενοι τὰ δέοντα πράττωσιν: ἐν 
85 δὲ ταλασίᾳ καὶ τὰς γυναῖκας ἐπεδείκνυεν ἀρχούσας τῶν 
3 a Ν Ν Ν \ > , ν ‘\ aA 
ἀνδρῶν διὰ τὸ τὰς μὲν εἰδέναι ὅπως χρὴ ταλασιουργεῖν, 
Ἀ Ν Ν > 4 > , Ν ΄“ , Y ἴων 
τοὺς δὲ μὴ εἰδέναι. εἰ δέ τις πρὸς ταῦτα λέγοι ὅτι τῷ 12 
’ὔ » Ν 4 A 5 θῶ va (74 Ν A 
τυράννῳ ἔξεστι μὴ πείθεσθαι τοῖς ὀρθῶς λέγουσι, “ Καὶ πῶς 
Ws 99-5 Ἢ ’ \ / 3 , , 27 
av,” ἔφη, “ ἐξείη μὴ πείθεσθαι, ἐπικειμένης γε ζημίας ἐάν 
eae - ¥ , 
90 TLS τῷ εὖ λέγοντι μὴ πείθηται; ἐν @ yap ἂν τις πράγματι 
ἴω 5 ε ε ’ 
μὴ πείθηται τῷ εὖ λέγοντι, ἁμαρτήσεται δήπου, ἁμαρτάνων 


10. ὑπὸ τῶν τυχόντων : ‘by the 
multitude.’? See on τὰ τυχόντα i. 1. 
14. ---λαχόντας : sc. τὸ ἄρχειν. --- τοὺς 
βιασαμένους : those who have won it 
by violence. 

11. ὁμολογήσειε : opt. in past 
general cond. rel. clause, like 
συμφαῖεν in iii. 8.9. So ef τις λέγοι 
in 12. --- τὸν ναύκληρον : the ship- 
owner, here distinguished from τῷ 
ἐπισταμένῳ, t.é€. the captain. — καὶ 
τοὺς ἄλλους πάντας κτλ. : and so 


all others who have anything needing 
attention, if they think they know 
how to attend to it, (do so); other- 
wise, etc. The ellipsis after ἐπίστα- 
σθαι ἐπιμελεῖσθαι may be filled with 
ἐπιμελομένους, Supplementary parti- 
ciple with ἐπεδείκνυεν, which governs 
also the participles πειθομένους and 
μεταπεμπομένους. 

12. δήπου: opinor, credo.— 
ἁμαρτάνων : circumstantial participle 
of condition. 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA III. 9. 


175 


Ν - ᾽’ ” > \ 7 ἰὴ , 9 A ἈΝ 
δὲ ζημιωθήσεται." εἰ δὲ φαίη τις τῷ τυράννῳ ἐξεῖναι καὶ 18 
> “A XN cy A “ Ν δὲ 5 , 3» »ν 
ἀποκτεῖναι τὸν εὖ φρονοῦντα, “Τὸν δὲ ἀποκτείνοντα,᾽ ἔφη, 

A ¥ 
“τοὺς κρατίστους TOV συμμάχων οἴει ἀζήμιον γίγνεσθαι 
δὴ ὡς ἔ ζημιοῦσθαι; πότερα γὰρ ἂν μᾶλλ te 
959 ws eETUXE CHP ; pa yap μαλλον OLEL 
lat an x ν Ν ’ 3 
σῴζεσθαι τὸν τοῦτο ποιοῦντα ἢ οὕτω καὶ τάχιστ᾽ ἂν 


ἀπολέσθαι; " 


3 , , 2 N ΄ , 2 A , 
Ερομένου δέ τινος QAUTOV TL δοκοίη αὐυτῳ κράτιστον 14 


> >.7 5 / Ss 3 ’ (a4 5 ’,ὕ >b] 

ἀνδρὶ ἐπιτήδευμα εἰναι, ἄπεκρίνατο, Εὐπραξίαν. 
, de 4 5 Ν Ἀ 5 ἴα 3 “ὃ 4 

100 μένου O€ πάλιν εἰ Kal THY εὐτυχίαν ἐπιτήδευμα νομίζοι 


ἐρο- 


> “ lal Ν > 9 ’, » 99) .Ὰ rt CEE Ν 

εἶναι, “ Πᾶν μὲν οὖν τοὐναντίον ἔγωγ᾽, ἔφη, “τύχην καὶ 
~ ῪΝ A ῪΝῸΝ 

πρᾶξιν ἡγοῦμαι: τὸ μὲν γὰρ μὴ ζητοῦντα ἐπιτυχεῖν τινι 

τῶν δεόντων εὐτυχίαν οἶμαι εἶναι, τὸ δὲ μαθόντα τε καὶ 


ὕ ’ > A > / 4 Ν ε an 
μελετήσαντά TL εὖ ποιεῖν εὐπραξίαν νομίζω, καὶ οἱ τοῦτο 


3 ὃ ͵ ὃ ἴω ,ὕ > , ” 
105 E7UTNOEVOVTES OOKOVTL μοι εὖ πραττειν. 


ae eer 
και ἀρίστους 15 


δὲ καὶ θεοφιλεστάτους ἔφη εἶναι ἐν μὲν γεωργίᾳ τοὺς 
7) pev yeupy4 

Ν > , 9.59 , x > , 

τὰ γεωργικὰ εὖ πράττοντας, ἐν δ᾽ ἰατρείᾳ τοὺς τὰ ἰατρικά, 


3 Ν ΄ ‘ Ν ’ Ν Ν Ν Ss / 
ἐν δὲ πολιτείᾳ τοὺς τὰ πολιτικά: τὸν δὲ μηδὲν εὖ πράτ- 


τοντα οὔτε χρήσιμον οὐδὲν ἔφη εἶναι οὔτε θεοφιλῆ. 


13. καί: οὕθη. ---ἢ ὡς ἔτυχε 
ζημιοῦσθαι : ““ΟΥ gets off with a 
light punishment.’? --- ἂν μᾶλλον 
σῳΐεσθαι: would be more secure. 
-- ἢ... ἀπολέσθαι : or in this way, 
and speedily, would perish. 

14, κράτιστον ἐπιτήδευμα: the 
best ριιγϑιιϊί. --- εὐπραξίαν : good con- 
duct. The questioner of Socrates 
understands εὐπραξία and ed πράττειν 
in their usual sense of success and 
succeed, synonymous with εὐτυχία 
and εὐτυχεῖν (so used in 8) ; and nat- 
urally asks if Socrates considers 
this a pursuit.— τὸ ἐπιτυχεῖν : sc. 
τινά as subj., easily supplied from 
ζητοῦντα. ---- εὖ ποιεῖν : to do well. 


15. θεοφιλεστάτους : most be- 
loved by the gods. Distinguish this 
compound from φιλόθεος loving the 
gods. 

10. The subject of the painter’s 
art is whatever falls under his eye. 
He atiains his ideal form by combin- 
ing the best features of the actual, 
and can even represent mental char- 
acteristics, so far as these express 
themselves outwardly. In like man- 
ner, sculpture expresses not only the 
outward form of the body, but also 
the varying moods of the soul. The 
artisan, on the other hand, has only 
the actual and material to keep in 
mind: his work must fulfill its 


176 


EENO®ONTOS AITOMNHMONEYMATA ΓΤ. 10. 


> Ν Ν. \ ¥ ~ Ν 4, 3 ’ ἃ 
Αλλὰ μὴν καὶ εἰ ποτε τῶν Tas τέχνας ἐχόντων KallO 


3 ΄ ψ ΄, ἡ: ὡς ΄, ΄ \ 
Eepyaclas EVEKaA χρωμένων QUTQLS διαλέγοιτό τινι, και 


τούτοις ὠφέλιμος ἦν. 


εἰσελθὼν μὲν γάρ ποτε πρὸς Παρ- 


ράσιον τὸν ζωγράφον καὶ διαλεγόμενος αὐτῷ, “Apa,” ἔφη, 


“> ΄, » "3 δὶ 5 / ASE , \ 
5 “ὦ Παρράσιε, γραφική ἐστιν ἡ εἰκασία τῶν ὁρωμένων; τὰ 


a) A Ν Ae Ν ἃς ‘ Ν \ \ Ἂς 
γοῦν κοῖλα καὶ τὰ ὑψηλὰ καὶ τὰ σκοτεινὰ καὶ τὰ φωτεινὰ 


Ν Ἂ \ Ν Ν Ν Ν Ν , Ν Ν A 
Kal τὰ σκληρὰ Kal τὰ μαλακὰ Kal τὰ τραχέα Kal τὰ λεῖα 


\ δ ΄ \ \ \ ΄ ὃ Ν aA , 
Kal τὰ VEA Και TA παλαιὰ σωματα OLA τῶν χρωμάτων 


9 / > “Ὁ ” 
ἀπεικάζοντες ἐκμιμεῖσθε. 


“᾿Αληθῆ λέγεις," ἔφη. 


Ν 
“Kat 


10 μὴν τά γε καλὰ εἴδη ἀφομοιοῦντες, ἐπειδὴ οὐ Padiov ἑνὶ 


3 , A » ’ὔ »» 9 ἴω 
ἀνθρώπῳ περιτυχεῖν ἄμεμπτα πάντα ἔχοντι, ἐκ πολλῶν 


, Ν 3 ε ’ ’ὔ ν ν ἣν, 
συνάγοντες τὰ ἐξ ἑκάστου κάλλιστα οὕτως ὅλα τὰ 


4 Ν la 4 3) 
σώματα καλὰ ποιεῖτε φαίνεσθαι. 


ἐν ” 
OUTWS. 


“Ποιοῦμεν yap,” ἔφη, 


“Τί γάρ;" ἔφη, “τὸ πιθανώτατον καὶ ἥδιστον 


Ὗ 4 Ν ’ + 8 ’ 3 
15 και φιλικώτατον και ποθεινότατον καὺ ἐρασμιώτατον ATO- 


μιμεῖσθε τῆς ψυχῆς ἦθος; 


x Se , 3 a ” 
YY OVOE μιμῆτον ἐστι Τοῦτο; 


“Πῶς γὰρ av,” ἔφη, “μιμητὸν εἴη, ὦ Σώκρατες, ὃ μήτε 
συμμετρίαν μήτε χρῶμα μήτε ὧν σὺ εἶπας ἄρτι μηδὲν 


design. Every coat of mail that fits, 
Jinds in that its true harmony. 

1. ἐχόντων: devoted to. See on 
ἔχῃ i. 6. 18. --- ἐργασίας ἕνεκα: as 
a profession. — τινί, τούτοις : as 
in i. 2. 62. --- εἰσελθὼν μέν: cor- 
responds to πρὸς δὲ Κλείτωνα εἰσελ- 
θών in 0. --- ἸΠΠαρράσιον : a famous 
painter from Ephesus, who resided 
at Athens, and at this time was a 
young man, perhaps thirty years 
the junior of Zeuxis (i. 4. 8). 
Pliny says of him primus 
symmetriam picturae dedit, 
primus argutias vultus, ele- 
gantiam capilli, venustatem 
oris, confessione artificum in 


lineis extremis palmam adep- 
tus Hist. Nat. xxxv. 10. — γραφική : 
without the art., aS σωφροσύνη i. 2. 
23. The pred. εἰκασία, as containing 
the definition, takes the article. — 
ἐκμιμεῖσθε : you reproduce to the 
life. 

2. τὰ καλὰ εἴδη : beautiful fig- 
ures, — ἀφομοιοῦντες : circumstan- 
tial participle of time. — ἄμεμπτα : 
faultless. — ἐξ ἑκάστου : in each. See 
on τὰ ἐκ THs χώρας iii. 6. 11. — ὅλα : 
as a whole. For its predicate posi- 
tion, see G. 979; H. 672 ο. 

3. τί yap: see on ii, 6. 2. -- 
ποθεινότατον : most provocative of 
desire. — ἦθος : character. — ὧν σὺ 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA III. 10. 177 


’ 


“"Ap’ οὖν," ἔφη, “γίγνε- 4 
20ται ἐν ἀνθρώπῳ τό τε φιλοφρόνως καὶ τὸ ἐχθρῶς βλέπειν 


» , δ ΨἉΨ ε , 3 ) 
ἔχει, μηδὲ ὅλως ὁρατόν ἐστιν; 
ΕἾ - A 
“Ἔμοιγε Soxet,” ἔφη. “Οὔκουν τοῦτό γε 
“Kat pada,” ἔφη. “Ἐπὶ δὲ 


A ἴω ’ 5 “A \ ἴω “A ε ’ “ἃ 
Τοις Τῶν φίλων ἀγαθοῖς και τοις Κακοις ομοιως σοι δοκοῦ- 


πρός τινας; 
μιμητὸν ἐν τοῖς ὀμμασιν;" 


¥ . , 9 , 4 ν ὦ “Ὁ 
σιν ἔχειν τὰ πρόσωπα οἵ τε φροντίζοντες καὶ οἱ μή; 
25 “Μὰ Δί᾽ οὐ δῆτα, ἔφη. “ἐπὶ μὲν γὰρ τοῖς ἀγαθοῖς φαι- 
ὃ ( ἐπὶ δὲ a A θ Χ ΄ ” «Οὐ Δ 32 
ροί, ἐπὶ δὲ τοῖς κακοῖς σκυθρωποὶ γίγνονται. ὑκοῦν, 
“Kat pada,” ἔφη. 
“᾿Αλλὰ μὴν Kal TO μεγαλοπρεπές τε καὶ ἐλευθέριον Kal τὸ 5 


» ςς A nw ὃ Ν 3 ’ ” 
ἔφη, “καὶ ταῦτα δυνατὸν ἀπεικάζειν ; 


, eae 4 Ν Ν , ἃ 
ταπεινόν τε καὶ ἀνελεύθερον καὶ τὸ σωφρονικόν τε καὶ 
80 φρόνιμον καὶ τὸ ὑβριστικόν τε καὶ ἀπειρόκαλον καὶ διὰ 
τοῦ προσώπου καὶ διὰ τῶν σχημάτων καὶ ἑστώτων καὶ 
ςς A ΄ ” » 
Αληθῆ λέγεις," ἔφη. 
’ 
“Kat pada, ἔφη. “Πότε- 
9 ἴω 
pov οὖν," ἔφη, “ νομίζεις ἥδιον ὁρᾶν τοὺς ἀνθρώπους bv 


rd > 4, / ” 
κινουμένων ἀνθρώπων διαφαΐνει. 

« 9 ἴω XN la) FSF 
Οὐκουν Kal ταυτα μιμητα:; 


86 ὧν τὰ καλά τε καὶ ἀγαθὰ καὶ ἀγαπητὰ ἤθη φαίνεται, ἢ 
ὃ 5. @ ers ΄, κ Ν \ te eS WEN 
L ὧν τὰ αἰσχρά TE καὶ πονηρὰ καὶ μισητά; Πολὺ νὴ 
Δί᾽ ἔφη, “διαφέρει, ὦ Σώκρατες." 
Πρὸς δὲ Κλείτωνα τὸν ἀνδριαντοποιὸν εἰσελθών ποτε 6 

“ 9 > 
καὶ διαλεγόμενος αὐτῷ, “Ὅτι per,” ἔφη, “ὦ Κλείτων, ἀλ- 

A aA Ἀ 
40 λοίους ποιεῖς δρομεῖς τε καὶ παλαιστὰς καὶ πύκτας καὶ 
-- σχημάτων : bearing. — διαφαίνει : 


(intr.) shows through. — ἥδιον (sc. 
civat) ὁρᾶν : is pleasanter to con- 


εἶπας : i.e. in 1, τὰ κοῖλα etc. — ὅλως : 
‘*in a word.”’ 
4. γίγνεται ἐν ἀνθρώπῳ κτλ. : “does 


it ever happen among men that 
friendship or hatred for any one is 
shown by a look ?’’ — ὁμοίως ἔχειν : 
equivalent to ὅμοιοι εἶναι. --- πρόσωπα : 
acc. of specification.—ot φροντίζοντες : 
‘those who sympathize.’? Const. 
with ἐπὶ τοῖς ἀγαθοῖς καὶ τοῖς κακοῖς. 

5. τὸ μεγαλοπρεπὲς κτλ. : the 
adjs. are contrasted pair with pair. 


template. — τοὺς ἀνθρώπους : obj. of 
ὁρᾶν. The answer of Parrhasius, 
though not direct, is perfectly nat- 
ural, and leaves no doubt as to his 
full assent to the views of Socrates. 

6. Κλείτωνα : not mentioned else- 
where. — ἀλλοίους : ““ of various ap- 
pearances and postures.’? — δρομεῖς 
κτλ. : for the Greek athletic contests, 


178 EENOSQNTOS AILTOMNHMONEYMATA T. 10. 


, BENS) ἈΠΕ ΣΙΝ ἃ \ , 
παγκρατιαστάς, ὁρῶ τε καὶ οἶδα: ὃ δὲ μάλιστα ψυχαγω- 
A Ν ~ 3, ‘\ > ’ Ν Ν ,ὔ 
γεῖ διὰ τῆς ὄψεως τοὺς ἀνθρώπους, τὸ ζωτικὸν φαίνεσθαι, 
πῶς τοῦτο ἐνεργάζῃ τοῖς ἀνδριᾶσιν ;” 


3.0) 


7 
Κλείτων οὐ ταχὺ ἀπεκρίνατο, “Ap, 


3 Ν Ἀττι lal e 

ἐπεὶ δὲ ἀπορῶν 6 

» A 

ἔφη, “ τοῖς τῶν ζώντων 
»¥ 9 ΄ὕ ees , A ,ὕ 

45 εἴδεσιν ἀπεικάζων τὸ ἔργον ζωτικωτέρους ποιεῖς φαίνε- 
Ν 

“ Καὶ pada,” ἔφη. 

“ , Ν 
τε ὑπὸ τῶν σχημάτων κατασπώμενα καὶ τἀνασπώμενα 


‘ , ” aA 
σθαι τοὺς ἀνδριάντας ; “Οὐκοῦν τά 
3 “a 7 Ν Ν la A, Ν ’ὔ’ 
ἐν τοῖς σώμασι καὶ τὰ συμπιεζόμενα καὶ τὰ διελκόμενα 
Ν \ ’ Ἂς Ας ’, 3 , ε ’ὔ 
καὶ τὰ ἐντεινόμενα καὶ τὰ ἀνιέμενα ἀπεικάζων ὁμοιότερά 
A 9 A A A 4 ” 
BOTE τοῖς ἀληθινοῖς Kal πιθανώτερα ποιεῖς φαίνεσθαι; 
Ψ' \ > » Ν \ \ / A 
“Πάνυ μὲν οὖν," ἔφη. “TO δὲ καὶ τὰ πάθη τῶν ποιούν- 
/ > A “ , A 
των TL σωμάτων ἀπομιμεῖσθαι οὐ ποιεῖ τινα τέρψιν τοῖς 
θ » 3) «ς sae Se AB ts fa; 3 a) Ν “A \ 
εωμένοις ; Εἰκὸς γοῦν, ἔφη. “Οὐκοῦν καὶ τῶν μὲν 
4 > Ν Ν » 3 ’ “ Ν 
μαχομένων ἀπειλητικὰ τὰ ὄμματα ἀπεικαστέον, τῶν δὲ 


“Σφόδρα 


’ > ’ ε 5» / ” 
BB νενικηκότων εὐφραινομένων ἢ ois μιμητέα; 


see Smith’s Dict. Antigq. 8.0. Ludus. 
--- ψυχαγωγεῖ : allures. — τὸ ζωτικὸν 
φαίνεσθαι : the lifelike appearance. 
It is interesting to remember that 
Socrates himself was trained as a 
sculptor by his father Sophroniscus ; 
and that a marble group of the 
Graces (ai Χάριτες), said to have 
been executed by him, was seen by 
Pausanias near the entrance to the 
Acropolis. See Introd. § 1. 

7. ταχύ: immediately. — ἀπει- 
κάζων τὸ ἔργον: by assimilating 
the work (before γου). --- ὑπὸ τῶν 
σχημάτων : in consequence of the 
(various) positions. — συμπιεζόμενα : 


compressed. — mOavorepa: ‘* more 
impressive.”’ 
8. τὰ πάθη: the emotions. Obs. 


the gradual increase in the demands 
made upon the artist: first, the 


various classes are distinguished, — 
runners, wrestlers, efc.; then, the 
various σχήματα in each class; and 
lastly, the various emotions ex- 
pressed by these. Cf. the lines 
of Schiller which were on the wall 
of the old Gewandhaus in Leipzig: 
‘Leben athmet die bildende Kunst, 
Geist fordr’ ich vom Dichter, | Aber 
die Seele spricht nur Polyhymnia 
aus,’ where the lyric Muse alone is 
allowed to express the soul’s deepest 
emotions. —Td ὄμματα ἀπεικαστέον, 
ἡ ὄψις μιμητέα : obs. the use of both 
the pers. and impers. constructions, 
-- ἀπειλητικά : pred. adj., with 
menacing glance. — εὐφραινομένων : 
joined with τῶν νενικηκότων instead 
of with ὄψις (as ἀπειλητικά with 
ὄμματα) because εὐφραίνεσθαι is more 
appropriately attributed to the person 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA III. 10. 


Ys ἔφη. 


179 


A » + LI Ν. > ial 
“Δεῖ apa,” ἔφη, “τὸν ἀνδριαντοποιὸν τὰ τῆς 


ψυχῆς ἔργα τῷ εἴδει προσεικάζειν." 
Πρὸς δὲ Πιστίαν τὸν θωρακοποιὸν εἰσελθών, ἐπιδείξαν- 9 


. τ ἊΝ ~ > 4 θ , > > ld “Ny 
TOS αὐτοῦ τῷ Σωκράτει θώρακας εὖ εἰργασμένους, “Νὴ 
᾿ 9 5 7 
θοτὴν Ἥραν," ἔφη, “καλόν ye, ὦ Πιστία, τὸ εὕρημα τὸ τὰ 


μὲν δεόμενα σκέπης τοῦ ἀνθρώπου σκεπάζειν τὸν θώρακα, 


ταῖς δὲ χερσὶ μὴ κωλύειν χρῆσθαι. 


ἀτάρ, ἔφη, “λέξον 10 


μοι, ὦ Πιστία, διὰ τί οὔτε ἰσχυροτέρους οὔτε πολυτελεστέ- 


ἴω » an Ν , / al ” 
ρους τῶν ἄλλων ποιῶν τοὺς θώρακας πλείονος πωλεῖς ; 


66 “Ὅτι, ἔφη, “ὦ Σώκρατες, εὐρυθμοτέρους Taw.” “Τὸν δὲ 


ε θ Δ Ὁ » «ςς , ᾽ “Δ θ “Ὁ > ὃ ͵ 
ῥυθμόν, ἔφη, “πότερα μέτρῳ ἢ σταθμῷ ἀποδεικνύων 


7 “ 5 Ν \ 7 > Ἄρα ’ὔΨ 
πλείονος τιμᾷ; οὐ γὰρ δὴ ἴσους γε πάντας οὐδὲ ὁμοίους 


> ’, » ε ἴω 
οἶμαί σε ποιεῖν, εἴ γε ἁρμόττοντας ποιεῖς." 


“᾿Αλλὰ νὴ 


AU,” ἔφη, “ποιῶ: οὐδὲν γὰρ ὄφελός ἐστι θώρακος ἄνευ 


Ἰοτούτου." 


εὔρυθμά ἐστι, τὰ δὲ appvOya;” 


»» ’ 
“Οὔκουν, ἔφη, “σώματά γε ἀνθρώπων τὰ μὲν 11 


4 Ἀ “-» » 
“Πάνυ μὲν οὖν, edn. 


«ΠὼὧΩ S ») ¥ ΠῚ ΄“ 5 50 , ε , \ 
ὡς οὖν, ἔφη, “τῷ ἀρρύθμῳ σώματι αρμόττοντα τὸν 


θώρακα εὕρυθμον ποιεῖς ;” 


» PT ae , , 3 5» θ ” 
ἐφη “ὁ appottwy yap ἐστιν ευὑρυθμος. 


a“? tes , ” 
Ὥσπερ Kal αρμόττοντα, 
“Δοκεῖς pou,” 12 


715 ἔφη ὁ Σωκράτης, “τὸ evpvO pov ov καθ᾽ ἑαυτὸ λέγειν, ἀλλὰ 


Ν ἈΝ , y x > , 3 ‘Ss a KR 
TPOS TOV χρώμενον, ὠσπερ αν €l φαίης ασπιοᾶα W AV 


ε ’ 4, » > \ , Ν 53 
αΡμοττΤη, τούτῳ εὔρυθμον εἰναι, και χλαμύδα, καὶ τάλλα 


than to τῇ ὄψει. — τὰ τῆς ψυχῆς 
ἔργα : the workings of the soul. 

9. καλὸν τὸ εὕρημα, τὸ σκεπάζειν 
τὸν θώρακα : it is an excellent in- 
vention, that the corselet should cover. 
The τό belongs to both infs. (cxerd- 
fev and κωλύειν). 

10. ἔφη : he continued. — πλείο- 
vos: 86. τῶν ἄλλων. For the gen. of 
price, see G. 1134; H. 1746. ---εὐρυθμο- 
τέρους : better proportioned. —rév δὲ 
ῥυθμὸν... πλείονος τιμᾷ: do you show 


this proportion in the measurement or 
weight (of your corselets), and so get 
a better price for them?—e ye: at 
least, if. —mwod: I do make (them 
to fit). 

11, ὥσπερ καὶ ἁρμόττοντα (sc. 
ποιῶ): precisely as I make it fit, t.e., a 
good ‘fit’ is good proportion. For 
καί, see on i. 1. 6. 

12. καθ᾽ ἑαυτό: per se, inand 
for itself. —mpés: with reference to. 
- ὥσπερ dv εἰ φαίης : 1.6. ὥσπερ ἂν 


180 EENO®QNTOS AILTOMNHMONEYMATA TI. 10. 


ε ΄ ¥ ¥ A Ayes ¥ x ge 
ὡσαύτως ἔοικεν ἔχειν τῷ σῷ λόγῳ. ἴσως δὲ Kal ἄλλο τι 18 
> A 9 ἈΝ “ ε Ψ ,- 3) (a4 4 4} 
οὐ μικρὸν ἀγαθὸν τῷ ἁρμόττειν πρόσεστι. “Δίδαξον, 
80 ἔφη, “ὦ Σώκρατες, εἴ τι ἔχεις." ““Hrrov,” ἔφη, “τῷ βάρει 
πιέζουσιν οἱ ἁρμόττοντες τῶν ἀναρμόστων τὸν αὐτὸν 
σταθμὸν ἔχοντες - οἱ μὲν γὰρ ἀνάρμοστοι ἢ ὅλοι ἐκ τῶν 
» 4 “ἡ Ν » lal , , 
ὥμων κρεμάμενοι ἢ Kal ἄλλο TL τοῦ σώματος σφόδρα 
4 4 \ \ - e \ ε , 
πιέζοντες δύσφοροι καὶ χαλεποὶ γίγνονται: oi δὲ ἁρμότ- 
4 Ἂς μον a Ν ε ἢ “ ~ XN 
85 TOVTES, διειλημμένοι TO βάρὸς τὸ μὲν ὑπὸ τῶν κλειδῶν Kal 
3 , \ Nee SX A » x L ee, Hee “ ’ὔ Ν 
ἐπωμίδων, τὸ δὲ ὑπὸ τῶν ὦμων, τὸ δὲ ὑπὸ τοῦ στήθους, τὸ 
δεν 6 Ν “A rd Ἂς Ἅ, ε Ν ἊΜ ’ὔ, > ’ὔ ἊΜ > 
δὲ ὑπὸ τοῦ νώτου, TO δὲ ὑπὸ τῆς γαστρός, ὀλίγου δεῖν οὐ 
φορήματι, ἀλλὰ προσθήματι ἐοίκασιν. “Eipnkas,” ἔφη, 14 
“ Fae ὃ 3. » \ 3 ἊΝ ἂν 7 » ’ὔ 
αὐτὸ du ὅπερ ἔγωγε τὰ ἐμὰ ἔργα πλείστου ἄξια νομίζω 
90 εἶναι - ἔνιοι μέντοι τοὺς ποικίλους καὶ τοὺς ἐπιχρύσους 
θώρακας μᾶλλον ὠνοῦνται." “᾿Αλλὰ μήν, ἔφη, “εἴ γε 
διὰ ταῦτα μὴ ἁρμόττοντας ὠνοῦνται, κακὸν ἔμοιγε δοκοῦσι 
, ee Mee, 2 α {ΣῊΝ δᾶν 66 ae 
ποικίλον TE καὶ ἐπίχρυσον ὠνεῖσθαι. aTap, ep, Tov 15 
σώματος μὴ μένοντος, ἀλλὰ τοτὲ μὲν κυρτουμένου, τοτὲ δὲ 
95 ὀρθουμένουύ, πῶς av ἀκριβεῖς θώρακες ἁρμόττοιεν ;" 
“Οὐδαμῶς, ἔφη. “Λέγεις, ἔφη, “ἁρμόττειν οὐ τοὺς 
3 A > si Ν \ “A 3 “~ ’ ” 
ἀκριβεῖς, ἀλλὰ τοὺς μὴ λυποῦντας ἐν τῇ χρείᾳ. 
a 5 an 
“Αὐτός, ἔφη, “ τοῦτο λέγεις, ὦ Σώκρατες, Kal πάνυ ὀρθῶς 
ἀποδέχῃ." 


φαίης, εἰ φαίης, our common Eng. _inf., see on iii. ὃ. 10.— προσθήματι : 


just as if you should βαψ. --- τῷ σῷ “ἃ natural appendage.’’ 

λόγῳ : according to what you say. 14. αὐτό: the very quality. — 
Cf. κατά γε τοῦτον τὸν λόγον iv. κακόν ποικίλον τε kal ἐπίχρυσον: a 
2. 852. decorated and gilded nuisance. 

13. ἔχεις : as in i. 6. 18. --- πιέ- 15. ἔφη : he added. — μὴ pévov- 
ἵουσιν : oppress. — τὸν αὐτὸν στα- τος : does not remain (long in one po- 
θμὸν ἔχοντες : although having the sition). —dxpiBets : accurately fitted. 
same weight. —Svernppévor τὸ βάρος: --- αὐτὸς λέγεις : ita est. Cf. the 
by distributing their weight.—tmwé6: emphatic od εἶπας of Matt. xxvi. 25. 
sc.” some partic. like φερόμενον.--- ---πάνυ ὀρθῶς ἀποδέχῃ: you have 


ὀλίγου Setv: almost. For the abs. the idea exactly. 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA III. 11. 181 


Γυναικὸς δέ ποτε οὔσης ἐν τῇ πόλει καλῆς, ἣ ὄνομα 11 
ἣν Θεοδό ὶ οἵ t Ὁ πείθ θέ 
ἣν Θεοδότη, καὶ οἵας συνεῖναι τῷ πείθοντι, μνησθέντος 
αὐτῆς τῶν παρόντων τινὸς καὶ εἰπόντος ὅτι κρεῖττον εἴη 
λόγου τὸ κάλλος τῆς γυναικός, καὶ ζωγράφους φήσαντος 
δ εἰσιέναι πρὸς αὐτὴν ἀπεικασομένους, οἷς ἐκείνην ἐπιδει- 
4 ε A 4 a“ » ςς 9 ’ὕ x » / 
κνύειν ἑαυτῆς ὅσα καλῶς ἔχοι, “ Ἰτέον ἂν εἴη θεασομέ. 

” » ε ’ὔ (a4 > Ν δὴ 9 4 4 ἈΝ 
νους, ἔφη ὁ Σωκράτης: “οὐ γὰρ δὴ ἀκούσασί γε τὸ 
λόγου κρεῖττον ἔστι καταμαθεῖν." καὶ ὃ διηγησάμενος, 

“Οὐκ av φθάνοιτ᾽," ἔφη, “ἀκολουθοῦντες. οὕτω μὲν δὴ 2 
10 πορευθέντες πρὸς τὴν Θεοδότην καὶ καταλαβόντες ζω- 
παυσαμένου δὲ 
τοῦ ζωγράφου, ““Ὦ avdpes,” ἔφη ὁ Σωκράτης, “πότερον 

ε A ὃ a A 86 , » 4 EA Ν ’, 

ἡμᾶς δεῖ μᾶλλον Θεοδότῃ χάριν ἔχειν, ὅτι ἡμῖν τὸ κάλλος 


γράφῳ τινὶ παρεστηκυῖαν ἐθεάσαντο. 


ε A 3 l4 x 4, EA, 9 3 , Lee > 
EQAUTNS ἐπέδειξεν, Ἢ TAVTYV ἡμῖν, OTL ἐθεασάμεθα ; ap εἰ 


165 μὲν ταύτῃ ὠφελιμωτέρα ἐστὶν ἡ ἐπίδειξις, ταύτην ἡμῖν 


Ν A A 
χάριν ἑκτέον, εἰ δὲ ἡμῖν ἡ θέα, ἡμᾶς ταύτῃ;" 


11. Socrates holds a conversation 
with Theodota, a courtesan famed 
for her beauty, on the best method of 
winning and keeping friends. Beauty 
alone cannot accomplish this: there 
must be added good nature and moder- 
ation in the bestowal of favors. The- 
odota expresses a willingness to learn 
From Socratestheart of winning lovers. 

1. Θεοδότη : afterward the mis- 
tress of Alcibiades, whom she is said 
to have buried after he was slain in 
Phrygia: Cf. Cornelius Nep. Alc. 
10.6. Plutarch (Alc. 39) says it was 
Timandra who buried him. --- οἵας : 
ready. See oni. 4. 6. — τῷ πείθοντι : 
sc. by solicitation or gifts. — κρεῖτ- 
τον εἴη λόγου : equivalent to κρεῖτ- 
τον ἢ wore λέγειν “was beyond 
the power of description.’’ Cf. 


> ’ 
E€LTTOVTOS 


(with the adj. in unfavorable sense) 
κρεῖσσον λόγου τὸ εἶδος τῆς νόσου Thuc. 
ii. 5ο. ---ἐπιδεικνύειν : for the inf., see 
on ὧν εἶναι i. 1. 8. — ἑαυτῆς : of her 
person. — ὅσα καλῶς ἔχοι : ““ 8.5 much 
as decorum permitted.’’ — θεασομέ- 
vous: acc., since ἑτέον ἂν εἶναι is equiv- 
alent to δέοι ἂν ἰέναι. See GMT. 923; 
H. 991 ἃ. ---οὐ yap... καταμαθεῖν : 
Sor it is impossible to judge by hear- 
say of that which passes description. 
—6 διηγησάμενος : i.e. the first 
speaker, introduced above by the 
words μνησθέντος τινός. --- οὐκ ἂν φθά- 
νοιτ᾽ ἀκολουθοῦντες : see on ii. 5. 11. 

2. παρεστηκυῖαν : posing, as 
model. The pf. marks the ‘pose’ 
as already assumed. — ταύτην (with 
ἑκτέον) : acc. like θεασαμένους in 1. 
— θέα : sight. 


182 


BENO®ONTOS ATLOMNHMONEYMATA ΓΤ. 11. 


δέ τινος ὅτι δίκαια λέγοι, “Οὐκοῦν, ἔφη, “ αὕτη μὲν ἤδη 


Ἀ 3 ε la » ὃ ’ὔ Ν 9 Ν. 3 
TE TOV TAP ἡμῶν €7TOQLVOV KEp αινει, και ἐπειδὰν εις 


πλείους διαγγείλωμεν, πλείω ὠφελήσεται, ἡμεῖς δὲ ἤδη τε 
-“ 3 4 9 “A ν b, Ψ ε 
20 ὧν ἐθεασάμεθα ἐπιθυμοῦμεν ἅψασθαι καὶ ἄπιμεν ὑποκνι- 
, Ν > ’ - 3 Ν ’ Bei 
ζόμενοι καὶ ἀπελθόντες ποθήσομεν.: ἐκ δὲ τούτων εἰκὸς 


ε “A \ 4 4 \ 4 3) 
ἡμᾶς μὲν θεραπεύειν, ταύτην δὲ θεραπεύεσθαι. 


\ ε 
καὶ ἢ 


\ 43 » > ann; ν » 
Θεοδότη, “Νὴ Δί᾽, ἔφη, “ei τοίνυν ταῦθ᾽ οὕτως ἔχει, ἐμὲ 


x l4 ech “~ ’, 4 » ” 
dy δέοι ὑμῖν τῆς θέας χάριν ἔχειν. 
25 Σωκράτης ὁρῶν αὐτήν τε πολυτελῶς κεκοσμημένην καὶ 


3 Ν , 
εκ δὲ TOUTOUV O 
\ 


4, lal 2 es. 9 3 A 9 ‘\ / 9 “A 
μητέρα παροῦσαν αὐτῇ ἐν ἐσθῆτί τε καὶ θεραπείᾳ ov TH 


Ψ \ , Ν Ν 9 A Ν sQ\ 
τυχούσῃ, καὶ θεραπαίνας πολλὰς καὶ εὐειδεῖς καὶ οὐδὲ 


4 > al 3 4 Ν “A » ἣν > ees 
ταύτας ἡμελημένως ἐχούσας, Kal τοῖς ἄλλοις τὴν οἰκίαν 


ἀφθόνως κατεσκενασμένην, “Εἰπέ μοι," ἔφη, “ὦ Θεοδότη, 


» 9 ’ ” 
80 ἔστι σοι ἀγρός; 
προσόδους ἔχουσα; 
χειροτέχναι τινές ;” 


> 9. ἊΨ a3 9 “ὃ » ” 
οὖν," ἔφη, “τἀπιτήδεια ἔχεις ; 


3 » 3...) Υνν 
“Οὐκ Emory, Edy. 

“Οὐδὲ οἰκία, ἔφη. 
“Οὐδὲ χειροτέχναι," ἔφη. 


“᾽᾿Αλλ᾽ ἄρα οἰκία 
“᾿Αλλὰ μὴ 
“Πόθεν 
“Ἐάν τις," ἔφη, “φίλος 


, 5 A 27) νι ον , 3 4%) 
μοι γενόμενος εὖ ποιεῖν ἐθέλῃ, οὗτός μοι Bios ἐστί. 
ν ν 3 ᾿ A 
35 “Νὴ τὴν Ἥραν," ἔφη, “ὦ Θεοδότη, καλόν γε τὸ κτῆμα Kal 
nw A > fh ~ > ~ Ἀ “A / > ld 
πολλῷ κρεῖττον ὀΐων TE Kal αἰγῶν καὶ βοῶν φίλων ἀγέλην 


3. ὠφελήσεται : in pass. sense. 
Cf. iii. 3. 15, 7. 9. — ὑποκνιζόμενοι : 
with a sting in us, --- θεραπεύεσθαι : 
‘receive our homage.’’ --- εἰ ἔχει, av 
δέοι : for the ‘mixed’ form of cond., 
see on i. 2. 45. 

4. θεραπείᾳ οὐ τῇ τυχούσῃ : ογηα- 
ments of no ordinary kind. Cf. τὰ 
τυχόντα i, τ. 14. For the costume 
of Greek women, see Becker, Char- 
icles, p. 247. --- οὐδὲ ταύτας ἦμε- 
λημένως ἔχουσας : cf. Terence’s 
description of a meretriz, ancillas 
adduxit plus decem, oneratas 


veste atque auro Heaut. iii. 1. 40. 
-- τοῖς ἄλλοις : in all other respects. 
- ἀφθόνως κατεσκευασμένην : lav- 
ishly Ζιυγηϊδ]οᾶ. ---- ἀλλ᾽ ἄρα : well, 
then. — χειροτέχναι : skilled slaves, 
by the sale of whose labor their 
mistress might profit. — οὗτός μοι 
βίος ἐστί: he constitutes my liveli- 
hood. 

5. νὴ τὴν Ἥραν: see on i. s. 5. 
- ὀΐων, βοῶν : sc. ἀγέλην with ἢ be- 
fore ὀΐων. For the condensed com- 
parison, see on τῶν ἄλλων 1.1. 8, and, 
for the form of ὀΐων, on ii. 7. 18. 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA III. 11. 


A 
κεκτῆσθαι. 


188 


3 ΡῈ ς La. “<< ’ ”A 4 3 , 37 
ἀτάρ," ἔφη, πότερον Τῇ τύχῃ ἐπιτρέπεις, ἐὰν 


ld / ν al / x ‘ > y 

τίς σοι φίλος ὠσπερ μυῖα πρόσπτηται, ἢ Kal αὐτή TL 
ἴω ."» «ΠΩ δ᾽ ἥδ. 33 »Ἄ ςς 3 \ , A 

μηχανᾳ; ως av, ἔφη, “ἐγὼ τούτου μηχανὴν 


40 εὕροιμι τὰ 


“Πολὺ νὴ Δί᾽, ἔφη, “προσηκόντως μᾶλλον ἢ 


ε ΄, > ἈΝ ε 3A aA ἈΝ \ \ 
ai φάλαγγες: οἶσθα yap ws ἐκεῖναι θηρῶσι τὰ πρὸς τὸν 


’ 3 4 Ν ὃ /, Ν ε ’ ν x 
βίον: ἀράχνια yap δήπου λεπτὰ ὑφηνάμεναι, ὁ TL ἂν 


ἐνταῦθα ἐμπέσῃ, τούτῳ τροφῇ χρῶνται." 
ἔφη, “συμβουλεύεις ὑφήνασθαί τι θήρατρον ;" 


\ \ > 
“Kat ἐμοὶ οὖν," 


“Οὐ γὰρ 


\ ν᾽ ae ¥ \ Ν ΄) » 
45 δὴ OUTWS YE ατέχνως οἴεσθαι χρὴ ΤΟ πλείστου ἄξιον 


ΕἾ , ’ὔ 3 ε ““ 4 \ A nw 
αγρευμα, φίλους, θηράσειν. οὐχ ὁρᾷς OTL καὶ TO μικρου 


ἄξιον, τοὺς λαγώς, θηρώντες πολλὰ τεχνάζουσιν ; ὅτι μὲν 


\ A 
yap τῆς νυκτὸς νέμονται, κύνας VUKTEPEUTLKAS πορισά- 


μενοι ταύταις αὐτοὺς θηρῶσιν. ὅτι δὲ μεθ᾽ ἡμέραν ἀποδι- 


ἊΝ 4 A “A 4 5 ν -' x 3 A 
50 δράσκουσιν, ἀλλας κτῶνται κύνας, αἵτινες ἢ ἂν EK τῆς 


A > Ν ψν πᾶ yey. A 2 a > , 
νομῆς ELS THNV εὐνὴν ἀπέλθωσι, ΤΊ) Οσμῃ αἰσθανόμεναι 


ε ’ 3 4 4 A , 3 ’ὕ ν A 5 
εὑρίσκουσιν αὐτούς. ὅτι δὲ ποδώκεις εἰσίν, ὥστε Kal ἐκ 


A a , > , ¥ > 4 
τοῦ φανεροῦ τρέχοντες ἀποφεύγειν, ἄλλας αὖ κύνας 


, ΄ Y \ ΄ ξεν 
τάαχέειας παρασκευάζονται, νὰ Κατα πόδας ahioKwvTat: 


9 - \ Ν 4 ΘΝ 3 ’ ᾿, 
δδ ὅτι δὲ καὶ ταύτας αὐτῶν τινες ἀποφεύγουσι, δίκτυα 


A Ν οἱ ᾽ν 5" 3 a) 
ἱστᾶσιν εἰς τὰς ἀτραποὺς 7 φεύγουσιν, WW εἰς ταῦτα 


3 Ἂ / ” 
ἐμπίπτοντες συμποδίζωνται. 


φίλους av ἐγὼ θηρῴην;" 


’ I ὦ 
“Ti οὖν," ἔφη, “ τοιούτῳ 


«ες 3 Ν \ 4399 » Ψ Ἁ 
Ἐὰν νὴ At, εἐφη, “ἀντὶ 


Ν , Y 3 , \ Ν deme’ \ 
κυνὸς κτήσῃ OOTLS σοι ἰχνεύων μὲν τοὺς φιλοκάλους καὶ 


’ὔ ε ἫΝ ε \ \ 4 9 5 4 
θ0πλουσίους εὑρήσει, εὑρὼν δὲ μηχανήσεται ὅπως ἐμβάλῃ 


- ἐπιτρέπεις : do you leave it to. — 
ἐάν : whether. 

6. τούτου : for this purpose. — 
προσηκόντως : filly. — τροφῇ : for 
food. See on δούλοις ii. τ. 12. 

7. οὕτως ye ἀτέχνως : 80, without 
any artifice. — ἄγρευμα : game. — 
νέμονται : sc. οἱ λαγῴ. --- κύνας vuKTe- 
ρευτικάς : dogs which hunt by night. 


For the gender, see on iv. 1. 3. 

8. μεθ᾽ ἡμέραν : after day has 
dawned. — 4: sc. 65g. The clause 
is obj. of αἰσθανόμεναι. ---- εὐνὴν : the 
hare’s lair or ‘form.’ —é τοῦ 
φανεροῦ : ‘in full view.’’ — κατὰ 
πόϑας : as in ii. 6. 9. 

9. κτήσῃ: sc. φίλον. The omitted 
apod. is readily supplied. 


184 


51-8 9 \ \ / ” 
αυτους εἰς TA OA δίκτυα. 


¥ aD 
AM 


RENO®GONTOS AILOMNHMONEYMATA 


ie © & 


\ 
“Kat rota,” ἔφη, “ἐγὼ δίκτυα 10 
a 
“Ἔν μὲν δήπου," ἔφη, “καὶ μάλα ev περιπλεκό- 


Ν A 3 \ , / e , Ν 
μενον, τὸ σῶμα. ἐν δὲ τούτῳ ψυχήν, ἣ καταμανθάνεις καὶ 
ε Ἅ 3 ’ ’ b, Wah. J x , > / 
ὡς av ἐμβλέπουσα χαρίζοιο καὶ ὁ τι ἀν λέγουσα evppai- 


a) ae “A Ν Ν. 3 ’ > ’ ε 4 
65 VOLS, και OTL δεῖ TOV μὲν ἐπιμελόμενον ασμέεένως ὑποδέχε- 


Ν Ν “A > / 43.49 7 ’ 
σθαι, τὸν δὲ τρυφῶντα ἀποκλείειν, καὶ ἀρρωστήσαντός γε 
’ “A 3 ’ Ν ’ fs 
φίλου φροντιστικῶς ἐπισκέψασθαι καὶ καλόν τι πράξαν- 
’ ~ Ν A / “ » 
τος σφόδρα συνησθῆναι καὶ τῷ σφόδρα σοῦ φροντίζοντι 
Ψ an A , A \ > 909 ¢ 
ὅλῃ TH ψυχῇ κεχαρίσθαι: φιλεῖν ye μὴν εὖ οἶδ᾽ ὅτι 
5 4 > , A 5 Ν \ 3 o- OA \ ¢ 
70 ἐπίστασαι ov μόνον μαλακῶς, ἀλλὰ Kal EVVOLKM@S* καὶ OTL 
> ’ ’ > e 4 IN 3. ὦ > ’ 9 > » 
ἀρεστοί σοί εἰσιν οἵ φίλοι, οἶδ᾽ ὅτι οὐ λόγῳ ἀλλ᾽ ἔργῳ 


> 2 3) 
ἀναπείθεις. 


οὐδὲν μηχανῶμαι." 


Ν > το 

“Μὰ τὸν Δί᾽, ἔφη ἡ Θεοδότη, “ ἐγὼ τούτων 
\ }] Ν 

“Καὶ μήν, ἔφη, “πολὺ διαφέρει τὸ 


Ν 4 Ἂν 3 “A > rd , εἶ 
κατὰ φύσιν τε καὶ ὀρθῶς ἀνθρώπῳ προσφέρεσθαι: καὶ 
Ἰδγὰρ δὴ βίᾳ μὲν οὔτ᾽ ἂν ἕλοις οὔτε κατάσχοις φίχον, 
εὐεργεσίᾳ δὲ καὶ ἡδονῇ τὸ θηρίον τοῦτο ἁλώσιμόν τε καὶ 


” 
παραμόνιμόν ἐστιν. 


“᾿Αληθῆ λέγεις," ἔφη. 


33» » “ A \ Ν , , ἴω 
vuv, ἔφη, “πρῶτον μὲν τοὺς φροντίζοντάς σου τοιαῦτα 
ἀξιοῦν οἷα ποιοῦσιν αὐτοῖς μικρότατα μελήσει, ἔπειτα δὲ 

᾿ τὶ 3 [4 , Ν oN Τὰ ν 
80 αὐτὴν ἀμείβεσθαι χαριζομένην τὸν αὐτὸν τρόπον: οὕτω 
γὰρ ἂν μάλιστα φίλοι γίγνοιντο καὶ πλεῖστον χρόνον 
φιλοῖεν καὶ μέγιστα εὐεργετοῖεν. χαρίζοιο δ᾽ ἂν μάλιστα, 18 


10. ὡς ἐμβλέπουσα : with what 
kind of looks. — τὸν ἐπιμελόμενον : the 
attentive lover, opposed to τὸν τρυ- 
φῶντα the self-conceited, insolent one. 
— ὑποδέχεσθαι, ἀποκλείειν : pres., 
denoting customary action; the 
aor. infs. in the next sent. indicate 
special cases. — κεχαρίσθαι : to be 
devoted. —-yé phv: see on i. 4. 5. — 
εὖ οἶδ᾽ ὅτι : see on iii. 6. 10. 

11. καὶ μήν: and yet. — πολὺ 
'διαφέρει : multum interest, it 


is of great importance. So in iii. 12. 
δ. ---- θηρίον : creature, appropriately 
used of man, after the illustrations 
in 6 and 7. 


12. τοιαῦτα : 86. ποιεῖν. --- ola 
ποιοῦσιν αὐτοῖς κτλ. : ‘*as will least 
trouble them to perform.’’ —atrhv: 


you yourself. — τὸν αὐτὸν τρόπον : 
i.e. aS freely as they oblige you. — 
μέγιστα : for the neut. adj. repre- 
senting a cognate acc., see on i. 
τ. 1. 


μ᾿ 


Δεῖ τοί- 12 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA III, 11. 


185 


> ΄ A \ Ν a CB ae \ ἊΝ Ν 
εἰ δεομένοις δωροῖο τὰ παρὰ σεαυτῆς. ὁρᾷς γὰρ ὅτι καὶ 
A ’ Ν Ν , 
τῶν βρωμάτων τὰ ἥδιστα, ἐὰν μέν τις προσφέρῃ πρὶν 
86 ἐπιθυμεῖν, ἀηδῆ φαίνεται, κεκορεσμένοις δὲ καὶ βδελυ- 
γμίαν παρέχει: ἐὰν δέ τις προσφέρῃ λιμὸν ἐμποιήσας, κἂν 


, 5S , e ld 4 ” 
φαυλότερα ἢ, πάνυ ἡδέα φαίνεται. 
ξὲ.3 \ Ν 5 lal ἴω 3 3 Ἀ ὃ ’ὔ ” 

ἐγὼ λιμὸν ἐμποιεῖν τῳ TOV Tap ἐμοὶ δυναίμην ; 


A a ἃν 9 »¥ 
“Πῶς οὖν av,’ edn, 
( Εἰ 


N 23 5)» « A \ aA , , 

νὴ Δί᾽, ἔφη, “πρῶτον μὲν τοῖς κεκορεσμένοις μήτε προσ- 
/ "4 x A al 

90 φέροις μήτε ὑπομιμνήσκοις, ἔως ἂν τῆς πλησμονῆς 

παυσάμενοι πάλιν δέωνται, ἔπειτα τοὺς δεομένους ὕπομι- 


’ὔ ε ’ ε λί \ “~ ’ θ 
μνήσκοις ὡς κοσμιωτάτῃ τε ὁμιλίᾳ καὶ τῴ φαίνεσθαι βου- 


λομένη χαρίζεσθαι καὶ διαφεύγουσα, ἕως ἂν ὡς μάλιστα 


δεηθῶσι: τηνικαῦτα γὰρ πολὺ διαφέρει τὰ αὐτὰ δῶρα 


96 ἢ πρὶν ἐπιθυμῆσαι διδόναι." 


καὶ ἡ Θεοδότη, “Ti οὖν 15 


3 , 33) i» tS , ee \ lal 
οὐ OV μοι, ἔφη, ω Σώκρατες, ἐγένου συνθηρατὴς των 


φίλων ;” 


> » ᾽ » << , , ” 
οὖν av, ἔφη, “πείσαιμί σε; 

3 Ν A ’ὕ 37 ᾽ὔὕ ὃ ὕὔ 3) 
αὐτὴ καὶ μηχανήσῃ, ἐάν τί μου δέῃ. 


“Ἐάν γε νὴ At,” ἔφη, “πείθῃς με σύ. “Πῶς 


᾽’ 9 »ἍἉ nw 
“Ζητήσεις,᾽ ἔφη, “τοῦτο 
Ψ 
“Ἐσιθι τοίνυν," 


ἀπραγμοσύνην, “᾿Αλλ᾽, ὦ Θεοδότη,᾽ ἔφη, “οὐ πάνυ μοι 


e? ’ 3 “4 Ν Ν 4 Ν ‘ 
ῥᾷδιόν ἐστι σχολάσαι: Kal yap ἴδια πράγματα πολλὰ Kal 


13. δεομένοις : only when they 
request them.—Ta& παρὰ σεαυτῆς : 
‘¢vour favors.’’— ὁρᾶς γὰρ ὅτι κτλ. : 
cf. the contrast between the follow- 
ers of Vice and those of Virtue ii. 1. 
30, 33. — BSeAvyplav: loathing. 

14, τῶν παρ᾽ ἐμοί: const. with λιμόν. 
- εἰ προσφέροις : 8C. τὰ παρὰ σεαυτῆς. 
The omitted apod. is easily supplied 
from the preceding sentence. So with 
ἐὰν πείθῃς 15. —érerra: without δέ, as 
often in Xenophon. See oni. 2. 1. 
— ὡς κοσμιωτάτῃ ὁμιλίᾳ : by the most 
modest demeanor. —t®@ φαίνεσθαι 
βουλομένη, καὶ διαφεύγουσα : by 


showing yourself desirous (to please), 
and yet drawing back. Socrates is 
‘giving points’ to a professional 
coquette. For the nom. of the parti- 
ciples, see on τῷ φανερὸς εἶναι τοιοῦτος 
ὧν i. 2. 8. -- πολὺ διαφέρει : it is far 
better. 

15. τί οὖν οὐ σὺ ἐγένου : why 
then do you not become. The aor. 
implies surprise that the action has 
not taken place, and hence conveys 
a more emphatic invitation than the 
pres. would. GMT. 62; H. 839. 
Cf. iv. 6. 14. — εἴσιθι : 86. εἰς τὴν ἐμὴν 


οἰκίαν. 


’, Χ , a 
100 ἔφη, “θαμινά." καὶ ὁ Σωκράτης ἐπισκώπτων τὴν αὑτοῦ 16 


186 EENO®QNTOS AILOMNHMONEYMATA Γ. 11. 


δημόσια παρέχει μοι ἀσχολίαν. εἰσὶ δὲ καὶ φίλαι μοι, at 
οὔτε ἡμέρας οὔτε νυκτὸς ad αὑτῶν ἐάσουσί με ἀπιέναι, 
“Ἐπί τ 
στασαι yap, ἔφη, “καὶ ταῦτα, ὦ Σώκρατες ;" “᾿Αλλὰ διὰ 


105 φίλτρα τε μανθάνουσαι παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ καὶ ἐπῳδάς." 


τί ole,” ἔφη, “᾿Απολλόδωρόν τε τόνδε καὶ ᾿Αντισθένην 

οὐδέποτέ μου ἀπολείπεσθαι; διὰ τί δὲ καὶ Κέβητα καὶ 

, , ΄ > » oy an 5 

Σιμμίαν Θήβηθεν παραγίγνεσθαι; εὖ ἴσθι ὅτι ταῦτα οὐκ 

¥ “ ͵ὔ \ 3 ἴω pte aes 3 49) 

1l0avev πολλῶν φίλτρων τε Kal ἐπῳδῶν καὶ ἰύγγων ἐστί. 

Ἢ A ΄ ” τἂν ge. x σ 2 \ \ 
Χρῆσον τοίνυν por,” ἔφη, “τὴν ἴυγγα, ἵνα ἐπὶ σοὶ 18 

“᾿Αλλὰ μὰ Δί᾽ ἔφη, “οὐκ αὐτὸς 

ἕλκεσθαι πρὸς σὲ βούλομαι, ἀλλὰ σὲ πρὸς ἐμὲ πορεύε- 
᾽ 


A 4 > / ” 
πρῶτον ἐλκω αὐτήν. 


σθαι. “᾿Αλλὰ πορεύσομαι, ἔφη: “μόνον ὑποδέχου." 


115 “᾿Αλλ᾽ ὑποδέξομαί σε," ἔφη, “ ἐὰν μή τις φιλωτέρα σου 


ἔνδον Neg 


16. δημόσια: said in jest, as Soc- 
rates took no part in public affairs. 
Cf.i. 6.15. — φίλαι: he playfully uses 
the fem. in speaking of his friends. 
— φίλτρα, ἐπῳδάς : cf. ii. 6. 10 ff. 
On the real meaning of érwéds, cf. 
τὰς δ᾽ ἐπῳδὰς ταύτας τοὺς λόγους εἶναι 
τοὺς καλούς Plato Charm. 157 a, also 
Phaedo 114 p. 

17. ᾿Απολλόδωρον : one of the 
most devoted companions of Soc- 
rates, mentioned by Plato as present 
both at the trial (Apol. 34 a) and 
at the death scene in the cell (Phaedo 
117 p), where his almost hysterical 
grief was rebuked by the philos- 
opher. —*Avricbévyv : see on ii. 5. 1. 
— Κέβητα καὶ Σιμμίαν : see oni. 2. 
48. These, as well as Antisthenes 
and Apollodorus, were present at 
the death of Socrates. — ἰύγγων : 
magic wheels. The tvy€ was a small 
bird (Lat. torquilla, Fr. torcou, 


Ger. Wendehals, Eng. ‘ wryneck’), 
which, when bound to a revolving 
wheel, was supposed by its motions 
to influence the affections ; hence its 
name was applied to the wheel. 

18. χρῆσόν por: lend me. — ἐπὶ 
σοὶ ἕλκω : set it spinning for you, 
the usual phrase for putting the tvyé 
in motion. For ἐπὶ col, see on ἐφ᾽ 
οἷς σπουδάσειεν i. 3. 11. --- φιλωτέρα : 
see on φίλαι 10. For various forms 
of the comp. of φίλος, see L. & S. 
8.v. —éav... ἔνδον q: wittily said, 
for the usual excuse of the ἑταῖραι in 
shutting out a would-be visitor was 
ἔνδον ἕτερος. Cf. ἀπέκλεισα ἐλθόντα, 
‘"Evdov érepos’ εἰποῦσα Lucian Dial. 
Meretr. xii. 310. The whole con- 
versation is inconceivable from a 
modern standpoint, remembering 
who and what the speakers were ; 
but it throws a strong side light on 
one phase of Greek society. 


“XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA III. 12. 187 


> - δὲ A , é; , , »” eas 
Ἐπιγένην δὲ τῶν συνόντων τινά, νέον TE ὄντα Kal TO12 
nr A » iO , “ me) io “ 3) » 4ἐ ἙΝ 
σῶμα κακῶς ἔχοντα, ἰδών, ς ἰδιωτικῶς, ἔφη, “τὸ 
»“ » 8 9 / ᾽᾽ \ 9 ς-ς 3 ὃ 4 , ” 3, 
σῶμα ἔχεις, ὦ ᾿Ἐπίγενες." καὶ ὅς, “᾿Ιδιώτης yap,” ἔφη, 
“Οὐδέν γε μᾶλλον, ἔφη, “τῶν ἐν 
5 Ὀλυμπίᾳ μελλόντων ἀγωνίζεσθαι: ἢ δοκεῖ σοι μικρὸ 
υμπίᾳ μ γ ἢ μικρὸς 
3 ε - QA A lal ἈΝ \ 4 > 4 ἃ 
εἶναι ὁ περὶ τῆς ψυχῆς πρὸς τοὺς πολεμίους ἀγών, ὃν 
5 nw 4 9 4 \ A > > , 
Αθηναῖοι θήσουσιν, ὅταν τύχωσι; Kal μὴν οὐκ ὀλίγοι 2 
μὲν διὰ τὴν τοῦ σώματος καχεξίαν ἀποθνήσκουσί τε ἐν 
τοῖς πολεμικοῖς κινδύνοις καὶ αἰσχρῶς σῴζονται, πολλοὶ 
\ > νον (ἂς ἴω lal 4 ey 7 Ἁ ε ’ὔ’ » 
10 δὲ δι᾿ αὐτὸ τοῦτο ζῶντές τε ἁλίσκονται καὶ ἁλόντες ἤτοι 


<< > , Ss 4 ’”’ 
εἰμί, ὦ Σώκρατες. 


4 Ν Ν ’ 3 Ψ 4 Ν 
δουλεύουσι τὸν λοιπὸν βίον, ἐὰν οὕτω τύχωσι, THY χαλε- 
rg / x > Ν > 4 Ν 3 ’ 
πωτάτην δουλείαν, ἢ εἰς τὰς ἀνάγκας τὰς ἀλγεινοτάτας 
\ ’ ’ ’ A“ ε / 

ἐμπεσόντες καὶ ἐκτείσαντες ἐνίοτε πλείω TOV ὑπαρχόντων 

39 “A Ν >, ’ὔ > “A “Ὁ > ’ » \ 
αὐτοῖς τὸν λοιπὸν βίον ἐνδεεῖς τῶν ἀναγκαίων ὄντες Kal 
16 κακοπαθοῦντες διαζῶσι: 


πολλοὶ δὲ δόξαν αἰσχρὰν 
κτῶνται διὰ τὴν τοῦ σώματος ἀδυναμίαν δοκοῦντες 


5 “ x “ wn 5 4 wn , 
ἀποδειλιᾶν. ἢ καταφρονεῖς TOV ἐπιτιμιων τὴς καχεξίας 3 


4 \ ε “4 x » ’ Ν “ \ ‘ 
TOUT@Y, Kal ῥᾳδίως αν OLEL φέρειν TA TOLAVTA; καὶ μὴν 


12. Physical exercise strengthens iii. 7. 
the body, and renders a man not only 
fit for the pursuits of war, but also 
better equipped for any line of work. 
Best of all, it assists mental action. 

1, ’Emvyévyv: son of Antiphon, 
of the deme Cephisia. Cf. Plato 
Apol. 33 ©, Phaedo 59 5. — ἰδιω- 
τικῶς : 1.6. unlike an athlete. — 
ἰδιώτης : lit. a private citizen, here 
non-professional, so far as con- 


1. ---βήσουσιν : will make, 
certamina decernent. --- ὅταν 
τύχωσι: 86. ἀγῶνα θέντες. 

2. ἀποθνήσκουσί τε, καὶ αἰσχρῶς 
σῳΐονται: vel pereunt, vel tur- 
piter servantur.—®6v αὐτὸ τοῦτο: 
i.e. διὰ τὸ κακῶς ἔχειν τὰ σώματα. --- 
ἐὰν οὕτω τύχωσι: ‘if this (i.e. 
slavery) should happen to them.” 
— ἐκτείσαντε : paying out, for 
their ransom. — πλείω τῶν ὑπαρχόν- 
των: more than 


cerns athletics. ‘‘I have no object 
in training, not being an athlete 
(ἀσκητής)."" To which Socrates re- 
torts, ‘‘ You need training fully as 
much as those who are to contend 
in the Olympian games.’’ See on 


their property 
amounted ἴο. ---- δοκοῦντες ἀποδειλιᾶν : 
having the reputation of being cowards. 

3. ἐπιτιμίων : penalties, i.e. dis- 
advantages. — τούτων : agrees with 
ἐπιτιμίων. --- καὶ μήν : see on i. 6. 3. 


188 SENOSQNTOS AITOMNHMONEYMATA T. 12. 


3 ’, λλώ ε»’ t nou , > ἡ δεῖ U vd 
οἶμαί γε πολλῷ paw Kal ἡδίω τούτων εἶναι, ἃ δεῖ ὑπομέ. 
20 νειν τὸν ἐπιμελόμενον τῆς τοῦ σώματος εὐεξίας - ἢ ὑγιεινό- 
τερόν τε καὶ εἰς τἄλλα χρησιμώτερον νομίζεις εἶναι τὴν 
’ A 9 ’ὔ x A Ν Ἂ > / 4 
καχεξίαν τῆς εὐεξίας ; ἢ τῶν διὰ THY εὐεξίαν γιγνομένων 
καταφρονεῖς ; καὶ μὴν πάντα γε τἀναντία συμβαίνει τοῖς 
εὖ τὰ σώματα ἔχουσιν ἢ τοῖς κακῶς. καὶ γὰρ ὑγιαίνου- 
2ὅ σιν ol τὰ σώματα εὖ ἔχοντες καὶ ἰσχύουσι: καὶ πολλοὶ 
μὲν διὰ τοῦτο ἐκ τῶν πολεμικῶν ἀγώνων σῴζονταί τε 
9 ὦ μὴ ἣν Ν ’ ΄ Ν Ν 
εὐσχημόνως καὶ τὰ δεινὰ πάντα διαφεύγουσι, πολλοὶ δὲ 
, “A Ν Ν ’, > A Ν Ν 
φίλοις τε βοηθοῦσι καὶ τὴν πατρίδα εὐεργετοῦσι καὶ διὰ 
ταῦτα χάριτός τε ἀξιοῦνται καὶ δόξαν μεγάλην κτῶνται 
80 καὶ τιμῶν καλλίστων τυγχάνουσι καὶ διὰ ταῦτα τόν τε 
λοιπὸν βίον ἥδιον καὶ κάλλιον διαζῶσι καὶ τοῖς ἑαυτῶν 
\ ’ὔ 3 x > Ἂν, A ’ 
παισὶ καλλίους ἀφορμὰς εἰς τὸν βίον καταλείπουσιν. 
» hs! 9 3 5 “ , ε , Ν Ν Ν 
οὔτοι χρὴ ὅτι οὐκ ἀσκεῖ δημοσίᾳ ἡ πόλις τὰ πρὸς τὸν 
΄, Ν la) A 3Q7 3 a 3 Ν \ i. 
πόλεμον, διὰ τοῦτο Kal ἰδίᾳ ἀμελεῖν, ἀλλὰ μηδὲν ἧττον 
86 ἐπιμελεῖσθαι. εὖ γὰρ ἴσθι ὅτι οὐδὲ ἐν ἄλλῳ οὐδενὶ ἀγῶνι 
οὐδὲ ἐν πράξει οὐδεμιᾷ μεῖον ἕξεις διὰ τὸ βέλτιον τὸ 
σῶμα παρεσκευάσθαι. πρὸς πάντα γὰρ ὅσα πράττουσιν 
ἄνθρωποι, χρήσιμον τὸ σῶμά ἐστιν: ἐν πάσαις δὲ ταῖς 
wn , Nd Ν ld ε ’, ἐ “A 
τοῦ σώματος χρείαις πολὺ διαφέρει ws βέλτιστα τὸ σῶμα 
τ A 
40 ἔχειν: ἐπεὶ καὶ ἐν ᾧ δοκεῖς ἐλαχίστην σώματος χρείαν 


5 3 an ὃ A , 3 > Y ss , 
ειναι, ἐν TW ιανοεῖσθαι, τις OUK οἷδεν OTL KQL ἐν τούτῳ 


- πολλῷ ῥάω.... ἃ δεῖ: const., 
τούτων (τῶν ἐπιτιμίων) πολλῷ pdw καὶ 
ἡδίω (ταῦτα) εἶναι, ἃ δεῖ κτλ. --- ὑγιεινό- 
τερον, χρησιμώτερον : for the gender, 
see on ii. 3. 1. 

4. &a τοῦτο: by virtue of this 
quality. — ἀφορμάς : see on ii. 7. 11. 

5. ὅτι οὐκ ἀσκεῖ κτλ. : Xenophon, 
in recording this fact, may be 
praising the Lacedaemonians tacitly, 


as he openly does in iii. 5. 15. — 
ἀλλὰ μηδὲν ἧττον: sc. χρή. ---ἐν 
ἄλλῳ οὐδενὶ ἀγῶνι κτλ.: war is 
contrasted with any other contest, 
and then with any occupation. — 
μεῖον ἕξεις : equivalent to μείων ἔσῃ. 
— πολὺ διαφέρει : as in 11]. rz. 11. 
6. ἐπεί : for. —Soxets: you think. 


—btv τῷ διανοεῖσθαι: in pure thinking. 


— τίς οὐκ οἷδεν : the sent. begins 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA III. 12, 13. 


189 


πολλοὶ μεγάλα σφάλλονται διὰ τὸ μὴ ὑγιαίνειν τὸ σῶμα; 
Ν / \ X 9 7, Ν ’ὔ Ν v4 ’ 
καὶ λήθη δὲ καὶ ἀθυμία καὶ δυσκολία καὶ μανία πολλάκις 
» ὃ \ \ A , ΄ > \ , 
πολλοῖς διὰ τὴν TOV σώματος καχεξίαν εἰς THY διάνοιαν 
Ψ Ψ 
40 ἐμπίπτουσιν οὕτως ὥστε καὶ τὰς ἐπιστήμας ἐκβάλλειν. 
; A Ν Ν ’ > » Ν 5 ’ ‘\ «(Ὁ κ 
τοῖς δὲ τὰ σώματα εὖ ἔχουσι πολλὴ ἀσφάλεια καὶ οὐδεὶς 
κίνδυνος διά γε τὴν τοῦ σώματος καχεξίαν τοιοῦτόν τι 
A + SS" de “A Ν er ’ “A \ Ν 
παθεῖν, εἰκὸς δὲ μᾶλλον πρὸς τὰ ἐναντία τῶν διὰ τὴν καχε- 
Eiav γιγνομένων τὴν εὐεξίαν χρήσιμον εἶναι. καίτοι τῶν 
50 YE τοῖς εἰρημένοις ἐναντίων ἕνεκα τί οὐκ ἂν τις νοῦν ἔχων 
ε lA > Ν Ν N Ν Ν Ν 3 4 ~ 
ὑπομείνειεν ; αἰσχρὸν δὲ καὶ τὸ διὰ THY ἀμέλειαν γηρᾶναι, 
πρὶν ἰδεῖν ἑαυτὸν ποῖος ἂν κάλλιστος καὶ κράτιστος τῷ 


’ ’ A \ 3 » > A > A > 

σώματι γένοιτο: ταῦτα δὲ οὐκ ἔστιν ἰδεῖν apehovvTa: οὐ 
Ν 352 72 3 / 4 ” 
yap ἐθέλει αὐτόματα γίγνεσθαι. 

3 , ’ la 4 4 7 

Οργιζομένου δέ ποτέ τινος ὅτι προσειπών τινα χαξ 18 

3 3 7 ςς “Ὁ 33 3 66 <x > Ν Ν 

pew οὐκ ἀντιπροσερρήθη, “ Γελοῖον," ἔφη, “τὸ εἰ μὲν τὸ 

σῶμα κάκιον ἔχοντι ἀπήντησάς τῳ, μὴ ἂν ὀργίζεσθαι, ὅτι 

δὲ τὴν ψυχὴν ἀγροικοτέρως διακειμένῳ περιέτυχες, τοῦτό 


δσε λυπεῖ." 


with ἐπεί, as if πάντες ἴσασιν were 
to follow, but the transition to 
the interr. is natural and lively. — 
πολλοῖς : in the case of many, dat. of 
interest. — τὰς ἐπιστήμας : ‘ all that 
they know.’’ — ἐκβάλλειν : for the 
inf. of result which a previous ac- 
tion tends to produce, see GMT. 587, 
1; H. 969; 

7. κίνδυνος: sc. ἐστί. ---γέ: added, 
because τοιοῦτόν τι παθεῖν is possible 
from other causes than καχεξία τοῦ 
σώματος. --- εἰκὸς δὲ μᾶλλον : it is far 
more likely. — πρὸς τὰ ἐναντία: to 
results the reverse.—évexa : const. with 
ἐναντίων. --- νοῦν ἔχων: with any sense. 

8. ἰδεῖν ἑαυτόν, ποῖος : for the 
‘ prolepsis,’ see on i. 2. 13. ---ταῦτα : 


these qualities. — ἐθέλει : are wont. 
Cf. ὅσα ἡ γῆ φύειν θέλει Oec. 4. 18. 

13. Several brief sayings of Soc- 
rates, giving sensible advice on vari- 
ous matters of everyday life. 

1. ὅτι : because. — προσειπών 
τινα xalpev:.the usual form of de- 
scribing a greeting; cf. the Lat. 
salve. For the dat. in this formula, 
cf. ἀλλήλοις χαίρειν προσεῖπον Hell. iv. 
1. 31. — γελοῖον : odd, cf. the Ger. 
komisch, and our colloquial use 
of ‘funny.’ — τὸ ph ἂν ὀργίζεσθαι : 
for the articular inf. with modi- 
fiers as a noun, see ἃ. 1555 ; H. 959, 
and for the inf. with ἄν, see on ἂν 
ἐκλεχθῆναι iii. 5. 2. — διακειμένῳ : dis- 
posed. 


190 


EENO®ONTOS AITOMNHMONEYMATA ΓΤ. 13. 


"AdXouv δὲ λέγοντος ὅτι ἀηδῶς ἐσθίοι, “᾿Ακουμενός," 2 


ἔφη, “ τούτου φάρμακον ἀγαθὸν διδάσκει." 


a ᾽) 
“Ποῖον ; 


5 ᾽ὔὕ ’ 
ἐρομένου δέ͵ 


» Φ Ν 
“Παύσασθαι ἐσθίοντα," ἔφη, “καὶ ἥδιόν τε καὶ 


9 ΄, ΟΣ ἢ , ΄ ΄ ” 
εὐτελέστερον Kal VYLELVOTEPOV διάξειν παυσάαμενον. 


¥ ee ς ΄ Ψ Ν ¥ 9. ε A \ 
Αλλου δ᾽ αὖ λέγοντος ὅτι θερμὸν εἴη Tap ἑαυτῷ τὸ 


ὕδωρ ὃ πίνοι, “Ὅταν ap’,” ἔφη, “ βούλῃ θερμῷ λούσασθαι, 


ν᾿ » ” 
ETOLLOV EOTAL σοι. 


“᾿Αλλὰ ψυχρόν," ἔφη, “ἐστὶν wore 


λούσασθαι. “ἦἾΑρ᾽ οὖν, ἔφη, “Kat οἱ οἰκέται σου ἄχθον- 


’ ’ὔὕ “ιν ἊΝ Ἂς ’ὔ > A 3) 
ται TWOVTES TE αὐτὸ Kal λουόμενοι AUTH ; 


A Ν 23. 1) 
“Ma τὸν Δί, 


edn: “ἀλλὰ καὶ πολλάκις τεθαύμακα ὡς ἡδέως αὐτῷ 


πρὸς ἀμφότερα ταῦτα χρῶνται." 


“Πότερον δέ; ἔφη, “τὸ 


Ἂ Ν ΄ a A > x Ν 3 3 
παρὰ σοὶ ὕδωρ θερμότερον πιεῖν ἐστιν ἢ τὸ ἐν ᾿Ασκλη- 


πιοῦ;" “Τὸ ἐν ᾿Ασκληπιοῦ,᾽ ἔφη. . “Πότερον δὲ λούσα- 


, Ν μὴ Ν x Ν 3 3 ’, 3) 
σθαι ψυχρότερον, τὸ παρὰ σοὶ ἢ τὸ ἐν ᾿Αμφιαράου; 


20 “Τὸ ἐν ᾿Αμφιαράου," ἔφη. 


3 “A δι. 3). + 4 
“"EvOupov οὖν," ἔφη, “ὅτι κιν- 


, 3 Lal 3 nw QA wn 
δυνεύεις δυσαρεστότερος εἶναι τῶν TE οἰκετῶν Kal τῶν 


a ρρωστούντων." 


2. ἀηδῶς : without appetite. Cf. 
ἡδέως ii, 1. 80. —’Axoupevds: a 
physician, and friend of Socrates. 
Cf. Plato Phaedr. 227 a, 268 a, B. — 
τούτου φάρμακον : see on iii. 8. 3. — 
διδάσκει : prescribes. — παύσασθαι 
ἐσθίοντα : to stop eating. For the 
supplementary participle, see on ii. 1. 
24. The ‘appetite cure’ has been 
known to physicians and _ philoso- 
phers from Acumenus and Galen 
down to Abernethy and Mark Twain. 
— καί, διάξειν (sc. φησί) : see on καὶ 
ὑπακούσεται ii. 3. 16. — παυσάμενον : 
circumstantial participle of condi- 
tion. 

3. παρ᾽ ἑαυτῷ : see on ii. 7. 4. --- 
ὃ πίνοι : which he had to drink. — 
ψυχρόν, ὥστε λούσασθαι : for the inf. 


with ws or wore and a positive adj. 
(instead of comp. with 7), see GMT. 
588. So we say ‘cold for bathing.’ 
Cf. ὀλίγοι ἐσμέν, wore ἐγκρατεῖς εἶναι 
αὐτῶν Cyr. iv. 5. 15.—pa τὸν Δία: 
see on i. 4. 1]. -- ἀλλὰ kal: ‘in- 
deed, on the contrary.’’— τὸ ἐν 
᾿Ασκληπιοῦ (sc. veg): on the south 
side of the Acropolis at Athens. 
Pausanias refers to this spring, and 
modern travelers speak of the water 
as not noticeably warm. — λούσα- 
σθαι: for the inf. with adjs., see 
GMT. 768; H. 952, and a.—év 
᾿Αμφιαράου (sc. veg): the temple 
of Amphiaraus (one of the ‘Seven 
against Thebes’) was at Ordpus in 
Boeotia; it, too, had a sacred foun- 
tain. Cf. Paus. i. 34. 3. 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA III. 13. 191 


, , > A 4. τ » , 
Κολάσαντος δέ τινος ἰσχυρῶς ἀκόλουθον, ἤρετο τί 4 
“ , 7 
χαλεπαίνοι τῷ θεράποντι. “Ort,” ἔφη, “ὀψοφαγίστατός 
“ἡ ’ , > \ 4 x > 4 
2ὅτε ὧν βλακότατός ἐστι καὶ φιλαργυρώτατος ὦν ἀργότα- 
3) “oy ὃ Ν > > ΄ , ’ an 
tos. “Hon ποτὲ οὖν ἐπεσκέψω πότερος πλειόνων πληγῶν 
a x 
δεῖται, σὺ ἢ ὁ θεράπων ;” 
Φοβουμένου δέ τινος τὴν εἰς ᾿Ολυμπίαν ὁδόν, “Ti,” ἔφη, 5 
« a \ , 3 \ x δὲ Y \ 
φοβῃ τὴν πορείαν; οὐ καὶ οἰκοι σχεδὸν ὅλην τὴν 
“Ὁ A Ὁ“ 
80 ἡμέραν περιπατεῖς καὶ ἐκεῖσε πορευόμενος περιπατήσας 
Χ 
ἀριστήσεις, περιπατήσας δειπνήσεις καὶ ἀναπαύσῃ; οὐκ 
> y 2 3 , \ ,ὕ Δ a3 , a a 
οἶσθα ὅτι εἰ ἐκτείναις τοὺς περιπάτους οὗς ἐν πέντε ἢ ἕξ 
ε ’ “a ε ’ x > » 3 3 ’ 
ἡμέραις περιπατεῖς, ῥᾳδίως ἂν ᾿Αθήνηθεν εἰς Ὀλυμπίαν 
5 ’ 4 ‘ Ν A ε ᾿ 4 “ “ 
ἀφίκοιο; χαριέστερον δὲ καὶ προεξορμᾶν ἡμέρᾳ μιᾷ μᾶλ- 
x ε / Ν \ Ν 3 la 
35dov ἢ voTepiley: TO μὲν yap ἀναγκάζεσθαι περαιτέρω 
ἴω ’ὔ 4 Ν ε Ν ᾿ς Ν Ν Δ Ὁ , 
τοῦ μετρίου μηκύνειν τὰς ὁδοὺς χαλεπόν, τὸ δὲ μιᾷ ἡμέρᾳ 
lf A \ ε ’ ΄ “ 
πλείονας πορευθῆναι πολλὴν ῥᾳστώνην παρέχει: κρεῖτ- 
> a A x A A 
τον οὖν ἐν TH ὁρμῇ σπεύδειν ἢ ἐν TH ὁδῷ." 
> ε 
Αλλου δὲ λέγοντος ὡς παρετάθη μακρὰν ὁδὸν πορευ- 6 
ΕἾ μ᾿ 
«οθείς, ἤρετο αὐτὸν εἰ καὶ φορτίον ἔφερε. “Μὰ Δί᾽ οὐκ 
ἔγωγ᾽, ἔφη, “ἀλλὰ τὸ ἱμάτιον. “Μόνος δ᾽ ἐπορεύου;," 
x 
ἔφη, “ἢ Kat ἀκόλουθός σοι ἠκολούθει; “Ἤκολούθει,᾽" 
x 
ἔφη. “Πότερον κενός," ἔφη, “ἢ φέρων τι; “Φέρων νὴ 
\ 53 
Δί᾽, ἔφη, “τά τε στρώματα καὶ τἄλλα σκεύη." “Καὶ 
4, ἀκόλουθον : an attendant, the stretch out, in one line. — οὗς περι- 
slave whose duty it was to accom- πατεῖς : sc. in Athens. οὕς is cog- 
pany his master when he went out. nate accusative. — ᾿Αθήνηθεν els 
Cf. 6. ᾿᾽Ολυμπίαν : a distance of about 130 
5. φοβουμένου : expressing ap- miles. —hpépa μιᾷ : dat. of degree 
prehension of. —otxo.: forthe accent, οἵ difference. — μᾶλλον : rather, be- 
see on i. 1. 2. --- πορευόμενος : while longs to ἐξορμᾶν. --- πλείονας (8c. 
on the journey. —wepimarfoas api- ὁδούς) : i.e. the days’ journeys. 
στήσεις, περιτατήσας δειπνήσεις : YOU 6. παρετάθη : worn out, iit. 
will simply take a walk and eat your — stretched out. — καί: besides. — 


luncheon, take another and eat din- ἀλλά : ‘nothing except.’? — κενός : 
ner. —el ἐκτείναις : if you should empty-handed. —orpdpara: bedding 


192. BENOSONTOS ATTOMNHMONEYMATA TI. 13, 14. 


45 πῶς, ἔφη, “ἀπήλλαχεν ἐκ τῆς 6000;” “ Ἐμοὶ μὲν δοκεῖ; 


ἔφη, “ βέλτιον ἐμοῦ. “Τί odv;” ἔφη, “el τὸ ἐκείνου φορ- 


4 » Ν ᾽’ ἰφὶ x » ἊΝ ᾽) 
τίον ἔδει σὲ φέρειν, πῶς ἂν οἴει διατεθῆναι; 


Δί᾽, ἔφη: “μᾶλλον δὲ οὐδ᾽ ἂν ἠδυνήθην κομίσαι." 


“Κακῶς νὴ 
(( Τὸ 


a nw a wn QA 4 A nw 
οὖν TOO OUTOV ἧττον του παιδὸς δύνασθαι TOVELWW πῶς 


3 , ὃ A 39 ὃ Ν > ” 
50 ἡσκημέενου OKEL σοι AV pos ειναυ: 


ε , Ν nan ΄, δ ΟΝ ὃ A ε Ν qe 
Οπότε δὲ των OUVVLOVT@Y Εετπι ELTVOV OL μεν μικρον 14 


ὄψον, οἱ δὲ πολὺ φέροιεν, ἐκέλευεν ὁ Σωκράτης τὸν παῖδα 


δ Ν da 9 δ x Θέ 
ΤΟ μικρον 7) εἰς ΤΟ Κοινον TLUEVAL 7) 


μέρος. 


x 4 ee Q 
διανέμειν εκαστῳ ΤΟ 


ε > Ν Ν ὔὕ > ΄ ld XN 
οἱ οὖν TO πολὺ φέροντες ησχύνοντο τό τε μὴ 


A lal > XN Ν [4 Ν Ν ee / 
5 κοινωνεῖν τοῦ εἷς TO κοινὸν τιθεμένου καὶ τὸ μὴ ἀντιτιθέναι 


ς, ΕΝ A τ ΝΣ > Ν V1.8 “ > + % ’ \ 
TO E€QAUTW)D * ἐτίθεσαν ουν Καὶ ΤΟ εαύτων ELS ΤΟ Κοινον" και 


9 Ν 50 Ν 2 > A \ , 3 , 
ἐπεὶ οὐδὲν πλέον εἶχον TOV μικρὸν φερομένων, ἐπαύοντο 


πολλοῦ ὀψωνοῦντες. 


- 


A ἴων A + 
Καταμαθὼν δέ ποτε τῶν συνδειπνούντων τινὰ τοῦ μὲν 


’ 4, ἂν δὲ », FN > Φ ας 3 7 
10 σίτου πεπαυμένον, TO OE οψον avTO καθ᾽ αὑτὸ ἐσθίοντα, 


, » wea , 9.3 Y ¥ Y y 
λόγου ὄντος περὶ ὀνομάτων, Ep οἵῳ ἔργῳ ἕκαστον εἴη, 


«Ἔ ἄρ ν τῶ «ὦ ἀνὸ 3. See Fae, | , \ ¥ 
χοιμεν ἂν, ἔφη, W ανόρες, εἰπειν ἔπι ποίῳ ποτέ ἐεργῳ 


ἄνθρωπος ὀψοφάγος καλεῖται; ἐσθίουσι μὲν γὰρ δὴ 


— ἀπήλλαχεν ἐκ : come off from (i.e. 
stand) the trip. — dv διατεθῆναι : 
would have fared. — τοῦ παιδός : the 
slave. Cf. the old Eng. use of 
‘knave’ (Ger. Knabe) equivalent to 
‘servant,’ and the former use of the 
word ‘boy’ for ‘slave’ in our 
Southern States. Slaves were ex- 
cluded from the exercises of the 
alaestra, and hence were οὐκ ἠσκη- 
πα. - ἠσκημένου ἀνδρός : cf. iii. 
circum, 


tion. me table talk of Socrates 


’ 3. παρ΄ moderation in eating. 
ὃ πίνοι : Whewy ἐπὶ δεῖπνον : the 


Ψυχρόν, ὥστ΄. have been what was 


known as €pavos (a picnic or ‘ basket 
party’), to which each guest brought 
his own share of the food. — ὄψον : 
meat, fish, or sauce, originally any- 
thing eaten with bread. —els τὸ 
κοινὸν τιθέναι : to place on the table 
for common participation. — τό τε 
μὴ κοινωνεῖν kal: both to refrain from 
sharing, and. —émel: since. — ἔπαύ- 
ovTo πολλοῦ ὀψωνοῦντες : they stopped 
buying meat at a high price. For the 
partic., see on ἐσθίοντα 13. 2. 
2. σίτου : equivalent to ἄρτου 
bread, as distinguished from ὄψον. --- 
ἐφ᾽ οἵῳ ἔργῳ ἕκαστον εἴη : for what 
action each was given. —wolw ποτέ:. 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA III, 14. 


193 


’ ς΄ ἈΝ “~ 4 »” 9 ΄ ΕῚ ΕῚ > > , 
πάντες ETL τῷ σίτῳ οψον, ὁταν παρῃ" GAN οὐκ οἶμαΐ πω 


15 ἐπὶ τούτῳ γε ὀψοφάγοι καλοῦνται." “Od γὰρ οὖν," ἔφη τις 


al , 
των TAPOVTOV. 


ony , . bb) » ({ ' Ψ ᾿Ξ, ~ ra 
tL yap; ἔφη, “ἐάν τις ἄνευ τοῦ σίτου 


Ν 3, FON 3 ’ὔ \ 5 ’ὕ > > ε nw 9 
τὸ ὄψον αὐτὸ ἐσθ μὴ ἀσκήσεως, ἀλλ᾽ ἡδονῆς ἕνεκα, 


’ὔ 5 , ed a xR 39 
πότερον ὀψοφάγος εἶναι δοκεῖ ἢ ov ; 


«ἄλλος τις ὀψοφάγος εἴη." 


20 “ Ὁ δὲ μικρῷ σίτῳ, ἔφη, “πολὺ ὄψον ἐπεσθίων ;” 


“Σχολῇ γ᾽ av,” én, 


͵7 » a ’ὔ 
Kal τις ἀλλος τῶν παρόντων, 


3 ἈΝ 
εν ἔμοι 


μέν, ἔφη ὁ Σωκράτης, “καὶ οὗτος δοκεῖ δικαίως ἂν ὀψο- 


φάγος καλεῖσθαι: καὶ ὅταν γε οἱ ἄλλοι ἄνθρωποι τοῖς 


“ » 4 > ’ x Ὁ / 
θεοῖς εὔχωνται πολυκαρπίαν, εἰκότως ἂν οὗτος πολυοψίαν 


» ” 
εὐχόοιτο. 


΄“ δὲ ‘al , > ’ὔ ’ ε 
Ταῦυτα Οἐε Του Σωκράτους ELTOVTOS, νομισας O 


25 νεανίσκος εἰς αὑτὸν εἰρῆσθαι τὰ λεχθέντα, τὸ μὲν ὄψον 


3 > 4 5 μ ¥ \ , 
οὐκ ἐπαύσατο ἐσθίων, ἄρτον δὲ προσέλαβε. 


καὶ ὁ Σω- 


κράτης καταμαθών, “Παρατηρεῖτ᾽,᾽ ἔφη, “τοῦτον οἱ πλη- 


, ε , ~ ΄ » x nxn» , ΄, ” 
lov, ὁπότερα τῳ σίτῳ Ow ἣ τῳ OW σίτῳ χρήσεται. 


*AdXov δέ ποτε τῶν συνδείπνων ἰδὼν ἐπὶ τῷ ἑνὶ ψωμῷ 


80 πλειόνων ὄψων γευόμενον, “ἾΑρα γένοιτ᾽ av,” ἔφη, “πολυ- 


τελεστέρα ὀψοποιία ἢ μᾶλλον τὰ ὄψα λυμαινομένη ἢ HY 


λ΄ A ε 9 Ν 3 ’, Ν Μ Ν 
ὀψοποιεῖται 6 ἅμα πολλὰ ἐσθίων καὶ ἅμα παντοδαπὰ 


ε > Ἃς Ἕ ’ ’ὔ 4 nw 
ἡδύσματα εἰς TO στόμα λαμβάνων; πλείω μέν γε TOV 


9. ἴω. 4 4 A aA A 3 .ω- 
ὀψοποιῶν συμμειγνύων πολυτελέστερα ποιεῖ- ἃ δὲ ἐκεῖνοι 


see on i, 1. 1. --- γὰρ οὖν : see on iii. 
6. 12. 

3. τὸ ὄψον αὐτό: his meat by it- 
8617. --- ἀσκήσεως : of training, like 
that of the athletes, who ate a great 
deal of meat to strengthen them. — 
σχολῇ : hardly. — wodvkapriav, πο- 
Avofiav: “ἃ good year for crops, a 
good year for meat.”’ 

4. καταμαθών : observing. — rot- 
τον : note the ‘prolepsis.’ — οἵ πλη- 
σίον (sc. ὄντες) : in appos. with the 


ὑμεῖς implied in παρατηρεῖτε. --- 


ὁπότερα : a rare substitute for πό- 
τερα.--- τῷ σίτῳ... χρήσεται : ‘will 
make a relish of the staple, or a 
staple of the relish’’ (Dakyns). For 
the dats., see on δούλοις ii. 1. 12. 

5. τῷ ψωμῷ : sc. ἄρτου or σίτου. 
ψωμός is a sop or morsel of bread, in 
N. T. ψωμίον, cf. John xii, 26, 30. 
-- ὄψων : here, dainty dishes. — 
Avpatvopévy : calculated to spoil. —q 
qv ὀψοποιεῖται, ὁ : than that which he 
practices, who.— πλείω μέν ye τῶν ὄψο- 
ποιῶν συμμειγνύων : as he mingles 


194 EENOSQNTOS ATOMNHMONEYMATA TI. 14. 


35 μὴ συμμειγνύουσιν ὡς οὐχ ἁρμόττοντα, 6 συμμειγνύων, 
εἴπερ ἐκεῖνοι ὀρθῶς ποιοῦσιν, ἁμαρτάνει τε καὶ καταλύει 
τὴν τέχνην αὐτῶν. καίτοι πῶς οὐ γελοῖόν ἐστι παρα- 

ΕΝ 
σκευάζεσθαι μὲν ὀψοποιοὺς τοὺς ἄριστα ἐπισταμένους, 
αὐτὸν δὲ μηδ᾽ ἀντιποιούμενον τῆς τέχνης ταύτης τὰ ὑπ᾽ 
39 ’ ’ὔ ’ Ν »» , ’ὔ 
40 ἐκείνων ποιούμενα μετατιθέναι; καὶ ἄλλο δέ τι προσγί- 
Ὸ > ᾽ 3 , 3 ’ Ν 
γνεται τῷ ἅμα πολλὰ ἐσθίειν ἐθισθέντι- μὴ παρόντων γὰρ 
lal A + 4 ~ \ 4 ε \ 
πολλῶν μειονεκτεῖν ἄν TL δοκοίη ποθῶν τὸ σύνηθες. ὁ δὲ 
Ν Ν 4 Ν eX ” , ν A 
συνεθισθεὶς τὸν ἕνα ψωμὸν ἑνὶ ὄψῳ προπέμπειν, OTE μὴ 
, λλ ’ ὃ 4 a Of ἐλ es Ἃς ως θ 3) 
παρείη πολλά, δύναιτ᾽ ἂν ἀλύπως τῷ ἑνὶ χρῆσθαι. 

4 Ἔλεγε δὲ καὶ ὡς τὸ εὐωχεῖσθαι ἐν τῇ ᾿Αθηναίων 

, 5 θί A Ν δὲ = Ἂ » 3% 
γλώττῃ ἐσθίειν Kadotro: τὸ δὲ εὖ προσκεῖσθαι ἔφη ἐπὶ 
“A A 9 A“ 
τῷ ταῦτα ἐσθίειν ἅτινα μήτε THY ψυχὴν μήτε TO σῶμα 
λυποίη μηδὲ δυσεύρετα εἴη: ὥστε καὶ τὸ εὐωχεῖσθαι τοῖς 

κοσμίως διαιτωμένοις ἀνετίθει. 


more ingredients even than the 
cooks. For the abridged compar- 
ison, see On κοινότερον τῶν ἄλλων i. 1. 
8. ---ἃ δὲ. .. ὁ συμμειγνύων : equiv- 
alent to ταῦτα δέ, ἃ ἐκεῖνοι μὴ συμ- 
μειγνύουσιν, συμμειγνύων. ---- ἐκεῖνοι : ἡ. 6. 
οἱ ὀψοποιοί. --- καταλύει: renders use- 
less. Cf. καταλύει τὸν ἱππέα Eq. xii. 5. 

6. μηδ᾽ ἀντιποιούμενον τῆς τέχνης 
ταύτης : pretending to no skill in this 
αγΐ. --- μετατιθέναι : to alter. — μειον- 
extetv: to be stinted. ΟἿ. μεῖον ἕξεις 
12. ὅ. ---τὸν ἕνα ψωμὸν κτλ. : to ac- 
company one piece of bread by one 


of meat. —6re μὴ παρείη : for ὅταν 
μὴ παρῇ, by assimilation to the mode 
of the main sentence. 

7. ἔλεγε : he used to remark. — τὸ 
εὐωχεῖσθαι : the phrase ‘ good cheer.’ 
For the neut. art. before any word 
or expression made the obj. of 
thought, see G. 955, 2; H. 125 e. — 
καλοῖτο : signified. —roed : theadverb 
εὖ. --- ἐπὶ τῷ ἐσθίειν : ‘to express the 
eating.’’— ἀνετίθει : he used to apply. 
‘Good cheer’ comes only when we 
eat wholesome viands and in mod- 
eration. 


UT@ ὃὲ Σωκράτης ἣν ἐν παντὶ πράγματι καὶ πάντα 1 
’ἅ > , ν “ ᾽ὔ An . 
τρόπον ὠφέλιμος, WOTE TH σκοπουμένῳ τοῦτο καὶ μετρίως 


αἰσθανομένῳ φανερὸν εἶναι ὅτι οὐδὲν ὠφελιμώτερον ἣν 


“ ’ A \ Ἦν -Ὃ ’ ’ ε le 
του Σωκράτει συνειναι καὶ μετ ἐκεινου διατρίβειν οπουοῦὺν 


> ae ε “ ’ = 3 ἃ Ἁ ᾿, 3 ’ a θ 
δ καὶ ἐν ὁτῳοῦν πράγματι: ἐπεὶ καὶ τὸ ἐκείνου μεμνῆσθαι 
Ν ’ 3 Ν 3 la \ 3 , 39 A 
μὴ παρόντος ov μικρὰ ὠφέλει τοὺς εἰωθότας τε αὐτῷ 
“A Ν , Ἁ 
συνεῖναι καὶ ἀποδεχομένους ἐκεῖνον: καὶ γὰρ παίζων 


οὐδὲν ἧττον ἢ σπουδάζων ἐλυσιτέλει τοῖς συνδιατρίβουσι. 
, Ν ¥ Ν ᾿Ξ» Θ΄ ΠΑΝ Ν > > 
πολλάκις yap ἔφη μὲν av Tivos ἐρᾶν, φανερὸς δ᾽ ἦν ov 
A ‘ , Ν ν 3 Ν A Ν Ν Ν 
10T@V τὰ σώματα πρὸς wpay, ἀλλὰ τῶν τὰς ψυχὰς πρὸς 


> Ἁ > 7, 3 γ᾿ 
ἀρετὴν εὖ πεφυκότων ἐφιέμενος. 


3 ΄ ἈΠ ΟΝ > 
ETEKMQALDETO δὲ τας aya- 


Ν , > “ 4 , Ὁ , Ἀ 
θὰς φύσεις εκ Του TAXU TE μανθάνειν οις προσέχοιεν και 


1. Socrates loved the companion- 
ship of young men, but of those only 
in whom he discerned natural abilities 
and an enthusiasm for what was noble. 
These, he held, stood especially in need 
of instruction; for enthusiasm and 
force, when misdirected, may lead to 
the most disastrous conseyuences. On 
the other hand, those who thought 
themselves able to dispense with in- 
struction because they were rich, he 
regarded as the greatest of fools. 

1. καὶ μετρίως αἰσθανομένῳ : con- 
cessive, even of moderate discernment. 
For αἰσθάνομαι in the sense of general 
intelligence, cf. οὐδὲ πρὸς ἀνθρώπων τῶν 
αἰσθανομένων Thuc. i. 71. — ὁπουοῦν, 
ὁτῳοῦν : see ON ὁπωστιοῦν i. 6. 11. — 
ἀποδεχομένους ἐκεῖνον : ‘receiving 


195 


and accepting his teachings.’? Cf. 
τοὺς ἀποδεξαμένους ἅπερ αὐτὸς ἐδοκίμαζεν 
i, 2. 8. --- παίζων, σπουδάζων : cf. 
ἔπαιζεν ἅμα σπουδάζων i. 3. 8. An 
instance of the playfulness is found 
in the ἐρᾶν of 2, a word usually 
directed toward physical attractions. 
Another is the amusing προοίμιον of 
2. 4 and 6. 

2. ἔφη, av: sc. as often as occasion 
arose. For the iterative ἄν, see on 
av ἔδωκε ii. 9. 4, and cf. iv. 6. 13. — 
τῶν, τῶν : const. with εὖ πεφυκότων 
those who were well endowed by nature. 
--- ὥραν, ἀρετήν : without the art., see 
on i. 2. 23. —érexpatpero: he used to 
infer. — τοῦ μανθάνειν : sc. αὐτούς as 
subject. — ois προσέχοιεν : for οἷς ἂν 
προσέχωσι Of direct discourse. G. 


196 


ἘΕΝΟΦΩΝΤΟΣ ATLOMNHMONEYMATA A. 1. 


a 4 ‘\ aA A , 
V OVEVELV a άθοιεν και ἐπιθυ ευν Τῶν αθ ATWV πάν- 
μνημ μ 


> 8 » 3 lA “A > “Ὁ Ν la Ἂς Ν 
TMV δι ων €OTLY οἰκιαν TE καλῶς οἰκειν και πόλιν και TO 


Ψ 9 , Ἀν A 9 , , > 
15 ολον ἀνθρώποις TE καὶ Τοις ἀνθρωπίνοις πράγμασιν εν 


A Ν Ν , ε la , > x 
χρῆσθαι: τους Y2p TOLOUTOVUS HYELTO παιδευθέντας ουκ αν 


᾿ > Ν Ν ε las »»» 
μόνον αὐτούς τε εὐδαίμονας εἶναι καὶ τοὺς ἑαυτῶν οἴκους 


καλῶς οἰκεῖν, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἄλλους ἀνθρώπους καὶ πόλεις 


δύνασθαι εὐδαίμονας ποιεῖν. 


ΓΗ ἘΣ Ἀν ἢ Χ , δ΄ \ 
OV TOV QUTOV δὲ TPOmov E77 


, » 9 \ N \ 9 ΄ ΄ 9 θ N 3 
20 πάντας ἤει, ἀλλὰ τοὺς μὲν οἰομένους φύσει ἀγαθοὺς εἶναι, 


id 4 \ ἴω 950Ὰ.02Ζὶ] ν ε + 
μάθήσεως δὲ καταφρονοῦντας, ἐδίδασκεν ὅτι αἱ αρισται 


δοκοῦσαι εἶναι φύσεις μάλιστα παιδείας δέονται, ἐπιδει- 


΄ A Y Ν 3 , a Ν 
κνυων Τῶν TE LITTTWV TOUS εὐφυεστάτους θυμοειδεῖς TE Και 


Pt 3 Χ 3 , A 3 , 
σφοδροὺς οντας, εὖ μέν EK νέων δαμασθεῖεν, εὐχρήηστοτα- 


Wine ie , 2» Qi 297 , 
25 TOUS και αριστους γιγνομένους, ει δὲ ἀδάμαστοι γένοιντο, 


’ ἈΝ , A nw al lal 
δυσκαθεκτοτάτους καὶ φαυλοτάτους καὶ τῶν κυνῶν τῶν 


9 4, l4 5 “ ἣν 3 a A 
εὐφυεστάτων, φιλοπόνων τε οὐσῶν καὶ ἐπιθετικῶν τοῖς 


θηρίοις, τὰς μὲν καλῶς ἀχθείσας ἀρίστας γίγνεσθαι πρὸς 


τὰς θήρας καὶ χρησιμωτάτας, ἀναγώγους δὲ γιγνομένας 


ὕὔ ἈΝ »" \ 4 
30 ματαιους TE και μανιώδεις και δυσπειθεστάτας. 


ε ΄, 
ομοιως 


Ν Ν ων 35 A ἈΝ > , 3 , 
δὲ Kal τῶν ἀνθρώπων τοὺς εὐφυεστάτους, ἐρρωμενεστάτους 


1481, 1497, 2; H. 914, 934. — οἰκίαν : 
we might expect οἶκον, after the anal- 
ogy of i. 1. 7, 2. 64; ii. 1. 19. — τὸ 
ὅλον: OMNINO.—Tovs γὰρ τοιούτους 
παιδευθέντας : for such natures when 
trained. This sent. contains the rea- 
son for the preceding τῶν εὖ πεφυκότων 
ἐφιέμενος. 

3. οὐ τὸν αὐτὸν τρόπον : like St. 
Paul, Socrates could be ‘all things to 
allmen.’ This variety in his methods 
is ridiculed by Aristophanes Clouds 
478-480. — τοὺς μέν : corresponds to 
τοὺς δέ in 5. — εἰ δαμασθεῖεν : if they 
should be broken in. — οὐσῶν : when 
hounds are meant, κυών is generally 





grammatically feminine. Cf. iii. 11. 
8. — ἐπιθετικῶν : eager to attack. — 
ἀχθείσας (ἄγω) : the usual term for 
training hunting dogs. — γίγνεσθαι: 
note the change from the participle 
(γιγνομένους) to the inf., permissible 


‘from the fact that ἐπιδεικνύειν is a 


verbum declarandi. — ἀναγώγους δὲ 
γιγνομένας : but if they should remain 
untrained, a slight ‘anacoluthon,’ 
since τὰς μέν preceded. 

4, ὁμοίως δὲ Kal τῶν ἀνθρώπων 
κτλ. : the thought that the very worst 
of characters are developed from the 
most richly endowed natures is fre- 
quentin Plato. Cf. Rep. 491; Gorg. 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA ΤΥ. 1. 197 


ta A »” Ν > 4 a x 
TE ταῖς ψυχαῖς ὄντας Kal ἐξεργαστικωτάτους ὧν ἂν 
ἐγχειρῶσι, παιδευθέντας μὲν καὶ μαθόντας ἃ δεῖ πράττειν 
22 Sf ‘ A 
ἀρίστους τε καὶ ὠφελιμωτάτους γίγνεσθαι. πλεῖστα yap 

Ν 
86 καὶ μέγιστα ἀγαθὰ ἐργάζεσθαι: ἀπαιδεύτους δὲ καὶ 
ἀμαθεῖς γενομένους κακίστους τε καὶ βλαβερωτάτους γί- 
γνεσθαι: κρίνειν γὰρ οὐκ ἐπισταμένους ἃ δεῖ πράττειν, 
πολλάκις πονηροῖς ἐπιχειρεῖν πράγμασι, μεγαλείους δὲ 
Ν 
καὶ σφοδροὺς ὄντας δυσκαθέκτους τε καὶ δυσαποτρέπτους 
τ ὲ ὃ Ν X A Ν ΄ ae , ἈΝ 
40εἶναι- διὸ πλεῖστα καὶ μέγιστα κακὰ ἐργάζεσθαι. τοὺς 
"ἧς At λ , ig A \ 4 Oe 
ἐπὶ πλούτῳ μέγα φρονοῦντας καὶ νομίζοντας οὐδὲν 
προσδεῖσθαι παιδείας, ἐξαρκέσειν δὲ σφίσι τὸν πλοῦτον 

> , Ν Ν ὃ , ΄, 4 by , 
οἰομένους πρὸς τὸ διαπράττεσθαί Te ὅ τι av βούλωνται 
K Ἁ A θ ε Ν “A > θ , > Δ λέ 9 

al τιμᾶσθαι ὑπὸ τῶν ἀνθρώπων, ἐφρένου λέγων ὅτι 

Ν \ ¥ ¥ ¥ N X , 277 \ 
45 μωρὸς μὲν εἴη, εἴ τις οἴεται μὴ μαθὼν τά TE ὠφέλιμα Kal 

\ λ Ν ΄“ ’ὔ ὃ , \ > ¥ 
τὰ βλαβερὰ τῶν πραγμάτων διαγνώσεσθαι, μωρὸς δ᾽ εἴ 
τις μὴ διαγιγνώσκων μὲν ταῦτα, διὰ δὲ τὸν πλοῦτον ὅ τι 
x aX: , » ὃ , Ν 7 
dv βούληται ποριζόμενος οἴεται δυνήσεσθαι τὰ συμφέ. 
ροντα πράττειν, ἠλίθιος δ᾽ εἴ τις μὴ δυνάμενος τὰ συμφέ. 
50 ῥοντα πράττειν εὖ τε πράττειν οἴεται καὶ τὰ πρὸς τὸν βίον 

> a RK A wa ec A , 3 / Ν Ν » 
αὐτῷ ἢ καλῶς ἢ ἱκανῶς παρεσκευάσθαι, ἠλίθιος δὲ καὶ εἴ 

» ὃ \ Ν A de 3 ers ὃ ’, 
τις οἴεται διὰ τὸν πλοῦτον μηδὲν ἐπιστάμενος δόξειν τι 

3 θὲ > x de > θὲ > ὃ a 1) , 

ἀγαθὸς εἶναι ἢ μηδὲν ἀγαθὸς εἶναι δοκῶν εὐδοκιμήσειν. 


526 a. — ὧν ἂν ἐγχειρῶσι : equivalent 
to τούτων, ἃ ἂν ἐγχειρῶσιν ἐξεργάζε- 
σθαι. For the gen., see on τῶν εἰς τὸν 
πόλεμον iii. 1. 6. --- ἐργάζεσθαι : for 
the inf., see on ὧν οὐδὲν εἶναι i. 
1. 8. 

5. ébpévov: he tried to bring to 
reason. Cf. ii. 6. 1. — εἴη : the subj. 
is to be supplied from the following 
clause. — εἴ τις οἴεται : for the indic. 
in subord. clauses of indirect dis- 
course, see G. 1497, 2; H. 933. — 


τά τε, καὶ τά, διαγνώσεσθαι : for τέ 
and καί with words of discrimi- 
nation, see on iii. 4. 3. — πράττειν εὖ 
τε πράττειν : for a similar play on 
words, cf. i. 6. 8. — εὐδοκιμήσειν : 
will win esteem. 

2. 1-20. How well Socrates knew 
how to bring to their senses young 
men who were filled with conceit of 
their fancied wisdom, is illustrated in 
his talks with Euthydémus. This 
youth wished to become a statesman, 


΄ 


198 EENO®QNTOS ΑΠΟΜΝΗΜΟΝΕΎΜΑΤΑ Δ. 2. 


A Ν ’ὔ’ , ~ 9 / 
Tots δὲ νομίζουσι παιδείας τε τῆς ἀρίστης τετυχη- 2 
κέναι καὶ μέγα φρονοῦσιν ἐπὶ σοφίᾳ ὡς προσεφέρετο, νῦν 
’ , χὰ 5 ’ Ν Ν ’ 
διηγήσομαι. καταμαθὼν yap Ἐῤθύδημον τὸν καλὸν γράμ- 
ματα πολλὰ συνειλεγμένον ποιητῶν τε καὶ σοφιστῶν τῶν 
3 ’ Ἂν τ Ὁ ὔ » δ ’ὔ / 

5 εὐδοκιμωτάτων Kal ἐκ τούτων ἤδη TE νομίζοντα διαφέρειν 
~ e A 5 7 ἈΝ ’ 5 , » ’ 
τῶν ἡλικιωτῶν ἐν σοφίᾳ καὶ μεγάλας ἐλπίδας ἔχοντα πάν- 
των διοίσειν τῷ δύνασθαι λέγειν τε καὶ πράττειν, πρῶτον 
μέν, αἰσθανόμενος αὐτὸν διὰ νεότητα οὕπω εἰς τὴν ἀγορὰν 
εἰσιόντα, εἰ δέ τι βούλοιτο διαπράξασθαι, καθίζοντα εἰς 
1) ἡνιοποιεῖόν τι τῶν ἐγγὺς τῆς ἀγορᾶς, εἰς τοῦτο καὶ αὐτὸς 

ἤει τῶν μεθ᾽ EavTov τινας ἔχων. καὶ πρῶτον μὲν πυνθα- 2 

νομένου τινὸς πότερον Θεμιστοκλῆς διὰ συνουσίαν τινὸς 
τῶν σοφῶν ἢ φύσει τοσοῦτον διήνεγκε τῶν πολιτῶν ὥστε 

Ν 5 “A > , ἈΝ ᾽ ε , ’ὔ 
πρὸς ἐκεῖνον ἀποβλέπειν τὴν πόλιν ὁπότε σπουδαίον 
15 ἀνδρὸς δεηθείη, ὁ Σωκράτης βουλόμενος κινεῖν τὸν EvOv- 

ὃ » θ » ΑΨ Ἅ » θ 3 \ > , 3 4 
μον εὔηθες ἔφη εἶναι τὸ οἴεσθαι τὰς μὲν ὀλίγου ἀξίας 
τέχνας μὴ γίγνεσθαι σπουδαίους ἄνευ διδασκάλων ἱκανῶν, 


but had no idea of going through any 
preliminary course of study or train- 


perhaps he was not yet eighteen. 
See on iii. 6. 1. — ἡνιοποιεῖόν τι τῶν: 


ing. Socrates shows him that he 
needs this, since he has no clear ideas 
even about what is just and unjust, 
which surely a statesman must un- 
derstand. 

1. Hvevdynpov: cf. 1. Ζ. 29. — 
γράμματα πολλὰ συνειλεγμένον : had 
collected many writings, as we should 
say, ‘had a good library.’ He may 
have had several dozen manuscripts. 
Cf. what Socrates says of himself, 
πάλαι 
ἀνδρῶν, οὺς ἐκεῖνοι κατέλιπον ἐν βιβλί- 


τοὺς θησαυροὺς τῶν σοφῶν 
os γράψαντες κτλ. i. 6. 14. --- σοφι- 
στῶν : see on i. 1. 1]. --- ἐκ τούτων : 
as a result of this. — πρῶτον μέν : cor- 


responds to ἐπεὶ δέ in 6.— 81a νεότητα: 


equivalent to τὲ τῶν ἡνιοποιείων τῶν. 
On such shops as places of resort, see 
Becker, Charicles, p. 279. --- ἤει : the 
main verb at last, preceded by the 
circumstantial participles καταμαθών 
and αἰσθανόμενος, and followed by 
ἔχων. ----τῶν ped’ ἑαυτοῦ : companions. 
In the Anabasis the phrase generally 
means atiendants or retinue. 

2. πρῶτον μέν : corresponds to 
πάλιν δέ in 8. --- πυνθανομένου τινός : 
on some one’s raising the question. — 
Θεμιστοκλῆς : see on ii. 6. 13. — διὰ 
συνουσίαν τινὸς τῶν σοφῶν : cf. σοφοὶ 
τύραννοι τῶν σοφῶν ξυνουσίᾳ Soph. Fr. 
12. --- κινεῖν : to draw out, lit. to stir. 
-- τὰς τέχνας : acc. of specification 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA IV. 2. 


199 


Ἀ Ae , , , ¥ , 3 ἄκος 
ΤΟ δὲ T POCOTAVAL πόλεως, TAVT@V εργων μέγιστον OV, A7TO 


ταὐτομάτου παραγίγνεσθαι τοῖς ἀνθρώποις. 


πάλιν δέ 8 


Ld A > l4 ε “ 4 ἃ 3 ων 
20 ΤΟΤΕ TAPOVTOS του Εὐθυδήμου, OP@V QAvTOV ATOK@POVVTA 


aA Fs \ , Ἂ / Ν “ 
τῆς συνεδρίας καὶ φυλαττόμενον μὴ δόξῃ τὸν Σωκράτην 
θαυμάζειν ἐπὶ σοφίᾳ, “Ὅτι per,” ἔφη, “ὦ ἄνδρες, Εὐθύδη- 


͵ ε as ε ΄, , a , , , 
μος οὑτοσὶ ἐν ἡλικίᾳ γενόμενος, τῆς πόλεως λόγον περί 


τινος προτιθείσης, οὐκ ἀφέξεται τοῦ συμβουλεύειν, εὐδηλόν 


2 ἐστιν ἐξ ὧν ἐπιτηδεύει: δοκεῖ δέ μοι καλὸν προοίμιον 


τῶν δημηγοριῶν παρασκευάσασθαι φυλαττόμενος μὴ δόξῃ 


μανθάνειν τι παρά Tov. δῆλον γὰρ ὅτι λέγειν ἀρχόμενος 


- ΄ὕ « 3 ἦν Ν A ¥, 3.» 
ὧδε T POOLLLAG ETAL * Παρ OVOEVOS μὲν ἸΤΩΊΤΟΤΕ, ὦ ἄνδρες 


[ω 5 95 
᾿Αθηναῖοι, οὐδὲν ἔμαθον οὐδ᾽ ἀκούων τινὰς εἶναι λέγειν τε 


; Ν ΄ ε Ν ὃ 2 ΄ 3 a 503 9 
30 καὶ πράττειν ἱκανοὺς ἐζήτησα τούτοις ἐντυχεῖν οὐδ᾽ ἐπε- 


᾽ὔ “ , ᾽ὔ ’ 4 ~ 3 ΄ 
μελήθην τοῦ διδάσκαλόν τινά μοι γενέσθαι τῶν ἐπισταμέ. 


5 Ἂς Ἁ 5» ’ ’ὕ Ν ᾽ὔὕ 3 
νων, ἀλλὰ καὶ τἀναντία: διατετέλεκα γὰρ φεύγων οὐ 


όνον τὸ μανθάνειν τι παρά τινος, ἀλλὰ καὶ τὸ δόξαι: 
μ μανᾷ 


ῳ Ve x > Ν 3 ’ ΒΕ οἱ / 
ὅμως δὲ ὅ TL ἂν ἀπὸ ταὐτομάτου ἐπίῃ μοι, συμβουλεύσω 


: e A 9 ε , 3 x 4 , \ A 
35 υμιν. 1 PLOT ELE δ᾽ ἂν οὕτω προοιμιάζεσθαι και τοις 


’, Ν “A / > Ν » A 
βουλομένοις παρὰ τῆς πόλεως ἰατρικὸν ἔργον λαβεῖν. 


with σπουδαίους 5716. --- ἀππτὸ ταὐτο- 
μάτου : equivalent to φύσει above. Cf. 
λέγεται (ὁ Περικλῆς) ... 
μάτου σοφὸ: γεγονέναι, ἀλλὰ πολλοῖς 
καὶ σοφοῖς συγγεγονέναι Plato Alc. I, 
118 c. So Demosthenes (xviii. 205) 
speaks of τὸν ταὐτόματον θάνατον, i.e. 
natural death. 

3. ἀποχωροῦντα : withdrawing 
From. —@avpafterv ἐπὶ σοφίᾳ: cf. i. 4. 
3. — ἰὐθύδημος οὑτοσί: our friend 
Euthydemus here, with a gesture. 
For the ‘deictic’ form of prons., 
see G. 412; Η. 274.—é&v ἡλικίᾳ 
γενόμενος : when he has reached 
the proper age. — προτιθείσης : 86. 


οὐκ ἀπὸ ταὐτο- 


through the herald. Cf. ἠρώτα μὲν 
ὁ κῆρυξ τίς ἀγορεύειν βούλεται ; Dem. 
XViil. 170. — προοίμιον : the exor- 
dium, or introduction of an oration. 

4. καὶ τἀναντία (sc. ἐποίησα): pre- 
cisely the reverse. — διατετέλεκα φεύ- 
γῶν : I have constantly avoided. For 
the supplementary participle with 
διατελέω, see G. 1587; H. 981. — τὸ 
δόξαι : sc. μεμαθηκέναι τι παρά τινος. 
Cf. 5. — ἐπίῃ μοι: may occur to me. 
So col ἐπῆλθεν ἐνθυμηθῆναι iv. 3. 3. 
Cf. ἐσῆλθέ με Hat. vii. 46. 

5. ἁρμόσειε : would be appropriate 
Sor. —tarpixdv ἔργον : the office of city 
physician. Certain physicians were, 


200 EENO®ONTOS AIITOMNHMONEYMATA A. 2. 


3 45) / > x > A Ἂν A vs ἍΨ θ > a 
ἐπιτήδειόν γ᾽ ἄν αὐτοῖς εἴη TOV λόγου ἄρχεσθαι ἐντεῦθεν" 
( 3 3 5 Oo \ ΄ Se. 3 A Ν 3 Ἐν 
Παρ᾽ οὐδενὸς μὲν πώποτε, ὦ ἄνδρες ᾿Αθηναῖοι, τὴν tarpt 
3 “ 
κὴν τέχνην ἔμαθον οὐδ᾽ ἐζήτησα διδάσκαλον ἐμαυτῷ 
40 γενέσθαι τῶν ἰατρῶν οὐδένα: διατετέλεκα γὰρ φυλαττό- 
μενος οὐ μόνον τὸ μαθεῖν τι παρὰ τῶν ἰατρῶν, ἀλλὰ καὶ 
XN ὃ "ζ θ ’ X , 4 Ἢ 4 ὃ la Ν 
τὸ δόξαι μεμαθηκέναι τὴν τέχνην ταύτην ὅμως δέ μοι τὸ 

3 Ν » ’ὔ ’ Ν 3 ε a“ 3 

ἰατρικὸν ἔργον δότε: πειράσομαι γὰρ ἐν ὑμῖν ἀποκινδυ- 
/ ya > 
νεύων μανθάνειν." πάντες οὖν οἱ παρόντες ἐγέλασαν 
45 ἐπὶ τῷ προοιμίῳ. ἐπεὶ δὲ φανερὸς ἣν ὁ Ἐὐθύδημος ἤδη 
μὲν οἷς ὁ Σωκράτης λέγοι προσέχων, ἔτι δὲ φυλαττόμενος 
αὐτός τι φθέγγεσθαι καὶ νομίζων τῇ σιωπῇ σωφροσύνης 
δόξαν περιβάλλεσθαι, τότε ὁ Σωκράτης βουλόμενος αὐτὸν 

ἴω 4 (a4 XN Md »» Ψ CE ε 
παῦσαι τούτου, “Θαυμαστὸν yap,” ἔφη, “τί ποτε ot βου- 
δ0 λόμενοι κιθαρίζειν ἢ αὐλεῖν ἢ ἱππεύειν ἢ ἄλλο τι τῶν 
τοιούτων ἱκανοὶ γενέσθαι πειρῶνται ὡς συνεχέστατα 
“A ν x 4 XN ld Ν > > 
ποιεῖν 6 τι ἂν βούλωνται δυνατοὶ γενέσθαι, καὶ ov καθ 
ἑαυτοὺς ἀλλὰ παρὰ τοῖς ἀρίστοις δοκοῦσιν εἶναι, πάντα 
ποιοῦντες καὶ ὑπομένοντες ἕνεκα τοῦ μηδὲν ἄνευ τῆς 

μ μη 

> ΄ ’ A ε 3 x A > , 
BB ἐκείνων γνώμης ποιεῖν, ὡς οὐκ ἂν ἄλλως ἀξιόλογοι 
γενόμενοι: τῶν δὲ βουλομένων δυνατῶν γενέσθαι λέγειν τε 


in Athens, elected by the popular 
assembly (ἐκκλησία) and paid by the 
state, to care for the sick among the 
poorer citizens. — ἀποκινδυνεύων : by 
trying experiments, at your risk. — 
οὖν : so, naturally. 

6. προσέχων: as Euthydemus 
was represented in 3 as departing 
(ἀποχωροῦντα), either he must have 
changed his mind, or the present dis- 
course is to be referred to another 
occasion. — νομίζων περιβάλλεσθαι : 
the pres. inf. is especially appropriate 
here: ‘‘ thinking that all the time he 


was wrapping himself in.’’— @avpa- 
στὸν yap: now it is surprising. — τί 
mote: see on i. 1. 1. The irony is 
somewhat strengthened by zoré. — 
παρὰ τοῖς ἀρίστοις κτλ. : ‘ with 
teachers of the highest reputation.”’ 
---πάντα: everything imaginable. See 
on ii. 2. 6. —évexa τοῦ ποιεῖν : that they 
may do.— ὡς οὐκ ἂν ἄλλως γενόμενοι : 
in the belief that otherwise they could 
not become. — τῶν δὲ βουλομένων : 
while of those who wish, part. gen. with 
τινές. The argument is a fortiori, 
a favorite form with Socrates; οἱ. 2. 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA IV. 2. 201 


Kal πράττειν τὰ πολιτικὰ νομίζουσί τινες ἄνευ παρασκευῆς 
καὶ ἐπιμελείας αὐτόματοι ἐξαίφνης δυνατοὶ ταῦτα ποιεῖν 
ἔσεσθαι. καίτοι γε τοσούτῳ ταῦτα ἐκείνων δυσκατεργα- 7 
60 στότερα φαίνεται, ὅσῳπερ πλειόνων περὶ ταῦτα πραγμα- 
τευομένων ἐλάττους οἱ κατεργαζόμενοι γίγνονται: δῆλον 
> ας τῷ ἮΝ Τὰ ΄, , ΄ \ > , 
οὖν ὅτι καὶ ἐπιμελείας δέονται πλείονος καὶ ἰσχυροτέρας 
ε 4, 3 ᾽’ x ε 3 ’ὔ ” > > . Ν > 
οἱ τούτων ἐφιέμενοι ἢ οἱ ἐκείνων. κατ᾽ ἀρχὰς μὲν οὖν 8 
3 4 > ’ὔ 4 , » ’ὔ 
ἀκούοντος Εὐθυδήμου τοιούτους λόγους ἔλεγε Σωκράτης: 
ε > ὃ δ) ΟΝ, ε ’ ε ΞΖ ν ’ 
65 ὡς δ᾽ ἤσθετο αὐτὸν ἑτοιμότερον ὑπομένοντα, ὅτε διαλέγοιτο, 
καὶ προθυμότερον ἀκούοντα, μόνος ἦλθεν εἰς τὸ ἡνιο- 
᾿ποιεῖον, παρακαθεζομένου δ᾽ αὐτῷ τοῦ Ἐὐῤθυδήμου, “ Εἰπέ 
3 ν se 0 “ὃ a» Ὁ ta Ca , Ν 
por, ἔφη, “ὦ Ἐῤθύδημε, τῷ οντι, ὠσπερ ἐγὼ ἀκούω, πολλὰ 
γράμματα συνῆχας τῶν λεγομένων σοφῶν ἀνδρῶν γεγονέ- 
ἴοναι;" καὶ ὁ Εὐθύδημος, “Νὴ τὸν Δί᾽, ἔφη, “ὦ Σώκρατες: 
καὶ ἔτι γε συνάγω, ἕως ἂν κτήσωμαι ὡς ἂν δύνωμαι 
A 9 
πλεῖστα." “Νὴ τὴν Ἥραν," ἔφη ὁ Σωκράτης, “ayapai γέ 9 
σου, διότι οὐκ ἀργυρίου καὶ χρυσίου προείλου θησαυροὺς 
A “ x Ὁ au Ν 4 ,ὔ 
κεκτῆσθαι μᾶλλον ἢ σοφίας: δῆλον γὰρ ὅτι νομίζεις 
3 4 ἃ Ψ > A / “~ \ > 4 
15 ἀργύριον καὶ χρυσίον οὐδὲν βελτίους ποιεῖν τοὺς ἀνθρώ- 
πους, τὰς δὲ τῶν σοφῶν ἀνδρῶν γνώμας ἀρετῇ πλουτίζειν 
Ν 7 ” ‘N ε » ὃ » 3 ’ 
τοὺς κεκτημένους. καὶ ὁ Εὐθύδημος ἔχαιρεν ἀκούων 
ταῦτα, νομίζων δοκεῖν τῷ Σωκράτει ὀρθῶς μετιέναι τὴν 


7. καίτοι γε τοσούτῳ... γίγνον- 
ται: and yet success in these pur- 
suits (collectively, statesmanship) is 
more difficult of attainment than in 
those (cithara playing etc.) just in 
proportion as, out of the larger num- 
ber engaging in these, fewer achieve 
success. πλειόνων may be either part. 
gen. or gen. abs. of concession al- 
though a larger number engage etc. 

8. κατ᾽ ἀρχάς: at ἢγϑ8ί.-- ἀκούοντος 
Ειὐθυδήμου: in the hearing of Buthyde- 


mus.—tropévovta: staying behind. — 
μόνος : contrasted with τῶν μεθ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ 
τινας ἔχων Of 1. -- αἰπέ: for the accent, 
see on i. 2. 41. ---- τῶν λεγομένων σοφῶν 
γεγονέναι : for the pred. adj., see G. 
931; H. 940 a. —éws ἂν κτήσωμαι: for 
temporal clauses implying purpose, 
see G. 1467; H. 921, and Remark. 

9. νὴ τὴν Ἥραν : see oni. 5. 5. 
— προείλου μᾶλλον : cf. Lat. potius 
malle. — γνώμας : precepts. — μετιέ- 
vat: to be pursuing. 


202 ΞΕΝΟΦΩΝΤΟΣ AILOMNHMONEYMATA A. 2. 


’ ε Ν \ te. * ε ’ δι 9 ’ 4 
σοφίαν. ὁ δὲ καταμαθὼν QUTOV ἡσθέντα τῳ ETAL@ τούτῳ,10 
80 “Τί δὲ δὴ βουλόμενος ἀγαθὸς γενέσθαι," ἔφη, “ὦ Ἐὐῤθύ- 
ὃ , Ν ’ bb) 5 Ν Ν 4 
nee, συλλέγεις τὰ γράμματα; ἐπεὶ δὲ διεσιώπησεν 
ὁ Ἐῤθύδημος σκοπῶν ὅ τι ἀποκρίναιτο, πάλιν 6 Σωκρά- 
της, “Ἄρα μὴ ἰατρός;" ἔφη “πολλὰ γὰρ καὶ ἰατρῶν 
ἐστι συγγράμματα." καὶ ὁ Εὐθύδημος, “Μὰ Ai’,” ἔφη, 
85 “οὐκ ἔγωγε. “᾿Αλλὰ μὴ ἀρχιτέκτων βούλει γενέσθαι; 
“ Ν 3 ὃ Ν Ν A ὃ aA). (a4 ¥ 3» > 9 
γνωμονικοῦ yap ἀνδρὸς καὶ τοῦτο δεῖ. Οὔκουν ἔγωγ᾽, 
ἔφη. “᾿Αλλὰ μὴ γεωμέτρης ἐπιθυμεῖς," ἔφη, “γενέσθαι 
ν ε 
ἀγαθός, ὥσπερ 6 Θεόδωρος; “Οὐδὲ γεωμέτρης," ἔφη. 
“᾿Αλλὰ μὴ ἀστρολόγος," ἔφη, “ βούλει γενέσθαι ;" 
90 καὶ τοῦτο ἠρνεῖτο, “᾿Αλλὰ μὴ ῥαψῳδός ;" ἔφη: 


ὡς δὲ 
( Ν Ν 
καὶ γὰρ 
“Ma Δί 
> ¥ 2 ἡ ἈΠῸ ῬΈΕΙ , ε 5 \ Τὸ ao Ss 
οὐκ eywy,” ἔφη: “τοὺς yap τοι ῥαψῳδοὺς οἶδα τὰ μὲν ἔπη 
> “ > ἊΝ \ a > ld 3 3) 
ἀκριβοῦντας, αὐτοὺς δὲ πάνυ ἠλιθίους ὄντας. 


\ τ , 4 » ’, A ” 
Ta Ὁμήρου σέ φασιν ἔπη πάντα κεκτῆσθαι. 


καὶ 6 Σω-τί 
κράτης ἔφη: “Οὐ δήπου, ὦ Εὐθύδημε, ταύτης τῆς ἀρετῆς 
95 ἐφίεσαι δι’ ἣν ἄνθρωποι πολιτικοὶ γίγνονται καὶ οἴκονο- 
Ν Ν ¥ e ἃ Ν 3 ’ὔ A » 
μικοὶ καὶ ἄρχειν ἱκανοὶ καὶ ὠφέλιμοι τοῖς τε ἄλλοις 
ἀνθρώποις καὶ ἑαυτοῖς ;" καὶ ὁ Ἐὐθύδημος, “Σφόδρα γ᾽," 
ἔφη, “ ὦ Σώκρατες, ταύτης τῆς ἀρετῆς δέομαι." “Νὴ ΔΩ; 
» ε ’ (a4 A ’ 5 to rae Ν , 
ἔφη ὁ Σωκράτης, “τῆς καλλίστης ἀρετῆς Kal μεγίστης 
3 4 ’ὔ » Ν “ ΔΛ ν Ν “Ὁ 
100 ἐφίεσαι τέχνης" ἔστι γὰρ τῶν βασιλέων αὑτὴ καὶ καλεῖς 


, ee ee) Hs. , 8'΄ δι 2 93 \ 
ται βασιλική. ἀτάρ," ἔφη, “ κατανενόηκας εἰ οἷόν T ἐστὶ 


10. ri: modifies ἀγαθός. ---- ἦρα μὴ 
ἰατρός : sc. βουλόμενος γενέσθαι, in 
loose connection with the preceding 
τί δὲ δὴ βουλόμενος ἀγαθὸς γενέσθαι, 
after which something like dpa μὴ 
τὴν ἰατρικήν might be expected. — 
γνωμονικοῦ ἀνδρός : with reference to 
the γνώμας of 9. --- οὔκουν: no in- 
deed. — Θεόδωρος : of Cyrene, said 
to have been a teacher of Socrates. 


- ἀστρολόγος : an astronomer. Cf. 
iv. 7. 4. --- πάνυ ἠλιθίους : sufficiently 
represents the opinion of Socrates’s 
time, that the professional rhapsodes 
declaimed the Homeric poems with 
little real understanding. Cf. Sym. 
ili. 6; Plato Ion 580 Β ff. 

11. οὐ δήπου: as in ii, 3. 1.— 
ἀτάρ: a significant but, marking 
the second stage of the lesson. — 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA IV. 2. 203 


μὴ ὄντα δίκαιον ἀγαθὸν ταῦτα γενέσθαι;" “Καὶ pada,” 
¥ « V5 er | ee ὃ ΄ 3 Ν , 
ἔφη, “Kal οὐχ οἷόν τέ ye ἄνευ δικαιοσύνης ἀγαθὸν πολίτην 
-_ ) a 
γενέσθαι." “Τί odv;” ἔφη, “σὺ δὴ τοῦτο κατείργασαι; 12 
το > » 3 - an 
τοῦ “Οἶμαί ye,” ἔφη, “ὦ Σώκρατες, οὐδενὸς av ἧττον φανῆναι 
” 3 3 > an 
δίκαιος." “Ap οὖν, ἔφη, “τῶν δικαίων ἐστὶν ἔργα 
9 A , ” cy l4 ”» »¥ “wo? > Ss ” 
WOTEP TOV τεκτόνων; ἔστι μέντοι," ἔφη. Ap οὖν, 
» «ς 4 ε 7 » Ν ε “ »» 5 “A 
ἔφη, “ ὥσπερ οἱ τέκτονες ἔχουσι τὰ ἑαυτῶν ἔργα ἐπιδεῖξαι, 
ν 8 ΄ φᾷ ἥν Ἂν »» Ἃ 3 ΄, 2) 
οὕτως οἱ δίκαιοι τὰ αὑτῶν ἔχοιεν ἂν ἐξηγήσασθαι; 
110 “Μὴ ovv,” ἔφη ὁ Ἐῤθύδημος, “οὐ δύνωμαι ἐγὼ τὰ τῆς 
’ὔ »Ὰ > ’΄ Ν Ἀ 73 » Ν 
δικαιοσύνης ἔργα ἐξηγήσασθαι; καὶ νὴ Δί᾽ ἔγωγε τὰ 
“ > 7 3 ‘\ > 3 ? » 3 ε ’ ε ᾽’ 
τῆς ἀδικίας: ἐπεὶ οὐκ ὀλίγα ἔστι καθ᾽ ἑκάστην ἡμέραν 
“Βούλει οὖν, ἔφη 618 
ἐνταυθοῖ μὲν δέλτα, ἐνταυθοῖ δὲ 


τοιαῦτα ὁρᾶν τε καὶ ἀκούειν." 
Σωκράτης, “γράψωμεν 
bapa; εἶτα ὅ τι μὲν ἂν δοκῇ ἡμῖν τῆς δικαιοσύνης ἔργον 
εἶναι, πρὸς τὸ δέλτα τιθῶμεν, ὅ τι δ᾽ ἂν τῆς ἀδικίας, πρὸς 
τὸ adda;” “Εἴ τί σοι δοκεῖ" ἔφη, “προσδεῖν τούτων, 
καὶ ὁ Σωκράτης γράψας ὥσπερ εἶπεν, τά 
“Οὐκοῦν, ἔφη, “ἔστιν ἐν ἀνθρώποις ψεύδεσθαι ;” 
120 μέντοι, Edy. 
“Δῆλον, ἔφη, “ὅτι πρὸς τὴν ἀδικίαν." 


, ΄“ ’ 
ποίει ταῦτα." 
«ἜἬ 

στι 

, > 9 » κι nA ’ 
“Ποτέρωσε ovr,’ ἔφη, “θῶμεν rTovro;’ 

“ ” » 
“Οὐκοῦν, edn, 
“Touro οὖν 


‘\ A Ν ’ » 
“καὶ ἐξαπατᾶν ἔστι; “Kat pada,” ἔφη. 


ποτέρωσε θῶμεν ;" “Καὶ τοῦτο δῆλον ὅτι," ἔφη, “ πρὸς 


καὶ pada: sc. κατανενόηκα. --- οὐχ οἷόν 
τέ ye: the γέ adds emphasis to the 


13. βούλει, γράψωμεν: see on 
βούλει σκοπῶμεν ii. 1. 1. — δέλτα, 


“answer, in which the words of the 
question are in part repeated. 

12. τοῦτο : i.e. δίκαιος γενέσθαι. ---- 
οὐδενὸς ἧττον δίκαιος : as upright as 
any one. See on i. 5. 60. ---:[ἔργα: 
characteristic works. — ἔχοιεν av: 
doubly potential, in meaning and 
syntax. — ph οὖν οὐ δύνωμαι: (do 
you fear) that I may be unable. G. 
1350 ; H. 867. — Kal: nay. 


ἄλφα : to stand, of course, for δικαιο- 
σύνη and ἀδικία. --- τιθῶμεν : pres. as 
denoting repeated action (hence ποίει 
in the answer); afterward, when a 
single action is spoken of, θῶμεν is 
used. 

14. εἶπεν : ‘‘suggested.’’ — δῆλον, 
ἔφη, ὅτι: 1.6. δῆλόν ἐστι, ἔφη, ὅτι. 
The condensed form δῆλον ὅτι, mani- 
festly, occurs just below. With both 


A 9 , ” 
130 ποιεῖν οὐ φήσομεν; 


ε Ss ” 
140 amAovoTaTor εἶναι ; 


204 


τὴν ἀδικίαν." “Ti δὲ τὸ κακουργεῖν ;” 
125 “Τὸ δὲ ἀνδραποδίζεσθαι ;’ 


’ 


“Kat Touro.” 


EENO®ONTOS ATLOMNHMONEYMATA Δ. 2. 


“Kat τοῦτο, ἔφη. 
“Πρὸς δὲ τῇ 


, sQOA δ ἀνε , , sy > 0 "ὃ ” 
δικαιοσύνῃ οὐδὲν μιν τούτων κείσεται, ὦ Ἐυθύυὸδημε; 


“Δεινὸν γὰρ ἂν ein,” ἔφη. 


“Ti δ᾽; ἐάν τις στρατηγὸς 1ὅ 


αἱρεθεὶς ἄδικόν τε καὶ ἐχθρὰν πόλιν ἐξανδραποδίσηται, 


΄, la) 3 a ” 
φήσομεν τοῦτον ἀδικεῖν; 


al A > A ” 
ἀπατᾷ πολεμὼν αὐτοῖς; 
«(3 
la Ἂ / ” 
ποιήσει; “Καὶ pada, 


ε dé Ν * 
ὑπελάμβανον πρὸς τοὺς 


Ν A ὃ ΄, θ ΄ Ἃ Ψ SP 
προς ΤΊ) LKQALOOVVY) €TEOV AV EL7); 


“Οὐ δῆτα," Edy. 
“Kat pada.” 


“Δίκαια δὲ 
“ἢν δ᾽; ἐὰν ἐξ- 


Ν 
“Δίκαιον, ἔφη, “Kat τοῦτο." 
Ἁ ε ‘4 Ν ’ὔ 
Εὰν δὲ κλέπτῃ τε καὶ ἁρπάζῃ τὰ τούτων, οὐ δίκαια 
»»Ὰ ‘<2 | 4 Ν “A 
ἔφη “ἀλλ᾽ ἐγώ σε TO πρώτον 
’, ’ “A > A ” 
φίλους μόνον ταῦτα ἐρωτᾶν. 
(a4 9 “A ΔΆ Ψ wg Ν ῪΜ 5 4 5 , ἴων XN 
135 “Οὐκοῦν, ἔφη, “ὅσα πρὸς TH ἀδικίᾳ ἐθήκαμεν, ταῦτα καὶ 


¥ > » 
“Ἔοικεν, ἔφη. 


= 2 , 
“Βούλει ody,” ἔφη, “ταῦτα οὕτω θέντες διορισώμεθα πάλιν, 16 


Ν Ν Ν / , > Ν la A 
T POS μεν τους πολεμίους δίκαιον ELVAL TA Τοιαῦτα, ποιειν, 


πρὸς δὲ τοὺς φίλους ἄδικον, ἀλλὰ δεῖν πρός γε τούτους ὡς 


“Πάνυ μὲν οὖν," ἔφη ὁ Εὐθύδημος. 


“Τί οὖν; ἔφη ὁ Σωκράτης, “ἐάν τις στρατηγὸς ὁρῶν 1Ἱ 


forms, 86. θετέον ἐστίν. ---τὸ κακουργεῖν 
(sc. ποτέρωσε θῶμεν): doing mischief. 
Note the increasing brevity of ques- 
tions and answers. —jpiv: in our 
opinion. For the dat. of relation, 
see G. 1172; H. 771. 

15. στρατηγός : pred. with aipe- 
θείς. --- δίκαια (86. ἔργα) ποιεῖν : 86. 
αὐτόν as subj. of the infinitive. — 
πολεμῶν : in the course of the war. — 
αὐτοῖς : i.e. the citizens implied in 
πόλιν above. —krérry τε kal ἁρπάζῃ: 
an example of κακουργεῖν. --- ὑπελάμ- 
Bavov: I was assuming. — πρός : 
with reference ἴο. --- πρὸς τῇ ἀδικίᾳ : 
for prep. and dat. with verbs of 
motion, see H. 788. Little distinc- 


tion seems to be made in the use of 
πρός with the dat. and with the acc. 
in this and the preceding section. — 
ἐθήκαμεν. for the pl. forms of the 
1 aor. with x, see on ἔδωκαν i. 1. 9. 
Cf. An. iii. 2. 5; ἐδώκαμεν Hell. vi. 
3. 6; παρεδώκαμεν Oec. ix. 9. Both 
forms occur in ἀριστεῖα ἔδωκαν, καὶ 
οἰκεῖν ἀτέλειαν ἔδοσαν τῷ βουλομένῳ 
ΤΟΙ; ἃ, δὲ ἢ; 

16. βούλει: as in 198. --- διορισώ- 
μεθα πάλιν: make a new distinction. 
-- ἀλλά: The Eng. idiom would per- 
mit and here, since this clause is not 
opposed in thought to the preceding 
one. — as ἁπλούστατον εἶναι: to be 
perfectly straightforward. 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA IV. 2. 205 


ἀθύμως ἔχον τὸ στράτ Ἴ Ἵ Ἵ 
μως ἔχον τὸ στράτευμα ψευσάμενος φήσῃ συμμάχους 
4 . Ν Ὃ“ ’ , 4 ~ > / Ν 
προσιέναι καὶ τῷ ψεύδει τούτῳ παύσῃ τῆς ἀθυμίας τοὺς 
στρατιώτας, ποτέρωθι τὴν ἀπάτην ταύτην θήσομεν;" 
145 “Δοκεῖ pou,” ἔφη, “πρὸς τὴν δικαιοσύνην." “Ἐὰν δέ τις 
υἱὸν ἑαυτοῦ δεόμενον φαρμακείας καὶ μὴ προσιέμενον 
% ε nw “ 
φάρμακον ἐξαπατήσας ὡς σιτίον τὸ φάρμακον δῷ καὶ τῷ 
ν A 
ψεύδει χρησάμενος οὕτως ὑγιᾶ ποιήσῃ, ταύτην ad THY 
3 / A θ ld ” ςς “ 3} Ψ (ς Χ , > 
ἀπάτην ποῖ θετέον ; Δοκεῖ μοι," ἔφη, “καὶ ταύτην εἰς 
15076 αὐτό." “Τί δ᾽; ἐάν τις, ἐν ἀθυμίᾳ ὄντος φίλου, δείσας 
Ν ὃ ΄’ ε , , nx ε , x , a Ὁ 
μὴ διαχρήσηται ἑαυτόν, κλέψῃ ἢ ἁρπάσῃ ἢ Eidos ἢ ἄλλο 
τι τοιοῦτον, τοῦτο αὖ ποτέρωσε θετέον ;" “Kat τοῦτο νὴ 
Δί, ἔφη, “πρὸς τὴν δικαιοσύνην. “Λέγεις, ἔφη, “σὺ 18 
ν “A Α 
οὐδὲ πρὸς τοὺς φίλους ἅπαντα δεῖν ἁπλοΐζεσθαι;" “Μὰ 
΄ > A 
156 Δί᾽ οὐ δῆτα, ἔφη “ ἀλλὰ μετατίθεμαι τὰ εἰρημένα, εἴπερ 
ἔξεστι. “Δεῖ γέ Tou,” ἔφη ὁ Σωκράτης, “ ἐξεῖναι πολὺ 
wn x aw » 
μᾶλλον ἢ μὴ ὀρθῶς τιθέναι. τῶν δὲ δὴ τοὺς φίλους 19 
3 ’ - Jee." 4 ν δὲ “~ ’, 
ἐξαπατώντων ἐπὶ βλάβῃ, ἵνα μηδὲ τοῦτο παραλίπωμεν 
¥ , as ΄ BA's hak’ sae, kee ER oes 9 
ἄσκεπτον, πότερος ἀδικώτερός ἐστιν, ὁ ἑκὼν ἢ ὁ ἄκων; 
= Ω 
160 “᾿Αλλ᾽, ὦ Σώκρατες, οὐκέτι μὲν ἔγωγε πιστεύω οἷς ἀποκρί- 
\ \ κ , , A Ε » A 
νομαι: καὶ yap τὰ πρόσθεν πάντα νῦν ἄλλως ἔχειν δοκεῖ 
tl _ ah ΄ 27 9 de De SF A Pe) , 
μοι ἢ ὡς ἐγὼ τότε φόμην: ὅμως δὲ εἰρήσθω μοι ἀδικώτε- 
Α͂ν Ν ε ’ ὃ / lal ¥ ee (a3 A 
pov εἶναι τὸν ἑκόντα ψευδόμενον τοῦ ἄκοντος. Δοκεῖ 20 
an > ν 
δέ σοι μάθησις καὶ ἐπιστήμη τοῦ δικαίου εἶναι ὥσπερ 


17. ἀθύμως ἔχον : inadespondent of 16. —perari@epar: much like ἀνα- 
condition. — παύσῃ : free.—els τὸ τίθεμαι in i. 2.44. Cf. Hat. vii. 18. 
αὐτό : on the same 8166. --- μὴ διαχρή- — det ἐξεῖναι : sc. μετατίθεσθαι. 
σηται: lest he make away with him- 19. ἐξαπατώντων ἐπὶ βλάβῃ : in 
self. Cf. διαχρᾶσθαι Hdt.i.24. For 17 and 18 the argument dealt with 
a similar treatment of the ordinary justifiable violations of the moral 
view of δικαιοσύνη, cf. Plato Rep. law for a good purpose; we are 
331 o ff. now to consider malicious deceit 

18. ἅπαντα ἁπλοΐζεσθαι : with towards friends. —éxkav: intention- 
reference to the ws ἑπλούστατον εἶναι ally. 


170 ἀγράμματος ;” 


175 μὴ ἐπισταμένου ; ” 


206 


EENO®ONTOS ATIOMNHMONEYMATA Δ. 2. 


165 τῶν ypappdrwr ;” “ Ἔμοιγε." “Πότερον δὲ γραμματικώτε- 
ρον κρίνεις, ὃς ἂν ἑκὼν μὴ ὀρθῶς γράφῃ καὶ ἀναγιγνώσκῃ 


ax 6A x » ” 
ἡ OS ἂν ακων; 


" δ, εν , \ 9 a > aA» 
-©6rdte βούλοιτο, Kat ὀρθῶς αὐτὰ ποιεῖν. 


«Ὁ x ee ¥ : Se δ » 
S$ QV EKWY, EYwye UVVQLTO γάρ ay, 


“Οὐκοῦν ὁ μὲν 


ε \ A 3 ων ’ ᾿ Ν x ¥ e Ν » 
εκων μη ὀρθῶς γράφων γβαμματικος αν ευὴ; oO δὲ ακων 


“Πῶς γὰρ ov;” 


“Tq δίκαια δὲ πότε- 


Ν οὶ 5 x » 
pov ὁ ἑκὼν ψευδόμενος καὶ ἐξαπατῶν οἶδεν ἢ ὁ ἄκων;" 


a 4 
“Δῆλον ὅτι ὁ ἑκών." 


«0 ¥ , \ x 
UKOUVV γβρβαμματικωώτέβρον μὲν TOV 


A , ἴω x ld \ > 
ἐπιστάμενον γράμματα τοῦ μὴ ἐπισταμένου φὴς εἶναι; 


> 43.0.5 σ , 3) 
οὐκ οἷδ᾽ ὅπως λέγειν. 


ςς , δὲ » 3 , Ἂς δί a 

Δικαιότερον O€ TOV ἐπιστάμενον TA δίκαια TOU 

“ ig ὃ A δέ \ lal 

Φαίνομαι: OoKw O€ μοι Kal ταῦτα 
\ ἃ x 

“Τί δὲ δή; ὃς dv βουλόμενος 21 


3 snd ’ ’ Ν > \ Ν ἊΜ 9 ἰφ , 
τἀληθῆ λέγειν μηδέποτε τὰ αὐτὰ περὶ τῶν αὐτῶν λέγῃ, 


ἀλλ᾽ ὁδόν τε φράζων τὴν αὐτὴν τοτὲ μὲν πρὸς ἕω, τοτὲ δὲ 


Ν ε , / Ν Ν 3 ’ Ν 
πρὸς ἑσπέραν φράζῃ καὶ λογισμὸν ἀποφαινόμενος τὸν 


20. τῶν γραμμάτων : lit. letters ; 
here, the rudiments of learning, 
reading and writing. —émére βού- 
λοιτο: for the assimilation of mode, 
see on αἰσθανοίμεθα i. 5. 1. — δικαιότε- 
pov κτλ. : the fallacy, of course, con- 
sists in the assumption that he who 
knows what is right will always do 
it; a confusing of knowledge with 
character. He who knows the right 
is not ‘righter,?’ but only ‘more 
knowing’ than he who does not 
know it. While we recognize this 
argument as a weak place in 
Socrates’s reasoning, it is not 
necessary to regard him as insincere 
in making use of it to convict the 
young man of ignorance. It is 
clear that to him the term ‘ knowl- 
edge’ included more than we under- 


Ν Ν Ν. ’ Ν > ’ > 4 
180 αὐτὸν τοτὲ μὲν πλείω, τοτὲ δ᾽ ἐλάττω ἀποφαίνηται, Ti 


stand by it. See Introd. §§ 18--21. 
--φαίνομαι (sc. τοῦτο λέγων) : ““ evi- 
dently I am saying this.’’ — οὐκ 
οἶδ᾽ ὅπως : somehow or other. 

21-29. Huthydemus is made to 
confess that he does not know what 
he thought he knew. Socrates, hav- 
ing destroyed the young man’s self- 
confidence, impresses on him _ the 
importance of self-knowledge ; and, by 
a series of searching questions, brings 
him to see and confess how sadly he 
needs this knowledge. 

21. ὃς ἂν μηδέποτε τὰ αὐτὰ περὶ 
τῶν αὐτῶν λέγῃ: a fault frequently 
committed by Euthydemus in the 
preceding portion of the dialogue. 
Cf. Plato Gorg. 491 B, c.— φράζων: . 
describing. —doyropov τὸν αὐτόν: 
one and the same calculation. — 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA IV. 2. 207 


; A lal “A iy ἃ » 
σοι δοκεῖ ὁ τοιοῦτος; “Δῆλος νὴ Δί᾽ εἶναι ὅτι ἃ wero 
οὐκ οἶδεν. “Οἶσθα δέ τινας ἀνδραποδώδεις 22 


“Ἔγωγε." 
“Δῆλον ὅτι δι᾽ ἀμαθίαν." 


εἰδέναι 


καλουμένους ;” ὉΜοΡερον διὰ σοφίαν ἢ Ov 


” 


ἀμαθίαν: ae Ap οὖν διὰ τὴν 
186 τοῦ χαλκεύειν ἀμαθίαν τοῦ Grogan: τούτου τυγχάνουσιν ; ” 
“Οὐ δῆτα." “᾿Αλλ᾽ ἄρα διὰ τὴν τοῦ τεκταίνεσθαι ;" 
«Οὐδὲ διὰ ταύτην." “᾿Αλλὰ διὰ τὴν τοῦ σκυτεύειν ;” 
«Οὐδὲ δι᾽ Ev τούτων," ἔφη, “ἀλλὰ καὶ τοὐναντίον: οἱ γὰρ 
πλεῖστοι τῶν γε τὰ τοιαῦτα ἐπισταμένων ἀνδραποδώδεις 
190 εἰσίν. “Ap οὖν τῶν τὰ καλὰ καὶ ἀγαθὰ καὶ δίκαια μὴ 
ἔφη. 
“Οὐκοῦν δεῖ παντὶ τρόπῳ διατειναμένους φεύγειν ὅπως μὴ 23 
«᾿Αλλὰ νὴ τοὺς θεούς," ἔφη, “ὦ Σώ- 
κρατες, πάνυ ᾧμην φιλοσοφεῖν φιλοσοφίαν du ἧς av 
195 μάλιστα ἐνόμιζον παιδευθῆναι τὰ προσήκοντα ἀνδρὶ 


“Ἔμοιγε δοκεῖ; 


207 ὅς ἊΝ Pics ἀρ ὁ 23 2759 
εἰδότων TO Ονομαᾶ TOUT ἐστιν: 


ἀνδράποδα ὦμεν." 


καλοκἀγαθίας ὀρεγομένῳ- νῦν δὲ πῶς οἴει με ἀθύμως 
ἔχειν ὁρῶντα ἐμαυτὸν διὰ μὲν τὰ προπεπονημένα οὐδὲ τὸ 
ἐρωτώμενον ἀποκρίνεσθαι δυνάμενον ὑπὲρ ὧν μάλιστα 


χρὴ εἰδέναι, ἄλλην δὲ ὁδὸν οὐδεμίαν ἔχοντα ἣν ἂν 


δῆλος, ὅτι οἷδεν : see On οὐ λανθάνεις av παιδευθῆναι: for the inf. with ἄν 


με, ὅτι 11]. 5. 24. 

22. ἀνδραποδόδεις : servile. See 
on i. 1. 16. ---ἀλλ᾽ ἄρα: ‘at for- 
tasse.’’ Cf. iii. 11. 4.—robvavriov: 
adverbial. See on i. 2. 60. — οὐδὲ 
δι᾿ ἕν τούτων : more emphatic than 
δί οὐδὲν τούτων Would be. — τὸ ὄνομα 
τοῦτ᾽ ἐστίν : does this name belong. 

23. ἀνδράποδα : lit. slaves, here 
indicates the opposite of xadol κἀγα- 
Got, hence boors, the ignobile vul- 
gus. Seeon καλοὺς κἀγαθούς i. 1. 16. 
- πάνυ ᾧμην : I certainly supposed. 
-- φιλοσοφεῖν φιλοσοφίαν : “πα I 
was following a plan of βἰυαγ.᾽" --- 


in indirect discourse, see on iii. 5. 2. 
-τὰ προσήκοντα : for one of two 
accs. retained in the pass. with verbs 
of teaching, see G. 1289; H. 724 a. 
- ὀρεγομένῳ : for the attrib. parti- 
ciple, see G. 1559; H. 965. — πῶς : 
exclamatory rather than interr., be- 
longs to ἀθύμως. --- διά: in view of 
the following neg., suggests the 
meaning ‘‘after,’’ ‘‘in spite of.” 
Similarly ἕνεκα iv. 3..3.— ὑπὲρ ὧν : 
i.e. ὑπὲρ τούτων, d Const. with τὸ 
ἐρωτώμενον a question in regard to 
matters which. — ἣν πορευόμενος : by 
pursuing which. 


208 EENO®QNTOS AIOMNHMONEYMATA Δ. 2. 


200 πορευόμενος βελτίων yevoiunv;” καὶ 6 Σωκράτης, “Himé24 
μοι, ἔφη, “ὦ EvOvdnpe, εἰς Δελφοὺς δὲ ἤδη πώποτε 


’ Ἂ 5 
adikov;” “Kat dis ye νὴ Aia,” ἔφη. “Κατέμαθες οὖν 


Ν lal “ , XN ‘T 50 ΚΟΥ ΤΕΣ, δον 
πρὸς τῷ ναῷ Tov γεγραμμένον τὸ “Τνῶθι σαυτόν; 
Tied ” « ΄, > pers A , 

ἔγωγε. Πότερον οὖν ovdéy σοι τοῦ γράμματος 

x 
205 ἐμέλησεν, ἢ προσέσχες TE Kal ἐπεχείρησας σαυτὸν 
“Μὰ Δί᾽ οὐ δῆτα," ἔφη: “καὶ 
Ν on , Py » ἰδέ δ 1s Q “Ὁ ahi 
yap δὴ πάνυ τοῦτό γε ῴμην εἰδέναι: σχολῇ yap ἂν ἄλλο 
“Πότερα 5€25 
δοκεῖ γιγνώσκειν ἑαυτὸν ὅστις τοὔνομα. τὸ ἑαυτοῦ 


3 A σ΄ » 
ἐπισκοπεῖν ὅστις εἴης; 


4 ¥ Ee 9 Ν των ” 
TL ἤδειν, EL ye μηδ᾽ ἐμαυτὸν ἐγίγνωσκον. 
σοι 
4 75 a 9 Ἂν» ε Ν y > , 3 
210 μονον OLOEV, ἢ οστις, WOTTEP OL TOUS LTTTOVS ὠνούμενοι οὐ 
» ἃ x 
πρότερον οἴονται γιγνώσκειν ὃν av βούλωνται γνῶναι, 
Ν x a , ᾽ὔ 3 Ss 3 x 
πρὶν av ἐπισκέψωνται πότερον εὐπειθής ἐστιν ἢ δυσπει- 
“ὡς a \ 
Ons, Kat πότερον ἰσχυρὸς ἢ ἀσθενής, Kal πότερον ταχὺς 
Ἃ δύ Ν TAX Ν Ν Ν na 9 , 3 
ἢ βραδύς, καὶ τάλλα τὰ πρὸς τὴν τοῦ ἵππου χρείαν ἐπι- 
“ὃ ’ Ν 5 “ὃ ν » ν ε ε Ν 
“ιδτήδειά τε καὶ ἀνεπιτήδεια ὅπως ἔχει, οὕτως ὁ ἑαυτὸν 
, A 
ἐπισκεψάμενος ὁποῖός ἐστι πρὸς THY ἀνθρωπίνην χρείαν, 


¥ \ ε κα δύ ” «KA! » ὃ ay »¥ 
EYVWKE τὴν αὐτου δυναμιν; Οὐυτως ἐμοιγε δοκεῖ, edn, 


24. εἰς Δελφοὺς δέ: the δέ seems 
to oppose its sent. to the preceding: 
‘¢You say you have no other road 
to travel; have you ever gone to 
Delphi?’ Delphi was the home of 
Apollo’s most celebrated oracle, on 
the slopes of Mt. Parnassus in 
Phocis. The modern village which 
occupied the site of the ancient Delphi 
has been purchased and removed ; 
and extensive excavations have been 
made by French archaeologists. — 
ναῷ : see on [11], 8. 10.— τὸ ’ Γνῶθι 
σαυτόν" : the famous ‘Know thy- 
self.’ This celebrated saying, vari- 
ously attributed to Bias, Chilo, and 
others of the Seven Wise Men, was a 


favorite one with Socrates, as em- 
bodying the essence of his philos- 
ophy. Cf. οὐ δύναμαί πω κατὰ τὸ Δελ- 
φικὸν γράμμα (inscription) γνῶναι 
ἐμαυτόν Plato Phaedr. 229 x. Cf. also 
Cic. Tusc. Disp. i. 22. 82. ---σχολῇ 
av ἤδειν : the neg. effect of σχολῇ 
(hardly) is well shown in this apod. of 
an unfulfilled condition. Cf. iii. 14.3. 
25. ov: i.e. τὸν bv. — 
τἄλλα πρὸς τὴν χρείαν, ὅπως ἔχει: 
how he is in the other points pertain- 
ing to the use.—ottws ὁ ἑαυτὸν 
ἐπισκεψάμενος: after the long com- 
parison beginning with ὥσπερ, the 
subj. ὅστις is renewed by the article. 
— δοκεῖ : the personal construction. 


ἵππον, 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA IV. 2. 209 


«et \ io \ Ν 6 ἴω ὃ 4 5 lal ε ’ ” 
ὁ μὴ εἰδὼς τὴν ἑαυτοῦ δύναμιν ἀγνοεῖν ἑαυτόν. 
“Ἐκεῖνο δὲ οὐ φανερόν, ἔφη, “ὅτι διὰ μὲν τὸ εἰδέναι 26 
ε Ἁ wn 3 Ν 4 ¥ Ν \ Ν 
220 ἑαυτοὺς πλεῖστα ἀγαθὰ πάσχουσιν ἄνθρωποι, διὰ δὲ τὸ 
5 nw ε lal A ’ὕ ε Ν Ν 3 , e 
ἐψεῦσθαι ἑαυτῶν πλεῖστα κακά; οἱ μὲν yap εἰδότες ἕαυ- 
τοὺς τά τε ἐπιτήδεια ἑαυτοῖς ἴσασι καὶ διαγιγνώσκουσιν a 
a) a) 
τε δύνανται Kal ἃ μή: Kal ἃ μὲν ἐπίστανται πράττοντες 
4 / Ὁ ’ x > , νὰ Ν Ν 
πορίζονταί τε ὧν δέονται καὶ εὖ πράττουσιν, ὧν δὲ μὴ 
296 ἐπίστανται ἀπεχόμενοι ἀναμάρτητοι γίγνονται καὶ δια- 
φεύγουσι τὸ κακῶς πράττειν: διὰ τοῦτο δὲ καὶ τοὺς 
ϑ 3 ’ , , Ν Ἢ A ων 
ἄλλους ἀνθρώπους δυνάμενοι δοκιμάζειν καὶ διὰ τῆς τῶν 
3, ’ ’ > Ν “ῷ \ Ν Ἀ , 
ἄλλων χρείας τά τε ἀγαθὰ πορίζονται Kal τὰ κακὰ φυλάτ- 
ε \ A > ’ > \ ’ “Ὁ ε a 
TovTat. οἱ δὲ μὴ εἰδότες, ἀλλὰ διεψευσμένοι τῆς ἑαυτῶν 27 
y 5 
230 δυνάμεως, πρός TE τοὺς ἄλλους ἀνθρώπους καὶ τἄλλα 
. Ε @ 
ἀνθρώπινα πράγματα ὁμοίως διάκεινται: Kal οὔτε ὧν 
» ¥ » Ὁ ἴω 
δέονται ἴσασιν οὔτε ὅ τι πράττουσιν οὔτε οἷς χρῶνται, 
ἀλλὰ πάντων τούτων διαμαρτάνοντες τῶν τε ἀγαθῶν ἀπο- 
τυγχάνουσι καὶ τοῖς κακοῖς περιπίπτουσι. καὶ οἱ μὲν 28 
“ϑ5 εἰδότες ὅ τι ποιοῦσιν, ἐπιτυγχάνοντες ὧν πράττουσιν, 
if N Ν . Ψ 
εὐδοξοί τε καὶ τίμιοι γίγνονται: καὶ οἵ τε ὅμοιοι τούτοις 
ἡδέως χρῶνται, οἵ τε ἀποτυγχάνοντες τῶν πραγμάτων 
3 ‘a , ε \ ΦΥῊΝ \ 
ἐπιθυμοῦσι τούτους ὑπὲρ αὑτῶν βουλεύεσθαι, Kat προ- 
«ἈΚ ΄ ἘΠ᾿ ey , ἐν Ν Ν 5 ’ aA > la) 
ἵστασθαί ye αὑτῶν τούτους, Kal Tas ἐλπίδας τῶν ἀγαθῶν ᾿ 
240€v τούτοις ἔχουσι, καὶ διὰ πάντα ταῦτα πάντων μάλι- 


, 39 aA e Qa δ ὧν , Ψ A 
στα TOVUTOVS aYAaTWOLW. Ou δὲ μὴ εἰοοτές O TL TOLOVOL, 29 


26. ἄνθρωποι : without the ar- 
ticle, as often. —8a τὸ ἐψεῦσθαι 
ἑαυτῶν : for the gen. with verbs of 
failing, deceiving, etc., see G. 1099 ; 
H. 748. — διαγιγνώσκουσιν ἅ τε, Kal 
ἅ : see on iii. 1. 9. — καὶ τοὺς ἄλλους : 
sc. as well as themselves. 

27. εἰδότες : sc. ἑαυτούς. --- διεψευ- 
σμένοι : the διά denotes complete- 


ness, thoroughly deceived. — ὁμοίως 
διάκεινται : are in the same condition, 
sc. of ignorance as to other men 
and other affairs. 

28. οἵ re ὅμοιοι : .6. those who 
have similar knowledge. — καί, γέ: 
and, even. Obs. the emphatic repe- 
tition of the dem. pron. οὗτος. ---- 
ἔχουσι : ‘they rest.’’ 


210 ἘΕΒΝΟΦΩΝΤῸΣ AIIOMNHMONEYMATA A. 2. 

“Ὁ ε 4 Ν @ x 3 , 9 ’ 
κακῶς τε αἱρούμενοι καὶ οἷς ἂν ἐπιχειρήσωσιν ἀποτυγχά- 
νοντες, OV μόνον ἐν αὐτοῖς τούτοις ζημιοῦνταί τε καὶ κολά- 

3 Ν 2 ine la) Ἂν la) Ν 4 
Covrat, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἀδοξοῦσι διὰ ταῦτα καὶ καταγέλαστοι 
Ν “ 
245 γίγνονται καὶ καταφρονούμενοι καὶ ἀτιμαζόμενοι ζῶσιν. 
A \ A 
ὁρᾷς δὲ καὶ τῶν πόλεων OTL ὅσαι ἂν ἀγνοήσασαι τὴν Eav- 
τῶν δύναμιν κρείττοσι πολεμήσωσιν, at μὲν ἀνάστατοι 
γίγνονται, αἱ δ᾽ ἐξ ἐλευθέρων δοῦλαι." καὶ ὁ Εὐθύδημος, 80 
ε ἴω 5 A 
“Ὡς πάνυ μοι δοκοῦν," ἔφη,“ ὦ Σώκρατες, περὶ πολλοῦ ποι- 
250 a. > \ 2 Ἂς , 4 » θ A ε 50 de XN 
ητέον εἶναι τὸ ἑαυτὸν γιγνώσκειν, οὕτως ἴσθι: ὁπόθεν δὲ χρὴ 
¥ θ 3 A ε , A Ν » eee ’ » 
ἄρξασθαι ἐπισκοπεῖν ἑαυτόν, τοῦτο πρὸς σὲ ἀποβλέπω εἴ 
x al 
μοι ἐθελήσαις av ἐξηγήσασθαι." “ Οὐκοῦν," ἔφη ὁ Σωκρά- 31 
της, “τὰ μὲν ἀγαθὰ καὶ τὰ κακὰ ὁποῖά ἐστι, πάντως που 


γιγνώσκεις." 


29. κακῶς αἱρούμενοι : making 
unfortunate choices, in cases where 
they have to decide what is suited 
to their powers. —4GAAd kal ἀδοξοῦσι : 
but they also lose reputation. In ad- 
dition to the concrete losses sustained 
by the failure of their plans, come 
chagrin and ill repute. — τῶν πόλεων 
ὅτι : emphatic position before ὅσαι, 
to heighten the contrast of πόλεων 
with the individuals just mentioned. 
— ἐξ ἐλευθέρων : from a condition 
of freedom. See on ἐκ παίδων ii. 
¥. Ὡς 

30-39. Socrates shows Euthy- 
demus that he still lacks the most 
necessary conditions of self-knowl- 
edge. His conception of good and 
evil is far from satisfactory; and, 
while professing an ambition to share 
in the leadership of a democratic 


“Ny Δί᾽, ἔφη, “εἰ yap μηδὲ ταῦτα οἶδα, 
~ la 

255 καὶ τῶν ἀνδραπόδων φαυλότερος ἂν εἴην." 

¥ & No νον > Χ 240 

ἔφη, “ καὶ ἐμοὶ ἐξήγησαι αὐτά. 


οὔθ... δή," 
“᾿Αλλ᾽ οὐ χαλεπόν," ἔφη" 


state, he is at the same time unable to 
say what the δῆμος really is. 

30. ὡς πάνυ μοι δοκοῦν, οὕτως 
ἴσθι: ‘‘rest assured that I fully be- 
lieve,’’ lit. in the belief that this seems 
so to me, understand accordingly. 
The participle is acc. absolute. For 
this use of the circumstantial parti- 
ciple, see GMT. 917 ; H. 978. Cf. ἀλλ᾽ 
ws φανέν ye τοὔπος ὧδ᾽ ἐπίστασο Soph. 
Oed. Tyr. 848. — ὁπόθεν δέ: but as to 
the point from which. — τοῦτο : em- 
phatic position, obj. of ἐξηγήσασθαι. 
—el ἐθελήσαις av: (to see) whether 
you would be willing, an indirect 
question after ἀποβλέπω, and also a 
potential opt. with faintly conceived 
protasis. G. 1827,1605; H. 872, 1016. 

31. πού: with irony, as in iii. 3. 
2.—el μὴ οἶδα, av εἴην: for the 
‘mixed’ cond., see on εἴ ἐστι, καλῶς 


270 ἀπολείπονται." 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA IV. 2. 


211 


“cc a A ‘\ FN ‘ ε ’ Ε] ᾿ > ’ 
πρῶτον μὲν γὰρ αὐτὸ τὸ ὑγιαίνειν ἀγαθὸν εἶναι νομίζω, 
\ A , ¥ N ¥ 
τὸ δὲ νοσεῖν κακόν - ἔπειτα Kal τὰ αἴτια ἑκατέρου αὐτῶν, 


Ν \ Ν Ν ‘73 , \ ν Ν \ 
και ποτα Kat βρωτὰ και ἐπιτηδεύματα, τα μὲν Τρβρος TO 


200 ὑγιαίνειν φέροντα ἀγαθά, τὰ δὲ πρὸς τὸ νοσεῖν κακά." 


“cc > mo DO F&F ‘“ Ν Ν ε ’ \ Ν A 2 A 
’ ’ υ αν μὲν 
Οὐκοῦν, ἔφη, “καὶ τὸ ὑγιαίνειν καὶ τὸ νοσεῖν, ὅταν μὲν 82 
3 » ’ 3 \ ἡ ¥ 9 a A 
ἀγαθοῦ τινος ALTLA γιγνήταιυ, ἀγαθὰ αν ειὴ, οταν δὲ κακου, 


αν 
κακα; 


, > es SD » A al 
“Πότε δ᾽ ay,” ἔφη, “τὸ μὲν ὑγιαίνειν κακοῦ 
¥ , Ν δὲ A 3 a »? 
αἴτιον γένοιτο, TO δὲ νοσεῖν ἀγαθοῦ; 


233. Υ} 


δ ‘ 
ταν νὴ Δί, 


265 ἔφη, “στρατείας τε αἰσχρᾶς καὶ ναυτιλίας βλαβερᾶς καὶ 


» “A 4 ε Ν Ν δ... ,ὔ 
ἄλλων πολλῶν τοιούτων οἵ μὲν διὰ ῥώμην μετασχόντες 


ἀπόλωνται, οἱ δὲ δι’ ἀσθένειαν ἀπολειφθέντες σωθῶσιν." 


ε 3 


Αληθῆ λέγεις: ἀλλ᾽ ὁρᾷς, ἔφη, “ὅτι καὶ τῶν ὠφε- 


λί ε ᾿Ὶ ὃ Ν εν, , e de ὃ 3 > θέ 
μων οι μεν ta βώμην μετέχουσιν, OL Οε OL ασὕενειαν 


ποτὲ δὲ βλάπτοντα, μᾶλλον ἀγαθὰ ἢ κακά ἐστιν ;” 
\ ‘\ ’ ’ ’ “ ἧς ’ 
δὲν μὰ Δία φαίνεται κατά γε τοῦτον τὸν λόγον. 


wn > ᾽ » nw 
“Ταῦτα ovv, ἔφη, “ποτὲ μὲν ὠφελοῦντα, 


“Οὐ: 


ἀλλ᾽ ἡ 


4 4 Ss , > ΄ > , 3 
γέ τοι σοφία, ὦ Σώκρατες, ἀναμφισβητήτως ἀγαθόν ἐστιν. 
ποῖον γὰρ ἄν τις πρᾶγμα οὐ βέλτιον πράττοι σοφὸς ὧν 


2757) ἀμαθής ;" “Τί δαί; τὸν Δαίδαλον," ἔφη, “οὐκ ἀκήκοας, 


ὅτι ληφθεὶς ὑπὸ Μίνω διὰ τὴν σοφίαν ἠναγκάζετο ἐκείνῳ 


δουλεύειν καὶ τῆς τε πατρίδος ἅμα καὶ τῆς ἐλευθερίας 


3 ’ \ 3 “ 3 ’ 5 “~ en ’ 
ἐστερήθη καὶ ἐπιχειρῶν ἀποδιδράσκειν μετὰ τοῦ υἱοῦ τόν 


ἂν ἔχοι ii. 5. 4. --- αὐτὸ τὸ ὑγιαίνειν : 
health itself, contrasted with τὰ αἴτια 
the causes. —érera: without δέ, as 
in i. 4. 11. --- ἐπιτηδεύματα : occupa- 
tions. — τὰ μέν, τὰ δέ: see on ii. 
Ι. 4. 

32. ὅταν γίγνηται, ἂν εἴη : see on 
31, and cf. G. 1437; H. 918. --- βλα- 
βερᾶς : disastrous. — μετασχόντες, 
ἀπολειφθέντες : both participles, indi- 
cating respectively sharing and sep- 
aration, are const. with the preceding 


genitives. — οὐδέν : sc. μᾶλλον ἀγαθὰ 
ἢ κακά. 

33. τί Sal: how so, expresses 
ironical surprise. — Δαίδαλον : the 
famous artificer, who built the Laby- 
rinth for Minos, king of Crete. The 
story of his escape by means of wings 
fastened with wax to his shoulders, 
and of the death of his son Icarus, 
was a favorite with the ancients. Cf. 
Ovid Met. viii. 157 ff. —Mtvo: for 
the form, see on ἴλεῳ i. 1. 9. — ἐκείνῳ: 


212 EENO®QNTOS AITOMNHMONEYMATA Δ. 2. 


τε παῖδα ἀπώλεσε Kal αὐτὸς οὐκ ἠδυνήθη σωθῆναι, ἀλλ᾽ 
280 ἀπενεχθεὶς εἰς τοὺς βαρβάρους πάλιν ἐκεῖ ἐδούλευεν ; ᾿ 
“Λέγεται νὴ Δί᾽," ἔφη, “ταῦτα. “Ta δὲ Παλαμήδους οὐκ 
ἀκήκοας πάθη; τοῦτον γὰρ δὴ πάντες ὑμνοῦσιν ὡς διὰ 
σοφίαν φθονηθεὶς ὑπὸ τοῦ ᾽Οδυσσέως ἀπόλλυται." “AE 
γετὰν καὶ ταῦτα, ἔφη. “ἼΑλλους δὲ πόσους οἴει διὰ 
, 3 ΄ὕ δ ΄ , ἶ ute Soe 
285 σοφίαν ἀνασπάστους πρὸς βασιλέα γεγονέναι Kal ἐκεῖ 
δουλεύειν; “Κινδυνεύει," ἔφη, “ ὦ Σώκρατες, ἀναμφιλο- 34 
’ 3 θὰ > X "ὃ ἊΝ «ἂν “Ry , 
γώτατον ἀγαθὸν εἶναι TO εὐδαιμονεῖν. L γε μή τις 
αὐτό, ἔφη, “ ὦ Εὐθύδημε, ἐξ ἀμφιλόγων ἀγαθῶν συντιθείη." 
“Ti δ᾽ av,” ἔφη, “τῶν εὐδαιμονικῶν ἀμφίλογον eEin;” 
(ς > | be ς Shc Ν la 9 A / x 
290 “Οὐδέν, ἔφη, “εἴ ye μὴ προσθήσομεν αὐτῷ κάλλος ἢ 
3 Ν Ἃ a x ΄ Ἃ ΄ + a 4 ” 
ἰσχὺν ἢ πλοῦτον ἢ δόξαν ἢ Kai τι ἄλλο τῶν τοιούτων. 
“᾿Αλλὰ νὴ Δία προσθήσομεν, ἔφη: “πῶς γὰρ ἄν τις 
Ε 
ἄνευ τούτων εὐδαιμονοίη;" “Νὴ Δί᾽ ἔφη, “ προσθήσο- 86 
¥ 3 «& Ν Ν Ν ’, a 3 ia] 4 
μεν apa ἐξ ὧν πολλὰ καὶ χαλεπὰ συμβαΐίνει τοῖς ἀνθρώ- 
Ν \ Ν ‘\ Ν 4 ε Ν A ιν “a 
295 ποις" πολλοὶ μὲν yap διὰ TO κάλλος ὑπὸ τῶν ἐπὶ τοῖς 
/ 2 , ΄, ὃ 9 ’ λλ Ν δὲ δι Ν 
ἰ ωὡραίοις παρακεκινηκότων διαφθείρονται, πολλοι ὃὲ διὰ 
τὴν ἰσχὺν μείζοσιν ἔργοις ἐπιχειροῦντες οὐ μικροῖς κακοῖς 
’ὔ Ν Ν Ν Ν la 4 ’ 
περιπίπτουσι, πολλοὶ δὲ διὰ τὸν πλοῦτον διαθρυπτόμενοί 
τε καὶ ἐπιβουλευόμενοι ἀπόλλυνται, πολλοὶ δὲ διὰ δό- 
800 ἕαν καὶ πολιτικὴν δύναμιν μεγάλα κακὰ πεπόνθασιν." 
i.e. Minos. See on i. 2. 8. --- Παλα- 34. κινδυνεύει : is likely. Cf. ii. 
μήδους : one of the wisest of the 3. 17; iii. 13. 3. Euthydemus begins 
Greeks before Troy. The various abruptly, without acknowledging the 
legends about him (many of them justice of what has just been said. — 
later than Xenophon’s time) gen- εἴ ye μή τις συντιθείη : unless, indeed, 


erally agree in making him the object we should compose it. — τῶν εὐδαιμο- 
of Odysseus’s envy and malice. Cf. νικῶν : the elements of happiness. 


Ovid Met. viii. 56-59. —amédAvrar : 35. προσθήσομεν : 86. ταῦτα. --- 
pres. tense, citing an event well σπαρακεκινηκότων : ‘beside them- 
known in song and story. —dva- _ selves.’?’ — od μικροῖς : ‘litotes.? — 


σπάστους γεγονέναι : cf. ἀνάστατοι πεπόνθασιν : for the rare ‘gnomic’ 
γίγνονται 29.---βασιλέα: 566 0} 11]. 5.26,  pf., see G. 1295; Η. 824 Ὁ. 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA IV. 2. 213 


“᾿Αλλὰ pry,” ἔφη, “εἴ ye μηδὲ τὸ εὐδαιμονεῖν ἐπαινῶν 36 


> AG λέ ε λ A δὲ ν Ν ἈΝ θ Ν A 
ὀρθῶς λέγω, ὁμολογῶ μηδὲ ὅ τι πρὸς τοὺς θεοὺς εὔχεσθαι 
χρὴ εἰδέναι. “᾿Αλλὰ ταῦτα μέν, ἔφη ὁ Σωκράτης, 
᾿ς “ἴσως διὰ τὸ σφόδρα πιστεύειν εἰδέναι οὐδ᾽ ἔσκεψαι: 

ον Ἂς , , , , 
305 ἐπεὶ δὲ πόλεως δημοκρατουμένης παρασκευάζῃ προεστά- 
ναι, δῆλον ὅτι δημοκρατίαν γε οἶσθα τί ἐστι." 


δήπου," ἔφη. 


«Πάντως 


εἰδέναι μὴ εἰδότα δῆμον ;” 


\ “9 » 
“Μὰ Av, οὐκ ἔμοιγε." “Καὶ 


ἴω ει Ὁ 3 ld ” > 
δῆμον ap οἶσθα τί ἐστιν; “Οἶμαι eywye.” “Kal τί 


810 νομίζεις δῆμον εἶναι; “Τοὺς πένητας τῶν πολιτῶν 


ἔγωγε." “Καὶ τοὺς πένητας ἄρα οἶσθα; “Πῶς γὰρ 
ov;” “Ap οὖν καὶ τοὺς πλουσίους οἶσθα;" “Οὐδέν γε 


Φ- “Δ Ν Ν , ” (a4 ys δὲ Zz Ἁ 
NTTOV ἢ καὶ τοὺς πένητας. Ποίους ὃε πένητας Kal 


, ΄ nae. ce lag ‘ , > . ὁ x 
ποίους πλουσίους καλεῖς: Τοὺς μέν, οἶμαι, μὴ ἱκανὰ 
» > aA A “ ’ὕ Ἁ \ ’ “ 
815 ἔχοντας εἰς ἃ δεῖ τελεῖν πένητας, τοὺς δὲ πλείω τῶν 
ἱκανῶν πλουσίους." 

, > ΑΔ » > ’ 5 “A A 5 A Ν 

πάνυ ὀλίγα ἔχουσιν οὐ μόνον ἀρκεῖ ταῦτα, ἀλλὰ καὶ περι- 

wn > > 5 “ ᾿ς ef \ 4 Ν 3 ε , 
ποιοῦνται ἀπ᾽ αὐτῶν, ἐνίοις δὲ πάνυ πολλὰ οὐχ ἱκανά 

Ἁ Ν 399 “ἅμ. 

ἐστι; “Καὶ νὴ At,” ἔφη ὁ Εὐθύδημος, “ὀρθῶς γάρ pe 

9 , 5 N \ , \ ἃ 9 
820 ἀναμιμνήσκεις, οἶδα γὰρ καὶ τυράννους τινὰς οἱ δι 

ν A 
ἔνδειαν ὥσπερ οἱ ἀπορώτατοι ἀναγκάζονται ἀδικεῖν." 


| 


\ 


\ 


“Δοκεῖ οὖν σοι δυνατὸν εἶναι δημοκρατίαν 37 


/ > 4 
“Καταμεμάθηκας οὖν ὅτι ἐνίοις μὲν 38 


la Ds of , yx la hid » ν 
“Οὐκοῦν, ἔφη ὁ Σωκράτης, “εἴ γε ταῦτα οὑτως ἔχει, τοὺς 39 


\ , > Ἂν “ Ls ‘ \ > ᾽’ὔ 
μὲν τυράννους εἰς τὸν δῆμον θήσομεν, τοὺς δὲ ὀλίγα 


96. πρὸς τοὺς θεούς : instead of 
the simple dative. 
τὸν ἥλιον Hat. vii. 54. — δημοκρατίαν : 
‘prolepsis.’ So δῆμον in line 309. 
See on i. 2. 13. 

37. δυνατόν : possible. — μὴ εἰ- 
δότα : without knowing. See on 
ἁπτόμενον i. 3. 8. —ets ἃ Set τελεῖν : fo 
pay for the necessaries of life. 

38. ταῦτα : ‘that little.’? — καὶ 


Cf. εὔχετο πρὸς 


νὴ Δία, οἶδα γὰρ καί: aye, by Zeus; 
why, I also know ο΄ ---- ἀναγκάζονται 
ἀδικεῖν : cf. κακουργεῖν ἰῃ 14. For the 
thought, cf. τῷ οὖν τυράννῳ τὰ πολλα- 
πλάσια ἧττον ἱκανά ἐστιν εἰς τὰ ἀναγ- 
kata δαπανήματα ἢ τῷ ἰδιώτῃ Hiero 
iv. 9. 

39. τοὺς μὲν τυράννους : as if 
Euthydemus had spoken, not of 
some princes, but of the princes as a 


214 


ἘΕΝΟΦΩΝΤΟΣ ATLOMNHMONEYMATA A. 2. 


΄ 28 3 . 4 3 \ , ” 
KEKTYLEVOUS, EAV OLKOVOLLKOL WOLV, εἰς TOUS πλουσίους. 


8395 καὶ ὁ Εὐθύδημος ἔφη - “᾿Αναγκάζει με καὶ ταῦτα ὅμολο- 


γεῖν δῆλον ὅτι ἡ ἐμὴ φαυλότης - καὶ φροντίζω μὴ κράτι- 


ἫΝ A ὃ , ‘ ε XO ὑδὲ ἰδέ ” 
OTOV Hf] μοι σιγαν": κινουνξυω γὰρ ATAWS OVOEV ELOEVAL. 


Ν ’ 3 4 » 9 ΜᾺ Ν la ε ‘a! 
καὶ πάνυ ἀθύμως ἔχων ἀπῆλθε καὶ καταφρονήσας ἑαυτοῦ 


Ν 4 PS Pe 9 , 5 
καὶ νομίσας τῷ ὄντι ἀνδράποδον εἶναι. 


πολλοὶ μὲν οὖν 40 


A ν : , ἥ ὡςπ ’ > ’ 9 ™ 
330 TWY OUTW διατεθέντων το Σωκράτους OUKETL αὐτῷ προσ- 


ἥεσαν, ovs καὶ βλακοτέρους ἐνόμιζεν: ὁ δὲ Εὐθύδημος 
ε ’, 9 x » > + > ’ ’ > Ἀ 
ὑπέλαβεν οὐκ dv ἄλλως ἀνὴρ ἀξιόλογος γενέσθαι, εἰ μὴ 


ν ’ ’ὔ Ψ. ἣ; > 3 , » 
ὅτι μάλιστα Σωκράτει συνείη: καὶ οὐκ ἀπελείπετο ETL 


9 A > 4 > A » » Ν Ν 5 lal e 
GQUTOV, εἰ μὴ TL ἀναγκαιον ELN* EVLA δὲ καὶ ἐμιμειτο ὧν 


3 “ 3 , ε la ε » ,. Ἃ ν » 
335 EKELVOS ἐπετήδευεν" O δέ, ως E€YV@ αντον OUTWS €XOVTA, 


y A , ε 4 Ν Ν , 
NKLOTA μεν διετάραττεν, ἁπλούστατα δὲ καὶ σαφέστατα 


3 “ 9 5 ’ > 7 ~ Ν 3 , ’ 
ἐξηγεῖτο Qa TE ἐνόμιζεν εἰδέναι δεῖν και ἐπιτηδεύειν κρα: 


τιστα εἰναι. 


class. —8fAov ὅτι: evidently. See 
on iii. 7. 1. — φαυλότης : lit. worth- 
lessness, here ‘lack of insight.’? — 
φροντίζω ph ἦ : for obj. clauses 
with verbs of fearing, see oni. 2. 18. 
— κινδυνεύω yap ἁπλῶς οὐδὲν εἰδέναι : 
for I seem to know absolutely noth- 
ing. — πάνυ ἀθύμως ἔχων: in a 
very despondent frame of mind. — 
τῷ ὄντι ἀνδράποδον : cf. ἀνδραπο- 
δώδεις 22, and ὅπως μὴ ἀνδράποδα 
ὦμεν 28. 

40. τῶν οὕτω διατεθέντων : of those 
thus treated. —ért μάλιστα : quam 
frequentissime. — διετάραττεν : 
86. ἐλέγχων, as, 6.0.7 in 20, 33, 39. — 
ἁπλούστατα : quite simply, without 
irony. —d τε ἐνόμιζεν: we should 
expect the τέ after eldévar. Its 
position is due to the condensed 
form of the sent., which, in full, 
would read ἐξηγεῖτο & τε ἐνόμιζεν 


εἰδέναι δεῖν καὶ ἃ ἐνόμιζεν ἐπιτηδεύειν 
κράτιστα εἶναι. 

3. Socrates impresses on his fol- 
lowers the necessity of σωφροσύνη in 
our relations with the gods as well as 
with men. He convinces Euthyde- 
mus that the gods, who have given 
to mortals all that they have, exer- 
cise over them a constant providential 
care. All other creatures are subject 
to man, who enjoys the immense 
advantages of reason and speech. 
The gods are visible, not in their per- 
sons but in their works. Moreover, 
man can ascertain from the gods what 
is best for him, if he will only rever- 
ence, honor, and trust them. See 
Introd. § 20. 

This chapter forms the sequel to 
i. 4, and serves to refute a charge 
against Socrates which was only 
touched in i. 2. 17 (οὐκ ἀντιλέγω). 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA IV. 3. 215 


Τὸ μὲν οὖν λεκτικοὺς Kal πρακτικοὺς [καὶ μηχανι- 3 
‘ ’ ‘\ ’ 3 » > Ν ὃ 
Kovs| γίγνεσθαι τοὺς συνόντας οὐκ ἔσπευδεν, ἀλλὰ πρό- 

Ψ A A 

Fepov τούτων WETO χρῆναι σωφροσύνην αὐτοῖς ἐγγενέσθαι. 
τοὺς γὰρ ἄνευ τοῦ σωφρονεῖν ταῦτα δυναμένους ἀδικω- 
᾿δτέρους τε καὶ δυνατωτέρους κακουργεῖν ἐνόμιζεν εἶναι. 
πρῶτον μὲν δὴ περὶ θεοὺς ἐπειρᾶτο σώφρονας ποιεῖν 


A 
TOUS συνόντας. 


ὁμιλοῦντι παραγενόμενοι διηγοῦντο: ἐγὼ 
Εὐθύδημον τοιάδε διελέγετο, παρεγενόμην. 


10 ἔφη, “ 


ἄλλοι μὲν οὖν αὐτῷ πρὸς ἄλλους οὕτως 


δέ ν Ν 
€, OTE πρὸς 
“Εἰπέ pou,” 


ὦ Ἐῤθύδημε, ἤδη ποτέ σοι ἐπῆλθεν ἐνθυμηθῆναι 


ε 9 ΄“ ε Ὗ - ε ¥ ’ ’ὔ 
ὡς ἐπιμελῶς οἱ θεοὶ ὧν οἱ ἄνθρωποι δέονται κατεσκευά- 


κασι;" 
οἶσθά y’,” ἔφη, 


θεοὶ παρέχουσι; 


νῷ τ, ες yoy» » 
καὶ ὅς, “Μὰ τὸν At’,” ἔφη, “οὐκ ἔμοιγε." 


“ANN 


«Ὁ “A A Ν ὃ ’ θ ek ΄- δὲ ε 
OTL πρῶτον μὲν φωτὸς δεόμεθα, ὁ ἡμῖν οἵ 
“Ny Δί; ἔφη, “ 


ὅ γ᾽ εἰ μὴ εἴχομεν, 


9 A A xa 5 4 4, A e , 
Ἰδόμοιοι τοῖς τυφλοῖς av ἦμεν ἕνεκά γε τῶν ἡμετέρων 


ὀφθαλμῶν." 


ε lal 4 4 4 > , ” 
ἡμῖν νύκτα παρέχουσι κάλλιστον ἀναπαυτήριον. 


᾽ν ἔφη, 


1. λεκτικούς, πρακτικούς, μηχα- 
νικούς : the development of these 
three qualities will be discussed in 
chaps. 6, 5, and 7 respectively. — 
πρότερον, ἐγγενέσθαι : see on i. 2. 17. 
—cwdhpoctvyy: lit. soundness of soul ; 
in this chapter, a right attitude of 
mind. See Introd. § 20. — ratra 
δυναμένους : sc. λέγειν καὶ πράττειν, 
briefly indicated in τὰ πολιτικά in i. 
2.17.— ἀδικωτέρους, δυνατωτέρους: sc. 
than they were before acquiring the 
above-mentioned qualities (ταῦτα). --- 
πρῶτον, περὶ θεοὺς : cf. ‘the fear of 
the Lord is the beginning of wisdom.’ 

2. οὕτως ὁμιλοῦντι : when convers- 
ing in this manner, i.e. preaching 


“ Ν a , » ” 
καὶ τοῦτο χάριτος ἄξιον. 


“᾿Αλλὰ μὴν καὶ ἀναπαύσεώς γε δεομένοις 


, 
“Tlavu 
nr ’ 
“Οὐκοῦν καί, 


σωφροσύνη. ---ἐγὼ δέ: Xenophon gives 
to this conversation the authority of 
an earwitness. 

3. σοὶ ἐπῆλθεν: tibi in mentem 
venit. Cf. iv. 2. 4. --- ὡς : how. — 
ov: i.e. ταῦτα, ov. — καὶ ds: see on i. 
4. 8. ---ὄ γ᾽ εἰ μὴ εἴχομεν : the rel. 8 
repeats with force the rel. of the pre- 
vious sentence. — ἕνεκά ye τῶν ἡμετέ- 
pov ὀφθαλμῶν : so far as it depends on 
our eyes, i.e. in spite of having eyes. 
Cf. ἀλλ᾽ ἐξέσται ἡμῖν, ἐκείνου ἕνεκα, 
πρὸς τὸ ἡμέτερον συμφέρον πάντα τίθε- 
σθαι but it will be in our power, for 
anything that he can do, to arrange 
everything to our own advantage Cyr. 
iii. 2. 30. 


216 


EENO®OQNTOS AMOMNHMONEYMATA A. 3. 


9 \ oe \ 9 \ x , 9 A eee 
ἐπειδὴ ὁ μὲν ἥλιος φωτεινὸς ὧν τάς TE WPAS τῆς ἡμέρας 

δ. ἃ Ἁ ἂν » 7 ε δὲ Ν ὃ Ν Ν Ἀ 
20 ἡμῖν καὶ τἄλλα πάντα σαφηνίζει, ἡ δὲ νὺξ διὰ τὸ σκοτεινὴ 


> 9 , 9 ,ὕ Ξ 9 “ . ee eee ἃ 
εἶναι ἀσαφεστέρα ἐστίν, ἀστρα ἐν TH νυκτὶ ἀνέφηναν, ἃ 


em A Ν Ν ν 3 ld Ν ὃ Ν A X 
ἡμῖν τῆς νυκτὸς τὰς Woas ἐμφανίζει, καὶ διὰ τοῦτο πολλὰ 


ὧν δεόμεθα πράττομεν ;” “Ἔστι ταῦτα," ἔφη. “᾿Αλλὰ μὴν 


9 Ψ, > , “A Ν 3 Ν ‘ “ Ν Ν 
ἢ γε σελήνη οὐ μόνον τῆς νυκτὸς ἀλλὰ καὶ τοῦ μηνὸς τὰ 


25 μέρη φανερὰ ἡμῖν ποιεῖ." “Πάνυ μὲν οὖν, ἔφη. 


“TS 8, 


9 ‘ “ ’, 4 ce ΠΝ 9 a a 3 ὃ ὃ , 
ἐπεὶ τροφῆς δεόμεθα, ταύτην μιν ἐκ TNS γὴς AVAOLOOVAL 


ν A , a Cm 
Kal Wpas ἁρμοττούσας πρὸς τοῦτο παρέχειν, al ἡμῖν οὐ 


μόνον ὧν δεόμεθα πολλὰ καὶ παντοῖα παρασκευάζουσιν, 


ἀλλὰ καὶ οἷς εὐφραινόμεθα;" 


80 φιλάνθρωπα." 


’ὔ’ 33. ἃν Ἁ 
“Πάνυ, ἔφη, “καὶ ταῦτα 


“TS δὲ καὶ ὕδωρ ἡμῖν παρέχειν οὔτ 
ο α P Pp ρεχ ω 


ἀπ Ἂν 9 N , Ν 4 ἴω ἴω 
πολλοῦ ἄξιον ὥστε καὶ συμφύειν τε καὶ συναύξειν τῇ γῇ 


ἈΝ A "4 , Ἁ ’ ε “Ὁ ’ \ a 
Kal Tals ὡραις πάντα TA χρήσιμα ἡμῖν, συντρέφειν δὲ Kal 


4. ἐπειδή : inasmuch as.— 6 μὲν 
ἥλιος, ἣ δὲ νύξ : while the sun, yet the 
night. Both clauses are grammatic- 
ally equivalent parts of the general 
reason introduced by ἐπειδή, but the 
weight of the reason lies in ἡ δὲ νὺξ 
κτλ. --- τάς τε wpas τῆς ἡμέρας : for 
the divisions of the day, see oni. 1. 
10. — διὰ τὸ σκοτεινὴ εἶναι : change 
in form of expression from φωτεινὸς 
wv above. For the case of σκοτεινή, 
see on αὐτός ii. 3. 11. — ἀνέφηναν : 
caused to shine. —tfjs νυκτὸς τὰς 
ὥρας : the Greeks divided the night 
into three watches (φυλακαί), the 
Romans into four (vigiliae).— 
διὰ τοῦτο: by means of this, refers 
to ἄστρα. . . dvépnvav. — πολλὰ 
πράττομεν : sc. which we could not 
do but for the help of moonlight and 
starlight. — rod μηνὸς τὰ μέρη : the 
month had three divisions, the first 
and last of which were called ἱσταμέ- 


νου and φθίνοντος (μηνός), the days of 
the middle division being reckoned 
as πρώτη ἐπὶ δέκα οἷς. The average 
length of a lunar month is a little 
over twenty-nine and a half days; 
the Greeks took it at exactly twenty- 
nine and a half days, and avoided 
the fraction by making one month 
of twenty-nine days and the next 
of thirty. See Gow, Companion to 
School Classics, p. 79. 

5. τὸ δ᾽ ἀναδιδόναι : sc. as subj. 
τοὺς θεούς. The unexpressed question 
may be translated ‘‘ what say you 
of that?” Cf. i. 4. 7.— ὥρας: 
seasons, of the year. 

6. τὸ ὕδωρ: obj. of παρέχειν. --- 
συμφύειν κτλ. : unites with the earth 
and the seasons in causing to spring 
up and grow. καί before συμφύειν 
corresponds to καί before μειγνύμενον, 
and καί before ἐπειδή connects 
ἀφθονέστατον παρέχειν with καὶ ὕδωρ 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA IV. 3. 


217 


ry " A A an κι 
αὐτοὺς ἡμᾶς, καὶ μειγνύμενον πᾶσι τοῖς τρέφουσιν ἡμᾶς 
’ Ν al 
εὐκατεργαστότερά TE Kal ὠφελιμώτερα καὶ ἡδίω ποιεῖν 
Ν 
86 αὐτά, καὶ ἐπειδὴ πλείστου δεόμεθα τούτου, ἀφθονέστατον 


la ’ 
αὐτὸ παρέχειν Hey ;’ 


\ A > ¥ 
“Kat τοῦτο," ἔφη, “προνοητικόν.᾽" 


“Τὸ δὲ καὶ τὸ πῦρ πορίσαι ἡμῖν, ἐπίκουρον μὲν ψύχους, 


ἐπίκουρον δὲ σκότους, συνεργὸν δὲ πρὸς πᾶσαν τέχνην 


\ , 9 9 , 9 ¥ 7 
καὶ πάντα ὅσα ὠφελείας ἕνεκα ἄνθρωποι κατασκευάζον- 


40ται; ὡς γὰρ συνελόντι εἰπεῖν, οὐδὲν ἀξιόλογον ἄνευ πυρὸς 


»” a Ν Ν , , ΄, ” 
ἄνθρωποι τῶν πρὸς τὸν βίον χρησίμων κατασκευάζονται. 


“ct 4 οι ςς ‘\ la ͵ὔ 3) 
Ὑπερβάλλει,᾽ ἔφη, “καὶ τοῦτο φιλανθρωπίᾳ. 


“Τὸ δὲ 


Ν “aN 3 ὃ Ν 3 A , ΄ Ν Ν 
TOV 1) LOV, ETELOQAV EV XELPOVE TPATYTAL, προσιέναι Τα μεν 


ἀδρύνοντα, τὰ δὲ ξηραίνοντα, ὧν καιρὸς διελήλυθεν, καὶ 


45TavTa διαπραξάμενον μηκέτι ἐγγυτέρω προσιέναι, ἀλλ᾽ 


5» , ’ , ε ΄“ ΄Ὺ A 
ἀποτρέπεσθαι φυλαττόμενον μή τι ἡμᾶς μᾶλλον τοῦ 


δέοντος θερμαίνων βλάψῃ, καὶ ὅταν αὖ πάλιν ἀπιὼν 


γένηται ἔνθα καὶ ἡμῖν δῆλόν ἐστιν ὅτι εἰ προσωτέρω 


ΞΨ 9 , ind va , , > 
ἄπεισιν, ἀποπαγησόμεθα ὑπὸ Tov ψύχους, πάλιν αὖ 


᾽ὔ \ A A 9 wn ἴω 9 nw 
δοτρέπεσθαι καὶ προσχωρεῖν, καὶ ἐνταῦθα τοῦ οὐρανοῦ 


παρέχειν at the beginning of the 
sentence.— πᾶσι τοῖς τρέφουσιν: 
neuter, — εὐκατεργαστότερα: easier 
of digestion. —airad: i.e. πάντα τὰ 
τρέφοντα. --- ἀφθονέστατον : pred., in 
the greatest profusion. 

7. ἐπίκουρον ψύχους : a protection 
against cold. Cf. ἐπικούρημα τῆς 
χιόνος An. iv. 5. 13. — ὡς συνελόντι 
εἰπεῖν: see on iii. 8 10. --- τῶν 
χρησίμων : depends on 
ὑπερβάλλει : intr., is preéminent. — 
φιλανθρωπίᾳ : dat. of respect. 

8. ἐπειδὰν ἐν χειμῶνι τράπηται : 
sc. at the winter solstice, when the 
sun begins to move northward, or 
‘toward us.’ — ἁδρύνοντα : ripening. 


οὐδέν. ---- 


— ὧν καιρὸς διελήλυθεν : whose time 
of πιαξιγὶψ has passed ; e.g., hay or 
grain left standing in the fields. — 
ἀποτρέπεσθαι : sc. at the summer 
solstice. —-yévnrar ἔνθα : reaches that 
point, where. —el ἄπεισιν : most 
vivid form of protasis. G. 1405; H. 
899. This has the ‘minatory’ force 
suggested by Gildersleeve; see Trans. 
Am. Philol. Assn., vii. p. 18. For 
the pres. of εἶμι in fut. sense, see 
G. 1257; H. 828 a. — ἀποπαγησό- 
μεθα : for the second fut. pass., see G. 
715; H. 474.— - καὶ ἐνταῦθα : re- 
fers to the position of the sun in 
both winter and summer. Xeno- 
phon’s knowledge of astronomy was, 


218 


EENO®ONTOS AILTOMNHMONEYMATA A. 3. 


ἀναστρέφεσθαι ἔνθα ὧν μάλιστ᾽ ἂν ἡμᾶς wpedoin;” “Νὴ 


433 


A 2 faa \ lal , » > , 
τὸν Ai’,” ἔφη, “καὶ ταῦτα παντάπασιν ἔοικεν ἀνθρώπων 


ν ld 3) «ς \ δ᾽ 3 δὴ Ν “ἅμ , Γ 
ενεκα γιγνομενοις. To 0, ἐπειδὴ καὶ τοῦτο φανερόν, οτι 


9 x ε ’ » Ν A » Ν ‘al δ ἘΝ 
οὐκ ἀν UTEVEYKALMEV OUTE TO καυμα OUTE τὸ ψύυχος, εἰ ἐξα- 


ν 4 ν 
δὅ πίνης γίγνοιτο, οὕτω μὲν κατὰ μικρὸν προσιέναι τὸν ἥλιον, 


ν A \ \ > ’ ν , ε “~ > e , 
OUT@ δὲ κατα μικρον QATLEVAL, WOTE λανθάνειν ἡμᾶς εἰς EKa- 
\. 2 / A , ” «ς9 ἃ | de NOL ε 

TEPA TA ἰσχυρότατα κασισταμένους ; Kyo μέν," ἔφη ὁ 
9 , ἐξ ~ na lal 3 » ξ΄ 35 “Ὁ lal 
Εὐθύδημος, “ἤδη τοῦτο σκοπῶ, εἰ apa Ti ἐστι τοῖς θεοῖς 


» a 3 , 4 3 “A \ ’ὔ 3 ’ 
ἔργον ἢ ἀνθρώπους θεραπεύειν, ἐκεῖνο δὲ μόνον ἐμποδίζει 


ν Ν Φ a , , ” 
60 pe, OTL καὶ τἄλλα Cwa τούτων μετέχει. 


τοῦτ᾽, ἔφη ὁ Σωκράτης, “φανερόν, ὅτι καὶ ταῦτα ἀνθρώ- 


4 ’ 4 Ν 5 , ’ὕ A » 
πων ἕνεκα γίγνεταί τε καὶ ἀνατρέφεται; τί γὰρ ἀλλο 


a ὅτς τὴς A. ee \ A V9 \ » \ 
ζῷον αὐγὼν TE Και OLWVY Και βοῶν καὶ ππὴῶν KAL OV@V KAL 


val » / ἴω 3 ἌΝ , 4 ¥ 
τῶν ἄλλων ζῴων τοσαῦτα ἀγαθὰ ἀπολαύει ὅσα ἄνθρωποι; 


65 ἐμοὶ μὲν γὰρ δοκεῖ, πλείω ἢ τῶν φυτῶν: τρέφονται γοῦν 


Ν ζ Oe @ ". ἃς 4 A 3 Oo 7 2 
και ΧρΉματι ονΡΤαι OVOEV YTTOV QAiTO Τούτων Y) QT E€KELYMYV 


Ἀ \ 4 > ? A A 3 ἴω lal , 
πολὺ δὲ γένος ἀνθρώπων τοῖς μὲν ἐκ τῆς γῆς φυομένοις 
> \ > vn 3 ‘\ Ν , ’ὔ’ Ν 
εἰς τροφὴν οὐ χρῆται, ἀπὸ δὲ βοσκημάτων γάλακτι καὶ 


of course, that of his time; but his 
description is fairly correct. Even 
modern astronomers conform to pop- 
ular usage in speaking of the sun’s 
‘rising and setting,’ ‘approaching’ 
and ‘receding from’ the earth. — 
ἀναστρέφεσθαι: versari, stays, in 
its apparent daily circuit round the 
earth. —€oue γιγνομένοις : ‘ looks 
like something taking place.’’ 

9. τὸ δέ: const. with προσιέναι 
τὸν ἥλιον. --- εἰ γίγνοιτο : if it should 
come upon Us. —otTw κατὰ μικρόν : 
thus, gradually. For the thought, cf. 
διδάσκει δὲ καὶ ὁ θεός, ἀπάγων ἡμᾶς κατὰ 
μικρὸν ἐκ τοῦ χειμῶνος εἰς τὸ ἀνέχεσθαι 
ἰσχυρὰ θάλπη (intense heat) ἔκ τε τοῦ 


θάλπους εἰς τὸν ἰσχυρὸν χειμῶνα Cyr. 
vi. 2. 29. --- λανθάνειν : 1.6. imper- 
ceptibly. For λανθάνω with supple- 
mentary participle, see on i. 2. 34. 
—el ἄρα : see on ii. 5. 2. --- τί ἐστι 
τοῖς θεοῖς ἔργον : ““ the gods have any 
(other) occupation.’’ — θεραπεύειν : 
to care for, as in i. 4. 10. — τούτων : 
these benefits. 

10. ἀγαθά : advantages. — Soxet: 
80. ἀπολαύειν τοὺς ἀνθρώπους, t.e. that 
men derive more advantage from 
animals than from plants. —rotrev: 
i.e. animals. The dem. οὗτος is used 
to denote the more important of two 
objects, as that which is nearer to 
the speaker’s thought. See on i. 3. 


9 


“Od yap Kat10 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA IV. 8. 


219 


: A “NN 4 ’ aA , \ ΄ 
τυρῷ καὶ κρέασι τρεφόμενοι ζῶσι: πάντες δὲ τιθασεύον- 
ἴοτες καὶ δαμάζοντες τὰ χρήσιμα τῶν ζῴων εἴς τε πόλεμον 


καὶ εἷς ἄλλα πολλὰ συνεργοῖς χρῶνται." 


“Ὁμογνωμονῶ 


Ν a 399 ¥ “cf A Ν 3 “ Ν. A ae 
σοι καὶ TouT, ἔφη. “ὁρῶ yap αὐτῶν καὶ τὰ πολὺ ἰσχυ- 


“ ν A 
ρότερα ἡμῶν οὕτως ὑποχείρια γιγνόμενα τοῖς ἀνθρώποις 


9 ΜᾺ 9 A 9 x 4 ” 
ὥστε χρῆσθαι αὐτοῖς 6 τι dv βούλωνται. 


“Τὸ δ᾽, ἐπειδὴ 11 


75 πολλὰ μὲν καλὰ καὶ ὠφέλιμα, διαφέροντα δὲ ἀλλήλων 


3 , A A > , 9 , ε , 
ἐστί, προσθεῖναι τοῖς ἀνθρώποις αἰσθήσεις ἁρμοττούσας 


Ν ν δι᾽ “' 3 λ 4 , “A 3 θῶ \ 
προς εκαστα OL WY ATO QUO[LEV TAVTWMV Τῶν aya ων" TO 


de Ν Ν ἀπ τὰν 3 a) Ὁ WS Φν ον 3 , 
€ Kal λογισμὸν ἡμῖν ἐμφῦσαι, ᾧ περὶ ὧν αἰσθανόμεθα 


᾿ ἢ 
λογιζόμενοί τε καὶ μνημονεύοντες καταμανθάνομεν ὅπῃ 


80 ἕκαστα συμφέρει, καὶ πολλὰ μηχανώμεθα Sv ὧν τῶν τε 


ἀγαθῶν ἀπολαύομεν καὶ τὰ κακὰ ἀλεξόμεθα: τὸ δὲ καὶ 12 


ε , ἴω] > @ , “ 3 “ / - 
EPHLYVELAV δοῦναι, δι HS πάντων Τῶν ἀγαθῶν μεταδίδομέν 


3 , ’ Ἁ ~ Ἁ , 
τε ἀλλήλοις διδάσκοντες Kal κοινωνοῦμεν καὶ νόμους 


τιθέμεθα καὶ πολιτευόμεθα;" 


“ , 3. 4 = 
Παντάπασιν ἐοίκασιν, ὦ 


8ὅ Σώκρατες, οἵ θεοὶ πολλὴν τῶν ἀνθρώπων ἐπιμέλειαν 


A ” 
ποιεισ θ αι. 


“Τὸ δὲ καί, ἡ ἀδυνατοῦμεν τὰ συμφέροντα 


: A θ @ A A Xx , δον ΟΝ eon 
T POVOELT Ql UTEP τῶν μέλλοντων, ΤαὐυτΊ αυτους μιν 


συνεργεῖν, διὰ μαντικῆς τοῖς πυνθανομένοις φράζοντας τὰ 
ἀποβησόμενα καὶ διδάσκοντας ἣ ἂν ἄριστα γίγνοιντο;" 


13. — γένος, ζῶσι: for the pl. verb 
with sing. collective subj., see on 
ws παύσαντες ii. 2. 3. — συνεργοῖς 
XpGvra.(sc.avrots): use them ashelpers. 
For the pred. dat., see H. 777 a. — 
ὅ τι: in whatever way, sc. χρῆσθαι. 
See on αὐτῇ χρῆσθαί τι Ϊ. 4. 6. 

11, προσθεῖναι : sc. as subj. τοὺς 
θεούς. --- πολαύομεν : the subj. ἡμεῖς is 
readily supplied from ἀνθρώποις. --- 
λογισμόν : reason. —mwoAAG: cognate 
accusative. — ἀλεξόμεθα : avert. On 
this and the next section, cf. i. 4. 5-14. 


12. ἑρμηνείαν : faculty of speech. 
Hermes was messenger and inter- 
preter for the gods; hence épunveds 
interpreter. — διδάσκοντες : by im- 
parting. —mpovoeto bar ὑπέρ : instead 
Of προνοεῖσθαι περί, the verb being 
one of caring for. —q: in what way. 
-- γίγνοιντο : pl. with neut. subj., 
either, as Kiihner suggests, because 
τὰ ἀποβησόμενα is Somewhat remote, 
or because Xenophon wished to em- 
phasize the idea of separate actions. 
Cf. ἐνταῦθα ἦσαν τὰ Βελέσυος βασίλεια 


220. 


ΞΕΝΟΦΩ͂ΝΤΟΣ AILOMNHMONEYMATA A. 8. 


90 “ Σοὶ δ᾽, ἔφη, “ὦ Σώκρατες, ἐοίκασιν ἔτι φιλικώτερον ἢ 


aA Y A ¥ \ 3 , ΛΊΑΝ an 
τοῖς ἄλλοις χρῆσθαι, εἴ ye μηδὲ ἐπερωτώμενοι ὑπὸ σοῦ 


΄ ΄, ν \ A \ a ae) “wc? , 
προσημαινουσι σοι A TE χρὴ ποιειν και A μη. Οτι δέ:8 


γε ἀληθὴ λέγω, καὶ σὺ γνώσῃ, ἂν μὴ ἀναμένῃς ἕως av 


τὰς μορφὰς τῶν θεῶν ἴδῃς, ἀλλ᾽ ἐξαρκῇ σοι τὰ ἔργα 


5 A e a , \ “A ‘ ᾽ὔ 
95 αὕτων ορωντι σέβεσθαι καὶ τιμᾶν τοὺς θεούς. 


3 , X 
EVVOEL δὲ 


ψ \ ἈΝ ε \ Y ε ΄ y \ 
OTL Και AVUTOL OL θεοὶ OUTWS ὑποδεικνύουσιν: Ol TE Yop 


ἄλλοι ἡμῖν τἀγαθὰ διδόντες οὐδὲν τούτων εἰς τοὐμφανὲς 


27 ὃ , Ae \ Ψ , , Ν 
LOVTES ιδόασι, καὶ Ο TOV ολον κοσμον συντάττων TE και 


᾽ > “Ὁ ᾽ὔ λὰ εν 5 θά 3 Ν δ τς Ν 
συνέχων, εν ῳ TAVTA Καλα KAL aya Q ἐστι, Και QAEL μεν 


100 χρωμένοις ἀτριβῆ τε καὶ ὑγιᾶ καὶ ἀγήρατα παρέχων, 


a xi 
θᾶττον δὲ νοήματος ὑπηρετοῦντα ἀναμαρτήτως, οὗτος τὰ 


μέγιστα μὲν πράττων ὁρᾶται, τάδε δὲ οἰκονομῶν ἀόρατος 


An. i. 4. 10, where the idea of a mul- 
titude of apartments in the palace 
is helped by the pl.; also καὶ τὰ 
ὑποδήματα περιεπήγνυντο An. iv. 5. 
14, where the shoes of many individ- 
uals are meant. —et ye mpoonpal- 
vovot: cf. i. 4. 15, where Aristode- 
mus makes the same remark. 

13. ὅτι δέ ye ἀληθῆ λέγω : 86. that 
the δαιμόνιον (i. 1. 2) really gives me ad- 
vice as to what I should and should 
not do, a point on which the preceding 
words of Euthydemus seem to cast 
doubt. The sense of the following 
passage is ‘‘I do not mean to say that 
the gods appear to me in bodily form. 
If you observe what they accomplish 
you will revere and honor them. The 
gods themselves give the hint that we 
must not expect to see them, but must 
be assured of their existence by the 
blessings which they bestow: they 
create and control, —that we see; but 
how they do it, we do not see.’’ — οἵ τε 


ἄλλοι : sc. θεοί. Socrates and those 
who followed him, Plato, the Stoics, 
Cicero, and others, supported the idea 
that besides one supreme God, there 
were other beings, far inferior to him, 
but immortal and endowed with great 
power. Cf.,ini. 4., 88 5and7 with 11, 
16and 18. The task of controlling the 
universe, here assigned to the supreme 
Deity, is elsewhere assigned τοῖς θεοῖς. 
Cf. τοὺς det ὄντας καὶ πάντα δυναμένους, 
οἵ καὶ τήνδε τῶν ὅλων τάξιν συνέχουσιν 
ἀτριβῆ καὶ ἀγήρατον καὶ ἀναμάρτητον 
(free from wear or age or error) Cyr. 
Vili. 7. 22. — ὑπηρετοῦντα: doing his 
will.— Ta μέγιστα πράττων ὁρᾶται: is 
perceived to be performing his might- 
iest works. For the supplementary 
participle with verbs of perceiving, 
see on ζῶντα i. 2. 16.— τάδε : them, 
i.€. τὰ μέγιστα, aS present before 
the eyes of the speaker. H. 696 a 
-- οἰκονομῶν : circumstantial parti- 
ciple of time. 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA IV. 3. oat 


δι ἐς ΕΒ 3 , δ᾽ ν Ἂ ὁ A Ν ὃ “ > 
ἡμῖν ἐστιν. ἐννόει δ᾽ ὅτι Kal 6 πᾶσι φανερὸς δοκῶν εἶναι 14 
ν 3 3 ΄ a 3 , ε Ν 3 a Cur 
ἥλιος οὐκ ἐπιτρέπει τοῖς ἀνθρώποις ἑαυτὸν ἀκριβῶς ὁρᾶν, 
106 ἀλλ᾽ ἐάν τις αὐτὸν ἀναιδῶς ἐγχειρῇ θεάσασθαι, τὴν ὄψιν 
ἀφαιρεῖται. καὶ τοὺς ὑπηρέτας δὲ τῶν θεῶν εὑρήσεις 
5 A 3, / Ν ν A ἮΝ» 5 ’ὔ 
ἀφανεῖς ὄντας: κεραυνός τε γὰρ ὅτι μὲν ἄνωθεν ἀφίεται, 
δῆλον, καὶ ὅτι οἷς ἂν ἐντύχῃ πάντων κρατεῖ, ὁρᾶται 5° 
οὔτ᾽ ἐπιὼν οὔτ᾽ ἐγκατασκήψας οὔτε ἀπιών: καὶ ἄνεμοι 
110 αὐτοὶ μὲν ϑὲχ ὀρθνται, ἃ δὲ ποιοῦσι φανερὰ ἡμῖν ἐστι, 
καὶ προσιόντων αὐτῶν αἰσθανόμεθα. ἀλλὰ μὴν καὶ 
3 , 7 ἃ » Ἀ » A 9 , 
ἀνθρώπου γε ψυχή, ἡ εἴπερ τι καὶ ἄλλο τῶν ἀνθρωπίνων 
~ δ = 9 \ ’ὔ 3 ε a“ ’ 
τοῦ θείου μετέχει, ὅτι μὲν βασιλεύει ἐν ἡμῖν, φανερόν, 
ὁρᾶται δὲ οὐδ᾽ αὐτή. ἃ χρὴ κατανοοῦντα μὴ καταφρο- 
115 νεῖν τῶν ἀοράτων, ἀλλ᾽ ἐκ τῶν γιγνομένων τὴν δύναμιν 
a ὧα , a x ὃ , ”? «? \ 4 
QUTWV καταμανθάνοντα τιμαν TO Οαιμονιον. Eyo μέν, 15 
s ΄ ” ὦ» ε 0 “ὃ ς-ς ἡ Ν Oe Ν 3 
ὦ Σώκρατες," ἔφη ὁ Εὐθύδημος, “ὁτι μὲν οὐδὲ μικρὸν ἀμε- 
λήσω τοῦ δαιμονίου, σαφῶς οἶδα: ἐκεῖνο δὲ ἀθυμῶ, ὅτι 
μοι δοκεῖ τὰς τῶν θεῶν εὐεργεσίας οὐδ᾽ ἂν εἷς ποτε 
120 ἀνθρώπων ἀξίαις χάρισιν ἀμείβεσθαι." “᾿Αλλὰ μὴ TOVTO 16 
ἀθύμει," ἔφη, “ὦ Εῤθύδημε-: ὁρᾷς γὰρ ὅτι 6 ἐν Δελφοῖς 
θεός, ὅταν τις αὐτὸν ἐπερωτᾷ πῶς ἂν τοῖς θεοῖς χαρί- 
> , ‘ , , ’ , ᾿ , 
ζοιτο, ἀποκρίνεται, ‘Nou πόλεως. νόμος δὲ δήπου 
πανταχοῦ ἐστι κατὰ δύναμιν ἱεροῖς θεοὺς ἀρέσκεσθαι: 
14. ἀκριβῶς : sharply. — καί, δέ: πραυΐργ. --- τὸ δαιμόνιον: here not the 


see on i. 1. 8. --- ὑπηρέτας : ministers. daemonium ofi. τ. 2, but that which 
Cf. ‘ye ministers of his, that do his proceeds from the δαίμων. So in the 


pleasure’ Ps. ciii. 21. --- κεραυνός te: following section. See oni. 1. 2. 

corresponds to καὶ ἄνεμος below. — 15. οὐδὲ μικρόν : not even in the 
ἐπιών : see on οἰκονομῶν 18. ---ἃ slightest degree. —éxeivo ἀθυμῶ : I am 
ποιοῦσι : ‘their effects..,.— adda discouraged at this. ἐκεῖνο is cognate 
μήν : iam vero.—eétwep te καὶ accusative. See on φροντίζοντας τὰ 


ἄλλο: as in iii. 6. 2.— ὁρᾶται οὐδ᾽ τοιαῦτα i. 1. 11. --- οὐδ᾽ ἂν εἷς : see on 
αὐτή: for the thought, cf. i. 4. 9; i. 6.2.— ἂν ἀμείβεσθαι: could requite. 
Cyr. viii. 7. 17, 20. —a χρή: see on 16. νόμῳ πόλεως : cf. i, 3. 1. — 
τοὺς τὰ τοιαῦτα i. 1.9.—T&@vdopatev: ἀρέσκεσθαι : to propitiate, usually 


222 


EENO®ONTOS AITOMNHMONEYMATA A. 3, 4. 


A = » ’ \ 
125 πῶς οὖν av τις κάλλιον καὶ εὐσεβέστερον τιμῴη θεοὺς ἢ 


ε 9 A , ν nan > Ν Ν. ~ A ’ 
ὡς αὐτοὶ κελεύουσιν, οὕτω ποιῶν; ἀλλὰ χρὴ τῆς μὲν δυνά- 11 


μεως μηδὲν ὑφίεσθαι: ὅταν γάρ τις τοῦτο ποιῇ, φανερὸς 


ὃ 4 > Ν ’ > A θ , \ Ἂν δὲ > , 
ἥπου ἐστι τότε οὐ τιμῶν θεούς: χρὴ οὖν μηδὲν ἐλλεῖ 


Ν , A ‘ \ A \ 
TOVTA Κατα δύναμιν τιμαν TOUS θεοὺς θαρρεῖν TE Και 


130 ἐλπίζειν τὰ μέγιστα ἀγαθά: οὐ γὰρ παρ᾽ ἄλλων γ᾽ ἄν 


135 


’ 3 ’ ’ “ἡ Ἂ, A Ν , 
τις μείζω ἐλπίζων σωφρονοίη ἢ παρὰ τῶν τὰ μέγιστα 


ὠφελεῖν δυναμένων, οὐδ᾽ ἂν ἄλλως μᾶλλον ἢ εἰ τούτοις 


Ἂν ΒΨ Ν aA x A Ἃ 3 ε , 
ἀρέσκοι: ἀρέσκοι δὲ πῶς av μᾶλλον ἢ εἰ ὡς μάλιστα 


᾽’ 9 A ” 
πείθοιτο αὐτοῖς ; 


ἴω Ν ὃ ᾿ , Ν Φ πῆς “A > ’, 
Τοιαῦτα μὴν δὴ λέγων τε καὶ αὐτὸς ποιῶν εὐσεβεστέρους 18 


τε καὶ σωφρονεστέρους τοὺς συνόντας παρεσκεύαζεν. 


3 Ν Ν Ν Ν A ’ > > , 
Αλλὰ μὴν καὶ περὶ Tov δικαίου ye οὐκ ἀπεκρύπτετο 4 


ἃ > 4 > Ν δ ΩΝ 3 ’ 90.2ὕ, nw 
ἣν εἶχε γνώμην, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἔργῳ ἀπεδείκνυτο, ἰδίᾳ τε πᾶσι 
νομίμως τε καὶ ὠφελίμως χρώμενος καὶ κοινῇ ἀρχουσί 


intr. except in Homer. — πῶς οὖν ἄν 
τις κτλ. : cf. ‘behold, to obey is bet- 
ter than sacrifice, and to hearken 
than the fat of rams’ 1 Sam. xv. 22. 

17. τῆς μὲν δυνάμεως ὑφίεσθαι : 
for μέν, see on i. 1. 1. The implied 
opposite is ‘‘ we may well, however, 
fall behind the offerings of our 
richer neighbors.’? — χρὴ οὖν μηδὲν 
ἐλλείποντα κτλ. : the sense of the 
passage is simply ‘‘fear and honor 
God with all your might, and then 
be of good courage.’?—od γὰρ ἂν 
ἐλπίζων (equivalent to ef ris ἐλπίζοι) 
σωφρονοίη : ‘for no one could 
reasonably expect.’ —ov8’ ἂν ἄλλως 
μᾶλλον : sc. ἐλπίζων σωφρονοίη. 

4. What Socrates thought of in- 
tegrity (σωφροσύνη περὶ ἀνθρώπου:) 
was sufficiently shown in his life, 
both private and public. We are 
here, however, more immediately con- 


cerned with his treatment of the sub- 
ject in his discourses: and this may 
be learned from a conversation which 
he once held with the sophist Hippias. 
He there defines uprightness as obe- 
dience: on the one hand, to the laws 
of the state, on which rest all good 
order, all prosperity, and all security ; 
on the other, to the unwritten divine 
laws, which are everywhere a neces- 
sary condition of man’s social life, 
and whose violation nature herself 
punishes. 

1. οὐκ ἀπεκρύπτετο γνώμην : di- 
rected at the criticism uttered by 
Hippias in 9. For the attraction of 
the antec. into the rel. clause, see on 
i, 2. 22. — ἣν εἶχε : here equivalent to 
the art. τήν in the unemphatic pos- 
sessive 086. --- καὶ ἔργῳ : ‘in his very 
actions,’? contrasted with καὶ ἔλεγε 
δέ in 5. — ἄρχουσί τε πειθόμενος : 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA IV. 4. 


223 


a ε ’ ’ , ἃ Ν / 
TE ἃ οἱ νόμοι προστάττοιεν πειθόμενος καὶ κατὰ πόλιν 


᾿ 3 A ,ὕ ν 4 δ > Ν 
δκαὶ ἐν ταῖς στρατείαις οὕτως ὥστε διάδηλος εἶναι παρὰ 


Ἀ » > a \ Y 5 A > 2 ΕῚ 
τοὺς ἄλλους εὐτακτῶν, καὶ OTE ἐν ταῖς ἐκκλησίαις ἐπι- 


’ ἴω 
στάτης γενόμενος οὐκ ἐπέτρεψε τῷ δήμῳ παρὰ τοὺς 
, ͵΄ > \ \ A , > y 
νόμους ψηφίσασθαι, ἀλλὰ σὺν τοῖς νόμοις ἠναντιώθη 
, ε A al ὃ , ray > x 4 ¥ 5 ’ 
τοιαύτῃ ὁρμῇ τοῦ δήμου ἣν οὐκ ἄν οἶμαι ἄλλον οὐδένα 


3» ε A A yy ’ 
10 ἄνθρωπον ὑπομεῖναι: καὶ ὅτε οἱ τριάκοντα προσέταττον 


ex Ν ‘ hes A 
αὐτῷ Tapa τοὺς νόμους TL, οὐκ ἐπείθετο: τοῖς τε yap 


Pf > 4, 3... ὅΕἋ XN 4 Ν 
νέοις ἀπαγορευόντων αὐτῶν μὴ διαλέγεσθαι καὶ προστα- 


’ὔ 3 3 - A + \ “ lal 3 A 
ξάντων ἐκείνῳ TE καὶ ἄλλοις τισὶ τῶν πολιτῶν ἀγαγεῖν 


δος ΄ ΄ > EL es \ \ \ ‘ 
τινα ETL θανάτῳ, μονος OUK ἐπείσθη, διὰ TO παρᾶ τους 


, > A , 
15 VOLOVS QAUT@ προστάττεσθαι. 


ea , Ν ε Ν , 
καὶ ὁτε τὴν ὑπὸ Μελήτου 


γραφὴν ἔφευγε, τῶν ἄλλων εἰωθότων ἐν τοῖς δικαστηρίοις 


corresponds to καὶ ὅτε οὐκ ἐπέτρεψε 
in 2. Strict adherence to ‘concin- 
nity’ would require καὶ οὐκ ἐπιτρέ- 
πων, but this would have occasioned 
an accumulation of participles. — 
ἃ οἱ νόμοι προστάττοιεν : in regard 
to matters which the laws enjoined. 
For the opt., see on νομίζοιεν i. 1. 
6. — wore εἶναι : for the inf., see 
On wore ἔχειν i, 2. 1. --- παρὰ τοὺς 
ἄλλους : beyond all others. See on 
i. 4. 14. 

2. ἐν ταῖς ἐκκλησίαις κτλ. : for 
the events alluded to, see on i. 1. 18. 
ἐκκλησίαις should strictly be sing., as 
Socrates was ἐπιστάτης in only one 
of the two sessions mentioned in 
Hell. i. 7: but Xenophon is speak- 
ing loosely of an affair well known 
and already described. — παρὰ τοὺς 
νόμους : cf. i. 1. 18. --- ὁρμῇ τοῦ δήμου : 
‘‘a tide of popular feeling.’’ — ἥν : 
instead of the more usual δέαν after 
τοιαύτῃ. 


3. τοῖς τε γὰρ νέοις κτλ. : Cf. i. 2. 
85. Note the difference between 
the impf. ἀπαγορευόντων (cf. μηδὲ 
διαλέγου i. 2. 35) and the aor. προσ- 
ταξάντων. --- ἀγαγεῖν τινα κτλ. : Leon, 
a rich citizen, had fled to Salamis to 
escape death at the hands of the 
Thirty. Socrates, with four other 
citizens, was commanded to proceed 
to Salamis and arrest Leon: the 
others obeyed, but Socrates reso- 
lutely refused. Cf. Hell. ii. 3. 39; 
Plato Apol. 32 ο. --- ἐπὶ θανάτῳ : to 
put him to death, see on ἐφ᾽ οἷς i. 
Ἀν Δ; 

4, Μελήτου : i.e. the chief ac- 
cuser. See Introd. ὃ 5. — γραφὴν 
ἔφευγε : was prosecuted, hence with 
iré6. The active meaning is ex- 
pressed by διώκειν. G. 1241; H. 
820. Cf. μή πως ἐγὼ ὑπὸ Μελήτου 
τοσαύτας δίκας φύγοιμι Plato Apol. 
19 σ. ---τῶν ἄλλων εἰωθότων κτλ. : 
these appeals to sympathy were a 


224 ΞΕΝΟΦΩ͂ΝΤΟΣ AILOMNHMONEYMATA Δ. 4. 


ὃς χά is ὃ ts διαλέγεσθ t κολακεύ 
πρὸς χάριν τε τοῖς δικασταῖς διαλέγεσθαι καὶ κολακεύειν 
καὶ δεῖσθαι παρὰ τοὺς νόμους, καὶ διὰ τὰ τοιαῦτα πολ- 
λῶν πολλάκις ὑπὸ τῶν δικαστῶν ἀφιεμένων, ἐκεῖνος οὐδὲν 
> ’ “ > / 3 A » Ν Ν 
20 ἠθέλησε τῶν εἰωθότων ἐν τῷ δικαστηρίῳ παρὰ τοὺς 
/ ~ 3 Ἀ ε 7 x > Ν ε Ν ἴω 
νόμους ποιῆσαι, ἀλλὰ ῥᾳδίως ἂν ἀφεθεὶς ὑπὸ τῶν δικα- 
στῶν, εἰ καὶ μετρίως τι τούτων ἐποίησε, προείλετο μᾶλλον 
A A x ἴω A 
τοῖς νόμοις ἐμμένων ἀποθανεῖν ἢ παρανομῶν ζῆν. καὶ 5 
ἔλεγε δὲ οὕτως καὶ πρὸς ἄλλους μὲν πολλάκις, οἶδα δέ 
7 ~ ei Ν Ν ε , Ν 3 A Ν A , 
25 TOTE αὐτὸν καὶ πρὸς Ἱππίαν τὸν Ἤλεϊον περὶ τοῦ δικαίου 
’ , Ν ’ ἣν 3 4 ε 
τοιάδε διαλεχθέντα. διὰ χρόνου γὰρ ἀφικόμενος ὃ 
Ἱππίας ᾿Αθήναζ εγένετο τῷ Σωκράτει λέ ᾿ 
ππίας ᾿Αθήναζε παρεγέν ΐ ρ γοντι πρός 
τινας ὡς θαυμαστὸν εἴη τὸ εἰ μέν τις βούλοιτο σκυτέα 
’ , x 4 x Ἂν» ve /, \ 3 aA 
διδάξασθαί τινα ἢ τέκτονα ἢ χαλκέα ἢ ἱππέα, μὴ ἀπορεῖν 
ν Δ , 4 , μὰ δέ σοι Ὁ 
80 ὅποι ἂν πέμψας τούτου τύχοι" [φασὶ δέ τινες καὶ ἵππον 
κὴ A “ ’ ’ la ’ 
καὶ βοῦν τῷ βουλομένῳ δικαίους ποιήσασθαι πάντα 
μεστὰ εἶναι τῶν διδαξόντων.] ἐὰν δέ τις βούληται ἢ 
ἄρ: Ἂς a Ν , x eX x + ey , Ἀ 
αὐτὸς μαθεῖν τὸ δίκαιον ἢ υἱὸν ἢ οἰκέτην διδάξασθαι, μὴ 


207 9 a 3 N , , i x ε , 
εἰδέναι οΟΤοι AV ἐλθὼν TUXOL TOUTOUV. καὶ O μεν Ἱππίας 6 


common device in the courts of 
Athens. Socrates regarded such en- 
treaties, though not formally pro- 
hibited by law, as in themselves 
παρὰ τοὺς νόμους, and refused to use 
them. Cf. Plato Apol. 38 bp, 5.— 
ἀλλὰ ῥᾳδίως ἂν ἀφεθείς: but although 
he would have been readily acquitted. 
For the participle with ἄν, represent- 
ing the same tense of the indic., see 
G. 1308, 2; H. 987 b. —éppévev, παρα- 
νομῶν: see On στήσαντας i. 1. 9. 

5. otras: in this strain. — 
Ἱππίαν : Hippias of Elis was one of 
the most famous sophists of his day, 
and was very popular as a teacher of 
rhetoric, although his charges were 


as high as those of Protagoras (see 
on i. 2. 5). He is a frequent figure 
in the Platonic dialogues, where he 
appears to better advantage than 
here. — διὰ χρόνου : as in ii. 8. 1. 
— mwapeyévero: happened upon. — 
διδάξασθαί τινα: to have any one 
trained. For the causative mid., see 
G. 1245; H. 815. — δικαίους : applied 
to persons or things that are as 
they should be (comme il faut); and 
especially appropriate here, the dis- 
cussion being on δικαιοσύνη. Cf. οὔτε 
yap ἅρμα γένοιτ᾽ ἂν δίκαιον ἀδίκων 
(trav) συνεζευγμένων Cyr. ii. 2. 26. — 
τῶν διδαξόντων : const. like τῶν ἀπο- 
λυσόντων ii. 1. 5. 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA IV. 4. 225 
> , A y > , aw ere ‘ 9 
86 ἀκούσας TAUTA ὠσπερ ἐπισκώπτων αὑτόν, “ Eri yap σύ, 

» ws , 3 “ Ν a & / a. ἃ 4 4 
ἔφη, “@ Σώκρατες, ἐκεῖνα τὰ αὐτὰ λέγεις ἃ ἐγώ πάλαι 

ὕὔ » ” A e 4 «ςἃ ᾽ὔ 4 
ποτέ σου ἠκουσα; καὶ O Σωκράτης, Ο δέ γε τούτου 

ὃ , $e x re ety ἃ , 9 ’ a. Ν σον ΄ 
εινότερον, ἔφη, ὦ ἵππία, ov μόνον ἄει τὰ αὑτὰ λέγω, 
5 A A \ ~ 5 “ A a Ψ ἈΝ A A 
ἀλλὰ καὶ περὶ τῶν αὐτῶν: σὺ δ᾽ ἴσως διὰ τὸ πολυμαθὴς 
ςς "A 4 
με 
(a3 ’ ” 
Ilorepor, 


> Ν Aw 3 lal 3 ὔ Ἁ 3 Ν ,ὕ ” 
40 εἶναι περὶ τῶν αὐτῶν οὐδέποτε τὰ αὐτὰ λέγεις. 
λει," ἔφη, “πειρῶμαι καινόν τι λέγειν ἀεί." 
» ςς \ \ a 5 ’ὔὕ a A , 37 
ἔφη, “Kal περὶ ὧν ἐπίστασαι; οἷον περὶ γραμμάτων ἐάν 
» , ’ὔ Ἀ A , > 4 ¥ \ 
TUS ἔρηταί σε πόσα Kal ποῖα Σωκράτους ἐστίν, ἀλλα μὲν 
’ὔ ¥ Ν “~ ~ ’ x > ee lal A 
πρότερον, ἄλλα δὲ νῦν πειρᾷ λέγειν ; ἢ περὶ ἀριθμῶν τοῖς 
5 “Ὁ > ‘ \ iA δὰ 5 ’, > Ν > Ν ΄ Ὁ ἃ 
46 ἐρωτῶσιν εἰ τὰ δὶς πέντε δέκα ἐστίν, οὐ τὰ αὐτὰ νῦν ἃ 
Ν / > ’ ” (a4 Ν Ν 4 ”» YF oc > 
καὶ πρότερον ἀποκρίνῃ; Περὶ μὲν τούτων, ἔφη, “ὦ 
ΟΣ 
Σώκρατες, ὥσπερ σὺ καὶ ἐγὼ ἀεὶ τὰ αὐτὰ λέγω, περὶ 
μέντοι τοῦ δικαίου πάνυ οἶμαι νῦν ἔχειν εἰπεῖν πρὸς ἃ 
¥ Ν » 9 ἃ » 9 Χ 4 bee A ” (a4 \ Ν 
οὔτε σὺ OUT ἂν ἄλλος οὐδεὶς δύναιτ᾽ ἀντειπεῖν. Νὴ τὴν 
50 H ” ¥ “ , λ ’ὕ 5 θὰ ε ld > , 
ραν," ἔφη, “μέγα λέγεις ἀγαθὸν εὑρηκέναι, εἰ παύσονται 
Ν ε ὃ Ν δί , , de ε Xe 
μὲν οἱ δικασταὶ δίχα ψηφιζόμενοι, παύσονται O€ οἱ πολῖται 
περὶ τῶν δικαίων ἀντιλέγοντές τε καὶ ἀντιδικοῦντες καὶ 
: , , T..@ ΄ ΄ \ 
στασιάζοντες, παύσονται δὲ ai πόλεις διαφερόμεναι περὶ 


A ὃ , \ a EE ee OTE > ay 9 
TOV OLKQALWY Και πολεμοῦσαι. KQL €YW μὲν OVK OLO OTWS 


6. ὥσπερ ἐπισκώπτων: as mock- 
ing, with the accusative. For the 
intr. use of the verb, cf. i. 3. 7. —€re 
yap σὺ κτλ. : for γάρ, see on i. 3. 10, 
and for the thought, cf. ὡς ἀεὶ ταὐτὰ 
λέγεις, ὦ Σώκρατες. Οὐ μόνον γε, ὦ 
Καλλίκλεις, ἀλλὰ καὶ περὶ τῶν αὐτῶν 
Plato Gorg. 490 Ὁ. Cf., also, i. 2. 
37.— διὰ τὸ πολυμαθὴς εἶναι : by 
reason of your being widely learned. 
For the case of the pred. adj., see on 
αὐτός ii. 3. 11. — ἀμέλει : as ini. 4. 7. 

7. πότερον : sc. some alternative 
question like ἢ μή (or ἢ del) ταὐτὰ 
λέγεις, Since the sent. ἢ. . . ἀποκρίνῃ is 


a new question, not opposed to the 
first. — οἷον : velut, for example. 
-- πόσα καὶ ποῖα Σωκράτους ἐστίν : 
how many and what letters are in 
(the word) Socrates. Cf. Oec. viii. 
14. --- περὶ ἀριθμῶν τοῖς ἐρωτῶσιν : 
for the position of the art., see on 
τὴν σοφίαν τοὺς πωλοῦντας i. 6. 13. — 
περὶ μέν, περὶ μέντοι : correlative. — 
ὥσπερ, kal: with omission of οὕτω, 
as in ii. 2. 2. 

8. νὴ τὴν Ἥραν : see on i. 5. 5. 
--λέγεις : “you claim.’’ — ψηφιζό- 
μενοι : for the supplementary parti- 
ciple, see on σκοπούμενος ii. 1. 24. — 


226 


EENO®ONTOS AILTOMNHMONEYMATA Δ. 4. 


A 9 4 Ν nw 3 nw wn 
55av ἀπολειφθείἥν σον πρὸ τοῦ ἀκοῦσαι τηλικοῦτον 


ἀγαθὸν εὑρηκότος." “᾿Αλλὰ μὰ Δί, 


25. }} 


» 
ἔφη, “οὐκ ἀκούσῃ, 9 


΄, > ἃ 3... ἅς 9 ΄, 9 , \ δὲ 5 
πρίν γ᾽ ἀν αὐτὸς ἀποφήνῃ ὁ τι νομίζεις τὸ δίκαιον εἶναι. 
ἀρκεῖ γὰρ ὅτι τῶν ἄλλων καταγελᾷς ἐρωτῶν μὲν καὶ 


ἐλέγχων πάντας, αὐτὸς δ᾽ οὐδενὶ θέλων ὑπέχειν λόγον οὐδὲ 


ἈΝ “' 
60 γνώμην ἀποφαίνεσθαι περὶ οὐδενός." “Τί δέ; ὦ Ἱππία," 10 
» ἐξ --ῷ 3, 4 3 Se ὃ A δί 3 2QOA 
ἔφη, “οὐκ ἤσθησαι ὅτι ἐγὼ ἃ δοκεῖ μοι δίκαια εἶναι οὐδὲν 


4, > , ” 
παύομαι ἀποδεικνύμενος ; 
“ we , 3 ᾽’ὕ 3) 

οὗτος ὁ λόγος ἐστίν; 


“Καὶ ποῖος δή σοι," ἔφη, 
“Ei δὲ μὴ λόγῳ, ἔφη, “ἀλλ᾽ 


» 5 / x 9 “ 9 ’, 
EPpy ἀποδείκνυμαι" 7) ου δοκεῖ σοι ἀξιοτεκμαρτότερον 


A , XN » i? 3) 
65Tov λόγου τὸ ἔργον εἶναι; 


“Πολύ γε νὴ Δί᾽, ἔφη: 


“δίκαια μὲν γὰρ λέγοντες πολλοὶ ἄδικα ποιοῦσι, δίκαια 


S2 , 509. ἃ Ὁ ἊΣ ΝΑΥΕΝΕ ἢν 
€ TPATT@V ovo αν εἰς AOLKOS EL). 


“Ἤισθησαι ovvil 


A ᾽ “Δ ἴω x A $ xX 
πώποτέ μου ἢ ψευδομαρτυροῦντος ἢ συκοφαντοῦντος ἢ 
φίλους ἢ πόλιν εἰς στάσιν ἐμβάλλοντος ἢ ἄλλο τι ἄδικον 
Ἰοπράττοντος ;" “Οὐκ ἔγωγε," ἔφη. “Τὸ δὲ τῶν ἀδίκων ἀπέ- 
χεσθαι οὐ δίκαιον ἡγῇ; “Δῆλος εἶ; ἔφη, “ὦ Σώκρατες, 
καὶ νῦν διαφεύγειν ἐγχειρῶν τὸ ἀποδείκνυσθαι γνώμην, 
ν ΄, \ , 3 Ν ἃ ‘3 e A 
6 τι νομίζεις τὸ δίκαιον: ov yap ἃ πράττουσιν οἱ δίκαιοι, 


3 3 ἃ Ν ΄ “ / 3) 
ἀλλ΄ ἃ μὴ πράττουσι, ταῦτα λέγεις. 


“᾿Αλλ᾽ ᾧμην 12 


5 ἔγωγε," ἔφη 6 Σωκράτης, “τὸ μὴ θέλειν ἀδικεῖν ἱκανὸν 


δικαιοσύνης ἐπίδειγμα εἶναι. 


ὅπως ἂν ἀπολειφθείην σου κτλ. : how 
I could ever tear myself away from 
you until I have heard of so great 
a blessing, since you have discovered 
it. 

9. πρὶν ἀποφήνῃ : for πρίν with 
the subjv., see G. 1471, 2; H. 924. 
---ἀρκεῖ, ὅτι τῶν ἄλλων καταγελᾷς : 
it is enough for you to laugh at 
the others, implying ‘‘ you shall not 
laugh at me.’’ ---ἐρωτῶν μὲν κτλ. : Cf. 
ἵνα Σωκράτης τὸ εἰωθὸς διαπράξηται, 


εἰ δέ σοι μὴ δοκεῖ, σκέψαι, 


αὐτὸς μὲν μὴ ἀποκρίνηται, ἄλλου δὲ 


ἀποκρινομένου λαμβάνῃ λόγον καὶ 
ἐλέγχῃ Plato Rep. 337 τ. 
10. ri δέ: ‘*how so.’’? — οὐδέν : 


in no respect, i.e. never. —el δὲ ph 
λόγῳ κτλ. : ‘¢ you ask me for words ; 
but suppose I show you deeds.’’ — 
οὐδ᾽ av eis: as in 1, 6. 2; iv. 3. 
15. 

11. γνώμην, 6 τι νομίζεις : of. 
ἀπόφηναι γνώμην ὅ τι σοι δοκεῖ An. 


4 Ὁ ὁ, 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA IV. 4. 227 


3A “ὃ αλλ 3 a \ Ἂν 3 \ \ , 

€av TOOE σοι μαλλον ἀρεσκῃ" φημὶ yap ἐγὼ TO νομιμον 

“ce Ἂν d= λέ ον ’ ’ 
Αρα τὸ αὐτὸ λέγεις, ὦ Σώκρατες, νόμι- 
» ”» » 

“"Eyoye, ἐφη. 

> , la ε a ς / x A ad , ” 

80 αἰσθάνομαί σου οποιον νομιμοὸον ἢ ποιον δίκαιον λέγεις. 

ἐἐ ” » 
ἔγωγε," ἐφη. 
ὰ “ 

“"A οἱ πολῖται," ἔφη, 


δί 53 ” 
ίκαιον εἶναι. 
, \ δι > ” “rn? \ 
μὸν TE Kal OlKQLOV εἰναυ; Ov yap 13 
\ > ἊΨ 
“Νόμους δὲ πόλεως," ἔφη, “γιγνώσκεις ;” 
“K \ 7 4 ’ὔὕ ᾽) 
αἱ τίνας τούτους νομίζεις ; 
ςς θέ Ψ ὃ A a Ny ἫΝ 3 , θ 3 , ” 
συνθέμενοι α TE δεῖ ποιεῖν Kal ὧν ἀπέχεσθαι ἐγράψαντο. 
«ςς 3 ~ ” » ( I A x » ε Ν. ἴω 
Οὐκοῦν, ἔφη, “νόμιμος μὲν ἂν εἴη ὁ κατὰ ταῦτα πολι- 
, » δὲ ε an ΄ὕ ” « , \ 
85 TEVOMEVOS, ἀνομος O€ ὁ ταῦτα παραβαίνων; Πάνυ μὲν 
ἣν 3ϑϑ, » 
οὖν, ἔφη. 
’ὔ’ » 3 ε lal 
πειθόμενος, ἄδικα δ᾽ ὁ τούτοις ameOorv;” 
3) 


(a3 O > ‘a Ν ὃ ra Ν x M6 ε , 
VKOUV και OLKQALGO μεναν πράττοι Ο τουτοις 
΄ὕ \ 
“Tlavu μεν 
> «0 9 Pie A Ν ὃ , , ὃ ΄, ε ὃ wee 
OUP. UKOVV O μὲν Τα OLKALA πράττων ἱκαιος, O OE Τα 


ΕἾ ΕἾ A ΕἾ 
ἄδικα ἄδικος; “Πῶς γὰρ ov;” “Ὁ μὲν ἄρα νόμιμος 


» 
ϑο δίκαιός ἐστιν, ὁ δὲ ἄνομος ἄδικος." καὶ ὁ Ἱππίας, τά 
«Νό Δ" » ἐ Σώ lal ¥ pe ee 

dpous 0, ἔφη, “ὦ Σώκρατες, πῶς ἂν τις ἡγήσαιτο 

A A 5 DY A ν 

σπουδαῖον πρᾶγμα εἶναι ἢ τὸ πείθεσθαι αὐτοῖς, οὖς γε 
πολλάκις αὐτοὶ ot θέμενοι ἀποδοκιμάσαντες μετατίθεν- 
“Καὶ γὰρ πόλεμον," ἔφη ὁ Σωκράτης, “πολλάκις 
“Καὶ 


, > ” ”» » Q 
“Διάφορον οὖν τι οἴει ποιεῖν, ἔφη, “τοὺς 


3) 
ται; 
9 ἀράμεναι αἱ πόλεις πάλιν εἰρήνην ποιοῦνται." 
, bb Mes ie of 
pada,” ἐφη. 
“Ὁ , , / 4 “a x ε 
τοῖς νόμοις πειθομένους φαυλίζων, ὅτι καταλυθεῖεν ἂν οἱ 
x A ἴω 
νόμοι, ἢ εἰ τοὺς ἐν τοῖς πολέμοις εὐτακτοῦντας ψέγοις, ὅτι 
3 x x Χ a A 
γένοιτ᾽ ἄν εἰρήνη; ἢ Kal τοὺς ἐν τοῖς πολέμοις ταῖς 
ἴω +. 
Ἰοοπατρίσι προθύμως βοηθοῦντας μέμφῃ;" “Ma Δί᾽ οὐκ 
12. ἐὰν τόδε κτλ. : if possibly 


this will please you better. See Η. 
907, 1016 c. Cf. σκέψαι ἐὰν καὶ σοὶ 


ὅπως, πῶς Cyr. i. 6.43; ὅ τι, τί Cyr. 
vii. 3. 10.—a.. . ἐγράψαντο : cf. i. 
2. 42 ff. —Gpa: then. 


ξυνδοκῇ Plato Phaedo 64 c. —ydp: 
as in i. 1.6. — τὸ αὐτό : subj. of εἶναι. 

13. σοῦ: for a similar ‘ pro- 
lepsis,’ see on θεῶν σθηται i. 4. 18. 
-- ὁποῖον, ποῖον : variation of form 
without difference in meaning. Cf. 


14, σπουδαῖον πρᾶγμα: a thing 
of any importance. —Kai yap: ‘why, 
for that matter.’’ — διάφορον ποιεῖν : 
that you are acting otherwise. —7: 
after διάφορον, as after διαφέρειν iii. 7. 
7; lil, 11. 14. — προθύμως : ‘ loyally.” 


228 


ἔγωγ᾽," ἔφη. 


EENO®ONTOS ΑΠΟΜΝΗΜΟΝΕΎΜΑΤΑ Δ. 4. 


“Λυκοῦργον δὲ τὸν Λακεδαιμόνιον, ἔφη 615 


, ςς ’ 4 Oe x ὃ 4 aA 
Σωκράτης, “καταμεμάθηκας ὅτι οὐδὲν av διάφορον τῶν 


ἄλλων πόλεων τὴν Σπάρτην ἐποίησεν, εἰ μὴ τὸ πείθεσθαι 


τοῖς νόμοις μάλιστα ἐνειργάσατο αὐτῇ; τῶν δὲ ἀρχόντων 


3 A / 3 > ἐς ν x “a / 
105 ἐν Tats πόλεσιν οὐκ οἶσθα ὅτι οἵτινες ἂν τοῖς πολίταις 


5 , 9S A A , , “' + ’ὔ 
QLUTL@MTATOL WOL TOV TOLS νομοις πείθεσθαι, ουτοι αριστοι 


5 Ἁ ’ὔ 3 - ’ὔ ε A A ’ 
εἰσι, καὶ πόλις ἐν n μάλιστα οἱ πολῖται τοῖς νόμοις 


΄ 3 Weta ¥ ΄, Mis , 
πείθονται, εν e€lpynvy τέ αριστα διάγει και εν πολέμῳ 


3 / / 3 3 Ν ᾿ ἣ ε ’ , rd / 
ἀνυπόστατός ἐστιν; ἀλλὰ μὴν καὶ OMovOLa γε μέγιστόν 16 


b] Ν ὃ al A , 3 Ν ,ὔὕ 3 
110 TE ἀγαθὸν OKEL ταῖς πόλεσιν ειναι, και πλειστάκις ἐν 


αὐταῖς αἵ τε γερουσίαι καὶ οἱ ἄριστοι ἄνδρες παρα- 


nw , e A Ἀ aA nw 
κελεύονται τοῖς πολίταις ὁμονοεῖν, Kal πανταχοῦ ἐν TH 


ε 4 ’ A Ἁ “4 > 4 ε ᾽’ 
Ἑλλάδι νόμος κεῖται τοὺς πολίτας ὀμνύναι ὁμονοήσειν, 


\ A > , Ν Ψ a 5 ΓΟ es 
καὶ παντάχου ομννυουσι τον ορκον TOUTOV* οιμαι ὃ eyo 


115 ταῦτα γίγνεσθαι, οὐχ ὅπως τοὺς αὐτοὺς χοροὺς κρίνωσιν 


ε Lal 5.393 ἡ Ν 3 \ 5» Ν 3 “ 3 3 
οἱ πολῖται, οὐδ᾽ ὅπως τοὺς αὐτοὺς αὐλητὰς ἐπαινῶσιν, οὐδ 


ν ‘\ 9 ‘ Ν ε A sQ> Ὁ ἴω ΕῚ A 
OTWS τοὺς AVUTOVS TOLYNTAS ALPWVTAL, ovo Wa TOOLS AVTOLS 


4 > » ame A ’ὔ’ 4 
nowvTat, ἀλλ᾽ ἵνα τοῖς νόμοις πείθωνται. 


τούτοις γὰρ 


A A > Ν 
τῶν πολιτῶν ἐμμενόντων, ai πόλεις ἰσχυρόταταί τε καὶ 


15. Λυκοῦργον καταμεμάθηκας, 
ὅτι κτλ. : Lycurgus was the famous 
lawgiver of Sparta ; he is usually as- 
signed to the eighth century B.c., but 
in reality nothing is known definitely 
of his date. As to his legislation, 
Holm (Hist. of Greece, i. 177) be- 
lieves that ‘it is impossible to dis- 
tinguish what belongs to Lycurgus, 
what is early Doric, and what is due 
to the times after Lycurgus. Only 
one point seems certain, that the 
work of Lycurgus was the consoli- 
dation of the supreme power of an 


9 ’ 7 4 » See 7 y¥yoR / 
120 εὐδαιμονέσταται γίγνονται" ἄνευ δὲ ὁμονοίας οὔτ᾽ ἂν πόλις 


aristocratic warrior caste.’ — οὐδὲν 
διάφορον κτλ. : see on iii. 5. 15, and 
cf. od δὲ οὔτε Λακεδαίμονα mponpod 
οὔτε Κρήτην, as δὴ ἑκάστοτε φὴς εὐνο- 
μεῖσθαι Plato Crito 52 ΞΕ. --- ἄριστα 
διάγει : ““15 most flourishing.”’ 

16. The thought of the passage 
is, that harmony, which is considered 
the greatest good of a state, is the 
result of obedience to the laws. — 
τοὺς αὐτοὺς χοροὺς κρίνωσιν : decide 
on the same choruses, sc. as prize 
winners. So αἱρῶνται just below. — 
οὐδ᾽ ἵνα : ‘¢and, in general, not that.” 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA IV. 4. 229 


εὖ πολιτευθείη οὔτ᾽ οἶκος καλῶς οἰκηθείη. ἰδίᾳ δὲ πῶς 11 
A 3, - - δι 2% , A - > ἃ A 
μὲν ay τις ἧττον ὑπὸ πόλεως ζημιοῖτο, πῶς δ᾽ av μᾶλλον 
nw “ἡ “Ὁ wn 
τιμῷτο, ἢ εἰ τοῖς νόμοις πείθοιτο; πῶς δ᾽ ἂν ἧττον ἐν 
τοῖς δικαστηρίοις ἡττῷτο ἢ πῶς ἂν μᾶλλον pegs τίνι 
125 δ᾽ ἄν τις sag tee πιστεύσειε παρακαταθέσθαι ἢ Ἶ χρήματα 
ἢ υἱοὺς ἢ θυγατέρας; τίνα δ᾽ ἂν ἡ πόλις ὅλη ἀξιοπιστό- 
τερον ἡγήσαιτο τοῦ νομίμου; παρὰ τίνος δ᾽ ἂν μᾶλλον 
“ , 4 x a x > A Ἃ + ae Ν᾽ Ἅ ΄, 
τῶν δικαίων τύχοιεν ἢ γονεῖς ἢ οἰκεῖοι ἢ οἰκέται ἢ φίλοι 
x a x 4 / δ᾽ x “A , , 
ἢ πολῖται ἢ ξένοι; τίνι δ᾽ ἂν μᾶλλον πολέμιοι πιστεύ- 
130 σειαν ἢ ἀνοχὰς ἢ σπονδὰς ἢ συνθήκας περὶ εἰρήνης ; τίνι 
> ἃ A“ x A“ ’ 4 3 ’ ’ 
δ᾽ ἂν μᾶλλον ἢ τῷ νομίμῳ σύμμαχοι ἐθέλοιεν γίγνεσθαι; 
τῷ δ᾽ ἂν μᾶλλον οἱ σύμμαχοι πιστεύσειαν ἢ ἡγεμονίαν 
x ’ x ’ ’ 3 ¥ > 7 
ἢ φρουραρχίαν ἢ πόλεις; τίνα δ᾽ ἄν τις εὐεργετήσας 
ε , , A A Ey Ν / Ἅ 
ὑπολάβοι χάριν κομιεῖσθαι μᾶλλον ἢ τὸν νόμιμον; ἢ 
A ¥ 
135Tiva μᾶλλον ἄν Tis εὐεργετήσειεν ἢ Tap οὗ χάριν ἀπο- 
λήψεσθαι νομίζει; τῷ δ᾽ av τις βούλοιτο μᾶλλον φίλος 
3 a “ΜᾺ , x A ® 3 , ἴω > » - 
εἶναι ἢ τῷ τοιούτῳ ἢ τῷ ἧττον ἐχθρός ; τῷ δ᾽ av τις ἧττον 
la x ® ’ Ν / > , 
πολεμήσειεν ἢ ᾧ μάλιστα μὲν φίλος εἶναι βούλοιτο, 


a A \ , δ ΄ 
ᾧ πλεῖστοι μὲν φίλοι καὶ σύμμαχοι 


Y - ιν Yd \ 
ἥκιστα δ᾽ ἐχθρός, καὶ ¢ 
140 βούλοιντο εἶναι, ἐλάχιστοι δ᾽ ἐχθροὶ καὶ πολέμιοι; ἐγὼ 18 

Ν > yy. ¢ , Ν “ας 3 , , , \ 

μὲν οὖν, ὦ Ἱππία, τὸ αὐτὸ ἀποδείκνυμαι νόμιμόν TE Kal 

ἣν > \ ὃ 9 9 ΄) , Sis ”? 

ίκαιον εἶναι, σὺ εἰ τἀναντία γιγνώσκεις, δίδασκε. 

> ¥ 

καὶ ὃ Ἱππίας, “᾿Αλλὰ μὰ τὸν Ala,” ἔφη, “ὦ Σώκρατες, ov 

A a » Ἁ a 

μοι δοκῶ τἀναντία γιγνώσκειν οἷς εἴρηκας περὶ τοῦ 
145 δικαίου. “᾿Αγράφους δέ τινας οἶσθα," ἔφη, “ὦ Ἱππία, 19 


17. τίνι δ᾽ ἄν τις μᾶλλον πιστεύ- ἄλλῳ πιστεύσειεν ἢ θεῷ i. τ. 5. The 


wee παρακαταθέσθαι: ‘to whom πιστεύσειαν below, however, is equiva- 
would anybody more confidently in- lent to intrust, like πιστεύσειε above. 
trust.’ — τῶν δικαίων : their rights. ---ττῷ: for the contr. form, see G. 
--- ἀνοχάς, σπονδάς, συνθήκας : cog- 410,1; H. 277. 

nate accs., after the analogy of 18. τὸ αὐτό: as in 12. — ἀποδεί- 


πιστεύειν πίστιν. Of. ταῦτα δὲ τίς ἂν κνυμαι: affirm. 


230 EENO®QNTOS AILOMNHMONEYMATA Δ. 4. 


ou , 3 ἐ a ” ἐφ ΠῚ ’ ἧς De ik 
οὖς γ᾽ ἐν πάσῃ, ἔφη, “χώρᾳ κατὰ ταὐτὰ 
¥ FN 5 > A 

“Ἔχοις ἄν οὖν εἰπεῖν, ἔφη, “ὅτι oi 


/ ” 
νόμους; 
4 ” 
νομιζομένους. 
»» Ἂν »» 3) ἃ ΄“ + 9 
ἄνθρωποι αὐτοὺς ἔθεντο; “Kat πῶς av,” ἔφη, “οἵ γε 
» λθ A Y xR ὃ θ A + ε 4 ’ὔ > ” 
οὔτε συνελθεῖν ἅπαντες av δυνηθεῖεν οὔτε ὁμόφωνοί εἶσι; 
150“ Τίνας οὖν, ἔφη, “νομίζεις τεθεικέναι τοὺς νόμους τού- 
3 ἃ etd) » Ν , Φ Ἁ 
τους; “Ἐγὼ μέν, ἔφη, “θεοὺς οἶμαι τοὺς νόμους 
A “A \ A 

τούτους Tots ἀνθρώποις Oeivar: Kal yap παρὰ πᾶσιν av-— 


θρώποις πρῶτον νομίζεται θεοὺς σέβειν." “Οὐκοῦν Kat20 


Ν wn 
᾿ “Kat τοῦτο," ἔφη. 


γονέας τιμᾶν πανταχοῦ νομίζεται ;᾿ 

a 5 ἴω a) / la Ν ’ὔ θ la to 
155 “Οὐκοῦν Kal μήτε γονέας παισὶ μείγνυσθαι μήτε παῖδας 
“Οὐκέτι μοι δοκεῖ," ἔφη, “ὦ Σώκρατες, οὗτος 

ν 

“Ti δή;" ἔφη. “Ὅτι, ἔφη, “αἰσθά- 
νομαΐ τινας παραβαίνοντας αὐτόν." “Καὶ γὰρ ἀλλαϑ1 
ἀλλὰ δίκην γέ τοι διδόασιν 


A 3) 
γονεῦσιν; 
θεοῦ νόμος εἶναι." 


πολλά," ἔφη, “παρανομοῦσιν. 
1600 οἱ παραβαίνοντες τοὺς ὑπὸ τῶν θεῶν κειμένους νόμους, ἣν 
5 Ἁ , Ν > ’ὔ A y Q 
οὐδενὶ τρόπῳ δυνατὸν ἀνθρώπῳ διαφυγεῖν, ὥσπερ τοὺς 
ὑπ᾿ ἀνθρώπων κειμένους νόμους ἔνιοι παραβαίνοντες 
διαφεύγουσι τὸ δίκην διδόναι, οἱ μὲν λανθάνοντες, οἱ δὲ 
βιαζόμενοι." 

4 , a Ἄ \ “Aw nw 
165 δύνανται διαφεύγειν γονεῖς TE παισὶ Kal παῖδες γονεῦσι 


\ ’ ” » 4 Ss 
“Kat ποίαν, ἔφη, “δίκην, ὦ Σώκρατες, οὐ 22 


4 ered “Ty Ψ \ Δί 3), ἂν Ἐς , Ν x 
μειγνυμένου; HV μέεγιστην, VY) Ll, ἔφη TL γὰρ αν 


19. τούς γ᾽ ἐν πάσῃ κτλ. : ‘+ you 
mean those which in every land are 
recognized as in force on the same 
points.’? For νομιζομένους, see on i. 
1. 1. --- ἔθεντο : established for them- 
selves. Note the force of the mid. as 
contrasted with the act. 
and θεῖναι following. — πῶς ἄν : sc. οἱ 
ἄνθρωποι θεῖντο. --- οὔτε ὁμόφωνοί εἰσι : 
nor (granting that they could come 
together) are they of one speech.— τοὺς 
νόμους τούτους : obviously repeated 
for emphasis. — νομίζεται ; i.e. νόμος 


τεθεικέναι 


ἐστίν. --- σέβειν : ‘the most general 
expression for religious veneration’ 
(Classen), in prose a rare substitute for 
σέβεσθαι. Cf. θεοὺς σέβοιεν Ages. i. 27. 

20. οὐκέτι : as in iii. 4. 10.---- οὗτος 
(ἰ.6. τὸ μὴ μείγνυσθαι) : attracted into 
agreement with νόμος. H. 632 a. — 
τί δή : how so, expresses surprise. 

21. καὶ γάρ: as in 14. --- γέ rou: 
assuredly. — κειμένους : equivalent 
to τεθειμένους. ---- οἱ μέν, οἱ δέ: parti- 
tive appos. with ἔνιοι. ---- λανθάνοντες " 
by remaining undiscovered. 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA IV. 4. 231 


; , » A A 
μεῖζον πάθοιεν ἄνθρωποι τεκνοποιούμενοι τοῦ κακῶς 
a > 9» »¥ a a 
“Πῶς οὖν," ἔφη, “κακῶς οὗτοι τεκνο- 28 
a 9 Oe λύ > A Ν 5 Ν »” 9 
ποιοῦνται, OUS γε οὐδὲν κωλύει ἀγαθοὺς αὐτοὺς ὄντας ἐξ 
ν Ν 3 
“Ὅτι νὴ At,” ἔφη, “ οὐ μόνον 
ἈΝ Ν “" 
ἀγαθοὺς δεῖ τοὺς ἐξ ἀλλήλων παιδοποιουμένους εἶναι, 


Ὁ 3) 
τεκνοποιεῖσθαι; 
170 ἀγαθῶν παιδοποιεῖσθαι;" 


ἀλλὰ καὶ ἀκμάζοντας τοῖς σώμασιν: ἢ δοκεῖ σοι ὅμοια 
τὰ σπέρματα εἶναι τὰ τῶν ἀκμαζόντων τοῖς τῶν μήπω 
ἀκμαζόντων ἢ τῶν παρηκμακότων;" “᾿Αλλά, μὰ Ai’,” 
“Πότερα οὖν," ἔφη, “ βελ- 
«ς Ta 


> 
“Οὐκ εἰκὸς μὰ 


> 9 > 
175 ἔφη, “οὐκ εἰκὸς ὅμοια εἶναι." 
’ ᾽) ~ Ψ ” » Ν ~ 
τίω;" “Δῆλον om,” ἔφη, “τὰ τῶν ἀκμαζόντων." 
“A ‘ > ’ » > A ” 
TOV μὴ ἀκμαζόντων apa ov σπουδαῖα. 
429) » 
At,” ἔφη. 
> Ν > 5 »¥ 
“Ov yap οὖν," edn. 


“ ν A 
“Οὐκοῦν οὕτω ye ov Set παιδοποιεῖσθαι." 
« 3 aA 9 Ψ' ΄ 

Οὐκοῦν οἵ γε οὕτω παιδοποιούμενοι 
ε A “A » A 
180 ὡς οὐ δεῖ παιδοποιοῦνται;" “ Ἔμοιγε δοκεῖ; ἔφη. “Τίνες 
3 » ” »¥ «“ ω “ἡ A » ᾽ν e ” 
οὖν ἄλλοι," ἔφη, “ κακῶς ἂν παιδοποιοῖντο, εἴ γε μὴ οὕτοι; 
ε nw ᾽ Ἀ wn *> 
““Opoyvapove σοι," ἔφη, “καὶ τοῦτο. “Τί δέ; τοὺς eb 24 
ποιοῦντας GVTEVEPYETELY οὐ πανταχοῦ νόμιμόν ἐστι; 
(ΝΖ ΣΌΝ Je ΄ Ν Ν a » Er” 
Nopipov,” ἔφη: “παραβαΐίνεται δὲ καὶ τοῦτο. Οὐυκουν 
᾿ χ 
186 καὶ οἵ τοῦτο παραβαίνοντες δίκην διδόασι φίλων μὲν ἀγα- 
an » A 
θῶν ἔρημοι γιγνόμενοι, τοὺς δὲ μισοῦντας ἑαυτοὺς avay- 
Ἄ > A 
καζόμενοι διώκειν; ἢ οὐχ οἱ μὲν εὖ ποιοῦντες τοὺς 
A Ν ’ Ν 
χρωμένους ἑαυτοῖς ἀγαθοὶ φίλοι εἰσίν, οἱ δὲ μὴ ἀντευεργε- 
“ Ν Ν \ “A 
TOUVTES τοὺς τοιούτους διὰ μὲν τὴν ἀχαριστίαν μισοῦνται 


22. τοῦ κακῶς τεκνοποιεῖσθαι: well observed (by Winans) that Soc- 


i.e. producing imbecile or deformed 
children. 

23. ὅτι νὴ Ala κτλ. : Hugo 
Grotius, the famous writer on inter- 
national law, in his treatise De jure 
belli ac pacis expresses surprise at 
Socrates for condemning incestuous 
marriages on the ground only of 
disparity of age. But it has been 


rates is only attempting to set forth 
the physiological reason for the fact 
mentioned in 22. — δῆλον ὅτι, ἔφη : 
as in iii. 7. 1. --- σπουδαῖα : vigorous. 
—ottw: i.e. by such intermarriages. 
— γὰρ οὖν : see on iii. 3. 2. 

24. wapaBalverar δέ: without a 
preceding μέν, a forcible opposition. 
---διώκειν : to seek the company. of, 


232 


al , ’ὔ , 3) 
χρῆσθαι τούτους μάλιστα διώκουσι; 


ἘΕΒΝΟΦΩΝΤΟΣ ΑΠΟΜΝΗΜΟΝΕΥΜΑΤΑ Δ. 4, 5. 


A \ , A 
190 ὑπ᾿ αὐτῶν, διὰ δὲ TO μάλιστα λυσιτελεῖν τοῖς τοιούτοις 


Ν πὰ 
“Νὴ τὸν Δί᾽, ὦ 


, ”» »¥ « n ~ , ¥ Ν Ἶ . 
Σώκρατες," ἔφη, “θεοῖς ταῦτα πάντα ἔοικε: τὸ γὰρ τοὺς 


/ > ‘\ “A / Ν ’ » 
νόμους αὐτοὺς τοῖς παραβαίνουσι τὰς τιμωρίας ἔχειν βελ- 


΄ x a ew, ΄ a > ” 
TLOVOS Ἢ ΚΑΤ ἄνθρωπον νομοθέτου δοκεῖ μοι ειὄναι. 


θετεῖν ἢ ἄλλα τῶν δικαίων ;” 


“Οὐκ ἄλλα μὰ Δί᾽, ἔφη: 


ςς “A Ν x » Ψ ἣς δί ᾽ 5 
σχολῇ γὰρ ἄν ἄλλος γέ τις τὰ δίκαια νομοθετήσειεν, εἰ 


μὴ θεός." 


‘\ > 3) 
τε καὶ νόμιμον εἶναι ἀρέσκει. 


πλησιάζοντας. 


« Ν A θ na »* Re , Ἀ δ τα δί , 
Kat tous θεοις apa, ὦ Ἱππία, τὸ αὑτὸ OiKaLov 


A ΄ Ν , ΄, ee” δ 
200 Τοιαυτα λέγων TE Καὶ πράττων δικαιοτέρους ETOLEL τους 


ε \ \ , 3 ΄ δ , ε κ᾿ 
Os δὲ KQL πρακτικωτέβους ETOLEL TOVS συνοντας εαύτῳ, 


νῦν αὖ τοῦτο λέξω. 


νομίζων γὰρ ἐγκράτειαν ὑπάρχειν 


3 x > ~ lA / ’, “A \ 
ἀγαθὸν εἶναι τῷ μέλλοντι καλόν τι πράξειν, πρῶτον μὲν 


as in ii. 8. 6. — διὰ δὲ τὸ λυσιτελεῖν 
κτλ. : yet on account of the special ad- 
vantage of associating with such men, 
they constantly seek their company. 
— cots ταῦτα πάντα ἔοικε: all that 
seems very much like gods, by which 
Hippias confirms what he has al- 
ready (19) in general admitted. The 
comparison is a condensed one 
(comparatio compendiaria); i.e. with 
the gods instead of with their works. 
See on πρὸς τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους iii. 5. 4, 
and cf. ὁμοίαν ταῖς δούλαις εἶχε τὴν 
ἐσθῆτα Cyr. ν. τ. 4. --- τὸ τοὺς νόμους 
τὰς τιμωρίας ἔχειν : the fact that the 
laws carry with them their own pen- 
alties. 

25. ἄλλα τῶν δικαίων : ‘‘ some- 
thing different from righteousness.”’ 
For the gen. of distinction, see on 
ὁδοῦ ii. 3. 16. --- σχολῇ : as in iii. 14. 


3.— καὶ rots θεοῖς κτλ. : correlative 
to the thought of 18, which is here 
taken up and extended. In 18, men 
agree that τὸ αὐτὸ νόμιμόν τε καὶ 
δίκαιόν ἐστι, and here the gods too 
hold the same opinion.—rovs πλησιά- 
{ovras: i.e. not only Hippias, but 
the circle of Socrates’s friends, who 
eagerly listened to this and similar 
discussions. 

5. Closely connected with εὐσέβεια 
and δικαιοσύνη, which should form the 
foundations of human training, is 
ἐγκράτεια (self-mastery), which alone 
enables aman to keep a practical grasp 
of life. Self-mastery enables a man 
not only to work successfully but also 
to enjoy thoroughly all true pleasures. 

1. ἐγκράτειαν ὑπάρχειν ἀγαθὸν 
εἶναι : it was a good thing for self-con- 
trol to belong to. ἐγκράτειαν ὑπάρχειν 


195 “Πότερον οὖν, ὦ Ἱππία, τοὺς θεοὺς ἡγῇ τὰ δίκαια vopo-25 


5 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA IV. 5. 230 


a %. ς Ν ἊΝ a aA 3 Ν € N rei 
αὐτὸς φανερὸς ἦν τοῖς συνοῦσιν ἠσκηκὼς αὑτὸν μάλιστα 
δ πάντων ἀνθρώπων, ἔπειτα διαλεγόμενος προετρέπετο πάν- 
των μάλιστα τοὺς συνόντας πρὸς ἐγκράτειαν. ἀεὶ μὲν 
Ἁ “ a 
οὖν περὶ τῶν πρὸς ἀρετὴν χρησίμων αὐτός τε διετέλει 
\ 

μεμνημένος Kal τοὺς συνόντας πάντας ὑπομιμνήσκων. 

, Φι  «ᾧ ‘ Ν 352." yy , 
οἶδα δέ ποτε αὐτὸν Kal πρὸς Εὐθύδημον περὶ ἐγκρατείας 
το τοιάδε διαλεχθέντα.- “Εἰπέ pou,” ἔφη, “ὦ Ἐῤθύδημε, dpa 

Ν Ἀ “A / Ss \ > Ν Ἁ ’ 
καλὸν καὶ μεγαλεῖον νομίζεις εἶναι καὶ ἀνδρὶ καὶ πόλει 
κτῆμα ἐλευθερίαν; “Ὡς οἷόν τέ γε μάλιστα, ἔφη. 
«Ὁ > ¥ Cry “A ὃ Ν lal γ΄ ε ἴω 
Οστις οὖν ἄρχεται ὑπὸ τῶν διὰ τοῦ σώματος ἡδονῶν 
᾽ ν ὃ Ν , \ ὃ , , δ , , 
Kal Ova ταύτας μὴ δύναται πράττειν τὰ βέλτιστα, Vopi- 
lal 5 ͵ > ” » 

16 ζεις τοῦτον ἐλεύθερον εἶναι; ἔφη. 


τὰ βέλτιστα, 


ν Ψ» 
“««“Ἤκιστα," «Ἴσως 
A 5 - , ys A 4 
yap ἐλευθέριον φαίνεταί σοι τὸ πράττειν 
iy A » Ν , A nw 
εἶτα TO ἔχειν TOUS κωλύσοντας TAH τοιαῦτα ποιεῖν ἀνελεύ- 
“Παντάπασιν 
“Ny 
ANY) 


ςς , δέ ὃ μι ε 5 A 
Πότερα" € σοι δοκουσιν οἱ ἀκρατεις 


᾽) 4 . 

θερον νομίζεις; “Παντάπασί γε," ἔφη. 

Ψ ἴω Δ), τ Φ A 5 , io 3) 
ἄρα σοι δοκοῦσιν οἱ ἀκρατεῖς ἀνελεύθεροι εἶναι: 

% 4? > ld ” 
20Tov Al, εἰκότως. 


4, , Ν ’ ’, x Ἀν ἦν / 
κωλύεσθαι μόνον τὰ κάλλιστα πράττειν, ἢ καὶ avayKale- 


δ x fo treat γ5 
σθαι Ta ALT KX LOTA ποιειν: 


κ᾿ a 
“Οὐδὲν ἧττον ἔμοιγ᾽, ἔφη, 


“δοκοῦσι ταῦτα ἀναγκάζεσθαι ἢ ἐκεῖνα κωλύεσθαι." 


is subj. of εἶναι. --- μάλιστα πάντων : 
above all men, belongs to the subj., 
while πάντων μάλιστα below is equiv- 
alent to above everything, and is con- 
‘nected with ἐγκράτειαν. 

2. ἀεὶ μὲν οὖν κτλ. : ‘he both 
himself always kept in mind the 
things conducive to virtue.’’ Const. 
περί with μεμνημένος, and for the par- 
ticiple with διατελέω, see on iv. 2. 4. 
- κτῆμα ἐλευθερίαν : note the em- 
phatic juxtaposition of this pred. and 
subject. — οἷόν τέ ye: see on iv. 2. 11. 
--μάλιστα : sc. καλὸν καὶ μεγαλεῖον. 


3. τῶν διὰ τοῦ σώματος ἡδονῶν: 
see on i. 5. 6.— ἥκιστα : ‘‘ far from 
it.’? — ἐλευθέριον : pred., fitting a 
freeman. —eira: see on ii. 2. 14. — 
τοὺς κωλύσοντας : for τούς with the 
fut. participle, see on τοὺς τάξοντας 
lil. 4. 4. --- ποιεῖν : for the inf. with 
verbs of hindering, see on πορεύε- 
σθαι i. 6. 6. 

4. εἰκότως : naturally. — οὐδὲν 
ἧττον ἤ : just as much 8. --- ταῦτα, 
ἐκεῖνα : Sc. ποιεῖν. But cf. τὰ κάκιστα 
ἀναγκάζοντας in 5, and see on φροντί- 
ζοντας i. τ. 11. 


234 EENO®QNTOS AMOMNHMONEYMATA Δ. 5. 
“Ποίους δέ twas δεσπότας ἡγῇ τοὺς τὰ μὲν ἄριστα 5 


Ν \ , 3 4 ᾽ ε 
25 κωλύοντας, τὰ δὲ κάκιστα ἀναγκάζοντας ;" “Ὡς δυνατὸν 


Ν 4>9> ¥ ’ ” 
νὴ Av,” ἔφη, “κακίστους. 
«ς9 XN eae ΒΕ: 6c Ἁ Ν aA ’ 

Eyo pev, edn, “τὴν παρὰ τοῖς κακί- 

» 

“Τὴν κακίστην apa δουλείαν οἱ ἀκρα- 

“Σοφίαν δὲ τὸ 6 


’ὔὕ 5 Ἀ 3 “ 5 4 “ 9 ’ὔ 
30 μέγιστον ἀγαθὸν ου δοκεῖ σοι ATELPYOVTA τῶν ἀνθρώπων 


“Δουλείαν δὲ ποίαν κακίστην 
νομίζεις εἶναι; 
στοις δεσπόταις." 
τεῖς δουλεύουσιν; “"Epovye δοκεῖ," ἔφη. 
ἡ ἀκρασία εἰς τοὐναντίον αὐτοὺς ἐμβάλλειν; ἢ οὐ δοκεῖ 
σοι προσέχειν τε τοῖς ὠφελοῦσι καὶ καταμανθάνειν αὐτὰ 
κωλύειν ἀφέλκουσα ἐπὶ τὰ ἡδέα καὶ πολλάκις αἰσθανο- 
μένους τῶν ἀγαθῶν τε καὶ τῶν κακῶν ἐκπλήξασα ποιεῖν 
3570 χεῖρον ἀντὶ τοῦ βελτίονος αἱρεῖσθαι; “Γίγνεται 
Tout,” ἔφη. “Σωφροσύνης δέ, ὦ Εὐθύδημε, τίνι ἂν φαΐ- 7 
μὲν ἧττον ἢ τῷ ἀκρατεῖ προσήκειν; αὐτὰ γὰρ δήπου 
τὰ ἐναντία σωφροσύνης καὶ ἀκρασίας ἔργα ἐστίν." 
“Ὁμολογῶ καὶ τοῦτο, ἔφη. “Tov δ᾽ ἐπιμελεῖσθαι 
40 ὧν προσήκει οἴει τι κωλυτικώτερον εἶναι ἀκρασίας; 
“Οὔκουν ἔγωγε," ἔφη. “Τοῦ δὲ ἀντὶ τῶν ὠφελούντων τὰ 
βλάπτοντα προαιρεῖσθαι ποιοῦντος, καὶ τούτων μὲν ἐπιμε- 
λεῖσθαι, ἐκείνων δὲ ἀμελεῖν πείθοντος, καὶ τοῖς σωφρονοῦσι 


5. ποίους τινάς : see on τοιάδε τις 
i. 1. 1. --- γῇ : 86. εἶναι. --- παρά : 
lit. with, at the house of; here (to 
follow Eng. idiom), wnder. — δουλείαν 
δουλεύουσιν : suffer slavery. For the 
cognate acc., see on ἀγῶνας ἐνίκων ii. 
6. 26. 

6. σοφίαν, τὸ μέγιστον ἀγαθόν : 
for the views of Socrates on the 
summum bonum, see Introd. § 19. — 
ἢ δὺ δοκεῖ σοι κτλ. : const. ἢ οὐ δοκεῖ 
σοι (ἡ ἀκρασία) κωλύειν καὶ ποιεῖν. ---- 
προσέχειν τοῖς ὠφελοῦσι : from at- 
tending to useful things. — αἰσθανο- 
μένους : even when they have a per- 


ception. —ékmAntaca: by bewildering 
them. Cf. ἐξίστησιν i. 3. 12. 

7. σωφροσύνης tive ἧττον προσή- 
kev: who has a less share of dis- 
cretion? For the gen. with verbs of 
sharing, see G. 1097, 2; H. 737. — 
αὐτὰ τὰ ἐναντία : pred., the direct op- 
posites (of each other). — τοῦ ἔπιμε- 
λεῖσθαι: objective gen. with κωλυ- 
τικώτερον. --- ὧν προσήκει : ““ duties.’” 
- τοῦ ποιοῦντος, πείθοντος, ἀναγκά- 
ἵοντος : for the participle used sub- 
stantively, see on τὸ κρατοῦν i. 2. 43. 
- τοῖς σωφρονοῦσι τὰ ἐναντία : the 
opposite of what prudent men do. 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA IV. 5. 


239 


ΝΎ ΠΣ τ A > , ¥ 9 , , 
TQ EVAVTLA TOLELV ἀναγκάζοντος OLEL TL ἀνθρώπῳ κακιον 


“ODE,” edn: 


> ” 
45 εἰναι; 


nw 4A nw 
“Οὐκοῦν τὴν ἐγκράτειαν τῶν 


> ’ "ἡ \ 3 ’ ἄχς Ὡς “ 5 ᾽ὔ BTW 
EVAVTLWY ω) THV AKPad lav €LKOS τοις ἀνθρώποις QLTLaV 


> ” 
εἰναι; 


, Ν ” IH » > ” 
TLWV TO ALTLOV ELKOS αριστον ειναι: 


> » 
“Πάνυ μὲν οὖν," edn. 


ςς 5 ~ A ~ > 
Οὐκουν Kal των ἐναν- 


“Εἰκὸς yap,” ἐφη. 


¥ » ) » > 
“Ἔοικεν apa,” edn, “ὦ Εὐθύδημε, ἄριστον ἀνθρώπῳ 


3 , 3 ” 
50 εγκρβάτεια ειναι; 


» = 
“Εἰκότως yap, ἔφη, “ὦ Σώκρατες." 


“Ἐκεῖνο δέ, ὦ Εὐθύδημε, ἤδη πώποτε ἐνεθυμήθης ;" 


“ “" .} » 
Ποῖον ;” ἐφη. 


4 Ἀ ‘ Ν 4 
“Ὅτι καὶ ἐπὶ τὰ ἡδέα ἐφ᾽ ἅπερ μόνα 


ὃ ae, Ε] , ‘ > Q , » Ὅς ἣν \ 9 
OKEL 7) ακρασια TOUS av βώπους αγέειν, αὐτΉ μεν ου 


ὃ ὔ » ε δ᾽ 3 ’ , , "ὃ 
υναται αγέειν, 7) εγκρατεια TAVT@V μάλιστα ω) εσθαι 


Bb ποιεῖ. “Πῶς; ἔφη. “Ὥσπερ ἡ μὲν ἀκρασία οὐκ ἐῶσα 
~ »” ἐν »Ἅ»Ἅ ’ὕ » 5 ’ὕ 5 
καρτερεῖν οὔτε λιμὸν οὔτε δίψος οὔτε ἀφροδισίων ἐπιθυ- 


, » > , ὃ > @ , » ἐῶν . 
μιὰν OUTE AYPUTVLAV, ι ὧν μονὼν ἐστιν NOEWS μὲν 


~ Ν “ Ν > ’ ε la y He. , 
φαγεῖν τε καὶ πιεῖν Kal ἀφροδισιάσαι, ἡδέως δ᾽ ἀναπαύ- 


, \ A \ , ‘3 
σασθαί TE Και κοιμηθῆναι, [καὶ] περιμειναντας και aAVa- 


’ὔ ν “Δ al e » ἡ ὃ ’ λύ 
60 σχομένους εως AV Ταῦτα WS EVL NOLOTA γένηται, K@MAVEL 


“ A , 
τοῖς ἀναγκαιοτάτοις τε καὶ συνεχεστάτοις ἀξιολόγως 


me e S75 (ὦ , , aA a Q 
ἥδεσθαι. ἡ δ᾽ ἐγκράτεια μόνη ποιοῦσα καρτερεῖν τὰ 


> , ’ Ν . “ > 4 , ee 
εἰρημένα μόνη καὶ ἥδεσθαι ποιεῖ ἀξίως μνήμης ἐπὶ 


For the condensed form of expres- 
sion, see On θεοῖς ταῦτα πάντα ἔοικε 
iv. 4. 24. -- οἴει τι: the τὶ shows 
that the preceding participles are 
neuter. 

8. οὐκοῦν κτλ. : const. οὐκοῦν 
εἰκὸς (ἐστὶ) τὴν ἐγκράτειαν αἰτίαν εἶναι 
τῶν ἐναντίων ἢ τὴν ἀκρασίαν. --- τῶν 
ἐναντίων ἤ : of the opposite of what. 
- ἄριστον : for the gender, see on 
χρησιμώτερον ii. 3. 1. 

9. ὅτι καὶ ἐπὶ τὰ ἡδέα κτλ. : that 
even to those pleasures to which alone 
intemperance seems to lead men, 


it really cannot lead them. ἀκρασία 


is lack of self-control, the exact op- 
posite of ἐγκράτεια.--- πῶς : how so? — 
ὥσπερ : inasmuch α8. --- ἔστιν : it is 
possible. — περιμείναντας, ἀνασχομέ- 
νους : circumstantial participles of 
manner, explaining καρτερεῖν, and 
belonging to its subj. (sc. ἀνθρώπου). 
— ὡς ἔνι ἥδιστα: see on iii. 8, 4. 
From οὐκ ἐῶσα to γένηται may be 
regarded as a parenthesis explana- 
tory of κωλύει. --- τοῖς ἀναγκαιοτάτοις 
τε καὶ συνεχεστάτοις : the most nat- 
ural and most continuous pleasures. 
— ἥδεσθαι ἀξίως μνήμης: fo have 
any pleasure worth recalling. 


236 EENO®QNTOS AILTOMNHMONEYMATA Δ. 5. 


τοῖς εἰρημένοις." “Παντάπασιν,᾽ ἔφη, “ἀληθῆ λέγεις." 
66 “᾿Αλλὰ μὴν τοῦ μαθεῖν τι καλὸν καὶ ἀγαθὸν καὶ τοῦ ἐπι- τὸ 
μεληθῆναι τῶν τοιούτων τινὸς δι᾿ ὧν ἂν τις καὶ τὸ ἑαυτοῦ 
σῶμα καλῶς διοικήσειε καὶ τὸν ἑαυτοῦ οἶκον καλῶς οἰκο- 
la Ά, ’ \ ’ 3 4 ’ Ν 
νομήσειε καὶ φίλοις καὶ πόλει ὠφέλιμος γένοιτο καὶ 
3 \ - > > @ 5 ’ 3 /, > Ν ἣν 
ἐχθροὺς κρατήσειεν, ἀφ᾽ ὧν οὐ μόνον ὠφέλειαι, ἀλλὰ καὶ 
70 ἡδοναὶ μέγισται γίγνονται, οἱ μὲν ἐγκρατεῖς ἀπολαύουσι 
πράττοντες αὐτά, οἱ δ᾽ ἀκρατεῖς οὐδενὸς μετέχουσι. τῷ 
x Ὁ an 
yap av ἧττον φήσαιμεν τῶν τοιούτων προσήκειν ἢ @ 
ἥκιστα ἔξεστι ταῦτα πράττειν, κατεχομένῳ ἐπὶ τῷ σπου- 
΄ ᾿ \ \ 3 , ε “τῶ wag 207 
δάζειν περὶ Tas ἐγγυτάτω ἡδονάς; καὶ ὁ Ἐῤθύδημος, 11 
16 “Δοκεῖς μοι," ἔφη, “ὦ Σώκρατες, λέγειν ὡς ἀνδρὶ ἥττονι 
τῶν διὰ τοῦ σώματος ἡδονῶν πάμπαν οὐδεμιᾶς ἀρετῆς 
προσήκει. “Τί γὰρ διαφέρει," ἔφη, “ ὦ Εὐθύδημε, ἄνθρω- 
πος ἀκρατὴς θηρίου τοῦ ἀμαθεστάτου; ὅστις γὰρ τὰ 
μὲν κράτιστα μὴ σκοπεῖ, τὰ ἥδιστα δ᾽ ἐκ παντὸς τρόπου 
A A 47 HK ᾽ ἴω 5 ’ ’ 
80 ζητεῖ ποιεῖν, τί ἂν διαφέροι τῶν ἀφρονεστάτων βοσκημά- 
των ; ἀλλὰ τοῖς ἐγκρατέσι μόνοις ἔξεστι σκοπεῖν τὰ κρά- 
τιστα τῶν πραγμάτων, καὶ λόγῳ καὶ ἔργῳ διαλέγοντας 
κατὰ γένη τὰ μὲν ἀγαθὰ προαιρεῖσθαι, τῶν δὲ κακῶν ἀπέ. 
” Ν να » δ᾿ > > ΄ 
χεσθαι." καὶ οὕτως ἔφη ἀρίστους τε καὶ εὐδαιμονεστά- 12 
»” , RF Ν ’ ΄ 
85Tous ἄνδρας γίγνεσθαι καὶ διαλέγεσθαι δυνατωτάτους. 


ἔφη δὲ καὶ τὸ διαλέγεσθαι ὀνομασθῆναι ἐκ τοῦ συνιόντας 


10. ἀλλὰ μήν: see on i. 1. 6. --- 
τοῦ μαθεῖν, τοῦ ἐπιμεληθῆναι : gens. of 
source with ἀπολαύουσι. G. 1130; 
H. 750. —amparrovres αὐτά : ‘‘in the 
very act of practicing them’”’ (sc. τὸ 
μαθεῖν καὶ τὸ ἐπιμελεῖσθαι). ---- τροσή- 
κειν : as in 7. --- κατεχομένῳ ἐπὶ τῷ 
σπουδάζειν περί: ‘‘ wholly occupied 
in the pursuit οἵ." --- τὰς ἐγγυτάτω 
jdovds : i.e. pleasures of the moment. 


Cf. ai ἐκ τοῦ παραχρῆμα ἡδοναί ii. τ. 20. 

11. ἥττονι τῶν ἡδονῶν: under sub- 
jection to the pleasures.. Cf. ἥττω 
γαστρός i. 5. 1. ---τί γάρ: (sc. quite 
right,) for in what respect. — ἀλλά: 
atqui. 

12. οὕτως : i.e. by self-control, 
and that discretion which carefully 
distinguishes the good from the bad, 
and cherishes it. — διαλέγεσθαι, 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA IV. 5, 6. 257 


A 4 ὃ ’ \ , Ν , 
κοινῇ βουλεύεσθαι διαλέγοντας κατὰ γένη τὰ πράγματα: 
δεῖν οὖν πειρᾶσθαι ὅτι μάλιστα πρὸς τοῦτο ἑαυτὸν ἕτοιμον 
παρασκευάζειν καὶ τούτου μάλιστα ἐπιμελεῖσθαι. ἐκ τού- 
ϑύτου γὰρ γίγνεσθαι ἄνδρας ἀρίστους τε καὶ ἡγεμονικωτά- 
τους καὶ διαλεκτικωτάτους. 

ε δὲ ἃ ὃ λ , > ’ ‘\ , 
Ὡς δὲ Kat διαλεκτικωτέρους ἐποίει τοὺς συνόντας, 
Σωκράτης γὰρ τοὺς μὲν 

3 ’ 7g” » A 3 + SO δ A ¥ 
εἰδότας τί ἕκαστον εἴη TOV ὄντων ἐνόμιζε Kal τοῖς ἄλλοις 


πειράσομαι καὶ τοῦτο λέγειν. 


x A 

dv ἐξηγεῖσθαι δύνασθαι, τοὺς δὲ μὴ εἰδότας οὐδὲν ἔφη 
5 θαυμαστὸν εἶναι αὐτούς τε σφάλλεσθαι καὶ ἄλλους σφάλ- 

Kg 4 “ A A 
ew: ὧν ἕνεκα σκοπῶν σὺν τοῖς συνοῦσι Ti ἕκαστον εἴη 
A » 5) , > »¥ , \ ἥν ΑΝ / 
TOV ὄντων οὐδέποτ᾽ ἔληγε. πάντα μὲν οὖν H διωρίζετο 
Ν ὦ x ¥ A 3 ν \ Ν ’ ~ 
πολὺ ἔργον av εἴη διεξελθεῖν, ἐν ὅσοις δὲ τὸν τρόπον τῆς 
3 ’ ’ὕ > “ Ld “Ὁ A 
ἐπισκέψεως δηλώσειν οἶμαι, τοσαῦτα λέξω. πρῶτον δὲ 
Ξε 
1Ἰοπερὶ εὐσεβείας ὧδέ πως ἐσκόπει. “Εἰπέ μοι," ἔφη, “ὦ 
> 4 as 4 9 , 3 3) Ν 9 

Εὐθύδημε, ποῖόν τι νομίζεις εὐσέβειαν εἶναι ;" καὶ ὅς, 
» 
ἐφη. 
διαλέγοντας : in the act. form, this verb 
means to pick out, select; διαλέγεσθαι 
is to converse, then, specifically, ‘‘ to 
arrive at truth by discussion.’’ For 
the lofty estimate placed on ‘ dialec- 
tic’ by Plato, cf. ap’ οὖν δοκεῖ σοι, ἔφην 
ἐγώ; ὥσπερ θριγκὸς (a coping stone) 
Tots μαθήμασιν ἡ διαλεκτικὴ ἡμῖν ἐπάνω 


429) 


» > A A 
“Κάλλιστον, νὴ Δί᾽, “Ἔχεις οὖν εἰπεῖν ὁποῖός τις ὁ 


ness), σοφία (wisdom), τὸ ἀγαθόν and 
τὸ καλόν (the good and the beautiful), 
ἀνδρεία (manliness), βασιλεία (royalty), 
τυραννίς (autocracy), ἀριστοκρατία (ar- 
istocracy), πλουτοκρατία (plutocracy), 
δημοκρατία (democracy). In case of 
contradiction, Socrates knew how to 
bring the question back to the funda- 
mental conception of the point at 


κεῖσθαι, καὶ οὐκέτ᾽ ἄλλο τούτου μάθημα 


ἀλλ᾽ 
ἔχειν ἤδη τέλος τὰ τῶν μαθημάτων : 
"Ἐμοιγ, ἔφη Rep. 534 x. 

6. An exposition of the Socratic 
method of discussion, the aim of 
which was always to arrive at the real 
essence of things through an accu- 
rate analysis of concepts. Xenophon 
gives his definition of the following: 
εὐσέβεια (piety), δικαιοσύνη (righteous- 


ἀνωτέρω ὀρθῶς ἂν ἐπιτίθεσθαι, 


issue; and based his discussion on 
generally recognized truths. 

1. διαλεκτικωτέρους : see on iv. 
5. 12.— ov ἕνεκα : wherefore. — σκο- 
wav: supplementary participle with 
ἔληγε. --- διωρίζετο : cf. dpicare i. 2. 
35. — τὸν τρόπον : his method. 

2. ὧδέ πως, ποῖόν τι: see on 
τοιάδε τις i. 1. 1. — καὶ ὅς : for the rel. 
as dem., see on i..4. 3. 


238 EENOSQNTOS AILOMNHMONEYMATA Δ. 6. 


” ᾽ Ἀπ να eae A 
εὐσεβής ἐστιν; “Ἐμοὶ μὲν δοκεῖ," ἔφη, “ὁ τοὺς θεοὺς 


γον δ, i Fue ad 
τιμῶν." “Ἔξεστι δὲ ὃν av tis βούληται τρόπον τοὺς 

‘ A ” ¥ Ν ΒΝ 3 Ἂ a a 
15 θεοὺς τιμᾶν; “Οὔκ, ἀλλὰ νόμοι εἰσὶ καθ᾽ ovs δεῖ τοῦτο 
aA) ἐξ ΧΑ dD Lane Ν , , 29 4 290 7 x 
ποιειν. Οὐκοῦν ὁ τοὺς νόμους τούτους εἰδὼς εἰδείη ἂν 


“Οἶμαι ἔγωγ᾽," ἔφη. “Ap 

a e 20 A ε A . \ A 4 ¥ ¥ 

οὖν 6 εἰδὼς ws δεῖ τοὺς θεοὺς τιμᾶν οὐκ ἄλλως οἴεται 
μ 


ε A Ἂν Ν A 3) 
ὡς δεῖ τοὺς θεοὺς τιμᾶν ; 


«ς 3 Ν 4. 9 »Ἄ 

Οὐ yap οὖν," Edy. 

«Οὐ 
UK 


ce ¥ \ \ Ν Ν , 29 \ 
O apa τὰ περὶ τοὺς θεοὺς νόμιμα εἰδὼς 


A aA A x ε > 
δεῖν τοῦτο ποιεῖν ὡς οἶδεν ;᾿ 
> 
¥ , Ἂ “ x ε ¥ A 
20 “Ἄλλως δέ τις θεοὺς τιμᾷ ἢ ὡς οἴεται Setv;” 
οἶμαι," ἔφη 
᾽ . 
’, x ‘ θ Ἁ ον 1] «Π , Ν Ὃν ΘΝ «0 > 
νομίμως av τοὺς θεοὺς τιμῴη ; άνυ μὲν οὖν. ὑὐκ- 
i ον , A ε A a.) «Tn \ ¥ 99 
οῦν ὅ YE νομίμως τιμῶν ws δεῖ τιμᾷ; Πῶς γὰρ οὔ; 
“Ὁ δέ ye ὡς δεῖ τιμῶν εὐσεβής ἐστι; “Πάνυ μὲν οὖν," 
25 ἔφη. 
€ A 13 488 ie ΄ “ον δας nA» Ὁ «ὃ ay 
ἡμῖν εὐσεβὴς ὡρισμένος εἴη; μοὶ γοῦν, ἔφη, “ δοκεῖ. 
> Ss » ἃ + 
“᾿Ανθρώποις δὲ apa ἔξεστιν ὃν av τις τρόπον Bovdr- 


iO apa τὰ περὶ τοὺς θεοὺς νόμιμα εἰδὼς ὀρθῶς ἂν 


ται χρῆσθαι;" “Οὖὔκ, ἀλλὰ καὶ περὶ τούτους [ὁ εἰδὼς a] 
3 / > a oS , al , Ka 
ἐστι νόμιμα, καθ᾽ ἃ δεῖ ἀλλήλοις χρῆσθαι, νόμιμος av 

80 εἴη |.” 


δεῖ χρῶνται; 


Ti ati Seen, ε Χ an , > ΄ ε 
Οὐκοῦν οἱ κατὰ ταῦτα χρώμενοι ἀλλήλοις ὡς 
“Πῶς γὰρ ov;” “Οὐκοῦν οἵ γε ws δεῖ 
’ vA a 2) “TT , Ν 98 » 
χρώμενοι καλῶς χρῶνται; ἄνυ μὲν οὖν," ἔφη. 
«Οὐ A Ψ A > θ ’ λῷ , λῷ 

ὑκοῦν ol γε τοῖς ἀνθρώποις καλῶς χρώμενοι καλῶς 
“Εἰκός γ᾽, ἔφη 
᾽ . 

35 δὲ O 3 “ ε a ΄ θ 4 δί 7 aA ” 
ὑκοῦν οἱ τοῖς νόμοις πειθόμενοι δίκαια οὗτοι ποιοῦσι; 


πράττουσι τἀνθρώπεια πράγματα ;" 


’ Ν > 39) » Vd Ν ἂν » 
“Πάνυ μὲν ody,” ἔφη.] “Δίκαια δὲ οἶσθα," ἔφη, “ὁποῖα 
a » 
καλεῖται; ““A οἱ νόμοι κελεύουσιν, ἔφη. “Οἱ apa 


A Δ. ἢ ΄, , , , a \ a 
TOLOVVTES A OL νομοι κελεύουσι δίκαιά TE WOLOVGOL Και A 


3. οὐ yap οὖν : see on iv. 4. 23. 

4. τὰ νόμιμα : ““ what is required 
by the law.’’ — ἡμῖν : as in iv. 2. 14. 

5. ἀνθρώποις : placed first, as 
being the contrast word between 
this question and the one at the end 


of 2.—GAAHAots χρῆσθαι : ‘‘to act 
towards one another.’’ — In this and 
the following section, we see again 
Socrates’s assumption that he who 
knows the right will do it. See on 
iv. 2. 20. 


40 TES δίκαιοί elo ;” 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA 


det;” “Πῶς yap ov;” 


IV. 6. 239 


9 lal 2 Q ’ Qn 
““Οὐκουν οἱ YE TH δίκαια ποιοῦν- 


“Οἶμαι ἔγωγ᾽," ἔφη. 


» 3S 
“Ove. οὖν τινας 


(θ θ “ ’ Ν io ’ ἃ ε ’ὔ λ 4 ” 
πείσεσθαι τοις νόμοις μὴ εἰδότας A OL νόμοι κελεύουσιν; 


“Οὐκ ἔγωγ᾽, ἔφη. 


» ia) \ “Ὁ La) ” 
οἴεσθαι δεῖν μὴ ποιεῖν ταῦτα; 


2O 7 Q ‘ “ A ¥ Q 
“Riddras δὲ ἃ δεῖ ποιεῖν οἴει τινὰς 


“Οὐκ οἶμαι," ἔφη. 


> ¥ A x Ἂ a 
“Οἶδας δέ τινας ἄλλα ποιοῦντας ἢ ἃ οἴονται δεῖν ;" 


45 “Οὐκ ἔγωγ᾽ ,” ἔφη. 


3539, 4ι Ν ’ὔ fa) ” 
εἰδότες οὗτοι TA δίκαια ποιοῦσιν ; 

ἴω σ Ν ΄“ ’ ’ > ᾽ 
“Οὐκοῦν οἵ γε τὰ δίκαια ποιοῦντες δίκαιοί εἰσι; 


γὰρ ἄλλοι; ἔφη. 


“Oj » Ν \ > θ 4 ’ 
Lapa τὰ περὶ ἀνθρώπους νόμιμα 


» , ᾿ > ἋΚ 
Πάνυ μὲν οὖν, ἔφη. 

“ne 
ινες 


“Ὀρθῶς av ποτε ἄρα ὁριζοίμεθα 


ε , ΄, > δ 207 \ δ τ Ὁ ΄ 
ὁριζόμενοι δικαίους ειναι τους εἰδότας TQ πέρι ἀνθρώπους 


50 νόμιμα ;” 


“Ἔμοιγε δοκεῖ, ἔφη. 


“sy ΄ δὲ , ἃ ΄, > ae , ΄, 
οφίαν δὲ τί av φήσαιμεν εἶναι; εἰπέ μοι, πότερά 


A ε \ ἃ φ An Ἁ 5 
σοι δοκοῦσιν οἱ σοφοὶ ἃ ἐπίστανται ταῦτα σοφοὶ εἶναι, 


x > ’ a Ν .-. » th, 
ἡ εἰσΐ τινες A μὴ ἐπίστανται σοφοί; 


ay 3 4 
“A ἐπίστανται, 


A 7» »¥ “A \ ” Ψ α΄. 536... 
δῆλον ort,” ἔφη- “πῶς γὰρ ἄν τις a γε μὴ ἐπίσταιτο, 


bb TavTA σοφὸς εἴη ;" 
) 
εἰσι; 


“Ap οὖν οἱ σοφοὶ ἐπιστήμῃ σοφοί 
“Τίνι γὰρ av,” ἔφη, “ἄλλῳ τις εἴη σοφός, εἴ γε 


, » ¥ > A @ 
μὴ ἐπιστήμῃ;" “Addo δέ τι σοφίαν οἴει εἶναι ἢ ᾧ σοφοί 


3 ” 
εἰσιν; 


«Οὐκ ἔγωγε." 
“> 


“Ἔμοιγε δοκεῖ." 


53 \ »¥ , ΓΦ ὦ ” 
60 εἰναι τὰ OVTA TAVTA ἐπίστασθαι; 


«9 ΄ 4 pire fel Se 
Ἐπιστήμη apa σοφία ἐστίν; 
Ap οὖν δοκεῖ σοι ἀνθρώπῳ δυνατὸν 


“Οὐδὲ μὰ Δί᾽ ἔμοιγε 


πολλοστὸν μέρος αὐτῶν." “Πάντα μὲν ἄρα σοφὸν οὐχ 


6. οἶδας: cf. οἴδασιν Oec. xx. 14, 
οἴδαμεν An. ii. 4. 6, Ionic forms rare 
in Attic. Cf. εἶπα ii. 2. 8. Xeno- 
phon’s use of these forms may be 
explained by his long residence 
among non-Attic Greeks. — ὀρθῶς 
κτλ. : cf. the conclusion reached in 4. 
-ποτέ: ‘‘finally,’’ after this long dis- 
cussion. Cf. μόγις οὖν ποτε ἡμῖν ἅνθρω- 
πος dvéwte τὴν θύραν Plato Prot. 314 Ε. 


7. σοφίαν : see on i. 2. 23.—a 
ἐπίστανται, ταῦτα : in regard to these 
things which they know. —% ᾧ σοφοί 
εἰσιν: than that by which they (sc. 
ἄνθρωποι, implied by the previous τὶς) 
are wise. —Ta ὄντα πάντα ἐπίστα- 
σθαι: cf. Lord Bacon’s saying that 
he had ‘taken all knowledge for his 
province.’ — οὐδὲ πολλοστόν : see on 
ili. 1. 6. 


240 EENO®ONTOS AILOMNHMONEYMATA Δ. 6. 


a » 93 3 A a 
οἷόν Te ἄνθρωπον eivar;” “Ma Δί᾽ οὐ δῆτα, ἔφη. “Ὃ 


¥ ᾿ς eS ς 4 “ Ν ϑ 3 ” 
apa ἐπίσταται ἕκαστος, τοῦτο Kal σοφός ἐστιν; 
“oy A») 
Epovye δοκεῖ. 
«59 3 > % § 27 Ν 3 Ν Ψ , 
65 Ap οὖν, ὦ Ἐῤθύδημε, καὶ τἀγαθὸν οὕτω ζητητέον 8 
“Πῶς ;" edn. 


λιμον εἶναι ;" 


ἃ. τὲ ΨΩ εἰ A δ 2 4 κι 35,2 
ἐστί; Δοκεῖ σοι τὸ αὐτὸ πᾶσιν ὠφέ. 
» 

“Τί δέ; τὸ ἄλλῳ ὠφέλι- 

A 
“Kat 


Αλλο δ᾽ av τι φαίης ἀγαθὸν εἶναι ἢ 


“Οὐκ ἔμοιγε." 

μον οὐ δοκεῖ σοι ἐνίοτε ἄλλῳ βλαβερὸν εἶναι; 

, Ὁ) » ¥ 
para, ἔφη. “ 

1076 ὠφέλιμον ;" “Οὐκ ἔγωγ᾽, edn. 
> A6 3 ν x tun μα ae -, 
ἀγαθόν ἐστιν ὁτῳ av ὠφέλιμον ἢ; 


“Τὸ ἄρα ὠφέλιμον 
“Δοκεῖ μοι," ἔφη. 
» 
“Τὸ δὲ καλὸν ἔχοις ἄν πως ἄλλως εἰπεῖν τί ἐστιν; ἢ 9 
ΕῚ , Ν “ἡ “A x “A xn »¥ >. 2 al a > 
ὀνομάζεις καλὸν ἢ σῶμα ἢ σκεῦος ἢ ἀλλ᾽ ὁτιοῦν, ὃ οἶσθα 
Ν , Ν » 3) ς Ν 279 > » 39) » 
πρὸς πάντα καλὸν ov; Ma Δί οὐκ eywy, ἐφη. 
«9 3 > Ν ἃ ἃ y ee 53 Ν a 
75“°Ap οὖν πρὸς ὁ av EKaoTOY χρήσιμον ἢ, πρὸς τοῦτο 
ey λῶ ¥ A θ ” (πτ 7 ᾿ a 9 »¥ 
εκάστῳ καλῶς exer χρῆσθαι; Πάνυ μὲν οὖν," ἐφη. 
«ςς NO de Ν » “ἥξει. ν x Ν a. ΕΚ 
Καλὸν ὃὲ πρὸς ἀλλο τί ἐστιν ἕκαστον 7 πρὸς ὃ ἑκάστῳ 
“Οὐδὲ πρὸς ἕν ἄλλο," ἔφη. “Τὸ 
, » 4 > Ν a x ΒΡ ΄ ” 
χρήσιμον apa καλὸν ἐστι πρὸς O av ἢ χρήσιμον; 
80 ““Ἔμοιγε δοκεῖ," ἔφη. 


καλῶς ἔχει χρῆσθαι; 


«“᾿Ανδρείαν δέ, ὦ Ἐῤθύδημε, ἄρα τῶν καλῶν νομίζεις τὸ 


εἶναι; “Κάλλιστον μὲν οὖν ἔγωγ᾽, ἔφη. “Χρήσιμον 
8. οὕτω: i.e. so that τὸ ἀγαθόν, 


like σοφός, will prove to be a term 


10. ἀνδρείαν : see on i. 1. 16; iii. 
9. 1. Plato discusses the term 


of relative application.—tTéd ἄλλῳ 
ὠφέλιμον (sc. ὃν) κτλ. : ‘one man’s 
meat is another man’s poison.’’? The 
‘good’ of which Socrates here speaks 
must be understood as practical ad- 
vantage, not as the highest ideal good. 

9. ἄλλως: otherwise, sc. than as 
τὸ ἀγαθόν was defined in 8, ὁ.6. rela- 
tively. —q: ‘‘or possibly.’? — πρὸς 
τοῦτο ἑκάστῳ καλῶς ἔχει χρῆσθαι : if 
is well to use each thing to that end 
(for which it is useful). 


ἀνδρεία in his Protagoras and Laches, 
Socrates being the chief speaker, as 
here, and the line of argument being 
the same. Cf. ταύτην (τὴν ἀνδρείαν 
φημὶ εἶναι) ἔγωγε τὴν τῶν δεινῶν καὶ 
θαρραλέων ἐπιστήμην καὶ ἐν πολέμῳ καὶ 
ἐν τοῖς ἄλλοις ἅπασιν Laches 195 a, 
a definition given as by Nicias, 
but claimed by him to proceed 
from Socrates. — μὲν οὖν: ‘‘much 
rather.’’ 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA IV. 6. 241 


é | 
ἄρα ov πρὸς Ta ἐλάχιστα νομίζεις τὴν avdpeiay;” “Νὴ 
9 
Δί᾽, ἔφη, “πρὸς τὰ μέγιστα μὲν οὖν. “ἾΑρ᾽ οὖν δοκεῖ 
Ν Ν, ὃ , \ 3 ’ ὃ ’ > Ν 
8ὅ σοι πρὸς τὰ δεινά τε καὶ ἐπικίνδυνα χρήσιμον εἶναι τὸ 
a ν 
ἀγνοεῖν αὐτά;" “Ἥκιστά γ᾽, ἔφη. “Οἱ ἄρα μὴ φοβού- 
μενοι τὰ τοιαῦτα διὰ τὸ μὴ εἰδέναι τί ἐστιν, οὐκ ἀνδρεῖοί 
εἰσιν; “Νὴ Av,” ἔφη: “πολλοὶ γὰρ av οὕτω γε τῶν τε 
μαινομένων καὶ τῶν δειλῶν ἀνδρεῖοι εἶεν. “Τί δὲ οἱ καὶ 
90τὰ μὴ δεινὰ δεδοικότες ;” “Ἔτι γε νὴ Δία," ἔφη, “ ἧττον." 
«9 > > \ Ν > θ ἈΝ Ν ‘\ ὃ Ν woes ld 
Ap οὖν τοὺς μὲν ἀγαθοὺς πρὸς τὰ δεινὰ καὶ ἐπικίνδυνα 
» > ὃ ’ ε A > Ν δὲ ἊΝ 4 ” 
ὄντας ἀνδρείους ἡγῇ εἶναι, τοὺς δὲ κακοὺς δειλούς ; 
“Πάνυ μὲν οὖν," ἔφη. “᾿Αγαθοὺς δὲ πρὸς τὰ τοιαῦτα 11 
/ » Ν Δ Ἁ ὃ ? 3 A lal 
νομίζεις ἄλλους τινὰς ἢ τοὺς δυναμένους αὐτοῖς καλῶς 
95 χρῆσθαι;" “Οὔκ, ἀλλὰ τούτους, ἔφη. “Kakods δὲ ἄρα 
x ν , A A θ ” « 7 Ν » 
τοὺς οἰους τούτοις κακως χρῆσθαι; Τίνας γὰρ αλ- 
hous;” ἔφη. “ἾΑρ᾽ οὖν ἕκαστοι χρῶνται ὡς οἴονται 
δεῖν; “Πῶς γὰρ ἄλλως ;" ἔφη. “ἾΑρα οὖν οἱ μὴ δυνά- 
μενοι καλῶς χρῆσθαι ἴσασιν ὡς δεῖ χρῆσθαι;" “Οὐ 
100 δήπου ye,” ἔφη. “Οἱ ἄρα εἰδότες ὡς δεῖ χρῆσθαι, οὗτοι 
καὶ δύνανται;" “Μόνοι y,” ἔφη. “Τί δέ; οἱ μὴ διη- 
μαρτηκότες ἄρα κακῶς χρῶνται τοῖς τοιούτοις; “Οὐκ 
¥ ”»»¥ “unt » n , 5 , ” 
οἴομαι," ἔφη. “Oi apa κακῶς χρώμενοι διημαρτήκασιν; 
“Rid 29 ἡ 
ἱκός y, ἐφη. 
105 καὶ ἐπικινδύνοις καλῶς χρῆσθαι ἀνδρεῖοί εἶσιν, οἱ δὲ δια- 


Ν » Ζ A A 
“Οἱ μὲν apa ἐπιστάμενοι τοῖς δεινοῖς τε 


4 rd B39 
μαρτάνοντες τούτου δειλοί; 


—ot: belongs to πρὸς τὰ ἐλάχιστα, 
hence the: following νὴ Δία is assur- 
edly. Similarly οὐκ with ἀνδρεῖοι in 
line 87. ---οἱ τὰ μὴ δεινὰ δεδοικότες : 
cf. τοὺς μὲν οὐδὲ τὰ δεινὰ δεδιέναι, τοὺς 
δὲ καὶ τὰ μὴ φοβερὰ φοβεῖσθαι i. τ. 
14. -- ἔτι ἧττον : sc. ἀνδρεῖοι. ----κα- 
κούς : 80. πρὸς τὰ δεινὰ καὶ ἐπικίνδυνα 
ὄντας. 


“Ἔμοιγε δοκοῦσιν," ἔφη. 


11, ἀλλά: ““ only.’’ — οἵους χρῆ- 
σθαι : equivalent to τοιούτους wore 
χρῆσθαι. See oni. 4. 6. --- οὗτοι : as 
in 6. ---- μόνοι : they only. — οἱ μὴ διη- 
μαρτηκότες : who have made no fail- 
ure. — ot διαμαρτάνοντες τούτου: 
those who fail utterly of this. For 
the gen. with verbs of missing, see 
G. 1099; H. 748. 


242 EENO®ONTOS AILOMNHMONEYMATA A. 6. 


Βασιλείαν δὲ καὶ τυραννίδα ἀρχὰς μὲν ἀμφοτέρας 12 
ε “A 3 ὃ - de 3 7 3 ’ \ Ν Ν 
ἡγεῖτο εἶναι, διαφέρειν δὲ ἀλλήλων ἐνόμιζε. τὴν μὲν γὰρ 
ἑκόντων τε τῶν ἀνθρώπων καὶ κατὰ νόμους τῶν πόλεων 
9 Ν / e A \ \ > , Ν Ν Ἂς 
110 ἀρχὴν βασιλείαν NYELTO, Τὴν δὲ ἀκόντων τε καὶ μὴ κατα 
’ 3 55: ὅδ. ε 3, 4 (ὃ Ν 
νόμους, ἀλλ᾽ ὁπως ὁ ἄρχων βούλοιτο, τυραννίδα. καὶ 
ὅπου μὲν ἐκ τῶν τὰ νόμιμα ἐπιτελούντων αἵ ἀρχαὶ Kabi- 
στανται, ταύτην μὲν τὴν πολιτείαν ἀριστοκρατίαν ἐνόμιζεν 
εἶναι, ὅπου δ᾽ ἐκ τιμημάτων, πλουτοκρατίαν, ὅπου δ᾽ ἐκ 
115 πάντων, δημοκρατίαν. 
Ei δέ τις αὐτῷ περί του ἀντιλέγοι μηδὲν ἔχων σαφὲς 18 
a ae | 
λέγειν, ἀλλ᾽ ἄνευ ἀποδείξεως ἤτοι σοφώτερον φάσκων 
5 ἃ ἀν Ν, - x A x : »Ἐ-: ὃ ’ “Ὁ 
εἶναι ὃν αὐτὸς λέγοι ἢ πολιτικώτερον ἢ ἀνδρειότερον ἢ 
» a) 4 o~\ \ | es 3 A x 
ἄλλο τι τῶν τοιούτων, ἐπὶ τὴν ὑπόθεσιν ἐπανῆγεν ἂν 
120 πάντα τὸν λόγον ὧδέ Tas: “Dis σὺ ἀμείνω πολίτην εἶναι 14 
ὃν σὺ ἐπαινεῖς ἢ ὃν ἐγώ;" “Φημὶ γὰρ οὖν. “Τί οὖν 
οὐκ ἐκεῖνο πρῶτον ἐπεσκεψάμεθα, τί ἐστιν ἔργον ἀγαθοῦ 
, ” «ς A A ” (a9 3 A 3 Ἁ ΄ 
πολίτου; Ποιῶμεν τοῦτο. “Οὐκοῦν ἐν μὲν χρημάτων 
διοικήσει κρατοίη ἂν ὁ χρήμασιν εὐπορωτέραν τὴν πόλιν 
125 ποιῶν ;”” 


\ > 3 
“Πάνυ μὲν οὖν," ἔφη. “Ἔν δέ γε πολέμῳ 6 


καθυπερτέραν τῶν ἀντιπάλων; “Πῶς γὰρ ov;” “Ἔν 


12. ἀρχάς : forms of government. 
--- ἀνθρώπων, πόλεων : objective gen. 
with ἀρχήν. --- κατὰ νόμους : cf. i. 2. 
41 ff.; iv. 4. 13. --- τῶν τὰ νόμιμα 
ἐπιτελούντων : those who discharged 
the obligations imposed by law, a very 
different meaning from that involved 
in the modern word ‘aristocracy.’ 
—k τιμημάτων : on the basis of 
property valuations. 

13. ἤτοι, ἤ : see on iii. 12. 2. — 
σοφώτερον (sc. τινὰ) εἶναι ὃν αὐτὸς 
λέγοι: 86. ἢ ὃν Σωκράτης λέγοι. --- ἐπὶ 
τὴν ὑπόθεσιν : ““ἴο the fundamental 


question,’’ i.e. to the essential mean- 
ing of the quality under discussion. — 
ἐπανῆγεν av: for the iterative indic. 
with ἄν, see on ἔφη ἄν iv. 1. 2. --- 
ὧδέ πὼς : the narrative now passes 
from general (περί του) to particular 
cases. 

14. φημὶ yap οὖν: cf. ἔστι γὰρ 
οὖν iii. 4. 2. -- τί οὖν οὐκ ἐπεσκε- 
ψάμεθα : for the tense, see on iii. 
11. 15. — χρημάτων : ‘ finances.’’ 
— κρατοίη (equivalent to κρείττων 
εἴη) : with reference to ἀγαθοῦ πολί- 
του. --- καθυπερτέραν : 86. τὴν πόλιν 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA ΤΥ. 6. 243 


A . ’ ἅν ὦ ἃ “Ἁ ’ > Ν / 
δὲ πρεσβείᾳ dp ὃς dv φίλους ἀντὶ πολεμίων παρα- 
4 3) “ > / ” ςς 3 a) Ν 9 , ε 
, σκευάζῃ; Εἰκός γε. Οὐκοῦν καὶ ἐν δημηγορίᾳ 6 
στάσεις τε παύων καὶ ὁμόνοιαν ἐμποιῶν; 
130 δοκεῖ." 
λέγουσιν αὐτοῖς φανερὸν ἐγίγνετο τἀληθές. ὁπότε δὲ 
Sr) ς “ , ὃ ’ ὃ Ν “ ’ὔ ε , 
αὐτός TL τῷ λόγῳ διεξίοι, διὰ τῶν μάλιστα ὁμολογουμένων 
3 ΄ ΄, ΄ Ν 3 ΄ 5 , 
ἐπορεύετο, νομίζων ταύτην THY ἀσφάλειαν εἶναι λόγου. 
τοιγαροῦν πολὺ μάλιστα ὧν ἐγὼ οἶδα, ὅτε λέγοι, τοὺς 
3 4 ε φ ~ » \ "Ὁ 
135 ἀκούοντας ὁμολογοῦντας παρειχεν" ἔφη δὲ καὶ Opn pov 
“A> -ὕ 9 al "ἢ 3 σον > ε ε Ν 
τῷ ᾿Οδυσσεῖ ἀναθεῖναι τὸ ἀσφαλῆ ῥήτορα εἶναι, ὡς ἱκανὸν 


Νὰ Ἔμοιγε 


[2 ὃ \ la λ , 3 ’ Ἁ Lal 9 
OUT@ O€ Τῶν ογων επαναγομενων και τοις αντι- 


ἄτας »” Ν “ ὃ ie A 3 , » Ν 
αὐυήτον οντα διὰ των OOKOUVUYT@Y Τοις ἀνθρώποις αγειν τους 


᾿ λόγους. 
ποιῶν. --- ἐπαναγομένων : sc. ἐπὶ τὴν ὅτι διὰ τῶν ὁμολογουμένων ἐπορεύετο, 
ὑπόθεσιν. ἐπεὶ διδάσκειν ἐβούλετο Dionys. Hal. 


15. ὁπότε διεξίοι : for the mode, 
see On διομολογήσαιτο i. 2. 57. --- διὰ 
τῶν μάλιστα ὁμολογουμένων ἐπο- 
pevero: ‘‘he proceeded from propo- 
sitions generally admitted as true.”’ 
Cf. ἄρτι yap δὴ καταμανθάνω, 7 με 
ἐπηρώτησας ἕκαστα" ἄγων γάρ με de ὧν 
ἐγὼ ἐπίσταμαι, ἀναπείθεις Oec. Xix. 15. 
-ταύτην τὴν ἀσφάλειαν εἶναι λόγου : 
that this was the truly safe method of 
reasoning. —Tovyapotv: and so it 
was, that. Cf. the use of this par- 
ticle in An. i. 9. — ὧν ἐγὼ οἶδα: 
equivalent to τούτων ovs οἶδα. --- 
Ὅμηρον : cf. Hom. 6171, where Odys- 
seus, apparently describing himself, 
ΒΔ Υ5 ὁ δ᾽ ἀσφαλέως ἀγορεύει. Cf., also, 
καὶ Ὅμηρος δ᾽ εἶπε" ὁ δ᾽ ἀσφαλέως ἀγο- 
ρεύει" τῇ ἀποδείξει τῶν ὁμολογουμένων 
ἀμφισβητούμενον λύειν δυνάμενος (being 
able to solve a vexed problem by his 
luminous statement of generally ad- 
mitted propositions). τοῦτο καὶ Ξενοφῶν 
καὶ Πλάτων λέγουσι περὶ Σωκράτους, 


de Arte Rhet. xi. 8. --- ἀναθεῖναι τὸ 
εἶναι : ‘*conferred the title.’? — ὡς 
ἱκανὸν ὄντα : we might expect ἱκανῷ 
ὄντι, to agree with ᾿Οδυσσεῖ. The 
acc. is due to the attraction of the 
nearer ῥήτορα. --- διὰ τῶν δοκούντων 
τοῖς ἀνθρώποις : repeats διὰ τῶν ὁμο- 
λογουμένων above. 

7. Socrates also desired for his 
friends an acquaintance with cer- 
tain branches of practical knowledge ; 
but urged them to observe moderation 
even in these. Geometry, astronomy, 
and arithmetic are to be studied only 
so far as they will subserve some use- 
ful purpose in life; and we should 
not be diverted by them from other 
more needful things. Health should 
always be carefully conserved. What- 
ever cannot be solved by human in- 
sight should be referred to the gods 
for advice. 

This chapter forms a sequel to 
i. 1. 6-9. 


244 


RENO®ONTOS ATTOMNHMONEYMATA A. 7. 


9 Ν ou ε “~ Ν ε “ , > 4 
Οτι μὲν οὖν ἁπλῶς THY ἑαυτοῦ γνώμην ἀπεφαίνετο ἢ 
Σωκράτης πρὸς τοὺς ὁμιλοῦντας αὐτῷ, δοκεῖ μοι δῆλον ἐκ 


A > 9 \ \ , A 
τῶν εἰρημένων εἶναι, ὅτι δὲ Kal αὐτάρκεις ἐν Tals προσ- 


/ \ 3 “ ΄“ lal 
ἠκούσαις πράξεσιν αὐτοὺς εἶναι ἐπεμελεῖτο, νῦν τοῦτο 


5 λέξω. 


’ Ν Ν Ὁ 3 XN oO 4 » 
πάντων μὲν γὰρ ὧν ἐγὼ οἶδα μάλιστα ἔμελεν 


nA 3 9 ¥ A rn 
αὐτῷ εἰδέναι ὅτου τις ἐπιστήμων εἴη TOV συνόντων ALTO: 
- Ν , 9 \ wn 39 ‘an > , ν Ν Kaa. 
ὧν δὲ προσήκει ἀνδρὶ καλῷ κἀγαθῷ εἰδέναι, 6 τι μὲν αὐτὸς 


9 7 ΄, , 297 ψ \ 4. τὸ 
εἰδείη, TAVT WV προθυμότατα ἐδίδασκεν, οΤου δὲ αυτος 


Ψ Ss 

ἀπειρότερος εἴη, πρὸς τοὺς ἐπισταμένους ἦγεν αὐτούς. 
90 2 \ \ , 9 , » > ε» 

10 ἐδίδασκε δὲ καὶ μέχρι ὅτου δέοι ἔμπειρον εἶναι ἑκάστου 


πράγματος τὸν ὀρθῶς πεπαιδευμένον - αὐτίκα γεωμετρίαν 

μέχρι μὲν τούτου ἔφη δεῖν μανθάνειν, ἕως ἱκανός τις 

γένοιτο, εἴ ποτε δεήσειε, γῆν μέτρῳ ὀρθῶς ἢ παραλαβεῖν 

Ἅ aA xn a rn »Y 9 , 9 

ἢ παραδοῦναι ἢ διανεῖμαι ἢ ἔργον ἀποδείξασθαι: οὕτω 
ἴω 3 A 4 

16 δὲ τοῦτο ῥᾷδιον εἶναι μαθεῖν ὦστε τὸν προσέχοντα τὸν 


wn nw Y »“3λ A \ 
νοῦν TH μετρήσει ἅμα τήν TE γὴν ὁπόση ἐστὶν εἰδέναι καὶ 


ε lal / 3 ’ 
ὡς μετρεῖται ἐπιστάμενον ἀπιέναι. 


τὸ δὲ μέχρι τῶν 


δυσσυνέτων διαγραμμάτων γεωμετρίαν μανθάνειν ἀπεδο- 


κίμαζεν. 


ν \ Ν. 9 ’ lal 5 » ε a 
ὃ τι μὲν yap ὠφελοίη ταῦτα, οὐκ ἔφη Opar: 


, > ¥ ΄, Ψις Δ > » \ A ε Ν 
20 καίτοι οὐκ ἄπειρός γε αὐτῶν HV: ἔφη δὲ ταῦτα ἱκανὰ 
εἶναι ἀνθρώπου βίον κατατρίβειν καὶ ἄλλων πολλῶν τε καὶ 


1. ὅτι μὲν οὖν ἁπλῶς κτλ.: Cf. 
ἁπλούστατα ἐξηγεῖτο iv. 2. 40. — 
αὐτοὺς εἶναι ἐπεμελεῖτο : ‘strove to 
have them,’’ a rare const. with 
ἐπιμελέομαι, instead of ὅπως εἶεν or 
ἔσονται, Or Tod εἶναι. ---- ὧν δὲ εἰδέναι : 
equivalent to τούτων δὲ ἃ εἰδέναι. 
— ἦγεν (sc. περὶ τούτων) : “ἴῃ re- 
gard to these matters he directed 
them.”’ 

2. μέχρι ὅτου: quo usque. — 
αὐτίκα : for example; a peculiar use 
of the adv., perhaps a condensed 


expression for αὐτίκα λέξω I will at 
once mention. Cf. Plato Prot. 359 
E; Rep. 420 σ. --- ἔργον ἀποδείξασθαι : 
‘¢to prove the correctness of a calcu- 
lation in land surveying. ’? --- ἀπιέναι : 
see on ποιῶν i. 2. 61. Cf. the Lat. 
discedere victorem. 

3. δυσσυνέτων: hard to compre- 
hend. — οὐκ ἄπειρός ye αὐτῶν ἣν : see 
on Θεόδωρος iv. 2.10. In the Clouds, 
Aristophanes represents geometry 
as being taught in the school of Soc- 
rates. —ixavd: ‘ calculated.”’ 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA ΤΥ. 7. 


245 


3 ᾿ ld 
ὠφελίμων μαθημάτων ἀποκωλύειν. ἐκέλευε δὲ καὶ ἀστρο- 4 
᾽ὔ ’ 
λογίας ἐμπείρους γίγνεσθαι, καὶ ταύτης μέντοι μέχρι 
na ν lal 

τοῦ νυκτός TE ὥραν καὶ μηνὸς Kal ἐνιαυτοῦ δύνασθαι 
’ 4 7 Ν “ ‘\ “Ὁ A 

2 γιγνώσκειν EVEKA πορείας TE Kal πλοῦ Kal φυλακῆς, Kal 


y ¥ x Ν x Ν “ἡ 3 Ὁ" ’ὕ % 
ὅσα ἄλλα ἢἣ νυκτὸς ἢ μηνὸς 7H ἐνιαυτοῦ πράττεται, πρὸς 
ταῦτ᾽ ἔχειν τεκμηρίοις χρῆσθαι, τὰς ὧρας τῶν εἰρημένων 


διαγιγνώσκοντας. 


Ν wn de ε (ὃ > A , 
και TAVUTQA OE Pe ta ειναι μαθεῖν πάρα 


τε νυκτοθηρῶν καὶ κυβερνητῶν καὶ ἄλλων πολλῶν οἷς 


80 ἐπιμελὲς ταῦτα εἰδέναι. 


Ν ὃΣ , , 3 , 
TO O€ μέχρι τουτου AOTPOVOMLAV 


’ td a Ἁ Ν \ 5 »Ὃ“ 39 “ wn 
μανθάνειν, μέχρι τοῦ καὶ τὰ μὴ ἐν TH αὐτῇ περιφορᾷ 
3, Ν ‘ 4 , ἃ 
ὄντα καὶ τοὺς πλάνητάς τε καὶ ἀσταθμήτους ἀστέρας 


A \ κ Β , A A A Ν 
γνῶναι, καὶ τὰς ἀποστάσεις αὐτῶν ἀπὸ τῆς γῆς καὶ τὰς 


“ὃ \ Ἀ 24 F te. lal ’ 
TEPLOOOVS καὶ TAS αἰτιας αὐτῶν ζητοῦντας κατατρίβεσθαι, 


86 ἰσχυρῶς ἀπέτρεπεν. 


ὠφέλειαν μὲν γὰρ οὐδεμίαν οὐδ᾽ ἐν 


, ¥ . Ae, s Oe , > , NPE: 
τούτοις ἔφη Opav* KQLTOL OVOE τούτων γε ἀνήκοος ἣν. 


ἔφη δὲ καὶ ταῦτα ἱκανὰ εἶναι κατατρίβειν ἀνθρώπου βίον 


καὶ πολλῶν καὶ ὠφελίμων ἀποκωλύειν. 


4. ἀστρολογίας : does not differ 
from ἀστρονομίας. Cf. iv. 2. 10.— 
καὶ ταύτης μέντοι : and yet this 
too (like geometry). — μέχρι τοῦ 
δύνασθαι: so far as to be able. 
— ὥραν: with equivalent 
to hour; with μηνός, equivalent to 
day; with equivalent 
to season or month. — νυκτός (with 
πράττεται) : for the gen. of time, 
see on ἀγορᾶς i. 1. 10. — τεκμηρίοις : 
as signs, sc., aS obj. of χρῆσθαι, 
the observed facts of ἀστρολογία. --- 
τῶν εἰρημένων : i.e. μηνός, 
ἐνιαυτοῦ. 

5. τὸ μανθάνειν : obj. οὗ ἀπέτρε- 
πεν. --- μέχρι τοῦ κτλ. : in appos. with 
μέχρι τούτου, with emphatic repeti- 
tion of the μέχρι. --- καί (in line 31) : 


νυκτός, 


ἐνιαυτοῦ, 


νυκτός, 


ὅλως δὲ τῶν 


even. — τὰ μὴ ἐν τῇ αὐτῇ περιφορᾷ : 
i.e. planets, comets, etc., having 
motions in a different plane from the 
general apparent movement of the 
stars; cf. the ‘cycle and epicycle, 
orb in orb’ of Raphael’s speech to 
Adam in Milton’s Paradise Lost, 
viii. 84. ---πλάνητας : planets, lit. 
wanderers. —aoTrabpnrovs ἀστέρας : 
prob. comets, as having no apparent 
fixed place. — ζητοῦντας κατατρίβε- 
σθαι : to wear ourselves out investigat- 
ing. For the supplementary partici- 
ple, see G. 1580 ; H. 985. — ἰσχυρῶς 
ἀπέτρεπεν : he strongly dissuaded 
from. — οὐδὲ τούτων ἀνήκοος ἦν: 
Archelaus, a pupil of Anaxagoras, 
is said to have taught Socrates 
astronomy. —tkava: as in 3. 


246 EENO®QNTOS AITOMNHMONEYMATA Δ. 7. 


οὐρανίων, ἣ ἕκαστα ὁ θεὸς μηχανᾶται, φροντιστὴν yiyve- 
40 σθαι ἀπέτρεπεν οὔτε γὰρ εὑρετὰ ἀνθρώποις αὐτὰ ἐνόμιζεν 
εἶναι οὔτε χαρίζεσθαι θεοῖς av ἡγεῖτο τὸν ζητοῦντα ἃ 
= aes, / > 3 la > x 
ἐκεῖνοι σαφηνίσαι οὐκ ἐβουλήθησαν. κινδυνεῦσαι δ᾽ ἂν 
ἔφη καὶ παραφρονῆσαι τὸν ταῦτα μεριμνῶντα οὐδὲν ἧττον 
x > / ΄ ε , / > ee 
ἢ Ava€aydpas παρεφρόνησεν ὁ μέγιστον φρονήσας ἐπὶ 
45 τῷ τὰς τῶν θεῶν μηχανὰς ἐξηγεῖσθαι. ἐκεῖνος γὰρ λέγων 
μὲν τὸ αὐτὸ εἶναι πῦρ τε καὶ ἥλιον ἠγνόει ὡς τὸ μὲν πῦρ 
ε ϑ ε ΄, a 3 \ Ν Ψ > 
ot ἄνθρωποι ῥᾳδίως καθορῶσιν, εἰς δὲ τὸν ἥλιον ov 
4 > , \ ε ον ἣν, “ ε ’ 
δύνανται ἀντιβλέπειν, καὶ ὑπὸ μὲν τοῦ ἡλίου καταλαμ- 
πόμενοι τὰ χρώματα μελάντερα ἔχουσιν, ὑπὸ δὲ τοῦ πυρὸς 
δοοὔ- ἠγνόει δὲ καὶ ὅτι τῶν ἐκ τῆς γῆς φυομένων ἄνευ μὲν 
ΘΝ a. ΤῊ οι 2QA 4 a) Ἂν ew \ A 
ἡλίου αὐγῆς οὐδὲν δύναται καλῶς αὔξεσθαι, ὑπὸ δὲ τοῦ 
Ν θ ΄ ΄, 3 / , δὲ Ν 
πυρὸς θερμαινόμενα πάντα ἀπόλλυται: φάσκων ὃὲ τὸν 
y , , 5 \ A 9 , Ψ , 
ἥλιον λίθον διάπυρον εἶναι καὶ τοῦτο ἠγνόει, ὅτι λίθος 
Ν 5 \ x » ’ 5 Ἂς ’ 3 ’ὔὕ ε 
μὲν ἐν πυρὶ ὧν οὔτε λάμπει οὔτε πολὺν χρόνον ἀντέχει, ὃ 
55 δὲ ἥλιος τὸν πάντα χρόνον πάντων λαμπρότατος ὧν δια- 
΄ ee TB Q \ \ , \ , 
μένει. ἐκέλευε δὲ καὶ λογισμοὺς μανθάνειν: καὶ τούτων 
ee ee na Ἂ»ΨΪ 2 7 , es , 
δὲ ὁμοίως Tots ἄλλοις ἐκέλευε φυλάττεσθαι THY μάταιον 
πραγματείαν, μέχρι δὲ τοῦ ὠφελίμου πάντα καὶ αὐτὸς 


where Socrates characterizes as 
ἄτοπα these views of Anaxagoras. 


6. οὐρανίων : objective gen. with 
φροντιστήν. Obs. the ‘ prolepsis.’ — 


ὁ θεός : but θεοῖς without the art. 
just below. See on iv. 3. 15. --- 
ταῦτα μεριμνῶντα : see on φροντί- 
ζοντας τὰ τοιαῦτα i, 1. 11]. ---᾿Αναξα- 
γόρας : of Clazoménae, a contempo- 
rary of Pericles (about 440 B.c.), 
famous as a physical philosopher. 
He taught that the sun was a mass 
of incandescent matter and that the 
moon was made ofearth. Accused of 
impiety, he was banished and retired 
to Lampsacus. Cf. Plato Apol. 26 x, 


7. τὸ αὐτὸ εἶναι πῦρ τε kal ἥλιον: 
for τὲ καί, see on iii. 4. 8. Cf. οὗτος 
(᾿ΑναξαγόραΞ) ἔλεγε τὸν ἥλιον μύδρον 
εἶναι διάπυρον (was a glowing mass of 
red-hot metal) καὶ μείζω τῆς Πελοποννή- 
σου Diog. Laert. ii. 8. — ἠγνόει ὡς : 
ignored the fact that. 

8. λογισμούς : the art of reckon- 
ing, i.e. practical arithmetic. — τού- 
των : objective gen. with πραγματείαν. 
—polws τοῖς ἄλλοις : equally with 
the other subjects. 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA IV. 7. 247 


συνεσκόπει καὶ συνδιεξήει τοῖς συνοῦσι. προέτρεπε δὲ 9 
4 Ἁ ε ’ 3 ~ Ἀ 4 4, 

60 σφόδρα καὶ ὑγιείας ἐπιμελεῖσθαι τοὺς συνόντας, παρά TE 
τῶν εἰδότων μανθάνοντας ὁπόσα ἐνδέχοιτο καὶ ἑαυτῷ ἕκα- 
στον προσέχοντα διὰ παντὸς τοῦ βίου τί βρῶμα ἢ τί 
πῶμα ἢ ποῖος πόνος συμφέροι αὐτῷ, καὶ πῶς τούτοις 
χρώμενος ὑγιεινότατ᾽ ἂν διάγοι- τοῦ γὰρ οὕτω προσέχον- 

Ὲ er » > EON. nee \ δ Ν ee 

65TOS ἑαυτῷ ἔργον ἔφη εἶναι εὑρεῖν ἰατρὸν τὰ πρὸς ὑγί- 

ειαν συμφέροντα αὐτῷ μᾶλλον διαγιγνώσκοντα [ ἑαυτοῦ]. 
εἰ δέ τις μᾶλλον ἢ κατὰ τὴν ἀνθρωπίνην σοφίαν ὠφελεῖ- 10 

σθαι βούλοιτο, συνεβούλευε μαντικῆς ἐπιμελεῖσθαι" τὸν 

Ν ἰὃ ’, ὃ ἄγος ΤΑ͂Ν ε Ν A 3 , \ a 

yap εἰδότα dv ὧν ot θεοὶ τοῖς ἀνθρώποις περὶ τῶν 

, 7 3 , 3» » ’ 
Ἰοπραγμάτων σημαίνουσιν, οὐδέποτ᾽ ἔρημον ἔφη γίγνεσθαι 


συμβουλῆς θεῶν. 


9. μανθάνοντας : circumstantial 
participle of manner with ἐπιμελεῖ- 
σθαι τοὺς συνόντας. --- ἐνδέχοιτο : was 
possible. — ἑαυτῷ ἕκαστον προσέχον- 
ra: each individual by observing his 
own case. —tl βρῶμα κτλ. : objs. of 
μανθάνοντα understood. —tod γὰρ 
οὕτω κτλ.: for he said that tt 
would be a difficult matter to find a 
physician who could tell better than a 
man that had thus attended to himself 
what was conducive to his health. 
τοῦ προσέχοντος is gen. of com- 
parison with μᾶλλον, and is placed 
at the beginning as involving the 
main question. For the thought, cf. 
Tiberius solitus erat eludere 
medicorum artes, atque eos 
qui post tricesimum aeta- 
tis annum ad internoscenda 
corpori suo utilia vel noxia 
alieni cconsilii indigerent 
(availed themselves of) Tacitus Ann. 
vi. 46. 


10. σημαίνουσι: as in i. 1. 9. 
The thought serves as an introduc- 
tion to the concluding chapter. 

8. Those who think that, because 
Socrates suffered the death penalty, 
his utterances as to the δαιμόνιον are 
thereby discredited, are in error. For 
Socrates did not, like them, regard 
death as an evil. With tranquillity 
and even cheerfulness he died a nobie 
and happy death. That he himself was 
assured of this is shown in his conver- 
sation with Hermogenes. He refused 
to adopt the usual form of defense, 
regarding his life as his best defense ; 
and moreover his δαιμόνιον warned 
him against an elaborate speech. He 
died at the right time, before age had 
impaired his powers of mind and 
body ; and the reproach of his taking- 
off lies not on him, but on those who 
condemned him. All who knew him 
mourned him sorely; for in Socrates 
died the noblest and happiest of men. 


248 EENO®OQNTOS AILTOMNHMONEYMATA Δ. 8. 


Εἰ δέ τις, ὅτι φάσκοντος αὐτοῦ τὸ δαιμόνιον ἑαυτῷ 8 
, Ψ 7 ἈΠ ΠΝ ᾿ ΄ a CON a 
προσημαίνειν a τε δέοι καὶ ἃ μὴ δέοι ποιεῖν ὑπὸ τῶν 
δικαστῶν κατεγνώσθη θάνατος, οἴεται αὐτὸν ἐλέγχεσθαι 
περὶ τοῦ δαιμονίου ψευδόμενον, ἐννοησάτω πρῶτον μὲν 
σ ν » , , A ε , > 9 > > Ν Ν 
ὅ ὅτι οὕτως ἤδη τότε πόρρω τῆς ἡλικίας ἣν ὥστ᾽ εἰ καὶ μὴ 
, 3 x nw ν Lal ἐν , 9 
τότε, οὐκ av πολλῳ VoTEpoY τελευτῆσαι τὸν βίον, εἶτα 
ψ Ἂς \ 3 4 a ΄ ἂς τῷ & , Ν 
ὅτι τὸ μὲν ἀχθεινότατον τοῦ βίου καὶ ἐν ᾧ πάντες τὴν 
ἴω, QA nw 
διάνοιαν μειοῦνται ἀπέλιπεν, ἀντὶ δὲ τούτου τῆς ψυχῆς 
͵ ¥ 
THY ῥώμην ἐπιδειξάμενος εὔκλειαν προσεκτήσατο, τήν TE 
’ ’ > , > , \ 3 4 
10 δίκην πάντων ἀνθρώπων ἀληθέστατα καὶ ἐλευθεριώτατα 
καὶ δικαιότατα εἰπὼν καὶ τὴν κατάγνωσιν τοῦ θανάτου 
XN A 
πρᾳότατα καὶ ἀνδρωδέστατα ἐνεγκών. ὁμολογεῖται yap 2 
> nd Las ’ > 4 4 U4 
οὐδένα πω τῶν μνημονενομένων ἀνθρώπων κάλλιον θάνα- 
τον ἐνεγκεῖν. ἀνάγκη μὲν γὰρ ἐγένετο αὐτῷ μετὰ τὴν 
’ la ε ta “ Ν Ν / A 3 4 
15 κρίσιν τριάκοντα ἡμέρας βιῶναι διὰ τὸ Δήλια μὲν ἐκείνου 
τοῦ μηνὸς εἶναι, τὸν δὲ νόμον μηδένα ἐᾶν δημοσίᾳ ἀπο- 
/ 4 x ε ’ὔ 3 Σ 3 4 Ν Ν 
θνήσκειν ἕως dv ἡ θεωρία ἐκ Δήλου ἐπανέλθῃ: καὶ τὸν 
, an 2 A 40 Ν > , ὑδὲ 
χρόνον τοῦτον ἅπασι τοῖς συνήθεσι φανερὸς ἐγένετο οὐδὲν 


1, ὅτι φάσκοντος αὐτοῦ, κατε- 
γνώσθη θάνατος: ‘because he 


accusative. Plato’s Apology is re- 
garded as a fairly correct report of 


asserted, and then was condemned 
to death.’’—-aept τοῦ δαιμονίου 
ψευδόμενον : inasmuch as, according 
to his critics, he would have con- 
ducted himself differently in regard 
to appearing at his trial if the 
δαιμόνιον had predicted his death 
to him. — ἀχθεινότατον : a poetic 
word. — τὴν διάνοιαν μειοῦνται : are 
weakened in intellect. Socrates was 
over seventy years of age; cf. 
νῦν ἐγὼ πρῶτον ἐπὶ δικαστήριον dva- 
βέβηκα, ἔτη γεγονὼς ἑβδομήκοντα Plato 

Apol. 17 ν. --- τὴν δίκην εἰπών : by 
ὶ pleading his case. δίκην is cognate 


the speech of Socrates before his 
judges. 

2. Δήλια: not to be confused 
with the ὁ εἰς Δῆλον πεμπόμενος χορός 
of iii, 3. 12, which was sent every 
four years. The Δήλια here men- 
tioned was a solemn embassy sent 
annually to Delos with thank offer- 
ings to Apollo, in commemoration of 
the victory of Theseus over the 
Minotaur, by which Athens was 
freed from the terrible tribute of 
seven youths and seven maidens. 
Cf. Plato Phaedo 58 a. — τὸν νόμον 
ἐᾶν: also governed by διά. — 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA IV. 8. 249 


> Fe ὃ Ν x x » , , 
ἀλλοιότερον διαβιοὺς ἢ τὸν ἔμπροσθεν χρόνον. καίτοι 
ἈΝ » 4 ’ 3 4 , > , 

20 TOV ἔμπροσθέν γε πάντων ἀνθρώπων μάλιστα ἐθαυμάζετο 
πον ΣΝ > , Ν 3 ’ “A Ἁ ἴω »» , 
ἐπὶ τῷ εὐθύμως TE Kal εὐκόλως ζῆν. καὶ πῶς ἂν τις καλ- 

x y > , x “ x ¥ , / 
λιον ἢ οὕτως ἀποθάνοι; ἢ ποῖος av εἴη θάνατος καλλίων 
x ἃ λλ ’ὔ 3 θ ’ A δ᾽ x , , 
ἢ ὃν κάλλιστά τις ἀποθάνοι; ποῖος δ᾽ ἄν γένοιτο θάνα- 
3 , an / x A Ρ / 
TOS εὐδαιμονέστερος τοῦ καλλίστου; ἢ ποῖος θεοφιλέστε- 
ω > 4 4 \ ν ὰε ὔ A 
25 pos τοῦ εὐδαιμονεστάτου; λέξω δὲ Kal ἃ Ἑ ρμογένους Tod 
» 

ἔφη yap, ἤδη Μελήτου 
γεγραμμένου αὐτὸν τὴν γραφήν, αὐτὸς ἀκούων αὐτοῦ 
πάντα μᾶλλον ἢ περὶ τῆς δίκης διαλεγομένου λέγειν αὐτῷ 

PEED YEP Τὴ 0 79 Y f 
ε PR. Dae 3 ΄ a 
ὡς χρὴ σκοπεῖν 6 TL ἀπολογήσεται, TOV δὲ TO μὲν πρῶτον 

80 εἰπεῖν: “Οὐ γὰρ δοκῶ σοι τοῦτο μελετῶν διαβεβιωκέναι ;” 
3 \ Ν + ae Ν» ν 3 A > Af [} 50" ΕἾ 
ἐπεὶ δὲ αὐτὸν ἤρετο ὅπως, εἰπεῖν αὐτὸν ὅτι οὐδὲν ἄλλο 


ς ἊΣ ν Ν 3 A 
Ἱππονίκου ἤκουσα περι αὕτου. 


A ὃ , x ὃ “A | 4 δί Ἁ Ν 
ποιῶν διαγεγένηται ἢ διασκοπῶν μὲν τά τε δίκαια καὶ τὰ 
ἄδικα, πράττων δὲ τὰ δίκαια καὶ τῶν ἀδίκων ἀπεχόμενος, 
αὐτὸς 
“Οὐχ ὁρᾷς, ὦ Σώκρατες, ὅτι οἱ ᾿Αθήνησι 

Ν Ν x » \ 3 A ἧς 
δικασταὶ πολλοὺς μὲν ἤδη μηδὲν ἀδικοῦντας λόγῳ πα- 
θέ 3 , Ar \ δὲ iO A 3 aN ” 
ραχθέντες ἀπέκτειναν, πολλοὺς δὲ ἀδικοῦντας ἀπέλυσαν ; 


ν ,ὕ ’, 4 3 , τὺ 
ἥνπερ νομίζοι καλλίστην μελέτην ἀπολογίας εἶναι. 
35 δὲ πάλιν εἰπεῖν " 


διαβιούς : for second aors. of the -μι 
form, see G. 799; H. 489, 14. — For 
the demeanor of Socrates during the 
last hours in his cell, see the conclud- 
ing chapters of Plato’s Phaedo. 

8. otras: i.e. εὐθύμως τε καὶ 
εὐκόλως. ---- θεοφιλέστερος : the noble 
and happy death of Socrates showed 
that he was beloved of the gods; and 
it does not follow from his death, 
either that his δαιμόνιον deceived him, 
or that what he had said of the 
δαιμόνιον was false. Cf. Plato Apol. 
40 a-c, 41 νυν. 

4. “Eppoyévous : see on ii. το. 3. 
- Μελήτου : see on i. 1. 1.—ye- 


γραμμένου αὐτὸν τὸν γραφήν : for the 
aces., see G. 1076; H. 728. --- πάντα 
μᾶλλον : see on ii. 4. 1. --- λέγειν its 
subj. is the word with which αὐτός 
agrees, attracted into the nom. under 
the usual rule for indirect discourse. — 
τοῦτο μελετῶν διαβεβιωκέναι : to have 
passed my whole life in the prepara- 
tion of this (my defense). — ποιῶν 
διαγεγένηται : ‘‘that all his life he 
had done,’’ the participle containing 
the main idea. —mpdrrev δίκαια, 
ἀδίκων ἀπεχόμενος : Obs. the ‘ chias- 
mus.’ 

5. αὐτός, εἰπεῖν : sc. ἔφη, as in 
4, — παραχθέντες : persuaded. — 


250 


EENO®ONTOS AILTOMNHMONEYMATA Δ. 8, 


«᾿Αλλὰ νὴ τὸν Δία," φάναι αὐτόν, “ὦ “Eppdyeves, ἤδη μου 


ἐπιχειροῦντος φροντίσαι τῆς πρὸς τοὺς δικαστὰς ἀπο- 


40 λογίας ἠναντιώθη τὸ δαιμόνιον." 


Ἃ > ἧς 9 an 
Kal αὑτὸς εἰπεῖν" 


A 4 ’ὕ 
“Θαυμαστὰ λέγεις." τὸν δέ, “Oavpdles,” φάναι, “εἰ τῷ 


A A la 95 Mees A Ἂς ’ ¥ 3 
θεῷ δοκεῖ βέλτιον εἶναι ἐμὲ τελευτᾶν τὸν βίον ἤδη; οὐκ 


> 9 Ὁ , A an a ’ 3 ἃ > \ 9 ’ὔ 
οἷσθ᾽ ὅτι μέχρι μὲν τοῦδε τοῦ χρόνου ἐγὼ οὐδενὶ ἀνθρώ- 


πων ὑφείμην ἂν οὔτε βέλτιον οὐθ᾽ ἥδιον ἐμοῦ βεβιωκέναι; 


45 ἄριστα μὲν γὰρ οἶμαι ζῆν τοὺς ἄριστα ἐπιμελομένους τοῦ 


ὡς βελτίστους γίγνεσθαι, ἥδιστα δὲ τοὺς μάλιστα αἰσθα- 


’ “ὦ / ’ 
νομένους ott βελτίους γίγνονται. 


a 3 Ν ἌΡ “ A 
Qa έγω μέχρι τοῦδε Του 


’ 3 ld 9 “ 4 Ν ων » 
ὄνου ἡσθανόμην ἐμαυτῷ συμβαίνοντα, καὶ τοῖς ἄλλοις 
Hf) μην ἐμ : μ 


> , 3 , Ἂς Ν Ν » A 
ἀνθρώποις ἐντυγχάνων καὶ πρὸς τοὺς ἄλλους παραθεωρῶν --.... 


ν \ A 
50 ἐμαυτὸν οὕτω διατετέλεκα περὶ ἐμαυτοῦ γιγνώσκων: Kal 


> 4 > , > S ‘N ae \ ’ὔ ν » A 
ov μόνον ἐγώ, ἀλλὰ καὶ οἱ ἐμοὶ φίλοι οὕτως ἔχοντες περὶ 


ἐμοῦ διατελοῦσιν, οὐ διὰ τὸ φιλεῖν ἐμέ, καὶ γὰρ οἱ [τοὺς] 


A ἕ 9 > < “A 
ἄλλους φιλοῦντες οὕτως ἂν εἶχον πρὸς τοὺς ἑαυτῶν φίλους, 


3 Ν , Ν > νὰ » 3 Ν , 4 : 
ἀλλὰ διόπερ καὶ αὐτοὶ ἂν οἴονται ἐμοὶ συνόντες βέλτιστοι 


55 γίγνεσθαι. 


3 Ν , , Ψ » 2 A 
εἰ δὲ βιώσομαι πλείω χρόνον, ἴσως ἀναγκαῖον 


»ἌᾺ A ΄-Ἔ , 5 A : A og lal > Wer | , 
€OTAL TA TOV γήρως ἐπιτελεῖσθαι, και Opav TE Και AKOVELY 


a \ ὃ A A \ ὃ , > 
YTTOV, Και ιανοεῖσθαι χέιρον, Και υσμαθέστερον ατο- 


, oad / » Wares, 3 , BY 
βαίνειν καὶ ἐπιλησμονέστερον, Kal ὧν πρότεῤον βελτίων 


“ , Pie 3 Ν \ . one A \ 
nV, TOUT@YV χείρω γίγνεσθαι: ἀλλὰ pur ταυτα γε μη 


ἠναντιώθη τὸ δαιμόνιον : cf. καὶ dis 
ἤδη ἐπιχειρήσαντός μου σκοπεῖν πέρὶ τῆς 
ἀπολογίας, ἐναντιοῦταί μοι τὸ δαιμόνιον 
Apol. 4. Cf. also Plato Apol. 81 ν, 
40 a, B. 

6. ὑφείμην av: I would concede. 
— βεβιωκέναι (sc. αὐτόν) : that he had 
lived. 

7. &: equivalent to καὶ ταῦτα. 
--ππρὸς τοὺς ἄλλους : see on πρὸς 
ἑαυτόν i. 2. δ2. --- παραθεωρών : like 
᾿ παραβάλλων in 1]. --- οὕτω διατετέ- 


Anka γιγνώσκων : I have constantly 
been of this mind. — οὕτως ἔχοντες 
περὶ ἐμοῦ διατελοῦσιν : constantly 
have this opinion of me. — οὐ διὰ 
τὸ φιλεῖν ἐμέ: not because they love 
me. 

8. τὰ τοῦ γήρως ἐπιτελεῖσθαι : to 
pay the debts of old age, i.e. to suffer 
the weakening of sight, hearing, and 
intellect. — ὁρᾶν, ἀκούειν, διανοεῖσθαι: 
with their advs., in appos. with τὰ 
τοῦ γήρως. --- ἀποβαίνειν : to turn out, 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA IV. 8. 251 


< Ν x 

60 αἰσθανομένῳ μὲν aBiwros ἂν εἴη ὁ Bios, αἰσθανόμενον δὲ 
πῶς οὐκ ἀνάγκη χεῖρόν τε καὶ ἀηδέστερον ζῆν; ἀλλὰ μὴν 9 
εἴ γε ἀδίκως ἀποθανοῦμαι, τοῖς μὲν ἀδίκως ἐμὲ ἀποκτείνα- 

σιν αἰσχρὸν ἂν εἴη τοῦτο: [εἰ γὰρ τὸ ἀδικεῖν αἰσχρόν 
ἐστι, πῶς οὐκ αἰσχρὸν καὶ τὸ ἀδίκως ὁτιοῦν ποιεῖν ;] ἐμοὶ 
Ν ’ 3 Ν Ν 8.3 εὦ Ἁ tA +> ἴω \ ’ 

65 δὲ τί αἰσχρὸν τὸ ἑτέρους μὴ δύνασθαι περὶ ἐμοῦ τὰ δίκαια 
μήτε γνῶναι μήτε ποιῆσαι; ὁρῶ δ᾽ ἔγωγε καὶ τὴν δόξαν 10 
τῶν προγεγονότων ἀνθρώπων ἐν τοῖς ἐπιγιγνομένοις οὐχ 
ὁμοίαν καταλειπομένην τῶν τε ἀδικησάντων καὶ τῶν 
3 ᾽’ οὶ ἂς ‘\ > N 3 ’Ψ 4 ε > 
ἀδικηθέντων - οἶδα δὲ ὅτι καὶ ἐγὼ ἐπιμελείας τεύξομαι ὑπ 
3 , Ν 3N\ a > ’ 3 ε ΄, A Bow 

ἴο ἀνθρώπων, καὶ ἐὰν viv ἀποθάνω, οὐχ ὁμοίως τοῖς ἐμὲ 
ἀποκτείνασιν: οἶδα γὰρ ἀεὶ μαρτυρήσεσθαί μοι ὅτι ἐγὼ 
ὁδί Ν ἡὸὃ 7 ΄, 3 θ ’ Oe / 3 ’ 
ἠδίκησα μὲν οὐδένα πώποτε ἀνθρώπων οὐδὲ χείρω ἐποίησα, 
βελτίους δὲ ποιεῖν ἐπειρώμην ἀεὶ τοὺς ἐμοὶ συνόντας." 

A A Ν ε ᾽’ id Ἁ Ἂς Ἁ 
τοιαῦτα μὲν πρὸς Ἑ, ρμογένην τε διελέχθη καὶ πρὸς τοὺς 

75 ἄλλους. 

A 3 , , » ‘ aA A 4 , 
τῆς ἐφιέμενοι πάντες ἔτι καὶ νῦν διατελοῦσι πάντων μά- 


wn A ’ὔ ’ὔ a 9S © 29 
των δὲ Σωκράτην γιγνωσκοντων οιος HV Ob ape- 11 


λιστα ποθοῦντες ἐκεῖνον, ὡς ὠφελιμώτατον ὄντα πρὸς 
> - ΩΝ 5 7 3 Ἁ A A A x a 3 Ἁ 
ἀρετῆς ἐπιμέλειαν. ἐμοὶ μὲν δὴ τοιοῦτος ὦν οἷον ἐγὼ 


»ἢ}) > \ A Kd 9 Ἁ ¥ ~ “ 
διήγημαι, εὐσεβὴς μὲν οὕτως ὥστε μηδὲν ἄνευ τῆς τῶν 


‘*to become.’? — μὴ αἰσθανομένῳ 
κτλ. : the thought is “1 I should 
not notice it, that itself would be 
a proof of dullness, and such a life 
would be no life; and if I should 
notice it, life would naturally lose its 
joy.”’ 

9. εἰ γὰρ τὸ ἀδικεῖν αἰσχρόν ἐστι 
κτλ. : the thought seems to be, that 
@ wrong act cannot successfully hide 
behind the forms of law; but the 
sent. is bracketed by some editt. as 
meaningless. On the section, cf. 
Apol. 26. 


10. τῶν τε, kal τῶν : see on τὲ 
καί 1ἰϊ, 4. 8. --- ἐπιμελείας τεύξομαι 
ὑπό: I shall enjoy consideration 
from. See on tréiii. 4. 1.—papruph- 
σεσθαι : mid. as passive. — βελτίους 
δὲ ποιεῖν τοὺς ἐμοὶ συνόντας : con- 
cludes and confirms the propositions 
laid down in i. 3. 1 and iv. 1. 1, after 
which the book comes to an end 
with a brief recapitulation of the 
contents of the entire work. 

11. Σωκράτην γιγνωσκόντων οἷος 
qv: for the ‘ prolepsis,’ see on i. 2. 
13. — pol μὲν δή: mihi quidem 


Zod ΞΕΝΟΦΩΝΤΟΣ AILOMNHMONEYMATA Δ. 8. 


80 θεῶν γνώμης ποιεῖν, δίκαιος δὲ ὥστε βλάπτειν μὲν μηδὲ 
μικρὸν μηδένα, ὠφελεῖν δὲ τὰ μέγιστα τοὺς χρωμένους 
a A ν 
αὐτῷ, ἐγκρατὴς δὲ ὦστε μηδέποτε προαιρεῖσθαι τὸ ἥδιον 
3 Ν a) ΄, ΄, x 7. Ν , 
ἀντὶ τοῦ βελτίονος, φρόνιμος δὲ ὥστε μὴ διαμαρτάνειν. 
, Ν ’ὔ Ν Ἀ £ X ¥ A 
κρίνων τὰ βελτίω καὶ τὰ χείρω, μηδὲ ἄλλου προσδεῖσθαι, 
85 ἀλλ᾽ αὐτάρκης εἶναι πρὸς τὴν τούτων γνῶσιν, ἱκανὸς δὲ 
Ν , 3 A Ν / Ν A ε Ν Ν 
καὶ λόγῳ εἰπεῖν τε καὶ διορίσασθαι τὰ τοιαῦτα, ἱκανὸς δὲ 
᾿ς, ὧἷἂἐνγ ’ εἶ ε 4 3 ‘4 ἃ 
καὶ ἄλλους δοκιμάσαι τε καὶ ἁμαρτάνοντας ἐξελέγξαι καὶ 
4 (Me FREY Ν \ > ’ 3 , lal 
προτρέψασθαι ἐπ᾽ ἀρετὴν καὶ καλοκἀγαθίαν, ἐδόκει τοιοῦ- 
τος εἶναι οἷος ἂν εἴη ἄριστός τε ἀνὴρ καὶ εὐδαιμονέστα- 
A ¥ 
90Tos. εἰ δέ τῳ μὴ ἀρέσκει ταῦτα, παραβάλλων τὸ ἄλλων 
ἦθος πρὸς ταῦτα οὕτω κρινέτω. 


igitur. —Gvev γνώμης : cf. ἄνευ him. ---- ταῦτα : ‘this my description 
τούτων (τῶν νόμων) μηδὲν πράττεν of the character of Socrates.””— 
πειρᾶσθε Hell. i. 7. 29. — τοὺς Xpepé- πρός: as in 7. 

yous αὐτῷ : those who associated with 


APPENDIX 


A. MANUSCRIPTS 


The manuscripts of the Memorabilia have come down to us in a less 
satisfactory condition than that of the MSS. of the other major Xeno- 
phontine writings (Anabasis, Hellenica, and Cyropaedia). They are 
sometimes divided by scholars into three classes, as follows: 

I. Codex A, Parisinus 1302. Written on cotton paper, about 1278 
A.D. The oldest, and generally regarded as best; but unfortunately 
it contains only books i and ii. 

Il. Codex B, Parisinus 1740. Written on cotton paper, about the 
close of the 13th century. (Schenkl regards this, in spite of its many 
arbitrary alterations, as of more authority than Parisinus A.) With 
B the following MSS. agree more or less closely: 

Codex Urbinas 63, of the 14th century, 

Codex Vaticanus 1619, and 

Codex Vaticanus 1336: both these latter of the 15th century. 

Ill. Codex C, Parisinus 1642, of the 15th century. 

Codex Vaticanus 1950, of the 14th century. 

Codex Laurentianus (in the library of San Lorenzo, Florence), 
written on parchment, of the 14th century. 

Codex Urbinas 93, of the 15th century. 

Most of the other MSS. date from the 15th century and are of less 
importance than those mentioned above. 


B. EDITIONS 
I. CompLETE EDITIONS OF XENOPHON 


E. Bontnus: Florence (P. Giunta), 1516. The Editio princeps. 
AnpREAS ASULANUS: Venice (Aldus), 1525. 
H. StepHanus: Paris, 1561 (2d ed., 1581). 
Wetts (1664-1727): Leipzig, 1763-1764. New ed., 1801-1804, 
6 vols., with dissertations and uotes (virorum doctorum) compiled by 
253 


254 XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA 


C. A. Thieme, a preface by J. A. Ernesti, and a Latin translation. 
Vol. IV contains the Memorabilia. 

WEISKE : Leipzig, 1798-1804, 6 vols., with full commentary. Vol. V 
contains the Memorabilia. 

J. G. ScHNEIDER: Leipzig, 1790-1849, 6 vols. Vol. IV contains 
the Memorabilia and Apologia Socratis. 

J. B. Gatu: Paris, 1808-1815, 7 vols., Greek and French, with 
critical notes. 

F. A. BoRNEMANN, R. Kiuner, and L. BREITENBACH: Gotha, 1828- 
1854, 4 vols., with Latin commentary. New ed., 1888-1863 (now pub- 
lished by Teubner of Leipzig). Vol. II (by Kiihner, 1841, 1857) con- 
tains the Memorabilia. 

L. Dinporr: Leipzig (Teubner), 1849-1851. New ed., 1873-1875. 
An important series of text editions, 

L. DinporFr: Oxford, 1852-1866, with full per and exegetical 
notes. The volumes of this valuable series (in addition to the Memo- 
rabilia, mentioned in II below) are as follows: Historia Graeca (1852) ; 
Expeditio Cyri (1855) ; Institutio Cyri (1857) ; Opuscula (1866). 

G. Saupre: Leipzig (B. Tauchnitz), 1865-1867 (later ed., 1867— 
1870), 5 vols. Vol. III contains the Memorabilia. 


II. Some SEPARATE EDITIONS OF THE MEMORABILIA 


J. A. Ernest1: Apomnemoneumata seu Memorabilium Socratis dic- 
torum libri iv. 5th ed., Leipzig, 1772. 

G. A. Hersst: Xenophontis Memorabilium Socratis libri iv. Halle, 
1827. Recensuit οἱ illustravit G. A. SaAupPE: Leipzig, 1834. 

F. A. BorNEMANN: Xenophontis Commentarit Socratis. Leipzig, 
1829. 

E. LeFrANc: Entretiens mémorables de Socrate. Paris, 1845, 4 vols., 
Greek and French. 

RAPHAEL Kttuyner: De Socrate Commentarii. Gotha, 1857. Text, 
with Latin notes and introduction. (The work mentioned in I 
above.) 

L. DrnporF : Xenophontis Memorabilia Socratis. Oxford, 1862 (later 
ed., 1875). With critical and exegetical notes. 

C. ScnHenKL: Xenophontis Opera (only 2 vols. published). Berlin 
(Weidmann), 1876. Text ed., with brief critical notes. Vol. II 
contains the Memorabilia. — 


APPENDIX 255 


S. R. Winans: Xenophon’s Memorabilia. Boston (Allyn), 1880. 

E. WEISSENBORN : Xenophons Memorabilien. Gotha (Perthes), 1885— 
1887. ‘School edition,” with German notes. 

W. GILBERT: Xenophontis Commentarii. Leipzig (Teubner), 1888. 
An authoritative text edition. 

L. BREITENBACH: Xenophons Memorabilien. 6th ed. revised by 
Rudolf Miicke, Berlin (Weidmann), 1889. «School edition,” with 
German notes, (The basis of the present edition.) 


C. AUXILIARIES 


F. W. Sturz: Lexicon Xenophonteum. Leipzig, 1801-1804, 4 vols. 

G. Saupre: Lexilogus Xenophonteus sive index Xenophontis grammati- 
cus. Leipzig, 1869. 

G. A. Kocu: Vollsténdiges Wérterbuch zu Xenophons Memorabilien. ὦ 
Leipzig, 1870. 

KATHARINE M. GitotH and Mary F. Ke.iioae: Index in Xeno- 
phontis Memorabilia. New York (Macmillan), 1900. (Vol. XI of Cor- 
nell Studies in Classical Philology.) 

C. G. Coser: Variae lectiones (Leyden, 1854), and Novae lectiones 
(Leyden, 1858). Cobet was an editor of the periodical Mnemosyne, in 
which most of his acute critical work appeared (Vols. VI-IX). Fora 
review of his emendations of Xenophon, see an article by B. Biichsen- 
schiitz in Philologus, xviii. 251 ff. 

A. Kroun: Socrates und Xenophon. Halle, 1875. 

C. ScHeNKL: Xenophontische Studien. Beitrdge zur Kritik der Apomne- 
moneumata. Vienna, 1875. 

K. Joex: Der echte und der Xenophontische Socrates. Berlin, 18938. 

J.J. HARTMAN: Analecta Xenophontea. Leyden, 1887. 

A. Dorine: Die Lehre des Socrates als soziales Reformsystem. 
Munich, 1895. 

H. G. Daxyns: The Works of Xenophon, translated. London and 
New York, 1890-1897, 3 vols. A full account of Xenophon is given 
in the Introduction to Vol. I. The Memorabilia is contained in 
Vol. III, Part I. 





INDEX OF PROPER NAMES 


A 


Acuménus, a physician, iii. 13. 2. 

Agamemnon, iii. 1. 4, 2. 1, 2. 

Alcibiades, character of, i. 2. 12; a 
companion of Socrates, i. 2. 24, 39; 
his discussion with Pericles, i. 2. 
40 ff.; his son, i. 3. 8, 10. 

Amphiaraus, spring in the sanctuary 
of, iii. 13. 3. 

Anaxagéras of Clazomenae, iv. 7. 
6. 

Antiphon ‘the sophist,’ his conversa- 
tions with Socrates, i. 6. 

Antisthenes (founder of the Cynic 
school), his conversation with 
Socrates, ii. 5; his friendship for 
Socrates, iii. 11. 17. 

Antisthenes, an Athenian general, iii. 
4. 1, 8, 4. 

Apollodérus, his devotion to Socrates, 
1 ΤΣ 47. 

Archedémus, recommended by Socra- 
tes to Crito, ii. 9. 

Areopagus, council of, iii. 5. 20. 

Aristarchus, his conversation with 
Socrates, ii. 7. 

Aristippus (founder of the Cyrenaic 
school), his discussions with Socra- 
tes, ii. 1; 11]. 8. 

Aristo, father of Glauco, iii. 6. 1. 

Aristodémus (‘the little’), his conver- 
sation with Socrates, i. 4. 

Asclepius (Lat. Aesculapius), 
spring in temple of, iii. 13. 3. 


Asia, ii. 1. 10; iii. 5. 11. 

Aspasia, ii. 6. 36. 

Athenians, the, i. 1. 1, 20, 2. 14, 
4. 15; their good qualities, iii. 3. 
18; their rejection of Nicomachi- 
des, iii. 4. 1; their merits and 
shortcomings and the best way to 
regain their military prestige, iii. 
5; their future life-and-death 
struggle, iii, 12. 1; meaning of 
εὐωχεῖσθαι in their dialect, iii. 14. 
7; supposed speeches to, iv. 2. 4, 
5. 

Athens, ii. 3. 18, 9.1; iii. 5. 2, 13. 
5; iv. 4. 5, 8. 5. 

Attica, property in, ii. 8. 1; threat- 
ened invasion of, iii. 5. 4; natural 
defenses of, iii. 5. 25. 


B 


Boeotia, formerly invaded by the 
Athenians, iii. 5. 4. 

Boeotians, the, compared with the 
Athenians, iii. 5. 2, 4. 


C 


Carthaginians, the, ii. 1. 10. 

Cebes the Theban, a companion of 
Socrates, i. 2. 48; iii, 11. 17. 

Cecrops, judge between Athena and 
Poseidon, iii. 5. 10. 

Cerimon, a large employer of labor, ii. 
7. 3. 


257 


258 


Chaerecrates, acompanion of Socrates, 
i. 2. 48; reconciled to his brother 
by Socrates, ii. 3. 

Chaeréphon, brother of the preceding, 
1. 2. 48. Ἦν ὅν Ἐπ 

Charicles, one of the Thirty, forbids 
Socrates to teach, i. 2. 38 ff. 

Charmides, son of Glauco and cousin 
of Plato, iii. 6. 1; his conver- 
sation with Socrates, iii. 7. 

Circé the enchantress, i. 3. 7. 

Clito the sculptor, his conversation 
with Socrates, iii. ro. 6-8. 

Critias the oligarch (one of the 
Thirty), formerly a friend of Soc- 
rates, i. 2. 12, 24, 29 ff. 

Crito, a companion of Socrates, i. 2. 
48, 3. 8; aided by Socrates, ii. 9. 

Critobilus, son of Crito, warned by 
Socrates, i. 3. 8; his conversation 
with Socrates, ii. 6. 

Cyrébus, a baker, ii. 7. 6. 


D 


Daedalus, on account of his wisdom 
seized and enslaved by Minos, iv. 
2. 33. 

Delia, the, or lesser Delian festival, 
iv. ὃ. 2. 

Delium, the battle of, 424 B.c., iii. 
5. 4. 

Delos, sacred island, iii. 3. 12; iv. 
$,-2. 

Delphi, inscription on the temple at, 
iv. 2. 24; answer of the god, iv. 
3. 16. 

Déméas of Collytus, a manufacturer, 
ii. 7. 6. 

Diodérus, persuaded by Socrates to 
relieve Hermogenes, ii. το. 1. 
Dionysodérus, a professor of ‘strate- 

: gia,’ arrives at Athens, iii. 1. 1. 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA 


E 


Egypt, i. 4. 17. 

Epicharmus, cited, ii. 1. 20. 

Epigenes, on ‘duty to the body,’ | 
his conversation with Socrates, iii. 
12. 

Erasinides, one of the generals tried 
for neglect of duty at Arginusae, 
1.2. 38; 

Erechtheus, legendary king of Attica, 
iii. 5. 10. 

Europe, ii. 1. 10; iii. 5. 11. 

Euthérus, his conversation with Soc- 
rates, ii. 8. 

Euthydémus, ‘ the fair,’ love of Crit- 
ias for, i. 2. 29; his conversa- 
tions with Socrates, iv. 2. 1-39, 
3. 2 ff., 5. 2 ff, 6. 2 ff 


G 


Glauco, Plato’s brother, son of Aristo, 
his conversation with Socrates, 
iii. 6. 

Glauco (the elder), father of Char- 
mides, iii. 7. 1. 

Greece, see Hellas. 


H 


Hellas (Greece), ii. 1. 28; iii. 5. 12, 
62, 2. a2 τας A ae 

Hellénes (Greeks), the, i. 4. 15; ii. 1. 
10. _ 

Hera (Lat. Iuno), ‘by,’ an occasional 
oath of Socrates, i. 5. 5; iii. το. 
9, 11. 5; iv. 2. 9, 4. 8. 

Heracles (Lat. Hercules), i. 3. 12; 
the choice of, ii. 1. 21 ff. 

Heraclidae, the, assisted by the Athe- 
nians, iii. 5. 10. 


INDEX OF PROPER NAMES 


Hermes (Lat. Mercurius), i. 3. 
7. 

Hermogenes, a companion of Soc- 
rates, i. 2. 48; ii. το. 3 ff.; iv. 
8. 4 ff. 

Hesiod, cited, i. 2. 56; i. 3. 3; ii. 
1. 20. 

Hippias of Elis, his conversation 
with Socrates, iv. 4. 5 ff. 

Hippocrates, an Athenian general, 
defeated at Delium, iii. 5. 4. 

Hipponicus, father of Hermogenes, iv. 
8. 4. 

Homer, cited, i. 2. 58; ii. 6. 11; 
iii. 1. 4, 2. 1, 2; greatest of epic 
poets, i. 4. 3; his works in Euthy- 
demus’s library, iv. 2. 10; his 
characterization of Odysseus, iv. 
6. 15. 


L 


Lacedaemon, i. 2. 61. 

Laceda ians, the, i. 2. 61; iii. 5. 4; 
various good qualities of, iii. 5. 15 ; 
their arms, iii. 9. 2; taught by 
Lycurgus to obey the laws, iv. 4. 
15. 

Lampricles, eldest son of Socrates, 
his conversation with his father, 
Ἧ: 2: 

Lebadéa (in Boeotia), the battle of, 
iii. 5. 4. 

Libya (i.e. Africa), ii. 1. 10. 

Libyans, the, subject to the Cartha- 
ginians, ii. 1. 10. 

Lichas, afamous citizen of Sparta, i. 
Ζ: ΟἿ, 

Lycurgus the great Spartan law- 
giver, iv. 4. 15. 

Lydians, the, subject to the Persians, 
ii. r. 10. 





259 


M 


Macedonia, iii. 5. 11. 

Maeotians, the, subject to the Scyth- 
ians, ii. 1. 10. 

Megarians, the, their chief industry, 
ii. 7. 6, 

Melanippides, a dithyrambic poet, i. 
4. 3. 

Melétus, the accuser of Socrates, 
institutes proceedings, iv. 4. 4, 
8. 4. 

Menon, a maker of cloaks, ii. 7. 
6. 

Minos, a legendary king of Crete, iv. 
2. 89. 

Mysians, the, and Pisidians, iii. 5. 
26. 


N 


Nausicydes, a well-to-do manufac- 
turer in Athens, ii. 7. 6. 

Niceratus, father of Nicias, ii. 5. 
2. 

Nicias, son of Niceratus, the Athe- 
nian statesman and general, ii. 
SB 

Nicomachides, a rejected candidate 
for the office of stratégus, his con- 
versation with Socrates, iii. 4. 


O 


Odysseus (Lat. Ulixes), his treat- 
ment of different classes, i. 2. 58; 
his escape from Circe’s wiles, i. 3. 
7; the Sirens’ song to, ii. 6. 11; 
the slayer of Palamedes, iv. 2. 33; 
the secret of his oratory, iv. 6. 15. 

Olympia, iii, 12. 1, 13. 5. 


260 


Ῥ 


Palamédes, slain in envy by Odysseus, 
iv. 2. 33. 

Parrhasius the painter, his conversa- 
tion with Socrates, 111, 10. 1-5. 

Peloponnesians, the, Boeotia power- 
less against Athens without their 
help, iii. 5. 4; opposed by the 
Athenians and Heraclidae, iii. 5. 
10; allied with the Athenians, iii. 
ae Ee 

Pericles (and Alcibiades), a discus- 
sion on law, i. 2. 40 ff. ; how he 
won the city’s affection, ii. 6. 13; 
his greatness, iii. 5. 1. 

Pericles (the younger), son of the 
preceding, his conversation with 
Socrates, iii. 5. 

Persians, the, the ruling power in 
Asia, ii. 1. 10; iii, 5. 11. 

Phaedondas the Theban, a companion 
of Socrates, i. 2. 48. 

Phrygians, the, subject to the Per- 
sians, ii. 1. 10. 

Piraeus, the, ii. 7. 2. 

Pisidians, the, and Mysians, iii. 5. 26. 

Pistias, a corselet-maker, his con- 
versation with Socrates, iii. ro. 
9-15. 

Plato, Socrates’s care for, iii. 6. 1. 

Polyclétus the famous sculptor, i. 
4. 3. 

Procrustes, Sinis, and Sciron, rob- 
bers, ii. 1. 14. 

Prodicus of Ceos, his apologue of 
the choice of Hercules, ii. 1. 21- 
33. 

Pythia, the, at Delphi, i. 3. 1. 


R 
- Rhapsodists, or Rhapsodes, iv. 2. 10. 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA 


Sciron, ii. 1. 14. 

Scylla, why hated by mortals, ii. 6. 
31. 

Scythians, the, rulers over the Maeo- 
tians, ii. 1. 10; their arms, iii. 9. 2. 

Sicily, i. 4. 17. 

Simmias the Theban, a companion 
of Socrates, i. 2. 48; iii. 11. 17. 

Sinis, ii. 1. 14. 

Sirens, the, their song to Odysseus, 
ii. 6. 11; why mortals are allured 
by, ii. 6. 31. 

Socrates, counts of the indictment 
against, i. 1. 1; refutation of these 
charges (1) as to his ‘impiety,’ i. 
1. 2-19; (2) as to his ‘ corrupting 
the youth,’ i. 2. 1-8; refutation 
of the charge that he taught his 
companions to despise the laws, i. 
2. 9-11; his relations with Critias 
and Alcibiades, i. 2. 12-28; with 
‘the Thirty,’ i. 2. 29-38; his 
true companions, i. 2. 48; his 
teachings on the respect due to 
kindred, i. 2. 49-55; his quota- 
tions from the poets not made 
with immoral or seditious purpose, 
i. 2. 56-61; how he helped his 
associates towards virtue by both 
example and precept, i. 3. 1-8; 
his self-control, i. 3. 9-15; his 
conversation with Aristodemus 
περὶ δαιμονίου, i. 4. 1-18; his self- 
control illustrated by his acts, i. 5. 
1-6; three conversations with An- 
tiphon, i. 6. 1-15; how he led his 
associates from false-seeming to 
virtue, i. 7. : 

His conversation with Aristippus 
on self-control vs. indulgence, ii. 1. 
1-34 (including the fable of the | 


INDEX OF PROPER NAMES 261 


choice of Hercules, 21-33); with 
his son Lamprocles on filial duty, 
ii. 2; with Chaerecrates on broth- 
erly affection, ii. 3; his discourse 
on friendship, ii. 4; his conversa- 
tion with Antisthenes, ii. 5. 2-65, 
and with Critobulus, 6, both on 
friendship ; how he helped friends 
in their troubles, shown in a con- 
versation with Aristarchus, ii. 7, 
in recommending an occupation to 
Eutherus, ii. 8, in advising Crito 
to employ Archedemus to ward off 
sycophants, ii. 9. 1-3, and in sug- 
gesting to Diodorus the merits of 
Hermogenes as a friend, ii. Io. 
1-5. 

Advises a young friend to study 
generalship (στρατηγία) with Dio- 
nysodorus, and discusses the art, 
iii. 1. 2-11; duties of a good com- 
mander, iii. 2; of a cavalry leader, 
iii. 3; his conversation with 
Nicomachides, a disappointed can- 
didate for the office of stratégus, 
iii. 4; with the younger Peri- 
cles on the best way to restore 
the Athenians to their former 
military supremacy, iii. 5; with 
Glauco on the need of ripe knowl- 
edge in the statesman, iii. 6. 2-18; 
with Charmides on excessive self- 
depreciation, iii. 7; discussion 
with Aristippus on ‘the good’ and 
‘the beautiful,’ iii. 8. 1-7; various 
definitions: of courage, iii. 9. 1-3 ; 
of wisdom and temperance, 4; of 
justice, 5; of insanity, 6-7; of 
envy, 8; of leisure, 9; of power 
to command, 10-13; of true suc- 
cess (εὐπραξία), 14-15; his conver- 
sation with Parrhasius on painting, 
111. το. 1-5; with Clito on sculp- 


ture, iii. το. 6-8 ; with Pistias the 
corselet-maker, iii. 10. 9-15; with 
Theodota on the art of winning lov- 
ers, iii. 11. 2-11; with Epigenes 
on the value of physical training, 
iii. 12; various wise and witty 
sayings, iii. 13; table talk, chiefly 
on the rationale of eating and 
drinking, iii. 14. 

His choice of friends, iv. 1; 
his method of dealing with those 
who thought they had already 
attained all wisdom illustrated in 
conversations with Euthydemus, 
iv. 2. 2-40; self-control the foun- 
dation of success, iv. 3. 1-2; 
his discussion with Euthydemus 
on the relation of man to the gods, 
iv. 3. 8-17; his regard for law, iv. 
4. 2-4; his discussion with Hippias 
on justice and uprightness, iv. 4. 
5-25; a series of discussions with 
Euthydemus on freedom, wisdom, 
sobriety, carefulness, etc., iv. 5. 
1-12; various definitions arrived 
at in a discussion with Euthy- 
demus, e.g., of piety, justice, wis- 
dom, the good, the beautiful, 
courage, monarchy, tyranny, ar- 
istocracy, plutocracy, democracy, 
iv. 6. 1-12; his merits as a teacher 
and thinker, iv. 7; his statements 
as to his δαιμόνιον justified by the 
closing scenes of his life, iv. 8. 


Sophocles the tragic poet, i. 4. 3. 
Sparta, iv. 4. 15. 
Syrians, the, ruled by the Persians, 


ii. 1. 10. 


T 


Thebans, the, selfish policy of, iii. 


5. 2; their confidence against the 
Athenians, iii. 5. 4. 


262 


Themistocles, how he won the city’s 
love, ii. 6. 18; world famous, iii. 
6. 2; did he attain eminence by 
his unaided genius or by consort- 
ing with wise men ? iv. 2. 2. 

Theodorus (of Cyrene), the mathe- 
matician, iv. 2. 10. 

Theoddta, her conversation with Soc- 
rates, iii. 11. 2-11. 

Theognis, quoted, i. 2. 20. 

Theseus, his deeds of valor, iii. 5. 10. 

Thessaly, i. 2. 24. 

Thracians, the, their light shields and 
javelins, iii. 9. 2. 

Thrasyllus and the other generals at 
Arginusae, the case of, i. 1. 18. 


XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA 


Tolmides, Athenian general, defeated 
at Lebadea, iii. 5. 4. 


x 


Xanthippe, wife of Socrates, alluded 
to, ii. 2. 1 fff. 

Xenophon, his conversation with Soc- 
rates, i. 3. 8 ff. 


Z 


Zeus (Lat. luppiter), ‘by,’ a com- 
mon oath, i. 2. 9 et freq. 

Zeuxis, the greatest of painters, i. 
4. 3. 


GRAMMATICAL INDEX 


Accent, 
of εἰπέ, i. 2. 41, 3. 9; 
iv. 2. 8; of ἔστι, iii. 
8. 4 : of οἴκοι, iii. 13. 
5 ; of οὔ, ii. 6. 11, 18 ; 
of παίδων, ii. 1. 21; 
of ws, i. 2. 58. 
Accusative, 
abs., i. 2. 20, 3. 2, 6. 5; 
ii. 2.13, 3. 3; iv. 2. 80. 
adv., i. 2. 23, 42, 54; 
ii. 1. 17; iii. 6. 10. 


cognate, i. 1. 18, 2. 36; > 


ii. 6. 26, 9. 4; iii. 5. 
26, 7.1, 11.12, 13.5; 
iv. 3. 11, 15, 4. 17, 

oes Oy. 5.1; 

cognate, w. verbs of 
motion, ii. τ 11, 21, 
29. 

exceptional form, ii. 5. 
1; 

obj. of trans. phrase, i. 
2. 19. 

of agent w. impers. ver- 
bal, i. 5. 5. 

of obj.retained w.pass., 
ii. 8. 1; iv. 2. 23. 

of specification, i. 6. 6, 
7.1; ii. 6. 30; iii. 10. 
4; iv. 2. 2. 

pl. in -εῖς, ii. 2.14; iii. 
5. 19, 7. 6, xo. 6. 

pred., i. 4. 6; ii. 1. 14, 
6. 16; iv. 2. 15. 


Accusative, 
two w. same verb, i. 2. 
5, 10, 12, 41, 60, 61, 
ΣΟΥ ΜΙ: 
li. 1. 2, 2. 9, 6. 29; 
iii. 5. 26; iv. 8. 4. 
w. verbs intr. in Eng., 
1 14. Ὁ} Ὁ. 6, 
Adjectives, 
as abstract nouns, i. 1. 
16. 
as pred.,i. 4. 18, 6.9; 
ii. 1. 14, 30, 31; iii. 
1. 3, 5. 4, 8, 10. 2,8; 
iv. 2. 8, 3. 4, 4. 6. 
dem. pronominal, posi- 
tion, ii. 1. 7. 
denominative, i. 1. 7. 
neut., -replacing cog- 
nate acc., i. 1. 11, 18; 
iii. 11. 12. 
Adverbs, 
as adj., i. 2. 27. 
as pred., iii. 9. 6. 
vy and μά in swearing, 
1. 2) Oy Ge 1a 5.5.0. 
fii. 11. 5; iv. 2. 9. 
Anacolithon, iv. 1. 3. 
Anaphira, i. 1.2, 5. 3; ii. 
1, 32. 
Antecedent, 
incorporated in rel. 
clause, i. 2. 22; iv. 4.1. 
omitted, i. 2. 19, 4. 





Ss iach 
263 


Aorist, 
inceptive, i. 1.18; iii, 
5. 1. 
indic. conveying invita- 
tion, 111. 11. 15; iv. 
6. 14. 
iterative, ii. 9. 4. 
participle of same time 
as main verb, ii. 2. 7. 
subjv. in prohibitions, 
iii. 6. 3. 
1, pl. forms w. x, i. 1. 
9; iv. 2. 15, 
2, of the -m form, iv. 
8. 2. 
Apocipe, i. 3. 3; iii. 3. 2. 
Apodosis, omitted, i. 3. 2; 
iii. 1. 9, 5. 9, τι 14, 
Apposition, 
explanatory, ii. 1. 
90405 ὅν. 53 8ι 
partitive, i. 2.60, 4. ὅ ; 
ii. 1.4, 7.1; iv. 4. 21. 
Article, 
as demonstrative, i. 2. 
83 ; ii. 1. 26. 
as possessive, i. 1. 9. 
generic, i. 1. 13, 3. 12; 
li. 1. 20, 8. 3. 
omitted, w. abstract 
nouns, i. 2. 23; iii. 9. 
6: 10. Le IVES we 
pred. subst., i. 2. 62, 
ii. 2.3; w. subst. parti- 


24, 





ciple, i. 3. 11; ii. 1.13. 


264 


Article, 
position, i. 6. 13; ii. 2. 
4; iv. 4.7. 
Assimilation, 
of consonants, i. 3. 3. 
of modes, i. 4. 14, 5. 1, 


ἅν | Samy ae (ie Bae: 2 8 
Ova 3 Wi ta δ. εν; 
2. 20. 


of οἵῳ σοι, ii. 9. 3. 
Assonance, i. 6. 5. 
Asyndéton, i. 1. 9; ii. 1. 

A Rae Me: Aa ae A 
iv. 3. 14. 
Attic, 
2 decl., i. 1.9; ii. 1. 28; 
iv. 2. 33. 
fut., ii. 1. 24, 6. 12. 
Attraction, 
of antec. to rel. clause 
(see Incorporation), 
12.22 9 305 44. 

of const. of subord. to 
that of main clause, 
i. 2.19, 21, 29, 47. 

of dem. pron. to gen- 
der of pred., iv. 4. 
20. 

of rel. into case of 
antec., i. 2. 21, 47, 
6. 11; ii. 1. 10, 25. 

Augment, ; 

before prep. in com- 
position, i. 6. 2. 

omitted, i. 2. 64. 


Brachyligy, ii. 4. 6; iii. 
5. 4, 6. 8. 


Chiasmus, ii. 1. 10; iv. 8. 
4. 

Comparatives, of φίλος, iii. 
11. 18. 





Comparison, abridged 
(comparatio compen- 
diaria), i. 1.3, 18; iii. 
5. 14, 11.5, 14. 5; iv. 
4. 24, 5. 7. 

Concinnity, i. 1. 14; ii. 2. 
ὃ, 4. Ἰ. 

Concrete, for abstract, ii. 
1. 21; iv. 2. 29. 

Condition, 

fut. less vivid, i. 4. 11; 
iii. 6. 18. 

‘minatory,’ iv. 3. 8. 

pres. general, i. 2. 27. 

rel., i. 1.6, 9, 15; iii. 6. 
16,9. 11; iv. HZ 

simple logical, i. 2. 18, 
20: ας, Be LOE Oe 
20. 

unfulfilled, i. 4. 5, 14; 
iii. 5. 8. 

Contracted forms, 

πεινῆν and διψῆν, li. 1. 

90. 


Dative, 

and prep. w. verbs of 
motion, iv. 2. 15. 

causal, iii. 5. 18. 

ethical, iii. 6. 2. 

of accompaniment, ii. 
1. 28, 

of advantage, ii. 3. 13; 
of disadvantage, ii. 
to. 1. 

of degree of difference, 
os, ΤΥ th Oe 

of interest, iii. 12. 6. 

of manner, i. 4. 14; of 
means, i. 3. 4, 11. 

of means w. χράομαι, i. 
t. aS, 

of motive w. ἐπί, i. 3.11. 





XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA 


Dative, 

of possession, i. 4. 6. 

of relation,i. 1. 1, 2. 
62, 4. 7; iii. 8. 10; 
iv. 2. 14, 3. 7, 6. 4. 

of respect, iii. 5. 2, 19; 
iv; 37, 

of time, i. 2. 61. 

pred., i..2. 114034. 
1.12, 80, 6. 26, 9. 3; 
lil. 11. Ὁ; T4245 ν] 
5. ἜΣ 

w. advs., i. 2. 50. 

w. verbs of serving, iii. 
1. ὅ. 


Elegiac distich, i. 2. 20. 
Future, 2, pass., iv. 3. 8. 


Genitive, 

abs., i. 1. 4, 2. 16, 27, 
6.5; ii. 4. 4, 6. 82; 
iV, 2.4, 

attrib., i. 1. 12, 3. 8. 

objective, i. 2. 63, 4. 
16 ; iii. 3.7, 5. 10 
8.3; iv. 5. 7, 6. 12, 
7. 6, 8. 

of agent, ii. 1. 34; iii. 
4.1: 

of cause, i. 2. 26. 

of comparison, i. 1. 3; 
iv. 7. 9. 

of means, i. 1. 3; iii. 3. 
bg Bs Age ae > 

of place, ii. 1. 11. 

of price or value, i. 6. 
11, 12; ii. 1. 19, 20, 
5. 3, 8.2; iii. ro. 10. 

of separation or dis- 
tinction, ii. 3. 16 ; iii. 
7.9; iv. 4. 25. 


GRAMMATICAL INDEX 


Genitive, 

of source, ii. 4. 1; iv. 5. 
10. 

oftime,i.1.10; iv. 7.4. 

part., i. 1. 14, 2. 46, 4. 
ee a. 2. 18° IV. 2. 
ἀμ 

pred., of characteristic, 
2. 10} Ἦν ς Ὁ, 8's 
iii. 4. 6; of measure, 
i. 2. 40; part., i. 2. 
31, 3. 9; of posses- 
sion, i. 6. 23. 

subjective, i. 4.5; ii. 1.3. 

w. adjs.,i. 2. 1, 60, 3. 4, 
4. 16, 6.8; ii. 1. 28; 
lii. 1.6; iv. 1. 4. 

w. advs., i. 2. 60, 6. 10; 
ii. 1. 28. 

w. verbs, alone w. 
δέομαι, ii. 6. 2; com- 
pounded w. κατά, i. 
3. 4, 10, 4.2; of dis- 
puting, ii. 1. 1, 7; 
of emotion, ii. 6. 33; 
of failing or deceiv- 
‘ing, iv. 2. 26, 6. 11; 
of forgetting, i. 2. 
21; of inferiority, 
ili. 5. 13; of judicial 
action, i. 2. 49; of 
perception or mental 
action, i. 1.11; ii. 1. 
24, 6. 33; of sharing, 
ii. 6. 23; iv. 5. 7; of 

- touching, i. 4. 12, 7. 
oe i's, 20; of 
wanting, i. 2. 11, 3. 
5; ii. 4. 6. 


Hyperbaton, i. 5. 1. 
Hysteron proteron, iii. 5. 
10. 





Imperfect, 
indic. in past unful- 
filled cond., i. 1. 5, 2. 
59, 4. 14. 
in independent clauses 
of indirect discourse, 
i. 3. 3. 
of attempted action 
(conative), i. 2. 29, 3. 
4. 
of habitual action, i. 
6. 2. 
participle, ii. 6. 7; iii. 
5. 4. 
Incorporation, of antec., i. 
2. 22; iv. 4.1. 
Indicative, 
fut. w. εἰ in expressions 
of uncertainty, i. 1. 
8. 
fut. w. pres. intention, 
ies ἀνα, ΤΩ 37, 
6. 80. 
in expressions of wish- 
ing, i. 2. 46. 
in fut. cond. of more 
vivid form, i. 2. 52. 
in simple logical cond., 
i. 2. 13, 26, 28. 
in subord. clauses of 
indirect discourse, 
iv. 1. 5. 
in unfulfilled cond., i. 
1. 5, 2. 59, 4. 5, 14. 
iterative, ii. 9. 4; iv. 1. 
2, 6. 13. 
potential, i. 2. 2; 111. 4. 
7. 
w. verbs of fearing, ii. 
3. 10. 
Indirect discourse, i. 2. 15; 
ii. 6. 18, 7. 11; iv. 1. 
5. 





265 


Indirect question, i. 1. 1, 2. 
33; ii. 6.8; ili. 9.9; 
iv. 2. 30. 

w. intensive particle 
ποτέ, i. τ. 1, 12. 

Infinitive, 

abs., iii. 8. 10, το. 18. 

aor. W. ᾧμην, iii. 4. 7. 

articular, i. 1. 12, 2. 1, 
3, 55, 3. 5, 7, 11, 6. 
8, 15; ii. 1. 16, 3. 9, 
14. ΤΣ 1, 11,6. 2, 
1%. 3, 

by assimilation in in- 
direct discourse, i. 1. 
8, 13, 14; iii. 11. 1; 
iv. 1. 4. 

fut. w. μέλλω (peri- 
phrastic), i. 1. 7. 

its predicate, 
attracted into nom., 

i. 2. 1, 3, 45, 55; 
iii. τι. 14; iv. 3. 4. 
its subject, 
attracted into nom., 
ii. 3. 11; iv. 8. 4. 
omitted, ii. 6. 6. 

obj., i. 3. 6. 

of purpose, i. 5. 2; iii. 
4. 8. 

of result, i. 2.1, 3. 5; iii. 
12. 6; iv. 4. 1. 

w. adjs., i. 2.15, 6. 9; 
ii. 1. 22; iii. 8. 8, 
13. 8. 

Ww. αἰσχύνομαι, iii. 1. 11, 
7. δ. 

w. ἄν in indirect dis- 
course, i. 1.6, 14, 16, 
3. 10, 15, 4. 16; ii. 
1.4, 2. 7; iii. 5. 2, 13. 
1; iv. 2. 33. 

W. ἐπιμελέομαι, iv. 7. 1. 


266 


Infinitive, 
w. olos,i. 4. 6; ii. 1. 15, 
6. 87, 9.4; iv. 6. 11. 
w. ws, after compara- 
tive, i. 4. 10. 
W. ὥστε, and adj., iii. 
13.3; as subj.,i. 3. 6. 
w. substs., i. 2. 60; ii. 
9.93 Ms 65%, 
w. temporal particles, 
i. 2. 40. 
w. verbs, of caution, i. 
5.3; of hindering, i. 
6. 6; ii. 1. 16, 6. 23 ; 
iv. 5. 3; of practi- 
cing, i. 6.7; ii. 1. 6. 
Interrogative particles, i. 
4.116 ih. 2.36. 
Ionic forms, ii. 2. 8, 7. 13, 
O25 Ὁ ον απ, δ: 
iv. 3. 10, 6. 6. 
Iterative form, i. 2. 58. 


Litdtes, i. 1. 2, 2. 11, 28, 
32, 5.6, 7.5; ii. 1.6, 
2.8: 1. 4. 3... 4 
iv. 2. 12, 35. 

Locative, iii. 5. 2. 


Metonymy, i. 2. 1, 68. 
Middle, 
causative, iv. 4. 5. 
in pass. sense, ii. 7. 8; 
iii. 3. 15; iv. 8. 10. 
Mixed conditional construc- 
tion, i. 2. 45; ii. 5. 4, 
8, 6. 4, 14; iil. 4. 5, 
6, 5. 8, 6. 14; iv. 2. 
31, 32. 


Negatives, a series of, 
strengthening nega- 
tion, i. 2. 48. 





Neuter, 
art. w.a word made obj. 
of thought, ili. 14. 7. 
pred. adj. w. masc. or 
fem. subj., i. 1. 5; 
By 15.. 1, δ᾽ 4B, 7G; 
29.7, 0154S 
Byrds 18: tea 
5. 8. 
words in appos. w. a 
sent., iii. 4. 12. 
Nominative, pred., i. 4. 5. 
Nouns, 
defective, i. 4. 5. 
denoting agent, i. 5. 2. 
proper in -κλέης, i. 2. 
41, 3.12. 

Number, changes from pl. 
to dual and vice 
versa, i. 2. 24, 38; ii. 
3:48. 


Object, of act. retained 
Ww. pass., ii. 6. 28. 
Object clauses, 
of apprehension, i. 2. 
18; iv. 2. 39. 
w. fut. indic., ii. 1. 1. 
w. φυλάττομαι, lii. 6. 16. 
Optative, 
and οἷς for ols dv w. 
subjv., iv. 1. 2. 
fut. in indirect ques- 
tion, i. 1. 6. 
in causal sents., i. 4. 19. 
in clauses of apprehen- 
sion, i. 2. 18. 
in cond. rel. clauses, i. 
1. 10, 2. 14, 57, 58, 
τ παν; 
15. 
in less vivid cond., i. 4. 
11. 





XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA 


Optative, 

in past general cond., 
1. 2. 473 iio. ik: 
iv. 6. 15. 

potential, i. 1. 5, 2. 8, 
ΑἹ ὅς 5, ΩΣ ΞΕ 
ii. 1. 22, 24, 2. 3, 3. 
5, 6. 19, 24; iii. 1. 
10, 8.10, 9. 2; iv. 2. 
12, 30. 

representing _interr. 
subjv. of direct dis- 
course, i. 2. 31. 


Parechésis, ii. 4. 5. 
Paronomasia, i. 1. 9, 2. 5. 
Participle, 
as antec. for cond. rel. 
clause, ii. 6. 29. 
attracted to case of 
noun, i. 1. 9. 
attrib., i. 1.11; iv. 2. 28. 
its use as subst., i. 
2.48. ii. 1. 7, 18; 
iv..5. 7. 
circumstantial, 
of cause, i. 2. 15, 3. 7; 
iii. 5. 26; iv. 2. 80. 
of concession, i. 2. 
1; 2. 7; Sia ee 
4. 8; i393, 49,4 
1, 6.22; iii, 8. 10. 
of cond., i. 1. 5, 20, 
3. 5, 8, 4.14, 5. 4, 
9.35. ἃ. 2.4. 10. 
7. 8; 1 .5. 2756. 
6, 9. 12, 13. 2; iv. 
2. 37. 
of manner or means, 
i, 1.1, 2. 44, 55; 
ii. 1. 23; ἔρον 1, 
5. 16; iv. 4. 4, 5. 9, 
7. Ὁ. 


GRAMMATICAL INDEX 


Participle, 
circumstantial, 
of purpose, i. 1. 6; 
iii. 7. 5. 
of time, iii. 10. 2; iv. 
3. 18, 14. 
fut., ii. 1. 5, 2.4; iii. 
4. 4; iv. 4. 5, 5. 3. 
impf., ii. 6. 7; iii. 5. 4. 
of εἰμέ omitted after 
verbs of knowing, i. 
7. 4. 
pred., i. 2. 1. 
in agreement w. 
omitted subj. of 
inf., ii. 6. 26. 
supplementary, i. 1. 5, 
11, 2. 14, 16, 17, 27, 
31, 34, 41, 53, 4. 2, 6. 
8; ii. τ. 18, 28, 24, 2. 
13, 3. 1, 11, 24, 4.7, 6. 
5, 35; iii. 6. 1, 13. 2, 
Ἐν 1 γ. 2:4, 3.9, 
10. δὲ ὅς 6.:}. 7.. 5. 
‘w. ἄν, representing same 
tense of indic., iv. 4. 
4. 
w. δῆλός and φανερός 
elut, i. 1. 2, 2. 3; ii. 
6. 7. 
W. ὥσπερ expressing 
comparison, ii. 1. 36. 
Particles, in alternative 
questions, i. 4. 4. 
Perfect, 
gnomic, iv. 2. 35. 
WwW. pres. meaning, i. 
6. 2. 
Pleonasm, ii. 1. 1. 
Plural, 
after sing. antec. sug- 
gesting a class, ii. 1. 
15. 





Plural, 
in abstract sense, i. 4. 
13. 
of modest assertion, i. 
2. 46. 
verb w. collective subj., 
i. 4.13; iv. 3. 10; w. 
neut. subj., ii. 4. 7; 
ἘΣ 32. 
Prepositions, w. obj. as 
attrib. adjs., ii. 1. 20. 
Present, 
of desired or attempted 
action, i. 2. 6, 16, 23, 
36; ii. 1. 14. 
of εἶμι in fut. sense, iv. 
30S. 
of events well known, 
iv. 2. 33. 
Ww. πάλαι, ii. 6. 30. 
Proclitic οὐ, accented, ii. 6. 
11,13; ws, accented, 
i. 2. 58. 
Prolepsis, i. 2. 13, 3. 1, 8, 
4. 18,18; ii. 5.1; iii. 
9. 8, 12. 8, 14. 4; iv. 
2. 36, 37, 4. 12, 7. 6, 
8. 11. 
Pronouns, 
deictic form, iv. 2. 3. 
dem., referring to omit- 
ted antec. of rel., i. 6. 
1831. 4. 7, 9:7. 
indef., added to adjs., 
ii, 1. 9, 2. 3. 
intensive, i. 1. 16. 
αὐτός in oblique cases 
as refl., i. 2. 49. 
interrogative, 
depending on de- 
pendent word, i. 4. 
14; on participle, 
ii. 1. 21. 





267 


Pronouns, 
interrogative, 
two questions in one 
clause, ii. 2. 3. 
personal, 
omitted, ii. 3. 13. 
used for indir. refl., 
i. 2. 32. 
reflexive, 
for reciprocal, ii. 6. 
20 ; ili. 5. 2, 16. 
indit.; 4): 2:33; ik) s, 
4, 9. 5. 
8 pers. for 2 pers., 
ii. 1. 31, 6. 35. 
relative, 
causal, ii. 3. 15, 7. 
13. 
clause w. force of 
attrib. adj., i. 1.2. 
in dem. meaning, i. 
4. 8; iv. 6. 3. 
in gender of pred., 
ii. 4. 2. 
introducing emphatic 
explanation, i. 2. 
1,64, 4.113 23; 
30; iii. 5. 15. 
w. antec. omitted, i. 
2.19; ii. 1.25. 
Protasis, 
second and subord., i. 
2. 36. 
two w. same apod., i. 
3. 5. 
w. ef equivalent to 
causal clause, i. 1. 
13. 


Subject, 
attracted into gender 
of pred., iv. 4. 20. 
of inf. omitted, ii. 6. 6. 


268 


Subject, 
of principal verb ex- 
pressed w. inf., ii. 
1. 35. 
Subjunctive, 
in cond. rel. clauses, i. 
Ἐπ Ὁ 
in final clauses, i. 2. 55. 
in indirect discourse, 
120,28: 
in obj. clauses, ii. 4. 2. 
in pres. general cond., 
Ἵ.:2, 9]; 
in temporal clauses, ii. 
1. 18; iii. 5. 6. 





Subjunctive, 
interr., i. 2. 15, 36, 45; 
ii. 1. 1, 10, 21, 23, 30; 
M3210, 6.45 8h 2s 
13. 
w. πρίν, iv. 4. 9. 
Superlative, strengthened, 
τι, 1. 9. 
Synésis, i. 2. 62; ii. 1, 81, 
2. 3, 3.2; iii. 5. 20. 


Temporal clauses, 
of purpose, iv. 2. 8. 
w. ἄν and subijv., iii. 
5. 6. 





XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA 


Transitive, and intr. 
senses in the same 
verb, i. 4. 11. 


Verbal, 
in -réos, i. 1.6, 14, 2. 34, 
5.5; ii. 1.28; iii. 6. 
3, τό. 8. 
in -rés, i. 1.7; ii. 6. 21. 

Verbs, denominative, i. 1. 
8, 4. 6. 

Voice, difference in mean- 
ing between act. and 
mid. in certain verbs, 
1, χ, .18. 


ἀλλά, following a cond. 
sent., iii. 3. 7. 
ἀλλὰ yap, introducing an 
objection, ii. 1. 17. 
ἀλλὰ μήν, in transitions, 
τ νῶν 20,2... 4, 11, 
63; ii. 6. 27; iv. 5. 
10. 
ἄλλως Te, ἄλλως τε καί, i. 
2. 59; ii. 6. 80. 
av, for ἐάν, i. 2. 2, 6. 14. 
Gy, 
in final clauses, i. 4. 
6. 
iterative, ii. 9.4; iv. 1. 
2, 6. 138. 
omitted w. inf., i. 3. 3; 
w. ἔδει, ii. 9. 5; w. 
ἣν, ii. 7. 10. 
repeated, i. 4. 14. 
retained w. the opt. in 
indirect discourse, i. 
2: 6, 60,6. 11; -w. 
the subjv. in rel. 
temporal clause, ii. 1. 
18. 
αὐτίκα-- for example, iv. 
ype 


yap, 
in answers, i. 3. 10, 4. 
Poet oe 3. Oy 160] 
6. 15; iii. 3. 2. 
introductory, i. I. 
Bits k 5 B24. 12. 


6 ; 








GREEK INDEX 


δέ, without preceding μέν, 
iv. 4. 24. 

δῆλός εἶμι, pers. const. 
w. ὅτι, iv. 2. 21. 


el, 
causal, i. 1. 13, 17, 2. 7, 
25, 26, 32; ii. 8. 5; 
iii. 7. 8, 9. 8. 
= whether, i. 1. 
a, θεὶς Ἵς 
εἶμι, its pres. ἴῃ fut. sense, 
iv. 3. 8. 
εἶπα, ii. 2. 8. 
εἰπέ, accent, i. 2. 41, 3. 9; 
ἔν... 2: 9. 
ἐπέεσσι, Epic for ἔπεσι, i. 
2. 58. 
ἔστι, accent, ii. 1. 20; iii. 
8. 4. 


ἔστιν ots, ii. 3. 6. 


8, 4. 


ἔστιν οὕστινας, i. 4. 2; 
iii. 5. 5. 
ead ἀνα Ὁ Ὁ Sei ὍΣ 


2, 10. 11; iv. 3. 14. 
introducing an illustra- 
HOR, 1.8.7 5% π|. Ὁ; 
6. 27. 
repeated in compound 
sents., i. 6. 3, 12. 
καὶ μήν. in transitions, i. 
4. 42,°6-'3, Bs Bees. 
4, 10, 19, 6. 27, το. 3; 
εἴ στο, ἀῶ 8. 91. 
269 





καλοὶ κἀγαθοί, i. 1. 16. 
κυών, gender, iii. 11. 7; 
iv. 1. 3. 


μέγιστον, for μέγιστα, i. 
1. 13, 
μέν, 
in logically subord: 
clauses, i. 4. 17, 6. 5; 
Lt, Θ᾽ 3, θυ, 
TF hes 
not followed by δέ, i. 
1. 1, 2. 29, 58, 6. 14, 
7. 5; ti. 6. 5, 8, 11, 
12, 145) HL ς Os te 
S17. 
w. force of μήν, i. 4. 4; 
ii. 6. 13. 


μή, 


in cond. rel. clause, i. 
Ve ΤῊΣ 
instead of οὐ, 
as indef., i. τ. 14; ii. 
8. 5. 
as subord. to imv., i. 
4.1. 
w. inf., i. 1. 9, 2. 39, 
6. 38. 
w. verbs of thinking, 
i. 1. 20, 2. 39, 41, 
6. 8. 
ph, i. 2. 7. 
ὅτε, i. 6. 11. 
οὐ Ww. subjv., ii. 
iv. 2. 12. 


2. 14; 


270 


μή, 
w. adjs., ii. 8. 5. 
w. fut. indic. in result 
clauses, ii. 6. 12. 
w. participle, i. 1. 9, 2. 
34; iii. 5. 28. 
w. potential opt. in 
questions, iii. 1. 10. 
w. verbs of forbidding, 
i. 2. 33. 
μηδέ, w. interr. subjv., i. 
2. 36. 
μόνον, position w. inf., i. 
Bate” Ae tp 


ναοῖς, for ‘Attic’ vegs, iii. 
8. 10. 


οἴκοι, accent, i. 1. 2; iii. 
13. ὅ. 

ὅπου, for ὅποι, i. 6. 6. 

ὅπως, adv., distinguished 
from conj., i. 1. 6. 

ὅπως μή, for μή, ii. 9. 2. 

ὅτου, i. 1. 15. 





ov, accented, ii. 6. 11, 13. 

οὔκουν and οὐκοῦν, i. 4. 
δ: 10. ih. a. Ὁ» Θὲ ee 
Mei.’ 4. 2, Blom ὩΣ 
6. ὃ. 

ovv, added to an affirma- 
tive, iii. 6. 12. 

«οὖν = Eng. ‘-ever,’ i. 1. 
146. 11 sty. TU: 

οὐχ ὅτι = οὐ λέγω ὅτι, ii. 


9: 8. 


παίδων, accent, ii. τ. 21. 

ποτέ, added to questions, 
ia: as ean by ΠῚ ee 2 
2; iv. 2. 6. 


σέο, form, i. 2. 58. 
otros, decl., i. 6. 2. 
στερήσεται, pass.,i. 1. 8. 


συνδιατρίβοντες, συνόν- 
τες, συνουσιασταί, 
ἐπιτήδειοι,  substi- 


tutes for μαθηταί.}. 1. 
4, 6,2, 8,4, Το 1; 








XENOPHON’S MEMORABILIA | 


τὰ μέν, τὰ δέ, i. 3. 1. 

τοιάδε, instead of τοιαῦτα, 
17s Bs ᾿ ἣ 

τοιαῦτα, pointing for- 
ward, ii. 1. 1. : 

τοίνυν, in transitions, i. 4. 
13. 

τοσοῦτον = only so much, 
ii. 4. 4. 

τοῦ = τινός. i. 6. 6. 

τῷ = τίνι, iv. 4. 17. 


φάσκων, i. 2. 19, 31. 
φημί, as affirmative an- 
swer, i. 2. 33. 
ὡς, 
accented, i. 2. 58. 
ἄν, in final clauses, i. 4. 
6. 
w. inf. after compara- 
tive, i. 4. 10. - 


« 
ye 


; ie ἐπὴν 


& 


bigs 





14 DAY USE 


RETURN TO DESK FRO 


LOAN 


This book is due on the last date stamped below, or | 
on the date to which renewed. 


Renewed books are subject to immediate recall. 


| 


M WHICH BORROWED 


DEPT. | 


᾿ 








REC’D LD 


_RECEVED-By— 





JUN 3~ 196¢ 


NOT ΔΑ | 
VOUT AS [580 





πΙεει 
FIRCULATION DEPT. 
* 























ἢ 























: ¢ | 48, 
VANE TWOS 1 ays 01 1996 
REC'D L 
JUN 19'64 -2/PM 
nov211980 £7 
eons y ΠΤ ἫΝ 














ts 





«ἀν “ἢ 











C. BERKELEY LIBRARIES 


0570%639 





Ψ Ἷ 
‘ 
; ἷς 
eh ad 
hoe ᾿ 
* te 
τῶν» ae : 
‘ 
~ 
- 
- 
‘ 
‘ 
Ld ‘ 
a ᾿ 
- ‘ 


eet = ee SS 








A: 


Rats 
i 


ee 


ΝΥΝ 


unl 


hae 


Δ 


cA 
Gera ot γε κατα 


ap 


* 


Pi be 


ea 


ΣΥΝ Rie cat 
ww “a “-- 


Seb 
Aa ᾧ 
eames 


a ny 


“chs 
hae aS 


ras 


tx 


arty « 
SS 


i es ae 


er 


Jd oh . ote Ay 
CRRA RS 
ΤᾺΣ rae, ‘ 


ΡΣ ΛΟ 
Nene te 
. Sica: at 











yy 
Rita a 


3 par 








oF 
Nad > 
gees. 


Sea 
Ἔ 
ek 
aos 




















- 
τ 


ν᾿ ἃς 


Van 


Seat 
Neal 


SSRN 


nA 


a ee Sait 


ie 





Sate 


ttn 


ro 
a, 























ee 
i 


cart 





εὐ Oh eee 
ΝΥΝῚ ws 


ΕἾ 


age 


ἐς 


a 


LATOR 
Aas ; 


tN 
yay" 


See OT τ 


ein 


δὰ : ἣν" 
Ἢ νὰν ἘΣ x J Ἄν 


7 


ty ie 


wag 


bes 


Ate Ἀ 


NS, 
τις at atte δον ᾿ς 
ὑφ ete Oh ae 

ἀν SMe ΝΣ eG : ye ἈΑν Ά 
. 4 pares 
Pant 


aa 


Ἶ 
ὡς 


Π τ . 


he” 


se 
hs 
ἘΝ 





rok 


Soe 


oot 








RENN 


carat 


eas 
= sien 





